FT1A Touch
Uploaded by
DavidFT1A Touch
Uploaded by
DavidFT9Y-B1390
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Confirm that the delivered product is what you have ordered. Read this manual to make sure of correct operation.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Be certain to read this manual carefully before performing installation, wiring, or maintenance work, or operating
the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* has been manufactured with careful regard to quality. However,
if you intend to use this product in applications where failure of this equipment may result in damage to property or
injury, ensure that it used in conjunction with appropriate fail-safe backup equipment.
• In this manual, safety precautions are categorized in order of importance to Warning and Caution:
Warning notices are used to emphasize that improper operation may cause severe
personal injury or death.
Caution notices are used where inattention might cause personal injury or damage to
equipment.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* is not intended to be used for applications which require high
reliability and safety, such as medical equipment, nuclear equipment, railways, aircraft, and vehicles. The
SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* cannot be used for these applications.
For other applications which require high reliability in function and precision, provide a failsafe design and
redundant design for the entire system including the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*.
• Turn off the power to the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* before installation, removal, wiring,
maintenance, and inspection of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*. Failure to turn power off may
cause electrical shock or fire hazard.
• Special expertise is required to install, wire, configure, and operate the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-
C12RA-*. People without such expertise must not use the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* uses an LCD (liquid crystal display) as a display device. The
liquid inside the LCD is harmful to the skin. If the LCD is broken and the liquid attaches to your skin or clothes,
wash the liquid off using soap, and consult a doctor immediately.
• Emergency and interlocking circuits must be configured outside of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*.
• If relays in the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* output circuits should fail, outputs may remain at on or
off state. For output signals which may cause serious accidents, configure monitor circuits outside the SmartAXIS
FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* self-diagnostic function may detect internal circuit or program
errors, stop programs, and turn outputs off. Configure circuits so that the system containing the SmartAXIS FT1A-
M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* are not jeopardized when outputs turn off.
• Do not use the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*’s internal touch switches for an emergency circuit.
If the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* failed, the external equipment connected to the SmartAXIS
FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* will no longer be protected, and serious injury to operators and equipment
damage may be caused.
Preface-1 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
• Prevent the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* from falling while moving or transporting, otherwise
damage or malfunction of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* will result.
• Use the product within the environmental limits given in the catalog and manual. Use of the product in high-
temperature or high-humidity environments, or in locations where it is exposed to condensation, corrosive gas
or large shock loads can create the risk of electrocution and fire.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* is designed for use in pollution degree 2. Use the SmartAXIS
FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* in environments of pollution degree 2. (based on the IEC60664-1 rating)
• Install the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* according to the instructions. Improper installation will result
in falling, failure, electrical shock, fire hazard, or malfunction of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*.
• Prevent metal fragments or wire chips from dropping inside the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*
housing. Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard, damage, and malfunction.
• Use a power supply of the rated value. Using a wrong power supply may cause fire hazard.
• The SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* uses “PS2 of EN61131” as DC power supply. (based on the
IEC/EN61131 rating)
• Use wire of a proper size to meet the voltage and current requirements.
• Use an IEC 60127-approved fuse on the output circuit and the power line outside the FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*.
This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* is destined for Europe.
• Use an EU-approved circuit breaker. This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-*
and FT1A-C12RA-* is destined for Europe.
• Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*. Incorrect
operation of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* may cause mechanical damage or accidents.
• Use the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* in a local area network if you download, upload or
monitor the project data via the Ethernet port.
• The touch panel of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* is made of glass, and will break if exposed
to excessive shock. Take due care when handling it.
• When more than one button is pressed at the same time, due to the detection characteristics of an analog type
touch panel, only the gravity center of the pressed area is sensed and the unit assumes that only one button is
pressed. Thus, when more than one button is pressed simultaneously, the resulting operation is not guaranteed.
• The screen becomes blank when the backlight is burnt out; however, the touch panel remains enabled. Incorrect
touch panel operation will occur when operating the touch panel when the backlight appears to be turned off
but is actually burnt out. Note that this erroneous operation may result in damage.
• Do not push hard or scratch the touch panel and protection sheet with a hard object such as a tool, because
they are damaged easily.
• At temperatures over the rated operating temperature, the clock accuracy is affected. Adjust the clock before use.
• For applications which require clock accuracy, adjust the clock periodically.
• Do not install the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-* in areas subjected to strong ultraviolet rays,
since ultraviolet rays may impair the quality of the LCD.
• Do not attempt to disassemble, repair or modify the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*. This can
create the risk of fire or electrocution.
• When disposing of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*, do so as an industrial waste.
• Do not switch off the power or pull out the USB flash drive while it is being accessed, as this may result in
destruction of the stored data. If the data on the USB flash drive is corrupted, format the USB flash drive.
Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Member States
Note) The following symbol mark is for EU countries only and is according to the directive 2006/66/EC Article 20
information for end-users and Annex II.
This symbol mark means that batteries and accumulators, at their end-of life, should be
disposed of separately from your household waste.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol shown above, this chemical symbol means
that the battery or accumulator contains a heavy metal at a certain concentration. This will be
indicated as follows :
Hg : mercury (0.0005%), Cd : cadmium (0.002%), Pd : lead (0.004%)
In the European Union there are separate collection systems for used batteries and
accumulators.
Please dispose of batteries and accumulators correctly in accordance with each country or local
regulation.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual Preface-2
Revision history
Revision history
March 2013: First Edition
Caution
• The contents of this manual and the WindO/I-NV3 and WindLDR applications are copyright, and all rights are
reserved by IDEC Corporation. Unauthorized duplication, reproduction, sales, transfers, or leasing is prohibited.
• The contents of this manual and the WindO/I-NV3 and WindLDR applications are subject to change without notice.
• IDEC Corporation accepts no responsibility for circumstances arising from the use of this manual or the
WindO/I-NV3 and WindLDR applications.
• Please contact your vendor or IDEC Corporation with any problems regarding the operation of this product.
Trademarks
WindO/I, WindLDR, WindCFG, SmartAXIS and MICRO/I are registered trademarks of IDEC CORPORATION in JAPAN.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7 are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation of the
United States, other countries, or both. Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other company names and product names used in this manual or the WindO/I-NV3 application are trademarks of
their respective owners.
Fugue ©1999-2003 Kyoto Software Research, Inc. All rights reserved.
This product adopts the font of Ryobi.
Regarding laws and compatible standards
This product adheres to the laws and compatible standards of all countries involved as shown below.
European laws and standards
This product complies with the following EU directives.
• Low Voltage Directive (Directive 2006/95/EC)
• EMC Directive (Directive 2004/108/EC)
To comply with these directives, this product has been designed and evaluated on the basis of the following
international and European standard.
• IEC/EN 61131-2: 2007 (excluding the Lite digital I/O status indicators)
North American regulations/standards
This product has obtained the following certification from UL.
• UL508
• CSA C22.2 No.142
For details on the compatible standards and EU Directives, contact the distributor from which you purchased this
product or visit our web site.
Preface-3 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Preface
Preface
This user’s manual describes entire functions, specifications, installation, and operation basics of the SmartAXIS. Also
included are powerful communications of the SmartAXIS and troubleshooting procedures.
This manual describes SmartAXIS Touch (SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*) and WindO/I-NV3 software.
The information includes drawing tools, setup procedures, and how to configure all Touch operator interfaces.
This user's manual describes the operation and handling of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-*. Please
read it carefully and ensure that you fully understand the functions and performance of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-
* and FT1A-C12RA-* and the WindO/I-NV3 software.
The complete set of manuals for the SmartAXIS and WindO/I-NV3 consist of three manuals (including this manual),
help files and character code table. Read these materials as necessary for your particular application.
References Content
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual Describes the hardware specifications of the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and
(This document) FT1A-C12RA-*.
Describes basic operations for ladder programming, instructions for monitoring
SmartAXIS Ladder Programming
on the SmartAXIS, available devices and instruction lists, and details of each
Manual
instruction.
Describes the connection procedures and available devices for various
External Device Setup Manual (PDF) communication including the PLC Link Communication, O/I Link Communication,
and DM Link Communication.
Describes programming for the SmartAXIS Touch series, and usage instructions
WindO/I-NV3 Help
for the WindO/I-NV3 software.
Describes usage instructions for WindLDR, programming software for the
WindLDR Help
SmartAXIS Pro/Lite series.
A list of fonts can be used with the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and FT1A-C12RA-
Character Table (PDF) * and WindO/I-NV3. For restrictions on using the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and
FT1A-C12RA-*, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
This manual describes the FT1A Series SmartAXIS Touch and the WindO/I-NV3 software.
Unless otherwise specified, SmartAXIS refers to the FT1A Series SmartAXIS Touch.
For the FT1A Series SmartAXIS Pro and the FT1A Series SmartAXIS Lite, refer to the “SmartAXIS Pro/Lite User's
Manual”.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual Preface-4
Symbols Used in this Document
Symbols Used in this Document
This manual uses the following symbols to facilitate description.
Symbols
…… Useful information relating to a function
Information that requires special attention. Failure to operate the product in accordance with
……
the information provided can lead to serious injury or damage.
…… Indicates the chapter/page of related reference information.
OK …… Screen buttons are indicated by bold text or by using the actual graphic icon.
SHIFT, A Keyboard keys are indicated by the keyboard inscription in capital letters or enclosed in
……
square brackets.
**** …… Controls are indicated by bold text.
Preface-5 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual
Item Description
SmartAXIS Another name for the SmartAXIS FT1A Series.
Touch The generic term for the SmartAXIS FT1A-M12RA-* and the FT1A-C12RA-*.
Pro The generic term for the FT1A Series that includes an LCD, excluding the Touch.
Lite The generic term for the FT1A Series that does not include an LCD, excluding the Touch.
Generic term used to refer to the O/I Touchscreen HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, HG3G/4G, HG1F/
MICRO/I
2F/2S/3F/4F.
Generic term used to refer to a PLC or micro computer that is connected to and
External device
communicates with the Touch.
Memory that is capable of storing values in unit of bits or words loaded on the Touch
Device Address
and external device.
Device area that is pre-allocated for exchanging screen management, error information,
System Area
and clock data between the Touch and external device.
A communication method that performs communication with the external device
PLC Link Communication
according to the setting of the screen and without a program.
A communication method that reads to or writes from the Touch device from a
DM Link Communication
computer or microcomputer board.
A communication method which performs communication with external devices such as
User Communication
barcode readers and inverters.
A method that is capable of operating the Touch independently without connecting to
No External Devices
external device.
External Device Communication Generic term used to refer to PLC Link Communication and DM Link Communication.
A connection format that enables connections of up to 16 units of Touch with high-
O/I Link
speed communication of 115,200bps.
O/I Link Master The Touch unit that is directly connected to external device on the O/I Link network.
O/I Link Slave The Touch units that are not directly connected to external device on the O/I Link network.
WindO/I-NV3 Software for creating projects and data of the Touch.
This is the editor for the control functions of the Touch. It is launched from
WindLDR WindO/I-NV3. Operations for creating Ladder Program are similar to those of the
WindLDR PLC programming software for the Pro and Lite.
This system configuration tool intuitively implements optimized settings for devices and
WindCFG system configurations through a combination of PLCs, operator interfaces, and other
peripheral equipment by selecting icons and dragging and dropping them.
Data including image data required for operating the Touch, which is created with
Project
WindO/I-NV3 software.
WindO/I-NV3 provides tools to manage pictures, text and script etc. With the Managers,
Manager
you can create and manage them in your project.
Setup Generic term used to refer to the common settings in the project.
Project Settings Basic settings of operation in the Setup settings.
Alarm Log A function where the Touch collects log data of alarms.
Data Log A function where the Touch collects data of device addresses.
Script A script is an executable list of commands created by a simple programming language.
Control function The control function by ladder program created with WindLDR.
A group of 16 texts maximum that is in order to dynamically switch the character
Text Group
displayed on the Touch according to the value of device.
Text fonts that can be displayed on the Windows OS on which the WindO/I-NV3 is
Windows Font
running.
Maintenance Communication Communications between the WindO/I-NV3 and Touch using a dedicated protocol.
A special Popup Screen on the Touch on which value of device can be displayed or
Device Monitor
changed.
Pre-allocated screen dedicated for performing initial setting of the Touch, self-diagnosis,
System Screen
and clearing the log data etc.
External memory For the Touch, a USB flash drive.
Screens that are loaded on to the Base Screen, including Popup Screen and Device
Window
Monitor.
Drawings Define as as non functional content (i.e. shape, picture, text).
Parts Define as functional content (i.e. button, pilot lamp, commands, etc.)
Object Define as combination of Drawings and Parts placed on WindO/I-NV3 edit screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual Preface-6
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual
Item Description
Touch Switch A part that operates a function by pressing parts that have been placed on the screen.
Keypad that is displayed when operating Numerical and Character Input parts when
Standard Keypad Standard is selected under Type in the Keypad menu for Numerical and Character
Input parts.
Preface-7 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Contents
Contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................ Preface-1
Revision history ........................................................................................... Preface-3
Caution ....................................................................................................... Preface-3
Trademarks ................................................................................................. Preface-3
Regarding laws and compatible standards ..................................................... Preface-3
Preface ....................................................................................................... Preface-4
Symbols Used in this Document .................................................................... Preface-5
Abbreviations, Generic Terms, and Terminology Used in this Manual ............... Preface-6
Chapter 1 General Information for SmartAXIS
1 About the SmartAXIS ............................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 Type Numbers ................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Features for the Touch.....................................................................................1-2
1.3 Special Functions for the Touch ........................................................................1-3
2 About the WindO/I-NV3 ........................................................................................ 1-5
3 Operating Modes .................................................................................................. 1-6
4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program Creation and to Run Operation ..................... 1-7
Chapter 2 WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications ................................................................................... 2-1
1.1 Minimum System Requirements........................................................................2-1
1.2 Available Data.................................................................................................2-2
1.3 Available Text .................................................................................................2-6
1.4 Available Number of Colors ............................................................................ 2-19
1.5 Available Image Files.....................................................................................2-19
2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3 ........................................................................ 2-34
2.1 Starting WindO/I-NV3.................................................................................... 2-34
2.2 Exiting WindO/I-NV3 .....................................................................................2-36
3 Configuration & Functions ................................................................................... 2-37
3.1 Application Menu Command List..................................................................... 2-38
3.2 Quick Access Toolbar .....................................................................................2-39
3.3 Ribbon Command List.................................................................................... 2-42
3.4 Windows Displayed in the Workspace ............................................................. 2-50
3.5 Status Bar .................................................................................................... 2-54
4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3 ................................................................................... 2-57
4.1 Configuring the Work Environment .................................................................2-57
4.2 Customizing the Workspace ...........................................................................2-60
5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings .................................................... 2-62
5.1 Device Address Settings................................................................................. 2-62
5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions ......................................................................2-64
Chapter 3 Project
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data........................................................................ 3-1
1.1 Creating New Project Data ...............................................................................3-1
1.2 Opening Project Data ......................................................................................3-4
1.3 Saving Project Data.........................................................................................3-5
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual Preface -8
Contents
1.4 Printing Project Data ...................................................................................... 3-7
1.5 Comparing Project Data .................................................................................3-12
1.6 Changing Project Settings ..............................................................................3-13
1.7 Closing Project Data ......................................................................................3-16
2 Project Settings Configuration Procedure ...............................................................3-17
3 Project Settings Dialog Box...................................................................................3-18
3.1 System Tab ...................................................................................................3-18
3.2 Communication Interface Tab.........................................................................3-26
3.3 Communication Driver Tab .............................................................................3-31
3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab ................................................................3-33
3.5 Communication Driver Extension Tab ..............................................................3-34
3.6 O/I Link Tab..................................................................................................3-35
3.7 User Communication Tab ...............................................................................3-36
3.8 External Memory Tab .....................................................................................3-38
3.9 Autorun Tab..................................................................................................3-39
3.10 Project Details Tab.........................................................................................3-40
3.11 Contents Tab.................................................................................................3-41
4 Special Functions.................................................................................................3-42
4.1 Function Area Settings Configuration Procedure...............................................3-43
4.2 Stop Input ....................................................................................................3-45
4.3 Reset Input...................................................................................................3-46
4.4 Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error....................................................3-48
4.5 Run/Stop Selection at Power Up .....................................................................3-49
4.6 Keep and Clear Control Devices ......................................................................3-50
4.7 High-Speed Counter ......................................................................................3-52
4.8 Catch Input...................................................................................................3-69
4.9 Interrupt Input..............................................................................................3-71
4.10 Frequency Measurement................................................................................3-74
4.11 Input Filter ...................................................................................................3-76
4.12 Analog Input.................................................................................................3-78
4.13 Timer Interrupt .............................................................................................3-80
4.14 Watchdog Timer Setting ................................................................................3-82
4.15 Daylight Savings Time ...................................................................................3-84
4.16 Clock Function ..............................................................................................3-85
5 Project Restrictions ..............................................................................................3-88
5.1 Download Restrictions ...................................................................................3-88
5.2 Maximum Number of External Devices ............................................................3-88
Chapter 4 Screen
1 Screen Overview ...................................................................................................4-1
1.1 Screen Types ................................................................................................. 4-1
1.2 Screen Size .................................................................................................... 4-1
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens .....................................................4-2
2.1 Creating Screens ............................................................................................ 4-2
2.2 Opening Screens ............................................................................................ 4-2
2.3 Saving Screens............................................................................................... 4-4
2.4 Closing Screens.............................................................................................. 4-6
2.5 Duplicating Screens ........................................................................................ 4-8
2.6 Deleting Screens ...........................................................................................4-10
2.7 Reusing Screens............................................................................................4-12
3 Base Screen ........................................................................................................4-14
3.1 Base Screen Settings .....................................................................................4-14
3.2 Displaying Layered Base Screens ....................................................................4-18
Preface -9 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Contents
3.3 Operating When Drawing Objects and Parts Overlap........................................ 4-20
4 Popup Screen ..................................................................................................... 4-22
4.1 Popup Screen Settings...................................................................................4-22
4.2 Popup Screen Configuration ...........................................................................4-25
4.3 Standard Keypad Popup Screen......................................................................4-26
5 Screen Restrictions ............................................................................................. 4-27
5.1 Screen Number Restrictions ...........................................................................4-27
5.2 Maximum Number of Parts............................................................................. 4-27
5.3 Maximum Number of External Device Address.................................................4-28
5.4 Vertical Installation Restrictions ......................................................................4-28
Chapter 5 Drawings and Parts
1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 5-1
2 Drawing Objects ................................................................................................... 5-2
2.1 Shapes ...........................................................................................................5-2
2.2 Picture ...........................................................................................................5-2
2.3 Text ...............................................................................................................5-2
3 Part Types ............................................................................................................ 5-3
3.1 Buttons ..........................................................................................................5-3
3.2 Lamps ............................................................................................................5-3
3.3 Data Displays..................................................................................................5-3
3.4 Charts ............................................................................................................5-3
3.5 Commands .....................................................................................................5-4
Chapter 6 Drawings
1 Shapes................................................................................................................. 6-1
1.1 Line ...............................................................................................................6-1
1.2 Polyline ..........................................................................................................6-3
1.3 Polygon ..........................................................................................................6-5
1.4 Rectangle .......................................................................................................6-7
1.5 Circle/Ellipse ................................................................................................. 6-10
1.6 Arc...............................................................................................................6-13
1.7 Pie ...............................................................................................................6-15
1.8 Equilateral Polygons ...................................................................................... 6-18
1.9 Fill ...............................................................................................................6-21
2 Picture ............................................................................................................... 6-23
2.1 Picture Configuration Procedure ..................................................................... 6-23
2.2 Properties of Picture Dialog Box ..................................................................... 6-24
3 Text ................................................................................................................... 6-25
3.1 Text Configuration Procedure .........................................................................6-25
3.2 Properties of Text dialog box.......................................................................... 6-26
Chapter 7 Buttons
1 Bit Button............................................................................................................. 7-1
1.1 How the Bit Button is Used ..............................................................................7-1
1.2 Bit Button Configuration Procedure...................................................................7-3
1.3 Properties of Bit Button Dialog Box ...................................................................7-4
2 Word Button....................................................................................................... 7-17
2.1 How the Word Button is Used ........................................................................ 7-17
2.2 Word Button Configuration Procedure ............................................................. 7-20
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual Preface -10
Contents
2.3 Properties of Word Button Dialog Box .............................................................7-21
3 Goto Screen Button .............................................................................................7-35
3.1 How the Goto Screen Button is Used ..............................................................7-35
3.2 Goto Screen Button Configuration Procedure ...................................................7-36
3.3 Properties of Goto Screen Button Dialog Box ...................................................7-37
4 Key Button ..........................................................................................................7-49
4.1 How the Key Button is Used ...........................................................................7-49
4.2 Key Button Configuration Procedure................................................................7-50
4.3 Properties of Key Button Dialog Box................................................................7-51
4.4 Key Buttons ..................................................................................................7-63
4.5 Key Browser..................................................................................................7-66
5 Multi-Button ........................................................................................................7-68
5.1 How the Multi-Button is Used .........................................................................7-68
5.2 Multi-Button Configuration Procedure..............................................................7-69
5.3 Properties of Multi-Button Dialog Box..............................................................7-70
6 Keypad ...............................................................................................................7-82
6.1 How the Keypad is Used ................................................................................7-82
6.2 Keypad Configuration Procedure.....................................................................7-83
6.3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box .....................................................................7-84
7 Selector Switch....................................................................................................7-86
7.1 How the Selector Switch is Used.....................................................................7-86
7.2 Selector Switch Configuration Procedure .........................................................7-87
7.3 Properties of Selector Switch Dialog Box .........................................................7-88
8 Potentiometer ................................................................................................... 7-101
8.1 How the Potentiometer is Used .................................................................... 7-101
8.2 Potentiometer Configuration Procedure ......................................................... 7-102
8.3 Properties of Potentiometer Dialog Box ......................................................... 7-103
Chapter 8 Lamps
1 Pilot Lamps ...........................................................................................................8-1
1.1 How the Pilot Lamp is Used............................................................................. 8-1
1.2 Pilot Lamp Configuration Procedure ................................................................. 8-2
1.3 Properties of Pilot Lamp Dialog Box ................................................................. 8-3
2 Multi-State Lamps................................................................................................8-14
2.1 How the Multi-State Lamp is Used ..................................................................8-14
2.2 Multi-State Lamp Configuration Procedure.......................................................8-15
2.3 Properties of Multi-State Lamp Dialog Box.......................................................8-16
Chapter 9 Data Displays
1 Numerical Input ....................................................................................................9-1
1.1 How the Numerical Input is Used .................................................................... 9-1
1.2 Numerical Input Configuration Procedure ......................................................... 9-2
1.3 Properties of Numerical Input Dialog Box ......................................................... 9-3
1.4 How to Enter Values ......................................................................................9-21
1.5 Advanced Usage............................................................................................9-22
2 Character Input ...................................................................................................9-23
2.1 How the Character Input is Used ....................................................................9-23
2.2 Character Input Configuration Procedure.........................................................9-24
2.3 Properties of Character Input Dialog Box.........................................................9-25
2.4 How to Enter Text .........................................................................................9-37
2.5 String Data Storage Method ...........................................................................9-38
Preface -11 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Contents
2.6 Advanced Usage ...........................................................................................9-39
3 Picture Display.................................................................................................... 9-40
3.1 How the Picture Display is Used ..................................................................... 9-40
3.2 Picture Display Configuration Procedure .......................................................... 9-42
3.3 Properties of Picture Display Dialog Box .......................................................... 9-43
4 Message Display ................................................................................................. 9-53
4.1 How the Message Display is Used...................................................................9-53
4.2 Message Display Configuration Procedure .......................................................9-55
4.3 Properties of Message Display Dialog Box .......................................................9-56
4.4 String Data Storage Method ...........................................................................9-69
5 Message Switching Display .................................................................................. 9-70
5.1 How the Message Switching Display is Used....................................................9-70
5.2 Message Switching Display Configuration Procedure ........................................ 9-71
5.3 Properties of Message Switching Display Dialog Box ........................................ 9-72
6 Alarm List Display ............................................................................................... 9-83
6.1 How the Alarm List Display is Used.................................................................9-83
6.2 Alarm List Display Configuration Procedure ..................................................... 9-84
6.3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box ..................................................... 9-85
7 Alarm Log Display ............................................................................................... 9-99
7.1 How the Alarm Log Display is Used.................................................................9-99
7.2 Alarm Log Display Configuration Procedure ................................................... 9-100
7.3 Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box ................................................... 9-101
8 Numerical Display ..............................................................................................9-114
8.1 How the Numerical Display is Used............................................................... 9-114
8.2 Numerical Display Configuration Procedure ................................................... 9-115
8.3 Properties of Numerical Display Dialog Box ................................................... 9-116
9 Calendar ...........................................................................................................9-129
9.1 How the Calendar is Used ............................................................................ 9-129
9.2 Calendar Configuration Procedure ................................................................ 9-130
9.3 Properties of Calendar Dialog Box................................................................. 9-131
Chapter 10 Charts
1 Bar Chart ........................................................................................................... 10-1
1.1 How the Bar Chart is Used ............................................................................. 10-1
1.2 Bar Chart Configuration Procedure.................................................................. 10-2
1.3 Properties of Bar Chart Dialog Box.................................................................. 10-3
2 Line Chart .........................................................................................................10-19
2.1 How the Line Chart is Used.......................................................................... 10-19
2.2 Line Chart Configuration Procedure .............................................................. 10-20
2.3 Properties of Line Chart Dialog Box............................................................... 10-21
3 Pie Chart ...........................................................................................................10-39
3.1 How the Pie Chart is Used ........................................................................... 10-39
3.2 Pie Chart Configuration Procedure ................................................................ 10-40
3.3 Properties of Pie Chart Dialog Box ................................................................ 10-41
4 Meter................................................................................................................10-48
4.1 How the Meter is Used ................................................................................ 10-48
4.2 Meter Configuration Procedure ..................................................................... 10-49
4.3 Properties of Meter Dialog Box ..................................................................... 10-50
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual Preface -12
Contents
Chapter 11 Commands
1 Bit Write Command..............................................................................................11-1
1.1 How the Bit Write Command is Used...............................................................11-1
1.2 Bit Write Command Configuration Procedure ...................................................11-3
1.3 Properties of Bit Write Command Dialog Box ...................................................11-4
2 Word Write Command..........................................................................................11-9
2.1 How the Word Write Command is Used...........................................................11-9
2.2 Word Write Command Configuration Procedure ............................................. 11-11
2.3 Properties of Word Write Command Dialog Box ............................................. 11-12
3 Goto Screen Command ...................................................................................... 11-18
3.1 How the Goto Screen Command is Used ....................................................... 11-18
3.2 Goto Screen Command Configuration Procedure ............................................ 11-19
3.3 Properties of Goto Screen Command Dialog Box ............................................ 11-20
4 Script Command ................................................................................................ 11-25
4.1 How the Script Command is Used ................................................................. 11-25
4.2 Script Command Configuration Procedure ..................................................... 11-26
4.3 Properties of Script Command Dialog Box...................................................... 11-27
5 Multi-Command ................................................................................................. 11-31
5.1 How the Multi-Command is Used .................................................................. 11-31
5.2 Multi-Command Configuration Procedure....................................................... 11-32
5.3 Properties of Multi-Command Dialog Box....................................................... 11-33
6 Timer ............................................................................................................... 11-38
6.1 How the Timer is Used ................................................................................ 11-38
6.2 Timer Configuration Procedure ..................................................................... 11-39
6.3 Properties of Timer Dialog Box ..................................................................... 11-40
Chapter 12 Control Function
1 Ladder Program Actions and Operations ................................................................12-1
1.1 Ladder Program Actions.................................................................................12-1
1.2 Executing and Stopping Ladder Programs .......................................................12-3
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR................................................................................12-4
2.1 Start WindLDR ..............................................................................................12-4
2.2 Creating Ladder Program ...............................................................................12-5
2.3 Saving Control Function ............................................................................... 12-12
2.4 Exit WindLDR.............................................................................................. 12-12
3 Ladder Instruction Reference.............................................................................. 12-13
3.1 Basic Instruction List ................................................................................... 12-13
3.2 Advanced Instruction List............................................................................. 12-17
3.3 Compatible Data ......................................................................................... 12-28
Chapter 13 Alarm Log Function
1 Overview ............................................................................................................13-1
1.1 How the Alarm Log Function is Used...............................................................13-1
1.2 Alarm States .................................................................................................13-3
1.3 Sampling Data ..............................................................................................13-4
1.4 Data Configuration ........................................................................................13-5
1.5 Saving and Deleting Data...............................................................................13-7
1.6 Using Data and Detected Alarms ....................................................................13-9
2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure........................................................ 13-10
2.1 Configuring the Devices to Monitor and the Alarm Detection Condition............ 13-10
Preface -13 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Contents
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box ............................................................................13-13
3.1 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box ..................................................................... 13-13
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms.........................................................................13-25
4.1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display ......................................... 13-25
4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According
to the Active Alarm13-27
4.3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred.... 13-30
4.4 Saving Data as a CSV File ............................................................................ 13-32
Chapter 14 Data Log Function
1 Overview............................................................................................................ 14-1
1.1 How the Data Log Function is Used ................................................................ 14-1
1.2 Sampling Values of Devices............................................................................ 14-3
1.3 Data Configuration ........................................................................................14-5
1.4 Saving and Deleting Data ..............................................................................14-6
1.5 Using the Data.............................................................................................. 14-7
2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure .......................................................... 14-8
2.1 Configuring the Sampling Condition and Devices for Sampling Data ..................14-8
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box..............................................................................14-12
3.1 Data Log Settings Dialog Box ....................................................................... 14-12
3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................... 14-14
4 Using the Data ..................................................................................................14-25
4.1 Display the Data in the Line Chart ................................................................ 14-25
4.2 Displaying Data as Numerical Values............................................................. 14-27
4.3 Saving Data as a CSV File ............................................................................ 14-36
Chapter 15 Operation Log Function
1 Overview............................................................................................................ 15-1
1.1 How the Operation Log Function is Used.........................................................15-1
1.2 Recorded Events ...........................................................................................15-3
1.3 Data Configuration ........................................................................................15-4
1.4 Saving and Deleting Data ..............................................................................15-6
1.5 Using the Data.............................................................................................. 15-7
2 Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure ................................................... 15-8
2.1 Configuring the Events and the Condition for Recording ................................... 15-8
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box ......................................................................15-10
3.1 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box................................................................ 15-10
4 Using the Data ..................................................................................................15-17
4.1 Saving the Data as a CSV File ...................................................................... 15-17
Chapter 16 Data Storage Area
1 Overview............................................................................................................ 16-1
1.1 What is the Data Storage Area?......................................................................16-1
1.2 Data Storage Area......................................................................................... 16-2
2 Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure .......................................................... 16-3
3 Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box .......................................................... 16-4
3.1 Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box ....................................................16-4
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual Preface -14
Contents
Chapter 17 Preventive Maintenance Function
1 Overview ............................................................................................................17-1
1.1 How the Preventive Maintenance Function is Used ...........................................17-1
1.2 Counting the Operation Time and Operation Count ..........................................17-2
1.3 Thresholds....................................................................................................17-3
2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure......................................17-4
2.1 Counting Operation Time and Operation Count................................................17-4
3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box ..........................................................17-6
3.1 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box....................................................17-6
3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box ........................................................................17-8
4 Using the Data .................................................................................................. 17-11
4.1 Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display..................... 17-11
4.2 Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold... 17-14
Chapter 18 Recipe Function
1 Overview ............................................................................................................18-1
1.1 How the Recipe Function is Used....................................................................18-1
1.2 Data for Recipes............................................................................................18-2
1.3 Data Configuration ........................................................................................18-3
2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure...............................................................18-4
2.1 Configuring Recipe Function Operations and Devices .......................................18-4
3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................................18-8
3.1 Recipe Settings Dialog Box.............................................................................18-8
3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box ...................................................................... 18-10
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes ............................................................... 18-14
4.1 Editing Recipe Data ..................................................................................... 18-14
4.2 Creating Recipe Files ................................................................................... 18-17
4.3 Editing Recipe Files...................................................................................... 18-21
4.4 Deleting Recipe Files ................................................................................... 18-22
Chapter 19 Text Group
1 Overview ............................................................................................................19-1
1.1 How the Text Group Function is Used .............................................................19-1
1.2 Functions that Support Text Groups ................................................................19-2
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure.......................................................19-3
2.1 Creating Text Groups .....................................................................................19-3
2.2 Registering Text ............................................................................................19-5
2.3 Switching the Displayed Language by Value of Device.................................... 19-10
3 Text Manager .................................................................................................... 19-12
3.1 Text Manager.............................................................................................. 19-12
3.2 Text Group Settings Dialog Box .................................................................... 19-15
Chapter 20 Script
1 About the Script Function .....................................................................................20-1
1.1 Overview of the Script Function......................................................................20-1
1.2 Types and Trigger Conditions of the Script.......................................................20-2
1.3 Data Type of the Script ..................................................................................20-3
1.4 Script Error ...................................................................................................20-4
2 Editing and Management of the Script...................................................................20-5
Preface -15 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Contents
2.1 Script Registration Procedure .........................................................................20-5
2.2 Script Manager.............................................................................................. 20-7
2.3 Script Editor..................................................................................................20-8
3 Global Script......................................................................................................20-12
3.1 Setting procedures for Global Script.............................................................. 20-12
4 Script Definition Method .....................................................................................20-14
4.1 Format List ................................................................................................. 20-14
5 Script Coding Examples ......................................................................................20-22
5.1 Control Statements ..................................................................................... 20-22
5.2 Relational Operators.................................................................................... 20-28
5.3 Logical Operators ........................................................................................ 20-30
5.4 Arithmetic Operators ................................................................................... 20-31
5.5 Bitwise Operators........................................................................................ 20-32
5.6 Bit Functions............................................................................................... 20-34
5.7 Word Functions........................................................................................... 20-35
6 Important Notes ................................................................................................20-50
6.1 Important Notes Regarding the While Definition ............................................ 20-50
6.2 Number of Devices That Can Be Used........................................................... 20-50
6.3 Write Delay................................................................................................. 20-51
6.4 About the Priority of the Operator ................................................................ 20-52
Chapter 21 User Accounts and the Security Function
1 Overview............................................................................................................ 21-1
1.1 User Accounts............................................................................................... 21-1
1.2 Protecting Data .............................................................................................21-2
1.3 Protecting Displays and Operations.................................................................21-5
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure ............................................................ 21-8
2.1 Creating and Editing User Accounts ................................................................ 21-8
2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups .............................................................. 21-15
2.3 Protecting the Display and Operation of Screens and Parts ............................. 21-18
3 User Accounts Dialog Box ...................................................................................21-30
3.1 User Accounts Dialog Box ............................................................................ 21-30
4 Password Input..................................................................................................21-36
4.1 Entering the Password on the Touch............................................................. 21-36
4.2 Entering the Password in WindO/I-NV3......................................................... 21-38
Chapter 22 Communication
1 PLC Link Communication ..................................................................................... 22-1
1.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-1
1.2 PLC Link Communication Settings...................................................................22-2
2 O/I Link Communication...................................................................................... 22-3
2.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-3
2.2 O/I Link Communication Settings ...................................................................22-3
3 DM Link Communication ...................................................................................... 22-4
3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-4
3.2 DM Link Communication Settings ...................................................................22-5
4 No External Devices ............................................................................................ 22-6
4.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-6
4.2 No External devices Settings .......................................................................... 22-6
5 User Communication ........................................................................................... 22-7
5.1 Overview ...................................................................................................... 22-7
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual Preface -16
Contents
5.2 User Communication Settings Procedure .........................................................22-8
5.3 Protocol Manager ........................................................................................ 22-21
5.4 Example of User Communication Settings...................................................... 22-68
5.5 Compatible USB Bar Code Readers ............................................................... 22-73
5.6 Connection Diagram for User Communication ................................................ 22-73
Chapter 23 Online Function
1 Communicating with the Touch.............................................................................23-1
1.1 How the Online Function is Used ....................................................................23-1
1.2 Connect Touch to a Computer ........................................................................23-4
1.3 Change Communication Settings ....................................................................23-5
2 Downloading ..................................................................................................... 23-11
2.1 Downloading Project Data to the Touch......................................................... 23-11
2.2 Download Dialog Box................................................................................... 23-13
2.3 Downloading Files to an External Memory Inserted in the Touch ..................... 23-16
3 Uploading ......................................................................................................... 23-18
3.1 Upload Project Data from the Touch ............................................................. 23-18
3.2 Upload Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 23-21
4 Clear ................................................................................................................ 23-22
4.1 Clear Data from the Touch ........................................................................... 23-22
4.2 Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted in the Touch........................ 23-24
5 Formatting ........................................................................................................ 23-26
5.1 Formatting an External Memory Inserted in the Touch.................................... 23-26
6 System Information ........................................................................................... 23-27
6.1 Displaying System Information ..................................................................... 23-27
6.2 Target Information Dialog Box...................................................................... 23-29
Chapter 24 Monitor Function
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3...............................................................................24-1
1.1 How the Monitor Function in WindO/I-NV3 is Used ..........................................24-1
1.2 Debugging in WindO/I-NV3............................................................................24-4
1.3 Display the Value of Device in Popup ............................................................ 24-16
1.4 Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions ............................................ 24-16
1.5 Switching the Screen of the Touch ................................................................ 24-17
1.6 Open Current Screens.................................................................................. 24-17
2 Monitoring on the Touch .................................................................................... 24-18
2.1 How the Monitoring Function is Used ............................................................ 24-18
2.2 Device Monitor ............................................................................................ 24-19
2.3 Ladder Monitor............................................................................................ 24-23
Chapter 25 Data Transfer Function
1 Project Transfer Function......................................................................................25-1
1.1 How the Project Transfer Function is Used.......................................................25-1
1.2 Project Data Transfer Procedures....................................................................25-1
1.3 Converting Project Data for Transfer ...............................................................25-2
1.4 Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer Project Data..25-5
1.5 Precautions...................................................................................................25-6
Preface -17 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Contents
Chapter 26 External Memory Devices
1 USB Flash Drives................................................................................................. 26-1
1.1 How the USB Flash Drive Function is Used ...................................................... 26-1
1.2 Specifications................................................................................................26-1
1.3 File Structure ................................................................................................26-2
1.4 Reading/Writing Data .................................................................................... 26-3
1.5 Setting the External Memory Folder .............................................................. 26-12
1.6 Deleting Files on the USB Flash Drive ........................................................... 26-13
1.7 Formatting the USB Flash Drive .................................................................... 26-14
1.8 USB Popup Screen Function ......................................................................... 26-15
1.9 Precautions................................................................................................. 26-17
2 USB Autorun Function ........................................................................................26-18
2.1 Overview of the USB Autorun Function ......................................................... 26-18
2.2 USB Autorun Function Configuration Procedure ............................................. 26-19
2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File .......................................................... 26-22
2.4 USB Autorun Function Security..................................................................... 26-26
Chapter 27 Internal Devices
1 Bit Devices ......................................................................................................... 27-1
1.1 HMI Device Addresses ...................................................................................27-1
1.2 Control Device Addresses............................................................................... 27-4
2 Word Devices ..................................................................................................... 27-8
2.1 HMI Device Addresses ...................................................................................27-8
2.2 Control Device Addresses............................................................................. 27-11
Chapter 28 Touch Setup
1 Maintenance Screen............................................................................................ 28-1
1.1 Maintenance Screen Overview........................................................................ 28-1
1.2 Displaying the Maintenance Screen.................................................................28-1
1.3 Adjusting Screen Brightness...........................................................................28-2
2 System Mode Overview ....................................................................................... 28-3
2.1 System Mode Screens.................................................................................... 28-3
2.2 Names and Layout of Setup Menus.................................................................28-4
3 Settings ............................................................................................................. 28-5
3.1 Initial Setting ................................................................................................28-5
3.2 Clock Setting ................................................................................................28-9
3.3 Run.............................................................................................................. 28-9
3.4 System Info. (System Information) .................................................................28-9
3.5 Top Page .................................................................................................... 28-10
3.6 Self Diag. (Self Diagnosis)............................................................................ 28-10
Chapter 29 SmartAXIS Specifications
1 Touch ................................................................................................................ 29-1
1.1 Packing Contents .......................................................................................... 29-1
1.2 Type Number ................................................................................................29-1
1.3 Part Names................................................................................................... 29-2
1.4 External Interfaces ........................................................................................29-3
1.5 Specifications................................................................................................29-7
1.6 Dimensions................................................................................................... 29-9
1.7 Installation ................................................................................................. 29-10
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual Preface -18
Contents
1.8 Wiring ........................................................................................................ 29-13
1.9 USB Cable Lock Pin Attachment.................................................................... 29-14
1.10 Maintenance and Inspection......................................................................... 29-15
Chapter 30 Troubleshooting
1 Error Messages....................................................................................................30-1
1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen.......................................................................30-1
1.2 Low Battery Voltage ......................................................................................30-2
2 Error Information.................................................................................................30-3
2.1 General Error Codes ......................................................................................30-3
2.2 Ladder Program Execution Error .....................................................................30-5
3 Handling Problems...............................................................................................30-6
3.1 When You Cannot Download Project Data .......................................................30-6
3.2 When the Backlight is OFF and the Buzzer Sounds...........................................30-6
3.3 When a Problem Occurs with a Control Function..............................................30-7
Appendix
1 Color Number Correspondence Table...................................................................... A-1
2 Color Palette ........................................................................................................ A-2
3 Pattern Palette ..................................................................................................... A-3
4 Text Alignment ..................................................................................................... A-4
5 Ladder Program.................................................................................................... A-7
5.1 Processing in One Scan................................................................................... A-7
5.2 Executing Program Instructions ....................................................................... A-7
5.3 Breakdown of END Processing Time................................................................. A-7
5.4 Execution Times for Instructions...................................................................... A-8
5.5 Instruction Bytes ...........................................................................................A-10
6 USB Driver ..........................................................................................................A-12
6.1 Installing the USB Driver................................................................................A-12
6.2 Checking the USB Driver ................................................................................A-22
Index
Preface -19 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 1 General Information for SmartAXIS
1
This chapter describes SmartAXIS functions and system configuration examples.
General Information for SmartAXIS
1 About the SmartAXIS
The SmartAXIS is available in three types: the SmartAXIS Touch, the SmartAXIS Pro, and the SmartAXIS Lite. The
SmartAXIS Touch is equipped with the HMI functions of an operator interface and PLC control functions. In addition
to the functions of control and communication as a PLC, the SmartAXIS Pro is equipped with an LCD and operation
buttons on the front of the module. The SmartAXIS Lite is equipped with the various control and communication
functions as a PLC. This document describes the SmartAXIS Touch. Unless otherwise specified, SmartAXIS refers to
FT1A Series SmartAXIS Touch. For the SmartAXIS Pro and Lite, refer to the "SmartAXIS Pro/Lite User's Manual".
The Touch is a small-size programmable controller that is fully equipped with powerful basic functions, various
communication functions and HMI functions of an operator interface. Use WindO/I-NV3 for creating and managing
screens and data to used with the Touch.
1.1 Type Numbers
The notation for SmartAXIS Touch type numbers is as follows.
FT1A - M 12 R A - W
Body color W: Light gray
B: Dark gray
S: Silver
Power supply type A: DC power type (24V DC)
Output type R: Relay output
Inputs/outputs 12: 12 I/O points
LCD M: Monochrome LCD models
C: Color LCD models
FT1A: Type number
For a list of models, refer to Chapter 29 “SmartAXIS Specifications”.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 1-1
1 About the SmartAXIS
1.2 Features for the Touch
This section describes the features of the Touch.
The Touch is high-performance programmable controller in a compact package and is equipped with high speed
counters. The Touch enables you to build optimum systems to automate factories or control production lines.
■ Powerful display functions
The Touch is equipped with an LCD and the same display functions as the MICRO/I. You can monitor and modify
values of devices and monitor basic instructions.
Also, by creating screens and programming control functions, you can display the current time, bar charts, scrolling
messages, or simple text on the LCD screen.
■ 32-bit and Floating Point Data Types
For arithmetic commands, it is possible to unsigned 32-bit (D: double word) and signed 32-bit (L: long) arithmetic
processes, and floating point (F: float) arithmetic processes.
■ Supports Various Languages
Japanese, Roman, Chinese, Taiwanese, Central European, Baltic, and Cyrillic, languages are all supported. In addition
to the included fonts you can also use any of the Windows fonts on your computer.
1-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 About the SmartAXIS
1.3 Special Functions for the Touch 1
General Information for SmartAXIS
This section describes the functions of the Touch.
● I/O Related Functions
■ Catch Input
The catch input allows it to receive short input pulses from sensors without regard to the scan time. A maximum of
four catch inputs can be used.
■ Input Filter
The input filter can be adjusted according to the width of input signals to reject input noises. Selectable input filter
values to pass input signals are 0 millisecond, and 3 through 15 milliseconds in 1 millisecond increments.
■ Interrupt Input
The interrupt input can be used to call an interrupt program to respond to an external input that requires a response
faster than the scan time. A maximum of four interrupt inputs can be used.
■ Stop and Reset Inputs
Stop input is a function to stop the ladder program operation for the Touch. Reset input is a function to stop the
ladder program operation for the Touch and clear the value of control devices. Any input terminal on the Touch can
be designated as a stop or reset input to control the Touch operation.
■ Analog Input
Analog input of 0 to 10V DC can be converted to a digital value of 0 to 1000. A maximum of two inputs can be used
as analog inputs.
● Pulse I/O Functions
■ High-speed Counter
This function counts high-speed pulse inputs that cannot be measured in normal Ladder Program processing.
Use this function for applications such as positioning control with a rotary encoder or motor control. The Touch can
use singlephase high-speed counters and two-phase high-speed counters. A maximum of four single-phase high-
speed counters and a maximum of one two-phase high-speed counters can be used simultaneously.
Example: Controlling a motor by counting two-phase pulse input with a high-speed counter
Pulse motor
Rotary
High-speed pulse input
encoder
Two-phase pulses
Touch
■ Frequency Measurement
This function measures the frequency of pulses input to an input terminal. The frequencies of a maximum of one
input can be measured.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 1-3
1 About the SmartAXIS
● Convenient Functions
■ Calendar/Clock
The Touch features a real-time clock on-board. Using the calendar and clock function, the Touch can operate
according to the current date and time. These functions can be used to control time schedule for lighting or air
conditioning equipments.
■ Security function
The project in the Touch can be protected against reading and/or writing by including a password in the project. This
function is effective for security of projects.
■ “Keep” or “Clear” Designation of Touch Data
Internal relays, shift register bits, counter current values, and data register values of the control devices can be
designated to be kept or cleared when the Touch is powered down. All or a specified range of these devices can be
designated as keep or clear types.
■ RUN/STOP Selection at Startup when “Keep” Data is Broken
When data to be kept such as “keep” designated counter values are broken while the Touch is powered down, the
user can select whether the ladder program starts to run or not to prevent undesirable operation at the next startup.
■ Log Data
The function allows values of devices to be logged under specified sampling conditions. The sampled values of
devices are saved in internal memory along with the time of sampling.
■ Timer Interrupt
The timer interrupt can be used to call an interrupt program at a predetermined interval of time without being
affected by the scan time.
1-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 About the WindO/I-NV3
2 About the WindO/I-NV3
1
General Information for SmartAXIS
WindO/I-NV3 is software that is exclusively designed for operation with the Touch, for specifying settings and
creating screens and Ladder Program. The set of data made up of settings and created screens and Ladder Program
is called a project.
Using WindO/I-NV3, you create a project and then download it to the Touch, to build the interface necessary for
operation.
Download
Computer
Touch
Upload
USB flash drive Download
Upload
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 1-5
3 Operating Modes
3 Operating Modes
The Touch includes multiple modes, so you switch between modes as and when necessary. These modes are called
operating modes. The functions and the operations and conditions for switching are as follows.
Conditions required for
Mode Functions
switching to the mode
• Turn ON the power to the Touch.
This is the mode at the time of executing project • Press Run on the Top Page in the System
Run Mode data. The created screen is displayed and the Mode.
Ladder Program is executed. • The download of the project data is
completed.
• Press down for 3 seconds or more at the top
left corner of the screen to display the
Maintenance screen, and then press
System Mode.
Perform initial settings, clock settings, self-diagnosis, • Using the screen switching button, multi-
System Mode
etc. for the Touch. buttons, screen switch or multi commands,
switch to the System Mode.
• All data is cleared using WindO/I-NV3.
• Write the System Area 1 Display screen
number (address+0) to FFFFh.
Monitor Mode is used for monitoring values of
devices using WindO/I-NV3. On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, in the
Monitor Mode
While in Monitor mode, the words "Monitor mode" Monitor group, click Start Monitor.
flash at the bottom left of the screen of the Touch.
Transferring data between a computer and the
Data Transfer • Download project data.
Touch.
• When switched to System Mode, operation of the Touch stops.
• To display the Maintenance Screen by pressing down for 3 seconds or more at the top left of the screen,
the Enable Maintenance check box from the System Settings tab of the Project Settings dialog box
must be checked.
For details about Maintenance Mode, refer to Chapter 28 “1 Maintenance Screen” on page 28-1.
1-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program Creation and to Run Operation
4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program Creation and to Run Operation
1
General Information for SmartAXIS
The following flowchart describes the sequence of step from the screen and Ladder Program creation for the Touch to
the Run operation.
1 Launch the WindO/I-NV3
( refer to Chapter 2 “2.1 Starting WindO/I-NV3” on page 2-34)
2 Creating a Project, Screen and Ladder Program
Creating a new project ( refer to Chapter 3 “1.1 Creating New Project Data” on page 3-1)
• Creating new screens ( refer to Chapter 4 “2.1 Creating Screens” on page 4-2)
• Creating new Ladder Program ( refer to Chapter 12 “2.2 Creating Ladder Program” on page 12-5)
Modifying the project
5 Troubleshooting
( refer to Chapter 30 “Troubleshooting” on page 30-1)
3 Downloading the project
( refer to Chapter 23 “Downloading Project Data to the Touch” on
page 23-11)
4 Debug
(refer to Chapter 24 “Monitor Function” on page 24-1)
6 RUN
1 Launch WindO/I-NV3
Launch WindO/I-NV3.
2 Creating a Project, Screen and Ladder Program
Create a project and performing various settings.
Create display screens and Ladder Program.
3 Downloading the project
Connect the computer to the Touch using a USB cable or Ethernet cable, and download the created project data to
the internal memory of the Touch.
4 Debug
Using the monitor function, you can correct created project data while confirming actual actions.
5 Troubleshooting
If there is a module or communication-related problem with the Touch, or a problem with the screen or Ladder
Program, an appropriate message is displayed at the top of the screen.
In addition, error information is saved to a special data register. By referring to this information and repeatedly
correcting the project, downloading, and debugging, the project can be completed.
6 RUN
Starting communication with the external device and execute various functions according to the project settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 1-7
4 Flow from Screen and Ladder Program Creation and to Run Operation
1-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
9
Chapter 2 WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
This chapter describes the minimum system requirements for WindO/I-NV3, how to start and exit it, and the
configuration of its screens and menus. 2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
1.1 Minimum System Requirements
The table below shows the minimum system requirements for WindO/I-NV3.
Item Description
Windows 7 (64-bit and 32-bit versions),
OS Windows Vista (32-bit version),
Microsoft Windows XP (32-bit version, Service Pack 3 or later must be installed)
CPU 1.0 GHz or faster CPU
Memory 512 MB of RAM (1 GB recommended)
Hard drive 800 MB of free space
Graphics Screen resolution 1024x768 or higher
Other Mouse, CD-ROM drive, administrator account, .NET Framework 3.5 SP1
• System requirements to connect a computer to Touch models with USB ports. The computer must be
running Windows XP/Vista (32-bit version only), or Windows 7 (64-bit and 32-bit versions), and must
have a USB 1.1/2.0 port.
• A USB driver must be installed when connecting the Touch to a computer with a USB cable.
Install the USB driver when making the connection for the first time. For details, refer to Appendix “6.1
Installing the USB Driver” on page A-12.
The USB driver does not have to be installed for subsequent connections. However, you must connect the
Touch to the same USB port that was used when the USB driver was installed. The computer will not
recognize the Touch immediately if the USB cable is connected to a different USB port.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-1
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
1.2 Available Data
● Data types
Data type is the format of the data related to the minimum and maximum values of data that can be processed by a
part and handling of negative and real numbers.
Data types and data ranges that can be used on the Touch and WindO/I-NV3 are listed below.
Required word
Data type Processable data range
count
BIN16 (+) 1 0 to 65535
BIN16 (+/-) 1 -32768 to 32767
BIN32 (+) 2 0 to 4294967295
BIN32 (+/-) 2 -2147483648 to 2147483647
BCD4 1 -999 to 9999
BCD8 2 -9999999 to 99999999
float32 2 -3.4x1038 to -1.18x10-38, 0 , 1.18x10-38 to 3.4x1038
WindLDR data types are displayed as follows: BIN16(+) as W (word), BIN16(+/-) as I (integer), BIN32(+)
as D (double word), BIN32(+/-) as L (long), and float32 as F (float).
● Numeric value handling by data type
Data stored in devices is handled as described below.
Data type Data handling
bit bit
15
1 word 0
BIN16 (+) Data is handled as an unsigned 16-bit integer.
bit bit
15
1 word 0
Data is handled as an signed 16-bit integer.
BIN16 (+/-)
If the sign bit (bit 15) is 1, the value is two’s complement.
Sign bit
bit bit
31
Upper word Lower word 0
Handled as an unsigned 32-bit integer with the starting address
BIN32 (+)
as the lower word.
bit bit
31
Upper word Lower word 0 Handled as a signed 32-bit integer with the starting address as
BIN32 (+/-) the lower word.
If the sign bit (bit 31) is 1, the value is two’s complement.
Sign bit
bit
1 word Data is handled as a four digit (16-bit) binary-coded decimal
bit
15 0
value.
3rd 2nd 1st
Each four bits from bit 0 to bit 11 is handled as the absolute
BCD4 Sign Absolute value value for the 1st to 3rd digit.
Bit 12 to bit 15 is handled as the minus sign (-) when its value is
F (hex) and it is handled as the absolute value for the 4th digit
when 0 to 9 (hex).
bit bit Data is handled as an eight digit (32-bit) binary-coded decimal
Upper word Lower word
31 0
value.
7th 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st
Each four bits from bit 0 to bit 27 is handled as the absolute
BCD8 Sign Absolute value value for the 1st to 7th digit.
Bit 28 to bit 31 is handled as the minus sign (-) when its value is
F (hex) and it is handled as the absolute value for the 8th digit
when 0 to 9 (hex).
2-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Data type Data handling
Data is handled as a 32-bit floating-point real number. The number of significant digits is 6 digits. The
floating-point type data format conforms to the IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)
standard for the single precision storage format as explained next. 2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Single precision floating-point values in IEEE 754 (32 bits)
Single precision floating-point values in IEEE 754 are expressed with a total of 32 bits (2 words) using 1 bit
for the sign s, 8 bits for the exponent e, and 23 bits for the significand f. The sign bit indicates the sign of
the expressed value (positive or negative). The exponent is an 8 bit signed integer with a value from -128
to 127.
bit bit bit bit bit
31 30 23 22 0
float32 s e (exponent) [bit 30 to 23] f (significand) [bit 22 to 0]
+127 Represents after the decimal of 1.xxx
Sign bit (0: positive, 1: negative)
Example:
s e f
0 01111101 10000000000000000000000
-2
1.1×2
If all bits are 0, the value is “0”.
The internal representation of float32 is described here, but the data for float32 (floating-point real
numbers) is handled with a special bit configuration, so do not directly access the bits.
Example: Data handling
Data type Storing 0FFF (hex) in LDR10 Storing FFFF (hex) in LDR10
bit bit bit bit
15
LDR10 0 15
LDR10 0
0000111111111111 1111 111111111111
BIN16 (+)
0FFF (Hex) FFFF (Hex)
0FFF (hex) is handled as 4095 (dec). FFFF (hex) is handled as 65535 (dec).
bit bit bit bit
15
LDR10 0 15
LDR10 0
0000 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
BIN16 (+/-)
+ 0FFF (Hex) − FFFF (Hex)
0FFF (hex) is handled as 4095 (dec). Sign bit is 1, so FFFF (hex) is two’s complement,
handled as -1 (dec).
Storing 0FFF (hex) in LDR10, FFFF (hex) in Storing FFFF (hex) in LDR10, FFFF (hex) in
Data type
LDR11 LDR11
bit bit bit bit
31
LDR11 LDR10 0 31
LDR11 LDR10 0
00001111111111111111111111111111 1111 1111111111111111111111111111
BIN32 (+)
0FFFFFFF (Hex) FFFFFFFF (Hex)
0FFFFFFF (hex) is handled as 268435455 (dec). FFFFFFFF (hex) is handled as 4294967295 (dec).
bit bit bit bit
LDR11 LDR10 31
LDR11 LDR10 0
31 0
00001111111111111111111111111111 11111111111111111111111111111111
BIN32 (+/-)
+ 0FFFFFFF (Hex) − FFFFFFFF (Hex)
The sign bit is 0, so the positive number 0FFFFFFF Sign bit is 1, so two’s complement of the negative
(hex) is handled as 268435455 (dec). number FFFFFFFF (hex), handled as -1 (dec).
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-3
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Data type Storing 1234 (hex) in LDR10 Storing F765 (hex) in LDR10
bit bit bit bit
15
LDR10 0 15
LDR10 0
0001001000110100 1111011101100101
BCD4 + 234 (Hex) − 765 (Hex)
The sign is 1 (hex), so the binary-coded decimal The sign is F (hex), so the binary-coded decimal
value of the positive number 234 (hex), value of the negative number 765 (hex),
handled as 1234 (dec). handled as -765 (dec).
Storing 5678 (hex) in LDR10, 1234 (hex) in Storing F765 (hex) in LDR10, 4321 (hex) in
Data type
LDR11 LDR11
bit bit bit bit
31
LDR11 LDR10 0 31
LDR11 LDR10 0
00010010001101000101011001111000 1111 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001
BCD8 + 2345678 (Hex) − 7654321 (Hex)
The sign is 1 (hex), so the binary-coded decimal The sign is F (hex), so the binary-coded decimal
value of the positive number 2345678 (hex), value of the negative number 7654321 (hex),
handled as 12345678 (dec). handled as -7654321 (dec).
Data type Storing 0000 (hex) in LDR10, BFA0 (hex) in LDR11
LDR11 LDR10
BFA0 (Hex) 0000 (Hex)
bit bit bit bit
31 23 22 0
10111111101000000000000000000000
float32
Sign Exponent Significand
1 01111111 01000000000000000000000
20+21+22+23+24+25+26 = 127 2-2 = 0.25
Negative
−1.25×2127-127 = −1.25
In the data types BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-), BCD8, and float32, two words (upper word and lower word) are
used for a single value. The Touch and external device communicate data in device addresses in one word
units, so when the upper word and lower word are sent in separate packets, the value may have already
changed when the data for both words is received, which may cause an unexpected result.
2-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
● Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings
The indirect specification of a device address means to add a value (indirect value) to the address of the configured
device and use that address as the actual read source or write destination. You can change the read source or write
destination address just by changing this indirect value. 2
Indirect read
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Add the indirect value to the address of the configured device as the read source and read the value of device specified
indirectly.
Example: To read a value of device specified indirectly into LDR200
When the device address configured as the read source is LDR10 and the indirect value’s device address is
D21, if 4 (indirect value: 4) is set in D21, the device address of the value actually read is LDR14.
Device configured as read source LDR10 100
Indirect value LDR11 200
Indirect value’s device D21 4 4 words LDR12 300
LDR13 400
Device with actually read value LDR14 500
Read
LDR200 500
Indirect write
Add the indirect value to the address of the configured device as the write destination and write to the value of device
specified indirectly.
Example: To write the value in LDR20 to an indirectly specified device
When the device address configured as the write destination is LDR100 and the indirect value’s device address
is D20, if 3 (indirect value: 3) is set in D20, the device address of the value actually written is LDR103.
Device configured as write source LDR100 100
Indirect value LDR101 200
3 words
Indirect value’s device D20 3 LDR102 300
Device with actually written value LDR103 1000
Write
LDR20 1000
Parts you can indirectly read and indirectly write
Part Indirect read Indirect write
Word Button YES YES
Multi-Button YES YES
Numerical Input YES YES
Character Input YES YES
Numerical Display YES NO
Word Write Command YES YES
Script Command YES YES
Multi-Command YES YES
• Enter the value for indirect values as the data type BIN16 (+). Indirect values can be set in the range of
0 to 32767. If you enter a value for the indirect value outside this range, the value before the indirect
value changes is maintained when reading. When writing, “Device range error” is displayed.
In scripts however, enter a value for the data type set in the script.
• For indirect device reading, decide the read source address after the indirect value changes and after the screen
changes, and then read the value of device. For external device addresses, communication to read the value of
device from a external device takes time, so if data is transfered or arithmetic operations are executed before
the indirect read is finished, processing cannot be executed and the following error is displayed.
Word Button, Word Write Command: Indirect device error
Script Command: Script error
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-5
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
1.3 Available Text
● Font
Supported Languages
The Touch can display multiple fonts by installing them. In addition to the fonts installed on the Touch, all Windows
fonts displayed on your computer can be used on the display.
Font Description
Fonts to be pre-loaded on the Touch.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Korean, Taiwanese, Central European, Baltic and Cyrillic
Fonts installed in the Touch fonts can be installed on the Touch.
The installed fonts installed can be changed as needed using WindO/I-NV3, which
helps save and efficiently operate the user capacity.
All fonts used on the computer can be displayed on the Touch.
The Windows fonts allow you to display expressive characters on the Touch screen as
Windows Font
needed.
Windows fonts are downloaded as part of the project data.
In addition, the Touch has a function that switches between two or more text groups dynamically. With this function,
the registration text of buttons can be switched to different languages according to the conditions.
For details, refer to Chapter 19 “Text Group” on page 19-1.
Group 1: Japanese Group 2: English Group 3: Chinese
Text ID : 1 目標達成 Goal reached 䗴ᡆⴤḽ
Touch
External device
D100 : 1 目標達成
D100 : 2 Goal reached
D100 : 3 䗴ᡆⴤḽ
2-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Installed Fonts in the Touch
Font Name Code System Language
JIS 8-bit code 2
Japanese JIS level-1 and Japanese
Standard
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
level-2 kanji sets
Fonts
Icelandic, Irish, Italian, English, Dutch, Swedish, Spanish, Danish,
English ISO 8859-1 (Latin1)
German, Norwegian, Portuguese, Finnish, Faeroese, French
Japanese large * Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged JIS
font JIS level-1 kanji set level-1 kanji set.
(first standard) Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-10.
Japanese large
* Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged JIS
font
JIS level-2 kanji set level-2 kanji set.
(second
Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-10.
standard)
Chinese GB2312 Chinese
Optional
Korean KSC5601 Korean
Fonts
Taiwanese BIG5 Taiwanese
* Install this font to achieve a sharper display of enlarged
European large
ISO 8859-1 (Latin1) European fonts.
font
Refer to “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-10.
Central European ANSI1250 Czech, Hungarian, Polish, Slovak, Slovene
Baltic ANSI1257 Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian, Greenlandic, Lappish
Cyrillic ANSI1251 Bulgarian, Belarusian, Ukrainian, Serbian, Macedonian, Russian
• Japanese, European, and European large font are factory-installed.
The standard fonts cannot be replaced; however, the optional fonts can be downloaded from the
WindO/I-NV3.
• The Touch displays the single-byte parts of Chinese, Taiwanese, and Korean with ISO 8859-1, and
supports Hangul characters only in the double-byte part of Korean.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-7
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Available Fonts for Parts
Parts Description Touch installed Font*1 Windows Font
Bit Button YES YES
Word Button YES YES
Goto Screen Button YES YES
Buttons
Key Button YES YES
Keypad YES YES
Selector Switch YES YES*3
Pilot Lamp YES YES
Lamps
Multi-State Lamp YES YES
Numerical Input YES NO
Character Input YES NO
Message Display YES YES*2*3
Message Switching Display YES YES*3
Data Displays
Alarm List Display YES YES*3
Alarm Log Display YES YES*3
Numerical Display YES NO
Calendar YES NO
Bar Chart YES YES*3
Charts
Line Chart YES YES*3
*1 To use a Touch-installed font, the font should be downloaded from the WindO/I-NV3 in advance.
*2 Windows font can be used for fixed text only. Only the Touch-installed font can be used for the read device data code for the
Message Display.
*3 Windows font can be used only when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
2-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Font Size
Font Name Code System Size
Japanese large font (first standard) JIS level-1 kanji set 477KB 2
Japanese large font (second standard) JIS level-2 kanji set 424KB
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Chinese GB2312 238KB
Korean KSC5601 109KB
Optional Fonts Taiwanese BIG5 422KB
European large font ISO 8859-1 (Latin1) 102KB
Central European ANSI1250 6KB
Baltic ANSI1257 6KB
Cyrillic ANSI1251 6KB
The download size of font data is adjusted in multiples of 128KB.
The download size of font data is 128KB when the font size is 0KB or 128KB and smaller.
Example: When downloading Japanese large font (level-1 kanji set), Chinese, and European large fonts:
Font Size
Japanese large font (first standard) 477KB
Chinese 238KB
European large font 102KB
Total size of the font data 817KB
Download size of font data 896KB (817KB is adjusted in multiples of 128KB.)
Example: When downloading Chinese and Korean fonts:
Font Size
Chinese 238KB
Korean 109KB
Total size of the font data 347KB
Download size of font data 384KB (347KB is adjusted in multiples of 128KB.)
Example: When downloading all fonts:
Font Size
Japanese large font (first standard) 477KB
Japanese large font (second standard) 424KB
Chinese 238KB
Korean 109KB
Taiwanese 422KB
European large font 102KB
Central European 6KB
Baltic 6KB
Cyrillic 6KB
Total size of the font data 1790KB
Download size of font data 1792KB (1790KB is adjusted in multiples of 128KB.)
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-9
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
● High-quality Fonts
The high-quality fonts are the Japanese large fonts (first standard/second standard), and European fonts.
If you download high-quality fonts and select Use large font on the System tab in the Project Setting dialog box, the
Touch can replace some of the optional fonts with the high-quality fonts.
Scaled text with a background color is replaced and displayed with these fonts for a more attractive look.
High-quality European Font Display (Size 8x16)
W
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6
H
0.5
1
W
7 8
H
0.5
1
2-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
High-quality Japanese Font Display (Size 8x16)
H
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6
2
0.5
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
1
W
7 8
H
0.5
1
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-11
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
High-quality Japanese Font Display (Size 16x16)
W
0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6
H
0.5
1
W
7 8
H
0.5
1
• When the high-quality fonts have not been downloaded into the Touch, the standard fonts are used even
if Use large font is selected.
• When the Character Input part display font size is 8x16, high-quality fonts are not displayed even if Use
large font is selected.
2-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
● Windows Font
Selecting Windows Font for the Font property gives you access to all of the fonts installed on your computer for use
on Drawings and Parts. This allows you to display fonts and languages that are not installed on the Touch.
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Windows Font Settings
Windows Font settings are made in the Font Settings dialog box.
1 Click Change in the Windows Font group on the properties dialog box for Drawings, Parts, or on Text Manager.
2 Set each item, and then click OK.
■ Font
Select the font to use.
■ Font style
Select italic, bold, or other style.
■ Size
Select the size of the text.
■ Sample
Shows a preview using the specified font.
■ Character Pitch
Specify character spacing from 0 to 100.
■ Space between lines
Specify line spacing from 0 to 100.
■ Script
Select the character set code.
• The right end of the text may have missing dots if Font style is set to Italic. You can remedy this by
adding an extra space at the end of the line.
• An alternate font will be used if the Project Data uses a font that does not exist on the computer. This
means that text will appear differently if the Project Data is opened on another computer.
• The same font may also appear differently for different OS versions.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-13
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Using Windows Fonts
This section describes how to use Windows Fonts.
Selecting Windows Font for the Font property dialog box for the Text from the Drawings and Parts disables
the following options:
• Style: The style set under Windows Font will be used.
• Magnification: The width by height magnification will be set to 1 x 1. Note, Magnification can be
selected on the Message Display, Message Switching Display, and Alarm List Display
parts, but will not be reflected on the actual text displayed. To use scrolling on these
parts, adjust the display area for text using Magnification.
To register and use a Windows Font in Text Manager
Applicable
Text
Drawings
Buttons Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Key Button, Keypad, Selector Switch
Applicable Lamps Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp
Parts Data Displays Message Display, Message Switching Display, Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display
Charts Bar Chart, Line Chart
1 Select the Use Text Manager check box on the Properties dialog box for the Text from the Drawings and Parts.
• The Use Text Manager check box may appear in different locations depending on the part. This table shows
where to find this property:
Part Location
Text Properties of Text dialog box
Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Key Button,
Registration Text tab
Selector Switch, Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp
Keypad Properties of Keypad dialog box
Message Display General tab
Message Switching Display Message tab
Bar Chart, Line Chart Scale tab
• The Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts are designed to use the text registered in Text Manager so the
Use Text Manager check box is not shown.
2 Specify the Text ID for the Windows Font set in Text Manager.
• Using the Text ID for the Windows Font set in Text Manager disables these settings in the Properties
dialog box:
- Align Text: Multiple lines of text are shown aligned center-left when Center is selected. Text is
shown with right-indented left-aligned when Right is selected.
With right-indented left-aligned formatting, the line containing the most number of
characters is aligned on the right end while the other lines are aligned to the left
end of that line.
Aligns text to left end of line with most characters
Aligns text to right end of line with most characters
- Vertical Writing: Horizontal writing is used.
• The maximum number for the unit in the Numerical Input and Numerical Display parts is 4 characters.
The fifth character and any characters beyond that will appear outside the part.
• In the Message Display, variable text “\@” appears as is.
• With the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display, line spacing is not automatically adjusted based on
the size of the text. Adjust it using the Line Spacing property on the Format tab.
• If text containing a carriage return is used for a label on a Bar or Line Chart, or for an Alarm List Display
or Alarm Log Display part, it will appear truncated after the carriage return if a non-Windows Font is
used. The entire text, including the carriage return, is shown when using a Windows Font.
2-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
To select a font in the Properties dialog box
Applicable
Text
Drawings
Buttons Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Key Button, Keypad
2
Applicable
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Parts Lamps Pilot Lamp, Multi-State Lamp
Select Windows for Font on the Properties dialog box for the Text from the Drawings or Parts.
The Font property may appear in different locations depending on the part. This table shows where to find this
property:
Part Location
Text Properties of Text dialog box
Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Key Button, Pilot Lamp, Multi-
Registration Text tab
State Lamp
Keypad Properties of Keypad dialog box
● Character Code Table
Using the Character Code Table
Example: Finding the character code for the character “a” in the table.
Upper 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)
Lower 4 bits of the code (hexadecimal)
The upper four bits of the code are hexadecimal 6.
The lower four bits of the code are hexadecimal 1.
Therefore, the character code for "a" is as follows.
"a": 6 1
Lower 4 bits
Upper 4 bits
For other fonts and two-byte characters, refer to the table of the relevant code system.
Japanese (two-byte characters): JIS first standard/second standard, Chinese: GB2312, Taiwanese: BIG5,
Korean (Hangul character): KSC5601
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-15
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
European Font (ISO 8859-1)
Central European Font (ANSI 1250)
2-16 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Baltic Font (ANSI 1257)
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Cyrillic Font (ANSI 1251)
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-17
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Japanese Font (JIS X0201)
Control Codes
Refer to the following table when using control codes in User Communications.
2-18 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
1.4 Available Number of Colors
The available number of colors that can be used on the WindO/I-NV3 are listed below.
2
Model Target Number of colors
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Picture Manager 65,536 colors
Color LCD models
Properties of Drawings and Parts 256 colors
Picture Manager 8 shades
Monochrome LCD models
Properties of Drawings and Parts 8 shades
1.5 Available Image Files
• The supported formats for image files displayed on the Touch are BMP (bit map files) and NMF (NV Metafile).
• The NMF (NV Metafile) format is used for the drawing objects created on the editing screen of WindO/I-NV3.
Graphics can be created by selecting a drawing object on the editing screen and clicking Export as NV Metafile
from the popup menu.
• Picture Manager supports WME (Windows Metafile), DXF, and ICO (icon files) formats. These files are converted by
Picture Manager into bitmap files.
• The Touch cannot handle image files that are larger than the size of the screen. Images that exceed the
screen size are not displayed.
• The Numerical Input, Character Input, Message Display, Message Switching Display, Numerical Display,
Calendar, and Meter cannot correctly display pictures that use a transparent color.
● About Picture Manager
Picture Manager is an application for managing graphic elements used for part diagrams and drawings.
• When saving, deleting, or reducing graphic elements, the following operations are displayed in Picture Manager.
- On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Picture Manager).
- Double click Picture Manager in the Project window.
• To set up the Picture from the Drawings, click on the editing screen where the Picture is positioned to display
Picture Manager.
• If setting a graphic for a positioned object, display Picture Manager from the Properties dialog box.
If Picture Manager is displayed from the Properties dialog box of an object on the screen when setting the
Picture, Reduce, Delete, and Export are disabled.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-19
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
● Saving graphic elements in Picture Manager
This section describes how to save drawing objects in Picture Manager. Saved graphic elements can be used for part
diagrams and drawings.
Saving image files
1 Click Import in Picture Manager.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
When managing graphic elements by category, click (Create New Category) to create a new category in
the Category list, and select it.
2 Specify the image file, and then click Open.
Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Open dialog box. Click Options to toggle between
showing and hiding the items. For details, refer to “Open Dialog Box Options” on page 2-29.
2-20 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
The graphic element is saved in Picture Manager. The name of the image file becomes the picture name.
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
(Picture name)
Even when the image is saved to a different category, if a graphic element of the same name is already
saved in that category, a confirmation message to overwrite the file is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the image.
After overwriting, the image is saved in the list of the selected category, and the previous image is deleted
from the list.
Example: The graphic element "Picture00" is saved in the category "Pic_Lib."
If the graphic element "Picture00.bmp" is saved to the category "NewBook1," the new image
"Picture00" is saved to "NewBook1," and the image named "Picture00" that was previously in
"Pic_Lib" is deleted.
• Click No to stop saving the graphic element.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-21
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Selecting graphic elements from Symbol Factory
1 Click Symbol Factory in Picture Manager.
Symbol Factory is displayed.
When managing graphic elements by category, click (Create New Category) to create a new category in
the Category list, and select it.
2 Select a category of graphic elements from Categories.
A list showing pictures in the category selected from Symbols is displayed.
Click Options to display the Symbol Options dialog box, which can be used to modify fill color and
background color, and to flip or rotate shapes. The settings made here are applied to all the graphic
elements in Symbol Factory.
2-22 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
3 Select a graphic element from Symbols, and then click Copy.
The Picture Name Setting dialog box is displayed.
4 Enter the name of the graphic in Picture Name.
The maximum number is 256 characters.
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
\/:,;*?"<>|
Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Picture Name Setting dialog box. Click Options to
toggle between showing and hiding the items. For details, refer to “Picture Name Setting dialog box” on
page 2-33.
5 Click OK.
The graphic element is saved in Picture Manager.
If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency, the
transparency range is displayed in magenta (R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-23
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Saving drawing objects drawn on the editing screen
Drawing objects drawn on the editing screen are saved as pictures, in NMF (NV Metafile) format in Picture Manager.
1 Select and right-click the drawing object, then click Copy to Picture Manager.
The Picture Name Setting dialog box is displayed.
Grouped drawing objects can be saved to Picture Manager as a single picture.
2 Enter the name of the drawing object in Picture Name.
The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
\/:,;*?"<>|
Detailed settings can be made using Options from the Picture Name Setting dialog box. Click Options to
toggle between showing and hiding the items. For details, refer to “Picture Name Setting dialog box” on
page 2-33.
2-24 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
3 Click OK.
The drawing object is saved in Picture Manager.
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported with the option of enabling the transparency, the
transparency range is displayed in magenta (R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-25
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
● Saving pictures as image files
To use a picture saved in Picture Manager on another computer, save the picture as an image file.
1 Select a picture to export, and then click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
When Picture Manager is called from the Properties dialog box of an object arranged on the screen, Export
is not enabled.
• To select multiple pictures, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• To save as an image file in NMF (NV Metafile) format, select and right-click the drawing object drawn on
the editing screen, then click Export as NV Metafile.
2 Specify the save location in Save in, and then click Save.
The picture name is entered as File name.
2-26 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
● Managing Pictures
This section describes items and buttons in Picture Manager, Symbol Factory, and the Picture Name Setting dialog
box.
Picture Manager
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Pictures used in pictures of part diagrams and drawings are managed using Picture Manager.
(Category)
(Category list)
(Picture list)
(Image)
(Picture name)
■ (Create New Category)
Creates a new category in the category list.
The default category name is "NewBookn" (n: Number).
■ (Delete Category)
Deletes a category from the category list.
■ (Rename Category)
Changes the name of the category selected in the category list. The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the category name.
\/:,;*?"<>|
■ (Delete)
Deletes the picture selected in the picture list. Pictures that are used in project or parts cannot be deleted.
■ (Reduce)
Deletes all the pictures not used in the project from the pictures saved in the picture list.
■ (View)
Change how items appear in the picture list. Click to select Thumbnails or Details.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-27
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
■ (Category List)
Selects a category to save to when saving pictures.
When selecting a picture, select the category in which the arranged picture is saved.
The only default category is "Pic_Lib." To add a category, click (Create New Category).
(Category): The name of the category is displayed.
■ (Picture list)
The saved pictures are displayed as a list of images.
(Image): An image of the picture is displayed. If a picture contains transparency or a picture is imported
with the option of enabling the transparency, the transparency range is displayed in magenta
(R: 255, G: 4, B: 255).
(Picture Name): The name of the picture is displayed.
■ Import
Save pictures in Picture Manager. Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving image
files” on page 2-20.
Supported file formats are as follows. When selecting images that are not in a bitmap file format, the image is
converted to a bitmap before saving.
• BMP (bitmap file)
• WMF (Windows Metafile)
• DXF and JPEG
• ICO (icon files)
• NMF (NV Metafile)
When saving image files in DXF format, take note of the following points.
• Compatible with AutoCAD Ver. 2.2 to 2002. Compatibility with AutoCAD LT97 is confirmed by IDEC.
• If TrueType fonts are used, there is no garbling of text when Japanese is included in files. SHX format is
not supported.
• Errors may occur in conversion of coordinates, resulting in displacement of position. In addition, if an
image is greatly reduced when resizing at the time of saving, lines in the picture may disappear.
• If either the height or width is set to 0 when saving, the aspect ratio is preserved with reference to the
other dimension.
To save images in NMF format without conversion to bitmap file format, select and right-click the picture on
the editing screen, and then click Copy to Picture Manager from the popup menu. For details, refer to
“Saving drawing objects drawn on the editing screen” on page 2-24.
■ Export
Saves a picture selected in the picture list in BMP (bitmap) or NMF (NV Metafile) format, according to file type. Click
this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving pictures as image files” on page 2-26.
Saved graphics can be saved using Import.
■ Symbol Factory
Display the Symbol Factory images. You can select an image provided by Symbol Factory on your project data. For
details, refer to “Symbol Factory” on page 2-30.
■ Advanced
Displays detailed information about pictures selected in the picture list.
(Picture Name): Displays the picture name.
(File Type): Displays the file type.
Image Size (W×H): Displays the size of the picture (W×H) in pixels
File Size: Displays the size of the file (KB).
2-28 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
■ Select
Closes Picture Manager and sets the picture selected in the picture list.
■ Close
Closes Picture Manager.
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Open Dialog Box Options
Specify advanced settings when saving image files.
(Option items)
(Color before conversion) (Color after conversion)
■ Options <<
Toggles between showing and hiding the option items.
■ Apply Dithering
Selects this check box to perform dithering (error diffusion method) on images.
This function enables some images with tonal gradations and photo-like pictures to be rendered more beautifully
when they are saved.
■ Color Exchange
Selects this check box to convert the color of the picture.
From: Specifies color before conversion. Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box. Specify the color,
and then click OK.
to: Selects the color after conversion (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades). Click this button to display the
Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette. Transparent can also be selected.
If a color conversion to transparent is done when the monitor used for WindO/I-NV3 is a 16-bit color or
256-color display, even colors other than the color specified in (Color before conversion) may appear
transparent. However, on the Touch they will appear normally.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-29
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Symbol Factory
Symbol Factory is an English-version library tool that offers 5,000 images.
For details, see online help for Symbol Factory.
■ Preview
Image size (W×H in pixels) and preview of the picture are displayed.
■ Categories
The images supplied by Symbol Factory are divided into categories. Selects categories of pictures saved in Picture
Manager.
■ Symbols
The pictures in the selected category are displayed in a list. Selects a picture saved in Picture Manager.
■ Copy
Copy a picture selected from the Symbols to Picture Manager. Click this button to display the Picture Name Setting
dialog box.
■ Options
Modify the fill and background color and flip or rotate shapes. Click this button to display the Symbol Options dialog
box.
2-30 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Symbol Options Dialog Box
Modify the fill color and background color, and to flip or rotate shapes. The settings made here are applied to all the
graphic elements in Symbol Factory.
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
■ Fill Color
Fill Color Mode: Select from the following picture color conversion methods.
Original: The color of the image is not changed.
Shaded: The image filled with different shades of the color selected in Fill Color (for a 3D
effect).
Solid: The image is filled uniformly in the color selected in Fill Color.
Hollow: All color is deleted.
Fill Color: Selects the color used for Shaded or Solid modes. Click this button to display the Color Settings
dialog box. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be set when Shaded Or Solid are selected as the Fill Color Mode.
Original Shaded Solid Hollow
■ Orientation
Flip: Select from the following flipping methods.
None: The image is not flipped.
Horizontal: The image is flipped horizontally.
Vertical The image is flipped vertically.
Both The image is flipped both horizontally and vertically.
None Horizontal Vertical Both
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-31
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Rotation: Select from the following rotation methods.
0: The image is not rotated.
90: The image is rotated 90° counterclockwise.
180: The image is rotated 180° counterclockwise.
270: The image is rotated 270° counterclockwise.
None 90 180 270
■ Background Color
Selects the background color of the image when saving an image in Picture Manager or exporting an image using
Export Symbol from the File menu. Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box. Select a color from the
Color Palette.
When exporting an image in VML or SVG format by clicking Export Symbol from the File menu, this
setting is not applied.
■ OK
Saves the setting to close the Symbol Options dialog box.
■ Cancel
Closes the Symbol Options dialog box without saving the setting.
■ Defaults
Set options are returned to their default values.
2-32 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 WindO/I-NV3 Specifications
Picture Name Setting dialog box
Specifies a name for images saved in Picture Manager.
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
(Option items)
(Color before conversion) (Color after conversion)
■ Image
An image of the picture is displayed.
■ Picture name
Enter a name for the picture. The maximum number is 256 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the picture name.
\/:,;*?"<>|
■ Options <<
Toggles between showing and hiding the option items.
■ OK
Saves the image in Picture Manager.
■ Cancel
Stops saving the image.
■ Apply Dithering
Select this check box to perform dithering (error diffusion method) on images.
This function enables some images with tonal gradations and photo-like pictures to be rendered more beautifully
when they are saved.
■ Color Exchange
Select this check box to convert the color of the picture.
From: Specifies color before conversion. Click this button to display the Color Settings dialog box. Specify the color,
and then click OK.
to: Selects the color after conversion (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades). Click this button to display the
Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette. Transparent can also be selected.
• To make the background color of the picture saved from Symbol Factory transparent, set (Color Before
Conversion) and Background Color in the Symbol Options dialog box to R: 254, G: 254, B: 254.
• When the monitor used for WindO/I-NV3 is a 16-bit color or 256-color display, there is a risk that one or
more of the following phenemona occurs.
- When a color conversion to transparent is done, even colors other than the color specified in (Color
Before Conversion) may appear transparent. However, on the Touch they will appear normally.
- If converting a background color in Symbol Factory, an image that is copied to the clipboard may have
its colors reduced to the number of colors displayed by the computer monitor. For this reason, the color
setting will not match and the color conversion will not be performed.
Save the image again after changing the background color to another color in Symbol Factory.
For example, if the default color (R: 254, G: 254, B: 254) in (Color before conversion) is used, and
Background Color in Symbol Options dialog box is set to R: 254, G: 254, B: 254, the number of
monitor colors will match, even if it's 256, so the color conversion will be performed.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-33
2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3
2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3
2.1 Starting WindO/I-NV3
■ Windows 7, Windows Vista
Click Start, click Programs, click Automation Organizer, click WindOI-NV3, and then click WindOI-NV3.
■ Windows XP
Click Start, click All Programs, click Automation Organizer, click WindOI-NV3, and then click WindOI-NV3.
Example: Windows 7
WindO/I-NV3 starts.
If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed, click Yes (Windows 7) or Allow (Windows Vista).
Windows 7 Windows Vista
You can also start WindO/I-NV3 by double-clicking on the desktop.
2-34 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3
● Automation Organizer Updater dialog box
The Automation Organizer Updater dialog box is a feature that keeps WindO/I-NV3 up to date.
If a new version of Automation Organizer is released, the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box is displayed when
WindO/I-NV3 starts. 2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
In order to display the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box, your computer must be connected to the
Internet.
■ Available Updates
Date Shows the date the software was released.
Information Shows the software's title and version.
Click on this link to connect to IDEC's download site.
The software can be updated by downloading and running the latest version.
■ Description
This area shows the details of the latest changes in the software.
■ Preference
The Update Preference dialog box is displayed when this button is clicked.
To update information when WindO/I-NV3 starts, check this check box.
The Automation Organizer Updater dialog box will be displayed when there is an update.
■ Close
Closes the Automation Organizer Updater dialog box and start WindO/I-NV3.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-35
2 Starting and Exiting WindO/I-NV3
● Project Recovery dialog box
The Project Recovery dialog box is a feature to restore edited project data if your computer crashes while you were
editing. With this feature, you can return crashed the project to its last-saved state and restore project data that was
being edited. The Project Recovery dialog box is displayed if there is crashed project data when WindO/I-NV3 starts.
■ (Recovery data list)
This list shows recoverable data for a crashed project.
Project Name: Shows the project name.
Last Save Time: Shows the date and time when the data was last saved.
■ Open
Select the recovery data from the list, and then click this button to open the project data. The recovery data is deleted
when the project data is saved.
■ Delete
Deletes the recovery data.
■ Cancel
Closes the Project Recovery dialog box.
Recovery data is not deleted. The Project Recovery dialog box will be displayed again the next time WindO/I-NV3
starts.
If WindO/I-NV3 crashes in a state where you edit a screen and perform Save Screens after saving the
project data, the screen is not saved in the project data. Select the recovery data with the Project Recovery
dialog box and recover the project data.
2.2 Exiting WindO/I-NV3
Click and then click Exit WindO/I-NV3.
WindO/I-NV3 ends.
2-36 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
3 Configuration & Functions
This section describes the names and functions that make up WindO/I-NV3.
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Quick access toolbar Title bar
Application menu
Ribbon
Workspace
Editing window
Right click menu
Status bar
■ Title bar
The title bar shows the name of the project being edited and the name of this software, “WindO/I-NV3”.
■ Application menu
The application menu displays commands for handling project data such as commands for creating new project data,
opening project data, and saving project data. For details, refer to “3.1 Application Menu Command List” on page 2-38.
■ Quick access toolbar
The quick access toolbar is an area where you can locate commands that you use frequently. You can customize this
toolbar by adding or deleting buttons. For details, refer to “3.2 Quick Access Toolbar” on page 2-39.
■ Ribbon
The ribbon shows commands for creating project data and transferring data to the Touch. Common commands are
separated into their own tabs, so you can quickly execute. For details, refer to “3.3 Ribbon Command List” on page 2-42.
■ Workspace
The workspace is the area where the Project window, the Object List window, the Screen List window, the Part
List window, and the Toolbox window are located. You can change the position and method for displaying windows
in the workspace. For details, refer to “3.4 Windows Displayed in the Workspace” on page 2-50.
■ Editing window
The editing window is the area for editing Base Screens, Popup Screens, and Library Screens.
■ Right click menu
The right click menu is a popup menu that is displayed when right clicking the mouse on drawing objects and parts in
a list. It displays context sensitive commands.
■ Status bar
The status bar shows information such as the type number, communication driver, project data size, and cursor
position. You can change the items displayed on the status bar. For details, refer to “3.5 Status Bar” on page 2-54.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-37
3 Configuration & Functions
3.1 Application Menu Command List
Commands that can be executed from the application button are listed below.
Command Description
Creates project data by configuring settings displayed in dialog boxes step by
Interactive Quick Start
New step.
From Templates Creates project data using templates provided with WindO/I-NV3.
WindO/I-NV3 Project Opens project data that has already been created.
Open Opens project data uploaded from a Touch with Downloader and project data
Other Formats
saved in the Downloader format.
Save Saves the project data being edited.
WindO/I-NV3 Project Saves the project data being edited with a new name.
Save As Converts the project data being edited to data that can be used with
Other Formats
Downloader and saves it.
Print Prints the contents of the project data being edited.
Close Closes the project data being edited.
Recent Projects Shows the list of recently used project data, up to a maximum of ten items.
WindO/I-NV3 Options Customizes WindO/I-NV3 and configures the work environment.
Exit WindO/I-NV3 Exits WindO/I-NV3.
2-38 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
3.2 Quick Access Toolbar
● Quick access toolbar buttons and menus
Click on a quick access toolbar button or click on ▼ to the right of a button and then click on the displayed command
2
to execute that command.
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Quick access toolbar
● Customizing the quick access toolbar
If you click the (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) button, the Customize Quick Access Toolbar menu is displayed.
You can change the quick access toolbar to any desired settings.
■ Changing the buttons displayed on the quick access toolbar
Select only the buttons you want to display on the quick access toolbar.
■ More Commands
You can add or delete quick access toolbar commands.
1 Click on the quick access toolbar and then click More Commands.
The Customize dialog box is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-39
3 Configuration & Functions
2 Add or delete commands.
To add a command
1 Select the command to add in Choose commands from.
2 Click on the command to add from the list and then click Add>>.
The command is added.
To delete a command
Click the command to delete and then click Remove.
The command is deleted.
If you right click a command on the quick access toolbar and click Remove from Quick Access Toolbar,
that quick access toolbar command can be deleted.
• To change the order of the commands, click a command and then click ▲ or ▼ .
• To return to the quick access toolbar to its default settings, click Reset.
■ Show Below the Ribbon
You can change the position of the quick access toolbar to be located below the ribbon.
Click on the quick access toolbar and then click Show Below the Ribbon.
2-40 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
The quick access toolbar moves below the ribbon.
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
You can also change the quick access toolbar display position to be below the ribbon with the following
methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Show Quick Access Toolbar Below
the Ribbon.
• Select the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box on the Customize dialog box.
To return the quick access toolbar to its original position, click , and then click Show Above the Ribbon.
You can also return the quick access toolbar to its original position with the following methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Show Quick Access Toolbar Above
the Ribbon.
• Select the Show Quick Access Toolbar below the Ribbon check box on the Customize dialog box.
■ Minimize the Ribbon
You can change the format of the ribbon to be displayed only as tabs.
Click on the quick access toolbar and then check Minimize the Ribbon.
The ribbon is displayed as only tabs.
Click on a tab to display its commands.
To return the ribbon to its original state, click , and then click on the Minimize the Ribbon to remove the check
mark.
You can also change the ribbon to be displayed as only tabs with the following methods.
• Right click the quick access toolbar or the ribbon and then click Minimize the Ribbon.
• Double click a tab.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-41
3 Configuration & Functions
3.3 Ribbon Command List
● Home
Home is where basic operations are performed such as creating a new screen, editing, and downloading project data.
■ Clipboard
Command Description
Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard.
Cut Cuts the selected object from the editing window and copies it to the clipboard.
Copy Copies the selected object to the clipboard.
Duplicate Duplicates the selected object.
■ Screens
Command Description
Base Screen Adds a new Base Screen.
New
Popup Screen Adds a new Popup Screen.
Base Screen Opens a Base Screen that has already been created.
Open
Popup Screen Opens a Popup Screen that has already been created.
Open Previous Screen Opens a screen number before the currently selected screen.
Open Next Screen Opens a screen number after the currently selected screen.
Delete Deletes the selected screen.
Reuse Copies another project’s screens.
■ Drawings
Command Description
Line Draws a line.
Polyline Draws a polyline.
Polygon Draws a polygon.
Rectangle Draws a rectangle.
Circle/Ellipse Draws a circle or ellipse.
Shapes
Arc Draws an arc.
Pie Draws a pie.
Draws equilateral polygons (equilateral triangle, equilateral diamond, equilateral
Equilateral Polygons
pentagon, equilateral hexagon, equilateral octagon).
Fills the region with the same color as the fill start point with the specified color
Fill
and pattern.
Picture Inserts a picture.
Text Inserts text.
2-42 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
■ Parts
Command Description
Bit Button Inserts a Bit Button. 2
Word Button Inserts a Word Button.
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Goto Screen Button Inserts a Goto Screen Button.
Key Button Inserts a Key Button.
Buttons
Multi-Button Inserts a Multi-Button.
Keypad Inserts a Keypad.
Selector Switch Inserts a Selector Switch.
Potentiometer Inserts a Potentiometer.
Pilot Lamp Inserts a Pilot Lamp.
Lamps
Multi-State Lamp Inserts a Multi-State Lamp.
Numerical Input Inserts a Numerical Input.
Character Input Inserts a Character Input.
Picture Display Inserts a Picture Display.
Message Display Inserts a Message Display.
Data Displays Message Switching Display Inserts a Message Switching Display.
Alarm List Display Inserts an Alarm List Display.
Alarm Log Display Inserts an Alarm Log Display.
Numerical Display Inserts a Numerical Display.
Calendar Inserts a Calendar.
Bar Chart Inserts a Bar Chart.
Line Chart Inserts a Line Chart.
Charts
Pie Chart Inserts a Pie Chart.
Meter Inserts a Meter.
Bit Write Command Inserts a Bit Write Command.
Word Write Command Inserts a Word Write Command.
Goto Screen Command Inserts a Goto Screen Command.
Commands
Script Command Inserts a Script Command.
Multi-Command Inserts a Multi-Command.
Timer Inserts a Timer.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-43
3 Configuration & Functions
■ Editing
Command Description
Bring to Front Moves the selected object to the front.
Send to Back Moves the selected object to the back.
Group Groups multiple objects.
Ungroup Cancels the group.
Align Left Aligns selected objects to the left.
Align Center Aligns selected objects to the center.
Align Right Aligns selected objects to the right.
Align Top Aligns selected objects to the top.
Arrange Align Align Middle Aligns selected objects to the middle.
Align Bottom Aligns selected objects to the bottom.
Make Horizontal
Aligns selected objects to be equally spaced horizontally.
Spacing Equal
Make Vertical Spacing
Aligns selected objects to be equally spaced vertically.
Equal
Rotate Right 90° Rotates selected drawing objects 90° to the right.
Rotate Left 90° Rotates selected drawing objects 90° to the left.
Rotate
Flip Vertical Flips selected drawing objects vertically.
Flip Horizontal Flips selected drawing objects horizontally.
Automatically replaces a specified device address with a separate device
Replace
address.
Select Selects objects in the editing window.
Automatically changes the text size to the object’s size and display
AutoResize
region.
Enables or disables the increment address function.
Increment Address A specific value is added to the value of the object’s device address when
pasting and duplicating parts.
■ Project
Command Description
Project Data Downloads project data to the Touch.
Stops the Touch and then downloads Recipe files (CSV file) to the
Files to External Memory external memory inserted in the Touch. The Touch resumes running
Download
when files have finished downloading.
Files to External Memory Downloads Recipe files (CSV file) to the external memory inserted in the
while running Touch without stopping it.
Project Data Uploads project data from the Touch.
Upload Stored Data in External Uploads data from the External Memory Folder for the currently running
Memory project.
Compares the screen data and scripts in an existing project with the
Compare Projects project data currently being edited and displays the results of that
Compare comparison.
Re-verify Updates the comparison results to the most latest state.
Displays version information for the Touch runtime system and project
Target Info.
information.
Configures the communication target and communication conditions
Comm.Setup between the target and the Touch or between the computer and the
Touch.
2-44 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
● Configuration
Configuration is where you configure the system settings for the Touch that will use the project data being edited.
■ System Setup 2
Command Description
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Project Configures Touch operations and functions.
Alarm Log Configures the alarm log.
Data Log Configures the data log.
Operation Log Configures the operation log.
Data Storage Area Changes the allocation of the data storage area.
Preventive Maintenance Configures the preventative maintenance function.
Recipe Configures recipes.
Text Group Configures text groups.
Global Script Configures one global script.
■ Protect
Command Description
User Accounts Configures security function, user accounts, and passwords.
● Online
Online is where you download created project data and files to the Touch, where you upload data from the Touch,
and where you perform monitoring.
■ Transfer
Command Description
Project Data Downloads project data to the Touch.
Stops the Touch and then downloads Recipe files (CSV file) to the
Files to External Memory external memory inserted in the Touch. The Touch resumes running
Download
when files have finished downloading.
Files to External Memory while Downloads Recipe files (CSV file) to the external memory inserted in
running the Touch without stopping it.
Project Data Uploads project data from the Touch.
Upload Uploads data from the External Memory Folder for the currently
Stored Data in External Memory
running project.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-45
3 Configuration & Functions
■ Touch
Command Description
Displays version information for the Touch runtime system and project
Target Info.
information.
All Clears all of the data stored in the internal memory on the Touch.
Alarm Log Data Clears all of the alarm log data stored in the internal memory on the Touch.
Data Log Data Clears all of the data log data stored in the internal memory on the Touch.
Operation Log Data Clears all of the operation log data stored in the internal memory on the Touch.
Clear
HMI Keep Register
(LKR) and HMI Keep Clears the HMI Keep Register and the HMI Keep Relay.
Relay (LK)
Stored Data in External
Clears data saved to the external memory inserted in the Touch.
Memory
Format Formats the external memory inserted in the Touch.
■ Monitors
Command Description
Connects the Touch to the external device and starts monitoring. This
Start/Stop Monitor
command also stops monitoring.
Screens Shows or hides the Screen Monitor window.
Displays a value of device in a popup and emphasizes the object that is
Object List
satisfying the trigger condition in the object list or script editor.
Custom Shows or hides the Custom Monitor window.
Batch Shows or hides the Batch Monitor window.
Shows or hides the External Device Monitor window during 1:N
External Devices
communication.
Returns to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen
Back
was changed.
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the
Forward
screen was changed with the Back command.
First Screen Switches to the Base Screen with the smallest screen number in the project data.
Switches to the Base Screen with a screen number one smaller than the Base
Previous Screen Screen currently displayed. If the screen numbers are not consecutive
numbers, this command switches to the closest number.
Screen Number Switches to the Base Screen with a specified number.
Go to Screen
Switches to the Base Screen with a screen number one larger than the Base
Next Screen Screen currently displayed. If the screen numbers are not consecutive
numbers, this command switches to the closest number.
Switches to the Base Screen with the largest screen number in the project
Last Screen
data.
Open Current Screens Opens a monitored screen in the editing window.
■ Communication
Command Description
Configures the communication target and communication conditions between
Setup
the target and the Touch or between the computer and the Touch.
2-46 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
● View
View is where you can switch the workspace display and display the Tag Editor, Screen Diagram, and various
managers.
You can configure the items displayed in the editing window. 2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
■ Workspace
Command Description
Toolbox Shows the Toolbox window. This window displays Parts and Drawings.
Shows the Project window. This window displays the saved screens and project
Project Window
related information.
Shows the Screen List window. The window displays the screens saved in the
Screen List
project as thumbnails.
Shows the Object List window. This window displays all of the graphics and parts
Object List
placed in an editing screen.
Part List Shows the Part List window. This window displays the list of part images.
Shows the Tag Editor. This window displays the list of registered device address, tag
Tag Editor
name, and comments.
Shows the Screen Diagram. This window displays the Overlapping Screen
information, and the screen numbers and titles of the screens linked by the Goto
Screen Diagram
Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, the Numerical Input, the Character
Input, the Alarm List Display and the Alarm Log Display.
Shows the Comparison Result window. This window displays the results of that
Comparison Result
comparison of projects.
Picture Manager Shows Picture Manager. Manages the registered images for project use.
Shows Text Manager. Manages registered text which can be used for Text, Part
Text Manager objects, title of Popup Screen, messages with Alarm List Display and Alarm Log
Display.
Script Manager Shows Script Manager. Manages registered scripts for project use.
Protocol Manager Shows Protocol Manager. Manages protocols created.
Start up WindLDR. This is an editor for performing various control function settings
Control Function
and creating ladder programs.
■ Show/Hide
Command Description
Part Name Shows or hides drawing object names and part names.
Device Address Shows or hides device addresses and tag names.
Trigger Condition Shows or hides trigger conditions.
Commands Shows or hides the dotted frame for commands.
Shows or hides a Popup Screen’s number, display frame, and the part name of the
Popup Screen
part calling that Popup Screen.
Overlay Screens Shows or hides the configured overlay screens.
Display Shows or hides the display security group set for parts.
Security Group
Input Shows or hides the input security group set for parts.
Gridlines Shows or hides the gridlines in the editing window.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-47
3 Configuration & Functions
■ Screens
Command Description
Focus Order Changes the order to move the focus with Numerical Input and Character Input.
Reset Returns the displayed images to the default images.
ON/OFF State Switches between the ON image and the OFF image for buttons and lamps.
Previous State Changes the image for the displayed part to the previous state.
Changes the image for the displayed part to the image for the part with the
State State Number
specified number.
Next State Changes the image for the displayed part to the next state.
Text Group Changes the displayed text to the text of the specified text group.
Active User Displays only the parts that correspond to the specified user.
■ Zoom
Command Description
Zoom Changes the magnification of the editing window.
■ Window
Command Description
Close All Closes all editing windows.
● Format
Format is where you change the style of drawing objects, arrange objects, and change their size.
■ Shape Style
Command Description
1 dot Sets the line width to one dot.
2 dots Sets the line width to two dots.
3 dots Sets the line width to three dots.
5 dots Sets the line width to five dots.
Solid Sets the line to solid.
Dot Sets the line to dotted.
Dash Sets the line to dashes.
Long Dash Sets the line to long dashes.
Long Dash Dot Sets the line to long dash dot.
Long Dash Dot Dot Sets the line to long dash dot dot.
Pattern Changes the pattern.
Foreground Color Changes the pattern’s foreground color.
Background Color Changes the pattern’s background color.
2-48 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
■ Text Style
Command Description
Regular Sets the text style to regular. 2
Bold Sets the text style to bold.
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Shadow Gives the text a shadow.
Text Color Changes the text color.
Text Background Color Displays the text as if it were highlighted with a highlighter.
Shadow Color Changes the color of the shadow added to text given a shadow.
■ Arrange
Command Description
X-coordinate Changes the X-coordinate of the selected object.
Y-coordinate Changes the Y-coordinate of the selected object.
Bring to Front Moves selected object to the front.
Send to Back Moves selected object to the back.
Group Groups selected objects so they can be handled as a single object.
Ungroup Restores a grouped object to its individual objects.
Rotate Right 90° Rotates selected objects right 90°.
Rotate Left 90° Rotates selected objects left 90°.
Flip Vertical Vertically flips selected objects.
Flip Horizontal Horizontally flips selected objects.
Align Left Aligns selected objects to the left.
Align Center Aligns selected objects to the center.
Align Right Aligns selected objects to the right.
Align Top Aligns selected objects to the top.
Align Middle Aligns selected objects to the middle.
Align Bottom Aligns selected objects to the bottom.
Make Horizontal Spacing
Arranges selected objects to be equally spaced horizontally.
Equal
Make Vertical Spacing
Arranges selected objects to be equally spaced vertically.
Equal
■ Size
Command Description
Width Changes the width of the selected object.
Height Changes the height of the selected object.
Make Same Width Makes the selected objects a uniform width.
Make Same Height Makes the selected objects a uniform height.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-49
3 Configuration & Functions
3.4 Windows Displayed in the Workspace
● Changing the position of windows
Disabling docking
You can change the display position of the window by dragging and dropping the title bar of the window or its tab to
disable docking. Windows that are not docked are called floating windows.
• If you drag the title bar of the workspace window, you can move all the docked windows together.
Title bar
Drag and drop
• If you drag the tab of a workspace window, you can move just the selected window.
Drag and drop
Tab
Docking windows
You can dock a floating window to WindO/I-NV3’s left, right, top, or bottom frame or a separate window.
1 Drag the window’s title bar or tab.
The (Docking) icon is displayed.
Docking icon
2-50 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
When the mouse cursor gets close to a (Docking) icon while dragging the title bar or tab, the
(Docking) icon turns blue and the location to dock the window is displayed.
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Window docking location
2 Drop the title bar or tab on the (Docking) icon to dock that window to WindO/I-NV3’s left, right, top, or bottom
frame or a separate window.
• If the workspace window is dropped on the (Docking) icon, it is docked to WindO/I-NV3’s left, right, top, or
bottom frame.
• If a floating window is dropped on the (Docking) icon, it is docked to WindO/I-NV3’s left, right, top, or bottom
frame or a docked window.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-51
3 Configuration & Functions
• If you put the mouse cursor on another window while dragging a floating windows title bar, the (Docking) icon
is displayed. Drop the title bar on the (Docking) icon to dock the floating window to that window. Change the
displayed window with the tabs.
● Changing the display method of windows
Auto Hide
If the workspace window is docked, you can change the window to automatically hide and show only its tabs.
Click the (Auto Hide) icon to change the window to show only its tabs.
Auto Hide icon Tabs
The window is displayed when you bring the mouse cursor close to the tabs.
Mouse cursor
• Click (Auto Hide) to secure the window in place.
• Click (Close) to close the window.
2-52 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
The editing windows are displayed side by side.
When multiple editing windows are open, you can display those windows side by side.
2
Drag the tab of the editing window to display side by side and drop it where the icon is displayed.
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
The editing windows are displayed side by side.
Tab
Drag and drop
• You can change the active editing windows by clicking on or (Active Files) and selecting the
editing window.
• Click (Close) to close the active editing window.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-53
3 Configuration & Functions
3.5 Status Bar
Mode Data Size Text Group
Type Number Communication Driver Position Active User
Preview Zoom Slider
Snap to Grid
Zoom In button
Grid Settings
Zoom Zoom Out button
● Status bar items
■ Mode
This section of the status bar shows WindO/I-NV3’s current mode.
■ Type Number
This section of the status bar shows the Touch type set in the project data being edited.
■ Communication Driver
This section of the status bar shows the communication driver set in the project data being edited.
■ Data Size
This section of the status bar shows the download data file size for the project data being edited.
When you save the project, the display is updated with the latest information.
■ Position
This section of the status bar shows the X- and Y-coordinates of the mouse cursor in the editing window.
■ Text Group
This section of the status bar shows the current text group. The text displayed in the editing window changes
according to the displayed text group.
To change the text group, click ▼ and select the text group.
■ Active User
This section of the status bar shows the active user. You can hide or show objects in the editing window according to
the security group of the displayed user.
To change the active user, click ▼ and select the user.
■ Snap to Grid
Click to align objects to the grid.
2-54 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Configuration & Functions
■ Grid Settings
You can change the style and spacing of the grid displayed in the editing window.
Click to display the Grid Settings dialog box. Configure the items, and then click OK.
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Interval: Aligns the gridlines to the specified spacing.
Enter the spacing for the gridlines in Horizontal and Vertical.
Style: Select the grid style with Dot or Line.
Color: Select the grid color.
Click this button to open the color palette. Select the color with the color palette.
■ Preview
You can preview an edited screen.
Click to open the preview window.
(ON/OFF): Click the button to switch between the OFF image and ON image for buttons and lamps.
Copy: You can save the image displayed in the preview window as a bitmap image file by clicking Copy.
The preview display and the actual screen displayed on the Touch may differ.
For example, the image for overlay screens in the preview display is always shown in front. However, when
drawings and parts overlap on the actual screen, parts are always shown in front irregardless of the order
of overlay screens.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-55
3 Configuration & Functions
■ Zoom
Zoom shows the magnification of the editing window.
Click Zoom on the status bar to display the Zoom dialog box.
Specify: You can specify the zoom magnification (50% to 400%).
You can also specify the zoom magnification by dragging the zoom slider or clicking and .
● Customizing the status bar
You can change the commands displayed on the status bar.
Right click the status bar and check only the commands you want to display on the status bar.
2-56 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3
4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3
4.1 Configuring the Work Environment 2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
You can configure WindO/I-NV3 settings such as mode and options when editing screens, the path when selecting files,
and the path for automatic backups. The settings configured here are saved even when you exit WindO/I-NV3.
The procedure for configuring the work environment is shown below.
1 Click and then click WindO/I-NV3 Options.
The WindO/I-NV3 Options dialog box is displayed.
2 Change the settings on each tab as desired.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-57
4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3
● Edit tab
■ Mode Settings
When placing a part on the screen, select whether or not to display the part’s Properties dialog box.
Placement First: The part’s Properties dialog box is not displayed. This mode is for placing the parts on the screen
and finishing the screen’s design first.
Settings First: Displays the part’s Properties dialog box. This mode is for creating the screen while configuring the
Properties for the parts.
■ Properties Setting
Select whether or not to display the Properties dialog box for parts in the Advanced mode.
Basic: Displays the Properties dialog box in Basic mode to use only basic functions.
Advanced: Displays the Properties dialog box in Advanced mode so that all functions can be used.
You can also change the mode by clicking Advanced or Basic in the Properties dialog box for parts.
■ Enable Increment Address
When copying or duplicating parts, select this check box to add a specified value (-999 to 999) to the device address
set for the original part before pasting it to the screen.
■ Enable Increment Station No.
When copying or duplicating parts, select this check box to add a specified value (-999 to 999) to the device station
number set for the original part before pasting it to the screen.
This option can only be configured if the communication driver Connection is 1:N Communication.
■ Enable Text Auto Resizing
Select this box to automatically change the text size according to a change in part size.
■ Minimize the properties dialog box by clicking Preview button
Select this box to minimize an object's Properties dialog box when you click Preview on its properties dialog box.
■ Auto-change IME
Select this box to enter characters other than alphanumeric characters using the input method editor (IME) in text
boxes for entering device addresses.
You cannot enter full-width characters in text boxes that only accept alphanumeric input, even if the IME is
enabled.
Select this box to use full-width characters in tag names in the device address settings.
■ Bit Number Symbol
Select the separator for addresses and bits. When manually entering device address, you can enter either separator,
but they will be displayed using the symbol selected here.
Dot (WindLDR Format): Separates the address and bit with a dot.
Example: LDR100.00
Dash (WindO/I-NV3 Format): Separates the address and bit with a dash.
Example: LDR100-0
■ Workspace Setup
Displays the Workspace Setup dialog box. You can configure items displayed in the workspace window. For details,
refer to “4.2 Customizing the Workspace” on page 2-60.
2-58 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3
● General tab
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
■ Default Path
Specifies the path when saving project data and opening files.
Click to display the Select Path dialog box. Select the folder, and then click OK.
■ Save option
Automatic Save Every: Select this check box to automatically backup the project data at fixed time intervals (1 to
120 minutes).
Backup Save in: Specifies the location to save the backup data.
Click to display the Select Path dialog box. Select a folder, and then click OK.
Backup data is deleted when the project data is closed.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-59
4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3
■ Font Assignment
This option specifies the text font in the Properties dialog box for objects to display in text boxes and messages to
display on the screen.
Select a Font in Settings, and then click Change Font to display the Font Settings dialog box. Select the font to
use, and then click OK.
Font Assignment configures the fonts displayed in WindO/I-NV3. Fonts displayed on the Touch are not
changed. To display the same font on the Touch as the font displayed in WindO/I-NV3, select Windows Font
in the Properties dialog box for objects or Font setting in Text Manager.
For details, refer to “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
:
4.2 Customizing the Workspace
You can change the windows that are displayed in the workspace with the Workspace Setup dialog box.
● Screen List tab
This tab changes the Screen List window display.
■ Zoom
Select the zoom magnification for the thumbnails displayed in the Screen List window from the following.
100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
● Object List tab
This tab changes the items displayed in the Object List window.
■ List Items
Shows the list of items that can be displayed in the Object List window.
■ Add
Adds an item to Display Items.
Select an item in List Items, and then click this button to add it to Display Items.
■ Delete
Deletes an item from Display Items.
Select an item in Display Items, and then click this button.
■ Display Items
Shows the list of items that are displayed in the Object List window.
2-60 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Customizing WindO/I-NV3
■ Up
Shifts the selected item upward in the Display Items list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected item downward in the Display Items list.
2
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
● Parts List tab
This tab changes the items displayed in the Part List window.
■ Show Image Name
Select this box to display the image name for parts in the Part List window.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-61
5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings
5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings
This section describes common settings when creating project data.
5.1 Device Address Settings
Device addresses are memory on the Touch and external devices that can store values in bit or word units.
By setting device addresses to parts and functions, you can control the screen display and operation of parts.
Device addresses are specified by combining the device type and address in the following formats.
Dot (WindLDR Format): Device type Address . Bit
Dash (WindO/I-NV3 Format): Device type Address - Bit
Address and bit separator
The device address can be directly entered or it can be set with the Device Address Settings dialog box.
● Direct entry
Enter a device address with the keyboard following the basic format.
To enter the bit (0 to 15) for a word device, enter the address, the bit separator “.” or “-”, and the bit. You can enter
the address with either separator, but it is displayed according to the Bit Number Symbol setting. Bit Number
Symbol is set on the Edit tab of the WindO/I-NV3 Options dialog box.
● Specifying a device address with the Device Address Settings dialog box
To display the Device Address Settings dialog box, click to the right of the text box for setting the device address.
Use this dialog box to set the device address.
■ Target
Select the device that includes the device address to set from Touch or External Device.
■ Station No.
Specify the station number for the external device. The range that can be specified varies based on the
communication driver selected.
This option can only be set when 1:N Communication is selected on the Connection of the Select Communication
Driver dialog box or the Change Communication Driver dialog box.
■ Device Type
Select the device type.
The list only shows device types that can be used.
■ Address
Specify the address. The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected.
■ Bit
Specify the bit (0 to 15) of the word device when a word device is selected in Device.
■ Tag Name
Shows the tag names configured for the selected device address.
2-62 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings
■ Comment
Shows the comments configured for the selected device address.
■ Tag Editor
Opens the Tag Editor.
2
With the Tag Editor, you can display the list of device addresses used in the project data being edited and configure
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
tag names and comments for device addresses.
Tag names and comments configured in the Tag Editor can be used in WindLDR and WindCFG.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-63
5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings
5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions
Specify conditional expressions with Condition on the Trigger Condition tab.
Conditional expressions are specified by combining data and operators using the following basic format.
Data Operator Data
Directly enter the conditional expression or specify it with the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
● Direct entry
Enter the conditional expression with the keyboard.
• There is no limit on data or operators. However, the maximum number is 480 characters.
Data Operator Data
to
Data Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data ... (within 480 characters)
• To enter a device address for data, always enclose it with “[” and “]”.
Example: [LDR100] == 10
• To flip bits, enter “~” before the data.
• Parentheses “(” and “)” can be used.
( Data Operator Data ) Operator ( Data Operator Data )
• Operator priority is the same as scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” on
page 20-52.
● Configuring conditional expressions with the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box
You can easily configure a basic conditional expression using the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
• Up to a maximum of five items of data can be used.
Data Operator Data
to
Data Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data
• To flip the bits in data, select the Not check box.
• Operator priority is the same as scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” on
page 20-52.
1 Click Condition to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
2 Click Value or Device and enter a value or device address.
To flip the bits in data, select the Not box.
3 Select the operator.
4 Click the next Value or Device and enter a value or device address.
To flip the bits in data, select the Not box.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the necessary number of conditions.
If you display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box after directly entering a conditional expression, that
expression will be reflected in the dialog box. However, if you entered an expression that cannot be
reflected, the portion of the expression that could not be reflected is deleted when you click OK and close
the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
2-64 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings
● Data and operations that can be configured
Data
You can specify these types and values of data for conditional expressions. 2
Item Description
WindO/I-NV3 Basic Operations
Set a constant number as data.
Value The range that can be set differs according to the selected data type.
For details, refer to “Data types” on page 2-2.
Device Set a device address for a bit device or a word device that stores the value to be handled as data.
Operators
Specify the type of arithmetic operation to execute on the data. (In the table below, a indicates the operator’s left-
hand number, b indicates the right-hand number.)
Supported
device
Operator Details
Bit Word
device device
+ Addition Adds a and b . NO YES
- Subtraction Subtracts b from a . NO YES
Arithmetic
* Multiplication Multiplies a and b . NO YES
operators
/ Division Divides a by b . NO YES
% Modulo Calculates the remainder after dividing a by b . NO YES
== Equal to Compares if a is equal to b . YES YES
!= Not equal to Compares if a is not equal to b . YES YES
Greater than
>= Compares if a is equal or greater than b . NO YES
Relational or equal to
operators*1 Less than or
<= Compares if a is equal or less than b . NO YES
equal to
> Greater than Compares if a is greater than b . NO YES
< Less than Compares if a is less than b . NO YES
& Bitwise AND Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit in a and b . YES YES
| Bitwise OR Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit in a and b . YES YES
Bitwise XOR Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of a and
^ YES YES
(exclusive OR) b .
Bitwise
operators Flips the logic of each bits of a .
~ Bitwise NOT For word device and fixed values, 0 will be 65535 and 65535 will be 0. YES YES
For bit device, 0 will be 1, and 1 will be 0.
<< Left shift Shifts each bit of a to left for b bit(s). NO YES
>> Right shift Shifts each bit of a to right for b bit(s). NO YES
Calculates the logical product (AND) of a conditional expression
&& Logical AND NO YES
Logical and a conditional expression.
operators*1 Calculates the logical sum (OR) of a conditional expression and a
|| Logical OR NO YES
conditional expression.
• You cannot select logical operators in the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box.
• You cannot mix bit devices and word devices in a conditional expression.
• As a basic rule, conditional expressions are calculated in order from the left, but when multiple arithmetic
operations are combined, they are calculated according to the operator priority.
For [D10] == [D11] + [D12] * 2 + [D13], the expression is calculated in the following order.
D10 == D11 + D12 * 2 + D13
1
2
3
4
For the operator priority, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 20-52.
*1 Returns 1 if satisfied or 0 if not satisfied.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 2-65
5 WindO/I-NV3 Common Operations and Settings
● Setting and operation examples
Settings
Trigger Condition Settings Action
Direct entry
dialog box
Data Op. Data The condition is satisfied if the values of
[M0] == [M1]
M0 == M1 M0 and M1 are equal.
The condition is satisfied if the result of
Data Op. Data Op. Data
[M0] == [M1] & [M2] the AND operation on M1 and M2 is
M0 == M1 & M2
equal to M0.
Data Op. Data The condition is satisfied if the result of
[M0] == ~[M1] M0 & M1 flipping the bits in M1 is equal to M0.
Not
Data Op. Data The condition is satisfied if the value of
1234 == [D0]
1234 == D0 D0 equals 1234.
Data Op. Data Op. Data
The condition is satisfied if the result of
100 <= D0 + D1
100 <= [D0] + [D1] + [D2] + [D3] adding the values of D0 through D3 is
Op. Data Op. Data
100 or greater.
+ D2 + D3
The condition is satisfied if the value of
Data Op. Data Op. Data the remainder after D0 is divided by 10
0 != [D0] % 10
0 != D0 % 10 does not equal 0 (the value of D10
cannot be entirely divided by 10).
Data Op. Data Op. Data The condition is satisfied if the logical
D0 == D1 == D2
[D0] == ~[D1] & ~[D2] & [D3] & AND operation on the flipped bits of D1,
Not Not
[D4] the flipped bits of D2, the value of D3,
Op. Data Op. Data
and the value of D4 is equal to D0.
& D3 & D4
Data Op. Data Op. Data The condition is satisfied if the result of
D10 + D11 == D12 adding the values of D12 and D13 is
[D10] + [D11] == [D12] + [D13]
Op. Data equal to the result of adding the values
+ D13 D10 and D11.
Data Op. Data Op. Data The condition is satisfied if the result of
[D10] == [D11] + [D12] * 2 + D10 == D11 + D12 adding the values of D11, D12 multiplied
[D13] Op. Data Op. Data by two, and D13 is equal to the value of
* 2 + D13 D10.
(This expression cannot be
configured in the Trigger The condition is satisfied if the result of
100 <= [D0] + [D1] + [D2] + [D3]
Condition Settings dialog box adding the values of D0 through D7 is
+ [D4] + [D5] + [D6]+ [D7]
because it has over 6 items of 100 or greater.
data.)
(This expression cannot be
The condition is satisfied if the logical OR
configured on the Trigger
operation on the result of the logical AND
Condition Settings dialog box
1 == ([M0] && [M1]) || ([M2] && [M3]) operation on M0 and M1 and the result of
because it uses logical operators
the logical AND operation on M2 and M3
and it contains parentheses
is equal to 1.
“(” and “)”.)
(This expression cannot be
configured on the Trigger The condition is satisfied if the result of
Condition Settings dialog box multiplying the value of LDR12 by the
[LDR10] + [LDR11] == [LDR12] *
because it mixes bitwise result of adding the values of LDR13 and
([LDR13] + [LDR14])
operators and logical operators LDR14 is equal to the result of adding
or it contains parentheses the values of LDR10 and LDR11.
“(” and “)”.)
2-66 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 3 Project
The settings and screen data required to run the Touch are contained in a data structure called a Project. You must
create a project using WindO/I-NV3 and WindLDR, which is an editor to set control function, started from WindO/I-
NV3 before creating the screens and configuring the settings for the Touch. This chapter describes the various
settings required to create a project.
3
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
Project
1.1 Creating New Project Data
● Create new project data by using the interactive quick start
You can create project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step.
1 Click , and then click New.
A New Project dialog box is displayed.
2 Enter the project name, and then click Next.
The Select Product Series dialog box is displayed.
• You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:,;*?“<>|
• You cannot create project data in read-only folders or in WindO/I-NV3’s working folders (temporary
folders that start with “~”).
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-1
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
3 Select Product Series, Type Number, and Installation, and then click Next.
The Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed.
■ Product Series
Select the Touch type.
■ Type Number
A list of type numbers associated with the selected Touch is displayed. Select the type number to use.
■ Installation
Select the Touch installation direction from the following options.
Horizontal, Vertical (Counter Clockwise), Vertical (Clockwise)
You can go back to previous step to change the setting by clicking Previous.
4 Select Manufacturer, Protocol, and Connection, and then click Next.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.
■ Manufacturer
Select the manufacturer name of the external device used.
■ Protocol
Shows the communication driver list for the select manufacturer. Select the communication driver to use.
■ Connection
Select the connection according to the number of external devices.
1:1 Communication: The Touch is connected to a single external device.
1:N Communication: The Touch is connected to multiple external devices.
You can go back to previous step to change the settings by clicking Previous.
3-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
5 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
For details about the Project Settings dialog box, refer to “3 Project Settings Dialog Box” on page 3-18.
Project
• The Project Settings dialog box can also be accessed using the following methods.
- Click Project on the Configuration tab
- Double click Project Settings in the Project window
• You can go back to previous step to change the settings by clicking Previous.
This concludes creating project data.
Next you will create a screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3.1 Base Screen Settings” on page 4-14.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-3
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
1.2 Opening Project Data
● Opening project data
You can open project data that has already been created.
1 Click , and then click Open.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the file, and then click Open.
If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Select
the user name and enter its password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 21-1.
Next you will open a screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “2.2 Opening Screens” on page 4-2.
Click , and then click project data on the Recent Projects list to open a project data.
3-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
1.3 Saving Project Data
● Saving project data
You can save the project data being edited.
Click , and then click Save. 3
Project
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-5
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
● Saving project data with a different name
You can save the project data being edited with a different name.
1 Click , and then click Save As.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2 Enter the project name, and then click Save.
• You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:,;*?“<>|
• You cannot create project data in read-only folders or in WindO/I-NV3’s working folders (temporary
folders that start with “~”).
3-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
1.4 Printing Project Data
You can print the settings for the project data being edited and its screen images.
1 Click , and then click Print.
The Print dialog box is displayed. 3
Project
2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-7
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
● Print Tab
■ Printer
Name: Select a printer connected to the computer or Save As RTF file on disk.
You can output an RTF-formatted file by selecting Save As RTF file on disk.
Set path of RTF file: When outputting an RTF-formatted file, click this button to display the
Save As dialog box. Specify the saved location, file name, and then
click OK.
Status: Shows the current status of the printer.
Type: Shows the manufacturer and model of the printer.
Location: Shows the destination or the location to save the file.
Comment: Shows a comment entered in the Printer Properties dialog box.
■ Print Range
Select the items you want to print.
Project Settings: Prints the project settings.
Screen Settings: Prints the screen settings, a list of the parts on the screen, and a screen image. The details are
configured on the Screen tab.
Part List: Prints the settings for all parts used in the project.
Device List: Prints the settings for all devices used in the project.
Picture List: Prints the images and settings for drawing objects registered in Picture Manager. The details are
configured on the Picture tab.
Text List: Prints all the text registered in Text Manager.
Script List Prints all the scripts registered in Script Manager.
Protocol List: Prints the settings for Protocols registered in Protocol Manager. The details are configured on the
Protocol tab.
When the following items are selected, their tabs are displayed.
Item Reference
Screen Settings Screen Tab on page 3-9
Picture List Picture Tab on page 3-10
Protocol List Protocol Tab on page 3-11
■ Copies
Number of copies: Enter the number of copies to print (1 to 100).
■ Printing Font
Displays the Font dialog box. You can change the font used when printing.
3-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
● Screen Tab
Project
■ Type
Select the screens to print from the following items.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen
■ Range
Select the screens to print from the selected type of screen.
All: Prints all the screens.
Current Screen: Prints the selected editing window screen.
Selected Screens: Prints the selected screens. The selected screens are displayed in a list.
Add: Adds a screen to the list.
Click Add to display the Open Screens dialog box. Select Screen Type,
select the screen in Screen List, and then click OK to add the screen to
the list.
Delete: Deletes the screen from the list.
Select the screen in the list, and then click Delete.
■ Image
State: Changes the state of the parts for printing. Select the state from the following items.
OFF, ON, ON, OFF (Both)
Zoom: Prints the screen image at the specified magnification (20% to 400%).
Invert white and black: Select this to print the screen by inverting the colors so white is black and black is white.
Overlay Screens: Select this to print the screen by displaying overlay screens.
Show Part Name: Select this to print the screen by displaying part names.
Show Device Address: Select this to print the screen by displaying device addresses.
■ Screen image only
Prints only the screen type, number, and screen image.
■ Detailed List of Parts
Prints part settings for each screen. This can only be selected when Screen image only is cleared.
■ Device List
Prints device settings for each address. This can only be selected when Screen image only is cleared.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-9
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
● Picture Tab
■ Name
Shows a list of selected drawing object names.
Add: Adds a drawing object to the list.
Click this button to display Picture Manager. Select a picture, and then click Select to add it to the
list.
Delete: Deletes a picture from the list.
Select the picture name, and then click this button.
■ Zoom
Prints the picture at the specified magnification (20% to 400%).
3-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
● Protocol Tab
Project
■ Name
Shows a list of selected Protocol names.
Add: Adds a Protocol to the list.
Click this button to display Protocol Manager. Select a protocol, and then click Select to add it to
the list.
Delete: Deletes a protocol from the list.
Select a protocol name, and then click this button.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-11
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
1.5 Comparing Project Data
Compares project data during editing with the screens and scripts of saved projects.
1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Compare.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
2 Select a file to compare with, then click Open.
The Comparison Result window is displayed.
Comparison results are displayed using colored text.
Blue: Complete match
Red: Different content
Green: Only saved in the open project
Gray: Only saved in the comparison project
To compare with the comparison project data again, click the arrow to the right of Compare from the
Project group of the Home tab, then click Recompare.
3-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
1.6 Changing Project Settings
● Changing Product Series
Changes the product series set in the project data being edited.
1 Click Change Product Series on the status bar.
The Change Product Series dialog box is displayed.
3
Project
2 Select Product Series, Type Number, and Installation, and then click OK.
The Destination path for Convert dialog box is displayed.
3 Specify the save location and file name, and then click Save.
The data conversion process begins.
4 When the data is finished being converted, click Close.
Color settings (color data) are not converted.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-13
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
● Changing Communication Drivers
This section shows how to change the communication driver set in the project data being edited.
1 Click Change Communication Driver on the status bar.
The Change Communication Driver dialog box is displayed.
2 Select Manufacturer, Protocol, and Connection, and then click OK.
The confirmation message is displayed.
3 Check the message, and then click OK.
The Destination path for Convert dialog box is displayed.
4 Specify the save location and file name, and then click Save.
The data conversion process begins.
3-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
5 When the data is finished being converted, click Close.
Project
If there are no devices that correspond to the external device used in the current project data after
changing the communication driver, the items set with those devices are blank.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-15
1 Creating WindO/I-NV3 Project Data
1.7 Closing Project Data
You can close the project data being edited.
Click , and then click Close.
If the project data being edited has not been saved, a confirmation message for saving the project data is
displayed.
• Click Yes to save the project data and close it.
• Click No to close the project data without saving changes.
• Click Cancel to stop saving the project data.
3-16 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Project Settings Configuration Procedure
2 Project Settings Configuration Procedure
The Project Settings dialog box is used to configure Touch operations and functions for the project overall.
This section describes the configuration procedure for project settings.
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project. 3
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.
Project
2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-17
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Project Settings dialog box.
3.1 System Tab
The System tab is used to configure Touch operations.
■ Screen No. Format
Selects the type of data to use for the System Area 1 Display screen number (address+0) as BCD or BIN.
Default Screen: Specifies the screen number of the Base Screen to display first when the Touch is turned on (0 to
3000). When 0 is specified, the Touch is in the screen waiting state. Write a screen number to
System Area 1 Display screen number (address+0) or specify the default screen number from 1 to
3000.
■ Start Time (sec)
Specifies the time from when the Touch power is turned on until communications start with the external device (0 to
9999 seconds).
■ Auto Backlight OFF
Select this check box to turn off the backlight when the Touch is untouched for an extended period of time. To turn
on the backlight, touch the screen or write 1 to System Area 1 Auto Backlight OFF bit (address+1, bit 5) or System
Area 1 Screen display bit (address+1, bit 7).
Time (min): Specifies the time from when the Touch is last used to when the backlight is
turned off (1 to 9999).
Light ON with Screen Changing: When the backlight is turned off with this function, select this check box to turn on
the backlight when the screen is switched.
This option can only be configured when the Auto Backlight OFF check box is
selected.
3-18 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
■ Touch Sound
Select this check box to play a sound when the screen is pressed.
Control by Device*1: Select this check box to control the touch sound with a value of device.
This option can only be configured when Touch Sound is selected.
(Device): Specifies the word device that controls the touch sound.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
3
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
Project
on page 2-62.
The control over a touch sound with a value of device is as follows.
0: Do not play the touch sound.
1: Play the touch sound.
2: Play a shortened touch sound.
■ Enable Maintenance
Select this check box to display the maintenance screen during operation. The methods for displaying the
maintenance screen are as follows.
Press the upper-left corner of the Touch screen for three seconds or more.
If the Base Screen is switched before three seconds have elapsed, the load operation for the maintenance screen will
be canceled. Please press the screen again.
Touch
Press and hold
three or more seconds
■ Use Large Font
Select this check box to display text on the Touch in high-quality fonts. The Japanese or European font is replaced
with the high-quality fonts depending on the magnification.
To use high-quality fonts, the fonts must be downloaded to the Touch at the same time as the project. To download
fonts, click Options in the Download dialog box to display the Options dialog box. Select the Download additional
fonts check box, select the check boxes of the high-quality fonts to use (Japanese large font (First standard),
Japanese large font (Second standard), European large font), and then click OK.
For details on high-quality fonts, refer to Chapter 2 “High-quality Fonts” on page 2-10.
■ Enable Two-point Push
Select this check box to enable two-point push for touch switches. When two-point push is enabled, the bottom
switch and the switch above it operate in order.
On an analog touch panel, this function operates two overlapping switches when the two are pressed. This is not a
function to simultaneously operate two touch switches when they are both pressed.
■ Enable Low Battery Warning
Select this check box to display a warning when the backup battery is dead.
■ System Language
Selects the display language for the Maintenance Screen, Device Monitor, Adjust Brightness Screen*2, and Adjust
Brightness/Contrast Screen*3 as English or Japanese.
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “1 Maintenance Screen” on page 28-1.
*1 Advanced mode only
*2 Color LCD models only
*3 Monochrome LCD models only
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-19
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
■ Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of Numerical Input*1
Select this check box to display 0 when a Numerical Input that has the Always Entry Mode check box selected on
the General tab is displayed on the screen. When this check box is cleared, the value of device is displayed.
This option is reflected for all Numerical Inputs configured in the project.
■ Storage Method of String Data*1
Selects the handling method for text entered with the Character Input and values of devices read by the Message Display.
from Upper byte:
The values of devices are read from and written to the upper byte.
Example: When the text ABCDE is entered with the Character Input and written to the
destination device LDR100
Stored value
Device
Upper byte Lower byte
LDR100 'A' = 41 (hex) 'B' = 42 (hex)
LDR101 'C' = 43 (hex) 'D' = 44 (hex)
LDR102 'E' = 45 (hex) 0
NULL terminating character
from Lower byte: The values of devices are read from and written to the lower byte.
Example: When the text ABCDE is entered with the Character Input and written to the
destination device LDR100
Stored value
Device
Upper byte Lower byte
LDR100 'B' = 42 (hex) 'A' = 41 (hex)
LDR101 'D' = 44 (hex) 'C' = 43 (hex)
LDR102 0 'E' = 45 (hex)
NULL terminating character
When handling strings, 0 is written to the device as the NULL terminating character and treated as the end
of the string.
■ Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data*1
Selects the handling method for the values of devices when BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD8, or float32 is selected
for Data Type from the following.
This setting only applies to word devices. When the bit devices in control devices are handled as words, this setting is
always from Lower word.
from Upper word (Excludes bit devices handled as words):
Values of the word device are read from and written to the upper word.
Example: When Data Type for the Numerical Input is BIN32(+) and the numerical value
12345678 (hex) was entered and written to destination device LDR100
Device Stored value
LDR100 1234 (hex) Upper word
LDR101 5678 (hex) Lower word
from Lower word: For word devices and bit devices handled as words, values of devices are read from and
written to the lower word.
Example: When Data Type for the Numerical Input is BIN32(+) and the numerical value
12345678 (hex) was entered and written to destination device LDR100
Device Stored value
LDR100 5678 (hex) Upper word
LDR101 1234 (hex) Lower word
■ Execution Time of Control Function (msec)
Specifies the execution time for control function (5 to 1,000).
For details, refer to Chapter 12 “Execution Period” on page 12-2.
*1 Advanced mode only
3-20 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
■ Use System Area
The System Area is an area of predetermined devices to control the screen, communicate error and time information
between the Touch and the external device. Select this check box to use the System Area. For details, refer to
“System Area” on page 3-22.
Device: Specifies the word device to use as the System Area. The System Area is allocated starting from the
configured device address. 3
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
Project
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Use System Area 3, 4: Select this check box to use System Area 3 and 4.
Clear Keypad bit in System Area automatically*1: Select this check box to automatically set the System Area 2
Numerical Input setting and Character Input setting bits to 0 after
they have been set to 1.
The System Area 2 bits cleared by this function are as follows.
Numerical Input setting complete (address+3, bit 0)
Numerical Input setting cancel (address+3, bit 1)
Character Input setting complete (address+3, bit 5)
Character Input setting cancel (address+3, bit 6)
■ Blinking Cycle
Selects the blinking cycle (displaying a drawing object by switching it on and off at a fixed interval) as 1.0 sec or 0.5
sec.
■ Watch Dog*1
Select this check box to monitor whether or not the Touch and the external device are communicating by writing a set
value (00FF (hex)) at a fixed interval.
Device: Specifies the word device to write the value.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Time (sec): Specifies the interval to write the value (1 to 65535).
■ Disable Switch*1
Select this check box to enable and disable touch switches with a value of device.
Touch switches are enabled when the value of device is 1. They are disabled when the value of device is 0.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device that is read to enable or disable touch switches.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Use Device Cache*1
Select this check box to execute processing by reading all the values of external devices configured for a screen when
switching the Base Screen or when displaying a Popup Screen. On the Touch, written values are reflected regardless
of this option.
■ Start Part with synchronous*1
Select this check box to operate commands and HMI Special Internal Relays LSM1, LSM2, LSM3, and LSM5 after
reading all the values of external devices configured on the screen.
When this check box is cleared, all processing is immediately executed when the screen is displayed.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-21
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
● System Area
Overview
The area of predetermined devices to control the screen and communicate error information and time information
between the Touch and the external device is called the System Area.
The System Area on the Touch is as follows.
System Area Number of word addresses User Access
System Area 1 2 Read and write
System Area 2 2 Write
System Area 3 4 Read
System Area 4 4 Write
To use System Area 1 and 2, select the Use System Area check box on the Project Settings dialog box. To use
System Area 3 and 4, select the Use System Area 3, 4 check box.
Specify the word device to use as the System Area in Device to allocate the System Area starting at the configured
device address.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: When Device is configured as LDR100
(Starting address) LDR100
System Area 1
+1 LDR101
+2 LDR102
System Area 2
+3 LDR103
+4 LDR104
+5 LDR105
System Area 3
+6 LDR106
+7 LDR107
+8 LDR108
+9 LDR109
System Area 4
+10 LDR110
+11 LDR111
System Area 1
This area configures the Touch display, beep, and clearing bits.
Address Bit Function Description
This bit stores the number of the screen being displayed. Write a
value to this bit to change the screen to that number. Immediately
after the power is turned on, the value configured by Default
Screen in the Project Settings dialog box is stored here.
+0 0 to 15 Display screen number
If the screen number does not exist in the project data, an error
message (No screen data) is displayed. However, when 0 is written
to this bit, the screen is not switched and no error message is
displayed.
This bit stores the illumination state of the backlight. Write a value to
this bit to change the state.
0: Off
0 Backlight
Turns the backlight off.
1: On
Turns the backlight on.
This bit stores the screen blink state (1 sec. cycle). Write a value to
+1 this bit to change the state. This bit is 0 immediately after the power
is turned on.
0: Do not blink
Stop blinking the screen and turn it on.
1 Blink display (1 sec. cycle)
1: Blink
Blinks the screen in one second intervals.
When Blink display (1 sec. cycle) (address+1, bit 1) and Blink
display (0.5 sec. cycle) (address+1, bit 2) are both 1, the
screen blinks at one second intervals.
3-22 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
Address Bit Function Description
This bit stores the screen blink state (0.5 sec. cycle). Write a value to
this bit to change the state. This bit is 0 immediately after the power
is turned on.
0: Do not blink
Stop blinking the screen and turn it on.
2 Blink display (0.5 sec. cycle)
1: Blink
3
Blinks the screen in 0.5 second intervals.
Project
When Blink display (1 sec. cycle) (address+1, bit 1) and Blink
display (0.5 sec. cycle) (address+1, bit 2) are both 1, the
screen blinks at one second intervals.
This bit stores the color of backlight. Write a value to this bit to
change the color.
Monochrome LCD models
00: Reserved
01: White
3 to 4 Backlight color 10: Red
11: Pink
Color LCD models
01: White
00, 10 and 11: Reserved
This bit stores whether or not the function to automatically turn off
the backlight is enabled when the Auto Backlight OFF check box is
selected in the Project Settings dialog box. Write a value to this bit to
change the state. This bit turns 0 immediately after power is turned
on.
0: Enabled
5 Auto Backlight OFF
Automatically turns off the backlight when the Touch is unused
for an extended period of time.
+1
1: Disabled
Does not automatically turn off the backlight when the Touch
is unused for an extended period of time. The backlight turns
on if the value changes to 1 when the backlight is off.
This bit stores the beep state. Write a value to this bit to change the
state. This bit turns 0 immediately after power is turned on.
0: Stop
6 Beep
Stops continuous beeping.
1: Beep
Starts continuous beeping.
This bit stores the screen display state. Write a value to this bit to
change the state.
0: Hide
7 Screen display
Hides the screen when the backlight is on.
1: Show
Displays the screen.
8 Reserved
Write 1 to this bit to clear the error information bit (System Area 2
9 Clear error address+2). This bit automatically changes to 0 when processing is
finished.
Write 1 to this bit to clear the Numerical Input setting complete bit
Numerical Input setting (System Area 2 address+3, bit 0) and the Numerical Input setting
10
clear cancel bit (System Area 2 address+3, bit 1). This bit automatically
changes to 0 when processing is finished.
Write 1 to this bit to clear the Character Input setting complete bit
Character Input setting (System Area 2 address+3, bit 5) and the Character Input setting
11
clear cancel bit (System Area 2 address+3, bit 6). This bit automatically
changes to 0 when processing is finished.
12 to 15 Reserved
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-23
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
System Area 2
This area stores Touch states and error information. These bits turn 0 immediately after power is turned on.
Address Bit Function Description
0 to 2 Reserved
This bit changes to 1 when a communication error occurs in
3 Communication error communication with external device using Serial Interface 1
(SIO1).
4 Reserved
This bit changes to 1 when executing the following arithmetic
operations.
• A value other than 0 to 9 is used when the data type is BCD4
or BCD8
5 Arithmetic error • Dividing by zero
• When there is an inconsistency in the bar chart maximum,
minimum, or origin setting, or the full range is 0
• When there is an inconsistency in the line chart maximum,
minimum, or origin setting, or the full range is 0
This bit changes to 1 when writing a value to a device that falls
+2 6 Device range error outside its range or when exceeding the restrictions on the
number of configured devices.
7 Clock IC error This bit changes to 1 when the Touch internal clock stops.
8, 9 Reserved
This bit changes to 1 when an error occurs during script
execution. Error details are stored in HMI Special Data Registers
10 Script error
LSD52 and LSD53. For details, refer to Chapter 20 “1.4 Script
Error” on page 20-4.
If an error occurs when accessing an inserted USB flash drive,
11 USB flash drive access error
the value of this bit becomes 1.
12, 13 Reserved
This bit changes to 1 when the backup battery is dead or low
14 Backup data error and the data sampled by the log functions and the HMI Keep
Registers and HMI Keep Relays are cleared.
15 Reserved
This bit changes to 1 when finished entering a numerical value
Numerical Input setting
0 with the Numerical Input. Write 0 to Numerical Input setting
complete
clear (address+1, bit 10) to clear this bit.
This bit changes to 1 when entering a numerical value with the
Numerical Input setting
1 Numerical Input was canceled. Write 0 to Numerical Input
cancel
setting clear (address+1, bit 10) to clear this bit.
The value of this bit changes to 1 when Auto Backlight OFF is
configured and the backlight was turned off by this function. To
2 Backlight auto off running configure Auto Backlight OFF, select the Auto Backlight OFF
check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
This bit automatically changes to 0 when the backlight turns on.
+3
3 Reserved
This bit changes to 1 when transferring recipe data. This bit
4 Transferring recipe
automatically changes to 0 when the transfer is finished.
This bit changes to 1 when finished entering text with the
Character Input setting
5 Character Input. Write 0 to Character Input setting clear
complete
(address+1, bit 11) to clear this bit.
This bit changes to 1 when entering text with the Character
6 Character Input setting cancel Input is canceled. Write 0 to Character Input setting clear
(address+1, bit 11) to clear this bit.
7 to 15 Reserved
3-24 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
System Area 3
This area is for changing the Touch internal clock data.
Address Bit Function Description
0 to 7 Clock data Month Enter Month (01 to 12) as a 2 digit BCD.
+4
8 to 15 Clock data Year Enter Year (00 to 99) as a 2 digit BCD.
3
0 to 7 Clock data Hour Enter Hour (00 to 23) as a 2 digit BCD.
+5
Project
8 to 15 Clock data Day Enter Day (01 to 31) as a 2 digit BCD.
0 to 7 Clock data Second Enter Second (00 to 59) as a 2 digit BCD.
+6
8 to 15 Clock data Minute Enter Minute (00 to 59) as a 2 digit BCD.
0 to 14 Reserved Enter 0 in the reserved area.
+7 Write 1 to this bit to write the entered data (address+4 to +6, bits
15 Update
0 to 15) to the Touch internal clock data.
When the value of the update bit (address+7, bit 15) becomes 1, the clock data is updated as a whole.
Year, month, day, hour, minute, and second cannot be set individually.
System Area 4
This area reads the Touch internal clock data in one minute intervals.
Address Bit Function Description
These bits store the current Month (01 to 12) value as a 2 digit
0 to 7 Clock data Month
BCD.
+8
These bits store the current Year (00 to 99) value as a 2 digit
8 to 15 Clock data Year
BCD.
These bits store the current Hour (00 to 23) value as a 2 digit
0 to 7 Clock data Hour
BCD.
+9
These bits store the current Day (01 to 31) value as a 2 digit
8 to 15 Clock data Day
BCD.
0 to 7 Reserved
+10 These bits store the current Touch internal clock data Minute (00
8 to 15 Clock data Minute
to 59).
These bits store the current Day of Week value as a 2 digit BCD.
00: Sunday
01: Monday
02: Tuesday
0 to 3 Clock data Day of Week
+11 03: Wednesday
04: Thursday
05: Friday
06: Saturday
4 to 15 Reserved
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-25
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.2 Communication Interface Tab
The Communication Interface tab is used to configure the functions used by the Touch communication interfaces.
■ Interface Configuration
It displays the communication interfaces and Protocols to use. The settings in the Interface Settings changes
according to the selected item from this list. The supported Protocols for each communication interface are as follows.
Protocol
Item Communication Interface User
External Device O/I Link O/I Link Maintenance
Communication
Communication Master Slave Communication
1 to 3
RS232C YES NO NO YES NO
Port Serial Interface
RS422/485 YES YES YES YES NO
Ethernet Ethernet Interface YES NO NO YES YES
USB2 USB Interface TypeA NO NO NO YES NO
USB1 USB Interface Mini-B NO NO NO NO YES
3-26 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
Functions Available with the Serial Interface
The following functions can be used with the serial interface.
• Barcode reader connection
Refer to Chapter 22 “5 User Communication” on page 22-7.
Functions Available with the Ethernet Interface 3
The following functions can be used with the Ethernet interface.
Project
• Online
Refer to Chapter 23 “Online Function” on page 23-1.
• Debug
Refer to Chapter 24 “Monitor Function” on page 24-1.
Functions Available with the USB Interface
The following functions can be used with a USB interface.
• Online
Refer to Chapter 23 “Online Function” on page 23-1.
• Debug
Refer to Chapter 24 “Monitor Function” on page 24-1.
• Barcode reader connection
Refer to Chapter 22 “5 User Communication” on page 22-7.
■ Interface Settings
The items that can be configured vary based on the communication interface selected under Interface
Configuration.
When Port is selected under Interface Configuration
Protocol: Selects the Protocol to use with the serial interface (RS232C) from the following.
N/A, External Device Communication, User Communication 1, User Communication 2,
User Communication 3
Selects the protocol to use with the serial interface (RS422/485) from the following.
N/A, External Device Communication, O/I Link Master, O/I Link Slave, User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3
This communication interface is not used when N/A is selected.
Baud Rate: Selects the communication speed with the external device from the following.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200, 187500
The baud rate that can be configured varies based on Protocol.
Data Bits: Selects the data length as 7 or 8.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication, User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected for
Protocol.
Stop Bits: Selects the stop bits as 1 or 2.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication, User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected for
Protocol.
Parity: Selects the parity from the following.
None, Odd, Even
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication, User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected for
Protocol.
Flow Control: Selects the flow control method as None or ER according to the external device being used.
This option can only be configured when External Device Communication is selected for
Protocol.
Serial Interface: Selects the standard for the serial interface to use from the following.
RS232C, RS422/485 2-wire, RS422/485 4-wire
RS422/485 4-wire can only be configured when User Communication 1, User
Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected for Protocol.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-27
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
When Ethernet is selected under Interface Configuration
Example: To communicate with two Touchs and a computer via Ethernet
Set Touch A, Touch B, and the computer all to the same values: subnet mask 255.255.255.0, default
gateway 192.168.0.24.
Set the IP addresses to values that do not conflict: Touch A IP address 192.168.0.1, Touch B IP address
192.168.0.2, computer IP address 192.168.0.3.
Local network
Ethernet communication Touch A Touch B Computer
External device External device
IP address 192.168.0.1 192.168.0.2 192.168.0.3
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 192.168.0.24 192.168.0.24 192.168.0.24
• Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway according to the local network environment being
used. When Automatically obtain the IP address is selected, the network settings are automatically
assigned from the DHCP server on the local network environment being used.
• Settings assigned from the DHCP server can be checked on the Top Page in the System Mode.
• When Automatically obtain the IP address is selected, it make take some time to acquire the
network settings. If the download fails, increase the timeout time on the Home tab, in the Project
group, in Comm.Setup.
• For details, refer to Chapter 23 “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.
Protocol: N/A or External Device Communication. Varies based on the
Communication Driver selected for Protocol.
Automatically obtain the IP address (DHCP).: Automatically sets the network when connected to a network.
Use the following IP address: Manually specifies the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
IP Address: Specifies the IP address. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a
numeric value from 0 to 255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same
network, make sure to assign each device a unique IP
address.
Subnet Mask: Specifies the subnet mask. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a
numeric value from 0 to 255.
This value must be the same for all devices.
Default Gateway: Specifies the default gateway. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a
numeric value from 0 to 255.
Set this value when using a router. Leave the value
blank when not required.
Forbid Maintenance Communication: Select this check box to prohibit maintenance communication via
Ethernet communication.
About Networking Terminology
IP Address: The number allocated to identify devices connected to an IP network such
as the Internet or an intranet. The IP address is the address of each
individual device on a network.
Subnet Mask: The subnet mask is used to indicate the position of the division between the
network address portion and the host address portion of an IP address.
Default Gateway: The device such as a computer or a router that represents the gateway used
when accessing devices outside the network to which the device belongs.
3-28 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
When Protocol1, Protocol2, or Protocol3 is selected for Ethernet under Interface Configuration
Protocol: Selects the user communication to configure for the selected Protocol from the following.
User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3
Operation Mode:
Selects the operation mode when performing user communication with the Ethernet interface.
TCP Client: The Touch operates as a TCP client and the external device operates as a TCP server. The 3
Touch connects to the TCP server and sends and receives data.
Project
TCP Server: The Touch operates as a TCP server and the external device operates as a TCP client. The
Touch creates a listening port as a TCP server and waits for connections from TCP clients.
After a connection, it sends and receives data with the TCP client.
Target: Configures the IP address and port number for the external device.
These options can only be configured when TCP Client is selected for Operation Mode.
IP Address: Specifies the IP address for the target.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to
255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure to assign
each device a unique IP address.
Port No.: Specifies the port number for the target (0 to 65535).
Change IP Address and Port Number by Device:
Select this check box and specify a word device to change the target's IP
address and port number during operation. You can only specify an internal
device. During the start of operation, the Touch writes the values configured
by IP Address and Port No. to this device. After the start of operation, the
value of device is read and the target is changed.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: When IP Address is set to 192.168.1.1, Port No. is 2105, and the
device is LDR100
LDR100 2105 Port number
LDR101 192
LDR102 168
IP address
LDR103 1
LDR104 1
Touch: Configures the Touch listening port number.
These options can only be configured when TCP Server is selected for Operation Mode.
Port No. Specifies the Touch listening port number (0 to 65535).
The port numbers that cannot be used are as follows.
• Port numbers already used by the Touch: port number 2537 (for
maintenance communication), 2538 (for pass-through), 2101 (for FC4A*1
direct connection pass-through)
• When MODBUS/TCP Server is selected for Communication Driver,
Port Number on the displayed Communication Driver Extension tab
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-29
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
• The connection status for TCP clients and the TCP server can be checked with the value of the HMI
Special Data Registers (LSD). The connection is disconnected when 0. The connection is connected when
1.
LSD67-0: Connection status for User Communication 1 set to Ethernet interface
LSD67-1: Connection status for User Communication 2 set to Ethernet interface
LSD67-2: Connection status for User Communication 3 set to Ethernet interface
• To forcibly disconnect the connection with TCP clients and the TCP server, set the value of the HMI
Special Data Registers (LSD) from 0 to 1.
LSD68-0: User Communication 1 set to Ethernet interface
LSD68-1: User Communication 2 set to Ethernet interface
LSD68-2: User Communication 3 set to Ethernet interface
• For TCP client and TCP server, make a 1:1 connection between the Touch and the external device for one
user communication setting.
• When the Change IP Address and Port Number by Device check box is selected, the changed IP
address and port number are reflected when data is next sent.
When USB2 is selected under Interface Configuration
Protocol: Selects the Protocol used by the USB interface Type A from the following.
N/A, User Communication 1, User Communication 2, User Communication 3
This communication interface is not used when N/A is selected.
When USB1 is selected under Interface Configuration
Protocol: N/A is displayed.
This communication interface is used for maintenance communication.
*1 IDEC MICROSmart series PLC
3-30 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.3 Communication Driver Tab
The Communication Driver tab is used to configure the communication driver for the external device configured in
the current project data.
Project
■ Product Series
Shows the Touch model configured in the current project data.
■ Manufacturer
Shows the external device manufacturer configured in the current project data.
■ Protocol
Shows the communication driver name configured in the current project data.
■ External Device
These options configure the communication driver to use. For details, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual".
Transmission Wait (x 10 msec): Specifies the transmission interval for communication commands (0 to 255).
Time Out (x 100 msec): Specifies the time to wait for a response from the external device (1 to 255).
Retry Cycles: Specifies the number of times to execute a reconnection when the Touch cannot
communicate with the external device. When the number of reconnect attempts
reaches the number of times set here, a communication error is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-31
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
■ Ignore communication errors and continue operation
Select this check box to continue Touch operation even when a communication error occurs.
This option is only displayed when the communication driver Connection is 1:N Communication.
Display error message: Select this check box to display an error message (communication error) when a
communication error occurs and operation continues. Ack is displayed on the error
message (communication error).
When the Ignore communication errors and continue operation check box is
cleared, Ack is not displayed on the error message.
Auto retry: Select this check box to automatically retry communication from the Touch to the station
number where the communication error occurred when a communication error occurs
and operation continues.
All other communication stops while retrying.
To manually retry communication, clear the Auto retry check box.
To retry all station numbers, write 1 in bit 1 (initialize) of the device address configured by Batch
monitoring the communication error information for all Station Numbers.
To individually retry communication, write 1 in bit 0 (connection setting) of the device address configured by
Monitoring communication error information for each station number, individually.
Batch monitoring the communication error information for all Station Numbers:
Specifies the device that stores communication error information for all station numbers.
Only the HMI devices can be configured for this option.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
The information stored as error information is as follows. For details, refer to the
"External Device Setup Manual".
• Initialization
• Conditions under which the error occurred
• Read error log
• Write error log
Monitoring communication error information for each station number, individually:
Specifies the device that stores communication error information for each station
number. Only the HMI devices can be configured for this option.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This error information utilizes a maximum of 256 devices. Use caution so that the used
addresses do not overlap with other addresses.
The information stored as error information is as follows. For details, refer to the
"External Device Setup Manual".
• Connection settings
• Conditions under which the error occurred
• Read error log
• Write error log
3-32 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.4 Communication Driver Network Tab
The Communication Driver Network tab is used to configure the information for external devices connected by
Ethernet communication. This tab is displayed when a communication driver is selected that supports Ethernet
communication.
Project
■ Network List
Edits the settings for the external devices.
Station No.: Shows the station number of external device. Double clicking the cell displays the Communication
Driver Network Settings dialog box.
IP Address: Shows the IP address of the external device. (Default: 192.168.0.1)
Double clicking the cell allows you to specify the external device's IP address.
The format is “xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx”. “xxx” stands for a numeric value from 0 to 255.
When connecting multiple devices to the same network, make sure to assign each device a unique IP
address.
Port No.: Shows the port number of external device. (Default: 2101)
Double clicking the cell allows you to specify the external device's port number (0 to 65535).
■ Edit
Configures the IP address and port number for the selected station number. Select a station number, and then click
this button to display the Communication Driver Network Settings dialog box.
■ Clear
Returns the settings for the selected station number to the defaults.
You can change the IP address of the station numbers for the external devices using the System Screen. In
the Top Page in the System Screen, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, Ext. IP Address in order.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-33
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.5 Communication Driver Extension Tab
The Communication Driver Extension tab is used to configure the communication driver extension settings.
These settings vary based on the external device. This tab is displayed when communication driver extension settings
are required. For details, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual".
3-34 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.6 O/I Link Tab
The O/I Link tab configures the slave stations to connect to when the Touch is used as the O/I Link Communication
master. It configures the O/I Link station when the Touch is used as a slave. For details, refer to Chapter 22 “2 O/I
Link Communication” on page 22-3. These options can only be configured when O/I Link Master or O/I Link
Slave is selected for Protocol under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab.
3
Project
■ O/I Link Type
Selects the slave station (Slave1 to Slave15).
This option can only be configured when O/I Link Slave is selected for Protocol under Interface Settings on the
Communication Interface tab.
■ Slave Settings
Select the check boxes for the slave stations to connect to.
This option can only be configured when O/I Link Master is selected for Protocol under Interface Settings on
the Communication Interface tab.
The slave stations to connect to when the Touch is used as an O/I Link Communication Master are enabled
after the project is downloaded. The slave station number when the Touch is used as a slave is also enabled
after the project is downloaded.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-35
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.7 User Communication Tab
The User Communication tab is used to configure communication with external devices such as barcode readers.
For details, refer to Chapter 22 “5 User Communication” on page 22-7. This option can only be configured when User
Communication 1, User Communication 2, or User Communication 3 is selected for Protocol under
Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab.
■ Settings
Edits the user communication settings. You can use up to three user communication settings.
User Communication: Shows the user communication number.
Protocol Name: Shows Protocol Name configured in the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box.
■ Edit
Registers or changes the selected user communication settings. Select a user communication number, and then click
this button to display the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box.
■ Browse
Selects a Protocol to use as user communication with Protocol Manager. Click this button to display Protocol Manager.
■ Remove
Removes the Protocol selected under User Communication from the list.
3-36 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
■ Protocol
Shows the Protocol defined as the selected user communication.
No.: Shows the number for managing the Protocol settings. Double clicking the cell displays the
Command Settings dialog box.
Type: Shows the type of command. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Completed: Shows the send or receive complete report device. Double clicking the cell displays the
3
Command Settings dialog box.
Project
Status: Shows the destination device for the send or receive size and error information. Double clicking
the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Trigger Type: Shows the trigger type to execute the script. Double clicking the cell displays the Command
Settings dialog box.
Trigger Condition: The displayed content varies based on Trigger Type.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge, While ON, or While OFF: Shows the bit device that is the
condition. Double clicking the cell
displays the Command Settings
dialog box.
While satisfying the condition or Satisfy the Shows the conditional expression.
condition:
Fixed Period: Shows the period.
Comment: Shows the command comment. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog
box.
Size: Shows the command size in bytes. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings
dialog box.
■ Command
Shows the command settings for the selected Protocol. Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-37
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.8 External Memory Tab
The External Memory tab is used to configure the destination folder on the external memory inserted in the Touch.
■ External Memory Folder
Enter the folder name for the folder in the external memory to use on the Touch within 8 alphanumeric characters
using upper-case alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numbers (0 to 9). The default External Memory Folder name is
“HGDATA01” .
All the data sampled with the log functions is saved in this External Memory Folder. For details on the external
memory, refer to Chapter 26 “1 USB Flash Drives” on page 26-1.
• You cannot use the following characters in the folder name.
\ / : , ;* ? “ < > |
• After operation starts, the folders created in the External Memory Folder and the file names cannot be
changed.
■ Remove Files
Select this check box to erase the files saved in the External Memory Folder.
All Alarm Log files: Select this check box to erase all the Alarm Log data saved in folder. The folder name is
"ALARMLOG".
All Data Log files: Select this check box to erase all the Data Log data saved in folder. The folder name is
"DATALOG".
All Operation Log files: Select this check box to erase all the Operation Log data saved in all folders. The folder
name is "OPERATIONLOG".
Trigger Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition to delete the files.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
3-38 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.9 Autorun Tab
The Autorun tab is used to configure the USB flash drive autorun functions when inserted in the Touch. For details
on USB flash drives, refer to Chapter 26 “1 USB Flash Drives” on page 26-1.
Project
■ Enable USB Autorun
Select this check box to enable the USB Autorun function.
The USB Autorun function automatically displays a menu screen from which the user can execute predefined
commands when a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch.
■ Open Popup Screen when USB flash drive is inserted
Select this check box to display a Popup Screen when a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch.
Screen No.: Specifies the Popup Screen number (1 to 3015) to display when a USB flash drive is inserted in
the Touch.
Coordinates X, Y: Specifies the coordinates to display the Popup Screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-left
corner of the Popup Screen.
The units and range for the display coordinates are as follows.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-39
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
3.10 Project Details Tab
The Project Details tab displays and configures project data information.
■ Project Name
Shows the current project name. To change the project name, enter a new project name. The maximum number is
50 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:,;*?“<>|
■ Project Folder Size
Shows the total size of the current project data.
■ Download Data Size
Shows the total size of the data and the total size of only the image files when the current project data is
downloaded.
■ Location
Shows the save location for the current project data.
■ Created
Shows the date and time the current project data was created.
■ Modified
Shows the date and time the current project data was last saved.
■ Accessed
Shows the date and time the current project data was opened.
■ User
Enter the name of the creator. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Comment
Enter a comment for the project data. The maximum number is 40 characters.
3-40 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Project Settings Dialog Box
■ Language
Selects the language to use for the system information from the following. This option is also reflected in the project
name displayed in the system information on the Touch's System Screen.
European, Japanese, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The display type for dates and times varies based on the selected language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
3
Project
3.11 Contents Tab
The Contents tab is used to enter a comment for the project data.
■ Description
Enter a comment for the project data. The maximum number is 511 characters. A newline is counted as two
characters.
The content in Description is erased when the project is uploaded.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-41
4 Special Functions
4 Special Functions
This chapter describes the Touch special functions, how to configure them, and examples of their use.
● Function List
Function name Overview Setup location
The ladder program operation can be started/stopped with a specified
Stop input
input.
Reset input The values of the control devices can be cleared with a specified input.
Whether to start or stop the ladder program operation when the Touch
Run/stop selection at
is powered up after the "keep" data in the RAM has been lost can be
memory backup error
specified.
Run/stop selection at power Whether to start or stop the ladder program operation regardless of the
up M8000 status when the Touch is powered up can be specified.
Whether to clear or keep the device values, such as counter current
Keep and clear devices values, when the ladder program operation starts running can be
specified.
The high-speed counters can be used to count input pulses from rotary
High-speed counter
encoders or proximity switches regardless of the scan time.
The catch input can be used to receive short pulses from sensors
Catch input
regardless of the scan time.
Function area
When a quick response to an external input is required, such as in settings
Interrupt input positioning control, the interrupt input can call a subroutine to execute
an interrupt program.
The pulse frequency of input signals to input terminals can be counted
Frequency measurement
regardless of the scan time.
The input filter rejects short input pulses when the Touch is used with
Input filter
input signals containing noises.
Analog voltage inputs, such as inputs from pressure sensors, can be
Analog input
read and stored in special data registers as digital values.
When executing the same program repeatedly regardless of the scan
Timer interrupt time is required, the timer interrupt can call a subroutine to execute an
interrupt program at specified time interval.
Watchdog timer The watchdog timer monitors the Touch operation and the watchdog
settings time preset value can be changed.
The internal clock of the Touch can automatically be adjusted
Daylight savings time
according to the configured daylight saving time period.
The Touch can operate according to the current date and time and be
Clock function Instructions
used in applications, such as lighting or air conditioning.
When the setting of control function is changed, save the control function. For details, refer to Chapter 12
“2.3 Saving Control Function” on page 12-12.
3-42 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
4.1 Function Area Settings Configuration Procedure
The function area settings are the environment settings for the Touch. The operation of the Touch when powered
and communication port settings are configured in Function Area Settings.
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Function Area Settings.
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function). 3
WindLDR starts.
Project
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click a button for special functions.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Change the settings as necessary.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-43
4 Special Functions
● Function Description
Run/Stop Control These functions run or stop the ladder program when the Touch is turned on, when an
error occurs, or when an external input turns on.
• Stop input
• Reset input
• Run/stop selection at memory backup error
• Run/stop selection at power up
Memory Backup These functions keep or clear Control devices (the contents of memory) when a ladder
program starts operation. The values of the following devices can be configured to be kept
or cleared.
• Internal relays
• Shift registers
• Counters
• Data registers
Input Configuration These options configure the special functions such as the external input filter settings and
the high-speed counter.
• High-speed counter
• Catch input
• Interrupt input
• Frequency measurement
• Input filter
• Analog input
• Timer interrupt
Self Diagnostic These settings configure the watchdog timer that monitors the operating status of the
Touch.
Calendar & Clock The Touch is equipped with an internal clock and its calendar data (year, month, day, day
of the week) and clock data (hour, minute, second) which can be used in ladder programs.
Daylight savings time can also be configured for the internal clock.
3-44 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
4.2 Stop Input
This section describes the function on how a ladder program for the Touch can be stopped with external input.
● Function Description
This function stops execution of the Touch ladder programs by means of an external input, such as a control panel switch.
The normal external inputs of the Touch are set as stop inputs. 3
When a stop input is set to ON, the ladder program is stopped during execution. When a stop input is set to OFF, the
Project
ladder program executes from the top.
RUN
RUN/Stop State
STOP
ON
Start Control
(M8000) OFF
ON
Stop Input
OFF
*1 *2
The external inputs that can be set as stop inputs are I0 to I7.
While a reset input is ON, ladder program is stopped. For details of reset inputs, refer to “4.3 Reset Input”
on page 3-46.
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function) .
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the Use Stop Input check box.
4 Designate an external input (ex. I0) as a stop input.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
If I0 is set to ON after a ladder program is downloaded, the ladder program will stop.
*1 Even when M8000 (start control) is OFF, if a stop input is OFF, the Touch will remain in the RUN state.
*2 Even when a stop input is OFF, since M8000 (start control) is OFF, the program will not go into RUN state.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-45
4 Special Functions
4.3 Reset Input
This section describes the function for clearing the values of the Touch devices by means of external input.
● Function Description
This function clears execution of the Touch control devices by means of an external input, such as a control panel
switch. The normal external inputs of the Touch are set as reset inputs.
If a reset input is ON, the ladder program stops during execution and all control devices and general errors are
cleared, except for special internal relays and special data registers. When a reset input is set to OFF, the ladder
program executes from the top.
To set the reset input to OFF and execute the ladder program once again, it is necessary that M8000 is ON and that
stop inputs are OFF (if a stop input is set).
If these conditions are not satisfied, then even if the reset input is OFF, program execution will remain stopped and
the ladder program will not execute.
The external inputs that can be set as reset inputs are I0 to I7.
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the Use Reset Input check box.
4 Designate an external input (ex. I1) as a reset input.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
If I1 is set to ON after a ladder program is downloaded, the ladder program will stop and the value of the control
device will be cleared.
3-46 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
The state of each data item at the time of RUN, STOP, and Reset are as follows.
Internal relays, Shift
register bits, Counters, Not-
and Data register values Special Special Timer
maintained
Operation Output internal data current
Keep Clear data
relay register value
designation designation
range range
register
3
Project
Program Program Program Program Program Program Program
RUN
operation operation operation operation operation operation operation
Refer to
STOP OFF Maintained Maintained Maintained Maintained Maintained
Chapter 27.
STOP RUN Maintained Maintained Cleared Maintained Maintained Maintained Initialized
Reset (when
reset input is OFF Cleared Cleared Maintained Maintained Cleared Cleared
turned on)
Refer to
Power OFF OFF Maintained Maintained Maintained Cleared Cleared
Chapter 27.
Keep settings and clear settings for the internal relays, shift registers, counters, and data registers of control devices
are configured using the Function Area Settings tab. For details about keep settings and clear settings, refer to
“Keep and Clear Control Devices” on page 3-50.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-47
4 Special Functions
4.4 Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error
This section describes the function for setting the state of ladder programs when memory backup error is occurred.
● Function Description
If the Touch is powered OFF and left unused for long periods, resulting in a depleted backup battery, values of
devices, current time, and other data retained by the Touch are lost. If power is supplied to the Touch when it has
lost this retained data, a memory backup error occurs. The state of the ladder program when such a memory backup
error occurs can be selected.
If there is any risk of unforeseen actions occurring when the Touch is run while in this state (after memory backup
error is occurred), set to STOP. If the Touch is always operated regardless of whether a memory backup error occurs,
because there is no means to run ladder programs where it is located or for a similar reason, selected to RUN.
• Thanks to a lithium-ion battery the RUN/STOP (M8000) state of the Touch immediately before it is
powered OFF is retained, so when it is powered ON again, the Touch will operate in accordance with this
preserved RUN/STOP state.
• If the Touch is powered ON after this retained data is lost, following a long period of disuse, for example, a
memory backup error occurs and the value of special internal relay M8000 (start control) is lost.
• The data backup period is approximately 30 days when the backup battery is fully charged. After the
backup period is exceeded, the retained data will be lost from the Touch.
• If a keep data error occurs when Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error issues a STOP
instruction, the Touch stops running. To start operation of the Touch, set the Touch to RUN using the
Touch. For details, refer to Chapter 12 “1.2 Executing and Stopping Ladder Programs” on page 12-3.
• When a memory backup error occurs, an error code is stored in special data register D8005 (general error
code). For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.1 General Error Codes” on page 30-3.
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function) .
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Run under the Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error.
4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
3-48 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
4.5 Run/Stop Selection at Power Up
This section describes the function for selecting the state of ladder programs when the Touch is turned on.
● Feature Description
The state of ladder programs when the Touch is turned on is determined by the value of special internal relay M8000
(start control).
3
Project
Configuration Operation
Keep Run/Stop State at Power Starts running the Touch with the ladder program in the state at power down when the
Down Touch is powered up.
Turns ON M8000 and starts running the Touch and the ladder program when the Touch
Run (M8000 is turned on)
is powered up.
Turns OFF M8000, starts running the Touch and stops the ladder program when the
Stop (M8000 is turned off)
Touch is powered up.
• When the memory backup error occurs, the Touch is started or stopped according to Run/Stop
Selection at Memory Backup Error regardless of Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.
• Stop inputs and reset inputs have a higher priority than RUN/STOP Selection at Power Up.
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Run/Stop Control.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Keep Run/Stop State at Power Down, Run or Stop under the Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.
4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-49
4 Special Functions
4.6 Keep and Clear Control Devices
This section describes the function for retaining or clearing the Touch Control devices.
● Feature Description
Devices that can issue instructions to retain or clear data are internal relays, shift registers, counter current values,
and data registers. Relays and registers issued with clear instructions are cleared when operation starts. Values in the
powered OFF state are retained until power is turned on and operation starts.
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function) .
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Memory Backup.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the buttons under Internal Relay, Shift Register, Counter, and Data Register to Clear all, Keep all, or Keep/Clear
Specified Range as required.
To specify a clear/keep range, enter an upper limit and lower limit for the range.
4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
3-50 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Designation
The settings and actions for each control device are as follows.
■ Internal Relay (M)
Configuration Operation
Clear All All internal relays are cleared when the Touch starts operation. 3
Keep All The states of all internal relays are retained while the Touch is powered OFF.
Project
The states of all internal relays are retained while the Touch is powered OFF.
Keep Specified Range
Internal relays outside the specified range are cleared when operation starts.
• The default setting is Clear All.
■ Shift Register (R)
Configuration Operation
Clear All All shift registers are cleared when the Touch starts operation.
Keep All The states of all shift registers are retained while the Touch is powered OFF.
The states of all shift registers are retained while the Touch is powered OFF.
Keep Specified Range
Shift registers outside the specified range are cleared when operation starts.
• The default setting is Clear All.
■ Counter (C)
Configuration Operation
Keep All Counter current values are retained when the Touch is powered OFF.
Clear All All counter current values are cleared when the Touch starts operation.
Only counter current values within the specified range are cleared when the Touch
Clear Specified Range
starts operation. Counter current values outside the specified range are retained.
• The default setting is Keep All.
■ Data Register (D)
Configuration Operation
Keep All Data register values are retained when the Touch is powered OFF.
Clear All All data register values are cleared when the Touch starts operation.
Only data register values within the specified range are cleared when the Touch starts
Clear Specified Range
operation. Data register values outside the specified range are retained.
• The default setting is Keep All.
• Relays and registers specified under Clear All or Clear Specified Range are cleared when the Touch
starts operation. Values in the powered OFF state are retained until power is turned on and operation
starts.
• It is not possible to configure keep/clear settings for special data registers. This action is equivalent to
that of Keep All.
• It is not possible to configure keep/clear settings for special internal relays. For details about actions when
power is cut or operation is stopped, refer to Chapter 27 “Special Internal Relay (M)” on page 27-5
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-51
4 Special Functions
4.7 High-Speed Counter
This section describes the high-speed counter for counting high-speed pulses from devices such as rotary encoders
and proximity switches.
● Feature Description
The high-speed counter is a function that counts high-speed pulses which cannot be read in the execution of a normal
ladder program. The high-speed counter has a comparator function to compare the current value and a preset value
(target value). When the current value and the preset value match, an external output is turned on or an interrupt
program is executed.
The high-speed counter has a single-phase high-speed counter and a two-phase high-speed counter.
To use the high-speed counter, function area settings, data registers, special internal relays, and special data
registers must be configured.
Application example
This application example punches holes into a roll of paper at a regular interval.
The two pulses (A-phase, B-phase) that carry the phase difference output from the rotary encoder are counted by the
Touch two-phase high-speed counter.
When the current value reaches the preset value, the specified external output turns on and the perforator punches a
hole in the roll of paper.
Paper roll
Paper feed roller
Perforator
Pulse motor
Rotary
encoder
Two-phase pulses
SmartAXIS High-speed pulse input
Output when count matches
High-speed counter operation modes
The high-speed counter has the following two operation modes.
• Single-phase high-speed counter
• Two-phase high-speed counter
High-speed counting modes
The high-speed counter has the following three counting modes.
• Adding counter (single-phase high-speed counter)
• 2-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
• 4-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
Example: The input allocation when external input group 1 is specified as a two-phase high-speed counter
External input I0 I1 I2
High-speed counter A-phase B-phase External clear input (Z-phase)
3-52 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● High-speed Counter External Inputs
The 12-I/O type can only use a maximum of four single-phase high-speed counters and a maximum of one dual-phase high-
speed counter.
■ Single-phase high-speed counter
The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I0 and I1 as single-phase high-speed counters.
Group 1 2 3 4 5
3
Project
External input I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5
Single-phase
high-speed – – Pulse input Pulse input Pulse input Pulse input
counter
■ Two-phase high-speed counter
External inputs I0/I1 (group 1) can be used as two-phase high-speed counters. External inputs I2 can be used as external
clear inputs for group 1. In this situation, external inputs I2 cannot be used as single-phase high-speed counters.
Group 1 2 3 4 5
External input I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5
Two-phase External clear
Pulse input Pulse input
high-speed input*1 – – –
(A-phase) (B-phase)
counter (Z-phase)
*1 If not used as the external clear input (Z-phase), group 2 can be used as single-phase high-speed counters.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-53
4 Special Functions
● High-Speed Counter Operation
The high-speed counter turns on an external output or executes an interrupt program when the current value
matches the preset value (target value).
The high-speed counter has two operation modes, single-phase high-speed counter and two-phase high-speed
counter.
For how to configure the function to turn on an external output, refer to "Comparison Actions" on page 3-56.
■ Single-phase high-speed counter
Group 2, group 3, group 4, group 5 single-phase high-speed counter
• These groups only support adding counter.
• These groups support 10 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
• When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow occurs, an external output turns on or an
interrupt program is executed.
• These groups only support the reset input via a special internal relay. When the reset is executed, the current value
returns to the reset value specified by the special data registers.
Counting mode Frequency
Adding counter Group 2, 3, 4, 5: 10 kHz
■ Two-phase high-speed counter
Group 1 two-phase high-speed counter
• The two-phase high-speed counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input.
• These groups support 5 kHz maximum pulse input and are capable of counting from 0 to 4,294,967,295 (32 bits).
• Even higher speed counting is possible by specifying 2-edge count or 4-edge count.
• When the current value and the preset value match or an overflow or underflow occurs, an external output turns on
or an interrupt program is executed.
• These groups support resetting the current value by the reset special internal relay or external clear input (Z-
phase). When the reset is executed, the current value returns to the reset value specified by the special data
registers.
Group Frequency
2-edge count: 5kHz
Group 1
4-edge count: 2.5kHz
3-54 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Counting mode
The high-speed counter has the following three counting modes.
■ Adding counter (single-phase high-speed counter)
The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.
Pulse input
(I2, I3, I4, I5)
3
Project
Current value 10 11 12 13 14
■ 2-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
This counter counts by the phase difference between A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When A-phase precedes B-
phase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of B-phase. When B-phase precedes A-phase, the counter counts
down with the rise and fall of B-phase.
A-phase
B-phase
Current
0 1 2 3 4 3 2 1 0
value
■ 4-edge count (two-phase high-speed counter)
This counter counts by the phase difference between A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When A-phase precedes B-
phase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of A-phase and B-phase. When B-phase precedes A-phase, the
counter counts down with the rise and fall of A-phase and B-phase.
A-phase
B-phase
Current
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
value
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-55
4 Special Functions
● Comparison Actions
The operating condition when comparing values is configured in the WindLDR High-speed Counter Settings,
under Comparison Action.
The action when comparing values is Comparison Output or Interrupt Program, so specify an external output
number or label number when comparing.
Operation
When the preset value and the current value are compared and the values match, the specified output is turned on or
the interrupt program is executed.
A maximum of six high-speed counter preset values can be configured. For one preset value, the current value is
compared with the same preset value each time.
When multiple preset values are configured, the preset value is changed each time the current value and preset value match.
For example, if four preset values are configured, when preset value 1 matches the current value, the comparison
subject changes to preset value 2 3 4 in order.
When the final preset value 4 matches the current value, the preset value returns to preset value 1 and the values are compared.
■ Preset value storage locations
The preset values during high-speed counter operation are stored as 2 words in special data registers.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Preset Value
D8052 D8058 D8070 D8136 D8142
(Upper word)
R
Preset Value
D8053 D8059 D8071 D8137 D8143
(Lower word)
Specify the data registers to store the preset values in WindLDR and store those preset values in the ladder program.
Specify the starting address of the data registers to allocate the data registers to the individual settings in the
comparison settings. When the high-speed counter is executed, the preset value with the number stored in Current
Preset Value Number is active. The active preset value number for each comparison is stored in Current Preset
Value Number and the next active preset value number is automatically stored in Next Preset Value Number. By
changing the value of Next Preset Value Number in the ladder program, the next active preset value number can
be changed. The active preset value is stored for each group in the special data registers shown in the table above.
Example: Group 1, number of preset values is 3, set to device address D0000
When the current value matches preset value 1, Current Preset Value Number becomes 2 and 3 is stored in Next
Preset Value Number.
When the device address is configured as D0000, Current Preset Value Number is stored in D0001 and Next
Preset Value Number is stored in D0002.
For the group 1 preset value, the value of the data registers (D0004, D0005) allocated to preset value number 1 is
stored in D8052 and D8053 as shown in the table above and it is compared to the current value.
Current value and Current value and Current value and
Count Count
Counting state preset value 1 preset value 2 preset value 3
Before action Action start
matched matched matched
Current Preset Value
0 1 2 3 1
Number (D0001)
Next Preset Value Repeat
1 2 3 1 2
Number (D0002)
Before the count action, set the Next
Preset value 1 is set Preset value 3 Once again,
Preset Value Number and preset Preset value 2
to Current Preset is set. preset value 1 is
value 1 to 3 to the count values with is set.
Value Number set.
the initialize pulse in ladder program.
When the Next Preset Value Number preset value becomes active, the high-speed counter preset value during execution
does not change, even when the preset value for that preset value number is changed. When the current value and the current
preset value match, the preset value with the number stored in Next Preset Value Number becomes active. Changes to the
Next Preset Value Number data register must be performed before the preset value becomes active.
3-56 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
Comparison operation flow
The comparison operation flow is as follows.
1 Start (Run) the Touch.
For the first scan, Next Preset Value Number is set to the number for preset value 1 with the initialize pulse.
For the second scan, an I/O refresh is performed in END processing and the value of Next Preset Value Number is
transferred to Current Preset Value Number.
3
The content of Next Preset Value Number becomes the preset value n + 1 ("2" in this example).
Project
When the number of preset values is 1, Next Preset Value Number is always "1".
The data register that stores the preset value (target value).
Specify the starting address.
The outputs (external outputs) when the values match.
Transfer
The preset value with the number that became active is
the comparison subject with the current value and is
stored in the special data registers.
Example: For group 1
Storage destination for the preset value that became active.
Stored by group.
Group 1
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1)
Preset Value
D8052
(Upper word)
R/W
Preset Value
D8053
(Lower word)
2 Start the high-speed counter count operation.
Turn on the gate input to start the count operation.
3 Compare the Current Preset Value Number preset value and the current value. When the current value and the
preset value match, the next number for the preset value becomes active and the high-speed counter continues
counting.
Execute Comparison Output or Interrupt Program. (Comparison Output in this example)
• Turn on the comparison (special internal relay) for only one scan.
• Overwrite Current Preset Value Number with Next Preset Value Number and start the count with the preset
value for Current Preset Value Number.
• Add 1 to Next Preset Value Number.
4 When the procedure is executed up to preset value 6, repeat again from the beginning with preset value 1.
The Current Preset Value Number data register cannot be written to. It is read-only.
Next Preset Value Number and Preset Value 1 to Preset Value 6 can be read and written to.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-57
4 Special Functions
● Procedure
To use the high-speed counter, a normal input must be specified as Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter in
the Function Area Settings tab. Inputs I0 to I7 on the Touch can be selected as normal input, high-speed counter,
catch input, interrupt input, and frequency measurement.
When using normal input, catch input, interrupt input, or frequency measurement, high-speed counter cannot be
used.
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for the group to use the high-speed counter.
The High-speed Counter Settings dialog box is displayed.
4 Configure the operation mode and the counting mode, and then click OK.
To use comparison actions, configure the comparison settings.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
3-58 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Settings
■ Operation Mode
Inputs for group 2, group 3, group 4 and group 5 can only be used as single-phase high-speed counters.
When group 1 is selected as the high-speed counter, group 2 (I2) can be used as clear input.
■ Counting Mode (single-phase high-speed counter)
The adding counter can only be used for group 2, group 3, group 4 and group 5 high-speed counters.
3
Project
Adding Counter
The adding counter counts up with the rise in pulse input.
■ Counting Mode (two-phase high-speed counter)
When the two-phase high-speed counter is specified for Operation Mode for group 1, the counting mode can be
selected as 2-edge count or 4-edge count. The two-phase counter cannot be used for the group 2, group 3, group
4 and group 5 high-speed counters.
2-edge count
This counter counts at double the frequency of the input pulse.
This counter counts by the phase difference between the A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When A-phase precedes
B-phase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of B-phase. When B-phase precedes A-phase, the counter
counts down with the rise and fall of B-phase.
4-edge count
This counter counts at quadruple the frequency of the input pulse.
This counter counts by the phase difference between A-phase and B-phase pulse input. When A-phase precedes B-
phase, the counter counts up with the rise and fall of A-phase and B-phase. When B-phase precedes A-phase, the
counter counts down with the rise and fall of A-phase and B-phase.
■ Comparison Action
The comparison action is a function that compares the high-speed counter's current value with a preset value (target
value).
It can use either the comparison output or an interrupt program.
• When Comparison Output is selected, the specified external output is turned on when the current value and the
preset value match.
• When Interrupt Program is selected, the subroutine program with the specified label number is executed as the
interrupt program when the current value and the preset value match.
Overflow and underflow can also be used for the comparison conditions.
For details on the comparison actions, refer to "Comparison Actions" on page 3-56.
■ Comparison Settings
When using the comparison output or the interrupt program as the comparison action for the high-speed counter,
configure the external output number or the label number when there is a match. A maximum of six preset values can
be specified for Number of Comparisons (preset value number 1 to 6).
Tag Name
Specify the Tag name which is allocated to the starting address of the data register region to store the preset values.
Device Address
Shows the address of the data register specified by the tag name.
Number of Comparisons
You can configure a maximum of six preset values (target values) for the comparison action.
• The preset value becomes active by the END processing in the second scan after the Touch starts
operation. Store Preset Value in the data registers with initialize pulse M8120 input.
• When the preset value (special data register) is changed before the comparison, the preset value
currently being used for the comparison is discarded in the program's END processing, and the
comparison is performed with the newly configured preset value.
Output
When a comparison action is selected, these are the external outputs specified for preset value 1 to 6.
The external outputs that can be used as comparison outputs are Q0 to Q7. Remote outputs cannot be configured.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-59
4 Special Functions
Overflow
Select this check box to use overflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value exceeds
4,294,967,295).
Underflow
Select this check box to use underflow in the comparison action conditions (when the current value falls below 0).
When the comparison action is Comparison Output and either a preset value, overflow, or underflow has
been enabled as a comparison condition, the text box to enter the comparison output is enabled. The
comparison output can be specified for each of these match conditions.
■ Keep
After the current value matches the preset value, select to reset the current value to a reset value or to keep the
value. Select this check box to keep the current value.
■ Use HSC Reset Input
Select this check box to reset the current value to a reset value with external input (high-speed counter reset input).
High-speed counter reset input can only be specified for group 1.
Group External input
Group 1 I2
When high-speed counter reset input is turned on, the current value is reset to a reset value.
If high-speed counter reset input is not used, I2 is normal input.
High-speed counter devices
The high-speed counter operates according to special internal relay and special data register settings. While the high-
speed counter is operating, the current value, control output, and operating status value are reflected in the special
internal relays and special data registers with each scan.
The high-speed counter start and stop control signals and the current value, preset values, and reset values are
allocated to the special internal relays and special data registers.
Device allocation table
The devices used by the high-speed counter are as follows.
Special internal relay list
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Comparison
M8030 M8040 M8055 M8166 M8173
Output Reset
R/W
Gate Input M8031 M8041 M8056 M8167 M8174
Reset Input M8032 M8042 M8057 M8170 M8175
Reset Status M8033 – – – –
Comparison ON
M8034 M8043 M8060 M8171 M8176
Status
Overflow M8035 M8044 M8061 M8172 M8177 R
Underflow M8036 – – – –
Count Direction
M8037 – – – –
Flag
3-60 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
Special data register list
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Current Value
D8050 D8056 D8068 D8134 D8140
(Upper word)
R
Current Value
D8051 D8057 D8069 D8135 D8141
3
(Lower word)
Project
Preset Value
D8052 D8058 D8070 D8136 D8142
(Upper word)
Preset Value
D8053 D8059 D8071 D8137 D8143
(Lower word)
R/W
Reset Value
D8054 D8060 D8072 D8138 D8144
(Upper word)
Reset Value
D8055 D8061 D8073 D8139 D8145
(Lower word)
When using the devices above with instructions where the data type unit can be specified, specify the data type as
double word (D). When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to from Lower Word, the
lower word is stored in the first device.
■ Start/stop high-speed counter
The high-speed counter can be started and stopped per group by turning the gate input on or off.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Gate Input M8031 M8041 M8056 M8167 M8174 R/W
■ Current value storage locations
The current value for the single-phase high-speed counter is stored in special data registers as 2 words per group.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Current Value
D8050 D8056 D8068 D8134 D8140
(Upper word)
R
Current Value
D8051 D8057 D8069 D8135 D8141
(Lower word)
When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to from Lower Word, the lower word is
stored in the first device.
■ Comparison ON status
When the current value and the preset value match, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Comparison ON
M8034 M8043 M8060 M8171 M8176 R
Status
■ Overflow
When the current value exceeds 4,294,967,295, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan. When the
current value overflows, it becomes 0.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Overflow M8035 M8044 M8061 M8172 M8177 R
■ Underflow
When the current value falls below 0, the special internal relay turns on for only one scan. When the current value
underflows, it becomes 4,294,967,295.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Underflow M8036 – – – – R
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-61
4 Special Functions
■ Comparison output reset
When the special internal relay turns on, the comparison output selected on High-speed Counter Settings turns off.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Comparison
M8030 M8040 M8055 M8166 M8173 R/W
Output Reset
■ Reset input
When reset input is turned on, the current value returns to the reset value.
Reset input
Current value N-1 N N+1 Reset value (initial value)
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Reset Input M8032 M8042 M8057 M8170 M8175 R/W
■ Preset value, reset value storage locations
The preset value and the reset value for the high-speed counter are stored in special data registers as 2 words.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Preset Value
D8052 D8058 D8070 D8136 D8142
(Upper word)
Preset Value
D8053 D8059 D8071 D8137 D8143
(Lower word)
R/W
Reset Value
D8054 D8060 D8072 D8138 D8144
(Upper word)
Reset Value
D8055 D8061 D8073 D8139 D8145
(Lower word)
When the 32-bit data storage setting in the function area settings is set to from Lower Word, the lower word is
stored in the first device.
■ HSC reset input and reset status
When the HSC reset input is enabled in group 1, turn on HSC reset input I2 to return the current value to the reset
value.
In this situation, reset status turns on for only one scan.
HSC reset input
Reset status One scan
Current value N-1 N N+1 Reset value (initial value)
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
HSC Reset Input I2 – – – – –
Reset Status M8033 – – – – R
To use the reset input with group 1 single-phase high-speed counter, use I2 (group 2). When not using I2 as a reset
input, it can be used as normal input, high-speed counters, catch input, interrupt input, or frequency measurements.
■ Count direction flag
These special internal relays maintain whether group 1 current value count is being added or subtracted.
When these special internal relays are on, they indicate addition. When they are off, they indicate subtraction.
1 2 3 4 5
Group Read/Write
(I0 to I1) (I2) (I3) (I4) (I5)
Count Direction
M8037 – – – – R
Flag
3-62 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Timing chart 1
Single-phase high-speed counter (group 5) timing chart
Operating conditions
One preset value is used, and when the values match, output Q1 turns on and the current value is kept.
Overflow and underflow are not used.
3
Current value (D8140, D8141)
Project
14
13
12
11
10
9
8 Preset value 1=6
7 (D8142, D8143)
6
5
4
3
Reset value=2 2
1
(D8144, D8145)
0
Pulse input I5
Reset input M8175
Gate input M8174
One scan
Preset value M8176
Comparison ON status
Preset value 1 Q1
Comparison output Reset
Comparison output M8173
reset
1 When reset input (M8175) turns on, the reset value (D8144, D8155) is stored in the current value (D8140, D8141).
2 When gate input (M8174) turns on, the counting begins.
3 When the current value (D8140, D8141) and preset value 1 (D8142, D8143) match, the preset value 1 comparison
output (Q1) and Comparison ON status (M8176) turn on. When the Keep check box is selected in the settings in the
WindLDR High-speed Counter Settings, the current value is kept.
4 Q1 maintains the on state until comparison output reset (M8173) turns on. Preset value Comparison ON status
(M8176) turns on for only one scan.
5 When the gate output turns off, counting stops.
High-speed counter usage precautions
The high-speed counter starts the count operation with the following two conditions.
• The Touch starts operation.
• The gate input is turned on.
To start the count operation, turn the gate input on from off when the Touch is running. When the gate
input is already on when the Touch is stopped, the count operation starts when the Touch is switched from
stop to run.
When a ladder program is downloaded during the count operation, the count operation stops. The count
operation will restart by setting the Touch to run.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-63
4 Special Functions
● Timing chart 2
Two-phase high-speed counter (group 1) timing chart
Operating conditions
The counting mode is set to 2-edge count and reset input (I2) is used.
Two preset values are used, and when preset value 1 matches, output Q1 turns on and the current value is kept.
When preset value 2 matches, output Q2 turns on and the current value is cleared.
Overflow and underflow are not used.
Current value
14
Preset value 2=14 13
12
11
10
9
Preset value 1=8 8
7
6
5
Reset value=4 4
(D8554, D8555) 3
2
1
0
A-phase I0 1 1
1 0
B-phase I1
UP DOWN
Reset input I2
Reset status M8033
One scan
Gate input M8031
Preset value
Comparison ON status M8034 One scan One scan
Preset value 1
Comparison output Q1
Reset
Preset value 2
Comparison output Q2
Reset
Comparison output
reset M8030
1 When reset input (I2) turns on, the reset value (D8054, D8055) is stored in the current value (D8050, D8051).
In this situation, reset status (M8033) turns on for only one scan.
2 When gate input (M8031) turns on, counting begins.
3 When A-phase pulse (I0) precedes B-phase pulse (I1), the count goes up. When B-phase pulse (I1) precedes A-phase
pulse (I0), the count goes down.
4 When the current value and preset value 1 (D8052, D8053) match, the preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) and
setting value match (M8034) turn on.
When preset value 1 matches, preset value 2 is stored in the preset value (D8052, D8053) as the new preset value
and counting continues.
5 The preset value 1 comparison output (Q1) maintains the on state until comparison output reset (M8030) turns on.
M8034 turns on for only one scan.
3-64 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Example 1
Using the single-phase high-speed counter, this example program turns on external output Q2 when 1,000 pulses are input.
Application description
When pulses are input to input I0 and the count reaches 1,000, output Q2 is turned on.
In the WindLDR Function Area Settings, select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1.
3
Project
In High-speed Counter Settings, configure the settings as follows.
External input : Group 1 (I0 to I1)
Operation Mode : Single-phase High-speed Counter
Counting Mode : Adding Counter
Comparison Action : Comparison Output
Comparison Settings
Tag Name/Device Address : D0000 (data register)
Number of Comparisons :1
Comparison output : Q2 (external output when matched)
Preset value 1 (D4) : 0 (upper word)
Preset value 1 (D5) : 1,000 (lower word)
Keep : Cleared
Reset value (D8054) : 0 (upper word)
Reset value (D8055) : 0 (lower word)
Overflow : Cleared
Underflow : Cleared
Use HSC Reset Input : Cleared
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-65
4 Special Functions
Program
M8120 (initialize pulse) is a special internal relay that turns on for one scan when the Touch runs.
MOV(D) S1- D1- REP 1st scan
1000 D0004 Store 1,000 in preset value 1 (D0004, D0005)
M8120
MOV(D) S1- D1- REP
Store the reset value in D8054, D8055
0 D8054
MOV(W) S1- D1- REP
Store 1 in the next preset value number (D0002)
1 D0002
Turn off gate input (M8031)
M8031
Turn off M0000
M0000
3rd scan
Detect the rising edge of M0000, turn on gate input (M8031)
Start high-speed counter counting in the END processing
M0000 M8031 after the 3rd scan is executed
2nd scan
Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse, M0000 and M8032 turn on
M8120 M0000 Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing
after the 2nd scan is executed
M8032 (reset input) is a special internal relay that stores the preset
M8032 value (D8054, D8055) in the current value (D8050, D8051).
3-66 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Example 2
Using the two-phase high-speed counter, the pulses from a rotary encoder are input to the Touch and a continuous
workpiece is marked at a regular interval.
Application description
• The rotary encoder pulses are input to input I0. A 3
continuous sheet of paper is marked (holes are Paper roll Paper feed roller
Project
punched) at a regular interval (every 2,700
pulses).
• The rotary encoder is directly connected to the
paper feed roller, and output pulses are counted
by the high-speed counter and controlled.
Perforator
• The cycle time is the time to count 2,700 pulses.
Rotary encoder
When the hole punch time is 0.5 seconds, the
operation condition is 2,700 pulse count time >
0.5 seconds.
Touch
Select Two/Single-phase High-speed Counter for Group 1 in the Input Configuration group on Function
Area Settings tab.
In High-speed Counter Settings, configure the settings as follows.
External input : Group 1 (I0 to I1)
Operation Mode : Two-phase High-speed Counter
Counting Mode : 4-edge Count
Comparison Action : Comparison Output
Comparison Settings
Tag Name/Device Address : D0000 (data register)
Number of Comparisons :1
Comparison output : Q2 (external output when matched)
Preset value 1 (D0004) : 0 (upper word)
Preset value 1 (D0005) : 2,700 (lower word)
Keep : Cleared
Reset value (D8054) : 0 (upper word)
Reset value (D8055) : 0 (lower word)
Overflow : Cleared
Underflow : Cleared
Use HSC Reset Input : Cleared
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-67
4 Special Functions
Program
M8120 (initialize pulse) is a special internal relay that turns on for one scan when the Touch runs.
MOV(D) S1- D1- REP 1st scan
2700 D0004 Store 2,700 in preset value 1 (D0004, D0005)
M8120
MOV(D) S1- D1- REP
Store 0 in the reset value (D8054, D8055)
0 D8054
MOV(W) S1- D1- REP
Store 1 in the next preset value number (D0002)
1 D0002
Turn off gate input (M8031)
M8031
Turn off M0000
M0000
3rd scan
Detect the rising edge of M0000, turn on gate input (M8031)
SOTU Start high-speed counter counting in the END processing after the 3rd
M0000 M8031 scan is executed
2nd scan
SOTD Detect the falling edge of the initialize pulse, M0000 and M8032 turn on
M8120 M0000
Initialize the current value with the reset value in the END processing
after the 2nd scan is executed
M8032 (reset input) is a special internal relay that stores the reset
value (D8054, D8055) in the current value (D8050, D8051).
M8032
When the current value becomes 2,700 pulses, comparison
TIM T0 output Q2 turns on
5 The timer starts and comparison output reset (M8030) turns on after
Q2 M8030
five seconds
Current value
Preset value 1=2,700
2,700 pulses
Reset value 0
Comparison output Q2
Perforation time: 0.5 seconds
In this example, Z-phase reset input is not used.
3-68 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
4.8 Catch Input
This section explains catch inputs, which reliably capture short pulses such as sensor signals.
● Feature Description
Catch inputs are used to capture short pulses that change within the timeframe of a single scan. If catch inputs are
used, ON/OFF states are stored in special internal relays (M8091 to M8094) corresponding to each group of external
3
inputs, in accordance with the state of the external inputs during the time of one scan, and these signals can be used
Project
as input conditions. When a pulse is captured, the special internal relays turns ON or OFF during a single scan. If the
pulse is captured again during the next scan, the special internal relays will again turn ON/OFF during the scan.
To use catch inputs, specify Catch Input for the external input group that uses catch inputs under Function Area
Settings in WindLDR.
Catching Rising Edge of Input Pulse
*1
Actual Input
Catch Input Relay
(M8090-M8095)
END 1 scan time
Processed
Catching Falling Edge of Input Pulse
*1
Actual Input
Catch Input Relay
(M8090-M8095)
END 1 scan time
Processed
Catch Input Specifications
Minimum Turn ON Pulse Width: 50 μsec/Minimum Turn OFF Pulse Width: 50 μsec
● Input
The Touch inputs can be configured as normal inputs, high-speed counters, catch inputs, interrupt inputs, or
frequency measurement. To use catch inputs, specify Catch Input for the applicable group under Function Area
Settings.
Group 1 2 3 4 5
External Input I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5
Catch Input – – Catch Input Catch Input Catch Input Catch Input
The states of external inputs assigned to catch inputs are stored in the following special internal relays for each
group. (Read Only)
Group Catch Input Special Internal Relay for Catch Input
Group 2 I2 M8091
Group 3 I3 M8093
Group 4 I4 M8094
Group 5 I5 M8095
The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I6 and I7 as catch inputs on Touch.
Input filter settings have no effect on the catch inputs.
*1 When two or more pulses enter within one scan, subsequent pulses are ignored.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-69
4 Special Functions
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select Catch Input in the Groups 1 through 6 pull-down list boxes.
The Catch Input dialog box is displayed.
4 Select Catch Input Rising Edge or Catch Input Falling Edge in the pull-down list, and then click OK.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
● Example
Input I2 is designated as a catch input to maintain M0000 in the self-holding circuit.
This example demonstrates a program to maintain a catch input status for more than one scan.
When input I2 is turned on, special internal relay
M8091 is turned on, and M0000 is maintained in
M8091 M0001 M0000 the self-holding circuit.
When M0001 is turned on, the self-holding
circuit is unlatched, and M0000 is turned off.
M0000
3-70 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
4.9 Interrupt Input
This section explains interrupt inputs, which can be used to interrupt execution of a ladder program by means of an
external input to execute a subroutine.
● Feature Description
In the processing of normal ladder programs, execution proceeds iteratively from beginning to end, but if an interrupt
3
input is used, ladder program execution can be temporarily paused in order to execute a subroutine, irrespective of
Project
scans. With an interrupt input, a subroutine of predetermined label No. is run as an interrupt program when the
external input is turned ON. When processing of the subroutine program is ended, execution of the interrupt program
resumes. Up to 4 interrupt inputs can be set for external input groups 2 to 5.
● Function Specification
The Touch inputs can be configured as normal inputs, high-speed counters, catch inputs, interrupt inputs, or
frequency measurement. To use catch inputs, specify Interrupt Input for the applicable group under Function Area
Settings.
Jump destination label Nos. are stored in special data registers (D8033 to D8035, D8037, D8038).
Whether or not an interrupt input is allowed can be checked by the interrupt input state of the special internal relay
(ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited).
Group 1 2 3 4 5
External Input I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5
Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt Interrupt
Interrupt input – –
input input input input
Special Data Register
– – D8033 D8035 D8037 D8038
(Jump Destination Label No.)
Special Internal Relay
(Interrupt Input Status): – – M8071 M8073 M8074 M8075
Read only
The 12-I/O type cannot use external inputs I6 and I7 as interrupt inputs on Touch.
● Disable and Enable Interrupts
The interrupt inputs I2, I3, I4, and I5 and timer interrupt are normally enabled while the Touch is running, and can
also be individually disabled using the DI instruction or enabled using the EI instruction. When interrupt inputs I2, I3,
I4, and I5 are enabled, special internal relay are turned on, respectively. For details, refer to Chapter 16 "Interrupt
Control Instructions" in "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
When the Touch starts operation, interrupt inputs are set to the interrupt allowed state.
● Notes for Using Interrupt Inputs and Timer Interrupt:
• When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt, separate the interrupt program from the main program using the
END instruction at the end of the main program.
• When an interrupt program calls another subroutine, a maximum of 3 subroutine calls can be nested. If more than
3 calls are nested, a ladder program execution error occurs.
• When using an interrupt input or timer interrupt, include the label number of the interrupt program to be executed
when an interrupt occurs. The label numbers stored in data registers D8033 through D8035, D8037, and D8038
specify the interrupt programs for interrupt inputs I2, I3, I4, and I5 and timer interrupt, respectively.
• When more than one interrupt input is turned on at the same time, interrupt program execution is given priority to
inputs I2, I3, I4 and I5, in that order. If an interrupt is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, the
subsequent interrupt program is executed after the prior interrupt is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot
be executed simultaneously.
• Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.
• Interrupt programs cannot use some instructions. For details, refer to Chapter 12 “3 Ladder Instruction Reference”
on page 12-13.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-71
4 Special Functions
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select Interrupt Input in the Groups 1 through 6 pull-down list boxes.
The Interrupt Input dialog box is displayed.
4 Select Interrupt Input Rising Edge, Interrupt Input Falling Edge or Interrupt Both Edges in the pull-down
list, and then click OK.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
3-72 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Example program
The following example demonstrates a program using the interrupt input function, with input I2 designated as an
interrupt input. When the interrupt input is turned on, the input I0 status is immediately transferred to output Q0
using the IOREF (I/O refresh) instruction before the END instruction is executed.
M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
D8033 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for 3
interrupt input I2.
Project
The interrupt program is separated from the main program by
the END instruction.
When input I2 is on, program execution jumps to label 0.
M8125 is an always On special internal relay.
, IOREF immediately reads input I0 status to internal relay
M0300.
M0300 turns on or off the output Q0 internal memory.
4
Another IOREF immediately writes the output Q0 internal
memory status to actual output Q0.
4
Program execution returns to the main program.
Insert LRET at the end of the subroutine to return to the main
program.
To change input/output information during execution of an interrupt program, use the IOREF (Input/Output
Refresh) instruction. The IOREF instruction is used to freely change input/output data before the END scan.
For details, refer to Chapter 15 "Refresh Instruction" in "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-73
4 Special Functions
4.10 Frequency Measurement
This section describes frequency measurement, which measures the input frequency.
● Feature Description
These input pulses are processed in hardware, so frequencies can be measured with no relation to the scan time.
Groups that do not use frequency measurement can be used as normal inputs, high-speed counters, catch input, or
interrupt input. The measurement results are stored in special data registers and being updated with each scan.
● Function Specification
The Touch inputs can be configured as normal input, high-speed counters, catch input, interrupt input, and frequency
measurement. To use frequency measurement, specify the relevant group as Frequency Measurement in
Function Area Settings tab.
The frequency measurement results are stored in the following special data registers. (Read-only)
Any one of Groups 2, 3, 4, or 5 can be freely set.
Inputs I6 and I7 cannot be used for frequency measurement.
Group 1 2 3 4 5
External Input I0 I2 I3 I4 I5
Upper
Frequency – D8056 D8068 D8134 D8140
word
measurement
value (32 bits) Lower – D8057 D8069 D8135 D8141
word
Frequency measurement
200Hz to 10kHz
range
Less than ±1%
Measurement error
(Truncated after the decimal point)
Calculation cycle Each scan time
If the input pulse cycle is longer than the scan time, the measurement results are updated at pulse cycle + 1
scan time.
3-74 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Procedure
To use frequency measurement, you must configure it in the Function Area Settings and download the ladder
program to the Touch. Frequency measurements will start when you download the ladder program and set the Touch
to run.
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts. 3
Project
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Specify Frequency Measurement for the group to use frequency measurement.
4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-75
4 Special Functions
4.11 Input Filter
The input filter function is used to reject input noises. The catch input function described in the preceding section is
used to read short input pulses to special internal relays.
● Feature Description
The input filter rejects short input pulses when the Touch is used with input signals containing noises.
Different input filter values can be selected for inputs I0 through I7 in four groups using the Function Area Settings.
Selectable input filter values to pass input signals are 0 millisecond, and 3 through 15 milliseconds in 1 millisecond
increments. Default value is 3 milliseconds for all inputs I0 through I7. Inputs I10 and above on Touch are provided
with a fixed filter of 3 milliseconds.
Chattering Input signals
Input Filter Values and Input Operation
Depending on the selected values, the input filter has three response areas to reject or pass input signals.
• Input signals : Input signals do not pass the filter (selected filter value minus 2 milliseconds).
• Pass area : Input signals pass the filter (selected filter value).
• Indefinite area : Input signals may be rejected or passed.
The input filter rejects inputs shorter than the selected input filter value minus 2 milliseconds.
Example: Input Filter
To reject input pulses of 6 milliseconds or less, select input filter value of 8 milliseconds. Then input pulses of 8
milliseconds plus one scan time are accepted correctly at the END processing.
6 msec 8 msec
Rejected Indefinite Accepted
• Signals that pass through input filters are not necessarily captured as inputs. Normal inputs require a
pulse width of the filter value plus one scan time to receive input signals.
• If external inputs are set as high-speed counters, interrupt inputs, frequency measurement, or analog
inputs, input filters are disabled.
3-76 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
Project
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 If an input to which an input filter is applied is not a normal input, select Normal Input in the corresponding group.
4 Select an input filter value for each group of inputs.
The columns displayed next to
I0000 indicate I0 to I7.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-77
4 Special Functions
4.12 Analog Input
This section describes how to input analog signals such as those from pressure sensors.
● Feature Description
The Touch is equipped with two analog inputs. This function acquires 0 to 10V DC from analog output device and
converting it to 0 to 1000 digital values. The converted analog signals are stored in special data registers. Inputs that
are not specified as analog inputs are digital inputs.
For the on or off judgment threshold value when digital input is specified, refer to Chapter 29 “SmartAXIS
Specifications” on page 29-1.
When analog input is configured as digital input, the input filter is active.
Analog input value storage locations
A maximum of two analog inputs can be used. The converted analog signals are stored in special data registers
(D8040 and D8041 : read-only) as values between 0 and 1,000. These values are updated with each scan.
Analog input (I) 0 1
Special data register that stores
D8040 D8041
the analog input value
● Analog Input Filter
The analog input data is averaged by the specified filter count. This can reduce rapid fluctuations in analog input.
The larger the filter value set, the slower the tracking of the change in analog input becomes.
Count Description
0 No filtering
1 to 255 The input value is set as the average value of n samples of analog input data. (n: Count)
When filtering, the input value is calculated with the equation below.
Total analog input values for filter count (n) worth of scans
Analog input value after filtering =
Filter count n
● Analog Input Allocation
Input (I) 0 ... 5 6 7
Analog input (AI) – – – 0 1
Special data register that stores
– – – D8040 D8041
the analog input value
3-78 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Procedure
To use analog input, you must configure the Function Area Settings tab and download the ladder program to the
Touch.
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
3
Project
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select Analog for the external input to use as analog input and specify Filter Count.
Click Default to set all the external inputs to digital.
4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-79
4 Special Functions
4.13 Timer Interrupt
This section describes the timer interrupt that executes the interrupt program at a regular time interval.
● Feature Description
The timer interrupt is a function that executes a subroutine program with a predetermined label number as the
interrupt program at a regular time interval. The Function Area Settings dialog box is used to enable the timer
interrupt and to specify the interval, from 10 to 140 milliseconds, to execute the timer interrupt. When the timer
interrupt is enabled, the program execution jumps to the jump destination label number stored in special data register
D8036 repeatedly while the Touch is running.
D8036 Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No. R/W
A label is the starting address of the program branch to jump to, and it is specified by the LABEL instruction.
● Disable and Enable Interrupts
The timer interrupt is normally enabled while the Touch is running, and can also be individually disabled using the DI
instruction or enabled using the EI instruction. When timer interrupt is enabled, Touch is turned on. When disabled,
Touch is turned off.
For details, refer to Chapter 16 "Interrupt Control Instructions" in "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
● Notes for Using Timer Interrupt and Interrupt Inputs
• When using a timer interrupt or interrupt input, separate the interrupt program from the main program using the
END instruction at the end of the main program.
• When an interrupt program calls another subroutine, a maximum of 3 subroutine calls can be nested. If more than
3 calls are nested, a ladder program execution error occurs.
• The label numbers stored in data registers D8036 specify the interrupt programs for interrupt inputs I2, I3, I4, and
I5 and timer interrupt, respectively.
• If an interrupt is initiated while another interrupt program is executed, the subsequent interrupt program is
executed after the prior interrupt is completed. Multiple interrupt programs cannot be executed simultaneously.
• Make sure that the execution time of the interrupt program is shorter than interrupt intervals sufficiently.
• Interrupt programs cannot use some instructions. For details, refer to Chapter 12 “3 Ladder Instruction Reference”
on page 12-13.
3-80 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Procedure
To use timer interrupt, you must configure it in the Function Area Settings in WindLDR and download the ladder
program to the Touch.
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click .
WindLDR starts.
3
Project
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Input Configuration.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the Use Timer Interrupt check box.
4 Specify an interval to execute the timer interrupt.
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
● Example Program
The following example demonstrates a program of using the timer interrupt function.
M8120 is the initialize pulse special internal relay.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
0 D8036 D8036 stores 0 to designate jump destination label 0 for timer
M8120
interrupt.
Main Program
The interrupt program is separated from the main program by the
END END instruction.
While the SmartAXIS is running, program execution jumps to label
LABEL
0 repeatedly at intervals selected in the Function Area Settings.
0
Each time the interrupt program is completed, program execution
Interrupt Program returns to the main program at the address where timer interrupt
occurred.
LRET
Insert LRET at the end of the subroutine to return to the main
program.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-81
4 Special Functions
4.14 Watchdog Timer Setting
This section describes watchdog timer setting with monitoring the operation state of the Touch.
● Feature Description
A watchdog error occurs when the processing time for one scan exceeds the allowed time while the ladder program is
running.
If a watchdog error occurs, the system is reset with the purpose of returning the system to normal operation.
If the watchdog error occurs frequently, you can assume that there is a hardware problem and that the Touch
requires replacement.
Some of the reasons why a watchdog timer will occur are problems with the Touch hardware and the length of the
processing time in the ladder program. If the processing time for one scan of the ladder program exceeds the time
configured for the watchdog timer, place a NOP (no operation) instruction in the ladder program. The watchdog timer
is reset when the NOP instruction is executed.
Watchdog timer setting time
The watchdog timer setting time can be changed in the function area settings. Decide on the watchdog timer setting
time in either of the following two ways.
• Decide by user system specification
For example, when the watchdog timer is set to 100 milliseconds and the maximum value for one scan is 120
milliseconds, insert a NOP instruction in the ladder program to adjust that the error does not occur.
• Match the ladder program processing time
Check the maximum value for one scan (D8024) and set the watchdog timer value as a value with a safety margin
added to the maximum value.
Select the watch dog timer setting between 100 milliseconds and 5,000 milliseconds. The default time is 400
milliseconds.
When changing the watchdog timer setting value, select an appropriate value that fully takes into
consideration the safety of the system.
The ladder program execution time can be checked with the value of LSD38.
3-82 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Procedure
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
Project
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Self Diagnostic.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the preset value for watchdog timer.
4 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-83
4 Special Functions
4.15 Daylight Savings Time
This section describes the function that automatically adjusts the Touch real time clock according to the daylight
savings time settings.
● Feature Description
For regions where the Touch is used that implement daylight savings time, this function can automatically adjust the
Touch clock using the daylight savings time settings. When the time becomes the daylight savings time start time, the
clock is set an hour forward. When the time becomes the the daylight savings time end time, the clock is set an hour
back.
The Touch adjusts the clock for daylight savings time on the start day and the end day. However, the clock is also
adjusted for daylight savings time under the following conditions.
• When a ladder program was downloaded to the Touch.
• When the Touch power is turned on.
When the current time of the Touch internal clock is set using System Area or special data registers, the time is not
adjusted for daylight savings time, even if the time after it was set is within the daylight savings time period. Set the
clock to the time adjusted for daylight savings time. The set date and time becomes the date and time after being
adjusted for daylight savings time.
● Procedure
Configure daylight savings time on the Touch.
1 On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Control Function).
WindLDR starts.
2 On the WindLDR Configuration tab, in the Function Area Settings group, click Calendar & Clock.
The Function Area Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Select the Enable Daylight Saving Time check box.
4 Configure the start time and the end time. Specify the region using the Region list box.
If you select Custom, you are able to select any desired start time and end time.
Region Start time End time
Custom User specified User specified
USA or Canada March, 2nd Sunday, 2:00 AM November, 1st Sunday, 2:00 AM
Europe March, last Sunday, 1:00 AM October, last Sunday, 1:00 AM
Australia October, 1st Sunday, 2:00 AM April, 1st Sunday, 3:00 AM
5 Click OK.
This concludes configuring the settings.
3-84 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
4.16 Clock Function
This section describes the internal clock function on the Touch.
● Feature Description
This function enable you to control time based applications such as lighting or air conditioning equipment using the
current time data stored in special data registers. The internal clock data is backed up by a secondary lithium battery.
3
The current time is reset when the backup data is lost, so the current time will need to be set again.
Project
Function Description
The current time (calendar, clock) is updated every 500 milliseconds and automatically
Read clock
stored in the special data registers.
Set clock Sets the current time (calendar, clock). Uses the System Area or special data registers.
When clock data adjust flag M8021 is turned on from off, the seconds for the current time
are rounded up or rounded down based on 30 seconds to correct the seconds data for the
internal clock.
Adjust function If the current seconds are between 0 and 29 seconds, the seconds are set to 0 when M8021
is turned on from off.
If the current seconds are between 30 and 59 seconds, the minutes are set to + 1 and the
seconds are set to 0 when M8021 is turned on from off.
This relay turns on if clock write processing or a clock adjust processing could
M8013:
not be executed normally.
Calendar/clock error
This relay turns on if an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read from
M8014:
the internal clock to the special data registers (D8008 to D8014).
● Setting the Clock
The current time can be set on the Touch by using special data registers D8015 to D8021. Undefined values are
stored in special data registers D8015 to D8021. Always store an appropriate value before turning on M8016, M8017,
or M8020.
■ Calendar Data Write Flag (M8016)
After writing data to special data registers D8015 to D8018, turn M8016 on to set the internal clock with the data in
D8015 to D8018 as the calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week).
■ Clock Data Write Flag (M8017)
After writing data to special data registers D8019 to D8021, turn M8017 on to set the internal clock with the data in
D8019 to D8021 as the clock data (hour, minute, second).
■ Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag (M8020)
After writing data to special data registers D8015 to D8021, turn M8020 on to set the internal clock with the data in
D8015 to D8021 as the calendar data (year, month, day, day of the week) and the clock data (hour, minute, second).
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-85
4 Special Functions
Calendar and clock data storage locations
The calendar/clock data is stored in the following special data registers.
Special data
Description Range Setting timing
register
D8008 Year 0 to 99
D8009 Month 1 to 12
D8010 Day 1 to 31 Every 500 msec
Calendar/Clock
If the scan time is 500 msec
D8011 Current Data Day of the week 0 to 6
or longer, D8008 to D8014 are
(Read only)
D8012 Hour 0 to 23 updated with each scan.
D8013 Minute 0 to 59
D8014 Second 0 to 59
D8015 Year 0 to 99
D8016 Month 1 to 12
D8017 Day 1 to 31
Calendar/Clock
D8018 New Data Day of the week 0 to 6 –
(Write only)
D8019 Hour 0 to 23
D8020 Minute 0 to 59
D8021 Second 0 to 59
For the day of the week data, the values below are stored in the special data registers.
Day of the
Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday
week
Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
3-86 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Special Functions
● Example 1
This example sets the calendar and clock in a ladder program.
If you turn on M8020 with the new calendar/clock data set in the write-only data registers D8015 to D8021, the
internal clock on the Touch is updated with the current time (calendar, clock). In this example, the Touch internal
clock is set to 9:35:00 on Tuesday February 21, 2012.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
M8120 is the initialize pulse that turns on for only one scan 3
12 D0000
at the start of operation.
Project
M8120
When the Touch starts operating, the new calendar/clock
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP data is stored in D0000 to D0006 with the MOV (move)
2 D0001 instruction.
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
21 D0002
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
2 D0003
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
9 D0004
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP
35 D0005
MOV(W) S1 – D1 – REP When external input I0000 turns on, the new calendar data
0 D0006 is stored in special data registers D8015 to D8018.
Internal relay M0000 turns on for one scan only.
SOTU MOV(W) S1 R D1 R REP
I0000 D0000 D8015 4
When external input I1 turns on, the new clock data is
stored in special data registers D8019 to D8021.
M0000
Internal relay M0001 turns on for one scan only.
SOTU MOV(W) S1 R D1 R REP
I0001 D0004 D8019 3
When external input M0000 or M0001 turns on, M8020
turns on and the calendar/clock data is written to the
M0001 internal clock.
(M8020: Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag)
M0000 M8020
M8125 is a special internal relay that is always on during
operation.
M0001
While the Touch is running, the current time (calendar,
MOV(W) S1 R D1 R REP clock) is stored in D0010 to D0016 with the MOV
M8125 D8008 D0010 7
instruction.
● Example 2
When I1 turns on, the seconds on the internal clock are corrected to 0 seconds.
SOTU
I1 M8021
When input I1 turns on, clock data adjust flag M8021 turns on to correct the seconds on the internal clock.
The internal clock backup time is approximately 30 days (25°C TYP). If the power loss time exceeds the
backup time, the retained clock data is lost and the current time is initialized as 00:00:00 on January 1,
2000.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 3-87
5 Project Restrictions
5 Project Restrictions
5.1 Download Restrictions
■ Project Data Size
The size of the project data that can be downloaded to the Touch is approx. 5.6 MB max (including additional fonts).
• To check the project data size, on the Home tab, in the Project group, click Target Info. The Target
Information dialog box is displayed. The project data size can be checked with Memory Space (byte)
under Target Runtime Information.
• The project data size varies based on the fonts downloaded to the Touch. For details, refer to Chapter 2
“Font Size” on page 2-9.
■ Number of Parts
The number of parts that can be downloaded to the Touch are as follows.
Parts Number of parts
Total number of Bit Buttons, Word Buttons, Goto Screen Buttons, Multi Buttons, Key
32,000 max.
Buttons
Selector switches 200 max.
5.2 Maximum Number of External Devices
■ Project
The maximum number of external devices used in global script trigger conditions, user communication trigger
conditions, and global scripts that can be used in a single set of project data is 100 devices.
If the same device address is used in multiple device settings, the number of used devices is counted as
one. It is not counted as one device per device setting.
■ Data Log Settings
A maximum of 128 external devices can be used in the Data Log settings.
Even if the same device address is used in multiple device settings, the number of used devices is counted
as one device for each device setting.
■ Scripts
The restrictions on the number of external devices that can be used in a single script are as follows.
Item Number of devices
Destination external devices 64 max.
Source external devices 64 max.
If the same device address is used in multiple device settings, the number of used devices is counted as
one. It is not counted as one device per device setting.
3-88 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 4 Screen
This chapter provides an overview of the Touch screen and describes how to setup and operate the screen.
1 Screen Overview
1.1 Screen Types
4
The types of screens can be created with the WindO/I-NV3 are given below.
Screen
Touch
1230 7 8 9 CLR Popup Screen
Base Screen 4 5 6 CAN
7 8 9 CLR
1 2 3
ENT
4 5 6 CAN
1230 0 .
1 2 3
ENT
0 .
1230 7 8 9 CLR
4 5 6 CAN
Maintenance Screen
1 2 3
ENT
0 .
Screen Type Screen No. Description
The screen that is displayed when the Touch is in Run Mode. Drawing
Base Screen 1 to 3,000 objects and functional parts can be created mainly on this screen which
is displayed on the Touch.
Screens that can
The Popup Screen that is displayed on the Base Screen when the
be created with
Touch is in Run Mode. The size and coordinates of the screen can be
WindO/I-NV3
Popup Screen 1 to 3,015 specified and this screen can also be moved on the Base Screen.
A Popup Screen for the standard Keypad*1 will automatically be
created in screen numbers 3,001 to 3,015.
Using the screen that is displayed when the Touch is in Run Mode, you
Screen
Maintenance can switch from Run Mode to System Mode and load a screen to adjust
provided by the –
Screen Device Monitor and screen brightness.
Touch
For details, refer to Chapter 28 “1 Maintenance Screen” on page 28-1.
1.2 Screen Size
The size of the Base Screen is equal the size of the Touch screen. The Base Screen size is 240 x 100 dots.
*1 The Keypad that is displayed when operating Numerical and Character Input parts when Standard is selected under Type
in the Keypad menu for Numerical and Character Input parts.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-1
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
2.1 Creating Screens
This section describes how to create Base Screens and Popup Screens.
● Creating a screen
1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow under New.
2 Click Base Screen or Popup Screen.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.
To edit the properties for a Base Screen or Popup Screen that has already been created, double click an
area in the editing window with no objects.
3 Change the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
2.2 Opening Screens
● Opening a screen
You can open a single screen that has already been created.
Double click the screen to open in the Project window.
If you right click a screen in the Project window and then click Open Screens, the Open Screens dialog
box is displayed.
4-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
● Opening specific screens
You can open multiple screens as a group.
1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow to the right of Open.
2 Click the Base Screen or the Popup Screen.
The Open Screens dialog box is displayed.
Screen
If you right click a screen folder in the Project window and then click Open Screens, the Open Screens
dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the screens to open in Screen List, and then click OK.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to open from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
● Opening the previous or next screen
You can open the screen with the previous screen number or the next screen number of the screen displayed in the
active editing window.
To open the screen with the previous screen number, click (Open Previous Screen) in the Screens group on the
Home tab. To open the screen with the next screen number, click (Open Next Screen).
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-3
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
2.3 Saving Screens
● Saving a screen
You can save a single screen.
Right click the screen to save in the Project window, and then click Save Screens.
● Saving only specific screens
You can save multiple screens as a group.
1 Right click a screen folder in the Project window, and then click Save Screens.
The Save Screens dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the screens to save in Screen List, and then click OK.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to save from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen
4-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
■ Screen List
This list shows the screens being edited.
■ Select All
Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List.
● Saving a screen with a different screen number
You can save the screen being edited with a different screen number.
1 Right click a screen in the Project window, and then click Save Screen As.
4
The Save Screen As dialog box is displayed.
Screen
2 Specify the screen number after saving, and then click OK.
■ New No.
Specify the screen number (Base Screen: 1 to 3000, Popup Screen: 1 to 3015) after saving.
■ Screen Title
Enter or change the screen title. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
If you specify an existing screen number and then click OK, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the screen.
• Click No to stop saving the screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-5
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
2.4 Closing Screens
● Closing the displayed screen
You can close the active editing window.
Click in the upper-right of the editing window.
● Closing all screens
You can close all the editing windows.
On the View tab, in the Window group, click Close All.
4-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
● Closing a specific screen
You can close multiple editing windows as a group.
1 Right click a screen folder in the Project window, and then click Close Screens.
The Close Screens dialog box is displayed.
Screen
2 Click the screens to close in Screen List, and then click OK.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to close from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen
■ Screen List
This list shows the screens being edited.
■ Select All
Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List.
If you specify an unsaved screen and then click OK, a save confirmation message is displayed.
• Click Yes to save the screen and close it.
• Click No to close the screen without saving the changes.
• Click Cancel to stop saving the screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-7
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
2.5 Duplicating Screens
You can copy a screen that has already been created to create a new screen.
1 Right click a screen folder or screen in the Project window, and then click Duplicate Screens.
The Duplicate Screens dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the screens to copy in Screen List.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
3 Specify Screen No. for the new screen and the Number of copies to duplicate, and then click OK.
■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to duplicate from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
■ Screen No.
Specify the screen number (Base Screen: 1 to 3000, Popup Screen: 1 to 3015) for the new screen.
■ Number of copies
Specify the number of screens to copy (Base Screen: 1 to 2999, Popup Screen: 1 to 3014).
4-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
• If multiple screens are selected in Screen List or if the Number of copies is 2 or more, consecutive
screen numbers are added to the screens starting with the number specified in Screen No..
Example: When a screen with screen number of 1 is selected in Screen List, the Number of copies is
3, and Screen No. is 100 is selected, then the screen numbers after duplication are “100”,
“101”, “102”.
Screen No.: 1 Screen No.: 100
Number of copies: 3 99
Copy 99
Screen No.: 100
Screen List’s numbers: 1 4
Screen No.: 101
Screen
99
Screen No.: 102
99
Example: When screens with screen numbers 3 and 5 are selected in Screen List, the Number of
copies is 2, and Screen No. is 100 is selected, then the screen numbers after duplication are
“100” and “102” for the screens duplicated from screen number 3 and “101” and “103” for the
screens duplicated from screen number 5.
Screen No.: 3 Screen No.: 100
99
Copy 99
Number of copies: 2
Screen No.: 100 Screen No.: 5 Screen No.: 101
Screen List’s numbers: 3, 5 Copy
Full Full
Screen No.: 102
99
Screen No.: 103
Full
• If a screen number already exists after copying and you click OK on the Duplicate Screens dialog box, an
overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
- Click Yes to overwrite the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message.
- Click Yes To All to overwrite all the screens.
- Click No to display the next confirmation message without copying the screen with the number
displayed in the confirmation message.
- Click Cancel to stop copying screens.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-9
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
2.6 Deleting Screens
● Deleting a screen
You can delete a single screen.
1 Right click the screen to delete in the Project window, and then click Delete Screens.
A delete confirmation message is displayed.
2 Click Yes.
The screen is deleted.
Click No or Cancel to stop deleting the screen.
● Deleting specific screens
You can delete multiple screens as a group.
1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click Delete.
The Delete Screens dialog box is displayed.
If you right click a screen folder in the Project window and then click Delete Screens, the Delete Screens
dialog box is displayed.
4-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
2 Click the screens to delete in Screen List, and then click OK.
A delete confirmation message is displayed.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
Screen
■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to delete from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created.
■ Select All
Selects all the screens displayed in Screen List.
3 Click Yes or Yes To All.
• Click Yes to delete the screen with the number displayed in the confirmation message. When deleting multiple
screens, the next message to confirm deleting a screen is displayed.
• Click Yes To All to delete all the screens without displaying the confirmation message.
• Click No to display the next message to confirm deleting a screen without deleting the screen with the number
displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop deleting screens.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-11
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
2.7 Reusing Screens
You can copy screens from other project data.
1 On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click Reuse.
If you right click a screen folder or screen in the Project window and then click Reuse Screens, the Open
dialog box is displayed.
2 Select project data that includes the screens to copy, and then click OK.
The Open Screens dialog box is displayed.
If a password has been configured for the project data, the Password Screen will be displayed. Select user
name and enter password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
3 Click the screens to copy in Screen List, and then click OK.
To select multiple screens, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
■ Screen Type
Select the type of screen to copy from the following items. The selected screen type is displayed in Screen List.
All, Base Screen, Popup Screen
■ Screen List
This list shows screens included in the source project data.
4-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Creating and Manipulating WindO/I-NV3 Screens
If the screen number of the screen to copy, a picture included in the screen, a text ID, or a script ID already
exists in the project data being edited, an overwrite message is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the item displayed in the confirmation message. If there are multiple redundant
items, a confirmation message is displayed for each of those items.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all of the picture numbers, pictures, text IDs, and script IDs.
• Click No to display a dialog box for each setting. Change the item to a unique screen number or ID
number, and then click OK.
• Click Cancel to stop overwriting the displayed in the confirmation message. If there are multiple
redundant items, a confirmation message is displayed for each of those items.
4
Screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-13
3 Base Screen
3 Base Screen
The screen that is displayed when the Touch is in Run Mode. This screen places drawing objects and parts on the
base and creates a screen that is displayed on the Touch.
3.1 Base Screen Settings
● General Tab
■ Screen Type
Select Base Screen as the screen type.
You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen.
■ No.
Enter the Base Screen’s screen number (1 to 3000).
■ Title
Enter the Base Screen’s title. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Size
Shows the screen size. You cannot change the size of Base Screens.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created. It is only displayed when creating a new screen.
4-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Base Screen
● Options Tab
Screen
■ Background Color
Select the screen’s background color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades). Click this button to open the color
palette. Select color with the color palette.
When Overlay with Base Screen is configured, the background color for the Base Screen specified as the
background is displayed.
■ Backlight color*1
Select the backlight color for the screen from the following options.
“White”, “Red”, “Pink”
■ Overlay with Base Screen
Configure this section to display the Base Screen by overlaying screens.
1 to 5: Select these to display the Base Screen by overlaying screens.
No.: Enter the overlay screen’s screen number (1 to 3000).
Coordinates X, Y: Specify the display location of the overlay screen in coordinates. The coordinates can be set
in the range (Screen size - 1 dot).
The origin is the upper-left corner of the screen and the X- and Y-coordinates correspond to
the upper-left corner of the overlay window.
X
(0, 0)
Base Screen
Y
Overlay screen
*1 Monochrome LCD models only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-15
3 Base Screen
■ Display the Order of Overlapping Screens
You can select the display order of the Base Screen and the overlay screens.
Example:To display the Base Screen being edited as the background
Overlay screen
(5 screens max)
Base Screen being edited
Example: To display the Base Screen being edited above overlay screen: 3
Base Screen being edited
Overlay screen: 3
■ Blink
Select one of the following items as the setting when the screen is blinking.
None: Displays the screen.
Blink (1 sec cycle): The screen display is blinked in one second intervals.
Blink (0.5 sec cycle): The screen display is blinked in half second intervals.
Backlight OFF: Turns off the backlight until the screen is touched or until System Area 1 (address+1, bit 0 or
bit 7) is set to 1.
■ Focus Order
Sets the focus order for Numerical Input and Character Input. The focus order is the order the focus moves between
Numerical Input or Character Input when the user presses the ENT key. Text can be input in Numerical Input or
Character Input that has focus. The focus order number starts from 0.
Vertical: The focus moves vertically from top to bottom.
Horizontal: The focus moves horizontally from left to right.
Custom: Sets the desired order for moving the focus.
On the View tab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the parts in the
order to move the focus.
The focus moves in the following order when Numerical Input and Character Input on the screen is not
aligned to the left or top.
Vertical 1 Horizontal 1 2
1234 1234 67
4 3
5 890
4
2 5
67
Y-axis up to down
3
890
X-axis left to right
4-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Base Screen
■ Security Group
Select the security group to restrict the screen display.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the User Accounts dialog box.
None: Any user can open this screen.
Administrator, Operator,
Reader, (Created security group): Only a selected user can open this screen.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group in the Security Group Settings 4
dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups”
Screen
on page 21-15.
For details about the security function, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on
page 21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-17
3 Base Screen
3.2 Displaying Layered Base Screens
It is possible to layer and display multiple Base Screens. The coordinates and display order for layered screens can be
set on the screen that will serve as the base. The maximum number of layered screens is five screens.
■ Coordinates
Using the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left area of the layered screen become the X and Y
coordinates.
X
(0, 0)
Base Screen
Y
Overlay screen
■ Display Order
This allows you to select the order of display for the screen that will serve as the base and layered screens.
Example:Displaying a Base Screen that is currently being edited as the bottom most layer
Overlay screen
(5 screens max)
Base Screen being edited
Example: Displaying a Base Screen currently being edited on the layered screen: 3.
Base Screen being edited
Overlay screen: 3
For details about how to configure these settings, refer to “3.1 Base Screen Settings” on page 4-14.
Example: When Base Screen: 100 which has a clock placed in it is used as a layered screen, Base Screen:1 which is
displayed as the base and Base Screen: 2 will be displayed as follows:
Layered Screen
Base Screen: 1 Base Screen: 100 Base Screen: 2
130 110
Displayed as Displayed as
the base 100 the base
120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00
Layering Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1 Display for Base Screen: 2
130 110
100
120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00 11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00
4-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Base Screen
• Layered screens that have been set as layered screens will not be displayed on the screen that is
displayed as the base.
Example:Layering and displaying Base Screen: 100 on Base Screen: 1
Layering and displaying Base Screen: 101 on Base Screen: 100
Base Screen: 101
Layered Screen 0
Layered Screen
Displayed as
Base Screen: 1 Base Screen: 100 4
the base 130
Screen
100
120
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00 Layering
Display for Base Screen: 100
0
Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1 0 130
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00
130 100
120 Layered Screen (Base Screen:
100
101) is displayed.
120 11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00
11/Feb./22 Tue. 12:00 Layered Screen (Base
Screen: 101) is not
displayed.
• Drawing objects and parts from layered screens may not display properly when placed outside of the
displayed area.
Displayed as the base
Layered Screen
Outside of the display area
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-19
3 Base Screen
3.3 Operating When Drawing Objects and Parts Overlap
Place drawing objects and parts or parts with other parts so that they do not overlap.
When drawing objects and parts are placed or the screens are layered, if the drawing objects and parts have
overlapped , the following behaviors will occur.
● When Drawing Objects and Parts Overlap
The parts will always be displayed on the foremost layer.
Example: A case where Base Screen: 2 is layered with base: 1 as the bottom most layer, and the Numerical Display
belonging to Base Screen: 1 and a drawing object belonging to Base Screen: 2 overlap.
Base Screen: 1 Base Screen: 2
1234
Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1
1234
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 1 is displayed in front
● When Parts Overlap
The following behaviors will occur when data or updated parts are displayed in front.
Example: Base Screen: 2 is layered with base: 1 as the bottom most layer, and the Numerical Display belonging to Base
Screen: 1 and Numerical Display belonging to Base Screen: 2 overlap.
Base Screen: 1 Base Screen: 2
1234 567
Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 1 and 2 is unchanged
Base Screen: 2 567
1234 1234567
Base Screen: 1 The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 2 is displayed in front
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 1 is changed
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 2 is unchanged
The numerical
value changes
9999567
The Numerical Display for Base Screen: 1 is displayed in front
For the Message Display, Message Switching Display, and Alarm List Display, when the Scroll check box is
selected on the Format tab, the display is not correctly displayed when a part overlaps it.
4-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Base Screen
● When touch switches have overlapped
Pressing the touch switch activates the touch switch of the bottom most Base Screen and displays it in front.
Example: A case where Base Screen: 2 is layered with base: 1 as the bottom most layer (Touch switch two-point
push: disabled)
Base Screen: 1 Base Screen: 2
Screen
Layering
Display for Base Screen: 1
The switch for Base Screen: 1 and 2 has not been pressed
The switch for Base Screen: 2 is displayed in front
Press the switch for Base Screen: 2
The switch for Base Screen: 1 activates
The switch for Base Screen: 2 does not activate
The switch for Base Screen: 1 is displayed in front
When touch switch two-point push is enabled, the touch switches will be activated and the display will be
updated in order starting from the switch located one layer above the bottom-most switch. Touch switch
two-point push is selecting the check box labeled Enable Two-point Push under the System tab in the
Project Settings dialog box.
The touch switch two-point push is a function performed on the analog touch panel that activates both
switches when two overlapped touch switches have been pressed. There is no function that activates both
switches simultaneously when two switches have been pressed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-21
4 Popup Screen
4 Popup Screen
The Popup Screen that is displayed on the Base Screen when the Touch is in Run Mode. The size and coordinates of
the screen can be specified and this screen can also be moved on the Base Screen.
4.1 Popup Screen Settings
● General Tab
■ Screen Type
Select Popup Screen for the screen type.
You can only select the screen type when creating a new screen.
■ No.
Enter the Popup Screen’s screen number (1 to 3015).
However, screen numbers 3001 to 3015 are Popup Screens for standard Keypads for Numerical Input and Character
Input.
■ Font
Select the font to use for the title from the following choices:
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
This option can only be selected when Use Text Manager is cleared.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this to use text registered in Text Manager for the screen title.
However, the text color is white, not the color set in Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use text registered in Text Manager. Click to display Text
Manager.
This option can only be set when Use Text Manager is selected.
■ Title
Enter the Popup Screen’s title. The maximum number is 40 characters. This title is displayed in the Popup Screen’s
title bar.
This option can only be entered when Use Text Manager is cleared.
To enter Unicode text, click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the text in the Unicode
Input dialog box, and then click OK.
4-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Popup Screen
■ Size
Width, Height: Specify the width (40 dots to Base Screen width) and the height (40 dots to Base Screen height) of
the Popup Screen.
■ Screen List
This list shows screens that have already been created. It is only displayed when creating a new screen.
● Options Tab
4
Screen
■ Background Color
Select the screen’s background color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades). Click this button to open the color
palette. Select the color with the color palette.
■ Superimpose
Displays the Popup Screen’s background as completely transparent. The screen underneath the popup screen can be
seen.
If you select Superimpose, the buttons underneath the Popup Screen set to superimpose are active.
■ Title Bar
Select this to display the title bar on the Popup Screen. The text set in Title on the General tab is displayed in the
title bar.
The title bar is not displayed if superimpose is set.
Move Button: Select this to display the (Move) button on the title bar.
Close Button: Select this to display the (Close) button on the title bar.
■ Close while changing Base Screen
Select this to close the displayed Popup Screen when changing the Base Screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-23
4 Popup Screen
■ Focus Order
Sets the focus order for Numerical Input and Character Input. The focus order is the order the focus moves between
Numerical Input or Character Input when the user presses the ENT key. Text can be input in Numerical Input or
Character Input that has focus. The focus order number starts from 0.
Vertical: The focus moves vertically from top to bottom.
Horizontal: The focus moves horizontally from left to right.
Custom: Sets the desired order for moving the focus.
On the View tab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the parts in the order to
move the focus.
The focus moves in the following order when Numerical Input and Character Input on the screen is not
aligned to the left or top.
Vertical 1 Horizontal 1 2
1234 1234 67
4 3
5 890
4
2 5
67
Y-axis up to down
3
890
X-axis left to right
■ Security Group
Select a security group to restrict displaying the screen.
This option can only be set when Use Security functions is selected. The Use Security functions check box is set
on General tab in the User Accounts dialog box.
None: Any user can open this screen.
Administrator, Operator,
Reader, (Created security group): Only selected users can open this screen.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security Group
Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding and Editing
Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about the security function, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on
page 21-1.
4-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Popup Screen
4.2 Popup Screen Configuration
Title Bar
Move Button Close Button
Screen Display Area
4
Screen
■ Title Bar
Displays buttons and the title of the Popup Screen.
Pressing the title bar of the screen allows you to move the screen to the front.
Touch Touch Touch
When there is a title bar on the Popup Screen, touch switches that are within 20 dots of the title bar will
not respond.
■ (Move)
Moves the Popup Screen.
1 Press . 2 Press the position where the 3 The screen will move the position
screen will be moved to. that was pressed.
Touch Touch Touch
The location that was touched will
become the location of .
• The Popup Screen can be moved in the range where can be displayed.
• The Popup Screen will be moved in units of 1 dot.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-25
4 Popup Screen
■ (Close)
Closes the Popup Screen.
■ Screen Display Area
The area where drawing objects and parts are placed.
4.3 Standard Keypad Popup Screen
A Popup Screen that places a regular Keypad used for Numerical and Character Input on screen numbers 3001 to
3015 with the WindO/I-NV3.
Decimal (Number Value) Keypad Uppercase (Alphabet) Keypad
• The Standard Keypad Popup Screen can also place drawing objects and parts in the same manner as
Popup Screen numbers 1 to 3000.
• Screen numbers 3001 to 3015 are screen numbers that are empty when a new project has been created
and are handled as normal Popup Screens.
• Deleting a Standard Keypad Popup Screen and recreating a new Popup Screen of the same screen
number will place the same Keypad.
4-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Screen Restrictions
5 Screen Restrictions
5.1 Screen Number Restrictions
The number of screens and layered screens that can be created in a single project and the number of Popup Screens
that can be displayed on the Base Screen are as follows:
4
■ Base Screen
Screen
Item Number of screens
Number of screens that can be created 3,000 max.
Number of layered screens 5 max.
■ Popup Screen
Item Number of screens
Number of screens that can be created 3,015 max.
3 max. (Including the Device Monitor and Ladder
Number of screens that can be displayed on the Base Screen
Monitor*1)
5.2 Maximum Number of Parts
■ Number of Parts That Can be Placed on a Single Screen
Screen Number of Parts
Base Screen 960 max.
Popup Screen 480 max.
■ Number of Parts That Can be Displayed on a Single Screen
In addition to the currently displayed Base Screen, this includes layered screens and currently displayed Popup
Screens.
Parts Number of Parts
Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display Limit to 1. Either one but can't be both.
Numerical Inputs and Character Inputs in a constant state of
Limit to 1. Either one but can't be both.
input
Potentiometer 32 max.
Numerical Input 255 max.
Character Input 255 max.
*1 The maintenance screen is not included.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 4-27
5 Screen Restrictions
5.3 Maximum Number of External Device Address
The number of write-destination devices for usable external device addresses and the number of read-source devices
from the external device addresses differ depending on the screen type.
■ Base Screen (Includes Layered Screens)
External Device Address Number of Devices
Write-destination Device 512 max.
Read-source Devices 256 max.
■ Popup Screen
External Device Address Number of Devices
Write-destination Device 128 max.
Read-source Devices 64 max.
If the same device address is used in multiple device settings, the used number of devices will be counted
as one device. It will not be counted as one point per device setting.
5.4 Vertical Installation Restrictions
Even if you choose for them to be installed and displayed vertically, the next screen will be the same as horizontal
installation and display.
• System Mode
• Maintenance Screen
• Brightness/contrast adjustment screen*1, brightness adjustment screen*2
• Password Screen
*1 Monochrome LCD models only
*2 Color LCD models only
4-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 5 Drawings and Parts
This chapter contains an overview of drawings and parts that are used when creating a screen and a description of
the types of drawings and parts.
1 Overview
Drawings and parts are used by placing them on Base Screens and Popup Screens.
Drawings include objects such as straight lines, polygons, circles, pictures, and static text.
Touch
5
Equilateral Triangle
Drawings and Parts
Line
Text Caution
Polyline
Picture
Parts are objects that generate a variety of events when triggered by a change in the values of devices or by touch.
Touch Numerical Input
External device
Numerical Display
D10: 80 0
80
D11: 25 Line Chart
25
D12: 2 2 Picture Display
Tank 1
D13: 0 Message Display
Empty
D14: 0
Pilot Lamp
D15: 0
Selector Switch
Touch
External device
D10: 99 0
99
D11: 82 82
D12: 5 5 Parts changed to reflect
Tank 1
D13: 1 changes in the values of devices
Full
D14: 1
D15: 1
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 5-1
2 Drawing Objects
2 Drawing Objects
This section describes the drawing objects that can be drawn in WindO/I-NV3.
2.1 Shapes
Shapes Function
Basic Shapes Line Draws a line.
Polyline Draws a polyline.
Polygon Draws an object that connects two or more vertices with straight lines.
Rectangle Draws a rectangle.
Circle/Ellipse Draws a circle or ellipse.
Arc Draws an elliptical arc.
Pie Draws a pie.
Equilateral Polygon Draws a equilateral polygon. (triangle, diamond, pentagon, hexagon, or octagon)
Paint Paints the closed region of the drawing object.
2.2 Picture
Loads drawing objects that are registered in Picture Manager onto the edit screen.
2.3 Text
Draws text. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
Loads text that is registered in Text Manager.
5-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Part Types
3 Part Types
This section describes the parts that can be used on the Touch.
3.1 Buttons
Part Description
Bit Button Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.
Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address or
Word Button
to perform operations on the written value. 5
Goto Screen Button Switches to another screen or displays a window.
Drawings and Parts
Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading, copying files, and
Key Button
operating other parts.
Multi-Button Executes multiple commands at once.
A part comprised of Key Buttons. Enters numbers and characters into numerical or
Keypad
character input parts.
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device. This is an exclusive control that only writes a single value as
Selector Switch
1 and all other values as 0.
Potentiometer Writes a value selected by pressing a slider button to a word device.
3.2 Lamps
Part Description
Pilot Lamp Displays images. Switches the displayed image according to the value of a bit device.
Multi-State Lamp Displays images. Switches the displayed image according to the value of a word device.
3.3 Data Displays
Part Description
Numerical Input Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write entered numbers.
Character Input Uses either a Keypad or Key Button to write the character code for entered characters.
Displays images. Switches, moves or enlarges/reduces the displayed image according to the
Picture Display
value of a word device, the bit status within a word device or at a fixed period.
Loads fixed text strings and values of word device as character codes and displays them on
Message Display
the screen.
Switches the displayed fixed text string according to the value of a word device or the bit
Message Switching Display
status within a word device.
Switches the displayed fixed text string according to the value of device. Can display alarms
Alarm List Display
and multiple fixed text strings.
Alarm Log Display Displays the alarm log stored in the internal memory of the Touch.
Numerical Display Displays the numerical in the specified format.
Calendar Displays the date and time using the Touch's calendar data.
3.4 Charts
Part Description
Bar Chart Displays values of devices in a Bar Chart.
Line Chart Displays data logs and values of devices in a Line Chart.
Pie Chart Displays values of devices in a Pie Chart.
Meter Displays values of devices using a needle gauge.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 5-3
3 Part Types
3.5 Commands
Part Description
Bit Write Command Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.
Writes a value to a word device when certain trigger conditions are satisfied. Can be used to
Word Write Command
indirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on the written value.
Switches to another screen or displays a window when certain trigger conditions are
Goto Screen Command
satisfied.
Script Command Executes a script when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.
Multi-Command Executes multiple commands at once when certain trigger conditions are satisfied.
Starts a countdown when certain trigger conditions are satisfied, and writes 1 to an internal
Timer
device (HMI Timer Relay LTC) after the set time has elapsed.
5-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 6 Drawings
This chapter describes the procedures for drawing with shapes and the procedures for configuring pictures and text.
1 Shapes
1.1 Line
● Line Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing lines.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Line) under Basic Shapes.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
6
Drawings
2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the line on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location.
A line is drawn that connects the starting point and ending point.
Drag
Starting
point
Ending
point
To change the style of the drawn line, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the line to open the Properties dialog box
• Select the line and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
• Select the line and right click to display the popup menu
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-1
1 Shapes
● Properties of Line Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the line from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the line (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the line blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Point1, Point2
X, Y: Specifies the starting point and ending point of the line in coordinates.
The upper-left corner of the screen is the origin.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Y Line
Starting
point Ending
point
Screen
6-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
1.2 Polyline
● Polyline Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing polylines.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Polyline) under Basic Shapes.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
Drawings
2 Click at the location (starting point) to start drawing the polyline on the edit screen.
3 Click the corner point locations in order.
A line is drawn that connects the starting point and the various corner point locations in the order that they were
created.
4 Double click at the ending point location.
A line is drawn that connects the last corner point and the ending point.
Starting
point Corner
point
Corner
point Ending
point
The maximum number of corner points in a polyline, including the starting point and the ending point, is
300 points.
• To change the style of the drawn polyline, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the polyline to open the Properties dialog box
- Select the polyline and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
- Select the polyline and right click to display the popup menu
• To change the starting point, corner points, or the ending point of the drawn polyline, select the polyline
and right click on it, and then click Reshape. is displayed on the polyline. Drag to the desired
location. Double click the edit screen or press the Esc key to finish changing the shape.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-3
1 Shapes
● Properties of Polyline Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the polyline from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the polyline from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the polyline (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the polyline blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the polyline in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle that
circumscribes the polyline is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Y
Polyline
Screen
■ Size
W, H: Specifies the size of the polyline in width and height.
W: 1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Polyline
Height
Screen
6-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
1.3 Polygon
● Polygon Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing polygons.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Polygon) under Basic Shapes.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
Drawings
2 Click at the location (starting point) to start drawing the polygon on the edit screen.
3 Click the corner point locations in order.
A line is drawn that connects the starting point and the various corner point locations in the order that they were
created.
4 Double click at the ending point location.
A polygon is drawn with the starting point and ending point connected.
Corner
point
Starting Corner
point point
Ending
point
• To change the style of the drawn polygon, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the polygon to open the Properties dialog box
- Select the polygon and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
- Select the polygon and right click to display the popup menu
• To change the starting point, corner points, or the ending point of the drawn polygon, select the polygon
and right click on it, and then click Reshape. is displayed on the polygon. Drag to the desired
location. Double click the edit screen or press the Esc key to finish changing the shape.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-5
1 Shapes
● Properties of Polygon Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the polygon from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the polygon from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the polygon (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8
shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the polygon.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the polygon blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the polygon in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle that
circumscribes the polygon is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Polygon
■ Size
W, H: Specifies the size of the polygon in width and height.
W: 1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Polygon
6-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
1.4 Rectangle
● Rectangle Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing rectangles.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Rectangle) under Basic Shapes.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
Drawings
2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the rectangle on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A rectangle is drawn with the starting point and ending point set to opposite angles.
Starting
point
Drag
Ending
point
To change the style of the drawn rectangle, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the rectangle to open the Properties dialog box
• Select the rectangle and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
• Select the rectangle and right click to display the popup menu
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-7
1 Shapes
● Properties of Rectangle Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the rectangle from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the rectangle from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selected
for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the rectangle (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8
shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the rectangle.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the rectangle blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Round Type
Selects the style of the rectangle's corners from the following.
None, Curve, Straight
None Curve Straight
■ Round Radius
Specifies the rounding radius (1 to 200). However, the range that can be configured is where round radius x 2 is a
value smaller than Size W and Size H.
This option can only be configured when Curve or Straight is selected for Round Type.
For Curve For Straight
Round Radius Round Radius
6-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
■ Shadow
Selects the style of shadow attached to the rectangle from the following. This option draws the rectangle in a three-
dimensional manner.
None, Convex, Concave
This option can only be configured when 1 dot is selected for Line Width and Solid is selected for Line Type.
None Convex Concave
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the rectangle in coordinates. 6
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle is the X
Drawings
and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Rectangle
■ Size
W, H: Specifies the size of the rectangle in width and height.
W: 1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Rectangle
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-9
1 Shapes
1.5 Circle/Ellipse
● Circle/Ellipse Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing circles and ellipses.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Circle/Ellipse) under Basic Shapes.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the circle or ellipse on the edit
screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A circle or ellipse is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the
ending point.
Starting
point
Drag
Ending
point
To change the style of the drawn circle or ellipse, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the circle or ellipse to open the Properties dialog box
• Select the circle or ellipse and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
• Select the circle or ellipse and right click to display the popup menu
6-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
● Properties of Circle/Ellipse Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
Drawings
■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the circle or ellipse from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the circle or ellipse from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selected
for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the circle or ellipse (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the circle or ellipse.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the circle or ellipse blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Shadow
Selects the style of shadow attached to the circle or ellipse from the following. This option draws the circle or ellipse
in a three-dimensional manner.
None, Convex, Concave
This option can only be configured when 1 dot is selected for Line Width and Solid is selected for Line Type.
Convex Convex Concave
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-11
1 Shapes
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the circle or ellipse in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle that
circumscribes the circle or ellipse is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Circle/ellipse
■ Size
W, H: Specifies the size of the circle or ellipse in width and height.
W: 3 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 3 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Circle/ellipse
6-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
1.6 Arc
● Arc Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing arcs.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Arc) under Basic Shapes.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
Drawings
2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the arc on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
An arc is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the ending point.
Starting
point
Drag
Ending
point
• To change the style of the drawn arc, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the arc to open the Properties dialog box
- Select the arc and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
- Select the arc and right click to display the popup menu
• To change the starting point or the ending point of the drawn arc, select the arc and right click on it, and
then click Reshape. is displayed on the arc. Drag to the desired location. Double click the edit
screen or press the Esc key to finish changing the shape.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-13
1 Shapes
● Properties of Arc Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the arc from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the arc from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selected
for Line Width.
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the arc (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the arc blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the arc in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle that
circumscribes the arc is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Arc
■ Size
W, H: Specifies the size of the arc in width and height.
W: 3 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 3 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Arc
Height
6-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
1.7 Pie
● Pie Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure for drawing pies.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Pie) under Basic Shapes.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
Drawings
2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) to start drawing the pie on the edit screen.
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the rectangle.
A pie is drawn that inscribes the rectangle made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the ending point.
Starting
point
Drag
Ending
point
• To change the style of the drawn pie, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the pie to open the Properties dialog box
- Select the pie and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
- Select the pie and right click to display the popup menu
• To change the central angle of the drawn pie, select the pie and right click on it, and then click Reshape.
is displayed on the pie. Drag to the desired location. Double click the edit screen or press the
Esc key to finish changing the shape.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-15
1 Shapes
● Properties of Pie Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the pie from the following.
1 dot, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the pie from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot is selected
for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the pie (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the pie.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the pie blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the pie in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle that
circumscribes the circle with the same center as the pie is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Pie
6-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
■ Size
W, H: Specifies the size of the pie in width and height.
W: 3 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 3 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Pie
Drawings
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-17
1 Shapes
1.8 Equilateral Polygons
● Equilateral Polygons Drawing Procedure
This section describes the procedure to draw equilateral polygons (equilateral triangle, equilateral diamond,
equilateral pentagon, equilateral hexagon, equilateral octagon).
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Equilateral Triangle), (Equilateral
Diamond), (Equilateral Pentagon), (Equilateral Hexagon), or (Equilateral Octagon) under Equilateral
Polygons.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
2 Click and hold the mouse button at the location (starting point) on the edit screen to start drawing the square that will
circumscribe the equilateral polygon.
3 Drag the mouse to the ending point location so that location becomes the opposite angle of the square.
An equilateral polygon is drawn that inscribes the square made from the opposite angles of the starting point and the
ending point.
Starting
point
Drag
Ending
point
To change the style of the drawn square, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the square to open the Properties dialog box
• Select the square and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
• Select the square and right click to display the popup menu
6-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
● Properties of Equilateral Polygon Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
Drawings
■ Line Width
Selects the line width for the equilateral polygon from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
3 dots and 5 dots can only be configured when Solid is selected for Line Type.
■ Line Type
Selects the line type for the equilateral polygon from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, and Long Dash Dot Dot can only be configured when 1 dot or 2 dots
is selected for Line Width.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to use for the equilateral polygon (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern for the equilateral polygon.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the equilateral polygon blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the equilateral polygon in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the square that
circumscribes the equilateral polygon is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Equilateral polygon
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-19
1 Shapes
■ Size
W, H: Specifies the size of the equilateral polygon in width and height.
W: 1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Equilateral polygon
6-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Shapes
1.9 Fill
● Fill Configuration Procedure
This section describes the fill configuration procedure.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Shapes, and then click (Fill) under Fill.
The mouse cursor changes to (pencil).
Drawings
2 Click on a section where multiple shapes overlap on the edit screen.
The section where multiple shapes overlap is filled with the Foreground Color, Background Color, and Pattern
of the shape last drawn or the shape that last had its style changed. The clicked location is the fill starting point.
Fill starting point
• To change the fill style, perform one of the following operations.
- Double click the fill starting point to open the Properties dialog box
- Select the fill starting point and select the style with Shape Style on the Format tab
- Select the fill starting point and right click to display the popup menu
• If you move the fill starting point, the closed region where it was moved to is filled.
Fill starting point Fill starting point
• To select the fill starting point, click on the edit screen or select Fill on the Object List window.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-21
1 Shapes
● Properties of Fill Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Foreground Color, Background Color
Selects the foreground color and the background color to fill with (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the pattern to fill with.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the fill start position in coordinates.
The upper-left corner of the screen is the origin.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y Fill start point
6-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Picture
2 Picture
2.1 Picture Configuration Procedure
This section describes the picture configuration procedure.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Picture.
The mouse cursor changes to (picture).
6
2 Click the location on the edit screen to place the picture.
Drawings
Picture Manager is displayed.
3 Select a picture, and then click Select.
The selected picture, is placed on the screen.
To change the picture that was placed on the screen, perform one of the following operations.
• Double click the picture to open the Properties dialog box, and then click Browse
• Replace the picture in Picture Manager
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-23
2 Picture
2.2 Properties of Picture Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Browse
Changes the picture placed on the screen. Click this button to display Picture Manager.
■ Blink
Select this check box to make the picture blink.
The blink interval is specified with Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the picture in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle that
circumscribes the picture is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Picture
■ Size
W, H: Specifies the size of the picture in width and height.
W: 1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Picture
6-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Text
3 Text
3.1 Text Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for text.
1 On the Home tab, in the Drawings group, click Text.
The mouse cursor changes to (text).
6
2 Click the location on the edit screen to place the text.
Drawings
The Properties of Text dialog box is displayed.
3 Enter the text to display in Text and configure the options as necessary.
The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
4 Click OK.
The text is placed on the screen.
To change the style of the text placed on the screen, perform one of the following operations. You can
change the entered text in the Properties dialog box.
• Double click the text to open the Properties dialog box
• Select the text and select the style with Text Style on the Format tab
• Select the text and right click to display the popup menu
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-25
3 Text
3.2 Properties of Text dialog box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Font
Selects the font to use to display text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
■ Style
Selects the style of text from the following.
Regular, Bold, Shadow
This option can only be configured when Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central
European, Baltic, or Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
Top when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box to display text vertically.
This option can only be configured when Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central
European, Baltic, or Cyrillic is selected for Font.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicable
for installations of Windows that support East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are left-
aligned.
Aligned to
left edge
• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-byte
characters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters
6-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Text
■ Windows Font
Configures the font to use as the Windows Font.
Select Windows for Font to display the current settings. To change the settings, click Change to display the Font
Settings dialog box.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
■ Text
6
Enter the text to display. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
Drawings
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected by Font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3
Available Text” on page 2-6.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
• To enter Unicode characters, click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in
the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
• A newline is counted as two characters.
■ Text Color
Selects the color for the displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the zoom factor for characters (0.5, 1 to 8).
This option can only be configured when Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central
European, Baltic, or Cyrillic is selected for Font.
■ Background Color
Selects the background color for the text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Animation
Selects whether or not to make the text blink.
Normal: The text does not blink.
Blink: The text blinks.
■ Shadow Color
Selects the shadow color for the text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can only be configured when Shadow is selected for Style.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 6-27
3 Text
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the display position of the text or the text area in coordinates.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the rectangle that
circumscribes the text or the upper-left corner of the text area is the X and Y coordinates.
When the Use Text Area check box is cleared, the coordinates are for the text. When the Use Text
Area check box is selected, the coordinates are for the text area.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
When Use Text Area is cleared When Use Text Area is selected
X X
(0, 0) (0, 0)
Y IDEC Y IDEC
Text Text area
Screen Screen
■ Use Text Area
Select this check box to specify a text area and adjust the display position of the text with the specified text area.
W, H: Specifies the size of the text area in width and height.
W: 1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 1 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
IDEC Text area
Height
Screen
6-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 7 Buttons
This chapter describes the setup for the button parts and related Touch operations.
1 Bit Button
1.1 How the Bit Button is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.
Touch External device
0
1 7
Buttons
■ Set
Pressing the button writes a 1 to the
Press Release Press Release
bit device.
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written 1 1
■ Reset
Pressing the button writes a 0 to the
Press Release Press Release
bit device.
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written 0 0
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-1
1 Bit Button
■ Momentary
Pressing the button writes a 1 to the
Press Release Press Release
bit device.
Releasing the button writes a 0 to the Operation and
bit device. view
Initial image
Action Write Write Write Write
Data written 1 0 1 0
Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes a 0 to be written to the bit device.
■ Alternate
Each press of the button alternately
Press Release Press Release
writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device.
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written 1 0
■ Toggle
Pressing the button inverts the value
Press Release Press Release
of the bit device.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it Operation and
changes to 1, and vice versa. view
Initial image
Action Toggle Toggle
■ Move
Pressing the button writes the value
Press Release Press Release
in the source bit device to the value in
the destination bit device.
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Move Move
7-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Button
1.2 Bit Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Bit Buttons.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Bit Button.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Button.
7
Buttons
3 Double-click the dropped Bit Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-3
1 Bit Button
1.3 Properties of Bit Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on the
Registration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is
displayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:
Set: Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written 1 1
Reset: Pressing the button writes a 0 to the bit device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written 0 0
7-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Button
Momentary: Pressing the button writes a 1 to the bit device.
Releasing the button writes a 0 to the bit device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write Write Write
Data written 1 0 1 0
Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes a 0 to be written to the bit device.
Alternate: Each press of the button alternately writes a 1 or 0 to the bit device.
Press Release Press Release
7
Buttons
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written 1 0
Toggle: Pressing the button inverts the value of the bit device.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Toggle Toggle
Move: Pressing the button writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit
device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Move Move
■ Destination Device
Specify the destination bit device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-5
1 Bit Button
■ Write*1
Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset.
Example: This fills a contiguous block of bit devices with the same value.
M0 1
Action Mode: Set M1 1
Destination Device: M0 M2 1
Write: 5
M3 1
M4 1
If the bit in a word device is specified, the same value is written to same bit of contiguous word devices.
bit bit
15 0
D0 1
Action Mode: Set
Destination Device: D0-15 D1 1
Write: 5 D2 1
D3 1
D4 1
■ Source Data
Specifies the device that stores the data to be written.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Device: Specify the source bit device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Transfer: Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to transfer.
Example: This button writes the values in a contiguous block of bit devices to a contiguous block of devices at the
destination.
Device: LM0 LM0 1 M0 1
Destination Device: M0 LM1 0 M1 0
Transfer: 4 LM2 0 M2 0
LM3 1 M3 1
*1 Advanced mode only
7-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Button
■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button: Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.
Device: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is 0
and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
No Image: The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No Image
is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.
Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the value
7
of M0 changes, the display image will switch according to the value of M0 even if the button is not
Buttons
pressed.
Touch External device
0
OFF image:
M0
ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M0
M0
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-7
1 Bit Button
● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard: Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV3.
Picture: Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.5 Available Image Files” on page 2-19.
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink
ON image
OFF image
7-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Button
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
7
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Buttons
Width
Screen
Height Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-9
1 Bit Button
● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
■ Font
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
7-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Button
■ OFF, ON
Text: Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
When entering Unicode characters click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters
using the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color: Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Windows Font: Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change to
7
display the Font dialog box.
Buttons
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-11
1 Bit Button
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Button
Does not
Not
operate
satisfied
LM0: 1 Button
Condition
Satisfied Operates
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.
Button state
Always Enabled
While ON: Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Button state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
7-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Button
While OFF: Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Button state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Button state 7
Buttons
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-13
1 Bit Button
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a
value from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch Touch
Button
Button
Does not
Operates
operate
Hold down for three seconds
This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
7-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Button
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
7
Touch Touch Touch
Buttons
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,
and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab
of the Project Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-15
1 Bit Button
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment comments about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen
7-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
2 Word Button
2.1 How the Word Button is Used
Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on
the written value.
• Pressing the button writes a constant value to a word device.
Touch External device
D1= 0 Destination word device
Value 100 7
Write
Buttons
100
100→D1
D1= 100
• Pressing the button writes the value of device address to a word device.
Touch External device
D0= 123 Value in device
D1= 0 Destination word device
D0= 123
Move
D0→D1 D1= 123
• Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value to write before writing it to a word device.
Touch External device
D0= 100 Value to write
D1= 23 Operator value
D2= 0 Destination word device
D0= 100
Add
D1= 23
D0+D1→D2 Write
D2= 123
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-17
2 Word Button
■ Set
Pressing the button writes a constant
value to a word device. Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written Value Value
■ Move
Pressing the button writes the value in
the source device to the destination Press Release Press Release
word device.
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written Value in device Value in device
■ Momentary
Pressing the button writes the
constant value of ON data to a word Press Release Press Release
device.
Operation and
Releasing the button writes the view
Initial image
constant value of OFF data to a word
device.
Action Write Write Write Write
Data written ON data OFF data ON data OFF data
Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes the OFF data to be written to the word
device.
■ Alternate
Each press of the button alternately
writes the fixed value of ON data and Press Release Press Release
OFF data to the word device.
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written ON data OFF data
7-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
■ Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR
Pressing the button performs
arithmetic on the value in a reference Press Release Press Release
device and a constant value or the
Operation and
value in a device address and writes view
the result to a word device. Initial image
Arithmetic Arithmetic
Action operation operation
↓ ↓
Write Write
Data written Result Result
Example: Add (Addition)
Value of
Pressing the button adds the Reference Device
100 200 300 400 500
value in the Source 1 to the Data 50 40 30 20 10
Source 2 value and writes
Press Release Press Release
the sum in the word device.
7
Operation and
Buttons
view
Initial image
Addition Addition
Action ↓ ↓
Write Write
Value of
0 240 240 420 420
Destination Device
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-19
2 Word Button
2.2 Word Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Word Buttons.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Word Button.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Word Button.
3 Double-click the dropped Word Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
7-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
2.3 Properties of Word Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Buttons
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on the
Registration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is
displayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:
Set: Pressing the button writes a constant value to a word device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written Value Value
Move: Pressing the button writes the value in the source device to the destination word device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written Value in device Value in device
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-21
2 Word Button
Momentary: Pressing the button writes the constant value of ON data to a word device.
Releasing the button writes the constant value of OFF data to a word device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write Write Write
Data written ON data OFF data ON data OFF data
Pressing and holding the button until the screen changes causes the OFF data to be written to the word
device.
Alternate: Each press of the button alternately writes the fixed value of ON data and OFF data to the word
device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action Write Write
Data written ON data OFF data
Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:
Pressing the button performs arithmetic on the value in a reference device and a constant value
or the value in a device address and writes the result to a word device.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Arithmetic Arithmetic
Action operation operation
↓ ↓
Write Write
Data written Result Result
Example: Add (Addition)
Pressing the button adds the value in the Source 1 to the Source 2 value and writes
the sum in the word device.
Value of
100 200 300 400 500
Reference Device
Data 50 40 30 20 10
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Addition Addition
Action ↓ ↓
Write Write
Value of
0 240 240 420 420
Destination Device
7-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to Move. Because the number of devices
to transfer is specified in Advanced mode, you do not need to set Data Type.
IF BCD4 or BCD8 is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible in BCD, a 1 is written
to System Area 2 Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5) and an error message is displayed.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Arithmetic error” on page 3-24.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.
7
■ Source Data
Buttons
Select the data handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
Value: Use a constant.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, or Alternate.
If Action Mode is set to Momentary or Alternate, the value in the ON Data is written when the button
is ON, and the value in the OFF Data is written when the button is OFF.
Hexadecimal: Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values in
hexadecimal.
Device: Use a word device.
Specify the device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the source word device
according to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page
2-5.
Transfer*1: Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to transfer.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Example: If Transfer is set to 2 and Write is set to 3, the same data in 2
continuous word devices will be written to the destination device 3 times.
Device: LDR0 LDR0 999 D100 999
Transfer: 2 LDR1 1000 D101 1000
Destination Device: D100
D102 999
Write: 3
D103 1000
D104 999
D105 1000
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-23
2 Word Button
■ Destination Device
Destination Device: Specify the destination word device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device according
to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-5.
Write*1: Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to write.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, Alternate, or
Move.
Example: If Data Type is set to BIN16(+) and Write is set to 5, the same data will be
written to 5 continuous word addresses.
Data Type: BIN16(+) LDR10 12345
Source Data: 12345
LDR11 12345
Destination Device: LDR10
Write: 5 LDR12 12345 5 words
LDR13 12345
LDR14 12345
Example: If Data Type is set to BIN32(+) and Write is set to 5, the same data will be
written to a total of 10 word addresses (2 words 5 times).
Data Type: BIN32(+) LDR11 LDR10
Source Data: 987654 987654
Destination Device: LDR10 LDR13 LDR12
Write: 5
987654
LDR15 LDR14
987654 10 words
LDR17 LDR16
987654
LDR19 LDR18
987654
*1 Advanced mode only
7-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button: Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.
Device: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is 0
and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
No Image: The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No Image
is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.
Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the value
7
of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the button is
Buttons
not pressed.
Touch External device
0
OFF image:
M0
ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M0
M0
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-25
2 Word Button
● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard: Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV3.
Picture: Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.5 Available Image Files” on page 2-19.
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink
ON image
OFF image
7-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
7
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Buttons
Width
Screen
Height Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-27
2 Word Button
● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
■ Font
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
7-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
■ OFF, ON
Text: Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
When entering Unicode characters click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters
using the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color: Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Windows Font: Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change to
7
display the Font dialog box.
Buttons
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-29
2 Word Button
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Button
Does not
Not
operate
satisfied
LM0: 1 Button
Condition
Satisfied Operates
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.
Button state
Always Enabled
While ON: Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Button state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
7-30 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
While OFF: Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Button state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Button state 7
Buttons
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-31
2 Word Button
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a
value from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch Touch
Button
Button
Does not
Operates
operate
Hold down for three seconds
This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
7-32 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Button
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
7
Touch Touch Touch
Buttons
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,
and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab
of the Project Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-33
2 Word Button
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen
7-34 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Button
3 Goto Screen Button
3.1 How the Goto Screen Button is Used
Switches to another screen or displays a window.
• Pressing the button switches between Base Screens.
Touch Touch
Tank 1
130 Full
7
• Pressing the button opens and closes other windows (such as the Popup Screen, Device Monitor, Ladder Monitor,
Buttons
Password Screen, and Adjust Contrast Screen).
Touch Touch Touch Touch
D51 123 D51 123
D52 456 D52 456
D53 0 D53 0
999 999
• Pressing the button switches to the System Mode.
Touch Touch
6<67(002'(7233$*(
130
5XQ 0DLQ0HQX
-8/)5,
,3$GG '+&3
%5,*+71(66
• Pressing the button resets the current screen.
Touch Touch
130 0
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-35
3 Goto Screen Button
3.2 Goto Screen Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Goto Screen Buttons.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button.
3 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
7-36 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Button
3.3 Properties of Goto Screen Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Buttons
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on the
Registration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is
displayed for the ON state as well.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-37
3 Goto Screen Button
■ Action Mode
Select the behavior of the button from the following:
Back to previous Screen: Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.
Switch to Base Screen: Switches between Base Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “3 Base Screen” on
page 4-14.
Open Popup Screen: Opens a Popup Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “4 Popup Screen” on page 4-
22.
Close Popup Screen: Closes a Popup Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 4 “4 Popup Screen” on page 4-
22.
Open Device Monitor Screen: Opens the Device Monitor Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Device
Monitor” on page 24-19.
Close Device Monitor Screen: Closes the Device Monitor Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Device
Monitor” on page 24-19.
Open Ladder Monitor: Opens the Ladder Monitor. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.3 Ladder Monitor” on
page 24-23.
Close Ladder Monitor: Closes the Ladder Monitor. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.3 Ladder Monitor” on
page 24-23.
Open Password Screen: Opens the Password Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “4.1 Entering the
Password on the Touch” on page 21-36.
Close Password Screen: Closes the Password Screen. For details, refer to CChapter 21 “4.1 Entering the
Password on the Touch” on page 21-36.
Open Adjust contrast Screen: Opens the Adjust contrast Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “1.3 Adjusting
Screen Brightness” on page 28-2.
Close Adjust contrast Screen: Closes the Adjust contrast Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “1.3 Adjusting
Screen Brightness” on page 28-2.
Switch to System Mode: Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode. For details, refer to Chapter 28 “2
System Mode Overview” on page 28-3.
Reset current screen: Resets the current Base Screen.
When the current Base Screen is reset using the Reset current screen function, the window and internal
devices restart as if the Base Screens were switched.
7-38 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Button
■ Goto Screen
Screen No.: Specify the Base Screen number to go to (1 to 3,000), or the Popup Screen number to open or
close (1 to 3,015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to specify the screen number
using the value of the specified device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the
device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen or Close Popup Screen.
Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as the
origin.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust contrast Screen, or Open Movie
File Screen. 7
Coordinates X, Y:
Buttons
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to specify the coordinates
using the value of the specified device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the
device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen.
■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button: Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.
Device: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is
0 and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
No Image: The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No
Image is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.
Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the value
of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the button is not
pressed.
Touch External device
0
OFF image:
M0
ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M0
M0
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-39
3 Goto Screen Button
● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard: Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV3.
Picture: Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.5 Available Image Files” on page 2-19.
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink
ON image
OFF image
7-40 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Button
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
7
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Buttons
Width
Screen
Height Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-41
3 Goto Screen Button
● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
■ Font
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
7-42 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Button
■ OFF, ON
Text: Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
When entering Unicode characters click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters
using the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color: Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Windows Font: Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change to 7
display the Font dialog box.
Buttons
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-43
3 Goto Screen Button
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Button
Does not
Not
operate
satisfied
LM0: 1 Button
Condition
Satisfied Operates
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.
Button state
Always Enabled
While ON: Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Button state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
7-44 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Button
While OFF: Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Button state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Button state 7
Buttons
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-45
3 Goto Screen Button
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a
value from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch Touch
Button
Button
Does not
Operates
operate
Hold down for three seconds
This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
7-46 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Button
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
7
Touch Touch Touch
Buttons
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,
and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab
of the Project Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-47
3 Goto Screen Button
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen
7-48 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
4 Key Button
4.1 How the Key Button is Used
Performs a variety of functions including uploading and downloading project files, and operating other parts.
• Entering numbers in the Numerical Input
Touch
1230
Buttons
• Entering characters in the Character Input
Touch
• Operating the Alarm List Display or Alarm Log Display
Show focus. Move focus. Display reference screen.
Time Message REV Time Message REV Time Message REV Time Message REV
09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15Pump 1 fault
Motor fault Up
Pump 1 output low
10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn 10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn 10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn 10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,
10:28 High pressure Del 10:28 High pressure Del 10:28 High pressure Del 10:28
thenHigh pressure
press Start. Del
13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 fault Air Press.
Ref.
Stop Start 0000
2
kg/m
Key Button Reference screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-49
4 Key Button
4.2 Key Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Key Buttons.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Key Button.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Key Button.
3 Double-click the dropped Key Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
7-50 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
4.3 Properties of Key Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
(Key)
Displays settings
applicable to the
selected key.
7
Buttons
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on the
Registration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is
displayed for the ON state as well.
■ Key Type
Select the function for the Key Button.
Language: Switches the display of the key that is displayed when Keypad is selected in Key Browser. These
languages are available:
Japanese, European, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
Browse: Opens the Key Browser when clicked. Select a key.
For details, refer to “4.5 Key Browser” on page 7-66.
(Key): Displays the name of the key selected using the Key Browser.
• When you select a key, the label for that key is assigned as the Registration Text.
• The function of Key button will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.
The settings explained below appear depending on the type of key selected.
■ Popup Screen No.
The Alt key switches the current Popup Screen used as a Keypad when this button is pressed.
Specify the Popup Screen number to open a Keypad for.
This setting is enabled only if Alt was selected using the Key Browser.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-51
4 Key Button
■ Scroll Size
Key Buttons Pg. Up and Pg. Dwn scroll the list up and down, respectively. Key Buttons Fcs. Up and Fcs. Dwn move
the focus up and down, respectively. This settings specifies the number of pages or lines (1 to 1023 lines) to scroll or
move the focus per each press of the button.
This setting is enabled only if Pg. Up, Pg. Dwn, Fcs. Up, and Fcs. Dwn are selected using the Key Browser.
■ Transfer Setting
Key Buttons Download Project and Upload Project perform the data transfer function specified by their names.
These settings specify the source, data to be transfered, and destination.
This setting is enabled only if one of these keys is selected after clicking Data Transfer in the Key Browser.
If Download Project is selected.
Source: This is set to the USB flash drive on which the project file to transfer (.ZNV) was saved.
File Path: Specify the path to the project file (.ZNV) to transfer. The maximum number is 247
characters.
Example: Where “FT_DEMO_1.ZNV” is a project file saved on the root directory of a USB
flash drive:
FT_DEMO_1.ZNV
If Upload Project is selected.
Destination: Specify where to save the project uploaded from Touch. The location is the USB flash drive.
Folder Path: Specify the path to the folder where the uploaded project file will be saved. The
maximum number is 247 characters.
Example: To save it to the folder “Uploaded_Project” on a USB flash drive:
Uploaded_Project
7-52 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button: Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.
Device: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is 0
and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
No Image: The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No Image
is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.
Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the value
7
of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the button is
Buttons
not pressed.
Touch External device
0
OFF image:
M0
ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M0
M0
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-53
4 Key Button
● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard: Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV3.
Picture: Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.5 Available Image Files” on page 2-19.
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink
ON image
OFF image
7-54 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
7
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Buttons
Width
Screen
Height Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-55
4 Key Button
● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
■ Font
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
7-56 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
■ OFF, ON
Text: Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
When entering Unicode characters click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters
using the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color: Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Windows Font: Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change to
7
display the Font dialog box.
Buttons
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-57
4 Key Button
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Button
Does not
Not
operate
satisfied
LM0: 1 Button
Condition
Satisfied Operates
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.
Button state
Always Enabled
While ON: Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Button state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
7-58 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
While OFF: Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Button state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Button state 7
Buttons
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-59
4 Key Button
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a
value from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch Touch
Button
Button
Does not
Operates
operate
Hold down for three seconds
This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
7-60 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
7
Touch Touch Touch
Buttons
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,
and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab
of the Project Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-61
4 Key Button
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen
7-62 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
4.4 Key Buttons
● For Keypad
These keys can be used for Numerical Input and Character Input:
■ Numerical Input Keypad
Key Operation
. Inputs a decimal point.
0 to 9 Inputs a number from 0 to 9.
A to F Inputs a character from A to F.
+/- Toggles the sign.
Clears the data input thus far and cancels the input. Closes the Popup Screen that is opened as
CAN
the Keypad, if this key is placed on it.
CLR Clears the data input thus far and stands by for further input.
BS Deletes the character to the left of the character at the cursor position.
Writes the characters input as a numeric value to a device. After the data is written, the focus
7
ENT can be moved according to the Focus Order setting. Focus Order can be set on the Options
Buttons
tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.
Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus
< Fcs.
Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.
Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus Order
Fcs. >
can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.
The Alt key switches the Popup Screen opened as a Keypad. Closes the Popup Screen that is
Alt
opened as the Keypad and opens another Popup Screen as the Keypad.
The Alt key can be used, for instance, to switch between a decimal and a hexadecimal Keypad.
■ Character Input Keypad
Key Operation
! Inputs a !.
" Inputs a ".
# Inputs a #.
$ Inputs a $.
% Inputs a %.
&. Inputs a &.
' Inputs a '.
( Inputs a (.
) Inputs a ).
* Inputs a *.
+ Inputs a +.
, Inputs a ,.
- Inputs a -.
. Inputs a .
/ Inputs a /.
0 to 9 Inputs a number from 0 to 9.
: Inputs a :.
; Inputs a ;.
< Inputs a <.
= Inputs a =.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-63
4 Key Button
Key Operation
> Inputs a >.
? Inputs a ?.
@ Inputs a @.
A to Z Inputs a character from A to Z.
[ Inputs a [.
\ Inputs a \.
] Inputs a ].
^ Inputs a ^.
_ Inputs a _.
' Inputs a '.
a to z Inputs a character from a to z.
{ Inputs a {.
| Inputs a |.
} Inputs a }.
˜ Inputs a ˜.
(Keys dependent on Inputs the text displayed according to the language selected in the Language setting. For a list
Language setting) of the characters input using these keys, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
Clears the data input thus far and cancels the input. Closes the Popup Screen if it is opened as
CAN
a Keypad.
CLR Clears the data input thus far and stands by for further input.
DEL Deletes the character at the cursor.
BS Deletes the character to the left the cursor.
Writes the text input in ASCII code form to a device. After the data is written, the focus can be
ENT moved according to the Focus Order setting. Focus Order can be set on the Options tab of
the Screen Properties dialog box.
SP Inputs a space.
Cur. > Moves the cursor right.
< Cur. Moves the cursor left.
Moves the focus one item before the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus
< Fcs.
Order can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.
Moves the focus one item after the current one as per the Focus Order setting. Focus Order
Fcs. >
can be set on the Options tab of the Screen Properties dialog box.
The Alt key switches the Popup Screen opened as a Keypad. Closes the Popup Screen that is
Alt
opened as the Keypad and opens another Popup Screen as the Keypad.
Press and hold the < Cur. and Cur. > keys for more than one second to cause it to move repeatedly.
The Alt key can be used, for instance, to switch between Keypads for lower case and upper case letters.
7-64 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
● For Data Transfer Keys
These keys can be used to execute Data Transfer functions.
Key Operation
Download Project Downloads a project file (ZNV format) saved on an external memory to the Touch.
Uploads the project used for operation on the Touch and saves the project file (ZNV format) to
Upload Project
an external memory.
For details about Data Transfer functions, refer to Chapter 25 “Data Transfer Function” on page 25-1.
● For Alarm Displays
These keys can be used for the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts.
■ Alarm List Display
Key Operation
Pg. Up Scrolls up the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size.
Pg. Dwn Scrolls down the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size.
Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point of
7
Fcs. Up
focus can be shown by pressing REVERSE.
Buttons
Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point of
Fcs. Dwn
focus can be shown by pressing REVERSE.
REVERSE Toggles the focus between show and hide.
Ref. The reference screen appears.
Press and hold the Pg. Up, Pg. Dwn, < Cur., and Cur. > keys for more than one second to move the
focus repeatedly.
■ Alarm Log Display
Key Operation
Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point of
Fcs. Up
focus can be shown by pressing REVERSE.
Moves the focus the number of lines (1 to 1023) specified in Scroll Size. The current point of
Fcs. Dwn
focus can be shown by pressing REVERSE.
REVERSE Toggles the focus between show and hide.
CHECK Shows the date and time the alarm that has focus was confirmed.
All Chk. Shows the date and time that all alarms were confirmed.
Del. Clears the alarm that has focus.
Del. All Clears all alarms.
Ref. Shows the reference screen for the alarm that has focus.
Stop Buzzer and Screen
Stops the sound of the buzzer and screen flashing when an alarm occurs.
Flashing
Press and hold the Fcs. Up and Fcs. Dwn keys for more than one second to move the focus repeatedly.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-65
4 Key Button
4.5 Key Browser
Select the key using the Key Browser. The Key Browser closes when a key is selected. The name of the key is shown
in Key Type. Settings that apply to the selected key are displayed.
When you select a key, the label for that key is assigned as the Registration Text.
Select the key type from the following uses:
Keypad, Data Transfer, Alarm Display
■ Keypad
These buttons are used for Numerical Input and Character Input:
■ Data Transfer
These buttons are used to execute Data Transfer functions.
7-66 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Key Button
■ Alarm Display
These buttons are used to manipulate the Alarm List Display and Alarm Log Display parts.
Buttons
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-67
5 Multi-Button
5 Multi-Button
5.1 How the Multi-Button is Used
Executes multiple commands at once.
These commands can be assigned to a Multi-Button.
Command Description
Bit Write Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device when pressed.
Writes a value to a word device when pressed. You can specify the destination address indirectly, and
Word Write
perform arithmetic on the value to be written.
Goto Screen Switches screens or opens other windows when pressed.
Key Performs downloads or uploads when pressed. Also used to manipulate other parts.
Script Executes a script when pressed.
• Pressing the button writes a 1 to a bit device, and the value in a word device to another device.
0 1
Touch External device
D0= 123 D0= 123
Move
D1= 0 D1= 123
• When the button is pressed, executes the script and switches the Base Screen
Touch Executes the script
// Script A
[D 100] = [D 100] + 1;
if ([D 100] >= 50)
{
[D 100] = 0;
}
7-68 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Button
5.2 Multi-Button Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-Buttons.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Multi-Button.
7
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi-Button.
Buttons
3 Double-click the dropped Multi-Button and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-69
5 Multi-Button
5.3 Properties of Multi-Button Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the button is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on the
Registration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is
displayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the Action Mode for the Multi-Button: Momentary or Alternate.
Momentary: The button turns ON when pressed, and OFF when released.
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action ON OFF ON OFF
Alternate: The button switches between ON and OFF each time it is pressed.
?
Press Release Press Release
Operation and
view
Initial image
Action ON OFF
7-70 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Button
■ Multi-Function
Use this grid to add or edit commands to execute when the Multi-Button is pressed.
Function List: Lists the commands to be executed.
Command Type: Shows the command type.
Command Name: Shows the command name.
Device: Shows the setting when one of the following Command Type is selected.
Shows the destination device for the Bit Write and Word Write commands.
Shows the screen number when Goto Screen is set to Switch to Base
Screen, Open Popup Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Shows the script ID for the Script command.
• Executes only the Goto Screen command at the end of the Function List when multiple Switch to Base
Screen type commands are set for Action Mode.
• Goto Screen commands are not executed from top to bottom as they appear in the Function List.
Rather, they are executed at the end of the scan of the Touch when the Multi-Button is pressed.
• If multiple Key commands are set, only the first and second Key commands in the Function List are
executed. The third and following Key commands are not executed. Also, only the first Key command that
7
specifies a Data Transfer function in the Function List is executed if multiple Key commands are set.
Buttons
• The function of Key command will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Command Type: Select the command to add.
Bit Write: Performs the same function as the Bit Write Command. For details, refer to
Chapter 11 “1 Bit Write Command” on page 11-1. Click Add to display the
Properties of Bit Write for Multi-Functions dialog box.
Word Write: Performs the same function as the Word Write Command. For details, refer to
Chapter 11 “2 Word Write Command” on page 11-9. Click Add to display the
Properties of Word Write for Multi-Functions dialog box.
Goto Screen: Performs the same function as the Goto Screen Command. For details, refer to
Chapter 11 “3 Goto Screen Command” on page 11-18. Click Add to display the
Properties of Goto Screen for Multi-Functions dialog box.
Key: Performs the same function as the Key Buttons. For details, refer to “4 Key
Button” on page 7-49. Click Add to display the Properties of Key for Multi-
Functions dialog box.
Script: Performs the same function as the Script Commands. For details, refer to Chapter
11 “4 Script Command” on page 11-25. Click Add to display the Properties of
Script for Multi-Functions dialog box.
Add: Adds a command to the list. A maximum of 32 commands may be added.
In Command Type, select Command, and then click this button to display the corresponding
Properties dialog box. Specify the command in the Properties dialog box.
Edit: Changes a command in the list.
Select the command in the list, and then click this button to display the corresponding Properties
dialog box. Change the command in the Properties dialog box.
Delete: Deletes a command from the list.
Select the command in the list, and then click this button.
Copy: Copies a command in the list.
Select a command in the list, and then click this button. A copy of the selected command is added
to the end of the list.
Up: Shifts the selected command upward in the list.
Down: Shifts the selected command downward in the list.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-71
5 Multi-Button
■ View Switching Method*1
Select how to display the ON/OFF status of the button.
Button: Pressing the button changes the drawing object displayed.
Device: The drawing objects assigned to the OFF and ON states are displayed when the value of device is 0
and 1, respectively. Specifies the device used to switch the drawing object display.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
No Image: The button is not displayed on the screen. The button appears as a dashed line frame on the edit
screen. Pressing the corresponding area on the Touch activates the assigned function. If No Image
is selected, the settings for View and Registration Text are disabled.
Selecting Device in View Switching Method allows you to create an illuminated pushbutton.
The illuminated pushbutton switches state (or image) according to ON or OFF state of the device address,
allowing you to display the state of a device that is being operated.
Example: When you set an external device address M0 as Device in View Switching Method, if the value
of M0 changes, the display image will switched according to the value of M0 even if the button is
not pressed.
Touch External device
0
OFF image:
M0
ON image:
View Switching Method (Device): M0
M0
*1 Advanced mode only
7-72 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Button
● View Tab
Only Coordinates and Size can be configured when No Image is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
Buttons
■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard: Uses the default graphics contained within WindO/I-NV3.
Picture: Uses an image file saved in Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.5 Available Image Files” on page 2-19.
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Blink
Select this check box if blinking is desired (alternating ON and OFF) when a part is ON.
Blink
ON image
OFF image
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-73
5 Multi-Button
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
7-74 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Button
● Registration Text Tab
These options can only be configured when Button or Device is selected for View Switching Method on the
General tab.
Buttons
■ Font
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-75
5 Multi-Button
■ OFF, ON
Text: Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
When entering Unicode characters click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters
using the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color: Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Windows Font: Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change to
display the Font dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
7-76 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Button
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Buttons
■ Input Condition
The Button is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Button is disabled and not operational
while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Button is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Button is operational.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Button
Does not
Not
operate
satisfied
LM0: 1 Button
Condition
Satisfied Operates
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Button from the following.
Always Enabled: The Button is always enabled.
Button state
Always Enabled
While ON: Enables the Button when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Button state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-77
5 Multi-Button
While OFF: Enables the Button when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Button state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Button when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Button state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
7-78 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Button
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Buttons
■ ON delay
Select this check box to use the ON delay function.
Time (x100 msec): Specify the length of time that the button must be held down before activation by selecting a
value from 0 to 600 (units of 10 milliseconds).
The button activates after it is held down for a specified period of time.
Touch Touch
Button
Button
Does not
Operates
operate
Hold down for three seconds
This feature protects against mistaken operation by ensuring that the button will not be activated if touched
accidentally.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-79
5 Multi-Button
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,
and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab
of the Project Settings dialog box.
7-80 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Button
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
Buttons
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Button on the editing screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-81
6 Keypad
6 Keypad
6.1 How the Keypad is Used
A part comprised of Key Buttons. Enters numbers and characters into Numerical or Character Input parts.
• Entering numbers in the Numerical Input
Touch
1230 Numerical Input
Keypad
• Entering characters in the Character Input
Touch
Character Input
Keypad
Do not use the Keypad part with the Goto Screen Button or a combination of Goto Screen Commands. For
details, refer to “4 Key Button” on page 7-49.
7-82 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Keypad
6.2 Keypad Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Keypads.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Keypad.
7
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Keypad.
Buttons
3 Double-click the dropped Keypad and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Keypad Properties dialog box is displayed until OK is clicked.
Refer to “6.3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box” on page 7-84.
After OK on the Keypad Properties dialog box is clicked, double clicking the Keypad thereafter displays the
Properties dialog box for the Key Buttons as a group.
This allows editing of settings common to each button.
• View: “View Tab” on page 7-54
• Registration Text: “Registration Text Tab” on page 7-56
• Options: “Options Tab” on page 7-60
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode. To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-83
6 Keypad
6.3 Properties of Keypad Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
■ Browse
Select a prebuilt Keypad within WindO/I-NV3.
Displays the Standard Browser when clicked. Select numeric keys or character keys registered in the Standard
Browser.
■ Button
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Select the foreground and background color to use for the Keypad (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when the Color button is clicked. Select a color from the Color
Palette.
Pattern: Select a pattern to use for the Keypad.
Displays the Pattern Palette when the Pattern button is clicked. Select a pattern from the
Pattern Palette.
■ Registration Text
Font: Select one of the following fonts to use for the text on the buttons.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3
Available Text” on page 2-6.
Style: Select a character style: Regular or Bold.
Magnification W, H: Select the zoom factor (0.5, 1 to 8) to use on the text.
This setting is only enabled when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese,
Korean, Central European, Baltic or Cyrillic.
Text Color: Select the text color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when the Color button is clicked. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specify the display coordinates of the Keypad.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the Keypad using the upper left corner of the screen as
the origin.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Keypad
7-84 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Keypad
■ Size
W, H: Specify the size of the Keypad by specifying width and height.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Keypad
Height
Buttons
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-85
7 Selector Switch
7 Selector Switch
7.1 How the Selector Switch is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device. This is an exclusive control that only writes a single value as 1 and all other values as 0.
• Switching between two Run Modes (Manual and Auto)
Knob
Automatic
Auto Manual
L-button R-button
Ch1 Ch2
Automatic Manual
Operate
Auto Manual Auto Manual manually
Press L-button to Press R-button to
switch to Auto. switch to Manual.
• Switching between three Run Modes (Filling - Stop - Discharge)
Knob
F S D
L-button R-button
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
F S D F S D F S D
Press L-button to Switch to Stop. Press R-button to
switch to Filling. (The operation varies based switch to Discharge.
on the switch type.)
7-86 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Selector Switch
7.2 Selector Switch Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Selector Switch buttons.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Selector Switch.
7
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Selector Switch.
Buttons
3 Double-click the dropped Selector Switch and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-87
7 Selector Switch
7.3 Properties of Selector Switch Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switch Type
The 2-notch action is as follows.
• When the knob is at Ch1 (left), pressing the right button switches the selector knob to Ch2 (right).
During this action, the device for Ch1 is set to 0 and Ch2 is set to 1.
• When the knob is at Ch2 (right), pressing the left button switches the selector knob to Ch1 (left).
During this action, the device for Ch1 is set to 1 and Ch2 is set to 0.
The 3-notch action is as follows.
• The knob behaves as follows for 3-Notch No-return, 3-Notch R-return, and 3-Notch L-return button:
- Press R-button: knob switches from Ch1 (left) -> Ch2 (middle) -> Ch3 (right), in that order.
- Press L-button: knob switches from Ch3 (right) -> Ch2 (middle) -> Ch1 (left), in that order.
• Switching the knob writes 1 to the device for the new knob position, and 0 to the devices for the other two
channels.
Whether the knob returns and the direction it returns depends on the switch type.
Select the switch type from the following.
2-Notch No-return: The knob does not return when the operator's finger is released.
Press R-button Release Press L-button Release
Operation
and view
Default state
Action Write Write
Data Ch1 0 1
written Ch2 1 0
7-88 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Selector Switch
2-Notch R-return: After the knob switches from Ch1 to Ch2, it returns to Ch1 when the R-button is released.
Press Release
Operation
and view
Default state
Action Write Write
Data Ch1 0 1
written Ch2 1 0
2-Notch L-return: After the knob switches from Ch2 to Ch1, it returns to Ch2 when the L-button is released.
Press Release
Operation
7
and view
Buttons
Default state
Action Write Write
Data Ch1 1 0
written Ch2 0 1
3-Notch No-return: The knob does not return when the operator's finger is released.
Press R-button Release Press L-button Release Press L-button Release
Operation
and view
Default state
Action Write Write Write
Ch1 0 0 1
Data
written Ch2 0 1 0
Ch3 1 0 0
3-Notch R-return: • If the knob is switched to Ch3, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
• If the knob is switched to Ch1, or from Ch1 to Ch2, it stays where it is even if the button is
released.
Press R-button Release Press L-button Release Press R-button Release
Operation
and view
Default state
Action Write Write Write Write
Ch1 0 0 1 0
Data
written Ch2 0 1 0 1
Ch3 1 0 0 0
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-89
7 Selector Switch
3-Notch L-return: • If the knob is switched to Ch1, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
• If the knob is switched to Ch2, or from Ch3 to Ch2, it stays where it is even if the button is
released.
Press R-button Release Press L-button Release Press L-button Release
Operation
and view
Default state
Action Write Write Write Write
Ch1 0 0 1 0
Data
written Ch2 0 1 0 1
Ch3 1 0 0 0
3-Notch Both-return: If the knob is switched to Ch1 or Ch3, it returns to Ch2 when the button is released.
Press R-button Release Press L-button Release
Operation
and view
Default state
Action Write Write Write Write
Ch1 0 0 1 0
Data
written Ch2 0 1 0 1
Ch3 1 0 0 0
■ Notch
Register and edit the settings for each notch to each channel.
Use Text Manager: Select this check box to use the text registered in Text Manager as the Registration
Text for each channel.
(List of Notch settings): This list shows the notch settings for each channel.
No.: Shows the channel to be output. The number of notches selected in the Switch
Type determines the number of channels.
Double clicking the cell displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can edit the
notch settings. For details, refer to “Notch Settings dialog box” on page 7-92.
Device: Shows the destination bit device or bit in the destination word device.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box where you
can edit the device address. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Text: Shows the Registration Text for the channel.
Double clicking the cell displays the Unicode Input dialog box where you can edit the
Registration Text.
If you select the Use Text Manager check box, the text ID is shown. Double
clicking the cell displays Text Manager where you can edit the text.
Color: Shows the color of the Registration Text for the channel.
Double clicking the cell displays Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Set: Registers or changes the notch settings. Selecting a number that has already been registered
changes the existing notch settings.
Clicking Set displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can configure the notch. For
details, refer to “Notch Settings dialog box” on page 7-92.
Notches are always registered from Ch1.
7-90 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Selector Switch
Insert: Inserts a notch setting entry above the currently selected position.
Select the channel number from the list where you want to insert the notch setting, and then
click Insert. This displays the Notch Settings dialog box where you can configure the notch.
The notch settings at the point of insertion shift down one line. Notch settings cannot be
inserted if all channel numbers have a notch setting.
Remove: Deletes the registered notch setting from the list.
Select the channel number in the list, and then click Remove.
Default Position: Selects the default position of the knob when the Touch starts operation and the Selector
Switch is first displayed on the screen.
Ch1: Makes Ch1 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device
configured for Ch1, writes 0 to the devices configured for the
other channels.
Ch2: Makes Ch2 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device
configured for Ch2, writes 0 to the devices configured for the
other channels.
Ch3: Makes Ch3 the default knob position. Writes 1 to the device 7
configured for Ch3, writes 0 to the devices configured for the
Buttons
other channels.
Read from Destination Device: The position of the knob is determined by the value of
device.
The default knob position is fixed for these two switch types because of the return functionality.
2- Notch R-return: Ch1
2-Note L-return, 3-Notch Both-return: Ch2
• If Default Position is Ch1, Ch2, or Ch3, the position of the knob does not change even if the value in
the device configured for the channel changes, unless the change is caused by the buttons on the
Selector Switch. If Default Position is Read from Destination Device, the position of the knob
changes according to the value of device configured for the channel.
• When a Selector Switch is redisplayed immediately after switching the screen or when a hidden Selector
Switch is redisplayed, values are not written to the destination devices for the channels.
• If the value in the device used to determine the default knob position contains an illegal value, the knob
will be shown as follows:
- 2- Notch No-return: Ch1
- 3-Notch: Ch2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-91
7 Selector Switch
Notch Settings dialog box
This dialog configures a notch for a channel. If the channel has already been set with a notch, the setting is
overwritten.
■ Destination Device
Specify the destination bit device or bit in the destination word device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Text
Enter the Registration Text for the channel.
The characters that can be entered depends on the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
To enter Unicode characters, click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in the
Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
■ Text ID
To use the text registered in Text Manager as the Registration Text for the channel, specify the ID number from 1 to
32,000.
Click to display Text Manager.
This setting is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.
■ Text Color
Select the Registration Text color for the channel (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Displays the Color Palette when the Color button is clicked. Select a color from the Color Palette.
7-92 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Selector Switch
● View Tab
Buttons
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Knob
Selects the knob color of the Selector Switch (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Knob
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the
Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from
the Pattern Palette.
Flange
■ Switch
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the
Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the button.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from
the Pattern Palette.
Buttons
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-93
7 Selector Switch
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
7-94 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Selector Switch
● Format Tab
Buttons
■ Font
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-95
7 Selector Switch
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Input Condition
The Selector Switch is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Selector Switch is disabled and not
operational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Selector Switch is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Selector Switch is operational.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Button
Does not
Not
operate
satisfied
LM0: 1 Button
Condition
Satisfied Operates
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Selector Switch from the following.
Always Enabled: The Selector Switch is always enabled.
Selector Switch
state
Enabled
While ON: Enables the Selector Switch when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Selector
Switch state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
7-96 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Selector Switch
While OFF: Enables the Selector Switch when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Selector
Switch state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Selector Switch when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Selector
Switch state
7
Buttons
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-97
7 Selector Switch
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
7-98 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Selector Switch
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
7
Touch Touch Touch
Buttons
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,
and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab of
the Project Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-99
7 Selector Switch
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Selector Switch on the editing screen
7-100 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Potentiometer
8 Potentiometer
8.1 How the Potentiometer is Used
Writes a value to a word device by pressing a slider button.
• The slider display position increases and decreases while the button is depressed. The value of the slider at the
displayed position is written to the device when the button is released.
Touch
Value of slider at External device
displayed position
0
D0 : 0
7
Value of slider at
Buttons
displayed position
105
D0 : 0
Value of slider at
displayed position
127 Write to device
D0 : 127
Default state Press R-button Release Press L-button Release
Operation
and view
Slider Stop Moves right Stop Moves left Stop
Value Increases Decreases
Action Write Write
The slider indicates the value written to the device. When the value is increased or decreased, the slider display
position also changes.
The slider moves between a user-defined minimum and maximum value.
The input value increases and decreases while the button is depressed. The value of the slider at the displayed
position is written to the device when the button is released.
The slider display position does not change when the value of Destination Device changes unless it was
changed by the Potentiometer buttons. However, immediately after the screen is switched and immediately
after the part is displayed on the screen, the slider is displayed at the position specified by the value of
Destination Device.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-101
8 Potentiometer
8.2 Potentiometer Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Potentiometer parts.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Potentiometer.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Potentiometer.
3 Double-click the dropped Potentiometer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
7-102 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Potentiometer
8.3 Properties of Potentiometer Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Buttons
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Data Type
Select the data type handled by the Potentiometer.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Minimum
Specify the minimum value that can be entered. The minimum value varies based on the data type.
■ Maximum
Specify the maximum value that can be entered. The maximum value varies based on the data type.
■ Destination Device
Specify the destination word device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-103
8 Potentiometer
● View Tab
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Slider Color
Selects the slider color of the Potentiometer (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Slider
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the
Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from
the Pattern Palette.
Flange
7-104 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Potentiometer
■ Switch
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the
Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the button.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from
the Pattern Palette.
Buttons
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1) 7
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
Buttons
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-105
8 Potentiometer
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Input Condition
The Potentiometer is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Potentiometer is disabled and not
operational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Potentiometer is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Potentiometer is operational.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Button
Does not
Not
operate
satisfied
LM0: 1 Button
Condition
Satisfied Operates
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Potentiometer from the following.
Always Enabled: The Potentiometer is always enabled.
Potentiometer
state
Enabled
While ON: Enables the Potentiometer when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Potentiometer
state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
7-106 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Potentiometer
While OFF: Enables the Potentiometer when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Potentiometer
state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Potentiometer when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Potentiometer
state
7
Buttons
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-107
8 Potentiometer
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
7-108 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Potentiometer
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
7
Touch Touch Touch
Buttons
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User2 can view the buttons. But since the input security group is Group B,
User2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and User3 logs in to the system. Group A buttons can be displayed,
and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box under the System tab
of the Project Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 7-109
8 Potentiometer
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Potentiometer on the editing screen
7-110 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 8 Lamps
This chapter describes the setup for the lamp parts and related Touch operations.
1 Pilot Lamps
1.1 How the Pilot Lamp is Used
Pilot Lamp parts display drawing objects. The value of a bit device is used to switch the drawing object displayed.
• Switch and display pictures by the values of devices
0 Touch
External device
8
1
Lamps
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-1
1 Pilot Lamps
1.2 Pilot Lamp Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Pilot Lamps.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Lamps, and then click Pilot Lamp.
2 Click a point on the Edit screen where you want to place the Pilot Lamp.
3 Double-click the dropped Pilot Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
8-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Pilot Lamps
1.3 Properties of Pilot Lamp Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Lamps
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ >>OFF Text, >>ON Text
Applies the text entered in the Part Name field to the Text field under the OFF or ON fields on the Registration
Text tab. This is used as the Registration Text when the lamp is OFF or ON.
To specify the Registration Text to use when the button is ON, select the Set by State check box on the
Registration Text tab. If left unchecked, the same Registration Text assigned for the OFF state is
displayed for the ON state as well.
■ Action Mode
Select the action when the part is ON.
No Blink (only ON): Displays the drawing object for the ON state when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Blink (ON + Blink): When the condition is satisfied and the value of the trigger device is 1, the object blinks
(alternates between the drawing object for the ON and OFF states at fixed time interval). The
blinking interval can be set with the Blinking Cycle setting on the System tab of the Project
Settings dialog box.
Blink Trigger Device: Specify the bit device to cause the lamp to blink.
The lamp blinks when the value of device is 1. The action for No Blink
applies when the value is 0.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-3
1 Pilot Lamps
Example: When Action Mode is Blink (ON + Blink), Blink Trigger Device is M0, and on the Trigger Condition
tab, Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
Trigger Condition: Device LM0 value 0 1 1 0
Action Mode: Value in trigger device M0 0 0 1 1
Displayed drawing object
Displays OFF Displays ON Displays OFF
Action Blinking
drawing object drawing object drawing object
The lamp will neither turn on or blink if the trigger conditions are not met. Lamp trigger conditions are
configured on the Trigger Condition tab.
8-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Pilot Lamps
● View Tab
Lamps
■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard: Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV3.
Picture: Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.5 Available Image Files” on page 2-19.
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser or Picture Manager, depending on the setting for Image Type.
■ OFF button, ON button
Displays the graphic when ON or OFF. Clicking the ON button or OFF button switches the image displayed on the
View tab.
■ OFF, ON
Selects the color and pattern of the standard graphic when ON and OFF.
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Not Display Image*1
Select this check box to display no drawing object in the OFF state.
If the Not Display Image check box is selected:
• The Recover Background function will always be enabled.
• Text set as registration text for the OFF state will be displayed.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-5
1 Pilot Lamps
■ Recover Background*1
Select this check box to recover the background of the area where the picture had been displayed after the picture is
switched. When this check box is cleared, the background is filled with the screen's Background Color.
When parts or drawings are arranged so they overlap the background of the Pilot Lamp (below), the background of
parts and drawings is displayed as follows if the Pilot Lamp picture is hidden.
Pilot Lamp
Drawing
Check box cleared Check box selected
The screen is filled with
Background Color, so Since background parts and
background parts and drawings are redrawn, they
drawings are missing. return to their original state.
Can only be set when Picture is selected for Image Type.
However, when the background part is the Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display, bar chart, line chart, or pie chart,
the missing sections will remain.
If the Recover Background check box is selected, the number of parts that can be placed on a single
screen decreases. If an error message appears when the Picture Display is displayed on the Touch, clear
the Recover Background check box or reduce the number of parts.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
*1 Advanced mode only
8-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Pilot Lamps
● Registration Text Tab
Lamps
■ Font
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-7
1 Pilot Lamps
■ OFF, ON
Text: Inputs characters to be displayed on parts. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
When entering Unicode characters click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters
using the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000) when using the text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text Color: Selects the color of the text displayed on the part (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Windows Font: Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change to
display the Font dialog box.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
8-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Pilot Lamps
● Trigger Condition Tab
Lamps
The Pilot Lamp is on while the condition is satisfied, and it is off while the condition is not satisfied. The Pilot Lamp
displays the ON graphic when on and it displays the OFF graphic when off.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
When LM0 is 0, condition is not satisfied, so Lamp displays OFF graphic.
When LM0 is 1, condition is satisfied, so Lamp displays OFF graphic.
Touch
LM0: 0
Condition
Not satisfied Lamp
Displays OFF graphic
LM0: 1
Condition
Satisfied Lamp
Displays ON graphic
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to turn on the Pilot Lamp from the following.
While ON: Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Pilot Lamp status
Off On Off On On Off
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-9
1 Pilot Lamps
While OFF: Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
Pilot Lamp status
On Off On Off Off On
While satisfying the condition: Turns on the Pilot Lamp when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Pilot Lamp status
Off On Off On On Off
■ Data Type
Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the on condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the on condition.
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Specifies the conditional expression for the on condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment for the on condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
8-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Pilot Lamps
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Lamps
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-11
1 Pilot Lamps
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
8-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Pilot Lamps
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
Lamps
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Pilot Lamp on the editing screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-13
2 Multi-State Lamps
2 Multi-State Lamps
2.1 How the Multi-State Lamp is Used
Multi-state lamp parts display drawing objects. The value of a specified word device is used to switch the drawing
object to be displayed.
• Switch and display pictures by the values of devices
Touch bit15 bit3 bit0
External device
bit3 bit0 D0
D0= 0100
State: 2 State: 1 State: 0
bit3 bit0
D0= 0001
bit3 bit0
D0= 0010
bit3 bit0
D0= 0100
8-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Multi-State Lamps
2.2 Multi-State Lamp Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-State Lamps.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Lamps, and then click Multi-State Lamp.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi-State Lamp.
3 Double-click the dropped Multi-State Lamp and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
Lamps
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-15
2 Multi-State Lamps
2.3 Properties of Multi-State Lamp Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switching Method
Specify the method to switch drawing objects from the following:
Bit: Switches the drawing object displayed, according to the status of the bits.
Example: When Bit is selected and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following pictures.
bit15 bit3 bit0
Trigger device D0 value
Picture
State: 2 State: 1 State: 0
Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1, display
the picture for the lowest
order bit.
Trigger device D0
0001 0010 0100 1000 1110 1100
bit state
Picture to display
State: 0 State: 1 State: 2 State: 1 State: 2
Display picture Display picture Display picture Display picture Display picture
Action No picture
for bit 0 for bit 1 for bit 2 for bit 1 for bit 2
If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit
with no associated picture becomes 1,
display nothing.
8-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Multi-State Lamps
Value: Switches the drawing object displayed, according to the value of the device.
Example: When Value is selected and the values of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the following
pictures.
Trigger device D0 value 0 1 2
Picture
State: 0 State: 1 State: 2
Switches the picture to display according to the value of the device.
Trigger device D0 value 0 1 2 3
Picture to display
If the value of device
State: 0 State: 1 State: 2
has no picture associated
Action Display picture for 0 Display picture for 1 Display picture for 2 No picture with it, display nothing.
■ Trigger Device
Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching the drawing object.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
8
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Lamps
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-17
2 Multi-State Lamps
● View Tab
■ Image Type
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part.
Standard: Uses the default graphic for WindO/I-NV3.
Picture: Uses an image file saved using Picture Manager.
For details about image file restrictions, refer to Chapter 2 “1.5 Available Image Files” on page 2-19.
■ Recover Background*1
Select this check box to recover the background of the area where the picture had been displayed after the picture is
switched. When this check box is cleared, the background is filled with the screen's Background Color.
When parts or drawings are arranged so they overlap the background of the Multi-State Lamp (below), the
background of parts and drawings is displayed as follows if the Multi-State Lamp picture is hidden.
Multi-State Lamp
Drawing
Check box cleared Check box selected
The screen is filled with
Background Color, so Since background parts and
background parts and drawings are redrawn, they
drawings are missing. return to their original state.
Can only be set when Picture is selected for Image Type.
However, when the background part is the Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display, bar chart, line chart, or pie chart,
the missing sections will remain.
If the Recover Background check box is selected, the number of parts that can be placed on a single
screen decreases. If an error message appears when the Multi-State Lamp is displayed on the Touch, clear
the Recover Background check box or reduce the number of parts.
*1 Advanced mode only
8-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Multi-State Lamps
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
8
Lamps
Screen
Height Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-19
2 Multi-State Lamps
● Registration Text Tab
■ Font
Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects the magnification (0.5, 1 to 8) for text display.
Can only be set when Font is set to Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European,
Baltic or Cyrillic.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects text alignment in the vertical direction.
Top, Center, Bottom
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects text alignment in the horizontal direction.
Left, Center, Right, Center-Left
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Set by State
Select this check box if displaying different text when ON and OFF.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for text display.
8-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Multi-State Lamps
● State Tab
Lamps
■ Number of States
Specify the number of drawing objects (1 to 16) to display by switching.
■ Settings
Lists the state settings. The list shows various settings such as the state number and file name for the drawing object.
State: Shows the state number. Double clicking the cell displays the State Settings dialog box where
you can edit the state settings. For details, refer to “State Settings dialog box” on page 8-22.
Image: Shows the name or a file name for a drawing object. Double clicking the cell opens the View
Browser if Standard is selected under Image Type on the View tab, or Picture Manager if
Picture is selected. This allows you to change the drawing object to display.
Text: Shows the registration text. Double clicking the cell displays the Unicode Input dialog box. If you
selected the Use Text Manager check box on the Registration Text tab, the Text Manager
dialog box will appear. This allows you to change the registration text.
Fg.Color, Bg.Color: Shows the foreground and background colors (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) for
standard images. Double clicking the cell opens the Color Palette where you can change the
foreground and background colors. This setting can only be changed if Image Type is set to
Standard on the View tab.
Pattern: Shows the pattern for standard images. Double clicking the cell opens the Pattern Palette where
you can change the pattern of the image. This setting can only be changed if Image Type is set
to Standard on the View tab.
Text Color Shows the color of the registration text. Double clicking the cell opens the Color Palette where
you can change the color of the text.
Blink: Indicates whether to display the drawing object blinking or constantly lit. Double clicking the cell
toggles between Y for yes and N for no.
Windows Font: Shows the currently set Windows Font. Double clicking the cell displays the Font Settings dialog
box where you can change the Windows Font. This setting can only be changed when
Windows is selected for Font on the Registration Text tab.
Set: Registers the state settings to the list. If you select a state number that is already registered,
that number is overwritten with the new settings.
Click this button to display the State Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “State Settings
dialog box” on page 8-22.
Insert: Inserts the settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a state number in the list, and then click this button to display the State Settings dialog
box. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be inserted if all
state numbers are configured.
Remove: Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a state number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-21
2 Multi-State Lamps
■ Image
Shows the image for the state number selected in the Settings list.
■ Copy to next State
Select this check box to register or change all state settings at once.
This option copies the current settings to all state numbers after the selected state number when the settings are set
or changed.
State Settings dialog box
This dialog box sets the drawing object and registration text to display.
■ Image
Browse: Select the drawing object to use for the lamp part. Clicking this button opens the View Browser
if Standard is selected under Image Type on the View tab, or Picture Manager if Picture is
selected.
Image: Shows the selected drawing object.
■ Text
Enter the text to display. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered depends on the font selected for Font on the Registration Text tab. For details,
refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
This setting is only enabled when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared on the Registration Text tab.
■ Text ID
To use the text registered in Text Manager, specify the ID number from 1 to 32000.
This setting is only enabled when the Use Text Manager check box is selected on the Registration Text tab.
■ Color
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Select the foreground and background color to use for standard images (color: 256 colors,
monochrome: 8 shades).
Clicking either button opens the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Select the pattern for a standard image. Clicking this button opens the Pattern Palette. Select a
pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Text Color: Select the text color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) for the registration text.
Clicking this button opens the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Blink: Select this check box to cause the image to blink (alternately display the ON and OFF drawing
object at fixed time interval).
The blinking interval can be set with the Blinking Cycle setting on the System tab of the
Project Settings dialog box.
■ Windows Font
Specify the Windows Font to use.
The current settings are displayed by selecting Windows in the Font property on the Registration Text tab. To
change the settings, click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box.
The text ID setting is only enabled if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
8-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Multi-State Lamps
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Lamps
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-23
2 Multi-State Lamps
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
8-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Multi-State Lamps
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
Lamps
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Multi-State Lamp on the editing screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 8-25
2 Multi-State Lamps
8-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 9 Data Displays
This chapter describes how to configure the Data Display parts and their operation on the Touch.
1 Numerical Input
1.1 How the Numerical Input is Used
The Numerical Input features a display mode that displays the current value of device and an entry mode that enters
a value using the keypad or key buttons and writes that value to a device. When the part is displayed on the screen,
the Numerical Input is in display mode. To enter a value by pressing the keypad or key buttons, touch the Numerical
Input to switch it to entry mode. In entry mode, the value of device is displayed until a value is entered.
The Numerical Input can perform the following functions.
• Write a value entered with the keypad or key buttons to a device
Touch
External device
Numerical Input
999
999 D100: 999
Standard keypad
Data Displays
• Display the current value of device
Touch
External device
1234
D100: 1234
• Enter and display decimal numbers
Touch
External device
12.30 12.30
12.3
• Display the entered value as * (asterisk)
Touch
External device
**** ****
****
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-1
1 Numerical Input
1.2 Numerical Input Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Numerical Inputs.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Input.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Input.
3 Double-click the dropped Numerical Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Data Over tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
9-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
1.3 Properties of Numerical Input Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Data Displays
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Keypad
Configures the keypad for entering values in the Numerical Input.
Use as Display for Keypad*1: Select this check box to only use the Numerical Input as a part to display the
value entered with the keypad.
Type: According to the location where the keypad is configured, selects the type from the following.
Standard: Uses the standard keypad. The standard keypad is the keypad configured as
the Popup Screen for the standard keypad (screen number 3000 to 3015).
This is the keypad for the type configured by Display Type.
Popup: Uses a keypad configured as a Popup Screen.
Current Screen: Uses the keypad configured on the same screen as the Numerical Input.
Screen No.: Specifies the screen number of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad (1 to 3015).
This option can only be configured if Popup is selected for Type.
Adjust location automatically: Select this check box to display the Popup Screen configured as the keypad in
a location where it will not overlap the Numerical Input.
This option can only be configured if Standard or Popup is selected for
Type.
Coordinates X, Y: Specifies the display location of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-left
corner of the Popup Screen.
This option can only be configured when Popup is selected for Type and the Adjust location
automatically check box is cleared.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-3
1 Numerical Input
■ Display Type
Selects the display type for the value as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
■ Data Format
Data Type: Selects the type of data for the value.
The data type that can be configured differs according to Display Type. For the data
types that can be configured, see the table for Digits.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Digits: Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on the
display type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type Data Type Digits
BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-) 1 to 5
BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-) 1 to 10
Decimal display BCD4 1 to 4
BCD8 1 to 8
float32 1 to 10
Hexadecimal BIN16 (+) 1 to 4
display BIN32 (+) 1 to 8
Display Floating Point: Select this check box to display the decimal point.
If Data Type is BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4, or BCD8 and the Display
Floating Point check box is selected, a decimal value will be displayed on the Numerical Input when a
decimal value is entered on the keypad in entry mode, but an integer is written to the device. In display
mode, source data is an integer, but the value is displayed with a decimal point added at the number of
floating digits configured for the Numerical Input.
However, if float32 is selected for Data Type, both the destination data and the source data are decimal
values.
Example: When Display Type is configured as Decimal, Data Type is BIN16(+), the Display Floating
Point check box is selected, Digits is 5, Floating Digits is 3, and Destination Device is D100
Touch
External device
12.345 D100: 12345
12.345
Floating Digits: Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of the
number of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is
selected. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on the
display type and data type. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part is as
follows.
Display Type Data Type Floating Digits
BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-) 1 to Digits
BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-) 1 to Digits
Decimal display BCD4 1 to Digits
BCD8 1 to Digits
float32 1 to 8
Hexadecimal BIN16 (+) --
display BIN32 (+) --
9-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
Floating Symbol*1: Selects the decimal point symbol from the following.
.(dot), :(colon), ;(semicolon), ,(comma), /(slash)
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is
selected.
Example: When Digits is 4 and Floating Digits is 2
When Floating Symbol is .(dot) 12.34
When Floating Symbol is /(slash) 12/34
Floating Symbol is not reflected on the standard keypad. To change the decimal point symbol on the
standard keypad, please change the keypad button.
Suppress Zeros: Select this check box to hide “0” for the upper digits of the integer part.
Example: Suppress Zeros selected: 1234
Suppress Zeros cleared: 00001234
Not Display Sign: Select this check box to hide the - (negative) symbol when displaying negative values.
This option can only be configured when Data Type is BCD4, BCD8, or float32.
■ Input Method
These options specify the destination for entered values.
Destination Device: Specifies the word device to write the entered value to.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device by the
9
value of this device.
Data Displays
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
For details on indirect writing, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.
■ Always Entry Mode*1
Select this check box to enter values by pressing the keypad and key buttons without touching the Numerical Input
displayed on the screen.
To display 0 on the Numerical Input until a value is entered, select the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of
Numerical Input check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. To display the value of device,
clear the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of Numerical Input check box.
This option can only be configured if Current Screen is selected for Type.
Example: When the Always Entry Mode check box is selected and the Start from 0 in Always Entry Mode of
Numerical Input check box is selected on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box
Enter a value Press ENT
0 999 999
Operations and display
Display 0 Display value being entered Write value to device
Action
(Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode)
Value of Destination Device 1234 1234 999
Not displayed on Numerical Input.
Only one Numerical Input or one Character Input set to Always Entry Mode can be configured on a single
screen.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-5
1 Numerical Input
Example: When the Always Entry Mode check box is cleared
Press Numerical Input Enter a value Press ENT
1234 1234 1234 999 999
Operations and
display
Enter 999
Display value of Display focus Display value of Write value to device Display value of
Action device device device
(Display mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Display mode)
Value of
1234 1234 1234 999 999
Destination Device
■ Focus is moved by ENT button*1
When multiple Numerical Inputs are configured on the screen, select this check box to continue entering values on
each of the Numerical Inputs.
Each time ENT is pressed, the focus moves between the Numerical Inputs according to Focus Order. On the View
tab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the Numerical Inputs in the order to move the focus.
Example: When Numerical Input A and B are configured and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for
Numerical Input A is selected and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for Numerical Input B is
cleared
Press Numerical Input A Enter a value Press ENT Enter a value Press ENT
A 1234 1234 1234 999 999 999 999 999
B 567 567 567 567 567 567 333 333
1234 999 999 567 333 333
Operations
and display
Move focus from
Numerical Input A to B
Numerical Input A Display value of device Display focus Display value of device Write value of device Display value of device
Action (Display mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Display mode)
Numerical Input B Display value of device Display focus Display value of device Write value to device Display value of device
Action (Display mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Display mode)
Numerical Input A
Value of 1234 1234 1234 999 999 999 999 999
Destination Device
Numerical Input B
Value of 567 567 567 567 567 567 333 333
Destination Device
*1 Advanced mode only
9-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
■ Update the display by ENT button*1
Select this check box to display the current value unchanged and update the display when a value is entered and ENT
is pressed.
When this check box is cleared, the display updates with each press of a number button to display the number being
entered.
Press Numerical Input Enter a value Press ENT
Numerical Input
1234 1234 1234 999 999
Keypad display
1234 999 999
Operations and display
Display value of device Display focus Display value of device Write value to device Display value of device
Action
(Display mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) (Display mode)
Value of Destination Device
1234 1234 1234 999 999
Numerical Input display
1234 1234 1234 999 999
Keypad display
- 1234 999 999 - 9
Data Displays
When a value outside the input range is entered and ENT is pressed, “?” is shown in the display. The value
is not written to the device.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-7
1 Numerical Input
● View Tab
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange
9-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
9
Height Parts
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-9
1 Numerical Input
● Format Tab
■ Size
Selects the text size as 8x16 or 16x16.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can configure the text color in display mode and in entry mode. However, for Entry Mode text color can
be set only when the Reverse check box is cleared.
■ Reverse
Select this check box to reverse the text color and plate color during display mode when in entry mode.
9-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
■ Display Numerical Value with “*” *1
Select this check box to display the entered value as * (asterisks).
Nothing is displayed if the value of device is 0 when this check box is selected and the Suppress Zeros check box is
selected on the General tab. When this check box is selected in entry mode, nothing is displayed until a value is
entered from the key buttons or keypad. If ENT is pressed with nothing displayed, 0 is written to the destination
device.
■ With Unit*1
Select this check box to display units or other characters at the end of a number. Displayed characters must be
registered in Text Manager. The displayed text color will be as set for Text Color under the Format tab.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000).
Click to display Text Manager.
Text: Displays the characters of the specified Text ID.
• The maximum number that can be displayed with this function is 4 characters. The fifth and subsequent
characters of a character string are not displayed. However, if Windows Font is set for the specified Text
ID characters all the characters are displayed.
• If a carriage return (CR) is included the characters after the CR are not displayed.
Data Displays
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-11
1 Numerical Input
● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Range
Select data type.
Value: Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.
Device: Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a value of word device.
Specifies the allowable range of values to enter or display.
Minimum, Maximum: Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on the
data type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
When Device is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
• Select BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4 or BCD8 for Data Type under the
General tab, and to display a fractional number specify the values of Minimum and Maximum as an
integer.
Example: To set a value of “1.25” for the upper limit, enter “125”.
• If the value of device to display exceeds the data range that can be processed for the data type selected
under Data Format on the General tab, “?” is displayed.
• If the entered value exceeds the allowable range or if it exceeds the data range that can be processed for
the data type selected under Data Format on the General tab, “?” is displayed and the value is not
written to the device.
9-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the value entered with the keypad exceeds the allowable
range.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Report: Select this check box and specify the report device to write 1 in this device when the entered data or
the value of device to display exceeds the allowable range.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: If you attempt to enter “140”, which is higher than the maximum of “100”, or “-10”, which is lower than the
minimum of “0”, the value is not written and “?” is displayed. 1 is written to When Data Over report
device LM0.
0 80 80 10 10
Range: Value 0 80 ????? 10 ?????
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 100 Operations
When Data Over and
Report: Selected display
Report device: LM0
Entered data 80 140 10 -10
Written data 80
0 1
10
0 1
9
Data over notification: LM0
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-13
1 Numerical Input
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Input Condition
The Numerical Input is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Numerical Input is disabled and
not operational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Input is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Input is operational.
Touch
Not
Condition LM0: 0 123 operational
Not
satisfied
LM0: 1 Operational
Condition 123
Satisfied
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Input from the following.
Always Enabled: The Numerical Input is always enabled.
123
Numerical Input
state
Always Enabled
While ON: Enables the Numerical Input when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
0
123 123 123 123 123 123
Numerical Input
state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
9-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
While OFF: Enables the Numerical Input when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
123 123 123 123 123 123
Numerical Input
state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Numerical Input when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
123 123 123 123 123 123
Numerical Input
state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2. 9
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
Data Displays
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-15
1 Numerical Input
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Groups
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
9-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
999
Numerical Input
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
9
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
999
Data Displays
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are enter password, Group A parts are
not displayed to User1. and switch to User2. displayed to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User 2 (of Group A) can view the buttons. But since the input security
group is Group B, User 2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 3, who is part of both Group A and
Group B. Group A buttons can be displayed, and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M 999
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
999 999
Button Button
Cannot operate Can operate
Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-17
1 Numerical Input
■ Input with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values entered using a keypad and writing the results, select this check box and
input the arithmetic formula.
Example: To divide the value of device when entered by 60
External device Touch
42000÷60
Numerical Input
42000 Destination Device: D0
D0 700 Input with Arithmetic Operation: @/60
Write value of
entered value
divided by 60
■ Display with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values of devices and writing the results, select this check box and input the
arithmetic formula.
Example: To multiple the value of device when displayed by 60
External device Touch
1234×60
Numerical Input
74040 Destination Device: D0
D0 1234 Display with Arithmetic Operation: @*60
Display value
multiplied by 60 for
the value of device
Arithmetic Formulas
Arithmetic formulas can be specified by freely combining multiple kinds of data and operators in the following format.
Data Operator Data
to
Data Operator DataOperator Data Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data ...(up to 120 characters)
• There is no limit on the number of data items or number of operators. However, the maximum number is 120
characters.
• Round brackets can be used.
Data
Item Description
The device on which the arithmetic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic formula. Only
@ 1 device can be set for an arithmetic operation.
The device is as specified for Destination Device under the General tab.
Sets the constant values for the arithmetic formula.
Value The values that can be set depend on the data type selected using Data Format under the General
tab. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device Specifies the bit device or word device for the arithmetic formula.
Operators
Specify the type of arithmetic operation to be performed on the data. The operator priority is the same as for scripts.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 20-52.
Item Description
Sets the arithmetic operators.
+ Addition Adds a and b .
Arithmetic
- Subtraction Subtracts b from a .
operators * Multiplication Multiplies a and b .
/ Division Divides a by b .
% Modulo Calculates remainder after dividing a by b .
9-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
Item Description
Sets the bit operator.
& Logical AND Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of a and b .
| Logical OR Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of a and b .
Bit operator Logical XOR Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of a and
^
(exclusive OR) b .
<< Left shift Shifts each bit of a to left by b bit(s).
>> Right shift Shifts each bit of a to right by b bit(s).
Examples of Arithmetic Formula Input
Input Examples Description
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add 1 to the value entered using the
Keypad and write the result to the device.
@+1
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add 1 to the value of device and display
the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value entered
[LDR 0] + @ + using the Keypad and add 100, and write the result to the device.
100 To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value of
device and add 100, then display the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, write the logical AND operation of the value
9
entered using the Keypad and 3 to the device.
Data Displays
@&3
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, a logical AND operation of the value of
device and 3 is displayed.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box on the System tab in
the Project Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-19
1 Numerical Input
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Numerical Input on the editing screen
9-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Numerical Input
1.4 How to Enter Values
Use the keypad or key buttons to write a value to a device with the Numerical Input. The input methods are as
follows.
■ Pressing the Numerical Input and Entering Values from the Standard Keypad
Arrange a Numerical Input on the screen and in its properties dialog box, on the General tab, under Keypad, select
Standard for Type.
Touch
External device
Display value of device
1234
(Display mode) D100: 1234
Press Numerical Input
Display standard keypad
Display value of device
1234
(Entry mode) 999 D100: 1234
Enter "999"
Data Displays
Write value
Display value of device to device
999
(Entry mode) 999 D100: 999
Press ENT
Close standard keypad
Display value of device
999
(Display mode) D100: 999
When the following operations are performed, entry mode is canceled and the current value of device is
displayed in the Numerical Input. To enter a value, press the Numerical Input again to set it to entry mode.
• CAN is pressed.
• When the Focus is moved by ENT button check box on the General tab is cleared, a value was
written to the device by pressing ENT.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-21
1 Numerical Input
■ Without Pressing the Numerical Input, Directly Entering Values from a Keypad on the Same Screen
Arrange a Numerical Input and a keypad on the same screen. In the properties dialog box for the Numerical Input, on
the General tab, under Keypad, select Current Screen for Type and select the Always Entry Mode check box.
Touch
External device
Display value of device
1234
(Entry mode) D100: 1234
Enter "999"
Write value
Display value of device to device
999
(Entry mode) D100: 999
Press ENT
Display value of device
999
(Entry mode) D100: 999
1.5 Advanced Usage
● Using the System Area
• When finished entering a value by pressing ENT, 1 is written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting
complete bit (address+3, bit 0).
If the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting complete bit (address+3, bit 0) is set to another function's
execution condition, that function can be executed when ENT is pressed.
Example: To simultaneously close a Popup Screen when ENT is pressed
In the Properties of Goto Screen Command dialog box, on the General tab, select Close Popup
Screen for Action Mode. On the Trigger Condition tab, select Rising-edge for Trigger
Type, and configure Device as the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting complete bit
(address+3, bit 0).
• When CAN is pressed, entry mode is canceled and 1 is written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting cancel
bit (address+3, bit 1). However, if the keypad is closed by pressing (close) on the Popup Screen's title bar or
another Numerical Input is pressed before finished entering the value by pressing ENT, entry mode is canceled and
1 is not written to the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting cancel bit (address+3, bit 1).
• To clear the System Area 2 Numerical Input setting complete bit or the Numerical Input setting cancel bit, write 1
to System Area 1 Numerical Input setting clear bit (address+1, bit 10). To automatically clear these bits when the
Numerical Input keypad is pressed in entry mode, select the Clear Keypad bit in System Area automatically
check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
9-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
2 Character Input
2.1 How the Character Input is Used
The Character Input features a display mode that displays the character codes in current values of devices as text and
an entry mode that enters text using the keypad or key buttons and writes the character codes for the entered text to
devices. When the part is displayed on the screen, the Character Input is in display mode. To enter text by pressing
the keypad or key buttons, touch the Character Input to switch it to entry mode.
The Character Input can perform the following functions.
• Write the character codes for text entered with the keypad or key buttons to devices
Touch
External device
Character Input D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
FT SERIES
Standard keypad
FT SERIES_
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘I’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)
• Display the character codes in current values of devices as text
9
Touch
External device
Data Displays
FT SERIES
D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)
• Display entered text as * (asterisk)
Touch
External device
****
**** ****
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-23
2 Character Input
2.2 Character Input Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Character Inputs.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Character Input.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Character Input.
3 Double-click the dropped Character Input and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
9-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
2.3 Properties of Character Input Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Data Displays
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Keypad
Configures the keypad for entering text in the Character Input.
Use as Display for Keypad*1: Select this check box to only use the Character Input as a part to display the
text entered with the keypad.
Type: According to the location where the keypad is configured, selects the type from the following.
Standard: Uses the standard keypad. The standard keypad is the keypad configured as
the Popup Screen for the standard keypad (screen number 3000 to 3015).
Popup: Uses a keypad configured as a Popup Screen.
Current Screen: Uses the keypad configured on the same screen as the Character Input.
Screen No.: Specifies the screen number of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad (1 to 3015).
This option can only be configured if Popup is selected for Type.
Adjust location automatically: Select this check box to display the Popup Screen configured as the keypad in a
location where it will not overlap the Character Input.
This option can only be configured if Standard or Popup is selected for Type.
Coordinates X, Y: Specifies the display location of the Popup Screen configured as the keypad.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-left
corner of the Popup Screen.
This option can only be configured when Popup is selected for Type and the Adjust location
automatically check box is cleared.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-25
2 Character Input
■ Data Format
Specifies the digits to display.
Input Digits: Specifies the number of digits that can be entered with the Character Input (1 to 127).
Display Digits: Specifies the number of digits that can be displayed in the Character Input display (1 to 100).
■ Input Method
These options configure the destination for the character codes for the entered text.
Destination Device: Specifies the destination word device for the character codes for the entered text.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device by the
value of this device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
For details on indirect writing, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.
■ Always Entry Mode*1
Select this check box to enter text by directly pressing the keypad and key buttons without touching the Character
Input displayed on the screen.
This option can only be configured if Current Screen is selected for Type.
Example: When the Always Entry mode check box is selected
Press CLR Enter text Press ENT
FT_ _ IDEC_ IDEC_
Operations
and display
Deletes text Enter IDEC
Display values of devices Display only focus Display text being Write character codes to
Action
as text (Entry mode) (Entry mode) entered (Entry mode) devices (Entry mode)
‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex)
Value of
Destination Device ‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)
Only one Numerical Input or one Character Input set to Always Entry Mode can be configured on a single
screen.
Example: When the Always Entry Mode check box is cleared
Press Character Input Press CLR Enter text Press ENT
FT FT_ _ IDEC_ IDEC_ IDEC
Operations
and display
Deletes text Enter IDEC
Display values of devices Display focus Display only focus Display text being Write character codes to Display values of devices
Action
as text (Display mode) (Entry mode) (Entry mode) entered (Entry mode) devices (Entry mode) as text (Display mode)
‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4944(Hex) ‘ I ’ ‘D’ 4844(Hex)
Value of
Destination Device ‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex) ‘E’ ‘C’ 4543(Hex)
*1 Advanced mode only
9-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
■ Focus is moved by ENT button*1
When multiple Character Inputs are configured on the screen, select this check box to continue entering text on each
of the Character Inputs.
Each time ENT is pressed, the focus moves between the Character Inputs according to Focus Order. On the View
tab, in the Screens group, click Focus Order, and then click the Character Inputs in the order to move the focus.
Example: When Character Input A and B are configured and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for
Character Input A is selected and the Focus is moved by ENT button check box for Character Input B is
cleared
Press Character Input A Enter text Press ENT Enter text Press ENT Press ENT
A FT FT_ FT_ FT SERIES_ FT SERIES FT SERIES FT SERIES FT SERIES
B MICRO MICRO MICRO MICRO MICRO_ MICRO_ MICRO SMART_ MICRO SMART
FT_ FT SERIES_ FT SERIES_ MICRO_ MICRO SMART_ MICRO SMART_
Operations and
display
Move focus from
Character Input A to B
Character Input A Display values of devices Display focus Display text being Write character codes to Display values of devices
Action as text (Display mode) (Entry mode) entered (Entry mode) devices (Entry mode) as text (Display mode)
Character Input B Display values of devices Display focus Display text being Write character codes to Display values of devices
Action as text (Display mode) (Entry mode) entered (Entry mode) devices (Entry mode) as text (Display mode)
‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex) ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex) ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex) ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex) ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
Character Input A
Value of ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex) ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex) ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex) ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex) ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
Destiation Device ‘ I ’ ‘E’
‘S’ (NULL)
4945(Hex)
5300(Hex)
‘ I ’ ‘E’
‘S’ (NULL)
4945(Hex)
5300(Hex)
‘ I ’ ‘E’
‘S’ (NULL)
4945(Hex)
5300(Hex)
‘ I ’ ‘E’
‘S’ (NULL)
4945(Hex)
5300(Hex)
‘ I ’ ‘E’
‘S’ (NULL)
4945(Hex)
5300(Hex)
9
Data Displays
‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex) ‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex) ‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex) ‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex) ‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex) ‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex) ‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex) ‘M’ ‘ I ’ 4D49(Hex)
‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex) ‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex) ‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex) ‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex) ‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex) ‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex) ‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex) ‘C’ ‘R’ 4352(Hex)
Character Input B ‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex) ‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex) ‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex) ‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex) ‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex) ‘O’ (NULL) 4100(Hex) ‘O’ ‘ ’ 4120(Hex) ‘O’ ‘ ’ 4120(Hex)
Value of
‘S’ ‘M’ 534D(Hex) ‘S’ ‘M’ 534D(Hex)
Destiation Device
‘A’ ‘R’ 4152(Hex) ‘A’ ‘R’ 4152(Hex)
‘T’ (NULL) 5400(Hex) ‘T’ (NULL) 5400(Hex)
■ Update the display by ENT button*1
Select this check box to display the current text unchanged and update the display when text is entered and ENT is
pressed.
When this check box is cleared, the display updates with each press of a character button to display the character
being entered.
Press Character Input Enter text Press ENT
FT FT_ FT_ FT SERIES_ FT SERIES
FT_ FT SERIES_ FT SERIES_
Operations and
display
Display values of devices Display focus Display text being Write character codes to Display values of devices
Action entered (Entry mode) devices (Entry mode)
as text (Display mode) (Entry mode) as text (Display mode)
‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex) ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex) ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
Value of ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex) ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
Destination Device
‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex) ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4943(Hex)
‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex) ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)
Character Input
FT FT FT FT SERIES FT SERIES
display
Keypad display
Hide FT FT SERIES FT SERIES Hide
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-27
2 Character Input
● View Tab
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange
9-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
9
Height Parts
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-29
2 Character Input
● Format Tab
■ Font
Selects the font for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Size
Selects the text size as 8x16 or 16x16.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This option can configure the text color in display mode and in entry mode. However, for Entry Mode text color can
be set only when the Reverse check box is cleared.
■ Reverse
Select this check box to reverse the text color and plate color during display mode when in entry mode.
9-30 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
■ Display Character with “*”*1
Select this check box to display the entered characters as * (asterisks).
If this check box is selected, nothing is displayed until a value is entered from the key buttons or keypad when the
Character Input is in entry mode. If ENT is pressed with nothing displayed, 0 is written to the destination device.
■ Change Font with Device*1
Select this check box to change the font to display the text with a value of device.
The keypad (Popup Screen) can also be changed when Standard or Popup is selected for Type under Keypad on
the General tab.
Trigger Device: Specifies the word device (2 words) to use as the condition to change the font.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
1. Japanese
2. European
1st word 2nd word 3rd word Font number 6. Central European
7. Baltic
Font number Popup Screen No. 8. Cyrillic
Popup Screen
1 to 3015
No.
Example: With Trigger Device set to D100, to enter Central European text from Popup Screen
100 using a Character Input for entering European text from the standard keypad 9
(Popup Screen 3003)
Data Displays
Write 6 to D100 and 100 to D101.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-31
2 Character Input
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Input Condition
The Character Input is enabled and operational while the condition is satisfied. The Character Input is disabled and
not operational while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Character Input is not operational.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Character Input is operational.
Touch
Not
Condition LM0: 0 IDEC operational
Not
satisfied
LM0: 1 Operational
Condition IDEC
Satisfied
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to enable the Character Input from the following.
Always Enabled: The Character Input is always enabled.
IDEC
Character Input
state
Always Enabled
While ON: Enables the Character Input when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
0
IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC
Character Input
state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
9-32 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
While OFF: Enables the Character Input when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC
Character Input
state
Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Character Input when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC IDEC
Character Input
state
Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled
Data Type: Selects the type of data handled by the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured if While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2. 9
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as the input condition.
Data Displays
This option can only be configured when While ON or While OFF is selected for Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Specifies the conditional expression for the input condition.
This option can only be configured when While satisfying the condition is selected for Trigger
Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Comment: Enter a comment for the input condition. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-33
2 Character Input
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Groups
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
9-34 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
FT SERIES
Character Input
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
User2 130 130
******** ENT
9
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
FT SERIES
Data Displays
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are enter password, Group A parts are
not displayed to User1. and switch to User2. displayed to User2.
User1 User2
Since the display security group is Group A, User 2 (of Group A) can view the buttons. But since the input security
group is Group B, User 2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 3, who is part of both Group A and
Group B. Group A buttons can be displayed, and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ FT SERIES_
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
FT SERIES FT SERIES FT SERIES_
Button Button
Cannot operate Can operate
Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
■ No Touch Sound
This function is to disable touch sounds only for specified parts when the Touch makes touch sounds.
Select this check box to display disable touch sounds for this part.
To enable touch sounds on the Touch, select the Enable Touch Sound check box on the System tab in
the Project Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-35
2 Character Input
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Character Input on the editing screen
9-36 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
2.4 How to Enter Text
Use the keypad or key buttons to write character codes to devices with the Character Input. The input methods are as
follows.
■ Pressing the Character Input and Entering Text from the Standard Keypad
Arrange a Character Input on the screen and in its properties dialog box, on the General tab, under Keypad, select
Standard for Type.
Touch
External device
Display values of device as text
FT
(Display mode)
Press Character Input
D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
Display standard keypad
Display values of device as text
FT_
(Entry mode)
FT SERIE
D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
Enter text as
"FT SERIES"
Data Displays
Write text character
Display values of device as text codes to devices D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
FT SERIES_
(Entry mode)
FT SERIES_ D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
Press ENT
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)
Close standard keypad
Display values of device as text
FT SERIES
D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
(Display mode)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)
When the following operations are performed, entry mode is canceled and the current values of devices are
displayed as character codes on the Character Input. To enter text, press the Character Input again to
select it and set it to entry mode.
• CAN is pressed.
• When the Focus is moved by ENT button check box on the General tab is cleared, a value was
written to the device by pressing ENT.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-37
2 Character Input
■ Without Pressing the Character Input, Directly Entering Text from a Keypad on the Same Screen
Arrange a Character Input and a keypad on the same screen. In the properties dialog box for the Character Input, on
the General tab, under Keypad, select Current Screen for Type and select the Always Entry Mode check box.
Touch
External device
Display values of device as text
FT_
(Entry mode)
D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
Enter text as
"FT SERIES"
Write text character
Display values of device as text codes to devices D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
FT SERIES_
(Entry mode)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
Press ENT
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)
Display values of device as text D100 : ‘F’ ‘T’ 4654(Hex)
FT SERIES
(Entry mode)
D101 : ‘ ’ ‘S’ 2053(Hex)
D102 : ‘E’ ‘R’ 4552(Hex)
D103 : ‘ I ’ ‘E’ 4945(Hex)
D104 : ‘S’ (NULL) 5300(Hex)
■ Changing the Language and Entering Text
Select the Change Font with Device check box on the Format tab in the properties dialog box.
It is convenient to use this setting together with the text group settings.
The font and Popup Screen with this setting will change simultaneously with the text group change and text can be
entered with the same font as the text group.
Select the Use Dynamic Text check box in the Text Group Settings dialog box and specify the same device in
Trigger Device as the Trigger Device for this setting.
2.5 String Data Storage Method
The entered text is stored in the upper byte and lower byte according to the Storage Method of String Data
setting. Storage Method of String Data is configured on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-18.
Example: When the destination device is LDR100 and the entered text is ABCDE
• When from Upper byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data
Stored value
Device
Upper byte Lower byte
LDR100 'A' = 41 (Hex) 'B' = 42 (Hex)
LDR101 'C' = 43 (Hex) 'D' = 44 (Hex)
LDR102 'E' = 45 (Hex) 0
NULL terminating character
• When from Lower byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data
Stored value
Device
Upper byte Lower byte
LDR100 'B' = 42 (Hex) 'A' = 41 (Hex)
LDR101 'D' = 44 (Hex) 'C' = 43 (Hex)
LDR102 0 'E' = 45 (Hex)
NULL terminating character
When handling strings, 0 is written to the device as the NULL terminating character and treated as the end
of the string.
9-38 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Character Input
2.6 Advanced Usage
● Using the System Area
• When finished entering text by pressing ENT, 1 is written to the System Area 2 Character Input setting complete bit
(address+3, bit 5).
• When CAN is pressed, entry mode is canceled and 1 is written to the System Area 2 Character Input setting cancel
bit (address+3, bit 6). However, if the keypad is closed by pressing (close) on the Popup Screen's title bar or
another Character Input is pressed and selected before finished entering the text by pressing ENT, entry mode is
canceled and 1 is not written to the System Area 2 Character Input setting cancel bit (address+3, bit 5).
• To clear the System Area 2 Character Input setting complete bit or the Character Input setting cancel bit, write 1 to
System Area 1 Character Input setting clear bit (address+1, bit 11). To automatically clear these bits when the
Character Input keypad is pressed in entry mode, select the Clear Keypad bit in System Area automatically
check box on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-39
3 Picture Display
3 Picture Display
3.1 How the Picture Display is Used
The Picture Display displays pictures. It can change, move, or scale the displayed picture according to values of devices.
• Switch and display pictures by values of devices
bit15 bit3 bit0
Touch
External device
D0
bit3 bit0
D0= 0100
Pic2 Pic1 Pic0
bit3 bit0
D0= 0001
bit3 bit0
D0= 0010
bit3 bit0
D0= 0100
9-40 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Picture Display
• Move the picture position by values of devices
Touch
External device
X-coordinate D100= 0 Display picture at X 0, Y 0
Y-coordinate D101= 0
X-coordinate D100= 108
Y-coordinate D101= 45 Move picture to X 108, Y 45
X-coordinate D100= 216
Y-coordinate D101= 90
Move picture to X 216, Y 90
9
• Scale the size of the picture by values of devices and display it
Data Displays
Touch
External device
Width D100= 120
Height D101= 50 Scale picture to
W 120, H 50
Width D100= 216
Height D101= 90
Scale picture to
W 216, H 90
Width D100= 24 Shrink picture to
Height D101= W 24, H 10
10
When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-41
3 Picture Display
3.2 Picture Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Picture Displays.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Picture Display.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Picture Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Picture Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
9-42 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Picture Display
3.3 Properties of Picture Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Data Displays
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switching Method
Specifies the method for switching pictures to display from the following. Register pictures in Picture List on the
View tab.
Bit: Switches the picture to display according to the status of bits in a device.
Example: When Bit is selected and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following
pictures.
bit15 bit3 bit0
Trigger device D0
Picture
Pic2 Pic1 Pic0
Switches the picture to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1, display
the picture for the lowest
order bit.
Trigger device D0
0001 0010 0100 1000 1110 1100
bit state
Picture to display
Pic 0 Pic 1 Pic 2 Pic 1 Pic 2
Display picture Display picture Display picture Display picture Display picture
Action No picture
for bit 0 for bit 1 for bit 2 for bit 1 for bit 2
If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit
with no associated picture becomes 1,
display nothing.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-43
3 Picture Display
Value: Switches the picture to display according to the value of device.
Example: When Value is selected and the values of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the
following pictures.
Trigger device D0 value 0 1 2
Picture
Pic0 Pic1 Pic2
Switches the picture to display according to the value of device.
Trigger device D0 value 0 1 2 3
Picture to display
If the value of device has
Pic 0 Pic 1 Pic 2
no picture associated
Action Display picture for 0 Display picture for 1 Display picture for 2 No picture with it, display nothing.
Trigger Device: Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching pictures.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be configured when Bit or Value is selected.
When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.
■ Blink
Select this check box to flash the displayed pictures.
■ Dynamic Position*1
Select this check box to move and display the picture by specifying the coordinates of the picture as values of devices.
X Point: Specifies the word device that is the X-coordinate of the picture.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Y Point: Specifies the word device that is the Y-coordinate of the picture.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: When the X-coordinate is D100 and the Y-coordinate is D101
The picture is moved to the values of D100 and D101.
Value of X-coordinate device
D100 0 108 216
Value of Y-coordinate device 0 45 90
D101
0 108 216
0
Position of picture to display 45
90
*1 Advanced mode only
9-44 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Picture Display
■ Dynamic Size*1
Select this check box to scale the picture by specifying the size of the picture as values of devices.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Width: Specifies the word device that is the width of the picture.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Height: Specifies the word device that is the height of the picture.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: When the width device is D100 and the height device is D101
The picture is displayed with its size scaled to the values of D100 and D101.
Value of Width device D100 24 120 216
Value of Height device D101 10 50 90
24 120 216
10
Size of picture to display 50
90
9
Data Displays
When the size of pictures to switch differs and the Dynamic Size check box is cleared, all the pictures are
displayed with the same size as Pic0.
When moving and scaling pictures, set the values of devices so the picture is not moved or scaled outside
the screen's display area.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-45
3 Picture Display
● View Tab
Pic number
■ Picture List
Registers the pictures to display on the Picture Display. The picture number (Pic number) and the file name of the
registered picture are displayed in the list.
Set: Registers a picture to the list. If you select a Pic number with a picture that is already registered, that
number is overwritten with the new picture.
Select a Pic number on the list, and then click this button to display Picture Manager. Specify the picture to
register with Picture Manager.
Insert: Inserts the picture in the position selected on the list.
Select the Pic number on the list at the position to insert the picture, and then click this button to display
Picture Manager. Specify the picture to insert. The picture at the insertion point shifts one Pic number
down. The picture cannot be inserted when pictures are registered to all the Pic numbers.
Remove: Deletes the registered picture from the list.
Select a Pic number on the list, and then click this button to delete the selected picture from the list.
Up: Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
Down: Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
Recover Background*1:
Select this check box to recover the background of the area where the picture had been displayed after the
picture is switched. When this check box is cleared, the background is filled with the screen's Background
Color.
When parts or drawings are arranged so they overlap the background of the Picture Display (below), the
background of parts and drawings is displayed as follows if the Picture Display picture is hidden.
Picture Display
Drawing
Check box cleared Check box selected
The screen is filled with Since background parts
Background Color, so and drawings are
background parts and redrawn, they return to
drawings are missing. their original state.
However, when the background part is the Alarm List Display, Alarm Log Display, bar chart, line chart, or
pie chart, the missing sections will remain.
*1 Advanced mode only
9-46 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Picture Display
If the Recover Background check box is selected, the number of parts that can be placed on a single
screen decreases. If an error message appears when the Picture Display is displayed on the Touch screen,
clear the Recover Background check box or reduce the number of parts.
• When the Dynamic Position check box or the Dynamic Size check box is selected on the General tab,
the Recover Background check box cannot be selected.
• When the Recover Background check box and the Blink check box on the General tab are selected,
the picture is repeatedly displayed and hidden.
■ Image
Displays picture for the Pic number that has been selected in the Picture List.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
9
Data Displays
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 2 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 2 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-47
3 Picture Display
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
The Picture Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Picture Display does not display the picture.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Picture Display displays the picture.
Touch
Hide
Condition LM0: 0 picture
Not
satisfied
Show
LM0: 1 picture
Condition
Satisfied
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Picture Display from the following.
Always Enabled: The Picture Display is always enabled.
Data Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 Pic0
Display
Update Update Update Update Update Update Update
9-48 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Picture Display
While ON: Enables the Picture Display when the value of device is 1.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data
Data Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 Pic0
1
Value of Device
0
Display
Do not update Update Do not update Update Update Update Do not update
While OFF: Enables the Picture Display when the value of device is 0.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data
Data Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 Pic0
1
Value of Device
0
Display
Update Do not update Update Do not update Do not update Do not update Update
9
While satisfying the condition:
Data Displays
Enables the Picture Display when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Picture data
Data Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 Pic0 Pic1 Pic2 Pic0
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Display
Do not update Update Do not update Update Update Update Do not update
■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-49
3 Picture Display
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
9-50 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Picture Display
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
********
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
ENT
9
Data Displays
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-51
3 Picture Display
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Picture Display on the editing screen
9-52 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
4 Message Display
4.1 How the Message Display is Used
The Message Display is used to constantly display messages registered in advance and to display text read from
values of word devices as character codes.
The Message Display can perform the following functions.
• Display messages
Touch
Goal reached
• Display text according to value of devices
Touch
External device Message details
D100 : ‘1’ ‘2’ 3132(Hex) Goal 1234K
Goal \
9
Data Displays
D101 : ‘3’ ‘4’ 3334(Hex)
Always show Show according to
D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex) value of devices
D100 : ‘5’ ‘6’ 3536(Hex) Goal 5678K
D101 : ‘7’ ‘8’ 3738(Hex)
D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)
D100 : (NULL) ‘1’ 0031(Hex) Goal
D101 : ‘2’ ‘3’ 3233(Hex)
D102 : ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)
D100 ‘1’ ‘2’ 3132(Hex) ‘5’ ‘6’ 3536(Hex) (NULL) ‘1’ 0031(Hex)
Value of Reference D101 ‘3’ ‘4’ 3334(Hex) ‘7’ ‘8’ 3738(Hex) ‘2’ ‘3’ 3233(Hex)
Devices
D102 ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex) ‘K’‘M’(NULL) 4B00(Hex) ‘K’ (NULL) 4B00(Hex)
Display Goal 1234K Goal 5678K Goal
Display always shown text and text Display always shown text and text Display only always shown text
shown according to value of device shown according to value of device Do not show if upper byte of the Reference
Action
Device starting address is 00 (NULL)
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-53
4 Message Display
• Scroll messages
Touch
Message details
Line A Line A : 1234K pcs. Line B : 5678K pcs.
A : 1234K pcs.
pcs. Line B
8K pcs.
• Change the message and plate color according to a value of device
Touch
External device
Upper byte Lower byte
Upper byte Lower byte FT SERIES D0 : 0xF7 0x00
D0 : 0xF7 0x00
Plate color Text color
Upper byte Lower byte
Upper byte Lower byte FT SERIES D0 : 0xF7 0x90
D0 : 0xF7 0x90
Plate color Text color
9-54 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
4.2 Message Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Message Displays.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Message Display.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Message Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Message Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
Data Displays
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-55
4 Message Display
4.3 Properties of Message Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
To read values of word devices as character codes with text registered in Text Manager and display it as
text, enter “\@” (1 to 8) in Text for the Text ID at the position to display the value of device as text. The
channels configured under Data are allocated in order from the first “\@”. The text is displayed according to
the values of devices in order from the first reference device.
However, in the following situations “\@” is not handled as text to display according to values of devices and
is displayed unchanged.
• When Font is Windows for Text ID configured in Text Manager
• When the number of “\@” configured in Text for Text ID is greater than the number of channels
configured with devices
(Text for the character codes corresponding to the values of devices is only displayed for the number of
channels in order from the beginning.)
9-56 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
■ Message
Enter the text to display. The maximum number is 610 characters. You can enter multi-line messages by inserting a
newline. To configure text to display according to values of devices, enter “\@” (1 to 8) at the location to read the
values of word devices as character codes and display them as text. The channels configured under Data are
allocated in order from the first “\@”. The text is displayed according to the values of devices in order from the first
reference device.
Example: The device configured in Ch1 is allocated to the first “\@”. The device configured in Ch2 is allocated to the
second “\@”.
Goal \ Ch1
Now \ Ch2
Always show Show according to values of devices
The characters that can be entered vary based on to the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For details, refer
to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
• To enter Unicode characters, click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in
the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
• To display the backslash (\), enter a backslash (\) before the backslash (\).
Example:\\
■ Data
9
These options are used to register or edit the devices with values to read as character codes.
Data Displays
(Settings): Lists the settings for the text to display according to values of devices.
No.: Shows the channel numbers (Ch1 to Ch8).
Device: Shows the reference device configured for the channel.
Words: Shows the number of words used by the reference device.
Reference Device: Specifies the word device that stores the values read as character codes.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Set the values of devices to the character codes for the language used. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “Character Code Table” on page 2-15.
Words: Specifies the number of words for the length of the text to display (1 to 64). Values of devices
for the configured amount of words are read as character codes starting from the device
address set by Reference Device. 2 single-byte characters can be displayed by 1 word.
Set: Registers the settings for the text to display according to values of devices to the list. If you
select a number that is already registered, that number is overwritten with the new settings.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to register the Reference Device
and Words settings.
Always register the settings from Ch1.
Insert: Inserts the settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to insert the Reference Device and
Words settings. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be
inserted if all the Ch numbers are configured.
Remove: Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a Ch number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-57
4 Message Display
● View Tab
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange
9-58 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
9
Height Parts
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-59
4 Message Display
● Format Tab
■ Font
Selects the font for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the text alignment in the vertical direction from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom, Center-Top
Set to Center when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
9-60 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box when displaying text vertically.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicable
for Windows supports East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are left-
aligned.
Aligned to
left edge
• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-byte
characters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters
• When using text displayed according to values of devices, the characters are counted as single-byte
characters and the display area for the characters is indicated by dotted lines. Therefore, when the text
to display according to values of devices is double-byte characters, the display area actually required
differs from the area indicated by the dotted lines.
9
Example: When 1 word of text to display according to values of devices is set to vertical writing, the
Data Displays
vertical size of the dotted lines is displayed as 2 single-byte characters.
2 single-byte chars. 1 double-byte char.
Dotted line frame is
2 chars. High
■ Align Text depending on the length of the Displayed message*1
Select this check box to align text as standard to the number of characters that will be displayed.
When cleared, the maximum number of characters (set number of words) is always aligned as standard.
Example: When there are 2 characters of text to always display on the first line, 6 characters of text to always display
on the second line and 6 characters of text (3 words) to display according to values of device, Align Text
Horizontal is set to Center, and the text to display according to values of device is blank (when only 6
characters are always displayed on the second line)
Check box: Selected Check box: Cleared
1st line text : AB
Blank
AB AB
2nd line text : AB CD E F AB C D E F AB C D E F
Always show Show according to
values of device
Characters to show Maximum characters
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-61
4 Message Display
■ Scroll*1
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.
Speed (1: Fastest): Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the text displayed according to values of devices, the text color, or the displayed text changes, the
message is scrolled from the beginning.
When the Scroll check box is selected, take care about the following points.
• This setting is only enabled when the Enable check box in the Blink group box on the Option tab is
cleared.
• The number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen decreases. If the Touch displays an error
message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the number of parts on the screen.
• When the scan time of the Touch is long, scrolling speed may become slow.
*1 Advanced mode only
9-62 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Data Displays
The Message Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
When disabled, the plate and flange are displayed, but the message is not displayed.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Message Display does not display the message.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Message Display displays the message.
Touch
LM0: 0 Hide
Condition
Not
satisfied
Show
LM0: 1
Condition FT SERIES
Satisfied
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Message Display from the following.
Always Enabled: The Message Display is always enabled.
FT SERIES
Message Display
state
Always show message
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-63
4 Message Display
While ON: Enables the Message Display when the value of device is 1.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.
1
Value of Device
0
FT SERIES FT SERIES FT SERIES FT SERIES
Message Display
state Hide Show Hide Show Show Show Hide
message message message message message message message
While OFF: Enables the Message Display when the value of device is 0.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.
1
Value of Device
0
FT SERIES FT SERIES FT SERIES
Message Switching
Display state Show Hide Show Hide Hide Hide Show
message message message message message message message
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Message Display when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not display message.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
FT SERIES FT SERIES FT SERIES FT SERIES
Message Display
state Hide Show Hide Show Show Show Hide
message message message message message message message
■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
9-64 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Data Displays
■ Change Color by Device
Switches the message or plate color.
External device Touch
Device
Upper byte Lower byte
Upper byte Lower byte
FT SERIES D0 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0
D0= 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0
Plate color Text color
Upper byte Lower byte
Upper byte Lower byte
FT SERIES D0 0 x F 7 0 x 9 0
D0= 0 x F 7 0 x 9 0
Plate color Text color
Enable: Select this check box to switch the color of the message or plate depending on
the value of device.
Device: Specifies the word device that stores the color data for the message or plate.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
Color data assignments that are stored to devices are given below.
bit bit bit bit
15 Upper byte 8 7 Lower byte 0
Device
Address Plate color Text color
Address+1 Plate color when blinking Text color when blinking
This uses address+1 to specify the text color and plate color when the Enable
check box has been selected.
For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number Correspondence Table” on
page A-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-65
4 Message Display
■ Blink
Flashes the message or plate color.
External device Touch
Trigger device
0
FT SERIES
Flashing
1 FT SERIES
FT SERIES
FT SERIES
Enable: Turn this check box on to make messages flash.
Trigger device: Specifies the bit device that wlll be used as a condition to trigger flashing.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
When the value of device is 0, the color specified in Text Color on the Format tab or in Plate
Color on the View tab will be displayed.
When the value of device is 1, the color displayed when the device is 0 and the color specified in
Text Color or Plate Color will be displayed alternately.
Flash intervals are set in Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
Text Color: This selects the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) of text when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This can be set only when the Enable check box is cleared.
Plate Color: This selects the plate color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) when flashing.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
This can be set only when the Enable check box is cleared.
Text Color and Plate Color are specified in Device under Change Color by Device when the Enable
check box has been selected in both Blink and Change Color by Device.
Example: When the Device is D0
Device
Upper byte Lower byte
External device Touch Upper byte Lower byte
D0= 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0
D1= 0 x 2 3 0 x F 7 D0 0 x F 7 0 x 0 0
Trigger device FT SERIES
0
Plate Color Text Color
Text Color
Flashing Plate Color
1 FT SERIES
FT SERIES FT SERIES
Text color when blinking
Plate color when blinking
Upper byte Lower byte
D1 0 x 2 3 0 x F 7
Plate color Text color
when blinking when blinking
9-66 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130
Numerical Display
Display: None
9
Display: Group A
Data Displays
Button
Display: Group A
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-67
4 Message Display
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Message Display on the editing screen
9-68 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Message Display
4.4 String Data Storage Method
The values of devices read as character codes are stored in the upper byte and lower byte of words according to the
Storage Method of String Data setting. Storage Method of String Data is configured on the System tab in the
Project Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-18.
Example: When reference device D100 = 3132 (Hex), D101 = 3334 (Hex), D102 = 3500 (Hex)
• When from Upper byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data
Stored value
Device Displayed string
Upper byte Lower byte
D100 31 (Hex) 32 (Hex) 12
D101 33 (Hex) 34 (Hex) 34
D102 35 (Hex) 0 5
NULL terminating character
• When from Lower byte is selected for Storage Method of String Data
Stored value
Device Displayed string
Upper byte Lower byte
D100 32 (Hex) 31 (Hex) 21
D101 34 (Hex) 33 (Hex) 43 9
D102 0 35 (Hex)
Data Displays
NULL terminating character When handling values of devices as character
codes, 0 is handled as the NULL terminating
character to end the string. Therefore, when the
upper byte is 0, nothing is displayed.
• When handling values of devices as character codes, 0 is handled as the NULL terminating character to
end the string. Therefore, when the upper byte is 0, nothing is displayed.
• To display only a single character, set the lower byte to 0.
Example:To display a single-byte 7
‘7’ 3700(Hex)
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-69
5 Message Switching Display
5 Message Switching Display
5.1 How the Message Switching Display is Used
The Message Switching Display is used to switch the displayed message according to the value of a word device.
bit15 bit3 bit0
Touch
External device
D0
bit3 bit0
Message details
Drying
D0= 0001 Msg0 Drying
Msg1 Heating
Msg2 Cooling
bit3 bit0
Heating
D0= 0010
bit3 bit0
Cooling
D0= 0100
9-70 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Message Switching Display
5.2 Message Switching Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Message Switching Displays.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Message Switching Display.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Message Switching Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Message Switching Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
Data Displays
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-71
5 Message Switching Display
5.3 Properties of Message Switching Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Switching Method
Selects the method for switching message to display from the following. Messages are registered in Settings on the
Message tab.
Bit: Switches the message to display according to the status of bits in a device.
Example: When Bit is selected and the bits of trigger device D0 are allocated to the following messages.
bit15 bit3 bit0
Trigger Device D0
Message
Msg0 Drying
Msg1 Heating
Msg2 Cooling
Switches the message to display according to the status of the bits.
If multiple bits are 1, display the message for
the lowest order bit.
Trigger Device D0
0001 0010 0100 1000 1110
bit state
Message to display Drying Heating Cooling Heating
Msg0 Msg1 Msg2 Msg1
Action Display Msg0 Display Msg1 Display Msg2 No message Display Msg1
If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit with
no associated message becomes 1, display
nothing.
9-72 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Message Switching Display
Value: Switches the message to display according to the value of device.
Example: When Value is selected and the value of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the following
messages.
Message details
Trigger Device D0 value 0 : Msg0 Drying
1 : Msg1 Heating
2 : Msg2 Cooling
Switches the message to display according to the value of device.
Trigger Device D0 value 0 1 2 3
Message to display Drying Heating Cooling
Msg0 Msg1 Msg2
Action Display Msg0 Display Msg1 Display Msg2 No message
If the value of device has no message
associated with it, display nothing.
■ Trigger Device
Specifies the word device to use as the condition for switching messages. 9
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Data Displays
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-73
5 Message Switching Display
● Message Tab
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager.
■ Settings
Lists the message settings.
No.: Shows the message number (Msg number).
The number of messages that can be registered varies based on Switching Method on the
General tab.
Bit: Msg0 to Msg15
Value: Msg0 to Msg999
Message: Shows the registered message.
Change: Shows Y when the Change Color check box is selected. Shows N when the check box is
cleared.
Text: Shows the text color of the message.
Plate: Shows the plate color.
■ Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
■ Message
Enter the text to display. The maximum number is 3,750 characters. You can enter multi-line messages by inserting a
newline.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected for Font on the Format tab. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
This option can only be configured if the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
• To enter Unicode characters, click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in
the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
• To display the backslash (\), enter a backslash (\) before the backslash (\).
Example: \\
9-74 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Message Switching Display
■ Change Color
Select this check box to configure Text Color and Plate Color per Msg number.
Text Color: Selects the text color for the messages when configuring the text color per Msg number (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate Color: Selects the plate color for the messages when configuring the plate color per Msg number
(color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
When this check box is cleared, the colors are configured by Text Color on the Format tab and Plate Color on the
View tab.
■ Set
Registers the message and color settings to the list. If you select a Msg number that is already registered, that
number is overwritten with the new settings.
Select a Msg number on the list, and then click this button to register the Message and Change Color settings.
■ Insert
Inserts the message and color settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Msg number on the list, and then click this button to insert the Message and Change Color settings. The
settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be inserted if all Msg numbers are configured.
■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list. 9
Select a Msg number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-75
5 Message Switching Display
● View Tab
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange
9-76 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Message Switching Display
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
9
Height Parts
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-77
5 Message Switching Display
● Format Tab
■ Font
Selects the font for displaying text from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
■ Align Text Horizontal
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Align Text Vertical
Selects the text alignment in the vertical direction from the following.
Top, Center, Bottom, Center-Top
Set to Center when the Vertical Writing check box is selected.
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
9-78 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Message Switching Display
■ Vertical Writing
Select this check box when displaying text vertically.
When the Vertical Writing check box is selected, take care about the following points. This is applicable
for Windows supports East Asian characters.
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are left-
aligned.
Aligned to
left edge
• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-byte
characters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette. 9
Data Displays
■ Scroll*1
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.
Speed (1: Fastest): Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the message is switched, the message is scrolled from the beginning.
When the Scroll check box is selected, take care about the following points.
• The number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen decreases. If the Touch displays an error
message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the number of parts on the screen.
• When the scan time of the Touch is long, scrolling speed may become slow.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-79
5 Message Switching Display
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
9-80 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Message Switching Display
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
********
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
ENT
9
Data Displays
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-81
5 Message Switching Display
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Message Switching Display on the editing screen
9-82 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Alarm List Display
6 Alarm List Display
6.1 How the Alarm List Display is Used
The Alarm List Display works with the Alarm Log function to display messages for active alarms and to display
multiple messages according to values of devices in a list.
• List currently active alarms out of the alarms configured in the Alarm Log settings
Message
D0-0 : ID1 Current fault
D0-1 : ID2 Pump fault
Touch
External device D0-2 : ID3 High pressure
D0-3 : ID4 Low air pressure
Current fault Pg. Up
Pg. Dwn
0 1
D0-0
D0-0 Alarm occurred
0 1
D0-1
D0-1 Pump fault
Low air pressure
Pg. Up Alarm occurred
9
Pg. Dwn
Data Displays
0 1
D0-3
D0-3 Alarm occurred
• Display multiple messages according to values of devices
Touch
External device
bit15 bit3 bit0
bit3 bit0
Setting 1 : 100 Pg. Up
D0
D0= 0001 Pg. Dwn
ID1 Sett
ID2 Sett
ID3 Sett
bit3 bit0
Setting 1 : 100 Pg. Up
Setting 2 : 200
D0= 0111 Setting 3 : 300 Pg. Dwn
• Only one Alarm List Display or Alarm Log Display can be configured on a single screen.
• When the active alarm is displayed on the Alarm List Display, the message disappears from the list when
the alarm is recovered from regardless of the Lock/Unlock setting. To display the alarm message until it
can be checked, use the Alarm Log Display. Lock/Unlock is configured on the Channel tab in the Alarm
Log Settings dialog box.
• For the key buttons used with the Alarm List Display, refer to Chapter 7 “Alarm List Display” on page 7-65.
• The number of the message (channel when using the Alarm function) that has focus on the Alarm List
Display is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD50.
• The information about where on the list the message that has focus is displayed, out of all the messages
displayed on the Alarm List Display, is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD56.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-83
6 Alarm List Display
6.2 Alarm List Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Alarm List Display.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm List Display.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm List Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
9-84 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Alarm List Display
6.3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Data Displays
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Message Settings
Selects the method for switching message to display.
Use Alarm Log Settings: Displays messages for the active alarms. The alarms are configured by the Alarm Log
settings.
Alarm Log Settings: Displays the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
New Message List: Displays the messages registered in Text Manager according to the state of bits in the
trigger device configured on the List tab.
Example: When Use Alarm Log Settings is selected, the Source (device to monitor) configured by the Alarm Log
function is D0, and the following messages are allocated to the channels
Message
D0-0 : ID1 Current fault
Source D0-1 : ID2 Pump fault
D0-2 : ID3 High pressure
D0-3 : ID4 Low air pressure
The active alarm messages are displayed.
D0-0 1 0 1 1 0
Source bit state D0-1 0 1 0 1 0
D0-2 0 1 1 1 0
D0-3 0 0 1 1 0
Current fault Pg. Up Pump fault Pg. Up Current fault Pg. Up Current fault Pg. Up Pg. Up
Message to display High pressure High pressure
Low air pressure
Pump fault
High pressure
Pg. Dwn Pg. Dwn Pg. Dwn Low air pressure Pg. Dwn Pg. Dwn
Display ID1, ID3, Display ID1, ID2,
Action Display ID1 Display ID2, ID3 No message
ID4 ID3, ID4
If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit with no associated
message becomes 1, display nothing.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-85
6 Alarm List Display
Example: When New Message List is selected and the bits of Trigger Device D0 are allocated to the following
messages.
bit15 bit3 bit0
Trigger Device D0
Message
ID1 Setting 1 : 100
ID2 Setting 2 : 200
ID3 Setting 3 : 300
The messages are displayed according to the state of the bits.
Trigger Device D0
0001 0110 0101 0111 0000
bit state
Setting 1 : 100 Pg. Up Setting 2 : 200 Pg. Up Setting 1 : 100 Pg. Up Setting 1 : 100 Pg. Up Pg. Up
Message to display Setting 3 : 300 Setting 3 : 300 Setting 2 : 200
Pg. Dwn Pg. Dwn Pg. Dwn Setting 3 : 300 Pg. Dwn Pg. Dwn
Display ID1, ID2,
Action Display ID1 Display ID2, ID3 Display ID1, ID3 No message
ID3
If all bits in the device are 0 or if a bit with no associated
message becomes 1, display nothing.
■ Display Type
Selects whether or not to simultaneously display multiple messages.
List: Simultaneously displays multiple messages.
Trigger Device D0
0111
bit state
Setting 1 : 100 Pg. Up
Message to display Setting 2 : 200
Setting 3 : 300 Pg. Dwn
Display ID1, ID2,
Action
ID3
Sort: Selects the display order when displaying multiple messages.
Old and New can only be configured when the Use Alarm Log Settings check box is selected.
Ascending: Sorts the list in alphabetic order from A to Z.
Descending: Sorts the list in alphabetic order from Z to A.
Old: Sorts the list in order from oldest to newest.
New: Sorts the list in order from newest to oldest.
One Line: Displays only a single message.
When multiple bits are 1, the message for the lowest order bit is displayed.
Trigger Device D0
0111
bit state
Setting 1 : 100 Pg. Up
Message to display
Pg. Dwn
Action Display ID1
■ Monitor Number of Displayed messages
Select this check box to count the number of displayed messages.
This option can only be configured when the New Message List check box is selected.
(Destination device): Specifies the word device to write the number of displayed messages to.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
9-86 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Alarm List Display
● List Tab
The List tab is only displayed when New Message List is selected for Message Settings on the General tab.
(Block settings)
9
■ Number of Blocks
Data Displays
Configures the devices that trigger messages to display and message switching as blocks (0 to 64).
1 block is composed of 16 channels. 1 device bit can be monitored for each channel. The maximum number
of device bits that can be monitored is 16 for each block.
■ Start Text ID
Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) of the message to display. The text ID numbers are sequentially
configured for all channels from the first block starting with the ID number configured here. Click to display Text
Manager.
■ Device Setting Method
Selects the trigger device setting method.
Serial: The trigger devices after the block number selected in the block settings are configured with
sequential addresses.
Random: Configures trigger devices for each block number.
■ (Block settings)
Registers and edits the messages to display for each block channel.
Block No.: Shows the block numbers in the amount specified by Number of Blocks.
Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual
Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-88.
Trigger Device: Shows the word device to use as the condition to display messages.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
When Serial is selected for Device Setting Method, the trigger devices for block numbers after
the selected block number are automatically configured with the configured trigger device as the
starting address.
No. of Reg. Text: Shows the number of messages registered to the block.
Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual
Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-88.
Edit: Changes the block settings in list.
Select a block number in the list, and then click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog
box. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 9-88.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-87
6 Alarm List Display
Insert: Inserts the block settings in the position selected on the list.
Select the block number at the position to insert the settings in the list, and then click this button to
display the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page
9-88.
The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be inserted if all block
numbers are configured.
Delete: Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a block number on the list, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.
Individual Settings Dialog Box
The Individual Settings dialog box is used to configure the conditions to display the messages.
(Settings)
■ Trigger Device
Specifies the word device to use as the condition to display messages. The bit of the word device corresponds to the
message numbers.
Example: When the number of blocks is 1 and D0 is specified as the trigger device
Message number 1-0 device bit is D0-0, message number 1-1 device bit is D0-1, up to message number
1-15 device bit which is D0-15.
Msg. No. Device bit
1-0 D0-0
1-1 D0-1
Block 1 1-2 D0-2
16 channels
1-14 D0-14
1-15 D0-15
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
When Serial is selected for Device Setting Method on the List tab, the trigger devices for block numbers after the
block number being registered or edited are automatically changed with the configured trigger device as the starting
address.
■ (Settings)
Msg. No.: Displayed as (Block No.)-(Message No.).
Alarm function: Selects whether or not to use the alarm function. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable.
Enable: Monitors the state of the device bit configured for the channel and displays the message.
Disable: The device bit is not monitored and the message is not displayed.
NO/NC: Selects the alarm detection condition. Double clicking the cell switches between NO and NC.
NO: Displays the message when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1.
NC: Displays the message when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.
Text ID: Shows the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use for the message.
The text ID is sequentially configured starting with the text ID configured by Start Text ID on
the List tab.
Text: Shows the text for the specified text ID.
Only shows the first line of text when the text registered to the text ID has multiple lines.
9-88 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Alarm List Display
● View Tab
Data Displays
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Line Color
When lines are displayed, select the check box and select line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Lines
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
Flange
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-89
6 Alarm List Display
■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the
Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the button.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from
the Pattern Palette.
Buttons
Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
9-90 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Alarm List Display
● Format Tab
9
■ Style
Data Displays
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
■ Display with Same Text Color
To set the text color for all messages to the same color, select this check box and select the text color to display
(color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
When this check box is cleared, the color for messages is the text color configured in Text Manager.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-91
6 Alarm List Display
■ Line Spacing*1
Selects the specification method for line spacing in the list and configures the line spacing.
Set with Number of Lines:
Specifies the number of lines for the message to display for one alarm line.
Number of Lines: Enter the number of lines (1 to 10). To completely display a message that
contains newlines, a number of lines that is equal to or greater than the number
of message lines is required.
When you enter a value in Number of Lines, Height (dots) is automatically calculated according
to the display area.
The relationship between the number of lines and the height (dots) is height (dots) = number of
lines x magnification H x 16.
Number of Lines Magnification H Height
1 × 1 × 16 = 16 dots Current fault When the message is 2 lines,
Pump fault 2nd line is not shown.
Number of Lines Magnification H
2 × 1 × 16 = 32 dots
Height
Current fault
Number of Lines Magnification H
3 × 2
Height
× 16 = 96 dots
Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault has occurred
has occurred
Number of Lines Magnification H Height
3 × 1 × 16 = 48 dots
Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
Pump fault
has occurred
has occurred
Since the alarm line spacing is adjusted with the number of lines for the message fixed, this option is
convenient to use when displaying multi-line messages.
Set with Dots: Specifies the line spacing for the message to display for one alarm line in dots.
Height (dots): Enter the height (8 to 160). To completely display a message, a height equal to
or greater than Magnification H x 16 dots x the number of message lines is
required.
When Magnification H is 1
To display a one-line message, 1 x 16 = 16 dots, a height of 16 dots or higher is required.
Height
16 dots Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred
To display a two-line message, 2 x 16 = 32 dots, a height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Height Height
Current fault When the message is two lines,
32 dots 16 dots Current fault
has occurred Pump fault
The second line is not shown.
Pump fault
has occurred
When Magnification H is 2
To display a one-line message, 1 x 32 = 32 dots, a height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Height
32 dots Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred
To display a two-line message, 2 x 32 = 64 dots, a height of 64 dots or higher is required.
Height Height
64 dots Current fault 32 dots Current fault When the message is two lines,
The second line is not shown.
has occurred Pump fault
Pump fault
has occurred
*1 Advanced mode only
9-92 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Alarm List Display
■ Scroll*1
Select this check box to enable scrolling display displaying of messages.
Can only be set when One Line is selected for Display Type under the General tab.
Speed (1: Fastest): Sets the scrolling speed (1 to 10). 1 is fastest, 10 is slowest.
When the Scroll check box is selected operation is follows.
• Messages that include CRs are displayed without the CRs.
• Messages scroll in the direction in which the text is drawn.
• When the text displayed according to values of devices, the text color, the displayed text, or the alarm
state changes, the message is scrolled from the beginning.
When the Scroll check box is selected, take care about the following points.
• The number of parts that can be arranged on a single screen decreases. If the Touch displays an error
message, clear the Scroll check box, or reduce the number of parts on the screen.
• When the scan time of the Touch is long, scrolling speed may become slow.
Data Displays
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-93
6 Alarm List Display
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
(Reference screen list)
■ Reference Screen
The Options tab is used to configure the reference screen. The reference screen is a Base Screen or Popup Screen
associated with each individual message. The reference screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.
1. Select a message displayed
2. Press the key button Ref. Reference screen opens
on the Alarm List Display
Motor fault REV Motor fault REV Motor fault REV
Pump1 fault Up Pump1 fault Up Pump
Pump1 1 fault
fault Up
Pump 1 output low
High pressure Dwn High pressure Dwn High pressure Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,
Pump 1 fault Del Pump 1 fault Del Pump 1 fault
then press Start. Del
Ref. Ref. Air Press.
Ref.
Stop Start 0000
kg/m2
Key buttons Up and Dwn Key button Ref. Reference screen
When displaying a reference screen, select either Base Screen or Popup Screen as the reference screen type.
When not displaying a reference, select Not Use.
This can only be set when New Message List has been selected in Message Settings on the General tab. When
Use Alarm Log Settings has been selected, the screen type will become the one selected in Reference Screen on
the Channel tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Specifies the coordinates to display the reference screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-left corner of
the reference screen.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected for Reference
Screen.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
9-94 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Alarm List Display
■ Screen No. Setting Method
Selects the setting method for the screen numbers on the reference screen list.
Serial: Continuously and automatically specifies screen numbers (1 to 3000) that are at or below the
selected message number.
Example 1: When screen number “100” has been entered for message number 1-0.
Screen numbers “100”, “101”, “102”....are automatically specified in order from message
number 1-0.
Example 2: When screen number “200” has been entered for message number 1-5.
Data Displays
Message numbers 1-0 to 1-4 are left unchanged and screen numbers “200”, “201”,
“202”....are automatically specified in order from message number 1-5.
Random: Specifies a reference screen number (1 to 3000) for each message number.
■ (Reference Screen List)
Displays a list reference screen numbers and screen titles that have been set to messages.
Message No.: Displays the message number.
Screen No.: Displays the reference screen number.
The screen number can be set according to the Screen No. Setting Method. The screen number is
specified in the screen number input dialog box that appears after double clicking on a cell. Enter a
screen number (1 to 3000) into Screen No. and then click OK.
When there is not screen for the specified screen number a message confirming the creation of a new
screen will appear.
If Yes is clicked, a screen will be created. If No is clicked, creating a screen is cancelled.
Title: Displays the title of a reference screen.
When editing a title, editing is performed in the Enter Title dialog box that appears after double
clicking on a cell. Edit the title and then click OK. The maximum number is 40 characters.
The title can be edited only when the screen number has already been set.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-95
6 Alarm List Display
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
• The security group for input can only be configured when there are grouped key buttons.
• For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on
page 21-1.
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
9-96 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Alarm List Display
Since the display security group is Group A, User 2 (of Group A) can view the buttons. But since the input security
group is Group B, User 2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 3, who is part of both Group A and
Group B. Group A buttons can be displayed, and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-97
6 Alarm List Display
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Alarm List Display on the editing screen
9-98 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Alarm Log Display
7 Alarm Log Display
7.1 How the Alarm Log Display is Used
The Alarm Log Display displays Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area.
• List the message, the occurrence time, recovery time, and confirmation time for the alarms that have occurred
Touch
External device 12 : 00
0 1 Occurrence Message Recovered Confirmed
Alarm occurred
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault 12 : 53 12 : 54
12 : 00 12 : 53 Recovered
REVERSE Fcs. Up Fcs. Dwn Ref.
1 0 12 : 54 Confirmed
12 : 53
Occurrence Message Recovered Confirmed
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault 12 : 53 12 : 54
Occurrence time Confirmation time
Message
Recovery time
REVERSE Fcs.Up Fcs.Dwn Ref. 9
Data Displays
• Display the reference screen for alarms that have occurred
Show focus Move focus Display reference screen
Time Message REV Time Message REV Time Message REV Time Message REV
09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15Pump 1 fault
Motor fault Up
Pump 1 output low
10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn 10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn 10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn 10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,
10:28 High pressure Del 10:28 High pressure Del 10:28 High pressure Del 10:28
thenHigh pressure
press Start. Del
13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 fault Air Press.
Ref.
Stop Start 0000
2
kg/m
Key Button Reference screen
Only one Alarm List Display or Alarm Log Display can be configured on a single screen.
• For the key buttons used with the Alarm Log Display, refer to Chapter 7 “Alarm Log Display” on page 7-65.
• When the Operate the Alarm on List directly check box on the General tab in the Properties of Alarm
Log Display dialog box is selected, a displayed alarm can be given focus by pressing it on the list.
• The number of lines from the start line to the selected line of the message displayed on the Alarm Log
Display is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD56.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-99
7 Alarm Log Display
7.2 Alarm Log Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Alarm Log Display.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm Log Display.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm Log Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
9-100 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Alarm Log Display
7.3 Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Data Displays
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Default Settings
These options configure the default settings when the Alarm Log Display is displayed.
Start Line No.: Specifies what number alarm to display when multiple alarms have occurred.
The range that can be specified is 1 to 5,011.
Sort: Selects the display order for alarms that have occurred as Old or New.
Display Focus on List after changing Screens or occurring Alarms*1:
Select this check box to automatically display the focus at the first item in the list
after switching screens and when an alarm occurs.
Display Reference Screen*1: Select this check box to automatically display the reference screen for the alarm
that has focus under the following conditions.
When the focus is displayed
When the focus moves
When a new alarm occurs
■ Displaying Alarms*1
Select these check boxes for alarms to display on the Alarm Log Display.
Not Recovered and Unconfirmed Alarm: Displays active alarms that have not been recovered and confirmed.
Not Recovered and Confirmed Alarm: Displays alarms that have not been recovered but the key button CHECK
has been pressed.
Recovered and Unconfirmed Alarm: Displays alarms that have been recovered but the key button CHECK has
not been pressed.
Recovered and Confirmed Alarm: Displays alarms that have been recovered and the key button CHECK has
been pressed.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-101
7 Alarm Log Display
■ First Alarm*1
An alarm that occurs in a state where no alarms have occurred is called the first alarm. Select the check boxes for the
operations to execute when the first alarm occurs.
Display First Alarm to 1st line on List: Always displays the first alarm on the first line of the list.
Change the color of First Alarm: Changes the text color of the first alarm according to the First Alarm
Color setting. First Alarm Color is configured on the Format tab.
■ Operate the Alarm on List directly*1
Select this check box to display the focus by pressing an alarm displayed on the list.
When an alarm is pressed with no focus displayed, the focus is displayed on that alarm.
When an alarm is pressed that does not have focus when the focus is displayed, the focus is moved to that alarm.
The focus is no longer displayed when an alarm with focus is pressed.
■ Alarm Log Settings
Displays the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
*1 Advanced mode only
9-102 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Alarm Log Display
● Log Tab
(Show items detailed settings)
■ Show Items
9
Select these check boxes for the items to display on the Alarm Log Display.
Data Displays
Title: Shows the titles on the first line of the list.
Occurrence Time: Shows the time the alarm occurred.
Recovery Time: Shows the time the alarm was recovered from.
Confirmation Time: Shows the time the alarm was confirmed by pressing the key button CHECK.
Occurrence Message Recovered Confirmed Title
12/01 12 : 00 Current fault 12 : 53 12 : 54
Occurrence time Confirmation time
Message Recovery time
REVERSE Fcs.Up Fcs.Dwn Ref.
■ (Show items detailed settings)
Each of the show items selected by the check boxes under Show Items can be configured in detail here.
Title: Enter the titles for the items to display. The maximum number is 20 characters.
Double clicking the cell displays the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in the
Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
Width: Specifies the number of characters to display (1 to 40). 1 is the width of a single-byte character,
2 is the width of a double-byte character.
Date: Selects the display type of the date from the following.
YY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, MM/DD, DD/MM, non-display
Time: Selects the display type of the time from the following.
HH:MM, HH:MM:SS, non-display
• If the title contains a newline, the text after the newline is not displayed. However, if using a Windows
font for the selected text ID, all the characters are displayed.
• If the title contains a language not supported as standard by the OS, the characters may be garbled when
displaying the (Show items detailed settings). However, the downloaded data is correctly displayed.
• If you change the display type for Date or Time, the number for Width is automatically adjusted.
• The text color for Message changes according to the alarm state. The text color for Message is
configured by Occurred Color, Recovered Color, and Confirmed Color on the Format tab.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-103
7 Alarm Log Display
■ Title
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for Title in the (Show items detailed settings). The
Text ID message configured for Occurrence Time, Message, Recovery Time, and Confirmation Time is
displayed in (Show Items detailed settings).
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in Text
Manager.
Click to display Text Manager.
This option can only be configured when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
9-104 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Alarm Log Display
● View Tab
Data Displays
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Line Color
When lines are displayed, select the check box and select line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Lines
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-105
7 Alarm Log Display
■ Buttons
Foreground Color, Background Color: Selects the foreground and background colors of the buttons (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color
Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the button.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the
Pattern Palette.
Buttons
Can be set only when there are grouped Key Buttons.
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 20 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 20 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
9-106 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Alarm Log Display
● Format Tab
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style. 9
■ Magnification
Data Displays
W, H: Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
■ Title Font
Select the font that will be used for the title from the following options.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page
2-6.
■ Title Color
Select the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) of the text for titles.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Occurred Color, Recovered Color, Confirmed Color, First Alarm Color*1
Select the color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades) of the occurred alarm, recovered alarm, confirmed alarm
and first alarm.
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Blink*1: Select this check box to flash alarms that are displayed on the list.
The flash interval is specified in Blinking Cycle on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box.
Reverse*1: Select this check box to show in reverse, the text color and plate color of alarms that are displayed on
the list.
Blink Reverse Blink and reverse
Current fault Current fault Current fault
Current fault
When the Key Button CHECK is pressed before recovering a triggered alarm, the alarm display will change
from the Occurred Color to the Confirmed Color. After this, the alarm that has changed to the Confirmed
Color will remain in that color and will not change to the Recovered Color even when recovered.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-107
7 Alarm Log Display
■ Line Spacing*1
Selects the specification method for line spacing in the list and configures the line spacing.
Set with Number of Lines:
Specifies the number of lines for the message to display for one alarm line.
Number of Lines: Enter the number of lines (1 to 10). To completely display a message that
contains newlines, a number of lines that is equal to or greater than the number
of message lines is required.
When you enter a value in Number of Lines, Height (dots) is automatically calculated according
to the display area.
The relationship between the number of lines and the height (dots) is height (dots) = number of
lines x magnification H x 16.
Number of Lines Magnification H Height
1 × 1 × 16 = 16 dots Current fault When the message is 2 lines,
Pump fault 2nd line is not shown.
Number of Lines Magnification H
2 × 1
Height
× 16 = 32 dots
Current fault
Number of Lines Magnification H
3 × 2
Height
× 16 = 96 dots
Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault has occurred
has occurred
Number of Lines Magnification H Height
3 × 1 × 16 = 48 dots
Current fault
has occurred
Pump fault
Pump fault
has occurred
has occurred
Since the alarm line spacing is adjusted with the number of lines for the message fixed, this option is
convenient to use when displaying multi-line messages.
Set with Dots: Specifies the line spacing for the message to display for one alarm line in dots.
Height (dots): Enter the height (8 to 160). To completely display a message, a height equal to
or greater than Magnification H x 16 dots x the number of message lines is
required.
When Magnification H is 1
To display a one-line message, 1 x 16 = 16 dots, a height of 16 dots or higher is required.
Height
16 dots Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred
To display a two-line message, 2 x 16 = 32 dots, a height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Height Height
Current fault When the message is two lines,
32 dots 16 dots Current fault
has occurred Pump fault
The second line is not shown.
Pump fault
has occurred
When Magnification H is 2
To display a one-line message, 1 x 32 = 32 dots, a height of 32 dots or higher is required.
Height
32 dots Current fault has occurred
Pump fault has occurred
To display a two-line message, 2 x 32 = 64 dots, a height of 64 dots or higher is required.
Height Height
64 dots Current fault 32 dots Current fault When the message is two lines,
The second line is not shown.
has occurred Pump fault
Pump fault
has occurred
Since only one line of the title is displayed, the title line spacing = 1 (number of lines) x Magnification H
x 16, regardless of the Line Spacing setting.
Example: When Magnification H is 1, the title line spacing = 1 x 1 x 16 = 16 dots
When Magnification H is 2, the title line spacing = 1 x 2 x 16 = 32 dots
*1 Advanced mode only
9-108 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Alarm Log Display
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Reference Screen Settings
9
The Options tab is used to configure the reference screen. The reference screen is a Base Screen or Popup Screen
Data Displays
associated with each individual message. The reference screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.
1. Select a message displayed on
the Alarm Log Display 2. Press the key button Ref. Reference screen opens
Time Message REV Time Message REV Time Message REV
09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15Pump 1 fault
Motor fault Up
Pump 1 output low
10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn 10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn 10:02 Pump1 fault Dwn
Press Stop, check the air,
10:28 High pressure Del 10:28 High pressure Del 10:28
thenHigh pressure
press Start. Del
13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 fault Air Press.
Ref.
Stop Start 0000
2
kg/m
Key buttons Up and Dwn Key button Ref. Reference screen
Reference Screen: Displays the type of screen selected in Reference Screen on the Channel tab in the Alarm
Log Settings dialog box.
Click to display the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
When displaying a reference screen, select either Base Screen or Popup Screen as the
reference screen type.
When not displaying a reference, select Not Use.
Coordinates X, Y: Specifies the coordinates to display the reference screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the X and Y coordinates are the upper-
left corner of the reference screen.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected for
Reference Screen.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
If you overlap the reference screen key button and the move focus key buttons, the reference screen can be
switched and checked while moving the focus.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-109
7 Alarm Log Display
■ Display Block No.
Specifies the range of block numbers that will display the collected alarm log data.
All: Displays the data for all blocks.
Block No.: Displays only the data for the specified blocks in the Alarm Log Display. Alarms in unspecified blocks are
not displayed, even if active.
Individual block numbers can be specified by separating the numbers with “,”, continuous regions can be
specified with “-”.
Example: When the number of blocks is 6, enter the following.
To specify blocks 1 to 3: 1-3
To specify blocks 1, 3, 6: 1, 3, 6
To specify blocks 1, 4 to 6: 1, 4-6
Number of Blocks Specified numbers
6 1-3 1, 3, 6 1, 4-6
No. Device
1-0 D100-0
1-1 D100-1 Block 1 Block 1 Block 1
1-2 D100-2
Block 1
1-13 D100-13 Block 2 Block 2 Block 2
1-14 D100-14
1-15 D100-15
2-0 D101-0 Block 3 Block 3 Block 3
2-1 D101-1
2-2 D101-2
Block 2
Block 4 Block 4 Block 4
2-13 D101-13
2-14 D101-14
2-15 D101-15
Block 5 Block 5 Block 5
5-0 D104-0
5-1 D104-1
Block 6 Block 6 Block 6
5-2 D104-2
Block 5
5-13 D104-13
5-14 D104-14
Blocks to display Blocks to display Blocks to display
5-15 D104-15
6-0 D105-0
6-1 D105-1
6-2 D105-2
Block 6
6-13 D105-13
6-14 D105-14
6-15 D105-15
• To display the alarms set in blocks 65 to 128 of the Alarm Log settings, select All under Display Block
No.. If Block No. is selected, only blocks 1 to 64 can be specified.
• For the number of blocks, refer to Chapter 13 “Number of Blocks” on page 13-16.
9-110 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Alarm Log Display
■ Security Groups
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
Input: Selects the security group for which operation of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
• The security group for input can only be configured when there are grouped key buttons.
• For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on
page 21-1.
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows: 9
Data Displays
User Name
User1 User2 User3
Security Group None Group A Group A, Group B
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
Input: Group B
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-111
7 Alarm Log Display
Since the display security group is Group A, User 2 (of Group A) can view the buttons. But since the input security
group is Group B, User 2 cannot operate the buttons.
Suppose that the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 3, who is part of both Group A and
Group B. Group A buttons can be displayed, and Group B buttons can be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130
130 User3 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Button
Button
Can operate
Cannot operate Open Password Screen,
For User2, enter password, For User3,
Group A parts are displayed but and switch to User3. Group A parts are displayed and
User2 Group B parts cannot be operated. User3 Group B parts can be operated.
9-112 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
7 Alarm Log Display
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
Data Displays
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Alarm Log Display on the editing screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-113
8 Numerical Display
8 Numerical Display
8.1 How the Numerical Display is Used
The Numerical Display is used to display the value of a word device in the specified format.
• Display the current value of device
Touch Display Device : D100
External device Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BIN16(+)
65535 Digits : 5
D100 : FFFF (Hex)
-1 Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BIN16(+/-)
Digits : 5
Touch Display Device : D100
External device Display Type : Hexadecimal
Data Type : BIN16(+)
AD2 Digits : 4
D100 : 1234 (Decimal)
? Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal
Data Type : BCD4
Digits : 4
• Display the decimal point
Touch
External device Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal
123.4 Data Type : BIN16(+/-)
Digits : 4
D100 : 1234 (Decimal)
Display Floating Point : On
Floating Digits : 1
• Display the unit
Touch
External device Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal
1234 pcs. Data Type : BIN16(+)
Digits : 4
D100 : 1234 (Decimal)
With Unit : On
Text ID : 1
Text : pcs.
• Blink a value that exceeds the minimum or the maximum
Touch
External device Display Device : D100
Display Type : Decimal
120 Data Type : BIN16(+)
Digits : 3
D100 : 120 (Decimal)
Range : Value
Minimum : 0
Maximum : 100
When Data Over
Blink : Selected
9-114 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Numerical Display
8.2 Numerical Display Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Numerical Displays.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Display.
3 Double-click the dropped Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
Data Displays
The Data Over tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-115
8 Numerical Display
8.3 Properties of Numerical Display Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Display Type
Selects the display type for the value as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
■ Data Format
Data Type: Selects the type of data for the value.
The data type that can be configured differs according to Display Type. For the data
types that can be configured, see the table for Digits.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Digits: Specifies the digits to display. The range of digits that can be set varies based on the
display type and data type. The digits that can be set are as follows.
Display Type Data Type Digits
BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-) 1 to 5
BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-) 1 to 10
Decimal display BCD4 1 to 4
BCD8 1 to 8
float32 1 to 10
Hexadecimal BIN16 (+) 1 to 4
display BIN32 (+) 1 to 8
Display Floating Point: Select this check box to display the decimal point.
When the Display Floating Point check box is selected and BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+),
BIN32(+/-), BCD4, or BCD8 is selected for Data Type, the source data is an integer, but the value is
displayed with the decimal point added at the configured floating digits.
However, if float32 is selected for Data Type, the source data is a decimal value.
9-116 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Numerical Display
Floating Digits: Specifies the number of digits for the fractional part of the decimal value out of the
number of digits specified by Digits.
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is
selected. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part varies based on the
display type and data type. The range of digits that can be set for the fractional part is as
follows.
Display Type Data Type Floating Digits
BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-) 1 to Digits
BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-) 1 to Digits
Decimal display BCD4 1 to Digits
BCD8 1 to Digits
float32 1 to 8
Hexadecimal BIN16 (+) --
display BIN32 (+) --
Floating Symbol*1: Selects the decimal point symbol from the following.
.(dot), :(colon), ;(semicolon), ,(comma), /(slash)
This option can only be configured when the Display Floating Point check box is
selected.
Example: When Digits is 4 and Floating Digits is 2
When Floating Symbol is .(dot) 12.34
9
When Floating Symbol is /(slash) 12/34
Data Displays
Suppress Zeros: Select this check box to hide “0” for the upper digits of the integer part.
Example: Suppress Zeros selected: 1234
Suppress Zeros cleared: 00001234
Not Display Sign: Select this check box to hide the - (negative) symbol when displaying negative values.
This option can only be configured when Data Type is BCD4, BCD8, or float32.
■ Display Method
Specifies the source of the value to display.
Display Device: Specifies the word device that stores the value to display.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the Display Device by the value of
this device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
For details on indirect reading, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write
Settings” on page 2-5.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-117
8 Numerical Display
● View Tab
The View tab is used to configure the external form of the part including its color and shape.
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange
9-118 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Numerical Display
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
9
Height Parts
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-119
8 Numerical Display
● Format Tab
■ Size
Selects the text size as 8x16 or 16x16.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ With Unit*1
Select this check box to display units or other characters at the end of a number. Displayed characters must be
registered in Text Manager. The displayed text color will be as set for Text Color under the Format tab.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32000).
Click to display Text Manager.
Text: Displays the characters of the specified Text ID.
• The maximum number that can be displayed with this function is 4 characters. The fifth and subsequent
characters of a character string are not displayed. However, if Windows Font is set for the specified Text
ID characters all the characters are displayed.
• If a carriage return (CR) is included the characters after the CR are not displayed.
*1 Advanced mode only
9-120 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Numerical Display
● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Data Displays
■ Range
Select data type.
Value: Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.
Device: Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a value of word device.
Specifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum: Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on the
data type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
When Device is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
• Select BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4 or BCD8 for Data Type under the
General tab, and to display a fractional number specify the values of Minimum and Maximum as an
integer.
Example: To set a value of “1.25” for the upper limit, enter “125”.
• If the value of device to display exceeds the data range that can be processed for the data type selected
under Data Format on the General tab, “?” is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-121
8 Numerical Display
■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the allowable range is exceeded.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Blink: Select this check box to make the value blink when the displayed data exceeds the allowable
range.
Report: Select this check box and specify the device to write 1 in the report device when the
displayed data exceeds the allowable range.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: If the value of word device of the reading source is “120,” which is higher than the upper limit of “100,” or
“-10,” which is below the lower limit of “0,” a value of 1 will be written to LM0 and the displayed numerical
value will blink.
Range: Value Read data 50 120 90 -10
Minimum: 0
Maximum: 100
50 120 90 -10
When Data Over Display
Blink: Selected Blinking Blinking
Report Device: LM0
Data over notification: LM0 0 1 0 1
9-122 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Numerical Display
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Data Displays
The Numerical Display is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied.
Select the operation when the condition is not satisfied as Not display Numerical data or Not update Numerical
data under While not satisfying the condition.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0, and While not satisfying the condition is Not
display Numerical data
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Numerical Display does not display the number.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Numerical Display displays the number.
Touch
Hide
Condition LM0: 0 number
Not
satisfied
Show
LM0: 1 number
Condition 1234
Satisfied
Data over does not operate for hidden Numerical Displays. Data over is reported if the minimum or
maximum is exceeded when the Numerical Display changes from hidden to displayed.
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Numerical Display from the following.
Always Enabled: The Numerical Display is always enabled.
Data 99 100 101 102 103 104 105
Display 99 100 101 102 103 104 105
Update Update Update Update Update Update Update
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-123
8 Numerical Display
While ON: Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device is 1.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data
Data 99 100 101 102 103 104 105
1
Value of Device
0
Display 0 100 100 102 103 103 103
Do not update Update Do not update Update Update Do not update Do not update
While OFF: Enables the Numerical Display when the value of device is 0.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data
Data 99 100 101 102 103 104 105
1
Value of Device
0
99 99 101 101 101 104 105
Display
Update Do not update Update Do not update Do not update Update Update
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Numerical Display when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Numerical data
Data 99 100 101 102 103 104 105
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
99 99 101 101 101 104 105
Display
Update Do not update Update Do not update Do not update Update Update
■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ While not satisfying the condition
Selects the operation of the Numerical Display when the condition is not satisfied.
Not display Numerical data: The plate and flange are displayed, but number is not displayed.
Not update Numerical data: The last updated number is displayed. The number does not change.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
9-124 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Numerical Display
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Data Displays
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-125
8 Numerical Display
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
■ Display with Arithmetic Operation
To apply arithmetic operations to values of devices and writing the results, select this check box and input the
arithmetic formula.
Example: To multiple the value of device when displayed by 60
External device Touch
1234×60
74040 Numerical Input
D0 1234 Destination Device: D0
Display value Display with Arithmetic Operation: @*60
multiplied by 60 for
the value of device
Arithmetic Formulas
Arithmetic formulas can be specified by freely combining multiple kinds of data and operators in the following format.
Data Operator Data
to
Data Operator Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data Operator Data ...(up to 120 characters)
Data
• There is no limit on the number of data items or number of operators. However, the maximum number is 120
characters.
• Round brackets can be used.
Data
Item Description
The device on which the arithmetic operation is performed is specified in the arithmetic formula. Only
@ 1 device can be set for an arithmetic operation.
The device is as specified for Display Device on the General tab.
Sets the constant values for the arithmetic formula.
Value The values that can be set depend on the data type selected in Data Format on the General tab.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device Specifies the bit device or word device for the arithmetic formula.
9-126 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
8 Numerical Display
Operators
Specify the type of arithmetic operation to be performed on the data. The operator priority is the same as for scripts.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “6.4 About the Priority of the Operator” on page 20-52.
Item Description
Sets the arithmetic operators.
+ Addition Adds a and b .
Arithmetic
- Subtraction Subtracts b from a .
operators * Multiplication Multiplies a and b .
/ Division Divides a by b .
% Modulo Calculates remainder after dividing a by b .
Sets the bit operator.
& Logical AND Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of a and b .
| Logical OR Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of a and b .
Bit operator Logical XOR Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of a and
^
(exclusive OR) b .
<< Left shift Shifts each bit of a to left by b bit(s).
>> Right shift Shifts each bit of a to right by b bit(s).
Examples of Arithmetic Formula Input
9
Data Displays
Input Examples Description
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add 1 to the value entered using the
Keypad and write the result to the device.
@+1
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add 1 to the value of device and display
the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value entered
using the Keypad and add 100, and write the result to the device.
[LDR0] + @ + 100
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, add the value of LDR0 to the value of
device and add 100, then display the result.
To perform the arithmetic operation and input the result, write the logical AND operation of the value
entered using the Keypad and 3 to the device.
@&3
To perform the arithmetic operation and display the result, a logical AND operation of the value of
device and 3 is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-127
8 Numerical Display
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Numerical Display on the editing screen
9-128 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
9 Calendar
9 Calendar
9.1 How the Calendar is Used
The Calendar can be used to display the date and time using the Touch's clock data.
• Display the date and time
Touch
12/07 13:45
• Write 0 or 1 to a device at the configured times
Touch
External device
ON Time : 10:00 Report device M0
09:00
OFF Time : 11:00 0
09:00 9
Data Displays
0 1
10:00
10:00
1 0
11:00
11:00
ON Time OFF Time
Time 09:00 09:30 10:00 10:30 11:00
Action Write Write
Value of Report Device M0 0 0 1 1 0
When Alarm is selected for Calendar Type, you can use just the alarm function without displaying the
clock on the screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-129
9 Calendar
9.2 Calendar Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Calendars.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Calendar.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Calendar.
3 Double-click the dropped Calendar and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
9-130 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
9 Calendar
9.3 Properties of Calendar Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the properties dialog box.
● General Tab
Data Displays
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Calendar Type
Selects the type of Calendar from the following.
Clock: Displays the date and time.
Alarm: Notifies by writing 1 (ON Time) or 0 (OFF Time) to a device at the configured times without
displaying the clock.
Clock & Alarm: Displays the clock and notifies by writing 1 (ON Time) or 0 (OFF Time) to a device at the configured
times.
■ Clock
These options configure the type and format of the clock. These options can only be configured when Clock or Clock
& Alarm is selected for Calendar Type.
Clock Type: Selects the items to display for the clock from the following.
Time, Day of the Week & Time, Date & Time, Date & Day of the Week & Time
Date: Selects the display type of the date from the following.
YY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YY, DD/MM/YY, MM/DD, DD/MM
This option can only be configured when Date & Time or Date & Day of the Week & Time is
selected for Clock Type.
Year: Selects the display type for the year as Double Figures or Four Figures.
This option can only be configured when Date & Time or Date & Day of the Week & Time is
selected for Clock Type.
Month: Selects the display type for the month as 1/2/3/... or Jan/Feb/Mar/....
This option can only be configured when Date & Time or Date & Day of the Week & Time is
selected for Clock Type.
Time: Selects the display type for the time as HH:MM or HH:MM:SS.
HH: hours, MM: minutes, SS: seconds
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-131
9 Calendar
● Alarm Tab
These options can only be configured when Alarm or Clock & Alarm is selected for Calendar Type on the
General tab.
(Alarm conditions)
■ Alarm Time
Selects the type of data for the alarm time.
Value: Specifies the alarm time as values and the day of the week.
Year: Enter the year (0 to 99).
Month: Enter the month (1 to 12).
Day: Enter the day (1 to 31).
Day of the Week: Select the day of the week.
Hour: Enter the hour (0 to 23).
Minute: Enter the minute (0 to 59).
Second: Enter the second (0 to 59).
Device: Configures the alarm time as values of word device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ (Alarm conditions)
Select the check boxes for the conditions to use as the alarm time.
The Day of the Week check box can only be configured when the Year check box is cleared.
9-132 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
9 Calendar
■ ON Time
Configures the time to write 1 to the report device according to the type of data.
• After 1 is written to the report time with ON Time, that value is retained.
Value of device retained after ON Time elapses
1
Value of
Report Device M0
0
Time
09:00 09:30 10:00 10:30 11:00
ON Time
• After a screen configured with the Calendar is displayed, if the time is in between ON Time and OFF
Time, 1 is written to the report device.
Writes 1 to notify that ON Time has already elapsed
1
Value of
Report Device M0
0
Time
09:00 09:30 10:00 10:30 11:00
ON Time Turn on Touch power
Open screen
OFF Time
9
Data Displays
■ OFF Time
Select this check box to configure the time to write 0 to the report device.
The time is configured according to the type of data.
• The value of Report Device is retained even when the current time exceeds OFF Time.
1
Value of Value of device retained after OFF Time elapses
Report Device M0
0
Time
10:00 10:30 11:00 11:30 12:00
OFF Time
• After a screen configured with the Calendar is displayed, if the time exceeds OFF Time, 0 is written to the
report device.
Writes 0 to notify that OFF Time has already elapsed
1
Value of
Report Device
0
Time
10:00 10:30 11:00 11:30 12:00
ON Time OFF Time Turn on Touch power
Open screen
■ Report Device
Specifies the bit device to write the value to at ON Time and OFF Time.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-133
9 Calendar
● View Tab
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange
9-134 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
9 Calendar
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts is defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
9
Height Parts
Data Displays
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-135
9 Calendar
● Format Tab
■ Size
Selects the text size as 8x16 or 16x16.
■ Style
Selects Regular or Bold for text style.
■ Magnification
W, H: Selects text magnification (0.5, 1 to 8).
■ Align Text
Selects the text alignment in the horizontal direction from the following.
Left, Center, Right
For details, refer to Appendix “4 Text Alignment” on page A-4.
■ Text Color
Selects the color of displayed text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
9-136 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
9 Calendar
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Data Displays
The Calendar is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. When
disabled, the plate and flange are displayed, but the time is not displayed.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the Calendar does not display the time.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the Calendar displays the time.
Touch
Hide
Condition LM0: 0 time
Not
satisfied
Show
LM0: 1 time
Condition 12/07 13:45
Satisfied
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the Calendar from the following.
Always Enabled: The Calendar is always enabled.
12/07 13:45
Calendar state
Always show time
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-137
9 Calendar
While ON: Enables the Calendar when the value of device is 1.
Example: When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying the
condition
1
Value of Device
0
12/07 13:45 12/07 13:45 12/07 13:45 12/07 13:45
Calendar state
Hide time Show time Hide time Show time Show time Show time Hide time
While OFF: Enables the Calendar when the value of device is 0.
Example: When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying the
condition
1
Value of Device
0
12/07 13:45 12/07 13:45 12/07 13:45
Calendar state
Show time Hide time Show time Hide time Hide time Hide time Show time
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the Calendar when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When the Not show Calendar check box is cleared under While not satisfying the
condition
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
12/07 13:45 12/07 13:45 12/07 13:45 12/07 13:45
Calendar state
Hide time Show time Show time Show time Show time Show time Hide time
■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
9-138 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
9 Calendar
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
Data Displays
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-139
9 Calendar
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User 1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and a switch is made to User 2 of Group A, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
9-140 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
9 Calendar
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
Data Displays
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Calendar on the editing screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 9-141
9 Calendar
9-142 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 10 Charts
This chapter describes how to configure charts and meters and their operation on the Touch.
1 Bar Chart
1.1 How the Bar Chart is Used
Bar charts and peak charts can be used to display values of word devices.
• Display values of word devices in a bar chart
Touch
External device
D100 : -50
D200 : 120
D300 : 40
• Display values of word devices in a peak chart
Touch
External device
D100 :
D200 :
-50
120
10
Charts
D300 : 40
• Make the chart blink when the displayed data exceeds the maximum or minimum
Touch
External device
Range: Value
D100 : 20 Minimum : 0
Maximum : 100
D200 : 80
When Data Over
D300 : 40 Blink: Selected
D100 : -50
D200 : 90
D300 : 120
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-1
1 Bar Chart
1.2 Bar Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for bar charts.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Bar Chart.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bar Chart.
3 Double-click the dropped Bar Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Data Over tab, Scale tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
10-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bar Chart
1.3 Properties of Bar Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
10
Charts
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Selects the type of chart from the following items.
Horizontal Bar, Vertical Bar, Horizontal Peak, Vertical Peak
Peak charts only display the tip of the bar chart.
Horizontal Bar Horizontal Peak
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-3
1 Bar Chart
■ Data Format
Data Type: Selects the data type handled by the chart.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
(Data Type)*1: Selects the type of data used for entering values in Origin, Minimum, and Maximum.
Value: Uses a constant.
Device: Uses a word device.
Origin, Minimum, Maximum: Specifies the origin, minimum, and maximum for the chart.
The origin, minimum, and maximum that can be specified during Basic mode and when
Value is selected vary based on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Data” on page 2-2.
When Device is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
If the data displayed in the chart is invalid, 1 is written to System Area 2 Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit
5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “ Arithmetic error” on page 3-24.
Invalid data is as follows.
• When the minimum is the same as or larger than the maximum
• When the source data includes A through F if Data Type is BCD4 or BCD8
*1 Advanced mode only
10-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bar Chart
● Data Tab
10
■ Settings
Charts
Lists the chart settings. The list shows the numbers, reference devices, and colors for the chart.
No.: Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch10).
For Horizontal Bar and Horizontal Peak, the numbers are listed in order from top. For
Vertical Bar and Vertical Peak, the numbers are listed in order from the left.
Vertical Bar
Horizontal Bar
Ch1
Ch2
Ch3
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3
Device: Shows the source word device for the data to display in the chart.
Fg. Normal: Shows the foreground color of the chart when normal.
Fg. Over*1: Shows the foreground color of the chart when data over.
Bg. Normal: Shows the background color of the chart when normal.
Bg. Over*1: Shows the background color of the chart when data over.
Pattern: Shows the chart pattern.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-5
1 Bar Chart
■ Reference Device
Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the chart.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Foreground Color
Normal, Data Over*1: Selects the foreground color for the chart when normal and when data over (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Background Color
Normal, Data Over*1: Selects the background color for the chart when normal and when data over (color: 256
colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click either button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Pattern
Selects the chart pattern.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Set
Registers the chart settings to the list. If you select a Ch number that is already registered, that number is overwritten
with the new settings.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to register the Reference Device, Foreground Color,
Background Color, and Pattern settings.
■ Insert
Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to insert the Reference Device, Foreground Color,
Background Color, and Pattern settings. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be
inserted if all Ch numbers are configured.
■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a Ch number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.
*1 Advanced mode only
10-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bar Chart
● View Tab
■ Browse
10
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
Charts
View Browser.
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to open the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
Flange
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-7
1 Bar Chart
■ Space between Bars*1
Specifies the spacing for the bar chart (0 to 100 dots).
Scale not shown Show scale
Chart spacing Chart spacing
Chart spacing
Chart spacing
Chart spacing
Chart spacing 0 100 200
Example: If Space between Bars is 10 If Space between Bars is 0
10 dots
10 dots
10 dots
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
*1 Advanced mode only
10-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bar Chart
● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
10
Charts
■ Range
Select data type.
Value: Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a constant.
Device: Specifies the minimum and/or the maximum as a value of word device.
Specifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum: Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified when Value is selected vary based on the
data type selected with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
When Device is selected, these options specify the source word devices.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-9
1 Bar Chart
■ When Data Over
These options configure the operation of the part when the allowable range is exceeded.
These options can only be configured when the Minimum or Maximum check boxes are selected under Range.
Blink: Select this check box to make the chart blink when the displayed data exceeds the allowable range.
Report: Select this check box to write 1 in the report device when the displayed data exceeds the allowable
range.
Report Device: Specifies the report device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-
62.
Example: If the value of word device of the reading source is “110,” which is higher than the upper limit of “100,” or
“-10,” which is below the lower limit of “0,” a value of 1 will be written to LM0 and the displayed bar will
blink.
Range: Value Ch1 data 60 110 80 10
Minimum: 0
Ch2 data 20 50 10 -10
Maximum: 100
When Data Over
Blink: Selected Ch1
Display Ch2
Report Device: LM0
0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100
Blinking Blinking
Data over notification: LM0 0 1 0 1
10-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bar Chart
● Scale Tab
The Scale tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
10
Charts
The options on the Scale tab vary based on the type selected with Chart Type on the General tab.
Horizontal Bar, Horizontal Peak: X-Axis
Vertical Bar, Vertical Peak: Y-Axis
■ Show Ticks
Select this check box to display a scale on a chart.
Major Divisions: Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).
Minor Divisions: Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).
Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale. The values are displayed in the same
color as the scale.
This can only be set if Value is selected for Data Format under the General tab.
Color: Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-11
1 Bar Chart
■ Show Gridline
Select this check box to display grid lines on the chart. Grid lines are displayed above the chart.
Display Position: Select from Scale and Data Over to specify the grid line display position.
Scale: Grid lines are displayed according to the number of major scale divisions.
Can only be set when the Show Ticks check box is selected.
Grid line
Data Over: Grid lines are displayed at the positions of values specified for Maximum and
Minimum under the Data Over tab.
This option can only be configured when Data Format on the General tab and
Range on the Data Over tab are set to Value.
Minimum Maximum
Line Type: Selects the type of grid lines from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Color: Specifies grid line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Show Label
Select this check box to display labels on the scale.
Font: Selects the font for text used in labels from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3
Available Text” on page 2-6.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32,000) when text registered in Text Manager are used for
labels.
Click to display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text: Inputs characters to be displayed for labels. The maximum number is 40 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
Can only be input when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
When entering Unicode characters click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters
using the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Color: Selects the color of the text used for labels (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for labels.
If a carriage return (CR) is included, the characters after the CR are not displayed. However, if Windows
Font is set for the specified Text ID, all the characters are displayed.
10-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bar Chart
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
10
The bar chart is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. Select
Charts
the operation when the condition is not satisfied as Not display Chart data or Not update Chart data under
While not satisfying the condition.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON, Device is LM0, and While not satisfying the condition is Not display Chart data
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the bar chart is not displayed.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the bar chart is displayed.
Touch
Hide chart
Condition LM0 : 0
Not
satisfied 0 50 100
Show chart
LM0 : 1
Condition
Satisfied
0 50 100
Data over does not operate for hidden bar charts. Data over is reported if the minimum or maximum is
exceeded when the bar chart changes from hidden to displayed.
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the bar chart from the following.
Always Enabled: The bar chart is always enabled.
Ch1 data 50 60 70 80 90
Ch2 data 10 30 50 70 90
Display
0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100
Update Update Update Update Update
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-13
1 Bar Chart
While ON: Enables the bar chart when the value of device is 1.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data
Ch1 data 50 60 70 80 90
Ch2 data 10 30 50 70 90
1
Value of Device
0
Display
0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100
Do not update Update Do not update Update Update
While OFF: Enables the bar chart when the value of device is 0.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data
Ch1 data 50 60 70 80 90
Ch2 data 10 30 50 70 90
1
Value of Device
0
Display
0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100
Update Do not update Update Update Do not update
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the bar chart when the condition is satisfied.
Example: When While not satisfying the condition is Not update Chart data
Ch1 data 50 60 70 80 90
Ch2 data 10 30 50 70 90
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Display
0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100 0 50 100
Update Do not update Update Update Do not update
■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
10-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bar Chart
■ While not satisfying the condition
Selects operation of the Bar Chart when condition is not satisfied.
Not display Chart data: The plate and flange are displayed, but Bar Chart is not displayed.
Not update Chart data: The last updated Bar Chart is displayed. The Bar Chart does not change.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
10
Charts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-15
1 Bar Chart
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
10-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bar Chart
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
10
Charts
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-17
1 Bar Chart
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the bar chart on the editing screen
10-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
2 Line Chart
2.1 How the Line Chart is Used
The line chart can be used to display values of devices sampled with the Data Log function and the values of multiple
word devices.
• Display the values of devices sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart
Touch
External device
100
D100 D101 D102 80
60
60 30 10
40
20
-20
80 40 10
70 40 20
70 50 10 100
80
60
40
20
90 70 10 0
-20
There are two types of trend charts, a normal trend chart and a pen recorder trend chart. 10
Charts
• Display the values of multiple, continuous devices in a single line chart
Touch
External device
D100 : 1 100
80
D101 : 5
60
40
20
D102 : 10 0
-20
D103 : 50
D104 : 20
D105 : 60
D106 : 10
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-19
2 Line Chart
2.2 Line Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Line Charts.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart.
3 Double-click the dropped Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Data Over tab, Scale tab, Trigger Condition tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
10-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
2.3 Properties of Line Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
10
Charts
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Selects the type of chart from the following.
Log Trend (Normal): Shows values of devices sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart. The
displayed chart is updated each time the latest data is sampled and the latest data is
charted from the left edge. If the sampled data exceeds the number of display points,
the entire chart is shifted to the left by the configured scroll size and the display is
updated.
Example: When Display Points is 5 and Scroll Size is 1
Ch1 data 5 30 80 90 110 110
Ch2 data 0 10 30 40 40 30
120 120 120 120 120 120
100 100 100 100 100 100
80 80 80 80 80 80
60 60 60 60 60 60
Display 40 40 40 40 40 40
20 20 20 20 20 20
0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
Scroll,
Action Display point 1 Display point 2 Display point 3 Display point 4 Display point 5
display point 6
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-21
2 Line Chart
Log Trend (Pen Recorder): Shows values of devices sampled with the Data Log function in a trend chart. The
displayed chart is updated each time the latest data is sampled and the latest data is
always displayed at the right edge. The entire chart shifts to the left point by point
and the display is updated.
Example: When Display Points is 5
Ch1 data 5 30 80 90 110 110
Ch2 data 0 10 30 40 40 30
120 120 120 120 120 120
100 100 100 100 100 100
80 80 80 80 80 80
60 60 60 60 60 60
Display 40 40 40 40 40 40
20 20 20 20 20 20
0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
Scroll,
Action Display point 1 Display point 2 Display point 3 Display point 4 Display point 5 display point 6
The chart can display a maximum of 20 lines.
To display multiple items of data, set the sampling conditions and data size for the data to display to the
same settings. The data cannot be displayed if its sampling conditions or data size is different.
Device Display: Display the values of multiple, continuous devices as a single line chart. The data size
for the devices is 16 bits.
Updating and erasing the display is controlled by the lower 2 bits of the starting
address value (control status) of the continuous devices.
The number of values of devices to display is specified by the value of starting address
+ 1.
The values of devices from starting address + 2 are displayed on the chart.
Example: When the starting address is D100
The display updates when the value of D100 changes from 0 to 1. The display is erased when the value
changes to 2. The display is first erased and then updated when the value changes to 3.
(Starting address) D100-0 value Update 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1
D100-1 value Erase 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
(Starting address +1) D101 value
5 5 3 5 5
Number of devices to display values
(Starting address +2) D102 value 10 10 70 10 20
(Starting address +3) D103 value 50 50 100 50 80
(Starting address +4) D104 value 20 20 90 20 30
(Starting address +5) D105 value 60 60 110 60 90
(Starting address +6) D106 value 10 10 80 10 20
120 120 120 120 120
100 100 100 100 100
80 80 80 80 80
60 60 60 60 60
Display 40 40 40 40 40
20 20 20 20 20
0 0 0 0 0
-20 -20 -20 -20 -20
Update Update Update Update Update
Action
Do not erase Erase Do not erase Do not erase Erase
Number of display Number of display
points changed points changed
If there are many items of data to display, it may take some time to update the display.
10-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
■ Data Format
Data Type: Selects the data type handled by the chart from the following.
BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BCD4
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Minimum, Maximum: Specifies the minimum and maximum for the chart.
The minimum and maximum vary based on the selected data type. For details, refer to Chapter
2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
If BCD4 is selected for Data Type and the read data contains A through F, 1 is written to System Area 2
Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 3
“Arithmetic error” on page 3-24.
■ Display Points
Specifies the maximum number of points of data to display on the chart (2 to (Base Screen horizontal size)).
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected for Chart
Type.
■ Scroll Size
Specifies the number of points of data to scroll when updating the chart display (1 to (Base Screen horizontal size)).
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) is selected for Chart Type.
Example: When Display Points is 5 and Scroll Size is 3
1. Reached maximum amount 2. Shift data 3 points left. 3. Display next data.
of data to display.
120
100
120
100
120
100 10
80 80 80
Charts
60 60 60
40 40 40
20 20 20
0 0 0
-20 -20 -20
■ Restart Chart
Select this check box to display the chart from the beginning when switching screens.
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected for Chart
Type.
Touch Touch Touch
100 100
80
1234
80 Display chart
60 60
40 40 from beginning.
20 20
0 0
-20 -20
Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2 Base Screen 1
Switch screen Switch screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-23
2 Line Chart
■ Scroll*1
Enable Scroll: To scroll the chart to display past data and to display the cursor, the chart display updating must be
stopped. To control updating the display, select this check box and specify the bit device or bit of
the word device to control the display.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Display updating stops when the value of device changes from 0 to 1. Display updating restarts
when the value of device changes from 1 to 0.
This option can only be configured when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is
selected for Chart Type.
Right Scroll Device, Left Scroll Device:
The chart can be scrolled to the right or to the left when display updating is stopped. This option
specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to scroll the chart left or right.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
The chart scrolls right or left one point of data each time the value of device changes from 0 to 1.
These options can only be configured when the Control Display Update and Scrolling check box
is selected.
Scroll right Scroll right Scroll right
1 data point. 1 data point. 1 data point.
1
Value of
Right Scroll Device LM0
0
120 120 120 120
100 100 100 100
80 80 80 80
60 60 60 60
40 40 40 40
20 20 20 20
0 0 0 0
-20 -20 -20 -20
Stop updating
Stop updating,
then scroll right
3 data points.
*1 Advanced mode only
10-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
● View Tab
■ Browse 10
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
Charts
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to open the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
Flange
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-25
2 Line Chart
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
*1 Advanced mode only
10-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
● Pen (Log) Tab
The Pen (Log) tab is only displayed when Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder) is selected for
Chart Type on the General tab.
10
Charts
■ Settings
Lists the chart settings.
No.: Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch20).
Channel No.: Shows the Data Log channel number to display on the chart.
Data No.: Out of the data contained in the selected Data Log channel number, shows the data
number to display on the chart.
Line Type: Shows the chart line type.
Line Size: Shows the chart line size.
Line Color: Shows the chart line color.
■ Channel No.
Specifies the Data Log channel number to display on the chart (1 to 128).
Data Log Settings: Displays the Data Log Settings dialog box where you can configure the channel while
checking the data to display. Select Channel No. under Settings, and then click OK to
close the Data Log Settings dialog box. Channel No. reflects the selected channel
number.
■ Data No.
Specifies the data number to display on the chart out of the data contained in the selected Data Log channel number.
■ Line Type
Selects the type of line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
■ Line Size
Selects the line size from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-27
2 Line Chart
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Set
Registers the chart settings to the list. If you select a Ch number that is already registered, that number is overwritten
with the new settings.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to register the settings for the Data Log Channel No. and
Data No. and the chart Line Type, Line Size, and Line Color.
Always register the settings from Ch1.
■ Insert
Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to insert the settings for the Data Log Channel No. and
Data No. and the chart Line Type, Line Size, and Line Color. The settings at the insertion point shift down one
line. Settings cannot be inserted if all Ch numbers are configured.
■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a Ch number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.
10-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
● Pen (Device) Tab
The Pen (Device) tab is only displayed when Device Display is selected for Chart Type on the General tab.
10
Charts
■ Reference Device
Specifies the starting address of the data to display on the chart.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
The data size for the devices is 16 bits.
Updating and erasing the display is controlled by the lower 2 bits of the starting address value (control status).
Bit 15 Bit 2 Bit 0
0 : Do not update
Reserved
1 : Update
0 : Do not erase
1 : Erase
The number of values of devices to display is specified by the value of starting address + 1.
The values of devices from starting address + 2 are displayed on the chart.
Example: If Reference Device is set to D100, continuous devices are used starting from D100. The used devices
are as follows.
(Starting address) D100 Control status (display operation)
+1 D101 Number of data to display values on chart
+2 D102
+3 D103
Data to display values on chart
+4 D104
Values of Devices Displayed chart
D100 value 1 120
100
D101 value 5 80
60 D103 D105
D102 value 10
40
D103 value 50
20
D104 value 20 D104
0 D102 D106
D105 value 60
-20
D106 value 10
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-29
2 Line Chart
■ Line Type
Selects the type of line from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
■ Line Size
Selects the line size from the following.
1 dot, 2 dots, 3 dots, 5 dots
■ Line Color
Selects the line color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
10-30 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
● Data Over Tab
The Data Over tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
10
Charts
■ Range
The type of data is Value. This option uses constants for the allowable range.
Specifies the allowable range of values to display.
Minimum, Maximum: Select these check boxes to specify the minimum and/or maximum.
The minimum and maximum that can be specified differ according to the data type selected
with Data Format on the General tab. For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Data” on page 2-2.
When grid lines are displayed for the minimum and maximum, select the Show Gridline check box on the
Scale tab and then select Data Over.
Ch1 data 60 110 80 70
Ch2 data 20 50 30 -10
Range : Value
Minimum : 0 120
100
120
100
120
100
120
100
Maximum : 100 80 80 80 80 Ch1
60 60 60 60
Display 40 40 40 40
20 20 20 20 Ch2
0 0 0 0
-20 -20 -20 -20
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-31
2 Line Chart
● Scale Tab
The Scale tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Show Ticks
Select this check box to display a scale on a chart.
Major Divisions: Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).
Minor Divisions: Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).
Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale. Can only be set for Y-Axis.
Color: Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
The numbers and scales will be the same color.
If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.
10-32 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
■ Show Gridline
Select this check box to display grid lines on the chart. The grid lines are displayed on the chart.
Display Position: Select from Scale and Data Over to specify the grid line display position.
Scale: Grid lines are displayed according to the number of major scale divisions.
Can only be set when the Show Ticks check box is selected.
Grid lines
Data Over: Grid lines are displayed at the positions of values specified for Maximum and
Minimum under the Data Over tab.
Maximum
Minimum
Line Type: Selects the type of grid lines from the following.
Solid, Dot, Dash, Long Dash, Long Dash Dot, Long Dash Dot Dot
Color: Specifies grid line color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
10
Charts
■ Show Label
Select this check box to display labels on the scale.
Font: Selects the font for text used in labels from the following.
Japanese, European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The characters that can be displayed depend on the font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3
Available Text” on page 2-6.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID No. (1 to 32,000) when text registered in Text Manager are used for
labels.
Click to display Text Manager.
Can only be set when the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
Text: Inputs characters to be displayed for labels. The maximum number is 40 characters.
The characters that can be entered depend on the font selected using Font. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
Can only be input when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
When entering Unicode characters click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters
using the Unicode Input dialog box then click OK.
Color: Selects the color of the text used for labels (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box if using the text registered in Text Manager for labels.
If a carriage return (CR) is included, the characters after the CR are not displayed. However, if Windows
Font is set for the specified Text ID, all the characters are displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-33
2 Line Chart
● Trigger Condition Tab
The Trigger Condition tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
The line chart is enabled while the condition is satisfied, and it is disabled while the condition is not satisfied. When
disabled, the plate and flange are displayed, but the chart is not displayed.
Example: When Trigger Type is While ON and Device is LM0
While LM0 is 0, the condition is not satisfied and the line chart is not displayed.
While LM0 is 1, the condition is satisfied and the line chart is displayed.
Touch
LM0 : 0 Hide chart
Condition 100
80
Not 60
40
20
satisfied 0
-20
Show chart
LM0 : 1 100
Condition 80
60
40
Satisfied 20
0
-20
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to enable the line chart from the following.
Always Enabled: The line chart is always enabled.
100
80
60
Chart state 40
20
0
-20
Always show chart
10-34 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
While ON: Enables the line chart when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
0
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
80 80 80 80 80 80 80
60 60 60 60 60 60 60
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Chart state 20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
-20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
Hide chart Show chart Hide chart Show chart Show chart Show chart Hide chart
While OFF: Enables the line chart when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
100 100 100 100 100 100 100
80 80 80 80 80 80 80
60 60 60 60 60 60 60
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Chart state 20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
-20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
Show chart Hide chart Show chart Hide chart Hide chart Hide chart Show chart
While satisfying the condition:
Enables the line chart when the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
100
80
60
40
100
80
60
40
100
80
60
40
100
80
60
40
100
80
60
40
100
80
60
40
100
80
60
40
10
Chart state 20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
20
0
Charts
-20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
Hide chart Show chart Hide chart Show chart Show chart Show chart Hide chart
■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-35
2 Line Chart
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
10-36 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Line Chart
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
10
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
Charts
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-37
2 Line Chart
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the line chart on the editing screen
10-38 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Pie Chart
3 Pie Chart
3.1 How the Pie Chart is Used
The stacked bar chart and pie chart are used to show the proportion of individual data to the sum of the data.
They can be used to check the relative change in the values of multiple devices in real-time.
• Display the proportion for the sum of values of multiple devices in a stacked bar chart or a pie chart
Touch
External device
D100 : 10
D200 : 10 1:1:1
D300 : 10
D100 : 120
4:2:1
D200 : 60
D300 : 30
If the source data is all 0, the chart shows the same proportion for all the data.
10
Charts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-39
3 Pie Chart
3.2 Pie Chart Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for pie charts.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Pie Chart.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Pie Chart.
3 Double-click the dropped Pie Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
10-40 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Pie Chart
3.3 Properties of Pie Chart Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
10
Charts
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Chart Type
Select the type of chart from the following items.
Horizontal Bar: Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a horizontal stacked bar chart.
Example: When displaying the values for three devices
Ch1 data 0 100 120 150
Ch2 data 0 100 60 50
Ch3 data 0 50 30 10
Horizontal Bar display
Proportion 1:1:1 2:2:1 4:2:1 15 : 5 : 1
Vertical Bar: Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a vertical stacked bar chart.
Example: When displaying the values for three devices
Ch1 data 0 100 120 150
Ch2 data 0 100 60 50
Ch3 data 0 50 30 10
Vertical Bar display
Proportion 1:1:1 2:2:1 4:2:1 15 : 5 : 1
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-41
3 Pie Chart
Pie: Shows the proportion of the sum of the data as a pie chart.
Example: When displaying the values for three devices
Ch1 data 0 100 120 300
Ch2 data 0 100 60 50
Ch3 data 0 50 30 10
Pie chart display
Proportion 1:1:1 2:2:1 4:2:1 30 : 5 : 1
■ Data Type
Selects the data type handled by the chart.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
If BCD4 or BCD8 is selected and the read data contains A through F, 1 is written to System Area 2
Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to
Chapter 3 “Arithmetic error” on page 3-24.
■ Settings
Lists the chart settings. The list shows the numbers, source devices, and colors for the chart.
No.: Shows the numbers for the chart (Ch1 to Ch10).
For Horizontal Bar, the numbers are listed in order from the left. For Vertical Bar, the numbers are
listed in order from the top.
Horizontal bar Vertical bar
Ch1
Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch2
Ch3
For Pie, the numbers are listed clockwise.
Pie chart
Ch3 Ch1
Ch2
Device: Shows the source device.
Fg. Color: Shows the foreground color of the chart.
Bg. Color: Shows the background color of the chart.
Pattern: Shows the chart pattern.
■ Reference Device
Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the chart.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Foreground Color
Selects the foreground color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
■ Background Color
Selects the background color for the chart (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
10-42 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Pie Chart
■ Pattern
Selects the chart pattern.
Click this button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
■ Set
Registers the chart settings to the list. If you select a Ch number that is already registered, that number is overwritten
with the new settings.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to register the Reference Device, Foreground Color,
Background Color, and Pattern settings.
■ Insert
Inserts the chart settings in the position selected on the list.
Select a Ch number on the list, and then click this button to insert the Reference Device, Foreground Color,
Background Color, and Pattern settings. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings cannot be
inserted if all Ch numbers are configured.
■ Remove
Deletes the registered settings from the list.
Select a Ch number, and then click this button to delete the selected settings from the list.
10
Charts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-43
3 Pie Chart
● View Tab
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange (color: 256 colors, monochrome:
8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange.
Click the Pattern button to open the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern Palette.
Flange
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
10-44 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Pie Chart
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Group 10
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Charts
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-45
3 Pie Chart
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
10-46 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Pie Chart
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
10
Charts
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the pie chart on the editing screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-47
4 Meter
4 Meter
4.1 How the Meter is Used
The meter displays the value of a word device as the movement of a needle.
• Display the value of a word device in a meter
Touch
External device
40 60
D100 : 0 20 80
0 100
40 60
D100 : 75 20 80
0 100
10-48 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Meter
4.2 Meter Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for meters.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Meter.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Meter.
3 Double-click the dropped Meter and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
10
Charts
The Range tab, Scale tab and Options tab only appear in Advanced mode.
To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-49
4 Meter
4.3 Properties of Meter Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Meter Type
Select the type of meter from the following items.
90 Degree Meter, 180 Degree Meter, 270 Degree Meter
90-degree meter 180-degree meter 270-degree meter
Example: 180 Degree Meter
Data 0 10 40 75
180-degree meter display
10-50 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Meter
■ Data Format
Data Type: Selects the data type handled by the meter.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Minimum, Maximum: Specifies the minimum and maximum for the data.
The minimum and maximum vary based on the selected data type. For details, refer to
Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
The needle does not move past the left edge when the data value is the minimum or
lower.
The needle stops at the right edge when the data value is the maximum or higher.
If BCD4 is selected for Data Type and the read data contains A through F, 1 is written to System Area 2
Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5), and an error message is displayed. For details, refer to Chapter 3
“Arithmetic error” on page 3-24.
■ Reference Device
Specifies the source word device for the data to display in the meter.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
10
Charts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-51
4 Meter
● View Tab
■ Browse
Select the type of graphic to be used to represent the part from the list of graphics. Click this button to display the
View Browser.
■ Needle
Selects the needle color of the Meter (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Needle color
■ Plate Color
Selects the plate color of the standard graphic (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Plate color
10-52 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Meter
■ Flange
Foreground Color, Background Color:
Selects the foreground and background colors of the flange of the standard graphic (color:
256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Pattern: Selects a pattern for the flange of the standard graphic.
Click the Pattern button to display the Pattern Palette. Select a pattern from the Pattern
Palette.
Flange
■ Coordinates
X, Y: Sets the display position of parts using coordinates.
The X and Y coordinates of parts are defined relative to an origin at the top-left corner of the screen.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
X
(0, 0)
Screen
Y
Parts
10
Charts
■ Size
W, H: Sets width and height to define the size of parts.
W: 5 to (Base Screen horizontal size)
H: 5 to (Base Screen vertical size)
Width
Screen
Height Parts
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-53
4 Meter
● Range Tab
The Range tab is only displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Show Range
Select this check box to show ranges on the meter and configure the number of ranges, range colors, and limits.
Number of Ranges: Specifies the number of ranges (1 to 5).
Range Color: Selects the range color (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click this button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Limits: Specifies the limit for the range.
The limit varies based on the selected data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Data” on page 2-2.
Example: 180-degree meter, data minimum is 0, maximum is 100, the number of ranges is set to 5
The limit between range 1 and 2: 20
The limit between range 2 and 3: 40 Range 3
The limit between range 3 and 4: 60 Range 2 40 60 Range 4
The limit between range 4 and 5: 80
20 80
Range 1 Range 5
0 100
10-54 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Meter
● Scale Tab
The Scale tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
10
Charts
■ Show Ticks
Select this check box to display a scale on a or meter.
Major Divisions: Enter the number of major scale divisions (1 to 20).
Minor Divisions: Enter the number of minor scale divisions (1 to 20).
Show Tick Numbers: Select this check box to display numbers along the scale. The values are displayed in the same
color as the scale.
Color: Selects the color of scales (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click the Color button to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
If the area for displaying the scale is small, the scale will not be displayed properly.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-55
4 Meter
● Options Tab
The Options tab is displayed in Advanced mode.
■ Security Group
Security groups are a security function for restricting the display and operation of parts.
Display: Selects the security group for which display of parts is restricted. (Default: None)
None: No security function is used.
Administrator, Operator, Reader: Three security groups are set up by default.
Click to display the Security Group Settings dialog box. If you create a security group on the Security
Group Settings dialog box, you can select that created group. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “2.2 Adding
and Editing Security Groups” on page 21-15.
For details about security functions, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page
21-1.
10-56 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Meter
Example: If the user and security group for a part are set as follows:
User Name
User1 User2
Security Group None Group A
Touch
Numerical Display
Line Chart and Bar Chart 130 Display: None
Display: Group A
Button
Display: Group A
For User1, who is not included in the specified security group, Group A parts are not displayed.
If the Password Screen is now opened and User2 logs in, Group A parts are displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Password
130 User2 130 130
******** ENT
A B C D E FGH I J K L M
NOPQRSTUVWXYZ
0123A56789
BS CLR OK
10
Charts
Open Password Screen,
Group A parts are Group A parts are
enter password,
not displayed to User1. displayed to User2.
and switch to User2.
User1 User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 10-57
4 Meter
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the meter on the editing screen
10-58 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 11 Commands
This chapter describes how to setup commands and their operation on the Touch.
1 Bit Write Command
1.1 How the Bit Write Command is Used
Writes a 0 or 1 to a bit device.
Touch External device
0
Not
Not satisfied
satisfied
Condition
1
Satisfied
Satisfied
Condition
■ Set
Writes a 1 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition is Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
satisfied. State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
11
Action Write Write
Commands
Data written 1 1
■ Reset
Writes a 0 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition is Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
satisfied. State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write
Data written 0 0
■ Momentary
Writes a 1 to the specified bit device
when the trigger condition is Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
satisfied. State of condition
When the trigger condition is no Condition Condition Condition Condition
longer satisfied, a 0 is written to the Action Write Write Write Write
specified bit device.
Data written 0 1 0 1
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-1
1 Bit Write Command
■ Toggle
Toggles the value of the specified bit
device when the trigger condition is Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
satisfied. State of condition
If the value of the bit device is 0 it Condition Condition Condition Condition
changes to 1, and vice versa. Action Toggle Toggle
■ Move
This function writes the value in the
source bit device to the value in the Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
destination bit device when the State of condition
trigger condition is satisfied. Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Move Move
11-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Write Command
1.2 Bit Write Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Bit Write Command.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Bit Write Command.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Write Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Bit Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-3
1 Bit Write Command
1.3 Properties of Bit Write Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:
Set: Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write
Data written 1 1
Reset: Writes a 0 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write
Data written 0 0
Momentary: Writes a 1 to the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger condition is no longer satisfied, a 0 is written to the specified bit device.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write Write Write
Data written 0 1 0 1
11-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Write Command
Toggle: Toggles the value of the specified bit device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
If the value of the bit device is 0 it changes to 1, and vice versa.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Toggle Toggle
Move: This function writes the value in the source bit device to the value in the destination bit device
when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Move Move
■ Destination Device
Specify the destination bit device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Write*1
Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set or Reset.
Example: This fills a contiguous block of bit devices with the same value.
M0 1
Action Mode: Set M1 1
Destination Device: M0
Write: 5
Satisfied
M2 1 11
Condition
M3 1
Commands
M4 1
If the bit of the word device is specified, the same value is written to same bit of contiguous word devices.
bit bit
15 0
D0 1
Action Mode: Set
Satisfied
Destination Device: D0-15 D1 1
Write: 5 Condition D2 1
D3 1
D4 1
■ Source Data
Specifies the device where the data to be written is stored.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Device: Specify the source bit device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Transfer: Specify the number of bit devices (1 to 64) to move.
Example: This button writes the values in a contiguous block of bit devices to a contiguous block of devices at the
destination.
Device: LM0 LM0 1 M0 1
Satisfied
Destination Device: M0 LM1 0 M1 0
Transfer: 4 Condition LM2 0 M2 0
LM3 1 M3 1
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-5
1 Bit Write Command
● Trigger Condition Tab
When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Not
Not executed
satisfied
LM0: 1
Condition Executed
Satisfied
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution Execution
Falling-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution
Satisfy the condition: Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution
11-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Bit Write Command
While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution
■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-7
1 Bit Write Command
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Bit Write Command on the editing screen
11-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Write Command
2 Word Write Command
2.1 How the Word Write Command is Used
Writes a value to a word device. Can be used to indirectly specify the destination address or to perform operations on
the written value.
• Writes a fixed value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch External device
Not satisfied
Condition
D1= 0 Destination word device
Value 100
Satisfied
Write 100
Condition
D1= 100
• Writes the value of device to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch External device
D0= 123 Value of device
Not satisfied
Condition
11
D1= 0 Destination word device
Commands
D0= 123
Satisfied
Move
Condition
D1= 123
• Performs arithmetic on the value to write before writing it to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch External device
D0= 100 Value to write
Not satisfied
D1= 23 Operator value
Condition
D2= 0 Destination word device
D0= 100
Satisfied Add
D1= 23
Condition
Write
D2= 123
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-9
2 Word Write Command
■ Set
Writes a fixed value to the specified word device
when the trigger condition is satisfied. Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write
Data written Fixed Value Fixed Value
■ Move
Writes the value in the source device to the
destination word device when the trigger Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
condition is satisfied. State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write
Data written Value of Device Value of Device
■ Momentary
Writes the fixed ON Data value to the specified
word device when the trigger condition is Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
satisfied. State of condition
Writes the fixed OFF Data value to the specified Condition Condition Condition Condition
word device when the trigger condition is no Action Write Write Write Write
longer satisfied. Data written OFF Data ON Data OFF Data ON Data
■ Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR
Performs arithmetic on the value in a reference
device and a fixed value, or the value at a device Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
address and writes the result to a word device State of condition
when the trigger condition is satisfied. Condition Condition Condition Condition
Arithmetic operation Arithmetic operation
Action ↓ ↓
Write Write
Data written Result Result
Example: Add (Addition)
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
in the Source 1 is added to the value in Source
2 and the result is written to the word device. Condition Condition Condition Condition
Addition Addition
Action ↓ ↓
Write Write
Data written Result Result
11-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Write Command
2.2 Word Write Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Word Write Command.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Word Write Command.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Word Write Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Word Write Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-11
2 Word Write Command
2.3 Properties of Word Write Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is satisfied from the following:
Set: Writes a fixed value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write
Data written Fixed Value Fixed Value
Move: Writes the value in the source device to the destination word device when the trigger condition is
satisfied.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write
Data written Value of Device Value of Device
Momentary: Writes the fixed ON Data value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Writes the fixed OFF Data value to the specified word device when the trigger condition is no
longer satisfied.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Action Write Write Write Write
Data written OFF Data ON Data OFF Data ON Data
11-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Write Command
Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, XOR:
Performs arithmetic on the value in a reference device and a fixed value, or the value at a
device address and writes the result to a word device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Arithmetic operation Arithmetic operation
Action ↓ ↓
Write Write
Data written Result Result
Example: Add (Addition)
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value in the Source 1 is added to the
value in Source 2 and the result is written to the word device.
Not satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied Satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Addition Addition
Action ↓ ↓
Write Write
Data written Result Result
■ Data Type
Select the data type to be handled by the operation selected for Action Mode.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to OR, AND, or XOR.
11
BIN16(+) and BIN32(+) can only be set if Action Mode is set to Move. Because the number of devices
Commands
to transfer is specified in Advanced mode, you do not need to set Data Type.
IF BCD4, BCD8, or float32 is selected and the arithmetic data contains a value inexpressible in BCD, a 1
is written to System Area 2 Arithmetic error bit (address+2, bit 5) and an error message is displayed.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “Arithmetic error” on page 3-24.
■ Source 1
Specify the source word device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Add, Sub, Multi, Div, Mod, OR, AND, or XOR.
■ Source Data
Select the data type to be handled by the operation selected for Action Mode and enter the value.
Value: Use a constant.
Only a Value can be handled if Action Mode is set to Set or Momentary.
If Action Mode is set to Momentary, the value in the ON Data is written when the trigger condition is
satisfied, and the value in the OFF Data when the trigger condition is no longer satisfied.
Hexadecimal: Select this check box to enter the ON Data and OFF Data values as a hexadecimal.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-13
2 Word Write Command
Device: Use a word device.
Specify the device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Use Reference Device*1:
Select this check box and specify a device to change the source word device according to
the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-5.
Transfer*1: Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) to move.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
Example: If Transfer is set to 2 and Write is set to 3, the same data in 2 continuous word
devices will be written to the destination device 3 times.
Source Data (Device): LDR0 LDR0 999 D100 999
Satisfied
Transfer: 2 LDR1 1000 D101 1000
Destination Device: D100 Condition
D102 999
Write: 3
D103 1000
D104 999
D105 1000
■ Destination Device
Destination Device: Specify the destination word device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to change the destination word device
according to the value of the specified device.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Move.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-5.
Write*1: Specify the number of word devices (1 to 64) at the destination.
For Move, specify how many times to repeat writing.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Set, Momentary, Alternate, or
Move.
Example: If Data Type is set to BIN16(+) and Write is set to 5, the same data will be
written to 5 continuous word addresses.
Data Type: BIN16(+) LDR10 12345
Source Data (Value): 12345
Satisfied LDR11 12345
Destination Device: LDR10
Write: 5 LDR12 12345 5 words
Condition
LDR13 12345
LDR14 12345
If Data Type is set to BIN32(+) and Write is set to 5, the same data will be
written to a total of 10 word addresses (2 words 5 times).
Data Type: BIN32(+) LDR11 LDR10
Source Data (Value): 987654 987654
Satisfied
Destination Device: LDR10 LDR13 LDR12
Write: 5 Condition
987654
LDR15 LDR14
987654 2 words x 5
LDR17 LDR16
987654
LDR19 LDR18
987654
*1 Advanced mode only
11-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Write Command
● Trigger Condition Tab
When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1. 11
Touch
Commands
Condition LM0: 0 Not
Not executed
satisfied
LM0: 1
Condition Executed
Satisfied
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution Execution
Falling-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-15
2 Word Write Command
Satisfy the condition: Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution
While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution
■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
11-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Word Write Command
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
11
Commands
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Word Write Command on the editing screen
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-17
3 Goto Screen Command
3 Goto Screen Command
3.1 How the Goto Screen Command is Used
Switches to another screen or displays a window.
• Switches between Base Screens when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch Touch
Tank 1
Satisfied 130 Full
Condition
• Opens and closes other windows (such as the Popup Screen, Device Monitor, Ladder Monitor, Password Screen,
and Adjust Contrast Screen) when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch Touch
Satisfied D51 123
D52 456
D53 0
999
Condition
Touch Touch
Satisfied D51 123
D52 456
D53 0
999
Condition
• Switches to the System Mode when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch Touch
Satisfied 130
Condition
• Resets the current screen when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Touch Touch
Satisfied 130 0
Condition
11-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Command
3.2 Goto Screen Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Goto Screen Command.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Goto Screen Command.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-19
3 Goto Screen Command
3.3 Properties of Goto Screen Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Action Mode
Select the action to perform when the trigger condition is met from the following:
Back to previous Screen: Switches to the previous screen. Returns to up to 16 earlier screens.
Switch to Base Screen: Switches between Base Screen.
Open Popup Screen: Opens a Popup Screen.
Close Popup Screen: Closes a Popup Screen.
Open Device Monitor Screen: Opens the Device Monitor Screen.
Close Device Monitor Screen: Closes the Device Monitor Screen.
Open Ladder Monitor: Opens the Ladder Monitor.
Close Ladder Monitor: Closes the Ladder Monitor.
Open Password Screen: Opens the Password Screen.
Close Password Screen: Closes the Password Screen.
Open Adjust contrast Screen: Opens the Adjust contrast Screen.
Close Adjust contrast Screen: Closes the Adjust contrast Screen.
Switch to System Mode: Switches to the Top Page in the System Mode.
Reset current screen: Resets the current Base Screen.
When the current Base Screen is reset using the Reset current screen function, the window and internal
devices restart as if the Base Screens were switched.
11-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Command
■ Goto Screen
Screen No.: If Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, specify the Base Screen number to switch to
(from 1 to 3000). If Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen or Close Popup Screen,
specify the number of the Popup Screen to open or close (from 1 to 3015).
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Switch to Base Screen, Open Popup
Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to specify the screen
number using the value of the specified device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the
device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1
Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen or Close Popup Screen.
Coordinates X, Y: Specify the coordinates on the Base Screen for displaying a window.
X and Y specify the upper left corner of the window using the upper left corner of the screen as the
origin.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup Screen, Open Device
Monitor Screen, Open Password Screen, Open Adjust contrast Screen, or Open Movie
File Screen.
Use Reference Device*1: Select this check box and specify a device to specify the coordinates
using the value of the specified device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the
device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1
Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This setting is enabled only if Action Mode is set to Open Popup
Screen. 11
Commands
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-21
3 Goto Screen Command
● Trigger Condition Tab
When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Not
Not executed
satisfied
LM0: 1
Condition Executed
Satisfied
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution Execution
Falling-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution
Satisfy the condition: Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution
11-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Goto Screen Command
While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution
■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-23
3 Goto Screen Command
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Goto Screen Command on the editing screen
11-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Script Command
4 Script Command
4.1 How the Script Command is Used
Executes a script when certain conditions are satisfied.
Satisfied
Executes Script
Start Condition
// Script A
[D 100] = [D 100] + 1;
if ([D 100] >= 50)
{
[D 100] = 0;
}
Touch
Complex processes such as conditional branching, logical operation, arithmetic operation, function, etc., can
be programmed in a text format using Scripts. For details, refer to Chapter 20 “Script” on page 20-1.
11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-25
4 Script Command
4.2 Script Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Script Commands.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Script Command.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Script Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Script Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
11-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Script Command
4.3 Properties of Script Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
(Script)
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters. 11
■ Script ID
Commands
Specify the script ID (1 to 32000) of the script to operate.
Script Manager will open when is clicked. Select a script from the script list.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “2.2 Script Manager” on page 20-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script selected in Script Manager.
■ (Script)
Displays the contents of the script selected in Script Manager.
Once this area is double clicked, the Script Editor will open and editing can be done.
For details, refer to Chapter 20 “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-27
4 Script Command
● Trigger Condition Tab
When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Not
Not executed
satisfied
LM0: 1
Condition Executed
Satisfied
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution Execution
Falling-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution
11-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Script Command
Satisfy the condition: Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution
While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution
Fixed Period: Command executes within a fixed time interval.
Fixed time interval Fixed time interval Fixed time interval
Action Execution Execution Execution Execution
■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition. 11
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Commands
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Period
Sets the period for command execution from 1 to 3600 (seconds).
Can only be set if Fixed Period is selected as Trigger Type.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-29
4 Script Command
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Script Command on the editing screen
11-30 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Command
5 Multi-Command
5.1 How the Multi-Command is Used
Executes multiple commands at once.
These commands can be assigned to a Multi-Command.
Command Description
Bit Write Writes a 0 or 1 to the specified bit device.
Writes a value to a word device. You can specify the destination address indirectly, and perform arithmetic
Word Write
on the value to be written.
Goto Screen Switches screens or opens other windows.
Key Performs downloads or uploads. Also used to manipulate other parts.
Script Executes a script.
• Writes a 1 to a bit device, and the value in a word device to another device when the trigger condition is satisfied.
0 1
Touch External device
Satisfied
Condition D0= 123 D0= 123
Move
D1= 0 D1= 123 11
Commands
• When the trigger condition is satisfied, executes the script and switches the Base Screen.
Executes the script.
Touch
// Script A
[D 100] = [D 100] + 1;
Satisfied if ([D 100] >= 50)
{
Condition [D 100] = 0;
}
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-31
5 Multi-Command
5.2 Multi-Command Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Multi-Commands.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Multi-Command.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Multi-Command.
3 Double-click the dropped Multi-Command and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
11-32 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Command
5.3 Properties of Multi-Command Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum number is 20 characters.
■ Multi-Functions
Add and edit commands to be executed when the trigger condition is satisfied.
Function List: Lists the commands to be executed.
11
Commands
Command Type: Shows the command type.
Command Name: Shows the command name.
Device: Shows the setting when one of the following Command Type is selected.
Shows the destination device for the Bit Write and Word Write commands.
Shows the screen number when Goto Screen is set to Switch to Base
Screen, Open Popup Screen, or Close Popup Screen.
Shows the script ID for the Script command.
• Executes only the Goto Screen command at the end of the Function List when multiple Switch to Base
Screen type commands are set for Action Mode.
• Goto Screen commands are not executed from top to bottom as they appear in the Function List.
Rather, they are executed at the end of the scan of the Touch when the trigger condition is satisfied.
• The function of Key button will affect on the next scan when the trigger condition is satisfied.
• If multiple Key commands are set, only the first and second Key commands in the Function List are
executed. The third and following Key commands are not executed. Also, only the first Key command that
specifies a Data Transfer function in the Function List is executed if multiple Key commands are set.
Command Type: Select the command to add.
Bit Write: Performs the same function as the Bit Write Command. For details, refer to “1
Bit Write Command” on page 11-1. Click Add to call up the Bit Write
Properties dialog box for Multi-Function.
Word Write: Performs the same function as the Word Write Command. For details, refer to
“2 Word Write Command” on page 11-9. Click Add to call up the Word Write
Properties dialog box for Multi-Function.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-33
5 Multi-Command
Goto Screen: Performs the same function as the Goto Screen Command. For details, refer
to “3 Goto Screen Command” on page 11-18. Click Add to call up the Goto
Screen Properties dialog box for Multi-Function.
Key: Performs the same function as the Key Buttons. For details, refer to Chapter
7 “4 Key Button” on page 7-49. Click Add to call up the Key Properties dialog
box for Multi-Function.
Script: Performs the same function as the Script Commands. For details, refer to “4
Script Command” on page 11-25. Click Add to call up the Script Properties
dialog box for Multi-Function.
Add: Adds a command to the list. A maximum of 32 commands may be added.
In Command Type, select Command, and then click this button to call up the corresponding
Properties dialog box. Specify the command in the Properties dialog box.
Edit: Changes a command in the list.
Select the command in the list, and then click this button to call up the corresponding Properties
dialog box. Change the command in the Properties dialog box.
Delete: Deletes a command from the list.
Select the command in the list, and then click this button.
Copy: Copies a command in the list.
Select a command in the list, and then click this button. A copy of the selected command is added
to the end of the list.
Up: Shifts the selected command upward in the list.
Down: Shifts the selected command downward in the list.
11-34 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Command
● Trigger Condition Tab
When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Not
Not executed
satisfied
11
Commands
LM0: 1
Condition Executed
Satisfied
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
Rising-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution Execution
Falling-edge: Command is executed when device changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution
Satisfy the condition: Command is executed when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-35
5 Multi-Command
While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution
■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition or While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
11-36 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Multi-Command
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Multi-Command on the editing screen 11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-37
6 Timer
6 Timer
6.1 How the Timer is Used
Starts a countdown when the trigger condition is satisfied, and writes 1 to an internal device (HMI Timer Relay LTC)
once the set time has elapsed.
Touch
Satisfied
Condition 0
LTC0: 0
LTD0 LTD0 LTC0: 1
1999 1998 999 1 0
Start countdown Set time
has elapsed
Not satisfied Satisfied Satisfied Not satisfied
State of condition
Condition Condition Condition Condition
Writes the
Start Writes 1 preset value
Action
countdown to LTC0 to LTD0 and 0
to LTC0
HMI Timer Current Value
LTD0 value
1999 1999 1998 999 1 0 1999
HMI Timer Relay
LTC0 value
0 0 1 0
• The HMI Timer Relay LTC is an internal device (bit device) that changes to 1 once the time set for the
timer has elapsed.
• The HMI Timer Current Value LTD is an internal device (word device) that stores current values for the
timer.
• Once switched to the screen that the timer has been placed in, the following values will be given
regardless of the whether the trigger condition is satisfied or not satisfied.
- HMI Timer Relay LTC: 0
- HMI Timer Current Value LTD: Preset Value
11-38 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Timer
6.2 Timer Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for Timers.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Commands, and then click Timer.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Timer.
3 Double-click the dropped Timer and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-39
6 Timer
6.3 Properties of Timer Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons in the Properties dialog box.
● General Tab
■ Part Name
Enter a name for the part. The maximum characters is 20 characters.
■ Timer Address
Specifies the HMI Timer address (0 to 31).
The device type for the HMI Timer Relay is LTC. The device type where the current value is stored is LTD.
Example: When 0 is specified for Timer Address
HMI Timer Relay: LTC0
HMI Timer Current Value: LTD0
■ Unit
Select the unit of time from sec or 100 msec.
■ Preset Value
Select the data type to use and the enter the preset value.
The preset value is the time from when the timer starts its countdown until 1 is written to the HMI Timer Relay LTC.
Value: When selecting sec in Unit, the preset value is specified with 1 to 65535 (second units) up to a maximum
of 1092 minutes 15 seconds.
When selecting 100 msec in Unit, the preset value is specified with 1 to 65535 (100 milliseconds units).
Device: Uses the values of word device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
11-40 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Timer
● Trigger Condition Tab
When the condition has been or is satisfied, the command is executed; when not satisfied, the command is not
executed.
Example: When Trigger Type is Rising-edge and Device is LM0
The command is executed when LM0 changes from 0 to 1.
Touch
Condition LM0: 0 Not
Not executed
satisfied
LM0: 1
Condition
Satisfied
Executed 11
Commands
■ Trigger Type
Selects the condition to execute the command from the following.
While ON: Command is executed when device is 1.
1
Value of Device
Action Execution Execution Execution
While OFF: Command is executed when device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution
While satisfying the condition:
The command continues being executed while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution Execution Execution
■ Data Type
Selects the data type to be handled by the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-41
6 Timer
■ Device
Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Condition
Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expression configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
■ Comment
Enter a comment about trigger conditions. The maximum number is 80 characters.
11-42 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Timer
● Comment Tab
The Comment tab is used to specify the parts arranged on the editing screen, and the popup text displayed when
the mouse pointer is placed close to No., Name, or Type in the object list.
When there are multiple parts of the same shape on the screen, this features makes it possible to
distinguish between the parts without displaying the Properties dialog box for each part, by just mousing
over the part.
■ Description
Enter a comment about parts. The maximum number is 80 characters.
Example: When mousing over the Timer on the editing screen
11
Commands
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 11-43
6 Timer
11-44 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 12 Control Function
This chapter describes the actions and operations for ladder program, basic operation for WindLDR, and functions of
each instruction.
The functions controlled by ladder programs created with WindLDR is called as control function.
1 Ladder Program Actions and Operations
1.1 Ladder Program Actions
Execution Period
Input delay
Input process I
Input refresh
Start of processing I
External
for part at top Input input
of screen Ladder process Control
function
Q
Output refresh Execution
Output process Q
Output Period
Output External
delay Sleep output
(HMI function HMI function
execution)
Execution Period
End of processing
for part at bottom
of screen
12
■ Input refresh
Control Function
A capture process is executed at the specified input filter, and the external output is reflected in the internal device
Input (I).
■ Input delay
There is a delay between an external input and the internal device Input (I). The maximum delay period is calculated
by the amount of 5 microseconds, filter value and the execution period.
When an input occurs immediately after the input refresh ends,
Input refresh
the input delay will be the longest because the processor waits Input process I
for the input refresh in the next scan before reflecting the input Ladder process External
to the input relay. input
Output refresh
Input delay
(maximum)
Sleep
(HMI function
execution)
I
Input refresh
Input
Ladder process
Output refresh
■ Ladder process
Executes the ladder program.
■ Output refresh
Updates the relay output (Q).
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-1
1 Ladder Program Actions and Operations
■ Output delay
There is a delay between an external output and the internal device Output(Q). The maximum delay period is
calculated by the amount of 300 milliseconds and the execution period.
When an output occurs immediately after the output refresh
Input refresh
ends, the output delay will be the longest because the processor
waits for the output refresh in the next scan before reflecting Ladder process
the output to the output relay.
Output refresh
Q
Output
Sleep
(HMI function
execution)
Output delay
(maximum)
Input refresh
Ladder process
Output process Q
Output refresh
External
output
■ Control function
A control function refers to three processes: input refresh, ladder process, and output refresh.
For details of control function settings, refer to Chapter 3 “4 Special Functions” on page 3-42, and the “SmartAXIS
Ladder Programming Manual”.
Only control devices can be used for control function.
■ Sleep
Sleep refers to the time used by the control function subtracted from the Execution Period. This is when the processor
executes HMI function.
■ Execution Period
The Execution Period refers to one scan of the control function (input refresh + ladder process + output refresh) and
HMI function (sleep).
The control function is executed once every specified execution interval.
• If execution of the control function takes more than half of the time specified for the Execution Period, the
processor automatically extends the Execution Period so that the control function completes within 1/2 of
the Execution Period. In this instance, error number 7 will be stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD53.
• If the execution time of the control function exceeds 3,000 milliseconds, it pauses to allow the output
refresh to be executed.
Thereafter, the function goes to sleep and the control function executes on the next scan. In this
instance, error number 6 will be stored in the HMI Special Data Register (LSD53).
There is a delay in the ladder program. Take this delay time into consideration when specifying the
Execution Period.
For example, if it is necessary to capture external inputs within 100 milliseconds, set the Execution Period
to 90 milliseconds.
■ HMI function
Parts laid out on the screen are processed from top to bottom only when the control function is in sleep mode.
Display processing pauses when execution of the next control function begins, and resumes when the function goes
to sleep again.
When processing reaches the bottom of the screen, processing returns to the top of the screen.
12-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Ladder Program Actions and Operations
1.2 Executing and Stopping Ladder Programs
This section describes operations to start and stop the Touch.
Make sure your safety before turning the Touch on and off. Incorrect operation may cause machine
damage or accidents.
The ladder program is executed (RUN) and stopped (STOP) by using the Touch operations, by turning the Touch
power on or off, or by external input with the stop input and reset input functions.
For details on operations based on the Touch power supply, refer to Chapter 12 “Start/Stop Operation Using the
Power Supply” on page 12-3.
For details on stop input settings, refer to Chapter 3 “4.2 Stop Input” on page 3-45.
For details on reset input settings, refer to Chapter 3 “4.3 Reset Input” on page 3-46.
Switching from RUN to STOP is executed by the END process of the ladder program, and the following functions are
stopped.
High-speed counter/User interrupt/Catch input/Timer interrupt
• For outputs during STOP, keep or clear can be selected by special internal relay M8025 (Maintain Outputs While
Ladder Program Operation Stopped). For details on M8025 (Maintain Outputs While Ladder Program Operation
Stopped), refer to Chapter 27 “Special Internal Relay (M)” on page 27-5.
• The current values of timer instructions (TML, TIM, TMH, TMS) are reset.
For timer instructions, refer to "TML (1 Second Timer" in Chapter 5 "Basic Instructions" - "TML (1-sec Timer)" in the
"SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
Also, when switching from STOP to RUN, device states are cleared or kept according to Memory Backup in
Function Settings. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.6 Keep and Clear Control Devices” on page 3-50.
● Start/Stop Operation Using the Power Supply
When the Touch power is turned on or off, the ladder program is executed (RUN) or stopped (STOP).
If power is turned OFF during RUN, stop (power fail) processing is executed.
12
1 Power up the Touch to start operation.
Control Function
2 Turn power on and off to start and stop operation.
To turn the power on, turn on the Touch and I/O sides
ON
at the same time, or turn on the I/O side first, followed I/O Side Power
by the Touch side. OFF
To turn the power off, turn off the Touch and I/O sides ON
Touch Power
at the same time, or turn off the Touch side first, OFF
followed by the I/O side.
0 sec or more 0 sec or more
The status of ladder program when power to the Touch is according with Run/Stop Selection at Power
Up. However, when the backup time has elapsed with the power in the OFF state, a keep data error occurs,
operation is according to the setting of Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error, regardless of the
setting for Run/Stop Selection at Power Up.
For details on RUN/STOP specification at startup, refer to Chapter 3 “4.5 Run/Stop Selection at Power Up”
on page 3-49.
For details on RUN/STOP specification when a keep data error occurs, refer toChapter 3 “4.4 Run/Stop
Selection at Memory Backup Error” on page 3-48.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-3
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
This section describes basic procedures for operating WindLDR.
2.1 Start WindLDR
On the WindO/I-NV3 View tab, in the Workspace group, click (control function).
WindLDR starts.
Next, create a ladder program.
12-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
2.2 Creating Ladder Program
This section describes the procedure for creating a simple ladder program in WindLDR.
For details about basic and advanced instructions, refer to the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
Create a simple program using WindLDR. The sample program performs the following operation:
• When input I0 is turned on, output Q0 is turned on.
• When input I1 is turned on, output Q1 is turned on.
• When both inputs I0 and I1 are turned on, output Q2 flashes in 1-sec increments.
Rung No. Input I0 Input I1 Output Operation
1 ON OFF Output Q0 is turned ON.
2 OFF ON Output Q1 is turned ON.
3 ON ON Output Q2 flashes in 1-sec increments.
One collection of a group of instructions that control output or advanced instructions is called a rung.
WindLDR manages programs in rung units. Function descriptions can be configured as rung comments for
individual rungs.
● Inserting a NO contact of input I0
1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in Instruction group, click Basic, and then click A (Normally Open).
The symbol for NO contact is displayed at the mouse pointer.
12
Control Function
2 Move the mouse pointer to the first column of the first line where you want to insert a NO contact, and then click the
left mouse button.
The NO contact is created on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-5
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
3 Set the device in the Property window.
Enter "I0" for Device and press ENTER.
A NO contact of input I0 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line.
Instructions can be entered using the right-click menu or the keyboard.
If entering an instruction using the right-click menu, open the menu, click Basic Command (B), and then
click A (Normally Open).
If entering NO contact from the keyboard, press A and then select NO contact from the Coil Selection
dialog box and press ENTER.
For details, refer to the online help for WindLDR.
● Inserting a NC contact of input I1
1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in Instruction group, click Basic, and then click B (Normally Closed).
The symbol for NC contact is displayed at the mouse pointer.
12-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
2 Move the mouse pointer to the second column of the first ladder line where you want to insert a NC contact, and then
click the left mouse button.
The NC contact is created on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window.
3 Set the device in the Property window.
Enter "I1" for Device and press ENTER.
A NC contact of input I1 is programmed in the first column of the first ladder line.
12
Control Function
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-7
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
● Inserting Output Q0
1 On the WindLDR Home tab, in Instruction group, click Basic, and then click OUT (Output).
The symbol for Output is displayed at the mouse pointer.
2 Move the mouse pointer to the third column of the first ladder line where you want to insert an output coil, and then
click the left mouse button.
The output is created on the ladder line and the properties are displayed in the Property window.
3 Set the device in the Property window.
Enter "Q0" for Device and press ENTER.
Output Q0 is connected to the series circuit of the NO contact for input I0 and the NC contact for input I1.
This completes programming for rung 1.
12-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
● Creates Rung 2
1 A new rung is inserted.
To insert a rung, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Append, and then click Append a Rung.
Rungs can be added using the right-click menu or the keyboard.
If inserting a rung using the right-click menu, open the menu and click Append (N), and then click Rung
(R).
If inserting a rung from the keyboard, press ENTER.
For details, refer to the online help for WindLDR.
2 Enter NC contact I0 and NO contact I1, and Output Q1.
Enter NC contact I0 and NO contact I1, and Output Q1 in the same way as described from “Inserting a NO contact of
input I0” on page 12-5 to “Inserting a NC contact of input I1” on page 12-6.
12
Control Function
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-9
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
● Creates Rung 3
1 Insert a rung and enter NO contact I0, NO contact I1, and Output M0010.
2 A new ladder line is inserted.
To insert a ladder line, on the Home tab, in the Editing group, click Append, and then click Append a Ladder
Line.
One output or computation instruction can be laid out on each ladder line. If entering multiple outputs or
computation instructions within a single rung, or if setting input conditions that extend over multiple lines,
insert a ladder line to the rung.
Ladder lines can be inserted using the right-click menu or the keyboard.
If inserting a rung using the right-click menu, open the menu and click Append (N), and then click Ladder
Line (L).
If inserting a rung from the keyboard, press .
For details, refer to the online help for WindLDR.
12-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
3 Enter NO contact M0010, NO contact M8121, and Output Q2.
M8121 is a special internal relay that repeatedly toggles ON/OFF on a 1 second cycle.
This completes programming for rung 1 to 3.
● Conversion of Programs
1 Confirms that programs have been correctly created.
On the Home tab, in the Program group, click Convert.
When the instruction symbols are connected correctly, conversion is completed successfully. If any error is found, the
errors are listed on the Info Window screen. Then, make corrections as necessary.
12
Control Function
Infomation window
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-11
2 Basic Operation for WindLDR
2.3 Saving Control Function
Saves the control function.
Click in WindLDR, and then click Save.
Application button
If project data is saved during editing in WindO/I-NV3, control function are also saved.
2.4 Exit WindLDR
Click in WindLDR, and then click Exit WindLDR.
WindLDR closes.
Application button
If you click in WindLDR and then click Close, or if you close the project file while editing in WindO/I-
NV3, you will exit WindLDR.
12-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
SmartAXIS instructions are divided into basic instructions, which perform sequencing, and advanced instructions,
which perform moves, comparisons, Boolean computations, binary arithmetic operations, bit shifts, and other
operations. Some instruction words cannot be used in interrupt processes.
In an interrupt process, the processing of the main program is interrupted, using the interrupt input, timer
interrupt, and high-speed counter of function settings, and a specified subroutine is executed. If a
subroutine that includes instruction words that cannot be used in interrupt processes is executed, a ladder
program execution error occurs.
The input and operation of SmartAXIS ladder program requires specialist knowledge.
To make effective use of the SmartAXIS, take the time to develop a thorough understanding of the
contents and programs in this manual.
3.1 Basic Instruction List
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
The LOD instruction starts the logical
Load operation with an NO (normally open)
LOD contact. YES
Stores intermediate results and reads
contact status
The LODN instruction starts the logical
Load Not operation with an NC (normally closed)
LODN contact. YES
Stores intermediate results and reads
contact status
Output
12
OUT Outputs the result of bit logical operation YES
Control Function
Output Not
Outputs the inverted result of bit logical
OUTN YES
operation
Set
Sets output, internal relay, data register
SET YES
S bit or shift register
Reset
Resets output, internal relay, data
RST YES
R register bit or shift register
And
AND Series connection of NO contact YES
And Not
ANDN Series connection of NC contact YES
Or
OR Parallel connection of NO contact YES
Or Not
ORN Parallel connection of NC contact YES
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-13
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
And Load
AND·LOD Series connection of circuit blocks YES
Or Load
OR·LOD Parallel connection of circuit blocks YES
Saves the result of bit logical operation
BPS Bit Push YES
temporarily
Reads the result of bit logical operation
BRD Bit Read YES
which was saved temporarily
Restores the result of bit logical
BPP Bit Pop YES
operation which was saved temporarily
Single Output Up
SOTU Falling-edge differentiation output NO
SOTU
Single Output Down
SOTD Rising-edge differentiation output NO
SOTD
1-sec Timer
TML TML T*** 1 sec On Delay timer NO
***
100-ms Timer
TIM TIM T*** 100 msec ON Delay timer NO
****
10-ms Timer
TMH TMH T*** 10 msec ON Delay timer NO
****
1-ms Timer
TMS TMS T*** 1 msec ON Delay timer NO
****
1-sec Off-delay Timer
TMLO TMLO T*** 1 sec OFF Delay timer NO
****
100-ms Off-delay Timer
TIMO TIMO T*** 100 msec OFF Delay timer NO
****
10-ms Off-delay Timer
TMHO TMHO T*** 10 msec OFF Delay timer NO
****
1-ms Off-delay Timer
TMSO TMSO T*** 1 msec OFF Delay timer NO
****
Counter
CNT CNT C*** Adding counter NO
****
12-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
Dual Pulse Reversible Counter
CDP C***
CDP **** Dual Pulse Reversible Counter NO
Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter
CUD C***
CUD **** Up/down selection reversible counter NO
Double-word Adding Counter
CNTD CNTD C*** Double-word adding counter NO
****
Double-word Dual Pulse Reversible Counter
CDPD C*** Double-word dual pulse reversible
CDPD NO
****
counter
Double-word Up/Down Selection Reversible Counter
CUDD C*** Double-word up/down selection
CUDD NO
****
reversible counter
Forward shift register
SFR R***
SFR **** Forward shift register NO
Reverse shift register
SFRN
SFRN R***
**** Reverse shift register NO 12
Control Function
Counter Comparison (=)
Equal to comparison of counter current
CC= CC＝ C*** YES
****
value
Counter Comparison (>=)
Greater than or equal to comparison of
CC>= CC>= C*** YES
****
counter current value
Data Register Comparison (=)
Equal to comparison of data register
DC= DC＝ D**** YES
****
value
Data Register Comparison (>=)
Greater than or equal to comparison of
DC>= DC>= D**** YES
data register value
****
Master Control Set
MCS Starts a master control YES
MCS
Master Control Reset
MCR Ends a master control YES
MCR
Jump
JMP Jumps a designated program area YES
JMP
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-15
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
Jump End
JEND Ends a jump instruction YES
JEND
End
END Ends a program YES
END
12-16 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
3.2 Advanced Instruction List
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
NOP
NOP No Operation YES
NOP
Move When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data from device
MOV MOV(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP designated by S1 is moved to device designated by D1. YES
***** ***** ** S1 D1
Move Not When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data from device
designated by S1 is inverted bit by bit and moved to
MOVN MOVN(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP YES
device designated by D1.
***** ***** **
S1 NOT D1
When input is on, the values contained in devices
Indirect Move designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the
source of data. The 16- or 32-bit data so determined is
IMOV IMOV(*) S1(R) S2 D1(R) D2 REP YES
moved to destination, which is determined by the sum of
***** ***** ***** ***** **
values contained in devices designated by D1 and D2.
S1 + S2 D1 + D2
When input is on, the values contained in devices
designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the
Indirect Move Not source of data. The 16- or 32-bit data so determined is
IMOVN IMOVN(*) S1(R) S2 D1(R) D2 REP inverted and moved to destination, which is determined YES
***** ***** ***** ***** ** by the sum of values contained in devices designated by
D1 and D2.
S1 + S2 NOT D1 + D2
When input is on, the values contained in devices
Indirect Bit Move designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the
source of data. The 1-bit data so determined is moved to
IBMV IBMV S1(R) S2 D1(R) D2 REP YES
destination, which is determined by the sum of values
***** ***** ***** ***** **
contained in devices designed by D1 and D2. 12
S1 + S2 D1 + D2
Control Function
When input is on, the values contained in devices
designated by S1 and S2 are added to determine the
Indirect Bit Move Not source of data. The 1-bit data so determined is inverted
IBMVN IBMVN S1(R) S2 D1(R) D2 REP and moved to destination, which is determined by the YES
***** ***** ***** ***** ** sum of values contained in devices designated by D1 and
D2.
S1 + S2 NOT D1 + D2
When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit word data starting
Block Move with device designated by S1 are moved to N blocks of
destinations, starting with device designated by D1. N-W
BMOV BMOV(W) S1 N_W D1 YES
specifies the quantity of blocks to move.
***** ***** *****
S1, S1+1, S1+2, ... , S1+N–1 D1, D1+1,
D1+2, ... , D1+N–1
When input is on, N blocks of 16- or 32-bit data in
N Data Set devices designated by S1, S2, S3, ... , Sn are moved to N
NSET NSET(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 blocks of destinations, starting with device designated by YES
***** ***** ***** ***** D1.
S1, S2, S3, ... , Sn D1, D2, D3, ... , Dn
N Data Repeat Set When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by S1 is
set to N blocks of destinations, starting with device
NRS NRS(*) N-W S1 D1 YES
designated by D1.
***** ***** *****
S1 D1, D2, D3, ... , Dn–1
When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data in devices
Exchange
designated by D1 and D2 are exchanged with each other.
XCHG XCHG(*) D1 D2 YES
Word data type: D1 D2
***** *****
Double-word data type: D1·D1+1 D2, D2+1
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-17
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
Timer/Counter Current Value Store When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by S1 is
read out and stored to the current value of device
TCCST TCCST(*) S1(R) D1(R) REP YES
designated by D1.
***** ***** **
S1 D1
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is
Compare Equal To
equal to S2 data, destination device D1 is turned on.
CMP= CMP=(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off. YES
AND/OR ***** ***** ***** **
Data type W or I: S1 = S2 D1 on
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 = S2·S2+1 D1 on
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is
Compare Unequal To
not equal to S2 data, destina-tion device D1 is turned on.
CMP<> CMP<>(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off. YES
AND/OR ***** ***** ***** **
Data type W or I: S1 S2 D1 on
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 S2·S2+1 D1 on
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is
Compare Less Than
less than S2 data, destination device D1 is turned on.
CMP< CMP<(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off. YES
AND/OR ***** ***** ***** **
Data type W or I: S1 < S2 D1 on
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 < S2·S2+1 D1 on
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is
Compare Greater Than
greater than S2 data, destination device D1 is turned on.
CMP> CMP>(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off. YES
AND/OR ***** ***** ***** **
Data type W or I: S1 > S2 D1 on
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 > S2·S2+1 D1 on
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is
Compare Less Than or Equal To less than or equal to S2 data, destination device D1 is
turned on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned
CMP<= CMP<=(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP YES
off.
AND/OR ***** ***** ***** **
Data type W or I: S1 S2 D1 on
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 S2·S2+1 D1 on
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by source
devices S1 and S2 are compared. When S1 data is greater
Compare Greater Than or Equal To
than or equal to S2 data, destination device D1 is turned
CMP>= CMP>=(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP on. When the condition is not met, D1 is turned off. YES
AND/OR ***** ***** ***** **
Data type W or I: S1 S2 D1 on
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 S2·S2+1 D1 on
When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data designated by
S1, S2, and S3 are compared. When the condition is met,
Interval Compare Greater Than or Equal To destination device D1 is turned on. When the condition is
not met, D1 is turned off.
ICMP>= ICMP>=(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 YES
***** ***** ***** ***** Data type W or I: S1 S2 S3 D1 on
Data type D, L, or F:
S1·S1+1 S2·S2+1 S3·S3+1 D1 on
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
Load Compare Equal To designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is equal to S2
data, the output to the following instructions is turned on.
LC= LC=(*) When the condition is not met, the output is turned off. YES
***** ***** Data type W or I: S1 = S2
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 = S2·S2+1
12-18 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is equal to S2
Load Compare Unequal To data, the output to the following instructions is turned
on. When the condition is not met, the output is turned
LC<> LC<>(*) YES
off.
***** *****
Data type W or I: S1 S2
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is less than S2
Load Compare Less Than data, the output to the following instructions is turned
on. When the condition is not met, the output is turned
LC< LC<(*) YES
off.
***** *****
Data type W or I: S1 < S2
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 < S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is greater than
Load Compare Greater Than S2 data, the output to the following instructions is turned
on. When the condition is not met, the output is turned
LC> LC>(*) YES
off.
***** *****
Data type W or I: S1 > S2
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 > S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is less than or
Load Compare Less Than or Equal To equal to S2 data, the output to the following instructions
is turned on. When the condition is not met, the output is
LC<= LC<=(*) YES
turned off.
***** *****
Data type W or I: S1 S2
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 S2·S2+1
This instruction constantly compares 16- or 32- bit data
designated by S1 and S2. When S1 data is greater than
12
Load Compare Greater Than or Equal To or equal to S2 data, the output to the following
Control Function
instructions is turned on. When the condition is not met,
LC>= LC>=(*) YES
the output is turned off.
***** *****
Data type W or I: S1 S2
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 S2·S2+1
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
Addition source devices S1 and S2 are added. The result is set to
destination device D1 and carry (M8003).
ADD ADD(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP YES
***** ***** ***** ** Data type W or I: S1 + S2 D1, CY
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 + S2·S2+1 D1·D1+1, CY
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source device S2 is subtracted from 16- or 32-bit data
Subtraction
designated by source device S1. The result is set to
SUB SUB(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP destination device D1 and borrow (M8003). YES
***** ***** ***** **
Data type W or I: S1 - S2 D1, BW
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 - S2·S2+1 D1·D1+1, BW
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source device S1 is multiplied by 16- or 32-bit data
designated by source device S2. The result is set to
Multiplication
destination device D1. When the result exceeds the valid
MUL MUL(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP range for data types D or L, the special internal relay YES
***** ***** ***** ** M8004 (ladder program execution error) is turned on.
Data type W or I: S1 X S2 D1·D1+1
Data type D, L, or F: S1·S1+1 X S2·S2+1 D1·D1+1
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-19
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source device S1 is divided by 16- or 32-bit data
designated by source device S2. The quotient is set to
16- or 32-bit destination device D1, and the remainder is
set to the next 16- or 32-bit data. Data type F does not
generate a remainder.
When S2 is 0 (dividing by 0), the special internal relay
Division M8004 (ladder program execution error) is turned on.
DIV DIV(*) S1(R) S2(R) D1(R) REP Data type W or I: YES
***** ***** ***** **
S1 ÷ S2 D1 (quotient), D1+1 (remainder)
Data type D or L:
S1·S1+1 ÷ S2·S2+1 D1·D1+1 (quotient),
D1+2·D1+3 (remainder)
Data type F:
S1·S1+1 ÷ S2·S2+1 D1·D1+1 (quotient)
When input is on, one is added to the 16- or 32-bit data
Increment designated by device S/D and the result is stored to the
same device.
INC INC(*) S / D YES
***** Data type W or I: S/D + 1 S/D
Data type D or L: S/D·S/D+1 + 1 S/D·S/D+1
When input is on, one is subtracted from the 16- or 32-
Decrement bit data designated by device S/D and the result is stored
to the same device.
DEC DEC(*) S / D YES
***** Data type W or I: S/D – 1 S/D
Data type D or L: S/D·S/D+1 – 1 S/D·S/D+1
When input is on, the square root of device designated
by S1 is extracted and is stored to the destination
designated by D1.
The square root is calculated to two decimals, omitting
the figures below the second place of decimals, and
multiplied by 100.
Data type W: S1 D1
When input is on, the square root of device designated
Root by S1·S1+1 is extracted and is stored to the destination
ROOT ROOT(*) S1 D1 designated by D1·D1+1. YES
***** ***** The square root is calculated to two decimals, omitting
the figures below the second place of decimals, and
multiplied by 100.
Data type D: S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1
When input is on, the square root of device designated
by S1·S1+1 is extracted and is stored to the destination
designated by D1·D1+1.
Data type F: S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1
Calculate the total of designated data, depending on the
calculation option.
ADD:
When input is on, N blocks of 16- or 32-bit data starting
Sum at device designated by S1 are added and the result is
stored to device designated by D1. S2 specifies the
SUM SUM(*) S1 S2 D1 YES
quantity of data blocks.
ADD/XOR ***** ***** *****
XOR:
When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit data starting at
device designated by S1 are XORed and the result is
stored to device designated by D1. S2 specifies the
quantity of data blocks.
12-20 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
AND Word When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source devices S1 and S2 are ANDed, bit by bit. The
ANDW ANDW(*) S1(R) S2(R) S3(R) REP YES
result is set to destination device D1.
***** ***** ***** **
S1 · S2 D1
OR Word When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source devices S1 and S2 are ORed, bit by bit. The result
ORW ORW(*) S1(R) S2(R) S3(R) REP YES
is set to destination device D1.
***** ***** ***** **
S1 + S2 D1
Exclusive OR Word When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data designated by
source devices S1 and S2 are exclusive ORed, bit by bit.
XORW XORW(*) S1(R) S2(R) S3(R) REP YES
The result is set to destination device D1.
***** ***** ***** **
S1 S2 D1
When input is on, N_B-bit data string starting with
source device S1 is shifted to the left by the quantity of
Shift Left bits designated by device Bits.
The result is set to source device S1, and the last bit
SFTL SFTL S1 S2 N_B bits YES
status shifted out is set to a carry (special internal relay
***** ***** ***** **
M8003). Zero or 1 designated by source device S2 is set
to the LSB.
CY S1
When input is on, N_B-bit data string starting with
source device S1 is shifted to the right by the quantity of
Shift Right bits designated by device Bits.
The result is set to source device S1, and the last bit
SFTR SFTR S1 S2 N_B bits YES
status shifted out is set to a carry (special internal relay
***** ***** ***** **
M8003). Zero or 1 designated by source device S2 is set
to the MSB.
S1 CY
When input is on, the 32-bit binary data designated by
S1 is converted into 8 BCD digits, shifted to the left by
the quantity of digits designated by S2, and converted
BCD Left Shift
BCDLS BCDLS S1 S2
back to 32-bit binary data.
Valid values for each of S1 and S1+1 are 0 through YES
12
***** ** 9999.
Control Function
The quantity of digits to shift can be 1 through 7.
Zeros are set to the lowest digits as many as the digits
shifted.
When input is on, N blocks of 16-bit word data starting
Word Shift with device designated by D1 are shifted up to the next
WSFT WSFT S1 S2 D1 16-bit positions. At the same time, the data designated YES
***** ***** ***** by device S1 is moved to device designated by D1. S2
specifies the quantity of blocks to move.
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data of the designated
Rotate Left source device S1 is rotated to the left by the quantity of
bits designated by device bits.
ROTL ROTL(*) S1 bits YES
The result is set to the source device S1, and the last bit
***** **
status rotated out is set to a carry (special internal relay
M8003).
When input is on, 16- or 32-bit data of the designated
Rotate Right source device S1 is rotated to the right by the quantity of
bits designated by device bits.
ROTR ROTR(*) S1 bits YES
The result is set to the source device S1, and the last bit
***** **
status rotated out is set to a carry (special internal relay
M8003).
When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit data designated by
S1 is converted into BCD and stored to the destination
Hex to BCD
designated by device D1.
HTOB HTOB(*) S1 D1 Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9999 for YES
***** ***** the word data type, and 0 through 9999 9999 for the
double-word data type.
S1 D1
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-21
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
When input is on, the BCD data designated by S1 is
converted into 16- or 32-bit binary data and stored to the
BCD to Hex
destination designated by device D1.
BTOH BTOH(*) S1 D1 Valid values for the source device are 0 through 9999 YES
***** ***** (BCD) for the word data type, and 0 through 9999 9999
(BCD) for the double-word data type.
S1 D1
When input is on, the 16-bit binary data designated by
S1 is read from the lowest digit as many as the quantity
Hex to ASCII
of digits designated by S2, converted into ASCII data,
HTOA HTOA(*) S1 S2 D1 and stored to the destination starting with the device YES
***** ***** ***** designated by D1.
The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4.
S1 D1, D1+1, D1+2, D1+3
When input is on, the ASCII data designated by S1 as
many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 is
ASCII to Hex converted into 16-bit binary data, and stored to the
destination designated by device D1.
ATOH ATOH(*) S1 S2 D1 YES
Valid values for source data to convert are 30h to 39h
***** ***** *****
and 41h to 46h.
The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 4.
S1, S1+1, S1+2, S1+3 D1
When input is on, the 16- or 32-bit binary data
designated by S1 is converted into BCD, and converted
into ASCII data. The data is read from the lowest digit as
many as the quantity of digits designated by S2. The
BCD to ASCII result is stored to the destination starting with the device
designated by D1.
BTOA BTOA(*) S1 S2 D1 YES
***** ***** *****
The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 for
the word data type, and 1 through 10 for the double-
word data type.
Word data type: S1 D1, D1+1, D1+2, D1+3, D1+4
Double-word data type: S1·S1+1 D1, D1+1, D1+2, ... , D1+9
When input is on, the ASCII data designated by S1 as
many as the quantity of digits designated by S2 is
converted into BCD, and converted into 16- or 32-bit
binary data. The result is stored to the destination
designated by device D1.
ASCII to BCD
Valid values for source data to convert are 30h through
ATOB ATOB(*) S1 S2 D1 39h. YES
***** ***** ***** The quantity of digits to convert can be 1 through 5 for
the word data type, and 1 through 10 for the double-
word data type.
Word data type: S1, S1+1, S1+2, S1+3, S1+4 D1
Double-word data type: S1, S1+1, S1+2, ... , S1+9 D1·D1+1
When input is on, a bit which is on is sought. The search
begins at S1 until the first point which is set (on) is
Encode
located. The quantity of points from S1 to the first set
ENCO ENCO S1 D1 point (offset) is stored to the destination designated by YES
Bits ***** ***** device D1.
If no point is on in the searched area, 65535 is stored to
D1.
Decode
When input is on, the values contained in devices
DECO DECO S1 D1 designated by S1 and D1 are added to determine the YES
***** ***** destination, and the bit so determined is turned on.
When input is on, bits which are on are sought in an
Bit Count
array of consecutive bits starting at the point designated
BCNT BCNT S1 S2 D1 by source device S1. Source device S2 designates the YES
***** ***** ***** quantity of bits searched. The quantity of bits which are
on is stored to the destination designated by device D1.
12-22 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
When input is turned on, output, internal relay, or shift
register bit designated by D1 is turned on and remains
on after the input is turned off.
Alternate Output When input is turned on again, the designated output,
ALT ALT D1 internal relay, or shift register bit is turned off. YES
SOTU
***** The ALT instruction must be used with a SOTU or SOTD
instruction, otherwise the designated output, internal
relay, or shift register bit repeats to turn on and off in
each scan.
When input is on, the data type of the 16- or 32-bit data
designated by S1 is converted and stored to the
destination designated by device D1.
Data types can be designated for the source and
destination, separately.
Data Type W, I D, L, F
Source S1 S1·S1+1
Convert Data Type Destination D1 D1·D1+1
CVDT CVDT S1 (R) D1 (R) REP YES
*TO* ***** ***** ** When the same data type is designated for both source
and destination, the CVDT instruction has the same
function as the MOV instruction.
Unless F (float) data type is selected for both source and
destination, only the integral number is moved, omitting
the fraction.
When the source data exceeds the range of destination
data type, the destination stores a value closest to the
source data within the destination data type.
S1 D1
When input is on, the 16-bit binary data designated by S1
Data Divide
is divided into upper and lower bytes. The upper byte
DTDV data is stored to the destination designated by device D1. YES
DTDV(*) S1 D1
***** ***** The lower byte data is stored to the device next to D1. 12
S1 D1, D1+1
Control Function
When input is on, the lower-byte data is read out from 2
consecutive sources starting with device designated by
Data Combine S1 and combined to make 16-bit data. The lower byte
data from the first source device is moved to the upper
DTCB DTCB(*) S1 D1 YES
byte of the destination designated by device D1, and the
***** *****
lower byte data from the next source device is moved to
the lower byte of the destination.
S1, S1+1 D1
When input is on, upper and lower byte- or word-data of
Data Swap a word- or double-word-data designated by S1 are
SWAP SWAP(*) S1 (R) D1 (R) REP exchanged, and the result is stored to destination YES
***** ***** ** designated by D1.
S1 D1
Weekly Timer Specified day of the week and ON time and OFF time are
WEEK WEEK S1 S2 S3 D1 compared with the current day/time, and the result is NO
***** ***** ***** ***** output
Yearly Timer
Specified date and current date are compared and result
YEAR YEAR S1 S2 S3 D1 NO
is output
***** ***** ***** *****
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-23
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
This is the label number, from 0 to 127 (all-in-one type
CPU) or 0 to 255 (slim type CPU), used at the program
address where the execution of program instructions
Label begins for a program branch.
An END instruction may be used to separate a tagged
LABEL LABEL YES
portion of the program from the main program. In this
***
way, scan time is minimized by not executing the
program branch unless input conditions are satisfied.
Note: The same label number cannot be used more
than once.
When input is on, jump to the address with label 0
through 127 (all-in-one type CPU) or 0 to 255 (slim type
CPU) designated by S1.
Label Jump When input is off, no jump takes place, and program
LJMP LJMP S1 execution proceeds with the next instruction. YES
***** The LJMP instruction is used as an “either/or” choice
between two portions of a program. Program execution
does not return to the instruction following the LJMP
instruction, after the program branch.
When input is on, the address with label 0 through 127
(all-in-one type CPU) or 0 to 255 (slim type CPU)
designated by S1 is called. When input is off, no call
takes place, and program execution proceeds with the
next instruction.
The LCAL instruction calls a subroutine, and returns to
the main program after the branch is executed. A LRET
Label Call instruction (see below) must be placed at the end of a
program branch which is called, so that normal program
LCAL LCAL S1 YES
execution resumes by returning to the instruction
*****
following the LCAL instruction.
Note: The END instruction must be used to separate the
main program from any subroutines called by the LCAL
instruction.
A maximum of four LCAL instructions can be nested.
When more than four LCAL instructions are nested, a
ladder program execution error will result, turning on
special internal relay M8004.
This instruction is placed at the end of a subroutine
called by the LCAL instruction. When the subroutine is
completed, normal program execution resumes by
Label Return returning to the instruction following the LCAL
LRET instruction. YES
LRET
The LRET must be placed at the end of the subroutine
starting with a LABEL instruction. When the LRET is
programmed at other places, a ladder program execution
error will result, turning on special internal relay M8004.
When input is on, the value stored in the data register
designated by S1 is decremented by one and is checked.
Decrement Jump Non-zero If the resultant value is not 0, program execution jumps
DJNZ DJNZ S1 S2 to address with label 0 through 127 (all-in-one CPU) or YES
***** ***** 255 (slim CPU) designated by S2. If the decrement
results in 0, no jump takes place, and program execution
proceeds with the next instruction.
12-24 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
When input is on, 1-bit I/O data designated by source
device S1 is refreshed immediately regardless of the scan
time.
When I (input) is used as S1, the actual input status is
immediately read into an internal relay starting with
M300 allocated to each input available on the CPU
module.
I/O Refresh When Q (output) is used as S1, the output data in the
IOREF IOREF S1 RAM is immediately written to the actual output available YES
***** on the CPU module.
Refresh instructions are useful when a real-time
response is required in a user program which has a long
scan time. The refresh instruction is most effective when
using the refresh instruction at a ladder step immediately
before using the data.
The IOREF instruction can be used with an interrupt
input or timer interrupt to refresh data.
When input is on, the HSCRF instruction refreshes the
high-speed counter current values in special data
High-speed Counter Refresh registers in real time.
The current values of four high-speed counters HSC1
HSCRF HSCRF YES
through HSC4 are usually updated in every scan. The
*
HSCRF can be used in any place in the ladder diagram
where you want to read the updated high-speed counter
current value.
Disable Interrupt
When input is on, interrupt inputs and timer interrupt
DI DI S1 NO
designated by source device S1 are disabled.
**
Enable Interrupt
When input is on, interrupt inputs and timer interrupt
EI EI S1 NO
designated by source device S1 are enabled.
**
XY Format Set
12
When input is on, the format for XY conversion is set.
Control Function
XYFS XYFS(*) S1 X0 Y0 .....
Xn Yn The XY coordinates define the linear relationship NO
* ***** ***** ***** ***** between X and Y.
Convert X to Y When input is on, the X value designated by device S2 is
converted into corresponding Y value according to the
CVXTY CVXTY(*) S1 S2 D1 NO
linear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction. The
***** ***** ****
conversion result is set to the device designated by D1.
Convert Y to X When input is on, the Y value designated by device S2 is
converted into corresponding X value according to the
CVYTX CVYTX(*) S1 S2 D1 NO
linear relationship defined in the XYFS instruction. The
***** ***** ****
conversion result is set to the device designated by D1.
When input is on, sampling data designated by device S1
is processed according to sampling conditions designated
Average by devices S2 and S3.
AVRG AVRG(*) S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 When sampling is complete, average, maximum, and NO
***** ***** ***** ***** ***** minimum values are stored to 3 consecutive devices
starting with device designated by D1, then sampling
completion output designated by device D2 is turned on.
1-sec Dual Timer While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turn
on and off for a duration designated by devices S1 and
DTML DTML S1 S2 D1 D2 NO
S2, respectively.
***** ***** ***** *****
The time range is 0 through 65535 sec.
100-msec Dual Timer While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turn
on and off for a duration designated by devices S1 and
DTIM DTIM S1 S2 D1 D2 NO
S2, respectively.
***** ***** ***** *****
The time range is 0 through 6553.5 sec.
10-msec Dual Timer While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turn
on and off for a duration designated by devices S1 and
DTMH DTMH S1 S2 D1 D2 NO
S2, respectively.
***** ***** ***** *****
The time range is 0 through 655.35 sec.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-25
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
1-msec Dual Timer While input is on, destination device D1 repeats to turn
on and off for a duration designated by devices S1 and
DTMS DTMS S1 S2 D1 D2 NO
S2, respectively.
***** ***** ***** *****
The time range is 0 through 65.535 sec.
Teaching Timer While input is on, the ON duration is measured in units of
100 ms and the measured value is stored to a data
TTIM TTIM D1 NO
register designated by destination device D1.
*****
The measured time range is 0 through 6553.5 sec.
Degree to Radian When input is on, the degree value designated by source
device S1 is converted into a radian value and stored to
RAD RAD(F) S1 D1
the destination designated by device D1. YES
***** *****
S1·S1+1° /180 D1·D1+1 rad
Radian to Degree When input is on, the radian value designated by source
device S1 is converted into a degree value and stored to
DEG DEG(F) S1 D1
the destination designated by device D1. YES
***** *****
S1·S1+1 rad 180/ D1·D1+1°
Sine When input is on, the sine of the radian value designated
by source device S1 is stored to the destination
SIN SIN(F) S1 D1 YES
designated by device D1.
***** *****
sin S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1
Cosine When input is on, the cosine of the radian value
designated by source device S1 is stored to the
COS COS(F) S1 D1 YES
destination designated by device D1.
***** *****
cos S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1
Tangent When input is on, the tangent of the radian value
designated by source device S1 is stored to the
TAN TAN(F) S1 D1 YES
destination designated by device D1.
***** *****
tan S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1
When input is on, the arc sine of the value designated by
source device S1 is stored in radians to the destination
designated by device D1.
Arc Sine asin S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1 rad
If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, an
ASIN ASIN(F) S1 D1
indefinite value is stored to D1·D1+1. YES
***** *****
The S1·S1+1 value must be within the following range:
-1.0 S1·S1+1 -1.0
If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, an
indefinite value is stored to D1·D1+1.
When input is on, the arc cosine of the value designated
by source device S1 is stored in radians to the
destination designated by device D1.
Arc Cosine acos S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1 rad
If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, an
ACOS ACOS(F) S1 D1
indefinite value is stored to D1·D1+1. YES
***** *****
The S1·S1+1 value must be within the following range:
-1.0 S1·S1+1 -1.0
If the S1·S1+1 value is not within this range, an
indefinite value is stored to D1·D1+1.
Arc Tangent When input is on, the arc tangent of the value
designated by source device S1 is stored in radians to
ATAN ATAN(F) S1 D1 YES
the destination designated by device D1.
***** *****
atan S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1 rad
Natural Logarithm When input is on, the natural logarithm of the binary
data designated by source device S1 is stored to the
LOGE LOGE(F) S1 D1 YES
destination designated by device D1.
***** *****
loge S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1
Common Logarithm When input is on, the common logarithm of the binary
data designated by source device S1 is stored to the
LOG10 LOG10(F) S1 D1
destination designated by device D1. YES
***** *****
log10 S1·S1+1 D1·D1+1
12-26 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Interrupt
Symbol Name and Symbol Function Program
Execution
When input is on, e is raised to the power S1·S1+1
Exponent designated by source device S1 and is stored to the
EXP EXP(F) S1 D1 destination designated by device D1. YES
***** ***** e (base of natural logarithm) = 2.7182818
eS1·S1+1 D1·D1+1
When input is on, binary data designated by source
Power device S1 is raised to the power S2·S2+1 designated by
POW POW(F) S1 S2 D1 source device S2 and the operation result is stored to the YES
***** ***** **** destination designated by device D1.
S1·S1+1S2·S2+1 D1·D1+1
FIFO Format When input is on, FIFOF instruction initializes an FIFO
data file. Each data file has unique number 0 through 9.
FIFOF FIFOF(W) S1 S2 D1 D2 NO
A maximum of 10 data files can be used in a user
* **** ***** **** ****
program.
First-In Execute When input is on, the data stored in data registers
FIEX FIEX(W) S1 starting with the device designated by S1 is stored to the YES
* ***** corresponding FIFO data file.
First-Out Execute When input is on, the data is retrieved from the
FOEX FOEX(W) D1 corresponding FIFO data file and stored to the data YES
* ***** registers starting with the device designated by D1.
When input is on, a value specified by device S1 is
sought. Data registers are searched, starting with the
data register designated by device S2. Device S3
specifies the quantity of 1-word or 2-word blocks of data
N Data Search registers to search, depending on the data type.
NDSRC NDSRC(W) S1 S2 S3 D1 The offset of the data register where a match first NO
***** ***** ***** ***** occurred is stored in data register designated by device
D1. The quantity of times the value was matched is
stored in the next data register. When the search results
in no match, 65535 is stored in device D1 and 0 is stored
in device D+1.
12
When input is on, time data designated by source device
Control Function
Time Addition S2 are added to date/time data designated by source
TADD TADD S1 S2 D1 device S1, depending on the selected mode. The result is YES
Mode *** *** ***** stored to destination device D1 and carry (M8003).
S1 + S2 D1, CY
When input is on, time data designated by source device
Time Subtraction S2 are subtracted from date/time data designated by
source device S1, depending on the selected mode. The
TSUB TSUB S1 S2 D1 YES
result is stored to destination device D1 and borrow
Mode *** *** *****
(M8003).
S1 – S2 D1, CY
While input is on, the ON duration is measured. The
measured time value (hour, minute, and second) is
stored to 3 consecutive data registers designated by
Hour destination device D1 and compared with the preset
value designated by source device S1. When the D1
HOUR HOUR S1 D1 D2 D3 NO
value reaches the S1 value, an output or internal relay
***** ***** ***** *****
designated by destination device D2 is turned on. Two
data registers starting with destination device D3 are
reserved for system work area.
S1 D1 D2
HMS to Sec When input is on, time data in hours, minutes, and
seconds designated by source device S1 is converted into
HTOS HTOS S1 D1 YES
seconds. The result is stored to destination device D1.
***** *****
Hours, minutes, seconds Seconds
Sec to HMS When input is on, time data in seconds designated by
source device S1 is converted into hours, minutes, and
STOH STOH S1 D1 YES
seconds. The result is stored to destination device D1.
***** *****
Seconds Hours, minutes, seconds
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-27
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
3.3 Compatible Data
The compatible data types for each command word are as follows.
In WindLDR data types are displayed as follows: BIN16(+) as W (word), BIN16(+/-) as I (integer),
BIN32(+) as D (double word), BIN32(+/-) as L (long), and float32 as F (float).
Data Type
Group W I D L F
Word Integer Double word Long Float
NOP NOP NO NO NO NO NO
MOV YES YES YES YES YES
MOVN YES YES YES YES NO
IMOV YES NO YES NO YES
IMOVN YES NO YES NO NO
IBMV(N) YES NO NO NO NO
Move
BMOV YES NO NO NO NO
NSET YES YES YES YES YES
NRS YES YES YES YES YES
XCHG YES NO YES NO NO
TCCST YES NO YES NO NO
CMP= YES YES YES YES YES
CMP<> YES YES YES YES YES
CMP< YES YES YES YES YES
CMP> YES YES YES YES YES
CMP<= YES YES YES YES YES
CMP>= YES YES YES YES YES
Data
ICMP>= YES YES YES YES YES
Comparison
LC= YES YES YES YES YES
LC<> YES YES YES YES YES
LC< YES YES YES YES YES
LC> YES YES YES YES YES
LC<= YES YES YES YES YES
LC>= YES YES YES YES YES
ADD YES YES YES YES YES
SUB YES YES YES YES YES
MUL YES YES YES YES YES
DIV YES YES YES YES YES
Binary
INC YES YES YES YES NO
Arithmetic
DEC YES YES YES YES NO
ROOT YES NO YES NO YES
SUM(ADD) YES YES YES YES YES
SUM(XOR) YES NO NO NO NO
ANDW YES NO YES NO NO
Boolean
ORW YES NO YES NO NO
Computation
XORW YES NO YES NO NO
12-28 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Data Type
Group W I D L F
Word Integer Double word Long Float
SFTL NO NO NO NO NO
SFTR NO NO NO NO NO
BCDLS NO NO YES NO NO
Shift and Rotate
WSFT YES NO NO NO NO
ROTL YES NO YES NO NO
ROTR YES NO YES NO NO
HTOB YES NO YES NO NO
BTOH YES NO YES NO NO
HTOA YES NO NO NO NO
ATOH YES NO NO NO NO
BTOA YES NO YES NO NO
ATOB YES NO YES NO NO
ENCO NO NO NO NO NO
Data Conversion
DECO NO NO NO NO NO
BCNT NO NO NO NO NO
ALT NO NO NO NO NO
CVDT YES YES YES YES YES
DTDV YES NO NO NO NO
DTCB YES NO NO NO NO
SWAP YES NO YES NO NO
Week WEEK NO NO NO NO NO
Programmer YEAR NO NO NO NO NO 12
LABEL NO NO NO NO NO
Control Function
LJMP NO NO NO NO NO
Program
LCAL NO NO NO NO NO
Branching
LRET NO NO NO NO NO
DJNZ NO NO NO NO NO
IOREF NO NO NO NO NO
I/O Refresh
HSCRF NO NO NO NO NO
Enable/Disable DI NO NO NO NO NO
Interrupt EI NO NO NO NO NO
XYFS YES YES NO NO NO
Coordinate
CVXTY YES YES NO NO NO
Conversion
CVYTX YES YES NO NO NO
Average AVRG YES YES YES YES YES
DTML NO NO NO NO NO
DTIM NO NO NO NO NO
Dual / Teaching
DTMH NO NO NO NO NO
Timer
DTMS NO NO NO NO NO
TTIM NO NO NO NO NO
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 12-29
3 Ladder Instruction Reference
Data Type
Group W I D L F
Word Integer Double word Long Float
RAD NO NO NO NO YES
DEG NO NO NO NO YES
SIN NO NO NO NO YES
Trigonometric COS NO NO NO NO YES
Function TAN NO NO NO NO YES
ASIN NO NO NO NO YES
ACOS NO NO NO NO YES
ATAN NO NO NO NO YES
LOGE NO NO NO NO YES
Logarithm / LOG10 NO NO NO NO YES
Power EXP NO NO NO NO YES
POW NO NO NO NO YES
FIFOF YES NO NO NO NO
File Data FIEX YES NO NO NO NO
Processing FOEX YES NO NO NO NO
NDSRC YES YES YES YES YES
TADD NO NO NO NO NO
TSUB NO NO NO NO NO
Clock HOUR NO NO NO NO NO
HTOS NO NO NO NO NO
STOH NO NO NO NO NO
12-30 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 13 Alarm Log Function
This chapter describes how to configure the Alarm Log function and its operation on the Touch.
1 Overview
1.1 How the Alarm Log Function is Used
The Alarm Log function samples the occurrence of alarms and recovery information by monitoring and evaluating the
state of devices.
The Alarm Log function can perform the following functions.
• Monitor device states and create Alarm Log data
Touch
External device 12:00
0 1 Alarm occurred
12:00 12:53 Recovered
1 0 12:54 Confirmed
12:53
Alarm Log data
No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:00:00 12/01 12:53:10 12/01 12:54:30
• Monitor device states and detect alarms
Touch
External device
0 1 Alarm occurred
13
Alarm Log Function
• Display an alarm screen when an alarm occurs
Touch
External device
0 1 Voltage Alarm occurred
drop
Alarm screen
• Make a sound of the buzzer and screen flashing the screen when an alarm occurs
Touch
External device
Beep
0 1
Alarm occurred
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-1
1 Overview
• Output Alarm Log data to the external memory
Touch
USB flash drive
Output to USB flash drive
Alarm Log data (CSV)
13-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.2 Alarm States
Alarms have three states: occurred, recovered, and confirmed.
Alarm state Details
Indicates that an alarm has occurred. There are two types of alarms that occur.
Occurred First Alarm: The first alarm that occurs in a state where no alarms have occurred.
Second and later: An alarm that has occurred while another alarm is active.
Indicates that the alarm that occurred has been recovered from.
Recovered However, for channels set to lock, the alarm is not recovered from until a key button is pressed
(CHECK or All Chk.).
Confirmed Indicates the key button CHECK or All Chk. was pressed.
Example: When the source device (the device to monitor) is D100-0, the error state (when an alarm has occurred) is
ON, the channel is set to Unlock, and the used key button is CHECK
When the source device is ON, the alarm changes to the “Occurred” state. When the source device is OFF,
the alarm changes to the “Recovered” state. When CHECK is pressed, the alarm changes to the
“Confirmed” state.
Alarm state
Source device state
No alarm
D100-0 : OFF occurring state
Alarm Log data
D100-0 : ON Occurred Record occurrence time
NO/NC is NO, so the state is
“Occurred”
D100-0 : OFF Recovered Record recovery time
Lock/Unlock is Unlock, so the
Press CHECK state is “Recovered”
Confirmed Record confirmation time 13
Alarm Log Function
If CHECK is pressed before the source device changes to OFF, the alarm changes to the “Confirmed” state
regardless of the state of the source device.
Alarm state
Source device state
No alarm
D100-0 : OFF occurring state
Alarm Log data
D100-0 : ON Occurred Record occurrence time
NO/NC is NO, so the state is
Press CHECK “Occurred”
Confirmed Record confirmation time
D100-0 : OFF Recovered Record recovery time
Lock/Unlock is Unlock, so the
state is “Recovered”
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-3
1 Overview
1.3 Sampling Data
Data is sampled each time the alarm occurs, is recovered from, or confirmed.
Example: When the message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the message for channel number 1-2 is
“Temperature abnormal”
Channel No. 1-1: Alarm occurred Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
1 (12:50:00) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00 – –
Channel No. 1-2: No alarm
Channel No. 1-1: Alarm Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
(12:50:00) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00 – –
2 Temperature
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm occurred 1-2 12/01/2011 12:50:10 – –
abnormal
(12:50:10)
Recovered from
Channel No. 1-1: Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
alarm
(12:50:20) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 –
3
Temperature
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm 1-2 12/01/2011 12:50:10 – –
abnormal
(12:50:10)
Channel No. 1-1: CHECK pressed Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
(12:50:30) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30
4 Temperature
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm 1-2 12/01/2011 12:50:10 – –
abnormal
(12:50:10)
Channel No. 1-1: Alarm occurred Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
(12:51:00) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30
5 Temperature
Channel No. 1-2: Alarm 1-2 12/01/2011 12:50:10 – –
abnormal
(12:50:10) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:51:00 – –
Channel No. 1-1: Alarm Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
(12:51:00) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30
6 Temperature
Channel No. 1-2: CHECK pressed 1-2 12/01/2011 12:50:10 – 12/01 12:52:10
abnormal
(12:52:10) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:51:00 – –
Channel No. 1-1: Alarm Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
(12:51:00) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30
7 Recovered from Temperature
Channel No. 1-2: 1-2 12/01/2011 12:50:10 12/01 12:53:00 12/01 12:52:10
alarm abnormal
(12:52:10) 1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:51:00 – –
13-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.4 Data Configuration
The sampled data is composed of the channel number, message, alarm state, time, and label.
The relationship between the Alarm Log function settings and the sampled data is as follows.
Alarm Log settings
Ϯ͘ŚĂŶŶĞůEŽ͘ ϯ͘DĞƐƐĂŐĞ ϰ͘ůĂƌŵƐƚĂƚĞĂŶĚƚŝŵĞ
Sampled data
Ś͘EŽ͘ DĞƐƐĂŐĞ KĐĐƵƌƌĞŶĐĞdŝŵĞ ZĞĐŽǀĞƌLJdŝŵĞ ŽŶĨŝƌŵĂƚŝŽŶdŝŵĞ ϱ͘>ĂďĞů
ϭͲϭ sŽůƚĂŐĞĚƌŽƉ ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϬϬ͗Ϭϱ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗Ϭϭ͗ϭϬ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗Ϭϭ͗ϯϬ
ϭͲϮ dĞŵƉĞƌĂƚƵƌĞĂďŶŽƌŵĂů ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϭ͗Ϭϵ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϬϮ͗Ϯϭ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϬϮ͗ϱϱ
ϭ͘ĂƚĂƐƚŽƌĂŐĞĂŵŽƵŶƚ ϭͲϭ sŽůƚĂŐĞĚƌŽƉ ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϬϮ͗ϬϬ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗Ϭϯ͗ϭϭ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗Ϭϱ͗ϭϮ
ϭͲϯ KǀĞƌĐƵƌƌĞŶƚ ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϯϬ͗Ϯϭ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϱϱ͗ϭϱ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϯ͗ϬϬ͗ϬϬ
ϭͲϭ sŽůƚĂŐĞĚƌŽƉ ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϰϱ͗ϯϲ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϱϯ͗ϭϮ ϭϮͬϬϭϭϮ͗ϱϳ͗ϰϭ
13
1. Data storage amount: The amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area. For details, refer to “Data
Alarm Log Function
Storage Amount” on page 13-7.
2. Channel No.: Composed of (Block No.)-(Channel No.). The devices to monitor and the conditions for alarm
occurrence and recovery are configured in the channels. When the sampled data is output
as a CSV file, the displayed label is “Ch.No.”.
3. Message: The message displayed when an alarm has occurred.
4. Alarm state and time: The alarm state (occurred, recovered, confirmed) and the time the alarm occurred, was
recovered from, and confirmed. When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, the
displayed label varies based on the output method.
5. Label: When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed in the label row.
This cannot be changed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-5
1 Overview
For sampled data, the format for displayed items varies based on the output method.
■ Batch
Batch output shows the recovery and confirmation time for an alarm that has occurred on a single line.
The labels displayed in the label row are “Ch.No.”, “Message”, “Occurrence Time”, “Recovery Time”, and
“Confirmation Time”.
Example: When the message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the message for channel number 1-2 is
“Temperature abnormal”
Confirmation
Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time
Time
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:50:00 12/01 12:50:20 12/01 12:50:30
1-2 Temperature abnormal 12/01/2011 12:50:10 -- 12/01 12:52:10
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:51:00 -- --
■ Real Time
Real time output displays the alarm state and the time the alarm became that state on a single line each time an
alarm occurs, is recovered from, or is confirmed.
The labels displayed in the label row are “Ch.No.”, “Message”, “State”, and “Time”.
Example: When the message for channel number 1-1 is “Voltage drop” and the message for channel number 1-2 is
“Temperature abnormal”
Ch.No. Message State Time
1-1 Voltage drop Occurred 12/01/2011 12:50:00
1-2 Temperature abnormal Occurred 12/01/2011 12:50:10
1-1 Voltage drop Recovered 12/01/2011 12:50:20
13-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.5 Saving and Deleting Data
● Saving Data
You can select whether or not to save the sampled data in the data storage area. The method to save data is
configured on the Channel tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
When Saving Data to the Data Storage Area
Select Store under Data in the Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box.
Touch
External device 12:00
0 1 Alarm occurred
12:00 12:53 Recovered
1 0 12:54 Confirmed
12:53
Alarm Log data
No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:00:00 12/01 12:53:10 12/01 12:54:30
If the number of active alarms exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount set for the data storage area, the data is
processed with either of the following methods.
■ Fixed
If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the new data is not saved.
New data
13
Alarm Log Function
Alarm Log data storage amount
■ Rotate
If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is saved.
New data
Oldest data
(delete)
Alarm Log data storage amount
When the backup battery is depleted, the data in the Alarm Log is erased when the Touch is turned off.
Data Storage Amount
The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 5011.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-7
1 Overview
When Not Saving Data to the Data Storage Area
Select No Store under Data in the Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box.
Use this option to monitor a device state and display only detected active alarms on the Alarm List Display.
Touch
External device
Voltage drop Pg.
Up
Pg.
0 1 Dwn Alarm occurred
Alarm List Display
● Deleting Data
The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the Online tab in WindO/I-NV3, click the arrow under Clear, and then click All or Alarm Log Data. For
details, refer to Chapter 23 “4 Clear” on page 23-22.
• On the Top Page in the System Mode, press Main Menu, Initial Setting, Initialize, and Alarm Log in order.
13-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.6 Using Data and Detected Alarms
The saved data and detected alarms can be used in the following ways.
● Using Saved Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Alarm Log data
Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:00:05 12/01 12:01:10 12/01 12:01:30
1-2 Temperature abnormal 12/01/2011 12:01:09 12/01 12:02:21 12/01 12:02:55
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:02:00 12/01 12:03:11 12/01 12:05:12
1-3 Overcurrent 12/01/2011 12:30:21 12/01 12:55:15 12/01 13:00:00
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:45:36 12/01 12:53:12 12/01 12:57:41
To use with the Touch To use with devices other than the Touch
• Display data with the Alarm Log Display • Save to and read from an external memory
Display Alarm Log data with the Alarm Log Display. Alarm Log data is saved in a CSV file format into the
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “7 Alarm Log Display” external memory which it can be read on your
on page 9-99. computer.
For details, refer to “4.4 Saving Data as a CSV File”
on page 13-32.
Occurred Message Recovered Confirmed
12/01 12:51 Temperature abnormal 12:53 12:52
Book1
12/01 12:00 Voltage drop 12:53 12:52
Select Ref.
Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3
Alarm Log data
(CSV)
13
Alarm Log Function
● Using Detected Alarms
• Display alarms with the Alarm List Display
Display detected alarms with the Alarm List Display.
For details, refer to “4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm”
on page 13-27.
Touch
External device
Voltage drop Pg.
Up
Pg.
0 1 Dwn Alarm occurred
Alarm List Display
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-9
2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure
2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Alarm Log function.
2.1 Configuring the Devices to Monitor and the Alarm Detection Condition
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab.
If you select Word, devices are configured per block.
If you select Bit, devices are configured per channel.
3 Set the number of blocks to manage in Number of Blocks.
One channel is used for one device to monitor. One block is 16 channels.
The number of blocks that can be set varies based on the Source Device Type setting.
4 Select the reference screen type in Reference Screen.
The reference screen is associated with the channel. This screen is displayed when the key button Ref. is pressed.
If a reference screen is not displayed, select Not Use.
5 To batch register all channels, click Auto. To individually register each channel, click Edit.
An example when Auto is clicked is described here.
The Auto-Setup dialog box is displayed.
13-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure
6 Specify the device to monitor in Source.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
For the Auto-Setup dialog box, the device addresses are sequentially set starting with the specified device address
from the highlighted row in Settings.
7 Under Data, select whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
To display Alarm Log data on the Touch or to output the data to a file, select Store.
If you select No Store, Alarm Log data is not created, but device states are monitored.
8 Under Alarm function, select whether or not to use the alarm function.
For channels with Disable selected, device states are not monitored and Alarm Log data is not created.
9 Under NO/NC, select the alarm detection condition.
If you select NO, the alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1. If you select NC, the alarm occurs
when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.
13
Alarm Log Function
10 Under Lock/Unlock, select whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.
If you select Unlock, the alarm is automatically recovered from based on the bit state when the monitored bit
becomes the normal state.
If you select Lock, even if the monitored bit becomes the normal state, the alarm remains active until the key button
CHECK is pressed.
11 Select the Text ID check box and specify the message to display when the alarm occurs as a Text Manager ID
number (1 to 32000).
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) text IDs are used starting from the set ID number.
12 Specify the screen number (1 to 3000) to display when the key button Ref. is pressed in Reference Screen No.
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) screens are used starting from the screen number.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in Reference Screen.
13 Click OK.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-11
2 Alarm Log Function Configuration Procedure
The devices to monitor and the messages are batch configured and displayed in Settings of Alarm Log Settings
dialog box.
14 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the devices to monitor and the alarm detection condition.
Next, configure the functions to execute using saved data and detected alarms.
“4.1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display” on page 13-25
“4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm” on page 13-27
“4.3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred” on page 13-30
“4.4 Saving Data as a CSV File” on page 13-32
13-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
3.1 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
● General Tab
The General tab is used to configure what kind of data to sample when an alarm occurs and the methods for saving
and deleting the sampled data.
■ Storage Method
Selects the data processing method when the number of active alarms exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount
set for the data storage area.
Fixed: If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the new data is not saved.
New data 13
Alarm Log Function
Alarm Log data storage amount
Rotate: If the saved data exceeds the Alarm Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data
is saved.
New data
Oldest data
(delete)
Alarm Log data storage amount
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-13
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Monitoring Period (x 100 msec)
Specifies the period to write the state of the monitored device to the Touch (6 to 500 (100 milliseconds units)).
■ Monitor Number of Active Alarms
Select this check box to count the number of active alarms.
(Destination Device): Specifies a word device to write the number of active alarms.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-62.
■ Monitor How Many Times Each Alarm has occurred
Select this check box to count the number of alarms that has occurred per channel.
(Top Device): Specifies a word device to write the number of alarms that has occurred. Number of blocks x 16
(number of channels) addresses are used starting from the set device address.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-62.
Example: When the number of blocks is 2 and LKR100 is specified as the starting device
The number of alarms that has occurred for channel number 1-0 is saved in LKR100.
The number of alarms that has occurred for channel 1-1 is saved in LKR101, and this
pattern continues up to LKR131 where the number of alarms that has occurred for
channel number 2-15 is saved.
Channel No.
1-0 LKR100 Starting device
1-1 LKR101
Block 1 1-2 LKR102
16 channels
1-14 LKR114
1-15 LKR115
2-0 LKR116
2-1 LKR117
Block 2 2-2 LKR118
16 channels
2-14 LKR130
2-15 LKR131
• If you specify HMI Keep Registers (LKR) as the destination word device, the number of alarms that has
occurred is retained even when the Touch power is turned off.
• The amount of Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area with the Alarm Log function is stored in
HMI Special Data Register LSD57.
• To monitor the number of alarms that has occurred, number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) devices
are required from the set starting device. If the destination device does not exist, “Device range error”
occurs on the Touch.
• If the values of devices that are counting the number of alarms that has occurred are overwritten by
another process, the alarms cannot be accurately counted.
■ Clear Log Data for Recovered Alarms
Select this check box to delete recovered data out of the saved Alarm Log data.
(Trigger Device): Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition to delete data. The recovered
data is deleted when the value of the configured device changes from 0 to 1. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Monitor the State of Each Alarm
Select this check box to check the alarm state per channel.
(Top Device): Specifies a word device to write the alarm state. Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels)
addresses are used starting from the set device address.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings”
on page 2-62.
The following values are written to the bits depending on the alarm state.
Bit 15 Bit 3 Bit 0
0: Before alarm/after recovery
Reserved 1: After alarm
0: Second and later alarm (Alarm that has occurred again while an alarm is active)
1: First alarm (First alarm that occurred)
0: After confirm
1: Before confirm
13-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Call Popup Screen
These settings configure the Popup Screen to display when an alarm occurs. The Popup Screen displayed when an
alarm occurs is called the alarm screen.
Call Popup Screen: Select this check box to display the alarm screen when an alarm occurs.
Screen No.: Specifies the alarm screen number (1 to 3015) to display when an alarm occurs.
Coordinates X, Y: Specifies the coordinates to display the alarm screen.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the
alarm screen is the X and Y coordinates.
Specify the coordinates in 1 dot units.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
■ Number of Stored Data
Specifies the maximum amount of Alarm Log data saved in the data storage area. Data is saved up to the set amount.
The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 5011.
Click to open the Data Storage Area Management dialog box. You can change the allocation of data storage area
memory in the Data Storage Area Management dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Data Storage Area” on
page 16-1.
13
Alarm Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-15
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
● Channel Tab
The Channel tab is used to configure the devices to monitor and the alarm detection condition.
■ Source Device Type
Selects the type of device to monitor.
Word: Uses a word device. Devices are configured per block.
Bit: Uses a bit device. Devices are configured per channel.
■ Number of Blocks
Configures the Alarm Log data in block units. The number of blocks that can be set varies based on the Source
Device Type setting and the Touch model.
Word: 0 to 128
Bit: 0 to 8
One block is composed of 16 channels. One device can be monitored for each channel. The maximum
number of devices that can be monitored is 16 for each block.
■ Reference Screen
Select the type of reference screen from the following items.
Base Screen, Popup Screen, Not Use
The reference screen is displayed when a message is selected on the Alarm List Display or the Alarm Log Display and
the key button Ref. is pressed. It is the Base Screen or Popup Screen associated with each channel.
2. Press the key button Ref. The reference screen opens
Time Message REV Time Message REV
09:15 Motor fault Up 09:15Pump 1 fault
Motor fault Up
1. Select a message displayed Dwn
Pump 1 output low
Dwn
10:02 Pump1 fault 10:02 Pump1 fault
Press Stop, check the air,
on the Alarm List Display 10:28 High pressure Del 10:28
thenHigh pressure
press Start. Del
or the Alarm Log Display 13:02 Pump 1 fault Ref. 13:02 Pump 1 faultAir Press.
Ref.
Stop Start 0000
2
kg/m
Key button Ref. Reference screen
13-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Settings
The Alarm Log settings for each channel are edited here.
No.: Displayed as (Block No.)-(Channel No.). Double clicking the cell opens the Individual Settings
dialog box.
Source: Shows the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor. Double clicking the cell opens the
Device Address Settings dialog box.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
Data: Shows whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
Double clicking the cell switches between Store and No Store.
Alarm function: Shows whether or not the alarm function is used. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable. Channels switched to Disable cannot be configured. Device states are
not monitored and Alarm Log data is not created.
NO/NC: Shows the alarm detection condition. Double clicking the cell switches between NO and NC.
Lock/Unlock: Shows whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.
Double clicking the cell switches between Lock and Unlock.
Text ID: Shows the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) to use for the message displayed when an
alarm occurs. Double clicking the cell allows you to specify the Text Manager ID number.
Text Message: Shows the text for the specified text ID. Double clicking the cell opens Text Manager.
Reference Screen No.: Shows the screen number to display when the key button Ref. is pressed. Double clicking the
cell opens the Individual Settings dialog box.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in
Reference Screen.
■ Auto
Batch registers or changes the settings for all the channels.
Click this button to open the Auto-Setup dialog box. The Auto-Setup dialog box settings are reflected in all the
channels.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 13-18.
■ Edit 13
Registers or changes, the settings for the selected channel.
Alarm Log Function
Select a channel, and then click this button to open the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings for the selected
channel are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 13-18.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-17
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Individual Settings Dialog Box
With the Auto-Setup dialog box, the Alarm Log settings for all channels are batch registered or changed.
With the Individual Settings dialog box, the Alarm Log settings for the selected channel are registered or changed.
■ Channel*1
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block No.: Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.
Channel No.: Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.
■ Block Settings
Configures Source and Data in block units.
Source: For the Auto-Setup dialog box, the device addresses are sequentially set from block number 1-
channel number 1, starting with the specified device address.
For the Individual Settings dialog box, if Source Device Type on the Channel tab is Word,
the 16 channels for the block selected at the start of the specified device address are batch
configured. For Bit, the selected channel is individually configured.
Click to open the Device Address Settings dialog box where you can edit the device address.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
Data: Selects whether or not to save Alarm Log data in the date storage area.
For the Auto-Setup dialog box, all the channels are batch configured.
For the Individual Settings dialog box, the 16 channels for the selected block are batch
configured.
Store: Alarm Log data can be displayed on the Touch or output to file.
No Store: Alarm Log data is not created, but device states are monitored.
*1 Individual Settings dialog box only
13-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Channel Settings
The trigger condition for the channel is configured here.
Alarm function: Selects whether or not to use the alarm function.
Enable: Monitors the state of the device configured for the channel and samples
the alarm information.
Disable: Does not monitor the state of the device. No Alarm Log data is created.
NO/NC: Selects the alarm detection condition.
NO: The alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 0 to 1.
NC: The alarm occurs when the monitored bit changes from 1 to 0.
Lock/Unlock: Selects whether or not to automatically recover based on the state of the monitored bit.
Lock: Even if the monitored bit returns the normal state, the alarm remains
active until the key button CHECK is pressed.
Unlock: The alarm is automatically recovered from based on the bit state when the
monitored bit returns the normal state.
Example: When NO/NC is NO
Monitored bit Unlock Lock
0 1
Alarm occurred Record occurrence time Record occurrence time
0 1
Record recovery time No operation
Record confirmation time
Press CHECK Record confirmation time
Record recovery time
The display on the Alarm List Display disappears when the alarm is recovered from, regardless of the Lock/
Unlock setting. To keep displaying the alarm until CHECK is pressed, use the Alarm Log Display. 13
Alarm Log Function
Text ID: To use text registered in Text Manager as the message to display when an alarm occurs,
select this check box and specify the Text Manager ID number to use as the message.
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) text IDs are used starting from the set ID
number.
Click to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.
Text: Shows the text for the specified text ID.
Reference Screen No.: Specifies the screen number (1 to 3000) to display when the key button Ref. is pressed.
Number of blocks x 16 (number of channels) screens are used starting from the screen
number.
This option can only be configured when Base Screen or Popup Screen is selected in
Reference Screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-19
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
● External Memory Tab
The External Memory tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory.
The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory.
\External memory folder\ALARMLOG
The default External Memory Folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1.5 Setting the External
Memory Folder” on page 26-12.
Sampled data after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data.
13-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Batch
Select this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory.
Touch
Alarm Log data Output to USB flash drive
USB flash drive
Ch.No. Message Occurrence Time Recovery Time Confirmation Time
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:00:05 12/01 12:01:10 12/01 12:01:30
1-2 Temperature abnormal 12/01/2011 12:01:09 12/01 12:02:21 12/01 12:02:55
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:02:00 12/01 12:03:11 12/01 12:05:12
1-3 Overcurrent 12/01/2011 12:30:21 12/01 12:55:15 12/01 13:00:00
1-1 Voltage drop 12/01/2011 12:45:36 12/01 12:53:12 12/01 12:57:41 Trigger Device
0 1 Alarm Log data (CSV)
Data to be output (all)
All the data is saved on the external memory when the trigger devices changes from 0 to 1. If a file with the same
name already exists on the external memory, that file is overwritten. The maximum amount of output data is the
amount configured by the data storage area.
Output stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is
stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
Trigger Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition for batch output. For the
device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
Data is output to file when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1.
File Name: Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “ALMHTO.CSV”. To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum
number is 120 characters (including the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1: Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of
the value of device configured by File Name Device to
the end of the file name for the output data. 13
Example: When the value of device configured by File
Alarm Log Function
Name Device is 123, the file name is
“ALMHTO123.CSV”.
File Name Device: Specifies the word device that is the source for the value
to add to the file name. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62. This option can only be
configured when the Add Device data to File Name
check box is selected.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-21
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Real Time
Select this check box to output data to the external memory in real time.
Touch
Alarm Log data
Time State Ch.No. Message
USB flash drive
Output to
12/01/2011 12:00:05 Occurred 1-1 Voltage drop
Data to be output USB flash drive
12/01/2011 12:01:09 Occurred 1-2 Temperature abnormal 3 minutes after
12/01/2011 12:01:10 Recovered 1-1 Voltage drop operation starts
12/01/2011 12:03:30 Confirmed 1-1 Voltage drop
12/01/2011 12:03:09 Occurred 1-3 Overcurrent Data to be output
12/01/2011 12:04:33 Recovered 1-2 Voltage drop 3 minutes after that
12/01/2011 12:05:15 Confirmed 1-2 Voltage drop
Data to be output after 3 minute interval
12/01/2011 12:08:41 Recovered 1-3 Overcurrent Alarm Log data (CSV)
another 3 minutes after operation starts
With real time output, data is saved to the external memory in three minute intervals after the Touch starts running.
When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory, data is appended to that file. If there
was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.
Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of
output data varies based on the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and the
labels.
If the interval to update the Alarm Log is shorter than real time output (the interval for writing to the external
memory), that Alarm Log is recorded up to the 1,023rd item, and then afterwards, old data is discarded in order and
replaced with new data.
Real time output stops when the file size of the Alarm Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficient
space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
• When the value of HMI Special Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time is first output in
real time to the USB flash drive, and then access to the USB flash drive is stopped.
• You can check the free space on the USB flash drive with HMI Special Data Register LSD34 to 35.
Trigger condition: Select the check boxes for the items that will trigger the output of Alarm Log data to the external
memory.
Occurrence: Alarm Log data is output to the external memory when an alarm has occurred.
Recovery: Alarm Log data is output to the external memory when the alarm is recovered
from.
Confirmation: Alarm Log data is output to the external memory when the key button CHECK was
pressed.
Month/day/year hour:minute:second is output for the trigger condition occurrence time, recovery time, and
confirmation time.
File Name: Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “ALMHTA.CSV”. To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum
number is 120 characters (including the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1: Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the
value of device configured by File Name Device to the end of
the file name for the output data.
Example: When the value of device configured by File Name
Device is 123, the file name is “ALMHTA123.CSV”.
File Name Device: Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add
to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62. This option can only be configured when the Add
Device data to File Name check box is selected.
*1 Advanced mode only
13-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
• The function to sample data operates when Alarm Log data is being saved to the external memory.
• The methods to erase Alarm Log files saved on the external memory are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory tab on the Project Settings dialog
box, select the Remove Files stored in External Memory check box and the All Alarm Log data
check box, and then configure the trigger device. Assign that trigger device to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV3, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data in
External Memory to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Alarm Log Data check box, and then
click OK.
13
Alarm Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-23
3 Alarm Log Settings Dialog Box
● Options Tab
The Options tab is used to configure whether or not the Touch’s internal buzzer operates and the screen flashing.
■ Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs
Select this check box to make a sound of the buzzer when an alarm has occurred.
■ Screen flashing when Alarm occurs
Select this check box to have the screen flash when an alarm occurs.
For monochrome LCD models, the backlight changes to red while the screen is flashing.
■ Buzzer and Screen Flashing*1
This item selects the condition for the alarm to sound the buzzer or to flash the screen. This item can only be
configured when the Buzzer when Alarm occurs or the Screen flashing when Alarms occurs is selected.
All Alarms: The buzzer is triggered and the screen flashing each time an alarm occur.
Only First Alarm: The buzzer is triggered and the screen flashing only when the first alarm*2 occurs. No beeps
will sound and no screen will flash when another alarm is already active.
■ Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing*1
Select the check box for the items that will trigger the sound of the buzzer and screen flashing to stop.
When touch everywhere on the screen: The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when you touch
anywhere on the screen.
When press CHECK/All Chk. button: The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when you touch
the key buttons CHECK or All Chk. on the Alarm Log Display.
When all Alarms are recovered: The sound of the buzzer and screen flashing stops when all the
alarms are recovered from.
• While the sound of the buzzer is sounding, System Area 1 (address+1, bit 6) is 1.
• While the screen is flashing, System Area 1 (address+1, bit 2) is 1.
For monochrome LCD models, System Area 1 (address+1, bit 3) is 0 and System Area 1 (address+1, bit
4) is 1 while the screen flashing.
• To stop the sound of the buzzer and the screen flashing when an alarm has occurred, use the following
methods.
- Press the key button Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing
- When a condition selected with the Stop the Sound of the Buzzer and Screen flashing check boxes
is satisfied
- To stop the sound of the buzzer, set System Area 1 (address+1, bit 6) to 0
- To stop the screen flashing, set System Area 1 (address+1, bit 1 to 4) to 0
However, when System Area 1 (address+1, bit 6) is 1 for a reason other than the occurrence of an alarm,
the sound of the buzzer does not stop until 0 is written. When System Area 1 (address+1, bit 1 to 4) are 1,
the alarm is triggered, however, the screen flashing doesn't stop until 0 is written into it.
• If you stop the screen flashing, the backlight turns off when System Area 1 (address+1, bit 0), and the
backlight turns on when it is 1.
*1 Advanced mode only
*2 The first alarm that has occurred in a state where no alarms are active
13-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
4.1 Displaying Saved Data with the Alarm Log Display
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of
Blocks.
3 Select the channel number to register, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
13
Alarm Log Function
4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select Store under Data.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-25
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
5 Select Enable under Alarm function, configure NO/NC and Lock/Unlock, and then click OK.
6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 to register all the channels.
7 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
8 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm Log Display.
9 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm Log Display.
10 Double-click the dropped Alarm Log Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
11 Change the settings on each tab as necessary.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “7.3 Properties of Alarm Log Display Dialog Box” on page 9-101.
12 Click OK.
The Properties of Alarm Log Display dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Touch to display saved data with the Alarm Log Display.
13-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
4.2 Displaying Registered Messages with the Alarm List Display According to the Active Alarm
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of Blocks.
3 Select the channel number to register a message to, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select No Store under Data.
13
Alarm Log Function
5 Select Enable under Alarm function and configure NO/NC and Lock/Unlock.
6 Select the Text ID check box, and then click .
Text Manager opens.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-27
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
7 Enter the message in Text.
8 Click Select.
9 Click OK in the Individual Settings dialog box.
The registered message is displayed in Settings of the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 to register messages for all the channels.
The messages to use can be registered in advance in Text Manager.
11 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
13-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
12 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Alarm List Display.
13 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Alarm List Display.
14 Double-click the dropped Alarm List Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
15 On the General tab, under Message Settings, select Use Alarm Log Settings.
13
Alarm Log Function
16 Configure the other settings and the settings on each tab as necessary.
For details, refer to Chapter 9 “6.3 Properties of Alarm List Display Dialog Box” on page 9-85.
17 Click OK.
The Properties of Alarm List Display dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Touch to display registered messages with the Alarm List Display according to the
active alarm.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-29
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
4.3 Make a Sound of the Buzzer and Flash the Screen when an Alarm has Occurred
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the type of device to monitor under Source Device Type on the Channel tab and specify Number of
Blocks.
3 Select the channel number to register a message to, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
4 Specify the device to monitor in Source and select Store under Data.
5 Select Enable under Alarm function, configure NO/NC and Lock/Unlock, and then click OK.
13-30 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
6 Click the Options tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
7 Select the Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs check box to make a sound of the buzzer when an alarm has
occurred.
8 Select the Screen flashing when Alarm occurs check box to have the screen flashing when an alarm has
occurred.
9 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the settings to make a sound of the buzzer and the screen flashing when an alarm has
occurred.
13
Alarm Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-31
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
4.4 Saving Data as a CSV File
● Saving Data as a CSV File
The Alarm Log data can be saved to the external memory as a CSV file.
The procedure to save the data is as follows.
On the WindO/I-NV3 System Setup tab, click Alarm Log to display the Alarm Log Settings dialog box. Select an
output method check box on the External Memory tab and configure the items. The data can be saved to the
External Memory Folder on the external memory. For details, refer to “External Memory Tab” on page 13-20.
Files saved to external memory are read using WindO/I-NV3.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and then click Data in external memory
to display the Upload from external memory dialog box. Select the Alarm Log Data check box, specify the
location to save the files in Path, and then click OK to be able to save the files in the specified folder.
● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure for files output with batch output and real time output is different.
■ Batch
Batch output shows the recovery and confirmation time for an alarm that has occurred on a single line.
The data structure of files output with batch output is as follows. Bold items are replaced by the Alarm Log settings,
sampled data, project file name, and WindO/I-NV3 version.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number"
Headers "File Type","Log type"
Blank row
Title row "Ch.No.","Message","Occurrence Time","Recovery Time","Confirmation Time"
" Channel number","Message"," MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS"," MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS",
" MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS"
Data row
·
·
·
Output example Data size of each row
"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V1.00" - 41 bytes
"File Type","Alarm Log Data" - 30 bytes
- 2 bytes
"Ch.No.","Message","Occurrence Time","Recovery Time","Confirmation Time" - 74 bytes
" 1-0","Voltage drop"," 08/11/2011 14:46:12"," 08/11 14:46:13"," 08/11 14:46:16" - 82 bytes
" 1-1","Temperature abnormal"," 08/11/2011 14:47:18"," 08/11 14:47:19", " 08/11 14:47:20" - 90 bytes
·
·
·
13-32 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
■ Real Time
Real time output displays the alarm state and the time the alarm became that state on a single line each time an
alarm occurs, is recovered from, or is confirmed.
The data structure of files output with real time output is as follows. Bold items are replaced by the Alarm Log
settings, sampled data, project file name, and WindO/I-NV3 version.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number"
Headers "File Type","Log type"
Blank row
Title row "Time","State","Ch.No.","Message"
" MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS","State"," Channel number","Message"
Data row ·
·
·
Output example Data size of each row
"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V1.00" - 41 bytes
"File Type","Alarm Log Data" - 30 bytes
- 2 bytes
"Time","State","Ch.No.","Message" - 35 bytes
" 08/11/2011 14:46:12","Occurred"," 1-0","Voltage drop" - 57 bytes
" 08/11/2011 14:46:13","Recovered"," 1-0","Voltage drop" - 58 bytes
" 08/11/2011 14:46:16","Confirmed"," 1-0","Voltage drop" - 58 bytes
" 08/11/2011 14:47:18","Occurred"," 1-1","Temperature abnormal" - 65 bytes
·
·
·
• The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for full-width characters, one byte for half-width
characters, and two bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• A space is inserted before the date in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project Settings, on
the Project Details tab, in Language. 13
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Alarm Log Function
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 13-33
4 Using Data and Detected Alarms
13-34 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 14 Data Log Function
This chapter describes how to configure the Data Log function and its operation on the Touch.
1 Overview
1.1 How the Data Log Function is Used
The Data Log function samples values of devices with the Touch using the configured sampling condition. The
sampled values of devices are saved in internal memory along with the sampling time.
The Data Log function can perform the following functions.
• Sample values of devices at a fixed time interval
Touch
External device
12 : 00 D100 : 0
12 : 05 D100 : 55
12 : 10 D100 : 123
• Sample values of devices when a value of device changes
Touch
External device
D100 : 123
0 1
• Output Data Log data to the external memory
Touch
Output to USB flash drive
USB flash drive 14
Data Log data (CSV) Data Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-1
1 Overview
• Copy Data Log data to internal devices
Data Log data
Sampling Time Data001
01/01/2011 12:00:30 120
01/01/2011 12:01:30 121
01/01/2011 12:02:30 122
Touch
01/01/2011 12:03:30 123
External device 01/01/2011 12:04:30 124
01/01/2011 12:05:30 125
126 01/01/2011 12:06:30 126
125 Copy
124
LDR10 : 126
LDR11 : 125
LDR12 : 124
(Internal device)
14-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.2 Sampling Values of Devices
The Touch samples target values of devices at a fixed time interval or when a value of device changes.
● Sampling Values of Devices at a Fixed Time Interval
When sampling values of devices (D100 to D102) at a 5 minute interval (Time: 300 seconds) with the data storage
amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the Touch samples Data Log data as follows.
Touch
External device
12 : 05 : 00 D100 D101 D102
20 80 2
12 : 10 : 00
10 70 3
12 : 15 : 00
30 90 1
1 5 minutes after data sampling starts, the Touch stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
2 10 minutes after data sampling starts, the Touch stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
3 15 minutes after data sampling starts, the Touch stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
Values of Devices Data stored on the Touch
Value Value
Time Sampling Time
D100 D101 D102 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3
1
01/01/2011 12:01:00 10 70 3 01/01/2011 12:05:00 20 80 2
2
01/01/2011 12:02:00 20 80 2 01/01/2011 12:10:00 10 70 3
3
01/01/2011 12:03:00 30 90 1 01/01/2011 12:15:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:04:00 10 70 3
01/01/2011 12:05:00 20 80 2
01/01/2011 12:06:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:07:00 10 70 3
01/01/2011 12:08:00 20 80 2
01/01/2011 12:09:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:10:00 10 70 3
01/01/2011 12:11:00 20 80 2
01/01/2011 12:12:00 30 90 1 14
01/01/2011 12:13:00 10 70 3
Data Log Function
01/01/2011 12:14:00 20 80 2
01/01/2011 12:15:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:16:00 10 70 3
4 20 minutes after data sampling starts, the Touch stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
Since the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the oldest data is deleted in order to make room
for the newest data.
Values of Devices Data stored on the Touch
Value Value
Time Sampling Time
D100 D101 D102 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
Deleted
01/01/2011 12:17:00 40 60 2 01/01/2011 12:10:00 10 70 3
01/01/2011 12:18:00 30 60 1 01/01/2011 12:15:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:19:00 10 90 3 4 01/01/2011 12:20:00 20 80 2
01/01/2011 12:20:00 20 80 2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-3
1 Overview
● Sampling Values of Devices when Value of Device Changes
When sampling values of devices (D100 to D102), when a bit device configured as the sampling condition switches
from 0 to 1 and the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the Touch samples Data Log data as
follows.
Touch
External device
D100 D101 D102
20 80 2
0 1
1 When data sampling starts and the bit device configured as the sampling condition switches from 0 to 1, the Touch
stores the values for devices D100 to D102.
2 When the sampling condition device switches from 0 to 1 the second time, the Touch stores the values for devices
D100 to D102.
3 When the sampling condition device switches from 0 to 1 the third time, the Touch stores the values for devices D100
to D102.
Values of Devices Data stored on the Touch
Value Value
Time Sampling Time
D100 D101 D102 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3
1
01/01/2011 12:01:00 10 70 3 01/01/2011 12:05:00 20 80 2
2
01/01/2011 12:02:00 20 80 2 01/01/2011 12:13:00 10 70 3
3
01/01/2011 12:03:00 30 90 1 01/01/2011 12:15:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:04:00 10 70 3
0 1
01/01/2011 12:05:00 20 80 2
01/01/2011 12:06:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:07:00 10 70 3
01/01/2011 12:08:00 20 80 2
01/01/2011 12:09:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:10:00 10 70 3
01/01/2011 12:11:00 20 80 2
01/01/2011 12:12:00 30 90 1
0 1
01/01/2011 12:13:00 10 70 3
01/01/2011 12:14:00 20 80 2
0 1
01/01/2011 12:15:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:16:00 10 70 3
4 When the sampling condition device switches from 0 to 1 the fourth time, the Touch stores the values for devices
D100 to D102.
Since the data storage amount in the data storage area is set to 3, the oldest data is deleted in order to make room
for the newest data.
Values of Devices Data stored on the Touch
Value Value
Time Sampling Time
D100 D101 D102 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
·
· Deleted
01/01/2011 12:17:00 40 60 2 01/01/2011 12:13:00 10 70 3
01/01/2011 12:18:00 30 60 1 01/01/2011 12:15:00 30 90 1
01/01/2011 12:19:00 10 90 3 4 01/01/2011 12:20:00 20 80 2
0 1
01/01/2011 12:20:00 20 80 2
14-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.3 Data Configuration
The sampled data is composed of the sampling time, values of devices, and labels.
The relationship between the Data Log function settings and the sampled data is as follows.
Data Log settings
Data No. 1 settings
Data No. 2 settings
Data No. 3 settings
4. Sampling time label 3. Amount of data
Sampled data
Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003 5. Data label
01/01/2011 12:00:00 20 120 201
01/01/2011 12:10:00 21 121 204
01/01/2011 12:20:00 22 122 206
2. Data storage amount 01/01/2011 12:30:00 23 123 206 14
01/01/2011 12:40:00 24 124 210
1. Channel 1 to 20 Data Log Function
Data No. 3: Value of device
Time the value of device was sampled Data No. 2: Value of device
Data No. 1: Value of device
1. Channel The sampled data is in channel units. A maximum of 20 channels can be configured.
2. Data storage amount: The amount of sampled data to save. The maximum amount that can be configured per
device differs according to the model. For details, refer to “Data Storage Amount” on
page 14-6.
3. Amount of data: The amount of data configured for a channel. The maximum amount of data that can
be configured is 128. The maximum number of devices that can be configured to
sample values is 128 total for all channels.
For example, when the amount of data for channel 1 is set to 128, this is the maximum
amount total for all channels, so channel 2 through 20 cannot be configured.
4. Sampling time label: When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this label is displayed in the label row
for the sampling time column.
5. Data label: When the sampled data is output as a CSV file, this label is displayed in the label row
for the data number columns.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-5
1 Overview
1.4 Saving and Deleting Data
● Saving Data
The sampled values of devices, along with the sampling time, are all saved in the data storage area.
Data Log data
Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003
01/01/2011 12:00:00 20 120 201
01/01/2011 12:10:00 21 121 204
Touch
01/01/2011 12:20:00 22 122 206
External device 01/01/2011 12:30:00 23 123 206
01/01/2011 12:40:00 24 124 210
Sample values of devices
01/01/2011 12:50:00 25 125 218
If the saved data exceeds the Data Log data storage amount per device, the old data is deleted and the new data is saved.
New data
Oldest data
(delete)
Data Log data storage amount per device
When the backup battery is depleted, the data in the Data Log is erased when the Touch is turned off.
Data Storage Amount
When saving the sampled data to the data storage area, set the data storage amount per device. The amount of data
that can be saved in the data storage area is calculated from the configured data storage amount per device and data
amount for each channel.
The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 12,528.
● Deleting Data
The method to delete sampled data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the Online tab in WindO/I-NV3, click the arrow under Clear, and then click All or Data Log Data. For details,
refer to Chapter 23 “4 Clear” on page 23-22.
• Press Main Menu on the Top Page in the System Mode, Initial Setting, Initialize, Data Log in order.
14-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.5 Using the Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Data Log data
Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003
01/01/2011 12:00:00 20 120 201
01/01/2011 12:10:00 21 121 204
01/01/2011 12:20:00 22 122 206
01/01/2011 12:30:00 23 123 206
01/01/2011 12:40:00 24 124 210
To use with the Touch To use with devices other than the Touch
• Display the data in the Line Chart • Save to and read from an external memory
Configure the data channel numbers and data Data Log data is saved in a CSV file format into the
numbers and display the data in the Line Chart. external memory which it can be read on your
For details, refer to “4.1 Display the Data in the Line computer.
Chart” on page 14-25. For details, refer to “4.3 Saving Data as a CSV File”
on page 14-36.
Book1
Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003 Data004
• Display the data with the Numerical Input or the
Data Log data
Numerical Display (CSV)
Copy the data to an internal device and display it with
the Numerical Input or the Numerical Display.
For details, refer to “4.2 Displaying Data as Numerical
14
Values” on page 14-27.
Data001 24 Data Log Function
Data002 124
Data003 210
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-7
2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure
2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Data Log function.
2.1 Configuring the Sampling Condition and Devices for Sampling Data
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Log.
The Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the channel number to register the Data Log settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
14-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure
3 On the General tab, under Log function, select Enable.
4 Specify the device for sampling data in Source.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
5 Select the condition for sampling data under Sampling Method.
■ Fixed Period
Samples the value of source device at a fixed interval. If Fixed Period is selected, specify Time in seconds.
■ Event Bit
Samples the value of source device each time the monitored bit device or bit of the word device changes from 0 to 1.
If Event Bit is selected, specify the device to monitor as the condition for sampling data in Device.
14
Data Log Function
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Event Word
Samples the value of source device each time the value of monitored word device changes. Specify the word device
to monitor as the condition for sampling data in Device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-9
2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure
6 Click the Data tab.
The channel number selected on the General tab is displayed in Channel No.
7 In Number of Data, specify the number of devices to sample starting with the source device configured on the
General tab.
The sequential devices from the starting address for the number of configured devices are displayed in Settings.
8 Enter the label to display in the sampling time column when the data is output as CSV under Sampling Time, in Label.
To use text registered in Text Manager, select the Use Text Manager check box and specify the ID number of the
text to use as the label.
Click to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.
9 Configure the details in Settings.
To batch register all the data settings for all data numbers, click Auto.
To individually register the data settings for each data number, select a data number, and then click Edit.
The dialog box that corresponds to each button is displayed.
An example when Edit is clicked is described here.
10 Check that the data number selected under Settings in Data No. is displayed.
11 Select the display type for the sampled value of device with Display Type.
The display type selected here is the display type for the numerical values when the data is output as CSV.
12 Select the data type for the sampled value of device with Data Type.
The data type selected here is the data type for the numerical values when the data is output as CSV.
14-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Data Log Function Configuration Procedure
13 Enter the text to display in the data label in Label.
The text entered here is the label row for the data number columns when the data is output as CSV.
If you selected the Use Text Manager check box on the Data tab, specify the ID number for the text to use in the
label.
14 Click OK to close the Data Settings dialog box.
To individually register Data Log settings on the Individual Settings dialog box, repeat steps 10 through 14.
15 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
16 Repeat steps 2 through 15 to register Data Log settings for all of the channel numbers to use.
17 Specify the Data Log data storage amount per device.
Click for Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog
box.
Increase the number for Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device.
Click OK to close the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.
14
Data Log Function
18 Click OK.
The Data Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the sampling conditions and devices for sampling data.
Next, configure the functions to execute using sampled data.
“4.1 Display the Data in the Line Chart” on page 14-25
“4.2 Displaying Data as Numerical Values” on page 14-27
“4.3 Saving Data as a CSV File” on page 14-36
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-11
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
This section describes the items and buttons on the Data Log Settings dialog box and the Individual Settings dialog box.
3.1 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
All the devices to sample values from and their sampling conditions are collectively managed in the Data Log Settings
dialog box.
■ Settings
Edits the Data Log settings for each channel.
Channel No.: Shows the channel number. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box
where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on
page 14-14.
Log function: Shows whether or not the Data Log function is used. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable. If switched to Disable, that channel’s settings all return to the default
settings.
Source: Specifies the device to sample values from. Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address
Settings dialog box where you can edit the device address. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62. This option can only
be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.
The size of the data to sample is 16 bits.
Sampling Method: Shows the condition for sampling data. Double clicking the cell switches between Fixed Period,
Event Bit, and Event Word. This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.
Range: Shows the time in seconds (1 to 9999) to sample data in a fixed interval when Fixed Period is
selected in Sampling Method. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box
where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-
14.
Shows the device that is the condition for sampling data when Event Bit or Event Word is
selected in Sampling Method. Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings
dialog box where you can edit the device address. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Monitor: Shows the write destination device for the amount of data when monitoring the amount of
sampled data. Shows No when not monitoring. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual
Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 14-14. This option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log
Function.
Batch: Shows the trigger device that triggers batch output when batch outputting all the data saved in
the data storage area to the external memory. Shows No when there is no batch output. Double
clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings. For
details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-14.
14-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
Real Time: Shows whether or not to perform real time output. Double clicking the cell switches between
Yes and No. Data is output to the external memory in 3 minute intervals for Yes channels. This
option can only be set when Enable is selected in Log Function.
No. of Data*1: Shows the number of devices to sample in a channel. Double clicking the cell displays the
Individual Settings dialog box where you can edit the settings. For details, refer to “3.2
Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-14. This option can only be set when Enable is
selected in Log Function.
■ Edit
Registers or changes the settings for the selected channel number.
Select a channel number, and then click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings for the
selected channel are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-14.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
■ Clear Log Data
Select this check box to erase the data saved in the data storage area.
(Trigger device): Specifies the bit device that triggers the erasure of the data. The data for all channels is erased
when the value of the configured device changes from 0 to 1. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device
Shows the maximum amount of data storage per device for Data Log data saved in the data storage area. If data is
saved up the maximum amount and then the maximum is exceeded, the old data is deleted and the new data is saved.
The default is 0.
Click to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog box where you can change the allocation of data
storage area memory. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Data Storage Area” on page 16-1.
14
Data Log Function
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-13
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box
Use the Individual Settings dialog box to register or edit the Data Log settings for the selected channel.
● General Tab
The General tab is used to configure the source devices for sampling data and the sampling conditions.
■ Channel No.
Specifies the channel number for sampling data (1 to 20).
■ Log function
Selects whether or not to use the Data Log function.
Enable: Samples values of devices and saves the data along with the sampling time.
Disable: Does not sample values of devices.
■ Source
Specifies the word device that is the source for sampling data.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Sampling Method
Sets the condition for sampling values of devices.
Fixed Period: Samples the value of source device at a fixed interval.
Time (sec): Specifies the time in seconds (1 to 9999).
This option can only be set when Fixed Period is selected.
Event Bit: Samples the value of source device each time the bit device or bit of the word device changes from
0 to 1.
Event Word: Samples the value of source device each time the value of word device changes.
Device: Specifies the word device that triggers sampling data.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be set when Event Bit or Event Word is selected.
14-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Monitor Number of Stored Data
Select this check box to monitor the number of times values of devices are sampled. The sampling count is written to
the specified device.
(Destination Device): Specifies the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
Report when Sampling Count has reached or exceeded Threshold*3:
Writes 1 in the report device when the current sampling count reaches or
exceeds the set threshold.
Threshold*1: Specifies the sampling count (1 to 12,528) that is the basis for reporting.
Report Device*1: Specifies the destination bit device or the destination bit of the word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Monitor % Space Used in Data Storage Area
Select this check box to monitor the usage of the allocated data storage area as the save destination for Data Log
data. The usage is calculated from the data storage amount allocated to the data storage area and the amount of
saved data, and then written to the specified device.
Usage = Current amount of Data Log data ÷ Data Log data storage amount per device (omits values after the decimal point)
(Destination Device): Specifies the destination word device to write the current usage of the amount of Data Log data storage.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
Report when % Space Used has reached or exceeded Threshold*1:
Writes 1 in the report device when the current usage reaches or exceeds the
set threshold.
Threshold*1: Specifies the usage (1 to 100) that is the basis for reporting.
Report Device*1: Specifies the destination bit device or the destination bit of the word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
14
Data Log Function
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-15
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
● External Memory Tab
The External Memory tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory.
The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory.
\External memory folder\DATALOG
The default External Memory Folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1.5 Setting the External
Memory Folder” on page 26-12.
Data that is sampled after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data.
14-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Batch
Select this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory.
Touch
Data Log data Output to USB flash drive
USB flash drive
Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003
01/01/2011 12:00:30 20 120 201
01/01/2011 12:01:30 21 121 204
01/01/2011 12:02:30 22 122 206
Data to be output
01/01/2011 12:03:30 23 123 206
(all)
01/01/2011 12:04:30 24 124 210
01/01/2011 12:05:30 25 125 210 Trigger Device
01/01/2011 12:06:30 26 126 218 0 1 Data Log data (CSV)
All the data is saved on the external memory when the trigger devices changes from 0 to 1. If a file with the same
name already exists on the external memory, that file is overwritten. The maximum amount of output data is the
amount configured by the data storage area or 1,024.
Output stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is
stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
Trigger Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device that triggers batch output. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-
62.
Data is output to file when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1.
File Name: Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “LOGOn.CSV”. (n: Data log channel number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters
(including the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1: Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the
value of device configured by File Name Device to the
end of file name for the output data.
Example: When the channel number is 1 and the value of
14
device configured by File Name Device is 123,
Data Log Function
the file name is “LOGO01123.CSV”.
File Name Device: Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to
add to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62. This option can only be configured
when the Add Device data to File Name check box is
selected.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-17
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Real Time
Select this check box to output data to the external memory in real time.
Touch
Data Log data Output to USB flash drive
USB flash drive
Sampling Time Data001 Data002 Data003
01/01/2011 12:00:30 20 120 201
Data to be output
01/01/2011 12:01:30 21 121 204 3 minutes after
01/01/2011 12:02:30 22 122 206
operation starts
01/01/2011 12:03:30 23 123 206
Data to be output
01/01/2011 12:04:30 24 124 210
3 minutes after that
01/01/2011 12:05:30 25 125 210
Data to be output 3 minute interval
01/01/2011 12:06:30 26 126 218 after another after operation Data Log data (CSV)
3 minutes starts
With real time output, data is saved to the external memory in three minute intervals after the Touch starts running.
When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory, data is appended to that file. If there
was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.
Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of output
data differs according to the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and the labels.
If the sampling interval is shorter than real time output (the interval for writing to the external memory), that Data
Log is recorded up to the data storage amount - 1, and then afterwards, old data is discarded in order and replaced
with new data.
Real time output stops when the file size of the Data Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficient
space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register
LSD33.
• When the value of HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time is first
output in real time to the USB flash drive, and then access to the USB flash drive is stopped.
• The text font configured for the starting device is output as the label font.
• You can check the free space on the USB flash drive with HMI Special Data Registers LSD34 to 35.
File Name: Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “LOGAn.CSV”. (n: Data log channel number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including
the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1: Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the
value of device configured by File Name Device to the end of
the file name for the output data.
Example: When the channel number is 1 and the value of
device configured by File Name Device is 123, the
file name is “LOGA01123.CSV”.
File Name Device: Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add
to the file name. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62. This option can only be configured when the Add
Device data to File Name check box is selected.
• The function to sample data operates when Data Log data is being saved to the external memory.
• The methods to erase Data Log files saved on the external memory are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory tab on the Project Settings dialog
box, select the Remove Files and the All Data Log files check boxes, and then configure the trigger
device. Assign that trigger device to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV3, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data in
External Memory to display the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Data Log Data check box, and then
click OK.
*1 Advanced mode only
14-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
● Data Tab
The Data tab is used to configure the data to sample.
■ Channel No.
Shows the selected channel number.
■ Number of Data
Specifies the number of devices (1 to 128) for sampling data. Samples values of devices in this amount starting with
the device configured as the source device on the General tab. 14
■ Use Text Manager
Data Log Function
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for labels when outputting data as CSV.
■ Label
Sampling Time: Specifies the label to display in the sampling time column when outputting data as CSV.
Text ID Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when text registered in Text
Manager are used for labels.
Click to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.
This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.
(Text) Enter the text to display in the label. The maximum number is 40 characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared. The
registered text is displayed when a text ID is specified.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-19
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Settings
Settings is used to configure the details of the data to sample for each data number in the selected channel.
Data No.: Shows the data numbers for the amount of data specified by Number of Data. Double clicking
the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box. The data number cannot be edited. For details, refer
to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.
Device: Shows the device as sequential numbers starting with the source device specified on the General
tab. Double clicking the cell displays the Data Settings dialog box. The device cannot be edited. For
details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.
Display Type: Shows the display type for numerical values when data is output as CSV. Double clicking the cell
displays the Data Settings dialog box where you can edit the data settings. For details, refer to
“Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.
Data Type: Shows the data type for numerical values when data is output as CSV. Double clicking the cell
displays the Data Settings dialog box where you can edit the data settings. For details, refer to
“Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.
Text ID: Shows the Text Manager ID number when text registered in Text Manager is used for labels.
Double clicking the cell opens Text Manager where you can edit the text.
Text ID is only displayed when you select the Use Text Manager check box.
Label: Shows the text to display as labels when data is output as CSV. Double clicking the cell allows you
to edit the label. The maximum number is 40 characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
The default label is “Data” and the data number.
Example: Data001
■ Auto
Batch registers or changes the settings for all the data.
Click this button to display the Auto-Setup dialog box. The details configured on the Auto-Setup dialog box are
registered for all the data.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.
■ Edit
Registers or changes the settings for the selected data.
Select the data, and then click this button to display the Data Settings dialog box. The details configured on the Data
Settings dialog box are registered or changed for the selected data.
For details, refer to “Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 14-21.
14-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
Auto-Setup Dialog Box and Data Settings Dialog Box
With the Auto-Setup dialog box, all the data for the selected channel is batch registered or changed.
With the Data Settings dialog box, the selected data for the selected channel is registered or changed.
Data No.: Displays 1 when the Auto-Setup dialog box was displayed by clicking Auto.
Displays the data number for the selected data when the Data Settings dialog box was displayed
by clicking Edit.
Display Type: Select the display type as Decimal or Hexadecimal for numerical values when data is output as
CSV.
Data Type: Select the data type for numerical values when data is output as CSV. For details, refer to Chapter
2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
When float32 is selected, the maximum number of digits for the integer part is 10 and the
number of digits for the decimal part is 5.
Text ID: Specifies the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when text registered in Text Manager are
used for labels. For the Auto-Setup dialog box, Text ID is automatically configured sequentially
starting with the specified text ID.
Click to open Text Manager where you can edit the text.
Text ID can only be configured when you select the Use Text Manager check box.
Label: Enter the text to display as the label when data is output as CSV. The maximum number is 40
characters.
The default label is Data+number.
Example: Data001
This item is only displayed on the Data Settings dialog box when the Use Text Manager check
box is cleared.
14
Data Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-21
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
● Options Tab
The Options tab only appears in Advanced mode. To switch to Advanced mode, click Advanced on the Data Log
Settings dialog box.
To display the data saved in the data storage area as numerical values on the Touch, copy this data to the specified
internal device.
■ Copy Data Log Data
Select this check box to copy data to a device.
Destination Device: Specifies the destination device for copied data. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
14-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Starting Point
Selects the starting point of the data to copy.
Newest Data: Sets the starting point as the newest data.
Oldest Data: Sets the starting point as the oldest data.
Specify by Value of Device: Specifies which data from the oldest data to set as the starting point.
Specifies the source word device. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: 1. For Newest Data, the starting point is the newest sampling time data.
2. For Oldest Data, the starting point is the oldest sampling time data.
3. For Specify by Value of Device and source device: 3, the starting point is the third item of data from
the oldest sampling time data.
Data Log data
Sampling Time Value
2. Oldest Data read starting point 12/18/2011 17:44:10 20
12/18/2011 18:34:10 21
3. Specify by Value of Device read starting point (source device: 3) 12/19/2011 19:24:43 22
12/19/2011 20:01:54 24
12/19/2011 21:39:21 26
1. Newest Data read starting point 12/20/2011 05:57:06 28
■ Number of Data
Selects the specification method for the amount of data to copy.
Value: Uses a constant.
Specifies the amount to copy (1 to 64).
Device: Uses a word device.
Specifies the source word device. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
The maximum amount of data that can be copied to the internal device is 64.
■ Stored Order of Data 14
Selects the order to copy data.
Data Log Function
From Newest to Oldest: Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the newest data first.
From Oldest to Newest: Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the oldest data first.
Example: When Starting Point is Newest Data and Number of Data is 3, data is copied in the following order
starting from device LDR10 configured in Destination Device.
Data Log data
Sampling Time Value Destination Device Value
12/18/2011 17:44:10 20 Configured device LDR10 28 Copy from newest data
: : LDR11 26
12/19/2011 19:24:43 22 LDR12 24
12/19/2011 20:01:54 24
Newest data 12/19/2011 21:39:21 26
read starting point 12/20/2011 05:57:06 28
Destination Device Value
Amount of data: 3 Configured device LDR10 24 Copy from oldest data
LDR11 26
LDR12 28
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-23
3 Data Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Target Data
Selects the data to copy from the Data Log data.
Sampling Time: Select this check box to copy the sampling time data from the Data Log data. When this check
box is selected, values of devices are copied in order from the data for data number 1.
Value of Device: Select this check box to copy the value of device from the Data Log data.
Data No.: Selects the specification method for the data number of the value to copy.
Value: Uses a constant.
Device: Uses a word device.
Start No.: Of the data to copy, specifies the data number of the data to start
copying.
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device, specify the source device. You can only
specify an internal device. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
When the Sampling Time check box is selected, the data number
is 1. This cannot be changed.
End No.: Of the data to copy, specifies the data number of the data to end
copying.
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device, specify the source device. You can only
specify an internal device. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
Example: When Start No. is 2 and End No. is 4, data 2 to 4 is the copy target.
Start No. End No.
Data No.: 1 2 3 4 5
Sampling Time Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5
10/01/2011 12:34:56 100 60 240 60 240
10/02/2011 03:45:12 200 80 450 80 450
Copy target
■ Trigger Condition
Selects the condition to start copying.
Always: Copies each time the data is updated.
Device: Specifies the device that triggers the start of copying the data. Copies the data when the value
of the specified device changes from 0 to 1.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
14-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
4 Using the Data
4.1 Display the Data in the Line Chart
You can display the sampled data in the Line Chart.
1 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.
2 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart.
3 Double-click the dropped Line Chart and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
4 On the General tab, select Chart Type as Log Trend (Normal) or Log Trend (Pen Recorder).
14
Data Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-25
4 Using the Data
5 Click the Pen (Log) tab.
6 Specify Channel No. and Data No. for the data to display in the chart.
Click Data Log Settings to display the Data Log Settings dialog box where you can configure the channel
while checking the data to display. Select Channel No. under Settings, and then click OK to close the
Data Settings dialog box. Channel No. reflects the selected channel number.
7 Select Line Type, Line Size, and Line Color.
8 Click Set.
The data to display in the chart is registered in the channel number (Ch1 to Ch20) for the chart selected in Settings.
9 Repeat steps 6 through 8 to register the data to display in the chart.
10 Click OK.
The Properties dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the Line Chart.
14-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
4.2 Displaying Data as Numerical Values
You can display data in the Numerical Display by copying data saved in the data storage area to an internal device
according to the conditions configured with the Options tab on the Individual Settings dialog box.
● Copying Data to Internal Devices
Copying Sampling Time Data
Sampling time data is copied as a BCD value to the six sequential devices starting with the device configured by
Destination Device.
The sampling time data is copied in year, month, day, hour, minute, second order regardless of the Stored Order of
Data setting.
■ Example
When the sampling time 10/01/2011 12:01:30 is copied to the destination device
Data Log data
Sampling Time Value Destination Device Value
10/01/2011 12:01:30 20 Configured device LDR10 2011 Year
LDR11 10 Month
LDR12 1 Day
LDR13 12 Hour
LDR14 1 Minute
LDR15 30 Second
Data Read Start Position and Copy Order of Data to the Destination Device
The data to copy and the order differs according to the Starting Point and the Stored Order for Data settings.
■ Example 1
Copying three items of the newest data in the Data Log to the destination device
Item Setting
Destination Device LDR10
Starting Point Newest Data
Number of Data 3
Stored Order of Data From Newest to Oldest
14
Data Log Function
Data Log data
Sampling Time Value Destination Device Value
12/18/2011 17:44:10 20 Configured device LDR10 28 Copy from newest data
: : LDR11 26
12/19/2011 19:24:43 22 LDR12 24
12/19/2011 20:01:54 24
Newest data 12/19/2011 21:39:21 26
read starting point 12/20/2011 05:57:06 28
Amount of data: 3
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-27
4 Using the Data
■ Example 2
Copying three items of the newest data in the Data Log in order from the oldest to the destination device
Item Setting
Destination Device LDR10
Starting Point Newest Data
Number of Data 3
Stored Order of Data From Oldest to Newest
Data Log data
Sampling Time Value Destination Device Value
12/18/2011 17:44:10 20 Configured device LDR10 24 Copy from oldest data
: : LDR11 26
12/19/2011 19:24:43 22 LDR12 28
12/19/2011 20:01:54 24
Newest data 12/19/2011 21:39:21 26
read starting point 12/20/2011 05:57:06 28
Amount of data: 3
■ Example 3
Setting the starting point to the fourth item of the oldest data in the Data Log and copying three items of data from
the newest to the destination device
Item Setting
Destination Device LDR10
Starting Point Specify by Value of Device (value is 4)
Number of Data 3
Stored Order of Data From Newest to Oldest
Data Log data
Sampling Time Value Destination Device Value
12/18/2011 17:44:10 20 Configured device LDR10 28 Copy from newest data
Specify by Value of Device 12/19/2011 07:24:09 21 LDR11 26
read starting point 12/19/2011 19:24:43 22 LDR12 24
(Source device: 4) 12/19/2011 20:01:54 24
12/19/2011 21:39:21 26
12/20/2011 05:57:06 28
12/20/2011 15:26:17 29
12/21/2011 06:46:57 31
Amount of data: 3
14-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
Copying Multiple Items of Data
When copying multiple items of data, first all the sampling times for the data are copied in order starting with the
device configured as the destination device, then the values of devices for all the data are copied in order.
For example, data is copied in this order: first sampling time second sampling time ... first data 1 value of
device first data 2 value of device second data 1 value of device second data 2 value of device and so on.
■ Example 1: When the amount of data is greater than the data to copy
When the sampling time and values of devices from data start number 1 to end number 3 are copied to the
destination device as two items of data
Item Setting
Destination Device LDR10
Starting Point Newest Data
Number of Data 2
Stored Order of Data From Oldest to Newest
Sampling Time, Value of Device
Target Data
Data No.: Start No. 1, End No. 3
Data Log data
Sampling Time Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 Data 5
10/01/2011 12:00:30 10 40 100 20 120
1. 10/01/2011 12:34:56 100 60 240 30 200
10/02/2011 03:45:12 200 80 450 70 400 Newest Data read starting point
2.
3. 4. 5.
Destination Device Value
Configured device LDR10 2011 Copy from oldest data
LDR11 10
LDR12 01
1. LDR13 12 First sampling time
LDR14 34
LDR15 56
LDR16 2011
LDR17 10
LDR18 02
2. LDR19 03
Second sampling time 14
LDR20 45
Data Log Function
LDR21 12
LDR22 100 First data 1 value
LDR23 200 Second data 1 value
3.
LDR24 60 First data 2 value
LDR25 80 Second data 2 value
4.
LDR26 240 First data 3 value
LDR27 450 Second data 3 value
5.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-29
4 Using the Data
■ Example 2: When the amount of data is less than the data to copy
When the sampling time and values of devices from data start number 1 to end number 3 are copied to the
destination device as two items of data
Item Setting
Destination Device LDR10
Starting Point Newest Data
Number of Data 2
Stored Order of Data From Oldest to Newest
Sampling Time, Value of Device
Target Data
Data No.: Start No. 1, End No. 3
Data Log data
Sampling Time Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 (no data)
10/01/2011 12:00:30 10 40
1. 10/01/2011 12:34:56 100 60
2. 10/02/2011 03:45:12 200 80 Newest Data read starting point
3. 4.
Destination Device Value
Configured device LDR10 2011 Copy from oldest data
LDR11 10
LDR12 01
1. LDR13 12 First sampling time
LDR14 34
LDR15 56
LDR16 2011
LDR17 10
LDR18 02
Second sampling time
2. LDR19 03
LDR20 45
LDR21 12
LDR22 100 First data 1 value
LDR23 200 Second data 1 value
3.
LDR24 60 First data 2 value
LDR25 80 Second data 2 value
4.
LDR26 0 First data 3 value
If the amount of data in the Data Log is less LDR27 0 Second data 3 value
than the data to copy, 0 is stored
When writing with the following settings, “Device range error” is displayed.
• Starting Point is 0 or a value larger than the amount of saved data
• Start No. is 0 or a value larger than Data No.
• End No. is 0 or a value larger than Data No.
• Start No. is a value larger than End No.
14-30 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
● Displaying Data on the Numerical Display
You can copy sampled data to an internal device and display it with the Numerical Display.
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Log.
The Data Log Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Click Advanced.
The dialog box switches to Advanced mode.
3 Under Settings, select the channel number for the data to display numerical values of on the Numerical Display, then
click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
14
Data Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-31
4 Using the Data
4 Select Enable for Log function on the General tab and configure Data Size, Source, and Sampling Method.
5 Specify the number of devices to sample in Number of Data on the Data tab, and configure Display Type and
Data Type for each item of data in Settings.
6 Click the Options tab.
7 Select the Copy Data Log Data check box.
8 Specify the destination device for the copied data in Destination Device.
You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
9 Select the data that is the start point for copying data in Starting Point.
■ Newest Data
Set the starting point to read as the newest data.
■ Oldest Data
Set the starting point to read as the oldest data.
■ Specify by Value of Device
Specifies which data from the oldest data to set as the starting point to read by value of device, and sets that data as
the starting point to read.
Specifies the source word device. You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
14-32 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
10 Select the specification method for the amount of data to copy in Number of Data.
■ Value
Use a constant.
Specifies the amount to copy (1 to 64).
■ Device
Use a word device.
Specifies the source word device. You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
The maximum amount of data that can be copied to the internal device is 64.
11 Select the order to copy data in Stored Order of Data.
■ From Newest to Oldest
Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the newest data first.
■ From Oldest to Newest
Of the data to copy, copies from the start point in order of the oldest data first.
12 Select the data to copy from the data in Target Data.
Select the Sampling Time check box to copy the sampling time data from the data.
Select the Value of Device check box to copy the value of device from the data. When not copying the value of
device, proceed to step 15.
13 Select the specification method for the data number to copy the value in Data No..
■ Value
Use a constant.
■ Device
Use a word device.
14 Specify the data number of the data to start copying out of the data to copy with Start No..
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device, specify the source device. You can only specify an internal device. Click to display the 14
Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Data Log Function
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
When the Sampling Time check box is selected, the data number is 1. This cannot be changed.
15 Specify the data number of the data to end copying out of the data to copy with End No..
If you select Value, specify the data number (1 to 128).
If you select Device, specify the source device. You can only specify an internal device. Click to display the
Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
16 Select the condition to start copying in Trigger Condition.
■ Always
Copies each time the data is updated.
■ Device
Specifies the device that triggers the start of copying the data. Copies the data when the value of the specified device
changes from 0 to 1. Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
17 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-33
4 Using the Data
18 Click OK to close the Data Log Settings dialog box.
19 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.
20 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Display.
21 Double-click the dropped Numerical Display and a Properties dialog box will be displayed.
22 Select the display type for the copied data with Display Type on the General tab.
23 Select the data type for the copied data in Data Type under Data Format.
24 Specify the number of digits to display in Digits under Data Format.
The range of digits that can be set differs according to the display type and data type.
14-34 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
25 Specify the source device for the copied data in Display Device under Display Method.
For sequential devices of the amount of data to copy starting with Destination Device configured on the Options
tab on the Data Log Settings Individual Settings dialog box, set Display Device for each Numerical Display to those
devices.
Example: When Destination Device is LDR10, Number of Data is 3
Specify three Numerical Displays with Display Device specified as LDR10, LDR11 and LDR12
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
26 Click OK.
The Properties dialog box closes.
27 Repeat step 17 through 26 to configure the Numerical Displays for the amount of data to copy.
This concludes configuring the Numerical Display.
Data Log data
Sampling Time Data001
01/01/2011 12:00:30 120
01/01/2011 12:01:30 121
01/01/2011 12:02:30 122
Touch
01/01/2011 12:03:30 123
External device 01/01/2011 12:04:30 124
01/01/2011 12:05:30 125
126 01/01/2011 12:06:30 126
125 Copy
124
LDR10 : 126
LDR11 : 125
LDR12 : 124
(Internal device)
14
Data Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 14-35
4 Using the Data
4.3 Saving Data as a CSV File
● Saving Data as a CSV File
The Data Log data can be saved to the external memory as a CSV file.
The procedure to save the data is as follows.
On the WindO/I-NV3 System Setup tab, click Data Log to display the Data Log Settings dialog box. Select a
channel number to save to the external memory, and then click Edit to display the Individual Settings dialog box.
Select an output method check box on the External Memory tab and configure the items. The data can be saved to
the External Memory Folder on the external memory. For details, refer to “External Memory Tab” on page 14-16.
Files saved to external memory are read using WindO/I-NV3.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and then click Data in external memory
to display the Upload from external memory dialog box. Select the Data Log Data check box, specify the
location to save the files in Path, and then click OK to be able to save the files in the specified folder.
● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure of the output file is as follows. The data structure for files output with batch output and real time
output is the same.
Bold items are replaced by the Data Log settings, sampled data, project file name, and WindO/I-NV3 version.
“Project Name”,”Project name”,”Version number”
“File Type”,”Log type”
Blank row
“Channel No.”,”Channel number”
Headers
“Source”,”Source device”
“Sampling Method”,”Sampling condition (type)”
“Sampling condition (label)”,”Sampling condition (configuration details)”
Blank row
Label row “Label (sampling time)”,”Label (data number 1)”,”Label (data number 2)”... times the amount of data
“MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS”,Data number 1 data value,Data number 2 data value... times the amount of
data
Data row
·
·
·
Output example Data size of each row
“Project Name”,”Dimmer Console”,”V1.00” - 41 bytes
“File Type”,”Data Log Data” - 29 bytes
- 2 bytes
“Channel No.”,”1” - 19 bytes
“Source”,”LDR 100” - 20 bytes
“Sampling Method”,”Fixed Period” - 34 bytes
“Time[Sec]”,”1” - 17 bytes
- 2 bytes
“Sampling Time”,”Data001”,”Data002” - 37 bytes
“08/23/2011 18:32:04”,171,234 - 32 bytes
·
·
·
• The data size for each row is counted as two bytes for full-width characters, one byte for characters, and
two bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• A space is inserted before the year in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time differs according to the language configured in Project Settings,
on the Project Details tab, in Language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
14-36 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 15 Operation Log Function
This chapter describes how to configure the Operation Log function and its operation on the Touch.
1 Overview
1.1 How the Operation Log Function is Used
The Operation Log function records events that have occurred on the Touch, including user operations such as
pressing a button or changing the operation mode.
You can perform the following actions using the Operation Log function.
• Record turning on the Touch power
Touch Touch
Power ON
130
12:00
Run Mode
• Record switching the Base Screen
Touch Touch
Switch to Base Screen Tank 1
130 Full
12:01
Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2
• Record changing the user
Touch Touch
Change Users
130 130
User1
12:02
User2 15
Operation Log Function
Group parts not displayed on User2 screen
• Record changing the operation mode
Touch Touch
Change Operation Modes
130
12:03
Run Mode System Mode
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-1
1 Overview
• Record pressing a touch switch
Touch
130
12:04
Press touch switch
• Record writing a value to a device by pressing a touch switch
Touch
External device Value 100
100
100 Write 100
D1= 100
12:05
Press touch switch
100→D1
• Output Operation Log data to the external memory
Touch
USB flash drive
Output to USB flash drive
Operation Log data
(CSV)
15-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.2 Recorded Events
The recorded events are as follows.
■ Power ON
This operation is recorded when the Touch power is turned on.
■ Switch to Base Screen
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched the Base Screen by pressing the Goto Screen Button or a Multi-Button
• Switched the Base Screen by pressing the key button Ref. on the Alarm List Display or the Alarm Log Display
• Switched the Base Screen by executing the Goto Screen Command or a Multi-Command
• Switched the Base Screen by writing a screen number to System Area 1 Display screen number (address+0)
■ Change Users
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched the user by entering a password on the Password Screen
• Switched the user by writing a value of device
• Switched to the default user
• If User is selected in Default User in the User Accounts dialog box, a Change Users event occurs when
the power is turned on and when the operation mode is changed.
• If the Switch to Base Screen check box is selected, a Switch to Base Screen event also occurs when
a Change Users event occurs.
■ Change Operation Modes
This operation is recorded by the following events.
• Switched to System Mode by pressing the Goto Screen Button or a Multi-Button
• Switched to System Mode by executing the Goto Screen Command or a Multi-Command
• Switched to System Mode by pressing System Mode on the Maintenance screen
• Switched to Run Mode from System Mode by pressing Run on the Top Page in the System Mode
• Switched to Monitor Mode from Run Mode by clicking Start Monitor on the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab
• Switched to Run Mode from Monitor Mode by clicking Stop Monitor on the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab
The Operation Log is only recorded during Run Mode.
Switching from Run Mode to System Mode and switching from System Mode to Run Mode is recorded.
Switching from System Mode to Data Transfer Mode and switching from Data Transfer Mode to System
Mode is not recorded.
■ Press buttons
This operation is recorded by the following events. 15
• Pressing a Bit Button, Word Button, Goto Screen Button, Multi-Button, Selector Switch, Potentiometer, Numerical
Operation Log Function
Input, Character Input
• Pressing the key buttons ENT, Download Project, Upload Project, All Chk., Del. All, Ref., Stop the Sound
of the Buzzer and Screen flashing
The Operation Log only records touch switch presses for parts created in WindO/I-NV3.
Operations for the following screens and buttons displayed in messages and title bars are not recorded.
• System screen
• Password screen
• System error messages
• Popup screen title bar
■ Write Data to any Devices
This operation is recorded by the following event.
Writing a value to a device by pressing a Bit Button, Word Button, Multi-Button, Selector Switch, Potentiometer,
Numerical Input, Character Input
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-3
1 Overview
1.3 Data Configuration
The recorded data is composed of a label, time, user name, screen number, event name, part name, device, and
content after the change.
The relationship between the Operation Log function settings and the recorded data is as follows.
Operation Log settings
ϭ͘ ǀĞŶƚ
Recorded data
ϰ͘^ĂŵƉůŝŶŐdŝŵĞ ϱ͘hƐĞƌEĂŵĞ ϲ͘^ĐƌĞĞŶEŽ͘ ϳ͘ ǀĞŶƚEĂŵĞ ϴ͘WĂƌƚEĂŵĞ ϵ͘ĞǀŝĐĞĚĚƌĞƐƐ ϭϬ͘ŚĂŶŐĞĚƚŽ
ϯ͘>ĂďĞůƐ ^ĂŵƉůŝŶŐdŝŵĞ
hƐĞƌ ^ĐƌĞĞŶEŽ͘ ǀĞŶƚEĂŵĞ WĂƌƚEĂŵĞ ĞƚĂŝůƐ ŚĂŶŐĞĚƚŽ
ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϬϬ͗ϭϬ Ͳ ĂƐĞϭ WŽǁĞƌKE Ͳ Ͳ Ͳ
ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϭ͗Ϯϯ hƐĞƌϭ ĂƐĞϭ ^ǁŝƚĐŚƚŽĂƐĞ^ĐƌĞĞŶ Ͳ Ͳ ĂƐĞϮ
ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗ϬϮ͗ϰϱ hƐĞƌϭ ĂƐĞϮ ŚĂŶŐĞhƐĞƌƐ Ͳ Ͳ hƐĞƌϮ
Ϯ͘ĂƚĂƐƚŽƌĂŐĞĂŵŽƵŶƚ
ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϯ͗Ϭϲ hƐĞƌϮ ĂƐĞϮ ŚĂŶŐĞKƉĞƌĂƚŝŽŶDŽĚĞƐ Ͳ Ͳ ^LJƐƚĞŵDŽĚĞ
ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϰ͗ϭϭ hƐĞƌϮ ĂƐĞϮ WƌĞƐƐďƵƚƚŽŶƐ ŝƚ^ǁŝƚĐŚ Ͳ Ͳ
ϭϮͬϬϭͬϮϬϭϭϭϮ͗Ϭϰ͗ϭϭ hƐĞƌϮ ĂƐĞϮ tƌŝƚĞĂƚĂƚŽĂŶLJĞǀŝĐĞƐ Ͳ >ZϬ ϱϱ
1. Event: Events that occur on the Touch due to operations including user operations. Only the checked
events are recorded.
2. Data storage amount:The amount of data to record. For details, refer to “Data Storage Amount” on page 15-6.
3. Label: When the recorded data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed in the label row.
4. Sampling Time: The time the event occurred.
The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project
Settings, on the Project Details tab, in Language.
YYYY/MM/DD Japanese
HH:MM:SS:
MM/DD/YYYY European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic
HH:MM:SS:
5. User Name: The user name when the event occurred.
The user name is only recorded when the Use Security functions check box is selected on the
General tab in the User Accounts dialog box.
6. Screen No.: The screen type and number that was displayed when the event occurred.
Base n: Base Screen (n: screen number)
Example: Base 1
Popup n: Popup Screen (n: screen number)
Example: Popup 10
7. Event Name: When the recorded data is output as a CSV file, this is the text displayed as a label to describe the
event that occurred. This item is configured in the Data Labels dialog box.
15-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
8. Part Name: The part name for the pressed touch switch when the Press buttons event occurs.
9. Device Address: The destination device when the Write Data to any Devices event occurs.
When an indirect write is used, the device specified by the indirect value is recorded.
Example: When the device configured as the destination for the value 100 is LDR100 and the
indirect value is 3
Event Name Part Name Details Changed to
Press buttons WordSwitch1 – –
Write Data to any Devices – LDR103 100
10. Changed to: The result produced from the event that occurred. The recorded content varies based on the
event that occurred.
Switch to Base Screen: The screen type and number after switching.
Base n: Base Screen (n: screen number)
Example: Base 1
Change Users: The user name after the change.
Change Operation Modes: The operation mode after the change.
Run Mode: Run Mode
System Mode: System Mode
Monitor Mode: Monitor Mode
Simulation Mode: Simulation Mode
Write Data to any Devices: The value written to the device by pressing the touch switch. This value
is handled as BIN16 (+). For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available
Data” on page 2-2.
The value written to the device is recorded as BIN16 (+) regardless of
the data type.
Example: When -10 (0xFFF6) is written to device D0
Event Name Part Name Details Changed to
Press buttons WordSwitch1 – –
Write Data to any Devices – D0 65526 (0xFFF6)
If the written value is 2 words (32 bits), each word is recorded (16 bits).
For the storage order for 32-bit device data, the upper word and lower
word are stored following the Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical
Data setting. Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data is
configured on the System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-18.
Example: When Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data is from
Lower word and 12345678 (0xBC614E) is written to device
15
D0 with the data type BIN32 (+)
Event Name Part Name Details Changed to
Operation Log Function
Press buttons WordSwitch1 – –
Write Data to any Devices – D0 24910 (0x614E)
Write Data to any Devices – D1 188 (0xBC)
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-5
1 Overview
1.4 Saving and Deleting Data
● Saving Data
The recorded data is saved in the data storage area.
Operation Log data
Touch Sampling Time User Screen No. Event Name Part Name Details Changed to
12/01/2011 12:00:10 - Base1 Power ON - - -
12/01/2011 12:01:23 User1 Base1 Switch to Base Screen - - Base2
130 12/01/2011 12:02:45 User1 Base2 Change Users - - User2
12/01/2011 12:03:06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes - - System Mode
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch - -
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Devices - LDR 0 55
If the saved data exceeds the Operation Log data storage amount, the oldest data is deleted and the new data is
saved.
New data
Oldest data
(delete)
Operation Log data storage amount
When the backup battery is depleted, the data in the Operation Log is erased when the Touch is turned off.
Data Storage Amount
The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 3579.
The maximum amount of data that can be recorded by a single operation is 150 items. When writing to
multiple devices in a single operation using the Multi-Button or other part, data over 150 items cannot be
recorded. If the data to be recorded in a single operation exceeds 150 items, HMI Special Internal Relay
LSM22 is set to 1. For details, refer to Chapter 27 “HMI Special Internal Relay (LSM)” on page 27-1.
● Deleting Data
The method to delete recorded data from the data storage area is as follows.
• On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Clear, and then click All or Operation Log Data. For
details, refer to Chapter 23 “4 Clear” on page 23-22.
• On the Top Page in the System Mode, press Main Menu, Initial Setting, Initialize, and Opn Log in order.
15-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.5 Using the Data
The saved data can be used in the following ways.
Operation Log data
Sampling Time User Screen No. Event Name Part Name Details Changed to
12/01/2011 12:00:10 - Base1 Power ON - - -
12/01/2011 12:01:23 User1 Base1 Switch to Base Screen - - Base2
12/01/2011 12:02:45 User1 Base2 Change Users - - User2
12/01/2011 12:03:06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes - - System Mode
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch - -
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Devices - LDR 0 55
• Save to and read from an external memory
Operation log data is saved in a CSV file format into the
Book1
Sampling Time User Screen No. Event Name Part Name Details Changed to
12/01/2011 12:00:10 - Base1 Power ON - - -
12/01/2011 12:01:23 User1 Base1 Switch to Base Screen - - Base2
12/01/2011 12:02:45 User1 Base2 Change Users - - User2
external memory which it can be read on your computer.
12/01/2011 12:03:06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes - - System Mode
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch - -
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Devices - LDR 0 55
Sheet1 Sheet2 Sheet3
For details, refer to “4.1 Saving the Data as a CSV File” on
page 15-17.
Operation Log data
(CSV)
15
Operation Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-7
2 Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure
2 Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Operation Log function.
2.1 Configuring the Events and the Condition for Recording
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Operation Log.
The Operation Log Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the Enable Operation Log Settings check box.
3 Select the check boxes for the events to record under Target Events to record.
Power ON: The following items are recorded when the Touch power is turned on.
Time, screen number, event name
Switch to Base Screen: The following items are recorded when the Base Screen is switched.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
Change Users: The following items are recorded when the user is changed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
Change Operation Modes: The following items are recorded when the operation mode is changed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
Press buttons: The following items are recorded when a touch switch is pressed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, part name
Write Data to any Devices: The following items are recorded when a value is written to a device by pressing a
touch switch.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, device, changed to
15-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Operation Log Function Configuration Procedure
4 Configure the Operation Log data storage amount in Number of Stored Data.
Click to display the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.
Specify the Operation Log data storage amount in Number of Stored Data for Operation Log, and then click OK.
The Data Storage Area Management dialog box closes.
5 Select the condition to record events in Trigger condition.
■ Always
Always records events.
■ Device
Records events when the specified device is 1. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
6 Click OK.
The Operation Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the events and the condition for recording.
15
Operation Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-9
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Operation Log Settings dialog box.
3.1 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
● General Tab
The General tab is used to configure the events and the condition for recording.
■ Enable Operation Log Settings
Select this check box to use the Operation Log function.
■ Target Events to record
Selects the events to record. Select the check boxes for the events to record.
Power ON: The following items are recorded when the Touch power is turned on.
Time, screen number, event name
Switch to Base Screen: The following items are recorded when the Base Screen is switched.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
Change Users: The following items are recorded when the user is changed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
Change Operation Modes: The following items are recorded when the operation mode is changed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, changed to
Press buttons: The following items are recorded when a touch switch is pressed.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, part name
Write Data to any Devices: The following items are recorded when a value is written to a device by pressing a
touch switch.
Time, user name, screen number, event name, device, changed to
Edit Data Labels: Displays the Data Labels dialog box.
The Data Labels dialog box is used to edit the text displayed in the label row and the
event names displayed in the data rows when the recorded data is output as a CSV file.
For details, refer to “Data Labels Dialog Box” on page 15-12.
15-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Monitor Number of Stored Data
Select this check box to count the amount of recorded Operation Log data. The amount of recorded data is written to
the specified device.
(Destination Device): Specifies the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
Report when Number of Stored Data has reached or exceeded Threshold*1:
Writes 1 to the report device when the current amount of data reaches or
exceeds the set threshold.
Threshold*1: Specifies the amount of data (1 to 3579) that is the basis for reporting.
1
Report Device* : Specifies the destination bit device or the bit of the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Monitor % Space Used in Data Storage Area
Select this check box to monitor the usage of the data storage area allocated as the save destination for Operation
Log data. The usage is calculated from the data storage amount allocated to the data storage area and the amount of
saved data, and then written to the specified device.
Usage = Current amount of Operation Log data ÷ Operation Log data storage amount (omits values after the
decimal point)
(Destination Device): Specifies the destination word device to write the current usage of the amount of Operation
Log data storage.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
Report when % Space Used has reached or exceeded Threshold*1:
Writes 1 in the report device when the current usage reaches or exceeds the
set threshold.
Threshold*1: Specifies the usage (1 to 100) that is the basis for reporting.
Report Device*1: RSpecifies the destination bit device or the bit of the destination word device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Clear Log Data
Select this check box to erase the Operation Log data saved in the data storage area.
(Trigger Device): Specifies the bit device that triggers the erasure of the data. The saved data is erased when the
value of the configured device changes from 0 to 1. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
15
■ Number of Stored Data
Operation Log Function
Shows the maximum amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area. Data is saved up to the set
amount. The maximum amount of data that can be saved in the data storage area is 3579.
Click to open the Data Storage Area Management dialog box where you can change the allocation of data storage
area memory. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Data Storage Area” on page 16-1.
■ Trigger Condition
Selects the trigger condition for the Operation Log function.
Always: Always records events.
Device: Records events when the specified device is 1. You can only specify an internal device.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-11
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
Data Labels Dialog Box
The Data Labels dialog box is where you can edit labels for recorded data and event names when saving data as a
CSV file.
Label of Recorded Data
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for recorded data labels when saving data as a CSV file.
■ Label of Recorded Data
Specifies the text to display in the label row in Text or Text ID.
Text: Double click the cell to enter the text to display as the label. The maximum number is 40
characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
Text ID: Double click the cell to specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text
registered in Text Manager as the label.
This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.
The details for each label row label is as follows.
Sampling Time: The label for the column to display the time the event occurred.
User Name: The label for the column to display the user name when the event occurred.
Screen No.: The label for the column to display the screen type and number that was displayed when the event
occurred.
Event Name: The label for the column to display the name of the event that occurred on the Touch by an
operation including a user operation.
Part Name: The label for the column to display the part name for the pressed touch switch when the Press
buttons event occurs.
Device Address: The label for the column to display the destination device when the Write Data to any Devices
event occurs.
Changed to: The label for the column to display the result produced from the event that occurred. The recorded
content varies based on the event that occurred.
15-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
Event Name
■ Use Text Manager
Select this check box to use text registered in Text Manager for the event names when saving data as a CSV file.
■ Event Name
Specifies the text to display in Event Name in Text or Text ID.
Text: Double click the cell to enter the text to display as the event name. The maximum number is 40
characters.
Text can only be entered when the Use Text Manager check box is cleared.
Text ID: Double click the cell to specify the Text Manager ID number (1 to 32000) when using text registered in
Text Manager as the event name.
This option is only enabled if you select the Use Text Manager check box.
Event name details are as follows.
Power ON: The event name when the Touch power is turned on.
Switch to Base Screens: The event name when the base screen is switched.
Change Users: The event name when the user is changed.
Change Operation Modes: The event name when the Touch operation mode is changed.
Press buttons: The event name when a touch switch is pressed.
Write Data to any Devices: The event name when a value is written to a device by pressing a touch switch.
15
Operation Log Function
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-13
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
● External Memory Tab
The External Memory tab is used to configure whether or not to output saved data to the external memory.
The output data is stored in the following folder on the external memory.
\External memory folder\OPERATIONLOG
The default External Memory Folder name is “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1.5 Setting the External
Memory Folder” on page 26-12.
Data recorded after starting output to the external memory is not included in the output data.
15-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Batch
Select this check box to batch output all the sampled data to the external memory.
Touch
Output to USB flash drive
Trigger Device USB flash drive
0 1
Operation Log data
Operation Log data
Sampling Time User Screen No. Event Name Part Name Details Changed to
(CSV)
12/01/2011 12:00:10 - Base1 Power ON - - -
12/01/2011 12:01:23 User1 Base1 Switch to Base Screen - - Base2
12/01/2011 12:02:45 User1 Base2 Change Users - - User2
Data to be output
12/01/2011 12:03:06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes - - System Mode
(all)
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch - -
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Devices - LDR 0 55
12/01/2011 12:07:30 User2 Base2 Switch to Base Screen - - Base3
All the data is saved on the external memory when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1. If a file with the same
name already exists on the external memory, that file is overwritten. The maximum amount of output data is the
amount configured by the data storage area.
Output stops if there is insufficient free space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is
stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
Trigger Device: Specifies the bit device that triggers batch output. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Data is output to file when the trigger device changes from 0 to 1.
File Name: Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “OPLOGO.CSV”.
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters
(including the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1: Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of
the value of device configured by File Name Device to
the end of the file name for the output data.
15
Example: When the value of device configured by File
Name Device is 123, the file name is Operation Log Function
“OPLOGO123.CSV”.
File Name Device: Specifies the word device that is the source for the value
to add to the file name. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62. This option can only be
configured when the Add Device data to File Name
check box is selected.
*1 Advanced mode only
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-15
3 Operation Log Settings Dialog Box
■ Real Time
Select this check box to output data to the external memory in real time.
Touch
Output to USB flash drive
USB flash drive
3 minute interval
after operation starts
Operation Log data
Operation Log data
Sampling Time User Screen No. Event Name Part Name Details Changed to
(CSV)
12/01/2011 12:00:10 - Base1 Power ON - - - Data to be output
12/01/2011 12:01:23 User1 Base1 Switch to Base Screen - - Base2 3 minutes after
12/01/2011 12:02:45 User1 Base2 Change Users - - User2
operation starts
12/01/2011 12:03:06 User2 Base2 Change Operation Modes - - System Mode Data to be output
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Press buttons BitSwitch - - 3 minutes after that
12/01/2011 12:04:11 User2 Base2 Write Data to any Devices - LDR 0 55
Data to be output
12/01/2011 12:07:30 User2 Base2 Switch to Base Screen - - Base3 after another
3 minutes
With real time output, data is saved to the external memory in three minute intervals after the Touch starts running.
When there is already data with the same file name on the external memory, data is appended to that file. If there
was no update to the data during the three minutes, it is not output.
Data is appended to the file until the size of the file reaches the restriction size (256 MB), so the maximum amount of
output data varies based on the settings for the output channel such as the amount of data, the data size, and the
labels.
If the interval events occur more quickly than the time it takes to accomplish the real time output (the interval for
writing to the external memory), the Operation Log is recorded up to the data storage amount - 1, and then
afterwards, old data is discarded in order and replaced with new data.
Real time output stops when the file size of the Operation Log data exceeds 256 MB or when there is insufficient
space on the external memory. USB flash drive error information is stored in HMI Special Data Register LSD33.
• When the value of HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes from 0 to 1, the data at that time is first
output in real time to the USB flash drive, and then access to the USB flash drive is stopped.
• You can check the free space on the USB flash drive with HMI Special Data Registers LSD34 and 35.
File Name: Enter the file name for the output data or shows the file name.
The default is “OPLOGA.CSV”.
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including
the extension).
Add Device data to File Name*1:
Select this check box to add the bottom three digits of the value of device configured by File
Name Device to the end of the file name for the output data.
Example: When the value of device configured by File Name Device is 123, the file name is
“OPLOGA123.CSV”.
File Name Device:
Specifies the word device that is the source for the value to add to the file name. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be configured when the Add Device data to File Name check box is
selected.
• The function to record data operates when Operation Log data is being saved to the external memory.
• The methods to erase Operation Log files saved on the external memory are as follows.
- To erase files during operation using parts, on the External Memory tab in the Project Settings dialog
box, select the Remove Files stored in External Memory check box and the All Operation Log
data check box, and then configure the trigger device. Assign that trigger device to a part.
- To erase files with WindO/I-NV3, click Clear on the Online tab, and then click Stored Data in
External Memory to open the Clear Data dialog box. Select the Operation Log Data check box, and
then click OK.
*1 Advanced mode only
15-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
4 Using the Data
4.1 Saving the Data as a CSV File
● Saving the Data as a CSV File
The Operation Log data can be saved to the external memory as a CSV file.
The procedure to save the data is as follows.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Configuration tab, click Operation Log to display the Operation Log Settings dialog box.
Select an output method check box on the External Memory tab and configure the items. The Operation Log data
is saved to the External Memory Folder on the external memory according to the External Memory tab settings. For
details, refer to “External Memory Tab” on page 15-14.
Files saved to external memory are read using WindO/I-NV3.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and then click Data in external memory
to display the Upload from external memory dialog box. Select the Operation Log Data check box, specify
the location to save the files in Path, and then click OK to be able to save the files in the specified folder.
● Data Structure and Output Example
The data structure of the output file is as follows. The data structure for files output with batch output and real time
output is the same.
Bold items are replaced by the Operation Log settings, recorded data, project file name, and WindO/I-NV3 version.
"Project Name","Project name","Version number"
Headers "File Type","Log type"
Blank row
"Sampling Time","User Name","Screen No.","Event Name","Part Name","Device
Label row
Address","Changed to"
" MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS","User Name","Screen Type & No.","Event","Part
Name","Device Address", "Changed to"
Data row
·
·
·
Output example Data size of each row
"Project Name","Dimmer Console","V1.00" - 41 bytes
"File Type","Operation Log Data" - 34 bytes 15
- 2 bytes
"Sampling Time","User","Screen No.","Operation","Part Name","Details","Changed to" - 84 bytes Operation Log Function
" 12/01/2011 12:00:10","-","Base 1","Power ON","-","-","-" - 60 bytes
" 12/01/2011 12:01:23","User1","Base 1","Switch to Base Screen","-","-", "Base2" - 81 bytes
·
·
·
• The data size for each row is counted as 2 bytes for full-width characters, one byte for half-width
characters, and two bytes for newlines. The total for each row is the total amount of space for the file.
• A space is inserted before the date in the data row.
• The display type for the date and time varies based on the language configured in Project Settings, on
the Project Details tab, in Language.
Japanese: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
European, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic: MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 15-17
4 Using the Data
15-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 16 Data Storage Area
This chapter describes how to configure the data storage area and its operation on the Touch.
1 Overview
1.1 What is the Data Storage Area?
The data storage area is the area in the Touch’s internal memory where saved data is not erased even when the
power is turned off. The HMI Keep Registers (LKR) and the HMI Keep Relays (LK) are allocated in this area.
The following data can be saved in the data storage area.
• Alarm Log data
Chapter 13 “Alarm Log Function” on page 13-1
• Data Log data
Chapter 14 “Data Log Function” on page 14-1
• Operation Log data
Chapter 15 “Operation Log Function” on page 15-1
• When there is no remaining battery power, the data in the data storage area is erased when the Touch
is turned off.
• If you download the project data from WindO/I-NV3, the Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data
Log data stored in internal memory are erased, and all internal devices are reset except for the HMI Keep
Registers (LKR) and the HMI Keep Relays (LK).
16
Data Storage Area
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 16-1
1 Overview
1.2 Data Storage Area
● Data Storage Area Capacity and Types of Storable Data
You can allocate areas to save Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data Log data, as well as areas to use as HMI
Keep Registers (LKR) and HMI Keep Relays (LK). The unallocated leftover area is free space.
Data storage area (102,400 bytes)
Alarm Log data Operation Log Data Log data HMI Keep Registers HMI Keep Relays
data (LKR) (LK) Free space
● Minimum and Maximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses
The minimum and maximum amount of data storage and the minimum and maximum number of addresses that can
be configured for the data storage area is as follows.
Data type Minimum Maximum
Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log 0 5,011
Number of Stored Data for Operation Log 0 3,579
Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device 0 12,528
Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) 1,024 8,192
Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) 1,024 8,192
16-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure
2 Data Storage Area Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the data storage area.
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Data Storage Area.
The Data Storage Area Management dialog box is displayed.
2 Specify the amount of Alarm Log data to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log
(0 to 5011).
3 Specify the amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for
Operation Log (0 to 3579).
4 Specify the amount of Data Log data per device to save in the data storage area in Number of Stored Data for
Data Log per Device (0 to 12528).
5 Specify the number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) addresses in Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) (1024 to
8192).
6 Specify the number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) addresses in Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) (1024 to 8192).
7 Click OK.
The Data Storage Area Management dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the data storage area.
16
Data Storage Area
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 16-3
3 Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box
3 Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.
3.1 Data Storage Area Management Dialog Box
The areas to save Alarm Log data, Operation Log data, and Data Log data and the areas to use as HMI Keep
Registers (LKR) and HMI Keep Relays (LK) are allocated in the Data Storage Area Management dialog box.
■ Number of Stored Data for Alarm Log
Specifies the amount of Alarm Log data to save in the data storage area (0 to 5011).
Alarm Log data is only saved in the data storage area when Store is selected under Block Settings, Data in the
Auto-Setup dialog box or in the Individual Settings dialog box for Alarm Log Settings.
■ Number of Stored Data for Operation Log
Specifies the amount of Operation Log data to save in the data storage area (0 to 3579).
■ Number of Stored Data for Data Log per Device
Specifies the amount of Data Log data per device to save in the data storage area (0 to 12528).
Data Log data is only saved in the data storage area when Enable is selected under Log function on the General
Tab in the Individual Settings dialog box for Data Log Settings.
■ Number of HMI Keep Register (LKR)
Specifies the number of HMI Keep Register (LKR) addresses (1024 to 8192).
■ Number of HMI Keep Relay (LK)
Specifies the number of HMI Keep Relay (LK) addresses (1024 to 8192).
■ Free Space
Shows the amount of free space in the data storage area (in bytes).
■ Default
Returns the configured values to their default values.
16-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 17 Preventive Maintenance Function
17
This chapter describes how to configure the Preventive Maintenance function and its operation on the Touch.
Preventive Maintenance Function
1 Overview
1.1 How the Preventive Maintenance Function is Used
The Preventive Maintenance function monitors the state of devices and counts the time the value of the monitored
devices are 1, as well as the number of times the values of monitored devices change to 1.
The Preventive Maintenance function can perform the following functions.
• Monitor devices that turn on lighting or warning lights and count the operation time
Touch
Lighting
External device
Lighting 1230 hours
Warning
360 hours
light
Warning light
• Report the replacement time for lighting and warning lights by the counted operation time
Touch
Lighting
External device
Please replace
Lighting
Warning Replace soon
light
Warning light
• Monitor devices connected to buttons and relays and count the operation count
Touch
External device
Button Button 123 times
Relay 1000 times
Relay
• Report the inspection time for buttons and relays by the counted operation count
Touch
External device
Inspect soon
Button
Button
Please inspect
Relay
Relay
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-1
1 Overview
1.2 Counting the Operation Time and Operation Count
The operation time and operation count are counted up to the set maximum value. The counted operation time and
operation count are saved in HMI Keep Registers (LKR) and the values are retained until they are reset. To reset a
counted value, set the value of the configured HMI Keep Register (LKR) to 0.
The maximum value that can be configured varies based on the data type of the destination device for the operation
time and operation count.
● Counting the Operation Time
While the value of Monitor Device is 1, 1 is added to the value of device (Operation Time Device) configured in
Measure Operation Time for each second that elapses. The operation time is not counted when it is less than one
second.
The counted operation time is written to the device configured in Measure Operation Time.
Example: When the value of Monitor Device M0 is 1, 1 is added to the value of Operation Time Device LKR0.
Not counted Not counted
3 sec. 0.5 sec. 0.5 sec. 3.4 sec.
Operation time
1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec. 1 sec. 0.4 sec.
Value of 1
Monitor Device M0
0
Value of
Operation Time Device LKR0 0 1 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 6 6
● Counting the Operation Count
When the value of Monitor Device changes from 0 to 1, 1 is added to the value of device (Operation Count Device)
configured in Measure Operation Count.
The counted operation count is written to the device configured in Measure Operation Count.
Example: When the value of Monitor Device M0 changes from 0 to 1, 1 is added to the value of Operation Count
Device LKR0.
Operation count 1 2 3 4
Value of 1
Monitor Device M0
0
Value of
Operation Count Device LKR0 0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
If the value of Monitor Device changes from 0 to 1 in an interval shorter than the Touch scan time and the
communication cycle with external devices, the operation time and operation count is not counted
normally. You can check the maximum Touch scan time (x 1 millisecond) with the value of HMI Special
Data Register LSD4. You can check the communication cycle with external devices (x 1 millisecond) with
the value of HMI Special Data Register LSD6. For details, refer to Chapter 27 “HMI Special Data Register
(LSD)” on page 27-8.
17-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.3 Thresholds 17
Preventive Maintenance Function
The threshold is a value that is the criterion for reporting to a configured device (Report Device) when the value
counted for the operation time or operation count (the value of Operation Time Device or Operation Count Device)
has reached the threshold value. 1 is written to the configured device when the operation time and operation count
reach the threshold.
Example: When the value of Operation Time Device LKR0 reaches the threshold set for level 1 through level 3, 1 is
written to the Report Device configured for each level, LM1 through LM3.
Level Threshold Report Device
Level 1 10 LM1
Level 2 15 LM2
Level 3 20 LM3
Level 1 threshold Level 2 threshold Level 3 threshold
Value of
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Operation Time Device LKR0
Value of 1
Level 1
Report Device LM1
0
1
Value of
Level 2
Report Device LM2 0
1
Value of
Level 3
Report Device LM3
0
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-3
2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure
2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Preventive Maintenance function.
2.1 Counting Operation Time and Operation Count
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Specify the number of devices to monitor in Number of Items.
3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options.
Select Operation Time + Operation Count.
The Operation Time and Operation Count settings are displayed in Settings.
4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
5 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
17-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Preventive Maintenance Function Configuration Procedure
6 Select the Measure Operation Time check box on the Operation Time tab. 17
If you are not counting the operation time, leave the Measure Operation Time check box cleared and proceed to
Preventive Maintenance Function
step 9.
7 Specify the destination device for the counted operation time.
You can only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
8 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Time device from Data Type.
This concludes configuring operation time counting.
9 Click the Operation Count tab.
10 Select the Measure Operation Count check box.
If you are not counting the operation count, leave the Measure Operation Count check box cleared and proceed to
step 13.
11 Specify the destination device for the counted operation count.
You can only specify an HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
12 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Count device from Data Type.
This concludes configuring operation count counting.
13 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
14 Repeat steps 2 through 13 to register settings to count the operation time and operation count in all the used
numbers.
This concludes configuring operation time and operation count counting.
Next, configure the functions to execute using counted data.
“4.1 Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display” on page 17-11
“4.2 Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold” on page 17-14
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-5
3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
This section describes the items and buttons on the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box and the Individual
Settings dialog box.
3.1 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is used to manage the preventive maintenance settings for each
monitored device.
■ Number of Items
Specifies the number of devices (1 to 256) to monitor. The numbers for the amount of configured devices is displayed
in Settings.
■ Display Options
Select the item to display in Settings from the following:
Operation Time: Operation time settings are displayed in Settings.
Operation Count: Operation count settings are displayed in Settings.
Operation Time + Operation Count: Operation time and operation count settings are displayed in Settings.
■ Settings
Edits the settings for each number.
No.: Shows the number of the preventive maintenance settings to manage. Double clicking
the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual
Settings Dialog Box” on page 17-8.
Monitor Device: Shows the bit device or bit of the word device to count the operation time or operation count.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Operation Time Device: Shows the destination device for the counted operation time. You can only specify an
HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option is only displayed when Operation Time or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
Data Type: Shows the date type of the operation time device. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual
Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 17-8.
This option is only displayed when Operation Time or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
17-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
Level 1 to 3 Threshold: Shows the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 1 17
through level 3. For a constant, double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
Preventive Maintenance Function
dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 17-8. For a
device, the Device Address Settings dialog box is displayed. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option is only displayed when Operation Time or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
Level 1 to 3 Report Device: Shows the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation time
reaches or exceeds the level 1 through level 3 thresholds.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
This option is only displayed when Operation Time or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
Operation Count Device: Shows the destination device for the counted operation count. You can only specify an
HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
Data Type: Shows the date type of the operation count device. Double clicking the cell displays the
Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on
page 17-8.
This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
Level 1 to 3 Threshold: Shows the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 1
through level 3. For a constant, double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 17-8. For a
device, the Device Address Settings dialog box is displayed. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
Level 1 to 3 Report Device: Shows the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation count
reaches or exceeds the level 1 through level 3 thresholds.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device
address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on
page 2-62.
This option is only displayed when Operation Count or Operation Time + Operation
Count is selected in Display Options.
■ Edit
Registers or changes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number, and then click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The configured content for
the selected number is reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings
Dialog Box” on page 17-8.
■ Remove
Deletes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number, and then click this button.
■ Up
Shifts the selected settings upward in the list.
■ Down
Shifts the selected settings downward in the list.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-7
3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box
The Individual Settings dialog box is used to configure the operation time and operation count settings for each
monitored device.
No.: Shows the number selected in Settings in the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box. To
change the set number, specify a number (1 to 256).
You can only specify a number of the amount of devices configured by Number of Items in
the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box.
Monitor Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to count the operation time or operation count.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
● Operation Time Tab
The Operation Time tab is used to configure the destination device for the counted operation time and the report
conditions when the threshold is reached or exceeded.
■ Measure Operation Time
Select this check box to count the operation time.
(Operation Time Device): Specifies the destination device for the counted operation time. You can only specify an
HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
If you specify the same device as the operation time device for multiple numbers, the counted operation
time is added in total by all the monitored devices for each number and the function will not be able to
count normally.
■ Data Type
Select the data type for the operation time device as BIN16 (+) or BIN32 (+). For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Report when Operation Time has reached or exceeded Threshold level
Select this check box to report when the counted operation time reaches or exceeds the threshold.
■ (Data Type)
Selects the type of data for the threshold.
Value: Uses a constant as the threshold.
Device: Uses a value of device as the threshold.
■ Level 1
Configures the level 1 threshold and report device.
Threshold Specifies the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 1. For a
constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, click to
display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
17-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
Report Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation time reaches 17
or exceeds the level 1 threshold.
Preventive Maintenance Function
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Level 2
Select this check box to configure the level 2 threshold and report device.
Threshold Specifies the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 2. For a
constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, click to
display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Report Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation time reaches
or exceeds the level 2 threshold.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Level 3
Select this check box to configure the level 3 threshold and report device.
Threshold Specifies the time as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 3. For a
constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, click to
display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Report Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation time reaches
or exceeds the level 3 threshold.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
● Operation Count Tab
The Operation Count tab is used to configure the destination device for the counted operation count and the report
conditions when the threshold is reached or exceeded.
■ Measure Operation Count
Select this check box to count the operation count.
(Operation Count Device): Specifies the destination device for the counted operation count. You can only specify an
HMI Keep Register (LKR).
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
If you specify the same device as the operation count device for multiple numbers, the counted operation
count is added in total by all the monitored devices for each number and the function will not be able to
count normally.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-9
3 Preventive Maintenance Settings Dialog Box
■ Data Type
Select the data type for the operation count device as BIN16 (+) or BIN32 (+). For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2
Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Report when Operation Count has reached or exceeded Threshold level
Select this check box to report when the counted operation count reaches or exceeds the threshold.
■ (Data Type)
Selects the type of data for the threshold.
Value: Uses a constant as the threshold.
Device: Uses a value of device as the threshold.
■ Level 1
Configures the level 1 threshold and report device.
Threshold Specifies the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 1. For a
constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, click to
display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Report Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation count reaches
or exceeds the level 1 threshold.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Level 2
Select this check box to configure the level 2 threshold and report device.
Threshold Specifies the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 2. For a
constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, click to
display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Report Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation count reaches
or exceeds the level 2 threshold.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Level 3
Select this check box to configure the level 3 threshold and report device.
Threshold Specifies the count as a constant or a device that is the criterion for reporting at level 3. For a
constant, the range that can be set varies based on the data type. For a device, click to
display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure,
refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Report Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the operation count reaches
or exceeds the level 3 threshold.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
17-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
4 Using the Data
17
Preventive Maintenance Function
4.1 Displaying the Counted Operation Count on a Numerical Display
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Specify the number of devices to monitor in Number of Items.
3 Select the item to display in Settings with Display Options.
Select Operation Count.
Operation count settings are displayed in Settings.
4 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
5 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-11
4 Using the Data
6 Click the Operation Count tab.
7 Select the Measure Operation Count check box and specify the destination device for the counted operation count.
8 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Count device from Data Type.
9 On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Display.
10 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Display.
11 Double-click the dropped Numerical Display and the Properties dialog box is displayed.
17-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
12 On the General tab, under Display Type, click Decimal. 17
Preventive Maintenance Function
13 Under Data Format, in Data Type, select the data type for the value to display.
Select the same data type as the data type selected on the Operation Count tab in the Preventive Maintenance
settings Individual Settings dialog box.
14 Specify Digits for the value to display.
The digits that can be set varies based on the display type or data type.
15 Under Display Method, in Display Device, specify the destination device for the counted operation count.
Select the same device as the device configured with Measure Operation Count on the Operation Count tab in
the Preventive Maintenance settings Individual Settings dialog box.
16 Click OK.
The properties dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to display the counted operation count on a Numerical Display.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-13
4 Using the Data
4.2 Notifying with a Beep when the Counted Operation Time Reaches the Threshold
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Preventive Maintenance.
The Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Specify the number of devices to monitor in Number of Items.
3 Select the number to register the Preventive Maintenance settings to in Settings, then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
4 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device to monitor with Monitor Device.
5 Select the Measure Operation Time check box on the Operation Time tab and specify the destination device for
the counted operation time.
6 Select the data type for the value of the Measure Operation Time device from Data Type.
17-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
7 Select the Report when Operation Time has reached or exceeded Threshold level check box. 17
Preventive Maintenance Function
8 Select the type of data for the threshold.
If you select Value, specify the threshold as a constant.
If you select Device, specify the threshold as a value of device.
9 Configure Threshold for level 1.
When you select Value as the threshold data type, specify the threshold as a constant. The range for the constant
that can be set varies based on the data type.
When you select Device as the threshold data type, specify the threshold as a value of device. Click to display the
Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device
Address Settings” on page 2-62.
10 Configure Report Device for level 1.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting when the threshold is reached or exceeded. Click to
display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2
“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
You can only specify an internal device.
11 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
12 Click OK to close the Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box.
13 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Alarm Log.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-15
4 Using the Data
14 On the Channel tab, under Source Device Type, select Bit and specify Number of Blocks.
15 Select the channel number to register the Level 1 Report Device to, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
16 Specify the Level 1 Report Device in Source and select No Store under Data.
Set Source to the Level 1 Report Device configured on the Operation Time tab in the Preventive Maintenance
settings Individual Settings dialog box.
17 Select Enable under Alarm function, select NO under NO/NC, and then click OK.
17-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Using the Data
18 Switch the alarm function for all the unused channel numbers to Disable in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
Select all the unused channels, and then click Edit. To select multiple channels, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while
17
you click the specific them.
Preventive Maintenance Function
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
Under Channel Settings, in Alarm function, select Disable and then click OK.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 17-17
4 Using the Data
19 Click the Options tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog box.
20 Select the Trigger Buzzer when Alarm occurs check box.
21 Click OK.
The Alarm Log Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes the configuration to notify with a beep when the counted operation time reaches the threshold.
17-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 18 Recipe Function
This chapter describes how to configure the Recipe function and its operation on the Touch.
18
1 Overview
Recipe Function
1.1 How the Recipe Function is Used
The Recipe function batch writes values prepared in advanced to specified devices and batch reads the values for
specified devices according to the state of a device. Use this function for situations such as configuring the initial
values of an external device when the Touch starts running. The data used by the Recipe function is called recipe
data for the data saved in internal memory, a recipe file for data saved to the external memory, and recipe values for
the values written to devices that were saved in recipe data and recipe files.
The Recipe function can perform the following functions.
• Batch write the recipe values saved in internal memory to devices when a value of device changes from 0 to 1
Touch
External device
0 1 Write
Recipe Data
Internal Memory
100
150
200
D100= 0 100
D101= 0 150
D102= 0 200
• Batch write the recipe values saved on the external memory to devices when a value of device changes from 0 to 1
Touch
External device USB flash drive
0 1 Write
D100= 0 100
Recipe File
D101= 0 150
100,
D102= 0 200 150,
200,
• Batch read value of a device and save them to the external memory as a recipe file when a value of device changes
from 0 to 1
Touch
External device USB flash drive
0 1 Output to USB flash drive
D100= 100
Recipe File
D101= 150
100,
D102= 200 150,
200,
To keep the values of devices, you can use recipe function. The recipe function saves them as a recipe file
in the external memory. For example, save the values of devices before the power is turned off and write
them the next time the power is turned on.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-1
1 Overview
1.2 Data for Recipes
The data handled by the Recipe function is based on the starting device address for the amount of data selected.
Example:When the Top Device is D100 and the Number of Data is 10
D100 value 1111
D101 value 2222
D102 value 3333
D103 value 4444
D104 value 5555
D105 value 6666
D106 value 7777
D107 value 8888
D108 value 9999
D109 value 11111
18-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.3 Data Configuration
The relationship between the Recipe function settings and the data for recipes is as follows.
18
Recipe settings
Recipe Function
7RS'HYLFH 'DWD
Data for recipes '
'
'
'
'
1XPEHU
'
RI'DWD
'
'
'
'
&KDQQHOWR
1XPEHURIEORFNV
1. Number of blocks: The operation using the data for recipes is configured in blocks (0 to 64). One block is 16
channels.
2. Channels: Destination devices and recipe values are configured in channels. One channel is used for one
item of data for the recipe.
3. Number of Data: The amount of data configured for one channel. The maximum number of data that can be
configured is 8,192.
4. Top Device: The starting address of the destination devices for recipe values and the source devices for
values of devices.
5. Data: The values to write to the devices.
If there are many word devices for the data for the recipe, it will take time to read and write them. For
example, when using the Recipe function to configure initial values, if other processes are executed before
the function is finished writing all the settings, you may experience unexpected results. Monitor the System
Area 2 Transferring recipe bit (address+3, bit 4) while the recipe is transferring and wait until reading and
writing the data for the recipe is finished before executing other processes. For details, refer to Chapter 3
“System Area” on page 3-22.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-3
2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure
2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Recipe function.
2.1 Configuring Recipe Function Operations and Devices
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Specify the number of blocks to use as data for the recipe in Number of Blocks.
The operation using the data for the recipe is configured in blocks (0 to 64). One channel is used for one item of data
for the recipe. One block is 16 channels.
The maximum number of blocks that can be configured is 64 blocks. The maximum number of devices that can be
configured for one channel is 8,192 devices.
3 Select the number of the data for the recipe to configure in Settings, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
18-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure
4 On the Channel tab, under Recipe function, select Enable.
The channel for the block number displayed in Channel is enabled.
18
Recipe Function
5 Enter the name for the Recipe function in Recipe Name.
The maximum number is 40 characters.
6 Specify the destination device for the Recipe values in Top Device.
To read values of devices and save them as a recipe file, specify the source device of the values.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
The specified device addresses are configured sequentially from the number 1 in Data List on the Data tab.
7 Select the data type for the values to write with Data Type.
To read values of devices and save them as a recipe file, specify the type of data for the read values.
8 With Number of Data, specify the number of destination devices starting with the device address configured by Top
Device.
To read values of devices and save them as a recipe file, specify the number of source devices.
The sequential device addresses from the starting address for the number of configured devices is displayed in Data
List on the Data tab.
The amount of data that can be set varies based on the data type. When BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), or BCD4 is
selected for Data Type, up to 8,192 items of data can be configured. When BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-), or BCD8 is
selected, up to 4,096 items of data can be configured.
9 With Display Type, select the display type for Data to configure in Data List on the Data tab.
To save data to a recipe file, the display type is decimal for all.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-5
2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure
10 Click the Data tab.
The data for the recipe in the amount specified by Number of Data on the Channel tab is configured in Data List.
In Device, the devices are sequentially configured starting from the device address specified by Top Device.
11 Double click the data cell for each number in Data List to enter the value to write to the device.
The value of device that can be configured varies based on Data Type and Display Type configured on the
Channel tab.
When Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting on the Block tab, entering values of devices is unnecessary.
12 Click the Block tab.
13 Select the destination to save recipe data to under Access to.
This option is set by block.
■ External Memory
Use a recipe file saved to the external memory.
■ Internal Memory
Use recipe data saved to internal memory.
If you selected Internal Memory, proceed to step 17.
18-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Recipe Function Configuration Procedure
14 Enter the file name for the recipe file in File Name.
The default is “RCPn.CSV”. (n: four digit sequential number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including extension).
If there is a recipe file with the same file name on the external memory, the existing file is overwritten with the new 18
file.
Recipe Function
15 Select the operation using the data for the recipe under Trigger Setting.
This option is set by block.
■ Read/Write
Save batch read values of devices to the external memory as a recipe file or write them to devices as recipe values.
This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to.
■ Read-only
Save batch read values of devices to the external memory as a recipe file.
This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to.
■ Write-only
Write recipe values to devices.
If you select Write-only, proceed to step 17.
16 Specify the device that triggers batch reading values of devices and saving them to the external memory as a recipe
file in Read Trigger.
This option is set by block.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
If you selected Read-only, proceed to step 18.
17 Specify the device that triggers batch writing recipe values to devices in Write Trigger.
This option is set by block.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
18 Click OK to close the Individual Settings dialog box.
19 Repeat steps 3 through 18 to register data for the recipe to all the used channels.
20 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
For details on how to create and edit the data for recipes, refer to “4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes” on page
18-14.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-7
3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
This section describes the items and buttons on the Recipe Settings dialog box and the Individual Settings dialog box.
3.1 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
Use the Recipe Settings dialog box to collectively manage the save destination of data for recipes, the devices for
writing recipe values and reading values of devices, and those execution conditions.
■ Number of Blocks
The operation using the data for the recipe is configured in blocks (0 to 64). One channel is used for one item of data
for the recipe. One block is 16 channels.
The maximum number of blocks that can be configured is 64 blocks. The maximum number of devices that can be
configured for one channel is 8,192 devices.
■ Settings
Edits the recipe settings for each channel.
No.: Displayed as (Block No.)-(Channel No.). Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings
dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-10.
Access to: Shows the save destination for the data for the recipe. Double clicking the cell switches between
Internal Memory and External Memory.
Trigger Setting: Shows the operation using the data for the recipe. When External Memory is selected for
Access to, double clicking the cell switches between Write-only, Read/Write, and Read-
only. Shows Write-only when Internal Memory is selected for Access to.
Read Trigger: Shows the device that triggers saving the recipe file. Double clicking the cell displays the Device
Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2
“5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger
Setting.
Write Trigger: Shows the device that triggers writing recipe values to devices. Double clicking the cell displays
the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under
Trigger Setting.
Recipe function: Shows whether or not to use the Recipe function. Double clicking the cell switches between
Enable and Disable.
Recipe Name: Shows the name of the Recipe function for each channel. Double clicking the cell displays the
Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page
18-10.
18-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
Top Device: Shows the starting address of the destination devices for recipe values and the source devices
for values of devices. Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box.
For the device address configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address
Settings” on page 2-62. 18
This option can only be configured when Recipe function is Enable.
Recipe Function
Data Type Shows the data type of the source or destination values of devices. Double clicking the cell
displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog
Box” on page 18-10.
Number of Data Shows the number of source or destination devices starting with the device address configured
by Top Device. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For details,
refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-10.
Display Type Shows the display type of Data in Data List configured on the Data tab in the Individual
Settings dialog box. Double clicking the cell displays the Individual Settings dialog box. For
details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-10.
■ Edit
Registers or changes the settings for the selected number.
Select a number in Settings, and then click this button to display the Individual Settings dialog box. The settings for
the selected channel are reflected in the Individual Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-10.
■ Write Recipe Files to External Memory
Saves all the settings in every channel on the Recipe Settings dialog box to the external memory as a recipe file.
Click this button to display the Select Drive dialog box.
Only saves channels configured with Access to set to External Memory and Recipe function set to Enable.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-9
3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
3.2 Individual Settings Dialog Box
Use the Individual Settings dialog box to register or edit the recipe settings for the selected channel.
● Block Tab
The Block tab is used to configure settings that are managed by blocks such as the save destination for the data for
the recipe to use, the Recipe function operation, and the trigger setting.
■ Access to
Selects the save destination for data for the recipe to use when writing values to devices.
External Memory: Uses a recipe file saved to the external memory.
Requires an external memory with a saved recipe file. For details, refer to “4.2 Creating Recipe
Files” on page 18-17.
Internal Memory: Uses recipe data saved to internal memory.
Since recipe data is handled as a portion of project data, it may put pressure on the volume of
project data that can be downloaded. One item of recipe data uses two bytes when the top
device data type is 16 bits and it uses four bytes when the top device data type is 32 bits.
Example: When the top device data type is 16 bits and using one block of 16 channels of recipe
data with a data amount of 10
2 x 10 x 1 x 16 = 320 bytes
When the top device data type is 32 bits and using 64 blocks of 16 channels of recipe
data with a data amount of 100
4 x 100 x 64 x 16 = 409.6 kilobytes
■ File Name
Enter the file name of the recipe file to save on the external memory.
The default is “RCPn.CSV”. (n: four digit sequential number)
To change the file name, enter a new file name. The maximum number is 120 characters (including the extension).
If there is a recipe file with the same file name on the external memory, the existing file is overwritten with the new
file.
18-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
■ Trigger Setting
Selects the operation using the data for the recipe.
Read/Write: Saves values of batch read devices to the external memory as a recipe file and writes them
to devices as recipe values.
18
This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to.
Recipe Function
Read-only: Saves values of batch read devices to the external memory as a recipe file.
This option can only be configured when External Memory is selected under Access to.
Write-only: Writes recipe values to devices.
■ Read Trigger
Specifies the device that triggers batch reading values of devices and saving them to the external memory as a recipe
file.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
Each bit of the word device configured by the read trigger corresponds to a channel.
When a bit changes from 0 to 1, a read to the device is executed.
Example: When the block 1 read trigger is specified as LDR0000
LDR0000-0 corresponds to channel 1-0, LDR0000-1 to channel 1-1, through to LDR0000-15 which
corresponds to channel 1-15.
bit bit
15 0
LDR0000
Channel 1-15 Channel 1-0
■ Write Trigger
Specifies the device that triggers batch writing recipe values to devices by block.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
This option can only be configured when Read/Write or Write-only is selected under Trigger Setting.
Each bit of the word device configured by the write trigger and the read trigger corresponds to a channel.
When a bit changes from 0 to 1, a write to the device is executed.
Example: When the block 1 write trigger is specified as LDR0000
LDR0000-0 corresponds to channel 1-0, LDR0000-1 to channel 1-1, through to LDR0000-15 which
corresponds to channel 1-15.
bit bit
15 0
LDR0000
Channel 1-15 Channel 1-0
■ Monitoring Period
Shows the period to monitor the write device and the read device. This period is for detecting alarms so it is the same
as the period to monitor device states. This option is configured on the General tab in the Alarm Log Settings dialog
box.
• When recipe values are batch written to devices with Access to set to External Memory and Trigger
Setting set to Read/Write or Write-only, if no recipe file exists in the “RECIPE” folder in the External
Memory Folder on the external memory, 0 is written to all the devices.
• If a value of device reads and recipe value writes occur simultaneously, first the values of devices are
read, then the recipe values are written.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-11
3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
● Channel Tab
The Channel tab is used to configure the recipe name for the selected channel and the devices to read and write
values to.
■ Channel
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block No.: Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.
Channel No.: Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.
■ Recipe function
Selects whether or not to use the Recipe function.
Enable: Writes recipe values to devices, reads values of devices and saves them to the external memory
as a recipe file.
Disable: The Recipe function is not used.
■ Recipe Name
Enter the name for the Recipe function to differentiate the channel. The maximum number is 40 characters. The
default is “Recipen”. (n: four digit sequential number)
■ Top Device
Specifies the starting address of the destination devices for recipe values and the source devices for values of devices.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
The specified device addresses are configured sequentially from the number 1 in Data List on the Data tab.
■ Data Type
Selects the type of data for recipe values to write and values of devices that are read. For details, refer to Chapter 2
“1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Number of Data
Specifies the number of source or destination devices starting with the device address configured by Top Device.
The sequential device addresses from the starting address for the number of configured devices is displayed in Data
List on the Data tab.
The amount of data that can be set varies based on the data type. When BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), or BCD4 is
selected for Data Type, up to 8,192 items of data can be configured. When BIN32 (+), BIN32 (+/-), or BCD8 is
selected, up to 4,096 items of data can be configured.
■ Display Type
Selects the display type for Data in Data List configured on the Data tab as Decimal or Hexadecimal.
Values when saving data to a recipe file are decimal.
18-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Recipe Settings Dialog Box
● Data Tab
The Data tab is used to configure recipe values written to devices.
18
Recipe Function
■ Channel
Shows the block number and the channel number for the selected channel.
Block No.: Shows the block number for the channel selected in Settings.
Channel No.: Shows the channel number for the channel selected in Settings.
■ Data List
Enter the recipe values to write to devices for each number in the selected channel.
No.: Shows the data numbers for the amount of data specified by Number of Data.
Device: Devices are sequentially configured starting from the device address specified by Top Device
on the Channel tab.
Data: Double click a cell to enter a recipe value. The value that can be configured varies based on
Data Type and Display Type configured on the Channel tab.
When Read-only is selected under Trigger Setting on the Block tab, entering recipe values
is unnecessary.
■ Import
Displays the Open dialog box.
Select a recipe file, and then click Open to overwrite the data in Data List with the selected recipe file.
■ Export
Displays the Save As dialog box.
Select the location to save the recipe file, enter a file name, and then click Save to save the recipe file for the
selected channel.
The saved recipe file can be edited using Notepad, commercially available text editors, and spreadsheet software.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-13
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
4.1 Editing Recipe Data
You can export recipe data for the selected channel, edit the recipe values in a saved file, and import a recipe file
back into WindO/I-NV3.
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the channel number to export its recipe data in Settings, and then click Edit.
The Individual Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Click the Data tab, and then click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
18-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
4 Specify the save location in Save in, and then click Save.
The file name specified on the Block tab in the Individual Settings dialog box is entered in File name.
18
Recipe Function
5 Open the exported recipe data file.
Use Notepad, a commercially available text editor, or spreadsheet software.
6 Edit the values and save the file.
7 Return to the Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box, and then click Import.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-15
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
8 Specify the file, and then click Open.
The recipe data is imported.
9 Click OK.
The Individual Settings dialog box closes.
10 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes editing recipe data.
18-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
4.2 Creating Recipe Files
Recipe files can be created on the external memory with the following procedure. The recipe values configured on the
Data tab in the Individual Settings dialog box are saved in recipe files. 18
“Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-17
Recipe Function
“Creating Recipe Files when Downloading Project Data” on page 18-19
“Creating Recipe Files with a Text Editor” on page 18-20
● Creating Recipe Files in the Recipe Settings Dialog Box
1 Insert a USB flash drive in the computer.
Computer
USB flash drive
2 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Recipe.
The Recipe Settings dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Write Recipe Files to External Memory.
The Select Drive dialog box is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-17
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
4 Specify the drive for USB flash drive, and then click OK.
■ Drive
Specifies the drive assigned to the external memory.
■ Network
Displays the Map Network Drive dialog box. This dialog box allows you to specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Folder
Specifies the folder to save the created recipe file.
Click to display the Project Settings dialog box. You can specify the External Memory Folder used as the save
destination.
5 Click OK.
The Recipe Settings dialog box closes.
The “RECIPE” folder is created in the External Memory Folder used as the save destination, and the recipe files for the
channels configured with Access to set to External Memory and Recipe function set to Enable in the Recipe
Settings dialog box are created.
18-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
● Creating Recipe Files when Downloading Project Data
When a project download is executed, the “RECIPE” folder is created in the External Memory Folder on the external
memory inserted in the Touch and the recipe files are created. The recipe files are only created for channels
configured with Access to set to External Memory and Recipe function set to Enable in the Recipe Settings 18
dialog box.
Recipe Function
The External Memory Folder is configured in the Project Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 26
“1.5 Setting the External Memory Folder” on page 26-12.
1 Insert a USB flash drive into the Touch.
Touch
USB flash drive
2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.
If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
Click Cancel to stop to save the project data.
3 Select the Download Recipe Files to External Memory check box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-19
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
4 Verify Communication Settings, and then click Download.
Since the recipe files are downloaded to the external memory inserted in the Touch, use the same settings as when
communicating with the Touch.
To change Communication Settings, click Change to display the Communication Settings dialog box. Change
Communicate with, Port, and Baud Rate. For details, refer to Chapter 23 “1 Communicating with the Touch” on
page 23-1.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name and
enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
5 Click Yes.
The Download Project dialog box is displayed and the project files start downloading.
When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.
6 Click OK.
7 Click Close.
● Creating Recipe Files with a Text Editor
You can edit recipe files using Notepad, commercially available text editors, or spreadsheet software.
1 Write the data for the amount of data in “value of device” comma (,) new line order.
If the amount of data in the recipe file is lower than the amount of data for the top device configured on the Channel
tab in the Individual Settings dialog box, 0 is written in the rest of the devices.
2 Save the file with the “.csv” extension.
Give the file the file name configured on the Block tab in the Individual Settings dialog box. If the file name is
different, 0 is written to all the devices.
3 Copy the edited recipe files to the “RECIPE” folder in the External Memory Folder on the external memory.
18-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
4.3 Editing Recipe Files
Book1
18
100
Recipe Function
150
200
You can read and display the data saved from the Touch to
the external memory as a recipe file on a computer.
USB flash drive
Recipe File
The recipe file that was read can be edited using Notepad, commercially available text editors, or spreadsheet
software.
You can upload recipe files from the external memory using WindO/I-NV3.
On the WindO/I-NV3 Online tab, click the arrow under Upload, and then click Stored Data in External
Memory to display the Upload Data from External Memory dialog box. Select the Recipe Files check box,
specify the location to save the recipe files in Path, and then click OK to be able to save the recipe files in
the specified folder.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 18-21
4 Creating and Deleting Data for Recipes
4.4 Deleting Recipe Files
The methods to delete recipe files saved on the external memory are as follows.
To delete files with WindO/I-NV3, on the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Clear, and then click Stored Data in
External Memory to display the Clear Data in external memory dialog box. Select the Recipe Files check box,
and then click OK.
18-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 19 Text Group
This chapter describes the Text Group function and how to configure text groups and text.
1 Overview
19
1.1 How the Text Group Function is Used
Text Group
Text groups are a function where the text used for such purposes as registration text, messages for parts, chart
labels, and titles for Popup Screens are registered in advance. The registered text is loaded and displayed when
displaying parts and screens. The text can be managed collectively including editing the registered text and adding or
deleting text.
Text groups can perform the following functions.
• Switch the displayed language by value of device.
Group 1: English Group 2: Chinese Group 3: Japanese
Text ID: 1 Goal reached 䗴ᡆⴤḽ 目標達成
Touch
External device
D100 : 1 Goal reached
D100 : 2 䗴ᡆⴤḽ
D100 : 3 目標達成
• Use common text for parts.
Touch
Group 1: English
RUN STOP Text ID: 1 RUN
Base Screen 1 Text ID: 2 STOP
RUN STOP
Base Screen 2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 19-1
1 Overview
1.2 Functions that Support Text Groups
The functions that support text groups are as follows.
Item Setting
Screen Popup Screen Title
Drawings Text Text
Bit Button Registration Text
Word Button Registration Text
Buttons Goto Screen Button Registration Text
Key Button Registration Text
Selector Switch Registration Text
Pilot Lamp Registration Text
Lamps
Multi-State Lamp Registration Text
Numerical Input Unit
Message Display Message
Message Switching
Data Message
Display
Displays
Alarm List Display Message
Alarm Log Display Message, Title
Numerical Display Unit
Bar Chart X-axis and Y-axis scale labels
Charts
Line Chart X-axis and Y-axis scale labels
Alarm Log Messages displayed in data output as CSV
Data Log Labels displayed in data output as CSV
Operation Log Recorded item labels and event names displayed in data output as CSV
When the text group is switched, the displayed Base Screen is reset. Popup Screens and internal devices
have the same behavior as when the Base Screen is switched. If the Close while changing Base Screen
check box is selected on the Options tab in the properties dialog box for the Popup Screen, the displayed
Popup Screen is closed. The behavior of the internal devices differs according to the internal devices. For
details, refer to Chapter 27 “Internal Devices” on page 27-1.
19-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for text groups and text.
2.1 Creating Text Groups 19
Text Group
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Text Group.
The Text Group Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 In Number of Text Groups, specify the number of text groups to create (1 to 16).
The configured number of text groups are enabled.
3 Under Text Group Name, enter the name for each text group.
The maximum number for the Text Group name is 20 characters.
For one text group, proceed to step 7.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 19-3
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
4 In Default Group, select the text group to use when the Touch power is turned on and when switched to run mode.
5 Select the Use Dynamic Text check box.
6 With Trigger Device, specify the word device to use as the condition to switch the text group.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
These options can only be configured when Number of Text Groups is specified as two or more.
When the value of device is 0, the text group switches to the default group.
If the value of device is invalid, the text group is not switched.
7 Click OK to close the Text Group Settings dialog box.
This concludes creating text groups.
19-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
2.2 Registering Text
1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Text Manager).
Text Manager is displayed.
19
Text Group
2 With Text Group, select the text group to register text to.
The default is “1-Group 1” only. To manage text by groups, create the groups in the Text Group Settings dialog box.
Click to display the Text Group Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Text Group Settings Dialog Box” on page
19-15.
For one text group, proceed to step 3.
3 With Text ID, specify the ID number to register (1 to 32,000).
4 With Font under Text Attribute, select the font to use for the text to register from the following.
European, Japanese, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic, Windows
When Windows is selected, all the fonts installed on the computer can be used. This allows you to display
fonts and languages that are not installed on the Touch.
Click Change to display the Font Settings dialog box. Configure the details such as the font, style, and size.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
5 With Text Color under Text Attribute, select the color of the text to register (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8
shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 19-5
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
6 In Text under Text Attribute, enter the text to register.
The maximum number is 3750 characters.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected by Font. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.3
Available Text” on page 2-6.
• You can enter multi-line text by inserting a newline. The newline is displayed as \n and is counted as two
characters.
• To enter Unicode characters, click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in
the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
7 Click Add/Edit.
The text is registered and displayed in the text list.
8 Repeat steps 2 through 7 to create the necessary text in each text group.
9 Click Close.
A save confirmation message is displayed.
10 Click OK.
The confirmation message and Text Manager close.
This concludes registering text.
19-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
● Saving Registered Text as a CSV File
To use registered text in another project, save the text as a CSV file or as a text file. This file is called a text list.
1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Text Manager).
Text Manager is displayed.
19
Text Group
2 With Text Group, select the text group where the text ID to save is registered.
For one text group, proceed to step 3.
3 Click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
4 Select Save in, enter File name, and then click Save.
5 Click Close to close Text Manager.
This concludes saving a text list.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 19-7
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
● Importing Text from a Text List
A text list saved as a CSV file or as a text file can be imported into Text Manager for the project being edited.
1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Text Manager).
Text Manager is displayed.
2 With Text Group, select the text group to register the imported text to.
For one text group, proceed to step 3.
3 Click Import.
The Text Message List dialog box is displayed.
4 Click List File.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
19-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
5 Select a saved text list, and then click Open.
The text is displayed in the list.
19
Text Group
6 Click the text to import.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
7 Click OK.
If there is text with an already registered ID number in Text Manager, a confirmation message to overwrite that text
is displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the text with the ID number displayed in the confirmation message.
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all the text.
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the text with the ID number displayed in the
confirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop importing text.
8 Click Close in Text Manager.
A save confirmation message is displayed.
9 Click OK.
The confirmation message and Text Manager close.
This concludes importing text from a text list.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 19-9
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
2.3 Switching the Displayed Language by Value of Device
When multiple text groups have been created, the text group can be switched with a value of device to display a
different language.
This section describes an example when the registration text for a button changes between English, Chinese, and
Japanese.
Group 1: English Group 2: Chinese Group 3: Japanese
Text ID: 1 RUN 䘆㺂 運転
Text ID: 2 STOP ↘ڒ 停止
Touch
External device
D100 : 1 RUN STOP
Bit Button 2 (Text ID: 2)
Bit Button 1 (Text ID: 1)
D100 : 2 䘆㺂 ↘ڒ
D100 : 3 運転 停止
1 Following the steps in “Creating Text Groups” on page 19-3, specify Number of Text Groups as 3, and under Text
Group Name, enter “English” for Group 1, “Chinese” for Group 2, and “Japanese” for Group 3. Select the Use
Dynamic Text check box and set Trigger Device to D100.
2 Following the steps in “Registering Text” on page 19-5, register the text.
Group 1: English Group 2: Chinese Group 3: Japanese
Text ID: 1 RUN 䘆㺂 運転
Text ID: 2 STOP ↘ڒ 停止
3 Create a Bit Button.
On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Bit Button.
4 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Bit Button.
19-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Text Groups and Text Configuration Procedure
5 Double-click the dropped Bit Button and the properties dialog box is displayed.
19
Text Group
6 Click the Registration Text tab.
7 Select the Use Text Manager check box.
8 Specify 1 for the Text ID under OFF.
9 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
The Properties of Bit Button dialog box closes.
10 Repeat steps 3 through 9 and create a Bit Button to use text ID 2 for the registration text.
This concludes configuring the settings to switch the displayed language by a value of device.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 19-11
3 Text Manager
3 Text Manager
This section describes items and buttons in Text Manager and on the Text Group Settings dialog box.
3.1 Text Manager
The text that is loaded and displayed when objects and Popup Screens are displayed is collectively managed with
Text Manager.
■ Text ID
Shows the ID number (1 to 32,000).
When registering text, specify the ID number to register (1 to 32,000).
When using registered text when displaying parts and screens, specify the ID number to use (1 to 32,000).
■ Text Group
Selects the group where text is registered.
The default is “1-Group 1” only. To manage text by groups, create the groups in the Text Group Settings dialog box.
Click to display the Text Group Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Text Group Settings Dialog Box” on page
19-15.
■ Text Attribute
This area configures the text to register and the font and color for the text.
Font: Selects the font used for displaying text from the following.
European, Japanese, Chinese, Taiwanese, Korean, Central European, Baltic, Cyrillic,
Windows
Text Color: Selects the color of the text to register (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Click Color to display the Color Palette. Select a color from the Color Palette.
Text: Enter the text to register here. The maximum number is 3,750 characters.
The characters that can be entered vary based on the font selected by Font. For details, refer
to Chapter 2 “1.3 Available Text” on page 2-6.
19-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Text Manager
Windows Font: Sets the font to be used as the Windows Font.
Select Windows using Font to display the current setting. To change the setting, click Change
to display the Font Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Windows Font” on page 2-13.
• You can enter multi-line text by inserting a newline. The newline is displayed as \n and is counted as two
characters. 19
• To enter Unicode characters, click to display the Unicode Input dialog box. Enter the characters in
Text Group
the Unicode Input dialog box, and then click OK.
■ Text Messages List
The attributes for the registered text are displayed in this list.
ID: Shows the ID number (1 to 32,000).
Font: Shows the font to use to display the registered text.
Color ID: Shows the color ID for the registered text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Message: Shows the registered text.
■ Add/Edit
Registers the settings in Text Attribute to the ID number specified by Text ID. When you specify an ID number
that is already registered, that ID number is overwritten with the new settings. The registered text and its attributes
are displayed in the Text Messages List.
.
■ Delete
Deletes the text with the ID number selected in the Text Messages List. Click this button and the Confirm Message
Delete Dialog dialog box is displayed.
• Click Yes to delete the text with the ID number displayed in the confirmation message from all the text groups.
• Click Yes To All to delete the text for all the ID numbers selected in the Text Messages List from all the text
groups.
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without deleting the text with the ID number displayed in the
confirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop deleting the text.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
■ Reduce
Deletes the text with ID numbers that are registered in the Text Message List but are not used in the project. This can
decrease the amount of project data and reduce the amount of internal memory used on the Touch.
■ Find
Displays the Find dialog box.
The text entered in Find what is searched for in Message in the Text Messages List.
When Find is clicked after selecting a range of text, it will only search within the selected range.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 19-13
3 Text Manager
■ Replace
Displays the Replace dialog box.
The text entered in Find what is searched for in Message in the Text Messages List and that text is replaced with
the text entered in Replace with.
When Replace is clicked after selecting a range of text, it will only search and replace within the selected
range.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
■ Import
Imports text in a text list saved as a CSV file or as a text file.
Click this button to display the Text Message List dialog box. For details, refer to “Importing Text from a Text List” on
page 19-8.
■ Export
Saves the text for the text group being edited as a CSV file or as a text file. This file is called a text list. The types of
files that can be saved are as follows.
• CSV file (comma delimited) (*.csv)
• CSV file (semicolon delimited) (*.csv)
• Text file (comma delimited) (*.txt)
• Text file (semicolon delimited) (*.txt)
• Unicode text file (tab delimited) (*.txt)
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving Registered Text as a CSV File” on page
19-7.
The saved text list can be imported with Import.
When Unicode text file (tab delimited) (*.txt) is selected, the file can handle multiple languages by
using a commercially available text editor or spreadsheet software that supports Unicode.
■ Other Groups
When text with the same ID number as the text selected in the Text Messages List is registered to other text
groups, that text is displayed in this list.
Group Name: Shows the group name.
Font: Shows the font for the registered text.
Color ID: Shows the color ID for the registered text (color: 256 colors, monochrome: 8 shades).
Message: Shows the registered text.
■ Select
Closes Text Manager and sets the ID number selected in Text Manager Text Messages List in the dialog box or
screen that opened Text Manager. This button is only enabled when Text Manager was called from the properties
dialog box of an object.
■ Close
Closes Text Manager.
When Text Manager was called from the properties dialog box of an object, Add/Edit, Delete, Reduce,
Replace, Import, and Export are disabled. These buttons are only enabled when Text Manager is
displayed with the following operations.
• Double click Text Manager in the Project window
• On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Text Manager)
19-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Text Manager
3.2 Text Group Settings Dialog Box
The groups for switching text are managed in the Text Group Settings dialog box.
19
Text Group
■ Number of Text Groups
Specifies the number of text groups (1 to 16). The configured number of text groups are created.
■ Text Group Name
Enters the names of the text groups.
The maximum number for the Text Group name is 20 characters.
■ Default Group
Select the group to use when the Touch power is turned on and when switching to run mode.
■ Use Dynamic Text
Select this check box to switch the text group according to the value of device.
Specify the word device to use as the condition to switch the text group.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
These options can only be configured when Number of Text Groups is specified as two or more.
When the value of device is 0, the text group switches to the text group set as the default group.
If the value of device is invalid, the text group is not switched.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 19-15
3 Text Manager
19-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 20 Script
This chapter describes the script function, editing and management of the script, definition method, and definition
sample.
1 About the Script Function
1.1 Overview of the Script Function 20
Script
● What is the script function?
Complex processes such as conditional branching, logical operation, arithmetic operation, functions, etc., can be
programmed in a text format using Script Function.
LM100 LM101
As an example, the logical product (AND) calculation described as in a ladder diagram is described as
[LM 100] & [LM 101] in text format in the script.
■ Description and management of the script
The script is programmed by WindO/I-NV3 script editor, and managed by Script Manager.
• By using the Script Editor, conditional expressions, operators, and functions can be described by selecting
them from a list, and an error in the script can also be determined. The script can also be exported as a
text file, so the script can be edited by a text editor such as Notepad, and the edited script can be
imported back into the Script Editor by saving it as a text file.
For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.
• Script Manager can manage the script collectively by adding, deleting, organizing, etc., the script created
by the Script Editor.
For details, refer to “2.2 Script Manager” on page 20-7.
■ Example of using the script
As an example, when reading the data from the external device and displaying on the Touch, the load on the external
device can be reduced for processes such as conditional branching or function calculation, which apply a heavy load
on the external device, by processing it with a script on the Touch.
// Change the additional value D10 0
// depending on the value of D10
if ([D 10] <= 9) D11 10
Read the data not processed
{ [D 10] = [D 10] + 10; } D12 30
else
{ [D 10] = [D 10] + 20; } D13 50
// Change the additional value
// depending on the value of D11 Touch
External device
if ([D 11] <= 19)
{ [D 11] = [D 11] + 20; }
else
{ [D 11] = [D 11] + 40; } Process with script to decrease
// Change the additional value the load of external device.
// depending on the value of D12
if ([D 12] <= 29)
{ [D 12] = [D 12] + 30; }
else
{ [D 12] = [D 12] + 60; }
// Change the additional value
// depending on the value of D13 D10 0 → 10 D10 10
if ([D 13] <= 39) D11 10 → 30 D11 30
{ [D 13] = [D 13] + 40; } Write the result
else D12 30 → 90 D12 90
{ [D 13] = [D 13] + 80; } D13 50 → 130 D13 130
Get the result by processing with script
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-1
1 About the Script Function
1.2 Types and Trigger Conditions of the Script
● Types of scripts
There are three types of scripts used.
■ Script Command
This is a script that executes in accordance with trigger conditions in the same way as other parts, such as buttons or
lamps, for each screen.
• It is executed only in the screens where it is placed.
• Multiple scripts can be set for each screen.
For details, refer to Chapter 11 “4 Script Command” on page 11-25.
■ Global Script
This is a script that operates within the whole project. This script is executed at the end of Touch scan process in
accordance with the trigger condition.
Only one global script can be set to a project.
For details about setup, refer to “3 Global Script” on page 20-12.
● Trigger condition of the script
Trigger conditions that can be set for the script are as follows:
Trigger Condition
While
Script Falling- Satisfy the satisfying
Rising-edge Fixed Period Always ON
edge condition the
condition
Script Command YES YES YES YES YES NO
Global Script YES YES NO NO YES YES
■ Rising-edge
Script is executed when trigger device changes from 0 to 1.
■ Falling-edge
Script is executed when trigger device changes from 1 to 0.
■ Satisfy the condition
Script is executed when the set condition is met.
This can only be set for the Script Command.
■ While satisfying the condition
Script is executed while the set condition is met.
This can only be set for the Script Command.
■ Fixed Period
Script is executed at set intervals.
■ Always ON
Script is executed on every scan of the Touch.
This can only be set for the Global Script.
20-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 About the Script Function
1.3 Data Type of the Script
It is required to set the data type appropriate for the range of data to be used, such as the maximum and minimum
values of the data used in the script, negative numbers or real numbers required, etc., considering what is to be
processed with the script.
Data type is set by the Script Editor.
For the setting method, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.
● Data Types
20
Script
There are seven types of data that can be processed by the script function.
For details about the data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Types of the data Required
Range that can be processed
type word count
BIN16 (+) 1 0 to 65535
BIN16 (+/-) 1 -32768 to 32767
BIN32 (+) 2 0 to 4294967295
BIN32 (+/-) 2 -2147483648 to 2147483647
BCD4 1 -999 to 9999
BCD8 2 -9999999 to 99999999
-3.4×1038 to -1.18×10-38
float32 2 0
1.18×10-38 to 3.4×1038
There are functions that cannot be used when the data types are different. Please refer to the format list.
For details, refer to “4 Script Definition Method” on page 20-14.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-3
1 About the Script Function
1.4 Script Error
This section describes the types, cause, and information of script errors.
● Types and causes of script errors
Script will stop running when an error occurs.
Types of script error Cause
Dividend was divided by 0 for division and residue calculation.
Processing error
Data types are BCD, float32, and value out of range is specified.
Execution time over error The execution time for one script exceeded 3,000 milliseconds.
Writing count error Data count written to the external device address in one script has exceeded 64.
Indirect read from external device address is performed while the HMI Special
Internal Relay LSM14 or LSM15 is 1.
Indirect device error
Indirect read or indirect write of external device address is performed with the
Global Script.
Value out of range was specified as argument for LINE function, RECTANGLE
Parameter error
function, or CIRCLE function.
● Error information
Script error information is stored in the following locations. An error message is displayed on the screen when a script
error has occurred.
Category Storage location Stored value
Bit 10 of the System Area address 0 No error
Existence of a script error
+2 1 Error
1 to
Script ID of the script with an error HMI Special Data Register LSD52 Script ID
32,000
1 Processing error
2 Execution time over error
3 Writing count error
Types of script errors HMI Special Data Register LSD53
4 Indirect device error
5 Parameter error
7 Fixed interval execution error
If there is a script error, bit 10 (11th bit) of the starting device +2 (third word from the beginning) of the
System Area will be 1.
System Area 1 System Area 2 System Area 3 System Area 4
Starting device +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9
1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word 5th word 6th word 7th word 8th word 9th word 10th word
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
11th bit
The starting device of the System Area is set in the System tab of the Project Settings dialog box.
For details about the System Area, refer to Chapter 3 “System Area” on page 3-22.
20-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Editing and Management of the Script
2 Editing and Management of the Script
2.1 Script Registration Procedure
This section describes the procedure to create a script and register it in the project.
The registered script can be used in a Multi-Button, Script Command, Multi-Command and Global Script.
1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Script Manager).
20
Script
Script Manager opens.
2 Click Add.
Script Editor opens.
3 Specify Script ID.
When creating a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 32000).
4 Enter Script Name.
The maximum number for the script name is 40 characters.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-5
2 Editing and Management of the Script
5 Select Data Type.
Be sure to match the Data Type of the script with the types of data being used within the script.
For example, if the script contains numbers with decimals, the Data Type of the script would be float32. If
the script contains only whole numbers between 0 and 65535, the Data Type of the script would be
BIN16(+).
6 Code a program in Script.
To create a script using the samples provided by WindO/I-NV3, under Function List, select Category and
Function, and then click Insert Format. The sample shown in Format is inserted at the cursor position in
Script.
7 When the script is finished, click OK.
The created script is shown in Script List.
8 Click Close on Script Manager.
A save confirmation message is displayed.
9 Click OK.
The scripts are saved in the project data and Script Manager closes.
If you click Cancel, Script Manager closes without saving the scripts.
When you are in the following dialog boxes, clicking will open Script Manager. When you close Script
Manager, you will be taken back to the original dialog box.
• Global Script General tab
• Script Command properties General tab
• Multi-function script properties for Multi-Buttons and Multi-Commands
20-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Editing and Management of the Script
2.2 Script Manager
Script Manager can add, delete and manage the script created by Script Editor.
20
Script
■ Script List
Displays a list of registered scripts.
Script ID: Displays the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the registered scripts.
Error: OK is displayed when there is no error in the registered script and NG is displayed when there is an error.
Script Name: Displays the script name of the registered scripts.
■ Script
Displays the contents of the script selected in the script list.
■ Add
Displays the Script Editor dialog box to add a script.
For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on page 20-8.
■ Edit
Displays the Script Editor dialog box to allow editing of the selected script. For details, refer to “2.3 Script Editor” on
page 20-8.
■ Delete
Deletes the script selected in the script list.
If a script is used in a project or parts, it cannot be deleted.
■ Reduce
Deletes the scripts that are registered in the script list but are not used in the project.
■ Select
The highlighted script in the script list is selected and Script Manager is closed.
■ Close
Closes Script Manager.
When Close is clicked after a change has been made in the script list, a confirmation message to save is
displayed. The change will be saved when OK is clicked. The change will be discarded and Script Manager
closed when Cancel is clicked.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-7
2 Editing and Management of the Script
2.3 Script Editor
A new script can be created or the script selected in Script Manager can be edited using Script Editor.
(Description)
■ Script ID
To create a new script, enter the script ID (1 to 32,000).
To edit an existing script, the set script ID is displayed.
■ Script Name
Enter the script name. The maximum number for script name is 40 characters.
■ Data Type
Select the data type to be processed by the script.
For details about the data type, refer to “1.3 Data Type of the Script” on page 20-3.
■ Script
Enter the script.
Single script limitation is 240 characters per line with up to 1024 lines.
■ Error Check
The script being edited is checked for errors.
■ Import
The Open dialog box is displayed.
By selecting a script saved (exported) in a text format (*.txt) and clicking Open, the imported script is inserted at the
cursor position of the script being edited.
20-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Editing and Management of the Script
■ Export
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
By selecting a save location and clicking Save, the script being edited is saved in text format (*.txt). A saved script
can be inserted in the script clicking Import.
20
Script
■ Options
The Options dialog box is displayed.
The fonts and color of the text, tab indents, etc., used in the Script text box are set in the Options dialog box. For
details, refer to “Script Formatting Options dialog box” on page 20-11.
■ Find
The Find dialog box is displayed.
Enter the text to be searched for in the Find What box.
When Find is clicked after selecting a range in the Script text box, it will only search within the selected
range.
■ Replace
The Replace dialog box is displayed.
Text entered in Find what will be replaced with the text entered in Replace with.
• This is useful when replacing device addresses.
• When Replace is clicked after selecting a range in the Script text box, it will only search and replace
within the selected range.
■ Show/Hide Function List
Switches between showing and not showing the Function List and Script Compilation Output.
The size of the script edit box can be changed by dragging the right bottom corner of the Script Editor. By
hiding the Function List and Script Compilation Output, the script editing area (text box) will become
larger, making the editing of script easier.
■ Cursor
Displays the current position of the cursor in the Script text box by line number and column number.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-9
2 Editing and Management of the Script
■ Function list
Category: Lists the categories of the functions.
Function: Lists the functions of the selected category.
Format: Displays the definition example of the selected function.
(Description): Displays the description of the selected function.
Insert Format: Contents displayed in the selected Format are inserted at the cursor position.
Insert Device: The Device Address Settings box is displayed.
By specifying the device address and clicking on OK, specified device address is inserted
at the cursor position.
■ Script Compilation Output
The contents of any errors found when using error check are displayed.
By double-clicking on the comment displayed in the Script Compilation Output, the part corresponding to the error
is highlighted in the Script text box.
Depending on the error, there may be an error in the line that is different from the line displayed in the
Script Compilation Output, or multiple errors may be displayed.
■ OK
Error check is performed for the script being edited and save it.
If there is an error in the script being edited, a message will appear before saving the script. It is possible to
save a script with an error.
■ Cancel
Closes Script Editor without saving the script being edited.
20-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Editing and Management of the Script
● Script Formatting Options dialog box
Font, Size, Tab indent, and Color used in the Script text box of the Script Editor can be specified.
20
Script
■ Font
The font name for the text displayed in the Script is entered or selected.
■ Size
The font size (dots) for the text displayed in the Script is entered or selected.
■ Sample
Displays a sample of the text with the Font and Size as specified in the Script text box.
■ Tab indent
Specify the position of the indent when a tab is inserted (1 to 20).
■ Color
Displays each of the text colors for Comment, Keyword, and Device.
The Color dialog box is displayed when the color button is clicked.
Text other than comment, keyword, or device is displayed in black.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-11
3 Global Script
3 Global Script
A Global Script is a script that operates throughout the entire project, regardless of which screen is currently being
displayed. Only one Global Script can be set for a project. This script is executed at the end of scan process of Touch
in accordance with the trigger condition.
3.1 Setting procedures for Global Script
Global Script is setup using the following procedures.
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Global Script.
The Global Script dialog box is displayed.
2 Click General tab and Trigger Condition tab.
Set or confirm the items displayed in each of the tabs.
● General Tab
■ Use Global Script
To use the Global Script, select the Use Global Script check box.
With Global Script, you cannot do indirect read and indirect write of the external device addresses.
(It can be setup in WindO/I-NV3, but it will not operate on the Touch.)
■ Script ID
Specify the script ID (1 to 32,000) of the script to operate.
Script Manager is displayed when is clicked. The script can be selected from the script list of Script Manager. For
details, refer to “2.2 Script Manager” on page 20-7.
■ Script Name
Displays the name of the script specified by the script ID.
■ Script
Displays the contents of the script specified by the script ID.
20-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Global Script
● Trigger Condition Tab
20
Script
■ Trigger Type
Specify the condition to execute the script.
Rising-edge: Script is executed when trigger device changes from 0 to 1.
Falling-edge: Script is executed when trigger device changes from 1 to 0.
Always ON: Script is executed constantly.
Fixed Period: Script is executed at set intervals.
■ Device
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device.
This is enabled only when Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected in Trigger Type.
■ Period (sec)
Specify the scan frequency in seconds (1 to 3,600).
This is enabled only when Fixed Period is selected in Trigger Type.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-13
4 Script Definition Method
4 Script Definition Method
4.1 Format List
This section describes the format and operation of control statements, operators, functions, etc.
Enter everything except comments in single-byte. For specific definition examples, refer to “5 Script Coding
Examples” on page 20-22.
● Control statements
Conditional expressions are described as Cond. expr. , Cond. expr. 1 , Cond. expr. 2 here. Execution lines are described as
Exe. line , Exe. line 1 , Exe. line 2 ...
■ Conditional branching
Format Description
if ( Cond. expr. )
Execution line is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.
{ Exe. line ; }
if ( Cond. expr. )
{ Exe. line 1 ; } Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression is satisfied.
else Execution line 2 is executed if it is not satisfied.
if { Exe. line 2 ; }
else
else if if ( Cond. expr. 1 )
Execution line 1 is executed if the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
{ Exe. line 1 ; }
Conditional expression 2 is determined if conditional expression 1 is not
else if ( Cond. expr. 2 )
satisfied, and execution line 2 is executed if conditional expression 2 is
{ Exe. line 2 ; } satisfied.
else Execution line 3 is executed if conditional expression 2 is not satisfied too.
{ Exe. line 3 ; }
switch ( Cond. expr. )
{
case constant 1:
Exe. line 1 ; Execution line 1 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches
break; constant 1.
switch case constant2: Execution line 2 is executed if the value of conditional expression matches
case constant 2.
Exe. line 2 ;
default
break; Execution line 3 is executed if the value of conditional expression does not
default: match constant 1 nor constant 2.
Exe. line 3 :
break;
}
■ Repeat
Format Description
Execution line is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression is
while ( Cond. expr. ) satisfied.
{ • It will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is always
while
Exe. line ; satisfied, so do not set fixed values or devices that do not change as the
} conditional expression.
• Do not write a value to the external device address in the while definition.
20-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Script Definition Method
■ Halt and exit
Format Description
while ( Cond. expr. 1 )
{
if ( Cond. expr. 2 )
Process will be as follows while the conditional expression 1 is satisfied.
{
• Execution line 2 is continuously executed while the conditional expression 2 is
Exe. line 1 ;
break not satisfied.
break;
• Once the conditional expression is satisfied, it will go out of the loop by break
}
Exe. line 2 ;
(not executing execution line 2), and execution line 3 is executed. 20
}
Script
Exe. line 3 ;
switch ( Cond. expr. )
{
case constant 1:
Exe. line 1 ; When the conditional expression 2 matches the constant 1, it will halt the
break;
break determination of constant 2 by break after executing execution line 1, and
case constant 2:
process will move to execution line 3.
Exe. line 2 ;
break;
}
Exe. line 3 ;
return return; It will exit the script, and execute the next parts or script.
● Operator
Device, constant, and temporary device are described as a , b here, and expression is described as Expr. ,
Expr. 1 , Expr. 2 .
■ Relational operator
Operator Format Description
== a == b Compares if a is equal to b .
!= a != b Compares if a is not equal to b .
< a < b Compares if a is less than b .
<= a <= b Compares if a is equal or less than b .
> a > b Compares if a is greater than b .
>= a >= b Compares if a is equal or greater than b .
■ Logical operator
Operator Format Description
&& ( Expr. 1 ) && ( Expr. 2 ) Calculates the logical product (AND) of Expr. 1 and Expr. 2 .
|| ( Expr. 1 ) || ( Expr. 2 ) Calculates the logical sum (OR) of Expr. 1 and Expr. 2 .
! !( Expr. ) Reverses the logic of Expr. .
■ Arithmetic operator
Operator Format Description
+ a + b Adds a and b .
- a - b Subtracts b from a .
* a * b Multiplies a and b .
/ a / b Divides a by b .
% a % b Calculates remainder after dividing a by b .
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-15
4 Script Definition Method
■ Bit operator
Operator Format Description
& a & b Calculates the logical product (AND) of each bit of a and b .
| a | b Calculates the logical sum (OR) of each bit of a and b .
^ a ^ b Calculates the exclusive logical sum (XOR) of each bit of a and b .
Reverses the logic of each bits of a .
~ ~ a For word device and fixed values, 0 will be 65535, and 65535 will be 0.
For bit device, 0 will be 1, and 1 will be 0.
<< a << b Shifts each bit of a to left for b bit(s).
>> a >> b Shifts each bit of a to right for b bit(s).
● Function
Device, constant, and temporary device are described as a , b , c , d ... here.
■ Bit function
Function Format Description
Turns bit device a to 1.
Bit set SET( a );
It will be same result as a = 1;.
Turns bit device a to 0.
Bit reset RST( a );
It will be same result as a = 0;.
Reverses the 1 and 0 of bit device a .
Bit reverse REV( a );
It will be same result as a =~ a ;.
■ Word function
Arithmetic operation
Function Format Description
Maximum value out of a , b , c is returned.
Maximum
value
MAX( a , b , c ) • This can be used for all data types.
• Up to 15 arguments can be defined.
Minimum value out of a , b , c is returned.
Minimum
value
MIN( a , b , c ) • This can be used for all data types.
• Up to 15 arguments can be defined.
Exponential Exponential function of a is returned.
function
EXP( a )
• This can only be used for data type float32.
Natural Natural logarithm (base is e) for a is returned.
logarithm LOGE( a ) • This can only be used for data type float32.
(Base: e) • Set a value larger than 0 for argument.
Common Common logarithm (base is 10) for a is returned.
logarithm LOG10( a ) • This can only be used for data type float32.
(Base: 10) • Set a value larger than 0 for argument.
a to the b power is returned.
Exponentiation POW( a , b )
• This can only be used for data type float32.
(Continued to next page)
20-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Script Definition Method
Arithmetic operation (Continued)
Function Format Description
Square root of a is returned.
Square root ROOT( a )
• This can only be used for data type float32.
Sine of a (-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula to represent
Sine SIN( a ) angle (units in radian) for argument a .
• This can only be used for data type float32.
Cosine of a (-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula to
20
Cosine represent angle (units in radian) for argument .
Script
COS( a ) a
• This can only be used for data type float32.
Tangent of a (-1 - +1) is returned. Specify arbitrary formula to
Tangent TAN( a ) represent angle (units in radian) for argument a .
• This can only be used for data type float32.
Arcsine of a (-1 - +1) in radian value (-π/2 - +π/2) is returned.
Arcsine ASIN( a ) Specify arbitrary formula for argument a .
• This can only be used for data type float32.
Arccosine of a (-1 - +1) in radian value (0 - π) is returned.
Arccosine ACOS( a ) Specify arbitrary formula for argument a .
• This can only be used for data type float32.
Arctangent of a (-1 - +1) in radian value (-π/2 - +π/2) is returned.
Arctangent ATAN( a ); Specify arbitrary formula for argument a .
• This can only be used for data type float32.
Conversion Value of a is converted from degree (°) to radian, and the value is returned.
from Angle to RAD( a );
Radian • This can only be used for data type float32.
Conversion Value of a is converted from radian to degree (°), and the value is returned.
from Radian DEG( a );
to Angle • This can only be used for data type float32.
Data type conversion
Function Format Description
Conversion BCD value of a is returned in binary value.
from BCD to BCD2BIN( a ) • This can be used with data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
Binary and BIN32 (+/-).
Conversion Binary value of a is returned in BCD value.
from Binary to BIN2BCD( a ) • This can be used with data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
BCD and BIN32 (+/-).
Conversion Float32 value of a is returned in binary value.
from float32 FLOAT2BIN( a ) Values under the decimal point is truncated.
to Binary • This can be used with data types BIN32 (+) and BIN32 (+/-).
Conversion Binary value of a is returned in float32 value.
from Binary to BIN2FLOAT( a )
float32 • This can be used with data types BIN32 (+) and BIN32 (+/-).
Conversion Decimal number value b is converted to a character string, and store
from Decimal in order with a as a starting device.
to String
DEC2ASCII( a , b )
• This can be used with data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
character BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.
Conversion Character string a is returned as decimal number value.
from String
character to
ASCII2DEC( a ) • This can be used with data types BIN16 (+), BIN16 (+/-), BIN32 (+),
Decimal BIN32 (+/-), BCD4, and BCD8.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-17
4 Script Definition Method
Data comparison and copy
Function Format Description
a : Starting device of comparison target 1
b : Starting device of comparison target 2
c : Range of comparison (in words)
Values of device a for c words and values of device b
Data
comparison
MEMCMP( a , b , c ) for c words are compared.
1 is returned if all the values of devices match, and 0 is returned if any
of the value does not match.
• Specified range is compared in word unit, and result is returned.
• Up to 64 words can be compared.
a : Starting device of copy source
b : Starting device of copy target
c : Range of copy (in words)
Data copy MEMCPY( a , b , c ) Values from a for c words are copied to b for c
words respectively.
• Specified range is copied in word unit.
• Up to 64 words can be copied.
Character string operation
Only internal devices can be specified as an argument for character string operation function.
Termination character NULL (0x00) is treated as end of character string when character string is handled. Also,
termination character NULL is not included in the length of the character string.
Function Format Description
a : Starting device of copy target
b : Starting device containing copy source character string
c : Start location of copy (0-127)
Character
STRCUT( a , b , c , d ) d : Number of characters to copy (1-128)
string copy
From the character string starting from b , character string
from c bytes forward for d characters are stored into
a for d characters.
Character Number of characters for character string starting from a is
STRLEN( a )
number count returned.
Character To the character string starting from a , the character string
string STRCAT( a , b ) starting from b is concatenated, and a is returned to
concatenation beginning.
From the character string starting from a , character string
Character starting from b is searched, and location found (number of
STRSTR( a , b ) characters from beginning -1) is returned.
string search
The maximum number for character string to search is 128
characters.
20-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Script Definition Method
Draw
• This is a function to draw an object on the screen. Top left corner of the screen is coordinates X=0 and Y=0.
• When a device is used as an argument, an object is drawn with the changed value when the value is changed.
However, the object that is already drawn is not erased. To erase the drawn object, overwrite it with the
background color.
• When an out-of-range value is used as an argument, 5 is stored in the LSD53 and script is halted.
Function Format Description
Straight line connecting the start coordinate and end coordinate is drawn.
a : Start coordinate X, b : Start coordinate Y, c : End
coordinate X, d : End coordinate Y, e : Line width,
f : Line type, g : Line color
20
LINE( a , b , c , d • e : Line width, f : Line type, g : Line color can be
Script
, e , f , g ) omitted.
• Specification of e : Line width is as follows:
Set value 1 2 3 5
Line width 1 dot 2 dots 3 dots 5 dots
Drawing of
It will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
straight line
• Specification of f : Line type is as follows.
Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6
Line type Solid Dot Dash Long Dash Long Dash Long Dash
Dot Dot Dot
LINE( a , b , c , d ) It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width is
set to anything other than 1 (1 dot).
• g : Line color is specified by the color data. It will be set to
255 (white) when omitted.
For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.
Rectangle with left top corner as start coordinate and bottom
right corner as end coordinate is drawn.
a : Start coordinate X, b : Start coordinate Y, c : End
coordinate X, d : End coordinate Y, e : Line width, f : Line
type, g : Foreground color, h : Background color, i :
Pattern, j : Rounded corner type, k : Rounded corner radius
• e : Line width, f : Line type, g : Foreground color,
h : Background color, i : Pattern, j : Rounded
RECTANGLE( a , b , c
corner type, k : Rounded corner radius can be omitted.
, d , e , f
, g , h , i • Specification of e : Line width is as follows:
, j , k ) Set value 1 2 3 5
Line width 1 dot 2 dots 3 dots 5 dots
It will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
• Specification of f : Line type is as follows.
Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6
Long Dash Long Dash
Line type Solid Dot Dash Long Dash
Dot Dot Dot
It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width is
Drawing of set to anything other than 1 (1 dot).
Rectangle • g : Foreground color, h : Background color is specified
by the color data. It will be set to 255 (white) when omitted.
For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.
• Specification of i : Pattern is as follows.
Set
0 2 3 4 7 8
value
Line Foreground Foreground Foreground Background Horizontal
None
type 100% 25% 50% 100% lines
RECTANGLE( a , b , c Set
9 10 11 12 13
, d ) value
Line Vertical Slant Slant
Cross-hatch Tint
type lines Upwards Down-wards
It will be set to 0 (None) when omitted.
• Specification of j : Rounded corner type is as follows.
Set value 0 1 2
Line type None Straight Curve
It will be set to 0 (None) when omitted.
• k : Rounded corner radius is specified with number of dots (0 - 200).
It will be set to 0 (0 dot) when omitted.
(Continued to next page)
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-19
4 Script Definition Method
Draw (Continued)
Function Format Description
A circle with specified radius from center coordinate is drawn.
a : Center coordinate X, b : Center coordinate Y, c :
X axis radius,
d : Y axis radius, e : Line width, f : Line type,
g : Foreground color,
CIRCLE( a , b , c , d h: Background color, i : Pattern
, e , f , g , h • e : Line width, f : Line type, g : Foreground color,
, i ) h : Background color, i : Pattern can be omitted.
• Specification of e : Line width is as follows:
Set value 1 2 3 5
Line width 1 dot 2 dots 3 dots 5 dots
It will be set to 1 (1 dot) when omitted.
• Specification of f : Line type is as follows.
Drawing Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6
of circle Long Dash Long Dash
and ellipse Line type Solid Dot Dash Long Dash
Dot Dot Dot
It will be set to 1 (Solid) when omitted or when the line width is
set to anything other than 1 (1 dot).
• g : Foreground color, h : Background color is specified
by the color data. It will be set to 255 (white) when omitted.
For color data, refer to Appendix “1 Color Number
Correspondence Table” on page A-1.
CIRCLE( a , b , c , d ) • Specification of i : Pattern is as follows.
Set value 0 2 3 4 7 8
Foreground Foreground Foreground Background Horizontal
Line type None
100% 25% 50% 100% lines
Set value 9 10 11 12 13
Vertical Slant Slant
Line type Cross-hatch Tint
lines Upwards Down-wards
It will be set to 0 (none) when omitted.
Offset
Function Format Description
a : Reference device
b : Device to store the indirect value (0 to 32767)
Specify the device b words from a .
Indirect read
Specify OFFSET function to the right of the assignment
statement.
Format example: c = OFFSET( a , b )
Operation: Stores the value of device in b words
Indirect
OFFSET( a , b ) from a into c .
specification
Indirect write
Specify OFFSET function to the left of the assignment statement.
Format example:OFFSET( a , b ) = c
Operation: Stores the value of c into the device
b words from a .
• Store the value appropriate for the data type as the indirect
value. As an example, when the data type is BCD4, store the
indirect value of BCD4 into the device.
20-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Script Definition Method
● Other
This section provides definitions for constant, device, temporary device, and comment.
■ Constant
Constant can be defined as decimal or hexadecimal numbers.
Sample definition of decimal numbers
1234 Define the numeric value directly.
-1234 Define the negative number with a “-” (minus) symbol at the beginning. 20
12.34 Decimal number can be defined for real numbers (float32).
Script
Define a “.” (period) between the whole numbers and decimal numbers.
There are 2 ways to define hexadecimal numbers.
Sample definition of hexadecimal numbers
0x12AB Define “0” (zero) and “x” (lower case x) at the beginning of the value.
12ABh Append “h” at the tail of the value.
■ Device Address
Device Address is defined with the device symbol and address within “[” and “]”.
Definition of the device
[Device symbol address] (“ ” represents a space.)
Sample definition
[LDR 100]
■ Temporary Device
Temporary device is a device that can be used only with the script. It can store a value and can be used as a variable.
It is defined with a device symbol “@” followed by address (1 to 16).
Definition of the temporary device
@Address (Space between the device symbol “@” and address is not required.)
Sample definition
@2 Temporary device number 2
All the values for temporary devices are set to “0” when the execution of the script is started.
■ Comment
A note defined in the script is called a comment. The line with “//” defined at the beginning of a line will become a comment.
“//” is defined with a single-byte. Double-byte characters can be used after “//”.
Definition of comment
// Arbitrary note
Sample definition
// Store the initial value to calculation ¬This line is not executed.
data [LDR 100] for process A
[LDR 100] = 1234;
:
:
• It will be useful to use comments to explain the contents of the script (especially when the editor of the
script has changed or some time has passed since editing).
• Comments are ignored (not executed) when the script is executed, so they can be defined freely without
worrying about the execution time.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-21
5 Script Coding Examples
5 Script Coding Examples
This section provides script coding examples for control statements, arithmetic operators, and functions, as well as
the descriptions of their operations.
5.1 Control Statements
■ Example 5.1.1 Conditional branch
Script
if ([LDR 100])
{
[LDR 200] = 100;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.2 Conditional branching
Script
if ([LM 100])
{
[LDR 200] = [LDR 300] + [LDR 400] + [LDR 500];
}
Operation description
If the value of LM100 is not 0, then LDR300, LDR400, and LDR500 are added and that value is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.3 Conditional branching
Script
if (0 != [LDR 100])
{
if (0 != [LDR 200])
{
[LDR 300] = 0x1234;
}
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 and the value of LDR200 is also not 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 and the value of LDR200 is 0, then nothing is executed.
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR200.
20-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.1.4 Conditional branching
Script
if ((0 != [LDR 100]) || (0 != [LDR 200]))
{
[LDR 300] = 100;
}
else
{
[LDR 400] = [LDR 500] + 100; 20
}
Script
Operation description
If either the value of LDR100 or the value of LDR200 is not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of both LDR100 and LDR200 is 0, 100 is added to LDR500 and that value is stored in LDR400.
■ Example 5.1.5 Conditional branching
Script
if ([LDR 100] == 0)
{
[LDR 200] = 0x1234;
}
else if ([LDR 100] == 1)
{
[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
}
else
{
[LDR 200] = 0x9999;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or 1, then 0x9999 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.6 Conditional branching
Script
if ([LDR 100])
{
if ([LDR 200])
{
if ([LDR300])
{
[LDR 400] = 100;
}
else
{
[LDR 400] = 200;
}
}
}
Operation description
If the values of LDR100, LDR200, and LDR300 are all not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR400.
If the values of LDR100 and LDR200 are not 0 and the value of LDR300 is 0, then 200 is stored in LDR400.
If either the value of LDR100 or LDR200 is 0, then nothing is executed regardless of the value of LDR300.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-23
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.1.7 Iteration
Script
[LDR 100] = 10;
[LDR 200] = 10;
while (0 < [LDR 100])
{
[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
[LDR 100] = [LDR 100] - 1;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is larger than 0, then 1 is repeatedly added to the value of LDR200 and 1 is repeatedly
subtracted from the value of LDR100.
In the script example above, when the while statement repeats ten times, the value of LDR100 becomes 0 and the
while statement ends.
After this script executes, the value of LDR100 is 0 and the value of LDR200 is 20.
■ Example 5.1.8 Iteration
Script
[LDR 100] = 0;
[LDR 200] = 3;
[LDR 300] = 5;
while ([LDR 100] == 0)
{
[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
if ([LDR 300] = [LDR 200)
{
SET([LM 0]);
break;
}
}
Operation description
While the value of LDR100 is 0, the while statement repeats.
Inside the while statement, if the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal, the while statement will terminate, and
after [LM 0] changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement.
In the script example above, the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal when the while statement repeats twice,
and after LM0 changes to 1, execution breaks out of the while statement loop. After execution, the value of LDR100
is 0, the value of LDR200 is 5, the value of LDR300 is 5, and LM0 is 1.
20-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.1.9 Indirect write and indirect read using iteration (while statement)
Script
// Transfer LDR10 through LDR19 to LDR100 through LDR109
// Initialize the indirect value
[LDR 0] = 0;
// Loop ten times 20
while ([LDR 0] < 10)
Script
{
// Transfer 1 word by indirect assignment
OFFSET([LDR 100], [LDR 0]) = OFFSET([LDR 10], [LDR 0]);
// Increment indirect value
[LDR 0] = [LDR 0] + 1
}
This script stores the values of LDR10 through LDR19 in LDR100 through LDR109.
It operates as follows.
First, the indirect value LDR0 is initialized and set to 0.
First iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 0, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements inside while
are executed.
• The value of LDR10, 0 words from LDR10, is stored in LDR100, 0 words from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 1.
Second iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 1, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements inside
while are executed.
• The value of LDR11, 1 word from LDR10, is stored in LDR101, 1 word from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 2.
:
(Repeats in this manner for the third to ninth iterations)
:
Tenth iteration (loop): The value of LDR0 is 9, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is true and the statements inside while
are executed.
• The value of LDR19, 9 words from LDR10, is stored in LDR109, 9 words from LDR100.
• 1 is added to the value of the indirect value LDR0 so that it becomes 10.
The value of LDR0 is 10, so the condition “[LDR 0] < 10” is false and execution breaks out of the while loop.
After execution, the values of LDR100 through LDR109 are the values of LDR10 through LDR19.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-25
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.1.10 Decimal to octal conversion using a while statement
Script
// Convert a decimal value to octal
// - For example, convert 10 (dec) to 12 (oct), 16 (dec) to 20 (oct)
// - Convert a value to octal up to 4 digits max
@1 = 0; // while counter
@2 = [LDR 100]; // gets original data
@3 = 1; // decimal base
@4 = 0; // calculation results
// repeat four times
while (@1 < 4)
{
// Extract 1st octal digit from original data. Store working result in @10.
@10 = @2 % 8;
// Convert the extracted results to decimal and add to results
@4 = @4 + (@10 * @3);
// Increase the decimal base by one digit
@3 = @3 * 10;
// Reduce the original data by one digit
@2 = @2 / 8;
// If @2 is 0, terminate the while statement
if (0 == @2)
{
break;
}
// Increment while counter by 1
@1 = @1 + 1;
// Store the calculation result in LDR200
[LDR 200] = @4;
Operation description
This example converts a decimal value to octal using a while statement.
By repeating the process to divide the original decimal data by 8 and converting each digit to octal in a while
statement, the conversion is implemented up to four digits.
The unconverted decimal value is stored in LDR100. After the script is executed, the converted octal value is stored in
LDR200.
20-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.1.11 Conditional branching with switch
Script
switch ([LDR 100])
{
case 10:
[LDR 200] = 0x1234;
break;
case 999:
[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
20
SET([LM 10]);
Script
break;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 10, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 999, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200 and LM10 turns on.
If the value of LDR100 is not 10 or 999, then nothing is executed.
■ Example 5.1.12 Conditional branching with switch using the default statement
Script
switch ([LDR 100])
{
case 0:
[LDR 200] = 0x1234;
break;
case 1:
[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
break;
default:
[LDR 200] = 0x9999;
break;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 0x1234 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is 1, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200.
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or 1, then 0x9999 is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.1.13 Terminate the script with the return statement
Script
if (0x1234 == [LDR 100])
{
[LDR 200] = 0x5678;
return;
}
[LDR 300] = 0;
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0x1234, then 0 is stored in LDR300.
If the value of LDR100 is 0x1234, then 0x5678 is stored in LDR200 and the script terminates.
The return statement does not break out of a function like the break statement, it terminates the script and executes
the next part or script.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-27
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.1.14 Break out of a loop with the break statement
Script
[LDR 100] = 0;
[LDR 200] = 3;
[LDR 300] = 5;
while ([LDR 100] == 0)
{
[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
if ([LDR 200] == [LDR 300)
{
SET([LM 0]);
break;
}
}
Operation description
While the value of LDR100 is 0, the while statement repeats until LDR200 and LDR300 are equal.
Inside the while statement, if the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal, the while statement will end and
execution breaks out of the while statement.
In the script example above, the values of LDR200 and LDR300 are equal when the while statement repeats twice,
and after LM0 changes to 1, the while statement ends. After execution, the value of LDR100 is 0, the value of LDR200
is 5, the value of LDR300 is 5, and the value of LM0 is 1.
5.2 Relational Operators
■ Example 5.2.1 Equal to
Script
if ([LDR 100] == [LDR 200])
{
[LDR 300] = 0x100;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.2 Not equal to
Script
if ([LDR 100] != [LDR 200])
{
[LDR 300] = 0x100;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.3 Less than
Script
if ([LDR 100] < [LDR 200])
{
[LDR 300] = 0xl00;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is less than the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
20-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.2.4 Less than or equal to
Script
if ([LDR 100] <= [LDR 200])
{
[LDR 300] = 0xl00;
}
Operation description 20
If the value of LDR100 is less than or equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
Script
■ Example 5.2.5 Greater than
Script
if ([LDR 100] > [LDR 200])
{
[LDR 300] = 0xl00;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is greater than the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.2.6 Greater than or equal to
Script
if ([LDR 100] > [LDR 200])
{
[LDR 300] = 0xl00;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is greater than or equal to the value of LDR200, then 0x100 is stored in LDR300.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-29
5 Script Coding Examples
5.3 Logical Operators
■ Example 5.3.1 Logical AND
Script
if (([LDR 100] == [LDR 200]) && ([LDR 300] == [LDR 400] + [LDR 500]))
{
[LDR 600] = 100;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is equal to the value of LDR200, and if the value of LDR300 is equal to the value of LDR400
and LDR500 added together, then 100 is stored in LDR600.
If either ([LDR 100] == [LDR 200]) or ([LDR 300] == [LDR 400] + [LDR 500]) is false, the processing in the brackets
“{ }” is not executed.
■ Example 5.3.2 Logical OR
Script
if ((0 != [LDR 100]) || (0 != [LDR 200]))
{
[LDR 300] = 100;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not 0 or the value of LDR200 is not 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
If either is true, the processing in the brackets “{ }” is executed.
■ Example 5.3.3 Logical inversion
Script
if (!([LDR 100] == 0x1234))
{
[LDR 300] = 100;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is not equal to 0x1234, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.3.4 Logical inversion
Script
if (!(0 !=[LDR 100]))
{
[LDR 300] = 100 ;
}
Operation description
If the value of LDR100 is 0, then 100 is stored in LDR300.
This is the same as the code “if (0==[LDR 100]))”.
20-30 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
5.4 Arithmetic Operators
■ Example 5.4.1 Addition
Script
[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] + [LDR 200];
Operation description
20
The values of LDR100 and LDR200 are added together and the result is stored in LDR300.
Script
■ Example 5.4.2 Subtraction
Script
[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] - [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR200 is subtracted from the value of LDR100 and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.3 Multiplication
Script
[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] * [LDR 200];
Operation description
The values of LDR100 and LDR200 are multiplied together and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.4 Division
Script
[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] / [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.4.5 Modulo
Script
[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] % [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is divided into the value of LDR200 and the remainder is stored in LDR300.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-31
5 Script Coding Examples
5.5 Bitwise Operators
■ Example 5.5.1 Logical AND
Script
if ([LM 100] & [LM 101])
{
SET([LM 200)]);
}
else
{
RST([LM 200]);
}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 1, LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical AND operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 0, LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100 LM101 LM200
■ Example 5.5.2 Logical OR
Script
if ([LM 100] | [LM 101])
{
SET([LM 200]);
}
else
{
RST([LM 200]);
}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 1, LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the values of LM100 and LM101 is 0, LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100 LM200
LM101
■ Example 5.5.3 Logical XOR (exclusive OR)
Script
[LDR 200] = [LDR 100] ^ 0xFF;
Operation description
The logical XOR operation on the value of LDR100 and each bit in 0xFF is stored in LDR200.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 15 (0x0F), then LDR200 is 240 (0xF0).
20-32 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.5.4 Inversion
Script
[LDR 200] = ~[LDR 100];
Operation description
The bits in the value of LDR100 are flipped and stored in LDR200.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 0, then LDR200 is 65535.
20
■ Example 5.5.5 Inversion
Script
Script
if (([LM 100] & ~ [LM 101]) | [LM 102])
{
SET([LM 200]);
}
else
{
RST([LM 200]);
}
Operation description
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of LM102 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on the
value of LM100 and the inverted result of the value of LM101 is 1, then LM200 changes to 1.
If the bitwise logical OR operation on the value of LM102 and the result of the bitwise logical AND operation on the
value of LM100 and the inverted result of the value of LM101 is 0, then LM200 changes to 0.
The operation is the same as the following ladder diagram.
LM100 LM101 LM200
LM102
■ Example 5.5.6 Left shift
Script
[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] << [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is shifted left by only the amount of the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 1 and the value of LDR200 is 3, 1 is shifted 3 bits to the left and the result 8 is
stored in LDR300.
■ Example 5.5.7 Right shift
Script
[LDR 300] = [LDR 100] >> [LDR 200];
Operation description
The value of LDR100 is shifted right by only the amount of the value of LDR200 and the result is stored in LDR300.
For example, if the value of LDR100 is 8 and the value of LDR200 is 3, 8 is shifted 3 bits to the right and the result 1
is stored in LDR300.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-33
5 Script Coding Examples
5.6 Bit Functions
■ Example 5.6.1 Set a bit
Script
SET([LM 100]);
Operation description
Turns LM100 to 1. The result is the same as [LM 100] = 1.
■ Example 5.6.2 Reset a bit
Script
RST([LM 100]);
Operation description
Turns LM100 to 0. The result is the same as [LM 100] = 0.
■ Example 5.6.3 Invert a bit
Script
REV([LM 100]);
Operation description
Flips LM100 1 and 0. The result is the same as [LM 100] = ~[LM 100].
20-34 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
5.7 Word Functions
● Arithmetic operations
■ Example 5.7.1 Maximum value
Script
[LDR 200] = MAX([LDR 100], [LDR 110], [LDR 120], [LDR 130], [LDR 140]);
Operation description 20
Out of the values stored in LDR100, LDR110, LDR120, LDR130, and LDR140, stores the maximum value in LDR200.
Script
Up to 15 arguments can be used.
■ Example 5.7.2 Minimum value
Script
[LDR 200] = MIN([LDR 100], [LDR 110], [LDR 120], [LDR 130], [LDR 140]);
Operation description
Out of the values stored in LDR100, LDR110, LDR120, LDR130, and LDR140, stores the minimum value in LDR200.
Up to 15 arguments can be used.
■ Example 5.7.3 Exponential function
Script
[D 10] = EXP([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the exponential function of the value of D20 and the result is stored in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.4 Natural logarithm
Script
[D 10] = LOGE([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the natural logarithm of the value of D20 and the result is stored in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.5 Common logarithm
Script
[D 10] = LOG10([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the logarithm of the value of D20 with 10 as the base and the result is stored in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.6 Power
Script
[D 10] = POW([D 20],[D 30]);
Operation description
Calculates the power of a value.
For example, when the value of D20 is 10 and the value of D30 is 5, the function calculates 10 to the power of 5 and
stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-35
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.7.7 Square root
Script
[D 10] = ROOT([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the square root of the value of [D20] and the result is stored in [D10].
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.8 Sine
Script
[D 10] = SIN([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the sine of the radian value of D20 and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.9 Cosine
Script
[D 10] = COS([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the cosine of the radian value of D20 and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.10 Tangent
Script
[D 10] = TAN([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the tangent of the radian value of D20 and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.11 Arcsine
Script
[D 10] = ASIN([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arcsine of the value of D20 and stores the result as radians in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.12 Arccosine
Script
[D 10] = ACOS([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arccosine of the value of D20 and stores the result as radians in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
20-36 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.7.13 Arctangent
Script
[D 10] = ATAN([D 20]);
Operation description
Calculates the arctangent of the value of D20 and stores the result as radians in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
20
Script
■ Example 5.7.14 Convert angle to radians
Script
[D 10] = RAD([D 20]);
Operation description
Converts the value of D20 from degrees (°) to radians and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
■ Example 5.7.15 Convert radians to angle
Script
[D 10] = DEG([D 20]);
Operation description
Converts the value of D20 from radians to degrees (°) and stores the result in D10.
Only the data type float32 can be used.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-37
5 Script Coding Examples
● Data type conversions
■ Example 5.7.16 Convert BCD to binary
Script
[LDR 200] = BCD2BIN([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the BCD value in LDR100 to a binary value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the BCD value 10 (16 as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, 10 (binary value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.17 Convert binary to BCD
Script
[LDR 200] = BIN2BCD([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the binary value in LDR100 to a BCD value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the binary value 16 (10 as a BCD value) is stored in LDR100, 16 (BCD value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.18 Convert float32 to binary
Script
[LDR 200] = FLOAT2BIN([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the float value in LDR100 to a binary value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the float value 1234 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, 1234 (binary value) is stored
in LDR200. If the float value 1234.56 (0x449A51EC as a binary value) is stored in LDR100, the value after the decimal
point is discarded and 1234 (binary value) is stored in LDR200.
■ Example 5.7.19 Convert binary to float32
Script
[LDR 200] = BIN2FLOAT([LDR 100]);
Operation description
Converts the binary value in LDR100 to a float value and stores it in LDR200.
For example, if the binary value 1234 is stored in LDR100, the float value 1234 (0x449A4000 as a binary value) is
stored in LDR200.
20-38 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.7.20 Convert decimal to string
Script
DEC2ASCII([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Converts the decimal numeric value in LDR200 to a string and stores it in order with LDR100 as the starting address.
• This function can be used with data types BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4, and 20
BCD8.
Script
• Only internal devices can be used.
• When using functions that handle strings, check the Storage Method of string data setting on the
System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Depending on the setting, the upper and lower bytes are
stored in the reverse of the following explanation.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-18.
• A NULL terminating character (0x00) is added to the end of the string.
Converting 1234 (when the data type is BIN16+)
Stored value
Device
Device Stored value Upper byte Lower byte
LDR200 1234 LDR100 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32
LDR101 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
LDR102 0x00 0x00
Terminating character
Converting -12345 (when the data type is BIN16+/-)
Stored value
Device
Device Stored value Upper byte Lower byte
LDR200 -12345 LDR100 '-' = 0x2D '1' = 0x31
LDR101 '2' = 0x32 '3' = 0x33
LDR102 '4' = 0x34 '5' = 0x35
LDR103 0x00 0x00
Terminating character
Converting 1234567890 (when the data type is BIN32+)
Stored value
Device
Device Stored value Upper byte Lower byte
LDR200 LDR100 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32
1234567890
LDR201 LDR101 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
LDR102 '5' = 0x35 '6' = 0x36
LDR103 '7' = 0x37 '8' = 0x38
LDR104 '9' = 0x39 '0' = 0x30
LDR105 0x00 0x00
Terminating character
Converting -1234567890 (when the data type is BIN32+/-)
Stored value
Device
Device Stored value Upper byte Lower byte
LDR200 LDR100 '-' = 0x2D '1' = 0x31
-1234567890
LDR201 LDR101 '2' = 0x32 '3' = 0x33
LDR102 '4' = 0x34 '5' = 0x35
LDR103 '6' = 0x36 '7' = 0x37
LDR104 '8' = 0x38 '9' = 0x39
LDR105 '0' = 0x30 0x00
Terminating character
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-39
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.7.21 Convert string to decimal
Script
[LDR 100] = ASCII2DEC([LDR 200]);
Operation description
Converts the stored string starting at LDR200 to a decimal and stores the result in LDR100.
The number of digits that can be converted is the maximum number of digits for each data type with added sign.
If the string to convert contains NULL or characters that cannot be converted to numeric values, the string is
converted up to that character.
• This function can be used with data types BIN16(+), BIN16(+/-), BIN32(+), BIN32(+/-), BCD4, and
BCD8.
• Only internal devices can be used.
• When using functions that handle strings, check the Storage Method of string data setting on the
System tab in the Project Settings dialog box. Depending on the setting, the upper and lower bytes are
stored in the reverse of the following explanation.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-18.
Setting the string “1234” (when the data type is BIN16+)
Stored value
Device
Upper byte Lower byte Device Stored value
LDR200 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32 LDR100 1234
LDR201 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
LDR202 0x00 0x00
Terminating character
Setting the string “1234567” (when the data type is BIN16+)
Stored value
Device
Upper byte Lower byte Device Stored value
LDR200 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32 LDR100 12345
LDR201 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
LDR202 '5' = 0x35 '6' = 0x36
LDR203 '7' = 0x37 0x00
Terminating character
Setting the string “-12345” (when the data type is BIN16+/-)
Stored value
Device
Upper byte Lower byte Device Stored value
LDR200 '-' = 0x2D '1' = 0x31 LDR100 -12345
LDR201 '2' = 0x32 '3' = 0x33
LDR202 '4' = 0x34 '5' = 0x35
LDR203 0x00 0x00
Terminating character
String “1234567890” (when the data type is BIN32+)
Stored value
Device
Upper byte Lower byte Device Stored value
LDR200 '1' = 0x31 '2' = 0x32 LDR100 - 101 1234567890
LDR201 '3' = 0x33 '4' = 0x34
LDR202 '5' = 0x35 '6' = 0x36
LDR203 '7' = 0x37 '8' = 0x38
LDR204 '9' = 0x39 '0' = 0x30
LDR205 0x00 0x00
Terminating character
20-40 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
● Data comparison and copying
■ Example 5.7.22 Word-unit data comparison
Script
[LDR 0] = MEMCMP([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 10);
Operation description
Compares the value of 10 words from LDR100 (up to LDR109) with the value of 10 words from LDR200 (up to
20
LDR209).
Script
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in LDR0. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.
Compare each
LDR100 LDR200
LDR101 LDR201
LDR102 LDR202
LDR107 LDR207
LDR108 LDR208
LDR109 LDR209
Even if the data type is set to BIN32+, BIN32+/-, BCD8, or float32, the comparison is performed from the
starting device in word units.
■ Example 5.7.23 Bit-unit data comparison
Script
[LDR 0] = MEMCMP([LDR 100-3], [LM 0], 10);
Operation description
Compares the third bit of LDR100 through the third bit of LDR109 with the state of the bits from LM0 to LM9.
If the value for each is entirely equal, 1 is stored in LDR0. If even a single one is not equal, 0 is stored.
Compare each
3rd bit of LDR100 LM0
3rd bit of LDR101 LM1
3rd bit of LDR102 LM2
3rd bit of LDR107 LM7
3rd bit of LDR108 LM8
3rd bit of LDR109 LM9
Even if the data type is set to BIN32+, BIN32+/-, BCD8, or float32, the comparison is performed from the
starting device in bit units.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-41
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.7.24 Word-unit data copy
Script
MEMCPY([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 10);
Operation description
Copies the value of 10 word devices from LDR200 (up to LDR209) to 10 word devices from LDR100 (up to LDR109).
Copy each
LDR100 LDR200
LDR101 LDR201
LDR102 LDR202
LDR107 LDR207
LDR108 LDR208
LDR109 LDR209
Even if the data type is set to BIN32+, BIN32+/-, BCD8, or float32, the data is copied from the starting
device in word units.
■ Example 5.7.25 Bit-unit data copy
Script
MEMCPY([LM 0], [LDR 100-3], 10);
Operation description
Copies the third bit of 10 words from LDR100 (up to LDR109) to the bit state for 10 bits of devices from LM0 (up to LM9).
Copy each
LM0 3rd bit of LDR100
LM1 3rd bit of LDR101
LM2 3rd bit of LDR102
LM7 3rd bit of LDR107
LM8 3rd bit of LDR108
LM9 3rd bit of LDR109
Even if the data type is set to BIN32+, BIN32+/-, BCD8, or float32, the bits are copied from the starting
device in bit units.
20-42 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
● String operations
When using functions that handle string data, check the Storage Method of string data setting in the project
settings.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.1 System Tab” on page 3-18.
■ Example 5.7.26 Copy a string
Script
20
STRCUT([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 2, 3);
Script
Operation description
Stores in order from LDR100 character count 3 (3 characters worth) from start position 2 (starting from 0, so the 3rd
character) of the string “ABCDEFG” that starts from LDR200.
The start position can be specified in the range from 0 to 127, the character count can be specified in the
range from 1 to 128.
Copy from string “ABCDEFG” at start position 2, character count 3
Start Character
Device Stored value position count
Device Stored value
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 0 Upper byte 'C' = 0x43
LDR200 LDR100
Lower byte 'B' = 0x42 1 Lower byte 'D' = 0x44
Upper byte 'C' = 0x43 ¬2 Upper byte 'E' = 0x45
LDR201 LDR101
Lower byte 'D' = 0x44 3 3 characters Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 4
LDR202
Lower byte 'F' = 0x46 5
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47 :
LDR203
Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
Script
STRUCT([LDR 100], [LDR 200], 1, 4);
Copy from string “ABCDEFG” at start position 1, character count 4
Start Character
Device Stored value position count
Device Stored value
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 0 Upper byte 'B' = 0x42
LDR200 LDR100
Lower byte 'B' = 0x42 ¬1 Lower byte 'C' = 0x43
Upper byte 'C' = 0x43 ¬2 Upper byte 'D' = 0x44
LDR201 4 characters LDR101
Lower byte 'D' = 0x44 3 Lower byte 'E' = 0x45
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 4 Upper byte 0x00 Terminating character
LDR202 LDR102
Lower byte 'F' = 0x46 5 Lower byte 0x00
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47 :
LDR203
Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-43
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.7.27 Count a string
Script
[LDR 100] = STRLEN([LDR 200]);
Operation description
Finds the length (character count) of the string starting from LDR200 and stores that in LDR100.
• The only devices that can be specified as function arguments in string operations are internal devices.
• The NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. (The terminating character is not included
in the string length.)
Device Stored value Device Stored value
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 Character
LDR200 count LDR100 7
Lower byte 'B' = 0x42
Upper byte 'C' = 0x43
LDR201
Lower byte 'D' = 0x44
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45
LDR202
Lower byte 'F' = 0x46
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47
LDR203
Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
Device Stored value Device Stored value
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 Character
LDR200 count LDR100 3
Lower byte 'B' = 0x42
Upper byte 'C' = 0x43
LDR201
Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45
LDR202
Lower byte 'F' = 0x46
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47
LDR203
Lower byte 0x00
20-44 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.7.28 Concatenate strings
Script
STRCAT([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Concatenates the string starting from LDR200 to the string starting from LDR100.
• Only internal devices can be used. 20
• The NULL terminating character (0x00) is the end of the string. (The terminating character is not included
Script
in the string length.)
Device Stored value Device Stored value
Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 Upper byte 'A' = 0x41
LDR100 LDR100
Lower byte 'B' = 0x42 Lower byte 'B' = 0x42
Upper byte 'C' = 0x43 Upper byte 'C' = 0x43
LDR101 Terminating LDR101
Lower byte 0x00 character
Lower byte 'D' = 0x44
Concatenate
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45
LDR102
Device Stored value Lower byte 'F' = 0x46
Upper byte 'D' = 0x44 Upper byte 'G' = 0x47
LDR200 LDR103
Lower byte 'E' = 0x45 Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
Upper byte 'F' = 0x46
LDR201
Lower byte 'G' = 0x47
Upper byte 0x00 Terminating character
LDR202
Lower byte 0x00
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-45
5 Script Coding Examples
■ Example 5.7.29 Search a string
Script
[LDR 0] = STRSTR([LDR 100], [LDR 200]);
Operation description
Searches for the search string “DEFG” that starts from LDR200 in the string to be searched “ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO” that
starts from LDR100 and stores the position of the occurrence of the string in LDR0. If not found, -1 is stored in LDR0.
If “?” is specified as a character to search for, it is handled as an arbitrary single-byte character.
When specifying “?” (0x3F) as a character, specify it as “~?” (0x7E3F) in two bytes.
When specifying “~” (0x7E) as a character, specify it as “~~” (0x7E7E) in two bytes.
• The maximum number for the search string is 128 characters.
• Only internal devices can be used.
When searching for “DEFG” and the string was found
Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored value Device Stored value Position Device Stored value
Upper byte 'D' = 0x44 Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 0
LDR200 LDR100 LDR0 3
Lower byte 'E' = 0x45 Lower byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper byte 'F' = 0x46 Upper byte 'C' = 0x43 2
LDR201 LDR101
Lower byte 'G' = 0x47 Lower byte 'D' = 0x44 ¬3
Terminating
Upper byte 0x00 character Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 4
LDR202 LDR102
Lower byte 0x00 Lower byte 'F' = 0x46 5
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47 6
LDR103
Lower byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper byte 'I' = 0x49 8
LDR104
Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper
byte
'K' = 0x47 10
LDR105
Lower
byte
'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper
byte
'M' = 0x4D 12
LDR106
Lower
byte
'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper
byte
'O' = 0x4F 14
LDR107
Lower
byte
0x00 Terminating character
When searching for “WXYZ” and the string was not found
Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored value Device Stored value Position Device Stored value
Upper byte 'W' = 0x57 Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 0
LDR200 LDR100 LDR0 -1
Lower byte 'X' = 0x58 Lower byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper byte 'Y' = 0x59 Upper byte 'C' = 0x43 2
LDR201 LDR101
Lower byte 'Z' = 0x5A Lower byte 'D' = 0x44 3
Terminating
Upper byte 0x00 character Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 4
LDR202 LDR102
Lower byte 0x00 Lower byte 'F' = 0x46 5
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47 6
LDR103
Lower byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper byte 'I' = 0x49 8
LDR104
Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper byte 'K' = 0x47 10
LDR105
Lower byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
LDR106
Lower byte 'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper byte 'O' = 0x4F 14
LDR107
Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
20-46 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
When searching for “?” as an arbitrary single-byte character
Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored value Device Stored value Position Device Stored value
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 0
LDR200 LDR100 LDR0 4
Lower byte '?' = 0x3F Lower byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47 Upper byte 'C' = 0x43 2
LDR201 LDR101
Lower byte 'H' = 0x48 Lower byte 'D' = 0x44 3
Terminating
Upper byte 0x00 character Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
LDR202 LDR102
Lower byte 0x00 Lower byte 'F' = 0x46 5
LDR103
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47 6 20
Lower byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Script
Upper byte 'I' = 0x49 8
LDR104
Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper byte 'K' = 0x47 10
LDR105
Lower byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
LDR106
Lower byte 'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper byte 'O' = 0x4F 14
LDR107
Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
When searching for “?” as a character
Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored value Device Stored value Position Device Stored value
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 0
LDR200 LDR100 LDR0 4
Lower byte '~' = 0x7E Lower byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper byte '?' = 0x3F Upper byte 'C' = 0x43 2
LDR201 LDR101
Lower byte 'G' = 0x47 Lower byte 'D' = 0x44 3
Upper byte 'H' = 0x48 Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
LDR202 Terminating LDR102
Lower byte 0x00 character Lower byte '?' = 0x3F 5
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47 6
LDR103
Lower byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper byte 'I' = 0x49 8
LDR104
Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper byte 'K' = 0x47 10
LDR105
Lower byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper
byte
'M' = 0x4D 12
LDR106
Lower
byte
'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper
byte
'O' = 0x4F 14
LDR107
Lower
byte
0x00 Terminating character
When searching for “~” as a character
Search string String to be searched Search result
Device Stored value Device Stored value Position Device Stored value
Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 Upper byte 'A' = 0x41 0
LDR200 LDR100 LDR0 4
Lower byte '~' = 0x7E Lower byte 'B' = 0x42 1
Upper byte '~' = 0x7E Upper byte 'C' = 0x43 2
LDR201 LDR101
Lower byte 'G' = 0x47 Lower byte 'D' = 0x44 3
Upper byte 'H' = 0x48 Upper byte 'E' = 0x45 ←4
LDR202 Terminating LDR102
Lower byte 0x00 character Lower byte '~' = 0x7E 5
Upper byte 'G' = 0x47 6
LDR103
Lower byte 'H' = 0x48 7
Upper byte 'I' = 0x49 8
LDR104
Lower byte 'J' = 0x4A 9
Upper byte 'K' = 0x47 10
LDR105
Lower byte 'L' = 0x4C 11
Upper byte 'M' = 0x4D 12
LDR106
Lower byte 'N' = 0x4E 13
Upper byte 'O' = 0x4F 14
LDR107
Lower byte 0x00 Terminating character
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-47
5 Script Coding Examples
● Drawing
■ Example 5.7.30 Draw a line
Script
LINE(20, 20, 60, 60, 3, 1, 20);
Operation description
Draws a line connecting the start coordinates X=20, Y=20 and the end coordinates X=60, Y=60 on the screen where
the script is running. The line has a line width of 3 (3 pixels), line type of 1 (solid line), and line color of 20 (red).
■ Example 5.7.31 Draw a line (omitting arguments)
Script
LINE(0, 0, 150, 100);
Operation description
Draws a line connecting the start coordinates X=0, Y=0 and the end coordinates X=150, Y=100 on the screen where
the script is running. The line width, line type, and line color have been omitted, so the line's line width is 1 (1 pixel),
the line type is 1 (solid line), and the line color is 255 (white).
■ Example 5.7.32 Draw a rectangle
Script
RECTANGLE(20, 20, 100, 60, 1, 2, 24, 22, 13, 2, 5);
Operation description
Draws a rectangle with the start coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's upper-left corner) X=20, Y=20 and
the end coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's lower-right corner) X=100, Y=60 on the screen where the
script is running. The rectangle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 2 (dotted line), foreground color is 24 (green),
background color is 22 (yellow), pattern is 13 (tint), rounding type is 2 (curve), and rounding radius is 5 (5 pixels).
■ Example 5.7.33 Draw a rectangle (omitting arguments)
Script
RECTANGLE(0, 0, 150, 100);
Operation description
Draws a rectangle with the start coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's upper-left corner) X=0, Y=0 and the end
coordinates (the coordinates of the rectangle's lower-right corner) X=150, Y=100 on the screen where the script is
running. The line width, line type, foreground color, background color, pattern, rounding type, and rounding radius are
omitted, so the rectangle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 1 (solid line), foreground color and background color is
255 (white), pattern is 0 (none), rounding type is 0 (none), and rounding radius is 0 (0 pixels).
■ Example 5.7.34 Draw a circle or ellipse
Script
CIRCLE(100, 100, 60, 60, 1, 2, 26, 0, 4);
Operation description
Draws a circle with the center coordinate X=100, Y=100, the X-axis radius 60 pixels, and the Y-axis radius 60 pixels.
The circle's line width is 1 (1 pixel), line type is 2 (dotted line), foreground color is 26 (light blue), background color is
0 (black), and pattern is 4 (foreground 50%).
■ Example 5.7.35 Draw a circle or ellipse (omitting arguments)
Script
CIRCLE(100, 100, 80, 40);
Operation description
Draws an ellipse with the center coordinate X=100, Y=100, the X-axis radius 80 pixels, and the Y-axis radius 40 pixels.
The line width, line type, foreground color, background color, and pattern are omitted, so the ellipse's line width is 1 (1
pixel), line type is 1 (solid line), foreground color and background color is 255 (white), and pattern is 0 (none).
20-48 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Script Coding Examples
● Indirect assignment
■ Example 5.7.36 Indirect read
Script
[LDR 200] = OFFSET([LDR 10],[D 20]);
Operation description
When the value of D20 is 8, the value of LDR18, the device 8 words from LDR10, is read and stored in LDR200.
20
Script
LDR10 0000 D20 0008
+8
LDR200 1234 LDR18 1234
Read
■ Example 5.7.37 Indirect write
Script
OFFSET([LDR 10],[D 20]) = 1234;
Operation description
When the value of D20 is 3, the constant 1234 is stored in LDR13, the device 3 words from LDR10.
LDR10 0000 D20 0003
+3
1234 LDR13 1234
Write
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-49
6 Important Notes
6 Important Notes
This section describes important notes when defining a script.
6.1 Important Notes Regarding the While Definition
■ Define so it will not go into an infinite loop.
The execution expression is repeatedly executed while the conditional expression is satisfied.
However, it will go into an infinite loop when the conditional expression is satisfied continually.
[LDR 100] = 10;
while (0 != [LDR 100])
{
[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
}
In the conditional expression of the while definition, it states to exit the loop when the value of LDR100 turns 0.
However, the value stored in the LDR100 is not changed after storing 10 in the first line of the script, so it will go into
an infinite loop.
When using the while definition, define it so it will not go into an infinite loop.
The value of LDR100 will become 0 when the while definition is repeated 10 times in the next example, and it will get
out of the while definition.
[LDR 100] = 10;
while (0 != [LDR 100])
{
[LDR 200] = [LDR 200] + 1;
[LDR 100] = [LDR 100] - 1;
}
■ Define it so it will not continue the process for longer than the time limit.
When the processing of a single script continues for more than the time limit due to a while definition, etc., an
execution time over error occurs and that script will be halted. Define the script so the execution time for one script
does not exceed 3,000 milliseconds.
For details, refer to “1.4 Script Error” on page 20-4.
■ Do not write into the external device address.
When it is written into an external device address in the while definition, a script error will occur.
6.2 Number of Devices That Can Be Used
Number of external device addresses that can be set in single script with WindO/I-NV3 are 64 for read device and 64
for write device.
When the total number of write data to an external device address exceeds 64 in a single script while executing a
script with Touch, that script will be halted with an error.
20-50 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 Important Notes
6.3 Write Delay
Since the writing process to the external device address is performed at the end of a script, it may not operate
correctly due to a write delay.
Example where write delay occurs
[D 100] = 1000;
[D 200] = [D 100] + 5000;
Initial value of D100 is 0.
20
Script
Since the write destination of 1000 in first line is the external device address, the value is not reflected immediately,
and the value of D100 is still 0 when the second line is executed.
Therefore, the value where 5000 is added to 0 (value of D100) would be written to D200 in second line.
The value of D100 will be 1000 and the value of D200 will be 5000 when above script is executed.
There are 2 countermeasures for cases like this.
● Not using the device cache
Write delay does not occur when writing to the internal device, so the calculation is performed only in the internal
device, and only the result will be written to the external device address.
[LDR 0] = 1000;
[LDR 0] = [LDR 0] + 5000;
[D 200] = [LDR 0];
● Using the device cache
Problems with the write delay to the external device address can be avoided by caching the value of the external
device address into the internal memory. To use the device cache, setup as follows in WindO/I-NV3.
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 In the System tab, click Advanced.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 20-51
6 Important Notes
3 Select the Use Device Cache check box.
4 Click OK.
This setting will be applied not only to the script, but to the whole project.
6.4 About the Priority of the Operator
As a basic rule, operators are calculated in order from left of the line, but when multiple calculations are combined,
they are calculated in following priority.
Priority Operator
High () {}
! ~ -(Negative number)
* / %
+ -(Subtraction)
<< >>
&
^
|
< <= > >=
== !=
&&
||
Low =
20-52 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 21 User Accounts and the Security Function
This chapter describes user accounts and the Security function, how to configure them, and their operation on the
Touch and in WindO/I-NV3.
1 Overview
1.1 User Accounts
The Security function protects access to data and Touch displays and operations using accounts. Accounts are the
privileges to use the Touch and data. By assigning accounts to users, you can protect the Touch from being
inappropriately operated and protect project data from alterations and misuse. 21
Accounts assigned to users are called user accounts.
User Accounts and the Security
User account
Account
User
Privileges to operate the Touch
Privileges to access data
Assign
In WindO/I-NV3, security groups are used as accounts.
There are two types of security groups. One type protects access to data. The other type protects Touch displays and
operations. To protect access to data, assign one of the provided security groups to a user. To protect Touch
displays and operations, assign a user-created security group to a user.
Protect data Protect displays and operations
Administrator GroupA
User-created security
Provided security groups Operator
groups (12 max) GroupB
Reader
Assign Assign
User account: User account:
A user name and password are associated with a user account and up to 15 user accounts can be created.
Password: 11111111 22222222 33333333 44444444 EEEEEEEE
User account:
User name: User1 User2 User3 User4 User15
If you configure a password for a user account assigned to a security group, access to data and Touch displays and
operations are password protected.
For password protected operations, users are prompted to enter their user name and password as necessary on the
Touch Password screen or the WindO/I-NV3 Enter Password dialog box.
Password screen Enter Password dialog box
Password
User ▼ ↑
******** ← → ENT
AB C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U V WX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK ↓
If a password is not configured for a user account, access to data and Touch displays and operations cannot
be protected.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-1
1 Overview
1.2 Protecting Data
● Protecting Access to Data
Security groups that protect access to data can perform the following functions.
• Protect from changes by editing project data
The Enter Password dialog box is displayed.
Opening project data
• Protect from alterations or misuse by downloading data
Project data
Computer Touch
USB flash drive
Download
Download
The Enter Password dialog box is displayed.
Recipe files
• Protect from the loss of data by upload
Project data
Computer Touch
USB flash drive
Upload
Upload
The Enter Password dialog box is displayed.
Alarm Log data
Data Log data
Operation Log data
Recipe files
21-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
• Protect from data erasures and formatting external memory by unauthorized access
Computer Touch
Deleting data
USB flash drive
Deleting data
Formatting
The Enter Password dialog box is displayed.
• Protect from alterations and misuse by changing to the System Mode
Touch Touch
21
User Accounts and the Security
Password
User ▼
AB C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK
The Password screen is displayed.
• Protect from unauthorized browsing by displaying Device Monitor
Touch Touch
Password
User ▼
AB C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK
The Password screen is displayed.
• Protect from the loss of data or alterations by the execution of the USB Autorun function
Touch Touch
Password
User ▼
AB C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK
The Password screen is displayed.
USB flash drive
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-3
1 Overview
● Security Groups that Protect Access to Data
Three security groups have been provided to protect access to data. These security groups are Administrator,
Operator, and Reader. Each one of these security groups can only be assigned to a single user.
■ Administrator
The Administrator group possesses complete access rights to project data. This security group can execute all
necessary operations including editing project data and changing Touch project data.
■ Operator
The Operator group can partially change project data by changing values of devices. This security group download
data to external memory.
■ Reader
The Reader group can read data stored on external memory.
The provided user account has the security groups Administrator, Operator, and Reader allocated to it.
Passwords have not been configured for this user account. To protect access to data, a password must be
configured for the user account.
User1
Administrator
Provided security groups Operator
Reader
● Operations Subject to Password Protection
If you configure a password for a user account assigned to a security group to protect access to data, access to data
is password protected. The operations that are subject to password protection and the security group that the
password is valid for are as follows.
Security group that the password is valid for
Operations subject to password protection
Administrator Operator Reader
Opening projects YES NO NO
Data editing
Reusing screens YES NO NO
Downloading project data YES NO NO
Downloading data to external memory*1 YES NO NO
Downloading data to external memory*1 while the
YES YES NO
Touch is running
Uploading project data YES NO NO
Uploading external memory data*1 YES YES YES
Modifying data
Deleting all data YES NO NO
Deleting external memory data*1 YES NO NO
Formatting external memory*1 YES NO NO
Switching to the Top Page in the System Mode YES NO NO
Displaying Device Monitor YES YES NO
Executing the USB Autorun function YES NO NO
To password protect operations, the lowest level security group out of the security groups enabled with a
password must be assigned to a user account.
The security levels, from highest to lowest, are Administrator > Operator > Reader.
Example: To password protect the operation to display Device Monitor, assign the Operator security group
to a user account. If a user account assigned to the Operator security group does not exist, the
operation is not password protected.
*1 External memory inserted into the Touch
21-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
1.3 Protecting Displays and Operations
● Displays and Operations that can be Protected with the Security Function
Security groups can be assigned to users to protect Touch displays and operations. These groups are capable of the
following actions.
• Protecting the display of screens
Touch Touch Touch
Base Screen 1 Password
User2
********
▼
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
ENT
Tank 1
Full
21
BS CLR OK
User Accounts and the Security
The Password Base Screen 2 is
screen is displayed. displayed.
Goto Screen Button Switch user account.
Base Screen 2
(Switch to Base Screen 2)
Can be displayed
Base Screen 2 User2
Cannot be User2
displayed
No user
• Protecting the display of parts
Line Chart that can only be displayed with User2
Touch Touch Touch
Password
User2 ▼
******** ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK
The Password Line Chart is
screen is displayed. displayed.
Goto Screen Button Switch user account.
Line Chart
(Open Password Screen)
Can be displayed
Line Chart User2
Cannot be User2
displayed
No user
• Protecting the operation of parts
Numerical Input that can only be operated by User2
Touch Touch Touch
Password
User2 ▼ 999
********
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
999 N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
999 999
BS CLR OK
The Password screen The Numerical Input
is displayed. can be operated.
Goto Screen Button Switch user account.
Numerical Input
(Open Password Screen)
Can be operated
User2
Numerical Input
User2
Can be operated
No user
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-5
1 Overview
● Security Groups that Protect Touch Displays and Operations
The security groups that protect the display and operation of screens and parts are user-created. Only the user
accounts assigned to the same security group as the security group configured for the screens and parts can display
and operate those screens and parts.
The security group for screens and parts is configured in the Options tab in the Properties dialog box for the screen
or part. The input security group to protect operations can only be configured for parts with an input function.
Example: If the user and security group for the part are set as follows:
User Name
User2 User3 User4
Security Group GroupA GroupA, GroupB GroupB
Touch Goto Screen Button (Open Password Screen)
Line Chart and Bar Chart Display: None
Input: None
Display: GroupA
Numerical Input
999 Display: None
Input: GroupB
Button
Default user: None Display: GroupA
Input: GroupB
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User2 in GroupA, the parts for GroupA are displayed. The
parts for GroupB cannot be operated.
Touch Touch Touch
Not
Displayed
displayed
Password
999 User ▼ 999 999
AB C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
Cannot be BS CLR OK
Cannot be
operated operated
With no user, GroupA parts Open the password screen with the Goto With User2, GroupA parts are
are hidden, GroupB parts Screen Button, enter the password, and shown, GroupB parts cannot be
cannot be operated. switch to User2. operated.
User2
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User3 in GroupA and GroupB, the parts for GroupA are
displayed and the parts for GroupB can be operated.
Not
Displayed
displayed
999
Password
999 User ▼ 999 999
AB C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
Cannot be BS CLR OK
Can be
operated operated
With no user, GroupA parts Open the password screen with the Goto With User3, GroupA parts are
are hidden, GroupB parts Screen Button, enter the password, and shown, GroupB parts can be
cannot be operated. switch to User3. operated.
User3
Parts that are not displayed on the screen cannot be operated regardless of the input security group.
21-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Overview
If the password screen is opened and the user switches to User4 in GroupB, only the displayed parts for GroupB can
be operated. The GroupA parts are not displayed.
Touch Touch Touch
Not Not
displayed displayed
999
Password
999 User ▼ 999 999
AB C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
Cannot be BS CLR OK
Can be
operated operated
With no user, GroupA parts
are hidden, GroupB parts
Open the password screen with the Goto
Screen Button, enter the password, and
With User4, GroupA parts are
hidden, displayed GroupB parts
21
cannot be operated. switch to User4. can be operated.
User Accounts and the Security
User4
GroupA is not configured for User4, so the button in the lower right of the screen is not displayed. Parts that
are not displayed on the screen cannot be operated, even by the user configured with the input security
group.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-7
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
This section describes the configuration procedure for the Security function.
2.1 Creating and Editing User Accounts
● Creating a User Account
1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The User Accounts dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the Use Security functions check box.
The settings related to user accounts are displayed.
The user account already provided with WindO/I-NV3 is as follows.
No.: 1
User Name: User
Password: (blank)
Security Group: Administrator, Operator, Reader
21-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
3 Click Add.
The New User Account dialog box is displayed.
4 Specify the user number (1 to 15) in No.
This number is used when switching the user account according to the value of device.
21
User Accounts and the Security
5 Enter the name for the new user in User Name.
The maximum number for the user name is eight characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
\/:*?“<>|
6 Enter the password in Password.
The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15. Only uppercase alphabetic characters and numbers can be
used.
Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.
7 Click the Group Membership tab.
Assign the security groups to the user being created.
Administrator, Operator, and Reader have already been provided in Security Group. These three security
groups cannot be used in multiple user accounts. To use them with the user account being created, delete the
security group from the user account they are assigned to beforehand.
User1 User2 User3
Administrator Operator Administrator
Reader
If you will not add a new security group, proceed to step 11.
If you will not assign a security group, proceed to step 12.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-9
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
8 Click Add.
The New Security Group dialog box is displayed.
9 Enter the name of the new group in New Group, and then click << Add.
The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
The created group name is added to Security Group. Repeat this procedure to create multiple security groups.
“ ” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “ ” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.
10 Click OK.
The group added is displayed in Security Group.
11 Select the security groups in Security Group on the New User Account dialog box to assign to the user being
created, and then click << Copy.
The security groups are copied to To.
The security groups that you create can be used in multiple user accounts.
User1 User2 User3 User4
GroupA GroupB GroupB GroupC
Created security GroupC
GroupB
groups (12 max)
GroupC
Multiple user accounts can use the same security groups.
To delete the security groups assigned to the user, select the security groups to delete in To, and then click Delete.
• To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Select the security groups in Security Group, and then click Delete to delete the security groups.
However, security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.
21-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
12 Click OK.
If you will not continue creating a user account, proceed to step 14.
13 Repeat steps 3 through 12 and create all of the necessary user accounts.
You can configure a user account to be enabled when the Touch power is turned on and when switching the
Run Mode in Default User.
21
User Accounts and the Security
14 Click OK.
The User Accounts dialog box closes.
This concludes creating a user account.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-11
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
● Editing a User Account
1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The User Accounts dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the user account to edit, and then click Edit.
The Change User Account dialog box is displayed.
3 On the General tab, change User Name and Password.
21-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
4 Click the Group Membership tab.
Change the security groups assigned to the user.
If you will not assign a security group or you will not delete a security group, proceed to step 7.
21
User Accounts and the Security
5 Select the security groups in Security Group to assign to the user being edited, and then click << Copy.
The security groups are copied to To.
If you will not delete a security group, proceed to step 7.
To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
6 Select the security groups assigned to the user to delete in To, and then click Delete.
The security groups are deleted from To.
• To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Select the security groups in Security Group, and then click Delete to delete the security groups.
However, security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-13
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
7 Click OK.
8 Click OK to close the User Accounts dialog box.
This concludes editing a user account.
● Deleting a User Account
1 On the Configuration tab, in the Protect group, click User Accounts.
The User Accounts dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the user account to delete, and then click Remove.
The user account is deleted.
3 Click OK.
The User Accounts dialog box closes.
This concludes deleting a user account.
21-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
2.2 Adding and Editing Security Groups
● Adding a Security Group
1 On the Project window, double click Security Group Settings.
The Security Group Settings dialog box is displayed.
21
User Accounts and the Security
2 Enter the name of the new group in New Group, and then click << Add.
The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
The created group name is added to Security Group. Repeat this procedure to create multiple security groups.
“ ” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “ ” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.
3 Click OK.
The Security Group Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes adding a security group.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-15
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
● Changing the Name of a Security Group
1 On the Project window, double click Security Group Settings.
The Security Group Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the security group in Security Group to change the name of, and then click Rename.
The Change Security Group Name dialog box is displayed.
The group name for Administrator, Operator, and Reader cannot be changed.
3 Change the name of the security group to the new group name in New Name.
The maximum number for the group name is 15 characters.
“ ” (Japanese), “None” (English), and “ ” (Chinese) cannot be used for the group name.
4 Click OK.
The Change Security Group Name dialog box closes.
5 Click OK.
The Security Group Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes changing the name of a security group.
21-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
● Deleting a Security Group
1 On the Project window, double click Security Group Settings.
The Security Group Settings dialog box is displayed.
21
User Accounts and the Security
2 Select the security group in Security Group to delete, and then click Delete.
The security group is deleted.
To select multiple security groups, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
• Security groups configured for user accounts, screens, and parts cannot be deleted.
• Administrator, Operator, and Reader cannot be deleted.
3 Click OK.
The Security Group Settings dialog box closes.
This concludes deleting a security group.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-17
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
2.3 Protecting the Display and Operation of Screens and Parts
● Protecting the Display of Screens
Here you will configure the security group for a screen to protect the display of that screen.
This section describes an example where the display of Base Screen 2 is protected when switching to Base Screen 2
by pressing the Goto Screen Button.
Touch Touch
Base Screen 1 Base Screen 2
Goto Screen Button Tank 1
(Switch to Base Screen 2) Full
Base Screen 2 Base Screen 2
Cannot be Can be displayed
displayed User2
No user
To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.
Configuration Procedure
1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 21-8, create the following user account.
User Name
User2
Security Group GroupA
To automatically display the Password screen when the user attempts to switch to a Base Screen they cannot access
with the current user account using the Goto Screen Button, in the User Accounts dialog box, in the Options tab,
select the Require a password automatically check box. For displaying the Password screen, refer to “4.1
Entering the Password on the Touch” on page 21-36.
21-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
2 Place a Goto Screen Button on Base Screen 1.
On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.
21
User Accounts and the Security
3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button.
4 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.
5 Select Switch to Base Screen for Action Mode.
6 Specify the screen number of the Base Screen to switch to with Screen No. under Goto Screen.
2 is specified here.
7 Click OK.
The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-19
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
8 Create the Base Screen to switch to and configure the security group.
On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow under New, and then click Base Screen.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.
9 Specify the screen number of the Base Screen to switch to with No. on the General tab.
This is the same screen number as the screen number specified in step 6. 2 is specified here.
10 Click the Options tab.
11 With Security Group, select the security group to allow the display of the Base Screen.
GroupA is selected here.
12 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
The Screen Properties dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the project to protect the display of screens.
21-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.
1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Switch to Base Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Touch
Base Screen 1
Press the Goto Screen Button.
21
No user
User Accounts and the Security
2 Press ▼ and select User2.
Password
User2 ▼
A B C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK
3 Enter the password.
1. Press , , , and to move the cursor to the character selected and then press ENT.
Password
User2 ▼
* ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789 1 2
BS CLR OK
2. Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password.
3. Press , , , and to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT.
Password
User2 ▼
******** ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789 1 2
BS CLR OK
If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 and the Password screen closes.
Base Screen 2 is displayed.
Touch
Base Screen 2
Tank 1
Full
User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-21
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
● Protecting the Display of Parts
Here you will configure the security group for a part to protect the display of that part.
This section describes an example where the display of the Line Chart is protected.
Goto Screen Button
(Open Password Screen)
Touch Touch
Line Chart Line Chart
Cannot Can be displayed
be displayed User2
No user
To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.
Configuration Procedure
1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 21-8, create the following user account.
User Name
User2
Security Group GroupA
2 Create a Line Chart and configure the display security group.
On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Charts, and then click Line Chart.
3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Line Chart.
4 Double-click the dropped Line Chart and the Properties dialog box is displayed.
21-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
5 Click Advanced.
The Options tab is displayed.
21
User Accounts and the Security
6 Click the Options tab.
7 Select the security group to allow the display of the Line Chart with Display under Security Group.
GroupA is selected here.
8 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
The Properties of Line Chart dialog box closes.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-23
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
9 Place a Goto Screen Button to display the password screen on the Base Screen.
On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.
10 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button.
11 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.
12 Select Open Password Screen for Action Mode.
13 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the Base Screen with Coordinates
X, Y.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
21-24 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
14 Click OK.
The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the project to protect the display of a part.
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.
1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Open Password Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Touch
21
User Accounts and the Security
Press the Goto Screen Button.
No user
2 Press ▼ and select User2.
Password
User2 ▼
A B C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK
3 Enter the password.
1. Press , , , and to move the cursor to the character selected and then press ENT.
Password
User2 ▼
* ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789 1 2
BS CLR OK
2. Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password.
3. Press , , , and to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT.
Password
User2 ▼
******** ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789 1 2
BS CLR OK
If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen
closes.
The Line Chart is displayed.
Touch
User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-25
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
● Protecting the Operation of Parts
Here you will configure the security group for a part to protect the operation of that part.
This section describes an example where the operation of the Numerical Input is protected.
Goto Screen Button
(Open Password Screen)
Touch Touch
999 999 999
Numerical Input The keypad is not displayed, Numerical Input
Cannot be nothing can be operated. Can be operated
operated User2
No user
To change the user account, a button or command is required to open the Password screen.
Configuration Procedure
1 Following the procedure in “Creating a User Account” on page 21-8, create the following user account.
User Name
User2
Security Group GroupA
2 Create a Numerical Input and configure the input security group.
On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Data Displays, and then click Numerical Input.
3 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Numerical Input.
4 Double-click the dropped Numerical Input and the Properties dialog box is displayed.
21-26 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
5 Click Advanced.
The Options tab is displayed.
21
User Accounts and the Security
6 Click the Options tab.
7 Select the security group to allow the operation of the Numerical Input with Input under Security Group.
GroupA is selected here.
8 Configure the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
The Properties of Numerical Input dialog box closes.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-27
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
9 Place a Goto Screen Button to display the password screen on the Base Screen.
On the Home tab, in the Parts group, click Buttons, and then click Goto Screen Button.
10 Click a point on the edit screen where you want to place the Goto Screen Button.
11 Double-click the dropped Goto Screen Button and the Properties dialog box is displayed.
12 Select Open Password Screen for Action Mode.
13 Specify the display location in coordinates for the password screen to open above the Base Screen with Coordinates
X, Y.
With the upper-left corner of the screen as the origin, the upper-left corner of the window is the X and Y coordinates.
X: 0 to (Base Screen horizontal size - 1)
Y: 0 to (Base Screen vertical size - 1)
14 Click OK.
The Properties of Goto Screen Button dialog box closes.
This concludes configuring the project to protect the operation of a part.
21-28 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
2 Security Function Configuration Procedure
Operating Procedure
This section describes an example when the current user account has no default user.
1 Press the Goto Screen Button configured with Open Password Screen.
The Password screen is displayed.
Touch
999
Press the Goto Screen Button.
21
No user
User Accounts and the Security
2 Press ▼ and select User2.
Password
User2 ▼
A B C D E F G H I J KLM ENT
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK
3 Enter the password.
1. Press , , , and to move the cursor to the character selected and then press ENT.
Password
User2 ▼
* ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789 1 2
BS CLR OK
2. Repeat 1 to enter all the characters for the password.
3. Press , , , and to move the cursor to OK and then press ENT.
Password
User2 ▼
******** ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789 1 2
BS CLR OK
If the correct password is entered, the user account changes to User2 from no default user and the Password screen
closes.
The Numerical Input can be operated.
Touch
999 999
User2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-29
3 User Accounts Dialog Box
3 User Accounts Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons on the User Accounts dialog box.
3.1 User Accounts Dialog Box
The passwords and security groups assigned to user accounts are collectively managed in the User Accounts dialog
box.
● General Tab
■ Use Security functions
Select this check box to protect access to data and to protect Touch displays and operations by accounts. The settings
related to user accounts are displayed.
When this check box is cleared, switching to System Mode, displaying the monitor, and accessing data are protected
by a single password. The SmartAXIS Touch is not protected if Password is left blank.
User Name: Enter the name for the user account.
The maximum number for the user name is eight characters. Only alphanumeric characters and
symbols can be used.
You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
\/:*?“<>|
Password: Enter the password.
The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15. Only uppercase alphabetic characters
and numbers can be used.
Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.
21-30 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 User Accounts Dialog Box
■ Users for this project
No.: Displays the number (1 to 15) used when switching the user account according to the value of
device. Double clicking the cell displays the Change User Account dialog box. For details, refer
to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.
User Name: Displays the name for the user account. Double clicking the cell displays the Change User
Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User
Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.
Password: Displays the password for the user account. Double clicking the cell displays the Change User
Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User
Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.
Security Group: Displays all of the security groups for user accounts. Double clicking the cell displays the 21
Change User Account dialog box. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and
User Accounts and the Security
Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.
■ Add
Makes a new user account. You can create a maximum of 15. Click this button to display the New User Account dialog
box. In the New User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are assigned to the user
account. For details, refer to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.
■ Edit
Select a number in Users for this project, and then click this button to display the Change User Account dialog box.
In the Change User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are changed. For details, refer
to “New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box” on page 21-32.
■ Remove
Deletes the user account with the selected number. Select a number, and then click this button.
■ Default User
Select the user account to be enabled when the Touch power is turned on and when switching the Run Mode.
If None is selected, no user account is selected when the Touch power is turned on and when the Run Mode is
changed. Screens and parts cannot be displayed or operated that are protected by a security group.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-31
3 User Accounts Dialog Box
New User Account Dialog Box and Change User Account Dialog Box
In the New User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups are assigned to an account and
that user account is added.
In the Change User Account dialog box, the user name, password, and security groups for the selected user account
are changed.
General Tab
■ No.
In the New User Account dialog box, this setting specifies the number (1 to 15) when switching the account according
to the value of device.
When Edit was clicked and the Change User Account dialog box was displayed, this item displays the selected user
account number.
■ User Name
Enter the name for the user account.
The maximum number is eight characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
You cannot use the following characters in the user name.
\/:*?“<>|
■ Password
Enter the password.
The number of characters for the password is 4 to 15. Only uppercase alphabetic characters and numbers can be
used.
Write down the password so you do not forget it and save that note in a safe place.
21-32 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 User Accounts Dialog Box
Group Membership Tab
21
User Accounts and the Security
■ To: (user name being configured)
Displays the user name and the list of security groups assigned to the user.
■ << Copy
Assigns the security groups to the user displayed in To.
Select the security groups in Security Group, and then click this button to add them to To.
■ Delete
Deletes the security groups assigned to the user.
Select the security groups in To, and then click this button.
■ Security Group
Displays a list of all the security groups. The provided security groups (Administrator, Operator, and Reader) are
grayed out if assigned to another user account.
■ Add
Makes a new security group. You can create a maximum of 12.
Click this button to display the New Security Group dialog box. New security groups are added in the New Security
Group dialog box. For details, refer to “Adding a Security Group” on page 21-15.
■ Rename
Select a security group in Security Group, and then click this button to display the Change Security Group Name
dialog box. Change the name of the security group in the Change Security Group Name dialog box. For details, refer
to “Changing the Name of a Security Group” on page 21-16.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-33
3 User Accounts Dialog Box
● Options Tab
These settings can only be configured when the Use Security functions check box is selected on the General tab.
■ Change User by Device
Select this check box to switch the user account according to the value of device.
The user account is specified by using the number on the General tab.
(Trigger device): Specifies the word device to write the number.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: When the trigger device is D0 and the default user is selected as User1
No. 1 2 3
User Name User1 User2 User3
(Default user)
The user account switches according to the value of device.
Value of Trigger device D0 1 2 3 4 0
User account
User1 User2 User3 User3 User1
Action Switch to user Switch to user Switch to user Switch to default
None
account no. 1 account no. 2 account no. 3 user account
The user account is not switched when the If the value of device is 0,
value of device is a number not configured to the user is switched to the
a user account or an invalid number. default user.
■ Back to Default User
Select this check box to automatically switch to the default user when the Touch is unused for an extended period of
time.
After: Specify the time (0 to 60 minutes) to switch to the default user after the Touch is last used.
If 0 is set, the Touch switches back to the default user immediately, even if the user account was
changed.
21-34 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 User Accounts Dialog Box
■ Status of Password Entry
Select this check box to monitor the entry status of the password on the Password screen.
(Destination device): Specifies a word device to write the password entry status.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
The following bits change to 1 depending on the password input status. These bits become 0 when the Password
screen opens or when a button other than ENT or (Close) is pressed on the Password screen.
Bit
21
Function Parameters
position
User Accounts and the Security
This bit stores the information when the correct password was 0: Password being entered
0
entered on the Password screen and ENT was pressed. 1: Correct password entered
This bit stores the information when an incorrect password was 0: Password being entered
1
entered on the Password screen and ENT was pressed. 1: Incorrect password entered
This bit stores the information when (Close) was pressed on 0: Password being entered
2
the Password screen. 1: Password entry canceled
3 to 7 Reserved –
■ Require a password automatically
Select this check box to automatically display the Password screen when the user attempts to switch to a Base Screen
that cannot be accessed with the current user account by using a Goto Screen Button or Goto Screen Command
configured with Switch to Base Screen for the Action Mode in the Properties dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-35
4 Password Input
4 Password Input
When a password is configured for a user account, the user is prompted to enter their password with the following
operations.
• Accessing password protected data
• Executing password protected displays and operations
4.1 Entering the Password on the Touch
To execute password protected operations, the user must open the Password screen and switch the user account.
The Password screen is opened with a Goto Screen Button or Goto Screen Command configured with Password
Screen. The Password screen is also automatically displayed on the Touch when the following operations are
executed.
• Switching to a Base Screen for a security group that cannot be displayed by the current user account with the Goto
Screen Button, Multi-Button, Goto Screen Command, or Multi-Command when the Require a password
automatically check box is selected on the Options tab in the User Accounts dialog box
• Switching to Top Page in the System Mode or displaying the Device Monitor with the Maintenance screen, Goto
Screen Button, Multi-Button, Goto Screen Command, or Multi-Command
• Downloading or uploading project data with a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command
• Executing the USB Autorun function
• Operations where the Password screen is not displayed are as follows.
- Switching the Base Screen using the System Area
- Displaying the alarm screen for the Alarm Log Settings
- Opening the keypad with the Numerical Input or Character Input
- Opening the Ref. screen with the Alarm Log Display
- For screens that are already open when the user account was switched by opening the Password screen
with the Goto Screen Button or Goto Screen Command
• When the user account is switched, the displayed Base Screen is reset. Popup screens and internal
devices have the same behavior as when the Base Screen is switched. However, if the Close while
changing Base Screen check box is selected on the Options tab in the Properties dialog box for the
popup screen, the popup screen is closed when the Base Screen is switched. The behavior of the internal
devices varies based on the internal devices. For details, refer to Chapter 27 “Internal Devices” on page
27-1.
• When the Touch has been installed vertically, the password screen is displayed horizontally.
21-36 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Password Input
● Password Screen Configuration
Password Close button
User Name User ▼
Password
Cursor
******** ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z
Key list 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 789
BS CLR OK
■ User Name
Displays the selected user name.
■▼
21
Switches the user name. Changes the user name in order of user account number. When the last user name is
User Accounts and the Security
changed, it returns to the first user name.
■ Password
The entered password is displayed as “*”.
■ Key list
Cursor Highlights the selected character or command.
A to Z, 0 to 9: The available characters which can be used in the Password. Select with the cursor and press ENT
to enter the selected character in Password.
BS : Select with the cursor and press ENT to delete one character entered in Password.
CLR : Select with the cursor and press ENT to delete all the characters entered in Password.
OK : Select with the cursor and press ENT to confirm the entered password and start verifying the user
name and password.
If the entered password is correct, the Password screen closes and the operation executes.
If the entered password was incorrect, the password entered on the Password screen is deleted and
the screen returns to input mode.
■
Moves the character list cursor up.
■
Moves the character list cursor left.
■
Moves the character list cursor right.
■
Moves the character list cursor down.
■ ENT
Enters the selected character in Password or executes the selected command.
■ (Close) button
Cancels password entry and closes the Password screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 21-37
4 Password Input
4.2 Entering the Password in WindO/I-NV3
When a user account assigned with Administrator is configured with a password, the Enter Password dialog box is
displayed in WindO/I-NV3 as required and the user is prompted to enter their password.
The operations that display the Enter Password dialog box are as follows.
• Opening projects
• Reusing screens
• Downloading project data
• Downloading data to external memory*1
• Downloading data to external memory*1 while the Touch is running
• Uploading project data
• Uploading external memory data*1
• Deleting all data
• Deleting external memory data*1
• Formatting external memory*1
● Enter Password Dialog Box
■ User Name
Selects the user name. This item can only be selected when multiple user accounts are registered.
■ Password
Enter the password. The entered password is displayed as “*”.
■ OK
Confirms the entered password and starts verifying the user name and password.
If the entered password is correct, the Enter Password dialog box closes and the operation executes.
If the entered password is incorrect, a confirmation message is displayed.
■ Cancel
Cancels password input and closes the Enter Password dialog box.
*1 External memory inserted into the Touch
21-38 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1
Chapter 22 Communication
This chapter describes the communication between the Touch and the external device.
1 PLC Link Communication
1.1 Overview
PLC Link Communication refers to the communiation protocol used for communication with the Touch, via the CPU
Unit*1 or PLC Link Unit*1 Programming Port of the external device connected to the Touch.
The Touch continuously reads the value of device of external devices on the currently displayed screen, and external
devices (such as relays and registers) on the screens are updated with the latest data at all times.
When a button is pressed or a command is executed in the Touch screen, the value is written to the external device. 22
Communication
PLC Link Commuication
Touch
External device
Numerical Display Read
Reference Device: D0 D0: 1234
1234
Bit Button 0 1
Destination Device: M0 Write M0:
For details regarding the PLC Link Communication, refer to Chapter 1 "PLC Link Communication" and
Chapter 2 "Connection to a PLC" in the "External Device Setup Manual".
*1 Unit names vary based on the manufacturer of the external device.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-1
1 PLC Link Communication
● PLC Link Connection Types
There are two basic types of connections. 1:1 Communication, where an external device is connected to a Touch; and
1:N Communication, where multiple external devices are connected to a Touch.
■ 1:1 Communication
The Touch is connected to a single external device.
Touch PLC Link Communication External device
Read
Write
■ 1:N Communication
The Touch is connected to multiple external devices.
PLC Link Communication
Touch External device
Read
Write
Station No.1
Read
Write
Station No.2
Read
Write
Station No.3
1.2 PLC Link Communication Settings
The external devices connected to the Touch and connection types are selected on the Select Communication Driver
dialog box, or the Change Communication Driver dialog box.
• When creating new project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step, by
clicking , and then clicking New, the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer
to Chapter 3 “Create new project data by using the interactive quick start” on page 3-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 “Changing Communication Drivers” on page 3-14.
Specify Manufacturer and Communication Driver for each CPU Unit*1 or each PLC Link Unit*1 of the external
device. For details regarding the correspondence model, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual."
*1 Unit names vary based on the manufacturer of the external device.
22-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 O/I Link Communication
2 O/I Link Communication
2.1 Overview
O/I Link Communication is a protocol for communication between Master and Slave, where a Touch connected to the
external device is configured as a Master and multiple Touch (Slaves) communicate with the external device via the
Master.
The Master Touch unit communicates with the external device by means of PLC Link Communication. The Master
Touch is called an O/I Link Master and a slave Touch connected to the O/I Link Master is called an O/I Link Slave. A
maximum of 15 O/I Link Slaves can be connected to an O/I Link Master.
Touch PLC Link Communication
O/I Link Master
External device 22
Read
Communication
D1: 5678
0 1
Write
M1:
O/I Link Communication
Read Write Read Write Read Write
Numerical Display
Reference Device: D1
5678
Bit Button
Destination Device: M1
Touch Touch Touch
O/I Link Slave O/I Link Slave O/I Link Slave
(Slave 1) (Slave 2) (Slave 15)
• The MICRO/I models that can communicate with the Touch using O/I Link Communication are the
HG2G-S/-5S/-5F, and HG3G/4G.
• For details regarding the O/I Link Communication, refer to Chapter 3 "O/I Link Communication" in the
"External Device Setup Manual".
2.2 O/I Link Communication Settings
These settings are configured under the O/I Link tab on the Project Settings dialog box. The Project Settings dialog
box can also be accessed using the following methods.
• Click Project on the Configuration tab.
• Double click Project Settings in the Project window.
The O/I Link Communication Settings can only be configured when O/I Link Master or O/I Link Slave is selected
in Protocol under Interface Settings on the Communication Interface tab. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.6
O/I Link Tab” on page 3-35.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-3
3 DM Link Communication
3 DM Link Communication
3.1 Overview
DM Link Communication reads and writes value to external devices using the Touch's dedicated DM Link memory. The
device type of dedicated DM Link memory is DM.
This method uses a dedicated IDEC protocol, so a communication program is required in the external device.
DM Link Communication
Touch
External device
Read Numerical Display
DM0: 999 Destination Device: DM0
999
5678
1234 5678 Numerical Display
DM1:
Write Reference Device: DM1
Dedicated DM Link memory
DM0
DM1
DM2
DM8190
DM8191
For details regarding the DM Link Communication, refer to Chapter 4 "DM Link Communication" in the
"External Device Setup Manual".
● Communication Methods
There are two basic types of DM Link Communication. 1:1 Communication, where the Touch is connected to an
external device; and 1:N Communication, where multiple Touch are connected to an external device.
■ 1:1 Communication
The external device is connected to a single Touch.
External device DM Link 1:1 Communication Touch
Read
Dedicated DM
Link memory
Write
The Event Transmission function from the Touch can be used with 1:1 communication.
The Event Transmission function is a function that works as follows. When value in the dedicated DM Link memory of
the Touch is changed, the data is transmitted from the Touch to the external device.
External device DM Link 1:1 Communication Touch
DM0: 100 Event transmission DM0: 0 100
Dedicated DM
DM1: 150 Link memory
DM1: 0 150
DM2: 200 DM2: 0 200
22-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 DM Link Communication
■ 1:N Communication
The external device is connected to multiple Touch.
DM Link 1:N Communication
External device Touch
Read
Write Dedicated DM
Link memory
Station No.1
Read
Write Dedicated DM
Link memory
Station No.2
Read 22
Write
Communication
Dedicated DM
Link memory
Station No.3
The Event Transmission function cannot be used with 1:N communication.
3.2 DM Link Communication Settings
DM Link Communication settings are selected on the Select Communication Driver dialog box, or the Change
Communication Driver dialog box.
• When creating new project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step, by
clicking , and then clicking New, the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer
to Chapter 3 “Create new project data by using the interactive quick start” on page 3-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 “Changing Communication Drivers” on page 3-14.
Select IDEC System in Manufacturer, and then select DM Link (1:1) or DM Link (1:N) in Communication
Driver.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-5
4 No External Devices
4 No External Devices
4.1 Overview
In this case, there is no communication with an external device, so the Touch operates as a standalone unit.
It is only possible to operate the Touch with relays and registers.
Touch
Internal device
No external devices
4.2 No External devices Settings
No external devices settings are selected on the Select Communication Driver dialog box, or the Change
Communication Driver dialog box.
• When creating new project data by following displayed dialog boxes and configuring settings step by step, by
clicking , and then clicking New, the Select Communication Driver dialog box is displayed. For details, refer
to Chapter 3 “Create new project data by using the interactive quick start” on page 3-1.
• Click Communication Driver on the status bar to display the Change Communication Driver dialog box. For
details, refer to Chapter 3 “Changing Communication Drivers” on page 3-14.
Select IDEC System in Manufacturer, and then select No External Device in Communication Driver.
22-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
5 User Communication
5.1 Overview
User Communication allows you to develop a communication protocol to transmit and receive data from an external
device, such as a bar code reader. The Touch supports the user communication with start and stop synchronization
(full duplex) and a maximum of 1,500 bytes of data transmission or reception.
User Communication is supported up to three interfaces of the Touch, either serial, Ethernet, or USB interfaces.
PLC Link Communication
Touch External device
22
Communication
User communication
Data transmission Data reception
External device
Up to 31 external devices can be connected when the serial interface is RS485. However, it is necessary to
thoroughly check command settings, error handling, and other detailed command specifications when
considering the capability of communicating with two or more external devices to decide the number of
external devices to be connected.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-7
5 User Communication
5.2 User Communication Settings Procedure
This section describes the procedure for setting user communication.
● Setting user communication for a communication interface
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Click the Communication Interface tab.
3 Select the interface for user communication under Interface Configuration, and then select the user
communication in Protocol under Interface Settings.
The User Communication tab is displayed.
22-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
4 Specify the items for Interface Settings.
Setting items vary based on the interface.
• Serial Interface
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “When Port is selected under Interface Configuration” on page 3-27.
• Ethernet Interface
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “When Protocol1, Protocol2, or Protocol3 is selected for Ethernet under
Interface Configuration” on page 3-29.
• USB Interface
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “When USB2 is selected under Interface Configuration” on page 3-30.
5 Click the User Communication tab.
22
Communication
6 Select the user communication under Settings, and then click Browse.
Select the user communication configured on the Communication Interface tab.
Protocol Manager is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-9
5 User Communication
7 Select the user communication protocol under Protocol List, and then click Select.
The name of the configured user communication protocol set on the User Communication tab in the Project
Settings dialog box is displayed in Protocol Name under Settings, and the protocol settings are displayed under
Protocol. In addition, the command settings selected under Protocol are displayed under Command.
8 Click OK.
This concludes configuring user communication for communication interfaces.
22-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
● Creating a New User Communication Protocol
1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Protocol Manager).
Protocol Manager is displayed.
2 Click Add.
The User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box is displayed.
22
Communication
3 Enter the name of the user communication protocol in the Protocol Name.
The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
\/:,;*?"<>|
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-11
5 User Communication
4 Set the time out (0 to 255) from when 1 frame of data has been received to when the next frame of data starts to be
received in Receiving Character Time Out (x100 msec).
A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. These setting items are used only with
receive command.
5 Click Edit.
The Command Settings dialog box is displayed.
6 Set Transmission (TXD) command.
Enter a comment for transmission command in Comment.
The maximum number is 40 characters.
7 Select TXD in Command Type.
Specify the transmitted data to the external device connected to the Touch and the conditions for transmitting data.
8 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting that data transmission was successfully completed in
Completed Device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
9 Specify the destination word device for the transmitted data size and error information in Status Device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
10 Set the wait time (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when the data is transmitted in
Transmission Wait (x100 msec).
11 Select the condition to transmit data in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Rising-edge
Data is transmitted when the value of device changes from 0 to 1.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Falling-edge
Data is transmitted when the value of device changes from 1 to 0.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
22-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
■ Satisfy the condition
Data is transmitted when condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the data type handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ Fixed Period
Data is transmitted at a fixed time interval.
Set the time interval between data transmissions as 1 to 3600 (seconds) in Period (sec).
12 Set data for transmission command.
Click Edit.
The Data Settings dialog box is displayed.
22
Communication
13 Select data type in Type.
Data setting items are displayed.
For details on transmission command, refer to “Transmission (TXD) Command” on page 22-37.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-13
5 User Communication
14 Set the data, and then click OK.
The data configured in Command is displayed.
15 Repeat steps 12 through 14 to set all the data for the transmission command.
The data are displayed in Command in the order they were set. To change the order of data, select data,
and then click Up or Down to shift it.
16 Click OK.
The transmission command configured under Protocol is displayed.
17 Specify Receive (RXD) command.
Click Edit.
22-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
18 Specify Receive (RXD) command.
Enter a comment for receive command in Comment.
The maximum number is 40 characters.
22
Communication
19 Select RXD in Command Type.
Define the data configuration for received data from the external device.
20 Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting that data receiving was successfully completed in
Completed Device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
If the value of Completed Device automatically is not set to 0 after it is set to 1, select the Not Clear Completed
Device automatically check box.
21 Specify the destination word device for the received data size and error information in Status Device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
22 Select the condition for being ready to receive data in Trigger Type under Trigger Condition from the following.
■ Always Enabled
The device is always ready to receive data. Proceed to step 24.
■ While ON
Ready to receive data when the value of device is 1.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ While OFF
Ready to receive data when the value of device is 0.
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device as the condition.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ While satisfying the condition
Ready to receive data while a condition is satisfied.
Specify the conditional expression in Condition and select the type of data handled by the conditional expression in
Data Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
For details on data types, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-15
5 User Communication
23 Set the time out (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied in Receiving Time Out (x100 msec) to
when 1 frame of data has been received.
A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command.
24 Set data for receive command.
Click Edit.
The Data Settings dialog box is displayed.
25 Select data type in Type.
Data setting items are displayed.
For details on receive command, refer to “Receive (RXD) Command” on page 22-50.
26 Specify the data, and then click OK.
The data configured in Command on the Command Settings dialog box is displayed.
22-16 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
27 Repeat steps 24 through 26 to specify all the data for the receive command.
22
Communication
The data are displayed in Command in the order they were set. To change the order of data, select data,
and then click Up or Down to shift it.
28 Click OK.
The receive command configured in Protocol on the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box is displayed.
To add a transmission command, repeat steps 5 through 16.
To add a receive command, repeat steps 17 through 28.
29 Configure all commands, click OK.
User communication protocols are registered in Protocol List on Protocol Manager.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-17
5 User Communication
30 Click Close.
This concludes registering user communication protocol.
22-18 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
● Using registered user communication protocol on another computer
Saving registered user communication protocol as a file
To use the user communication protocol registered in Protocol Manager on another computer, save it as a file.
1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Protocol Manager).
Protocol Manager is displayed.
2 Select the user communication protocol in Protocol List, and then click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed. 22
To select multiple user communication protocols, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific
Communication
items.
3 Specify Save in, and then click Save.
The name of the saved file will be the name of the protocol.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-19
5 User Communication
Importing user communication protocol
1 On the View tab, in the Workspace group, click (Protocol Manager).
Protocol Manager is displayed.
2 On Protocol Manager, click Import.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
To select multiple user communication protocols, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific
items.
3 Specify the user communication protocol file, and then click Open.
The user communication protocol is registered in Protocol Manager. The name of the user communication protocol file
is set as the name of the protocol.
When a user communication protocol file with the protocol name already exists, a confirmation message is
displayed.
• Click Overwrite to overwrite the existing user communication protocol.
• Click Rename to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box. Enter a new name for Protocol File
Name, and then click OK to add the user communication protocol with the protocol name entered for
Protocol File Name. For details, refer to “Protocol File Name Setting Dialog Box” on page 22-25.
• Click Cancel to stop importing the user communication protocol.
22-20 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
5.3 Protocol Manager
The protocol for user communication is collectively managed in Protocol Manager.
22
Communication
■ Protocol List
Displays a list of registered user communication protocols and sample protocols provided by WindO/I-NV3.
The bar code reader protocols such as Barcode-Reader1, Barcode-Reader2, and Barcode-Reader3 are
supplied as samples with WindO/I-NV3.
■ Add
Adds user communication protocols to the Protocol List.
Click this button to display the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box. Specify the user communication
protocol to be registered in the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “User
Communication Protocol Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-23.
■ Edit
Changes the selected user communication protocol.
Click this button to display the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box. Change the user communication
protocol in the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “User Communication Protocol
Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-23.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected user communication protocol.
■ Import
Imports a saved user communication protocol file. Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer
to “Importing user communication protocol” on page 22-20.
■ Export
Export and saves a selected user communication protocol as a file.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving registered user communication
protocol as a file” on page 22-19.
Saved user communication protocols can be imported using Import.
■ Copy
Copies the selected user communication protocol.
Click this button to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Protocol File Name Setting
Dialog Box” on page 22-25.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-21
5 User Communication
■ Protocol
The command settings for the user communication protocol selected in the Protocol List are displayed.
No.: Shows the number for managing command settings. Double clicking the cell displays the Command
Settings dialog box.
Type: Shows the type of command. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Completed: Shows the device for reporting when transmission or receiving of data is successfully completed.
Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Status: Shows the destination device for the transmitted or received data size and error information. Double
clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Trigger Type: Shows the trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. Double clicking the cell
displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Condition: Shows the condition of trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. The
displayed content varies based on Trigger Type.
Always Enabled: Trigger conditions are not necessary, so nothing is displayed.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge, While ON, or While OFF:
Shows the bit device as the condition. Double clicking the cell displays the
Command Settings dialog box.
While satisfying the condition or Satisfy the condition:
Shows the conditional expression.
Fixed Period: Shows the period.
Comment: Shows the command comment. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Size: Shows the command data size in bytes. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings
dialog box.
■ Command
Shows a list of command settings for the selected user communication protocol. Double clicking the line displays the
Data Settings dialog box.
■ Select
The highlighted user communication protocol in the protocol list is selected and Protocol Manager is closed.
■ Close
Close Protocol Manager.
22-22 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
● User Communication Protocol Settings Dialog Box
The command for user communication protocol is collectively managed in the User Communication Protocol Settings
dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Protocol Name
Enter the name of the user communication protocol. The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
\/:,;*?"<>|
■ Receiving Character Time Out (x100 msec)
Specify the time out value (0 to 255) from when 1 frame of data has been received to when the next frame of data
starts to be received. A frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. If the Receiving
Character Time Out is set to 0, it is not monitored. These setting items are used only with receive command.
Example: When the received data (1 frame) is 2 bytes, While ON is selected as Trigger Type in Trigger
Condition and LM100 is set to Device, LM101 is set to Completed Device, and LDR110 is set to Status
Device
The data of second byte starts to be received before exceeding the Receiving Character Time Out duration
after the data of first byte is received, and the values of the Completed Device and Status Device when
receiving of the data has been successfully completed are as follows.
• The value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is not selected, when the value of
the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes from 0 to 1, the value of the Completed Device LM101
changes to 0.
When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is selected, the value of Completed
Device LM101 remains 1, so set 0 if necessary.
• The value of the Receiving Character Time Out (address+0, bit 15) of the Status Device LDR110 remains
0.
Receiving Character Time Out duration
Receive command First byte of receive data Second byte of receive data
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON
0
1
Value of Completed Device
LM101
0
Value of Receiving Character Time Out 1
(address+0, bit 15)
of Status Device LDR110 0
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-23
5 User Communication
When the Receiving Character Time Out duration exceeds until the data of second byte starts to be
received after the data of first byte is received, the value of the Receiving Character Time Out (address+0,
bit 15) of the Status Device LDR110 changes to 1 and the Completed Device LM101 remains 0. In addition,
when the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes from 0 to 1, the value of LDR110 (address
+0, bit 15) changes to 0.
Receiving Character Time Out duration
Receive command First byte of receive data Second byte of receive data
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON
0
1
Value of Completed Device
LM101
0
Value of Receiving Character Time Out 1
(address+0, bit 15)
of Status Device LDR110 0
■ Protocol
Displays a list of command settings for the user communication protocol selected during editing. The maximum
amount that can be configured is 32 commands per protocol.
No.: Shows the number for managing command settings. Double clicking the cell displays the Command
Settings dialog box.
Type: Shows the type of command. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Completed: Shows the device for reporting when transmission or receiving of data is successfully completed.
Double clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box.
Status: Shows the destination device for the transmitted or received data size and error information. Double
clicking the cell displays the Device Address Settings dialog box.
Trigger Type: Shows the trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. Double clicking the cell
displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Condition: Shows the condition of trigger type for data transmission or being ready to receive data. The
displayed content varies based on Trigger Type.
Always Enabled: Trigger conditions are not necessary, so nothing is displayed.
Rising-edge, Falling-edge, While ON, or While OFF:
Shows the bit device as the condition. Double clicking the cell displays the
Command Settings dialog box.
While satisfying the condition or Satisfy the condition:
Shows the conditional expression.
Fixed Period: Shows the period.
Comment: Shows the command comment. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings dialog box.
Size: Shows the command data size in bytes. Double clicking the cell displays the Command Settings
dialog box.
■ Edit
Adds or changes commands.
To add a command, select an empty line for the protocol, and then click this button. To change a command, select a
command for the protocol, and then click this button. For details, refer to “Command Settings Dialog Box” on page
22-26.
■ Insert
Inserts a command in the selected position of the protocol.
Click this button to insert a command. The command at the insertion position shift down 1 line. When 32 commands
are already set, you cannot insert a command. For details, refer to “Command Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-26.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected command.
22-24 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
■ Copy
Copies the selected command.
Click this button to copy the selected command and add it to the end of the Protocol List.
■ Command
Displays data of the command selected in the protocol. Double clicking the line displays the Data Settings dialog box.
■ Copy to Protocol Manager
Copies a user communication protocol during editing and copies it to Protocol Manager.
Click this button to copy the user communication protocol and add it to the Protocol List of Protocol Manager.
This is enabled only when the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box under the User Communication
tab on the Project Settings dialog box is displayed.
When a protocol of the same name has already been saved, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
Click Overwrite to overwrite the existing protocol.
Click Rename to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box. Enter a new protocol name, and then click OK to 22
save the protocol.
Communication
Click Cancel to stop saving the protocol.
The User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box under the User Communication tab on the Project
Settings dialog box can be displayed in the following ways.
• Click Edit.
• Click Browse, and then click Add or Edit in Protocol Manager.
■ OK
Adds or changes the user communication protocol and closes the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box.
When a protocol of the same name has already been saved, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
Click Overwrite to overwrite the existing protocol.
Click Rename to display the Protocol File Name Settings dialog box. Enter a new protocol name, and then click OK to
save the protocol.
Click Cancel to stop saving the protocol.
■ Cancel
Closes the User Communication Protocol Settings dialog box, without adding or changing the user communication
protocol.
Protocol File Name Setting Dialog Box
Specify the name of a user communication protocol.
■ Protocol File Name
Enter the name of the user communication protocol. The maximum number for protocol name is 40 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the protocol name.
\/:,;*?"<>|
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-25
5 User Communication
● Command Settings Dialog Box
Specify the command details for user communication protocol.
■ Comment
Enter a comment for a command. The maximum number is 40 characters.
■ Command Type
Select the type of communication command from the following items.
TXD: A command for data transmission from the Touch to an external device.
External device
Touch
Transmission
Transmission data
1 2 3 4
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h)
Processing of transmission command is as follows.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is Rising-edge, Device is LM100 and
Completed Device is LM101
When the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes to 1, data is transmitted
by user communication from the Touch to the external device. When data transmission is
successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
State in which user State in which user
State in which data can be
communication is communication is
transmitted by user communication
not operating not operating
Start Complete
transmission transmission
Transmission data
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
Rising-edge 0
1
Value of Completed Device
LM101
0
22-26 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
RXD: A command for analyzing and processing data received by the Touch from an external device.
External device
Touch
Receive Receive data
1 2 3 4
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h)
Processing of receive command is as follows.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device is LM100 and
Completed Device is LM101
When the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes to 1, data can be received
(ready to receive) by user communication, so when data is transmitted from the external
22
device, the Touch starts to receive the data. When data receiving is successfully
Communication
completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
State in which user State in which user
State in which data can be
communication is communication is
received by user communication
not operating not operating
Data transmission from
external device Complete
receiving
Start
receiving Receive data
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
1
Value of Completed Device
LM101
0
■ Completed Device
Specify the bit device or bit of the word device for reporting that data transmission or receiving was successfully
completed. You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device is LM100 and Completed Device is
LM101
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
When the value of the Trigger Condition device LM100 changes from 0 to 1, the value of the Completed
Device LM101 changes to 0.
Receive command Receive data 1 frame
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
1
Value of Completed Device
LM101
0
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-27
5 User Communication
■ Not Clear Completed Device automatically
Select this check box when the value of the Completed Device is not set to 0 automatically after it changes to 1. This can
be configured when RXD is selected in Command Type.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device is LM100 and Completed Device is
LM101
When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is not selected:
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
When the first data of the next frame is received, the value of the Completed Device LM101 changes to 0.
Receive command Receive data 1 frame Receive data 1 frame
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
1
Value of Completed Device
LM101
0
When the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is selected:
When data receiving is successfully completed, the value of the Completed Device LM101 is set to 1. Even
after the first data of the next frame is received, the value of the Completed Device LM101 does not
change to 0.
Receive command Receive data 1 frame Receive data 1 frame
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
1
Value of Completed Device
LM101
0
22-28 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
■ Status Device
Specify the destination word device for the transmitted or received data size and error information. Error information
and command data size is stored at the beginning of the configured device address. When data transmission or
receiving has not successfully completed, the value of each bit changes to 1. The bits of the Status Device changes to
0 when the trigger condition is satisfied and they are not changed to 0 automatically. When Always Enabled is
selected in Trigger Condition of receive command, the value of the Status Device is kept as long as a Clear
command is not executed.
You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Example: When LDR110 is configured as Status Device
(Starting address) +0 LDR110 Error information and time out information
+1 LDR111 Transmitted or received data size (bytes)
22
When TXD is selected as Command Type:
Communication
Address Bit Function Cause Solution
• The Calculation Start Position and Calculation Change the Calculation
End Position are not stored in 1 frame. Start Position and
• The Calculation End Position is set before Calculation End Position
Calculation Start Position. settings.
0 BCC Error • When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII
Change the Calculation
(LCR), the data size from Calculation Start
Start Position and
Position to Calculation End Position is odd
Calculation End Position
bytes.
settings and the
• The data contains data other than ASCII
transmission data.
(30h to 39h, 41h to 46h) data.
1, 2 Reserved
When data type is Registering Constant
(Character) or Registering Constant
Registering Change the data stored in
3 (Hexadecimal), the value of the Index
Constant Data Error the Index Device.
Device does not match the Index No. of the
registered Registering Constant.
+0
4 Reserved
When data type is Device and the Use
Reference check box is selected, the device
Use Reference Change the value stored in
5 address in which the value of the Reference
Device Data Error the Reference Device.
Device is stored as offset has exceeded the
valid range.
Change the value of device
When data type is Device, the Variable
Device Data to a positive value or to a
check box is selected and Device is selected,
6 Variable value that does not exceed
the value of device is negative or exceeds the
Specification Error the setting (number of bytes
setting (number of bytes x number of words).
x number of words).
When transmitting data after the Trigger
Transmission
Condition is satisfied, the command with the Increase the time interval
7 Command Abandon
same Command No. was transmitting data or for starting transmission.
Error
transmission (transmission is not completed).
8 to 15 Reserved
Address Function Description
+1 Transmission Data Size (bytes) Stores the size of transmission data.
When the Error Information bit changes to 1, data is not transmitted, and the Transmission Completed
Device does not change to 1.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-29
5 User Communication
When RXD is selected as Command Type:
Address Bit Function Cause Solution
The BCC that calculated the receive data did not Check the transmission data
match the BCC that is appended to the receive data. from the external device.
• The Calculation Start Position and Calculation Change the Calculation
End Position are not stored in 1 frame. Start Position and
• The Calculation End Position is set before Calculation End Position
0 BCC error Calculation Start Position. settings.
• When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII (LCR), the Change the Calculation Start
data size from Calculation Start Position to Calculation Position and Calculation End
End Position is odd bytes. Position settings and the
• The data contains data other than ASCII (30h to transmission data from the
39h, 41h to 46h) data. external device.
• When data type is Device and the Variable check box is
selected, 1 frame of process is completed before one of
Constant (Character), Constant (Hexadecimal),
Registering Constant (Character), Registering
Received Data Check the transmission data
1 Constant (Hexadecimal), BCC, or Skip is processed.
Size Error from the external device.
• When data type is Device and the Variable
check box is not selected, the receive data size
of the receive data does not match that of the
specified receive command.
Registering The Constant (Character) or Constant
Check the transmission data
2 Constant Data (Hexadecimal) set up with the receive command
from the external device.
Error does not match the receive data.
Registering No data matches the registered setting of the Check the transmission data
3
Constant Error Registering Constant data. from the external device.
• When data type is Device and Conversion
Type is ASCII (HEX) to Binary, a code other
Device Data than 0 to 9 or A to F receives as data. Check the transmission data
4
+0 Conversion Error • When data type is Device and Conversion Type is from the external device.
ASCII (DEC) to Binary, a code other than 0 to 9
receives as data. Or the converted data exceeds 65535.
When data type is Device and the Use Reference check
Change the value of the
Device Data box is selected, the device address in which the value of the
Reference Device or the
5 Reference Reference Device is stored as offset has exceeded the valid
change the number of
Device Error range. Or the number of words setting of the device is
words.
beyond the range of device address for which data is stored.
Terminal Code of In the receive command whose trigger condition is
Check the transmission data
6 Receive Data being satisfied, the start code matches while the
from the external device.
Miscompare Error terminal code does not match.
Change settings so that the total
In the multiple Receive (RXD) Commands number of devices used for storage
processing, the number of the same-time stored at one time does not exceed 800
devices which is sum of the number of the stored words.
Device Storing
7 device of Device and the number of the index Change settings so that the trigger
Error
device of Registering Constant (Character) or conditions for several receive
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal), is over commands are not satisfied, to
800 words. reduce the number of receive
commands that are processed.
8 to 13 Reserved
1 frame of data is not received even when the
Receiving Time Check the transmission data
14 preset Receiving Time Out duration has passed
Out from the external device.
after the Trigger Condition is satisfied.
While 1 frame of data is being received, even after the time out
Receiving period—the specified time interval between receiving data
Check the transmission data
15 Character Time (from when 1 frame of data has been received to when the
from the external device.
Out next frame of data starts to be received)—has elapsed, the next
frame of data does not start to be received.
Address Function Description
+1 Receive Data Size (bytes) Stores the size of receive data.
After the Receiving Character Time Out duration has elapsed, the receive data is analyzed. When the Error
Information bit changes to 1, data is not received, and the Receiving Completed Device does not change to 1.
22-30 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
■ Transmission Wait (x100 msec)
Specify the wait time (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when the data is transmitted. This can
be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
After the Transmission Wait duration has elapsed from when the trigger condition is satisfied, transmission starts.
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is Rising-edge and Device is LM100
Transmission Transmission
Wait duration Wait duration
Transmission command Transmission data 1 frame Transmission data 1 frame
Value of LM100 when 1
Trigger Condition is
Rising-edge 0
■ Receiving Time Out (x100 msec)
22
Set the time out (0 to 255) from when the trigger condition is satisfied to when 1 frame of data has been received. A
Communication
frame refers to a data string from the beginning to the end of a command. If the Receiving Character Time Out is set
to 0, it is not monitored.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type, and While ON, While OFF, or While
satisfying the condition is selected in Trigger Type.
When 1 frame of data could not be received, even though the Receiving Time Out duration has elapsed from when
the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status Device (address+0, bit 14)
changes to 1. When the Receiving Time Out duration elapses, the value of the Completed Device does not change to
1, and the receive data is not processed.
When the trigger condition again changes from not satisfied to satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the
Status Device (address+0, bit 14) changes to 0. When the value of this bit is not 0, the Receiving Time Out cannot be
detected.
Receiving Time Out duration
Value of Device when 1
Trigger Condition is
While ON 0
Value of the Receiving Time Out 1
(address+0, bit14)
of the Status Device 0
Example: When Trigger Type in Trigger Condition is While ON, Device is LM100, Status Device is LDR110,
Completed Device is LM101 and the Not Clear Completed Device automatically check box is not
selected
When Status Device is LDR110, error information and time out information is stored in each bit of
LDR110.
When receiving of 1 frame of data is completed before the Receiving Time Out duration has elapsed from
when the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status Device LDR110
(address+0, bit 14) remains 0.
Receiving Time Out duration
Receive command Receive data 1 frame Receive data 1 frame
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON
0
Value of Receiving Time Out 1
(address+0, bit 14)
of Status Device LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device LM101
0
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-31
5 User Communication
When receiving of 1 frame of data could not be completed by the time the Receiving Time Out duration
elapses from when the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of the Receiving Time Out of the Status
Device LDR110 (address+0, bit 14) changes to 1.
Receiving Time Out duration
Receive command Receive data 1 frame
Value of LM100 when 1
Trigger Condition is While ON
0
Value of Receiving Time Out 1
(address+0, bit 14)
of Status Device LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device LM101
0
Receiving Time Out duration
Receive command Receive data 1 frame
1
Value of LM100 when
Trigger Condition is While ON
0
Value of Receiving Time Out 1
(address+0, bit 14)
of Status Device LDR110 0
1
Value of Completed Device LM101
0
■ Trigger Condition
Set the trigger conditions for transmission or receiving of data.
When TXD is selected as Command Type:
Trigger Type: A condition for data transmission is selected from the following.
Rising-edge: Data is transmitted when the value of device changes from 0 to 1.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution Execution
Falling-edge: Data is transmitted when the value of device changes from 1 to 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Execution Execution
Satisfy the condition:
Data is transmitted when the condition changes from not satisfied to satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Execution Execution Execution
22-32 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Fixed Period: Data is transmitted at a fixed time interval.
Fixed time interval Fixed time interval Fixed time interval
Action Execution Execution Execution
Data Type: Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition. You can only specify the HMI device.
Can only be set if Rising-edge or Falling-edge is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if Satisfy the condition is selected as Trigger Type. 22
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions
Communication
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
Period (sec): Specify the period for command execution from 1 to 3600 (seconds).
This is enabled only when Fixed Period is selected in Trigger Type.
When RXD is selected as Command Type:
Trigger Type: Selects the condition to be ready to receive data from the following.
Always Enabled: The Touch is always ready to receive data.
Action Always Enabled
While ON: Ready to receive data when the value of device is 1.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Enabled Enabled Enabled
While OFF: Ready to receive data when the value of device is 0.
1
Value of Device
0
Action Enabled Enabled Enabled
While satisfying the condition:
Ready to receive data while the condition is satisfied.
Satisfied
Condition
Not satisfied
Action Enabled Enabled Enabled
Data Type: Select the data type handled by the conditional expression.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Device: Specifies the bit device or bit of the word device to serve as condition. You can only specify the HMI device.
Can only be set if While ON or While OFF is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
Condition: Sets the condition formula.
Can only be set if While satisfying the condition is selected as Trigger Type.
Click to display the Trigger Condition Settings dialog box. For the conditional expressions
configuration procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.2 Setting Conditional Expressions” on page 2-64.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-33
5 User Communication
■ Command
Shows a list of command data. Double clicking the line displays the Data Settings dialog box.
For details, refer to “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-36. The maximum amount that can be configured is 32
commands per protocol.
The content displayed in lists varies based on the type of command.
Constant (Character): Displays the specified data enclosed in " ".
"Data"
Example: "1234"
Constant (Hexadecimal): Displays the specified data with each byte value enclosed in ' '.
'Data of the first byte' 'Data of the second byte' 'Data of the third byte' 'Data of the
forth byte'
Example: '31' '32' '33' '34'
Device: Displays the specified data enclosed by < >, in the following order.
<Device Conversion Type Number of bytes Variable Words Storage Method of data>
Device: Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]
When the Use Reference Device check box is selected,
displays as OFFSET([Device], [Reference Device])
Number of bytes: Displays the number of bytes of the transmitted or
received data.
Conversion Type: Display the conversion methods for values of devices as
follows.
B16-A: When Binary (HEX) to ASCII is selected
B10-A: When Binary (DEC) to ASCII is selected
N: When No Conversion is selected
Variable: When the Variable check box is selected, variables are
displayed as follows.
V00: When NULL (00h) is selected for transmission
command
V [Device]: When Device is selected for transmission
command
V: In the case of receive command
Words: Displays the number of word devices for transmitting or
receiving data.
Storage Method of data: Displays the handling method for value of read device as
follows.
U: When from Upper byte is selected
L: When from Lower byte is selected
Example: <OFFSET([LDR0100], [LDR0300]) N 2V[LDR0200] 2 U>
Registering Constant (Character):
Displays the specified data enclosed in << >>.
<<Index No. of No. 1: Data of No. 1 Index No. of No. 2: Data of No. 2 ... Index No. of
No. N: Data of No. N Index Device>> (N = 1 to 100)
Data: Displays the data enclosed by " "
Index Device: Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]
Example: <<1:"123" 2 :"456" 3 :"789" [LDR0100]>>
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal):
Displays the specified data enclosed in << >>.
<<Index No. of No. 1: Data of No. 1 Index No. of No. 2: Data of No. 2 ... Index No. of
No. N: Data of No. N Index Device>> (N = 1 to 100)
Data: Displays the data enclosed by ' '
Index Device: Displays the device address enclosed by [ ]
Example: <<1:'313233' 2:'343536' 3 :'373839' [LDR0100]>>
22-34 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
BCC: Displays the specified data enclosed in BCC ( ).
BCC(Calculation Start Position Calculation End Position Calculation Type
Conversion Type Number of bytes)
Calculation Start Position:
Displays the data position where the BCC calculation
starts.
Calculation End Position:
Displays the data position where the BCC calculation ends.
Calculation Type: Display the methods to calculate the data between the
Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position as
follows.
XOR: When XOR is selected
ADD: When ADD is selected 22
ADD2: When ADD (2's Complement) is selected
Communication
Conversion Type: Display the conversion methods for values of devices as
follows.
B16-A: When Binary (HEX) to ASCII is selected
N: When No Conversion is selected
Number of bytes: Displays the number of bytes of the transmitted or
received data.
Example: BCC(2 1 XOR N 2)
Skip: Displays the specified data enclosed in Skip( ).
Skip(Number of bytes)
Example: Skip(2)
Edit Add or change data.
To add data, select an empty line in the Command, and then click this button. To
change data, select data in the Command, and then click this button. For details, refer
to “Data Settings Dialog Box” on page 22-36.
Insert Insert data at the position of the selected command.
Click this button to display the Data Settings dialog box. And specify the data. The data
at the insertion point shifts down by 1 item. When 32 data items are already set, you
cannot insert data.
Delete Deletes the selected data.
Up Shifts the selected data upward in the command.
Down Shifts the selected data downward in the command.
■ Command Size
Displays the data size of a configured command.
The calculation method for command size varies based on the type selected in Command Type on the Command
Settings dialog box. The command size calculation methods are as follows.
TXD: Number of bytes for Constant Data + Number of bytes for a data of Registering Constant + Number of
bytes of BCC + Number of bytes of Device x Words of Device
RXD: Number of bytes for Constant Data + Number of bytes for a data of Registering Constant + Number of
bytes of BCC + Number of bytes of Skip + Number of bytes of Device x Words of Device
■ OK
Save the settings.
■ Cancel
Cancel the saving of settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-35
5 User Communication
● Data Settings Dialog Box
Specify the transmitted or received data by a command.
■ Type
Selects data types from the following items.
Constant (Character), Constant (Hexadecimal), Device, Registering Constant (Character), Registering
Constant (Hexadecimal), BCC, Skip
Skip can only be configured when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
Setting item varies based on the selection in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box.
When TXD is selected, refer to “Transmission (TXD) Command” on page 22-37.
When RXD is selected, refer to “Receive (RXD) Command” on page 22-50.
22-36 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
● Transmission (TXD) Command
Constant (Character)
The character data is sent without being converted.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Constant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Data
Enter character data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be transmitted. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that of a
double-byte character is two bytes.
Example: Constant (Character) for transmission command data
Item Setting
Data 1234
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the character data is transmitted in the following order.
Transmission data
Data
1 2 3 4
1234
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h)
No
conversion
Order of transmission
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-37
5 User Communication
Constant (Hexadecimal)
The hexadecimal data is sent without being converted.
Use this setting to send a control code of ASCII data (00h to 1Fh).
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Constant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
■ Data
Enter hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be transmitted.
Example: Constant (Hexadecimal) for transmission command data
Item Setting
Data 1234
When the trigger condition is satisfied, 1234h is transmitted in the order 12h and 34h.
Transmission data
Data
12h 34h
1234h
No
conversion
Order of transmission
22-38 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Device
The value of device is either not converted or converted to ASCII and then sent as data with the specified size.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Device is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Conversion Type:
Select the conversion rule for the value of device from the following.
Binary (HEX) to ASCII: Considers the value of device as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it to ASCII
data.
Binary (DEC) to ASCII: Considers the value of device as binary-coded decimal number and converts it to ASCII
data.
No Conversion: No conversion is performed.
■ Device
Specify the source word device for transmitted data. You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Use Reference Device
To change the source word device for transmitted data according to values of device, select this check box and
specify a device. This can be configured only when No Conversion is selected under Conversion Type. You can
only specify an internal device.
For details, refer to Chapter 2 “Indirect Read and Indirect Write Settings” on page 2-5.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Storage Method of data
Select the handling method for the value of read device. This can be configured only when No Conversion is
selected under Conversion Type.
from Upper byte: Value of devices are read from the upper byte.
from Lower byte: Value of devices are read from the lower byte.
■ Number of bytes
Specify the number of bytes of transmitted data. The number of bytes that can be specified varies based on the
setting under Conversion Type.
Binary (HEX) to ASCII: 1 to 4
Binary (DEC) to ASCII: 1 to 5
No Conversion: 1 to 2
■ Words
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 99) of transmitted data.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-39
5 User Communication
■ Variable
Select this check box to change the transmitted data size according to conditions. This can be configured only when
No Conversion is selected under Conversion Type. When the check box is not selected, the amount of data
(bytes) transmitted is data (bytes) for Number of bytes x Words.
NULL (00h): Send the data from the start data of the value of device up to 00 (hexadecimal). Data 00 will not
be sent. This setting is effective for sending only the character data section of character data
having 00 (hexadecimal) as the last data.
Device: Specify a word device to which a number of bytes is applied for transmitted data.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration
procedure, refer to Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
When the value of device exceeds Number of bytes x Words, or when it is negative, the Device
Data Variable Specification Error (address+0, bit 6) of the Status Device changes to 1, and
transmission does not occur.
Examples: Device for transmission command data
Example 1
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Storage Method of data from Upper byte
Number of bytes 1
Words 3
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.
Upper Lower Transmission data
Value of Device
12h 34h 12h 56h 9Ah
LDR100: 1234h
Words: 3 LDR101: 5678h from Upper byte
56h 78h 1 byte
LDR102: 9ABCh Order of transmission
9Ah BCh
No conversion
Example 2
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Storage Method of data from Lower byte
Number of bytes 2
Words 3
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.
Upper Lower Transmission data
Value of Device
12h 34h 34h 12h 78h 56h BCh 9Ah
LDR100: 1234h
Words: 3 LDR101: 5678h from Lower byte
56h 78h 2 bytes
LDR102: 9ABCh Order of transmission
9Ah BCh
No conversion
22-40 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Example 3
Item Setting
Conversion Type Binary (HEX) to ASCII
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Number of bytes 2
Words 2
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read, and data is converted to ASCII and transmitted in
the following order.
Value of Device
LDR100: 1234h
1 2 3 4 3
Transmission data
4 7 8
22
Words: 2 (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (33h) (34h) (37h) (38h)
Communication
LDR101: 5678h 2 bytes
5 6 7 8
(35h) (36h) (37h) (38h) Order of transmission
Binary (HEX) to ASCII
Example 4
Item Setting
Conversion Type Binary (DEC) to ASCII
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Number of bytes 2
Words 2
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read, and data is converted to ASCII and transmitted in
the following order.
Transmission data
Value of Device
1 2 3 4 3 4 7 8
LDR100: 1234
Words: 2 (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (33h) (34h) (37h) (38h)
LDR101: 5678 2 bytes
5 6 7 8
(35h) (36h) (37h) (38h) Order of transmission
Binary (DEC) to ASCII
Example 5
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Storage Method of data from Upper byte
Number of bytes 2
Words 2
Variable ON, NULL
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.
Upper Lower Transmission data
Value of Device
12h 34h 12h 34h
LDR100: 1234h
Words: 2
LDR101: 0056h from Upper byte
00h 56h 2 bytes
Order of transmission
No conversion
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-41
5 User Communication
Example 6
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Storage Method of data from Lower byte
Number of bytes 2
Words 2
Variable ON, Device: LDR200
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.
When the LDR200 value is 3
Upper Lower Transmission data
Value of Device
12h 34h 34h 12h 78h
LDR100: 1234h
Words: 2
LDR101: 5678h from Lower byte
56h 78h 2 bytes
LDR200=3
No conversion
Order of transmission
Example 7
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device ON, Device: LDR200
Storage Method of data from Upper byte
Words 2
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the value of device is read and data is transmitted in the following order.
When the LDR200 value is 2
Value of Device
LDR100: 1234h
Upper Lower Transmission data
LDR200=2 LDR101: 5678h
25h 37h 25h 37h 46h 19h
LDR102: 2537h
Words: 2 LDR103: 4619h from Upper byte
46h 19h 2 bytes
Order of transmission
No conversion
22-42 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Registering Constant (Character)
From the registered character data, character data according to the value of device is read and transmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Registering Constant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Number of Registering Constants
Specify the number of data of the registered character data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.: Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the character data.
Index: Shows the Index No. of the character data.
Data: Shows the character data.
■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the character data.
■ Data
Enter the character data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that of
a double-byte character is two bytes.
The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it is
overwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settings
cannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device
Specify the source word device to serve as the Index No. You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-43
5 User Communication
Example: Transmission command for Registering Constant (Character) data
Item Setting
Number of Registering Constants 3
Index No. 1: 123
Registering Constants Index No. 2: 456
Index No. 3: 789
Index Device LDR100
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the data of the Index No. according to the value of device is transmitted.
When the LDR100 value is 2
Index No. Data
Transmission data
1: 123
Number of 4 5 6
Registering 2: 456
(34h) (35h) (36h)
Constants: 3 3: 789 Index Device
LDR100=2
Order of transmission
22-44 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal)
From the registered hexadecimal data, the hexadecimal data according to the value of device is read and transmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Number of Registering Constants
Specify the number of data of the registered hexadecimal data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.: Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the hexadecimal data.
Index: Shows the Index No. of the hexadecimal data.
Data: Shows the hexadecimal data.
■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the hexadecimal data.
■ Data
Enter the hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered.
The data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it is
overwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down one line. Settings
cannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device
Specify the source word device to serve as the Index No. You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-45
5 User Communication
Example: Transmission command for Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) data
Item Setting
Number of Registering Constants 3
Index No. 1: 1234
Registering Constants Index No. 2: 5678
Index No. 3: 2537
Index Device LDR100
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the data of the Index No. according to the value of device is transmitted.
When the LDR100 value is 3
Index No. Data
Number of 1: 1234h
Transmission data
Registering 2: 5678h
Constants: 3 25h 37h
3: 2537h
Index Device
LDR100=3
Order of transmission
22-46 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
BCC (Block Check Code)
A BCC for the transmission data is automatically calculated and appended to the transmission data at an arbitrary
position and transmitted.
This can be configured only when TXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
BCC is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Calculation Start Position
Specify the position of transmission data at which BCC calculation starts (1 to 15). The position is counted backwards,
with the first position of the transmission data taken as 1.
Calculation Start Position: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
Transmission data:
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh)
■ Calculation End Position
Specify the position of transmission data at which BCC calculation ends (0 to 15). The position is counted forwards,
with the data position before the BCC taken as 0.
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
Transmission data:
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh)
Calculation End Position: (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) (0)
■ Calculation Type
Select the method to calculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position.
XOR: Calculates the data with exclusive logical add.
ADD: Calculates the data using addition.
ADD (2's Complement): Calculates the data using addition, inverts the bit and adds one.
Modbus ASCII (LCR): Calculation is performed according to the following procedure. Conversion Type:
Binary (HEX) to ASCII, Number of bytes: 2
1. Convert the ASCII characters between Calculation Start Position and Calculation End
Position into 1-byte hexadecimal data for each set of two characters.
Example: 37h, 35h→75h
2. Calculate the sum of the data obtained in step 1.
3. Invert the bit of the result of step 2 and add one. (2’s complement)
4. Convert the lower one byte data of the result of step 3 into ASCII characters.
Example: 75h→37h, 35h
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-47
5 User Communication
Modbus RTU (CRC): CRC-16 (Generating polynomial:x16+x15+x2+1) is calculated according to the following
procedure. Conversion Type: No Conversion, Number of bytes: 2
1. Obtain an exclusive OR (XOR) of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh.
2. If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0, shift to the right by one bit. If the
bit is 1, shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value (A001h).
3. Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times.
4. Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the data at Calculation End Position is processed.
6. Send the result of step 5 in the order of the lower byte and upper byte.
Example: 1234h→34h, 12h
■ Conversion Type
After calculating the data using the specified calculation type, select the type of conversion for the data from the
following.
Binary (HEX) to ASCII Considers the data as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it to ASCII data.
No conversion: No conversion is performed.
■ Number of bytes
After converting according to the specifed conversion type, select 1 or 2 for the number of bytes for transmission
data.
Example: BCC for transmission command data
This example describes the case of transmitting the BCC calculation result from the following transmission data as
BCC data.
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh)
• Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position
When Calculation Start Position is 2 and Calculation End Position is 1: Calculates the range 1234.
Calculation Start Position: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh)
Calculation End Position: (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) (0)
Data used for BCC calculation
• Calculation Type
XOR: 31h^32h^33h^34h^=04h
ADD: 31h+32h+33h+34h=CAh
ADD (2's Complement): Inverts the bit of CAh+1=36h
Modbus ASCII (LCR): BA → 42h, 41h
Modbus RTU (CRC): BA30h → BAh, 30h
• Conversion Type
When the BCC calculation result is 0004h, the converted data is as follows.
Data
0 4
0004h
(30h) (34h)
Binary (HEX) to ASCII
Data
00h 04h
0004h
No conversion
22-48 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
• Bytes and BCC data
When the converted data is 3034h, the data appended to the transmission data is as follows.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte) BCC data
0 4 4
(30h) (34h) (34h)
1 byte
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte) BCC data
0 4 0 4
(30h) (34h) (30h) (34h)
2 bytes
• When Calculation Type is Modbus ASCII (LCR)
When the BCC calculation result is 4241h after Binary (HEX) to ASCII conversion the resulting two bytes of data 22
is appended to the transmission data.
Communication
Converted data
Data (Second byte) (First byte) BCC data
B A B A
4241h
(42h) (41h) (42h) (41h)
Binary (HEX) to ASCII 2 bytes
• When Calculation Type is Modbus RTU (CRC)
When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is appended to the
transmission data.
Converted data
Data (Second byte) (First byte) BCC data
BAh 30h BAh 30h
BA30h
No conversion 2 bytes
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-49
5 User Communication
● Receive (RXD) Command
Constant (Character)
The received data is considered as character data and compared with the data specified without being converted.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Constant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
■ Data
Enter character data (1 to 1500 bytes) designated to be received. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and
that of a double-byte character is two bytes.
When a Constant (Character) is set at the beginning of a command, the first one byte is recognized as the
start code. When a Constant (Character) is set at the end of a command, the last one byte is recognized as
the terminal code.
For details, refer to “Start Code and Terminal Code” on page 22-66.
Example: Constant (Character) for receive command data
Item Setting
Data 1234
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the following data.
Data used for comparison with received data
Specified data
1 2 3 4
1234
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h)
No
conversion
Order of reception
22-50 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Constant (Hexadecimal)
The received data is considered as hexadecimal data and compared with the data specified without being converted.
Use this setting to receive a control code of ASCII data (00h to 1Fh).
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Constant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Data
Enter hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) designated to be received.
When a Constant (Character) is set at the beginning of a command, the first one byte is recognized as the
start code. When a Constant (Character) is set at the end of a command, the last one byte is recognized as
the terminal code.
For details, refer to “Start Code and Terminal Code” on page 22-66.
Example: Constant (Hexadecimal) for receive command data
Item Setting
Data 1234
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the following data.
Data used for comparison with received data
Specified data
12h 34h
1234h
No conversion
Order of reception
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-51
5 User Communication
Device
From the received data, data of the specified size is unconverted, or converted to binary format, and stored in the
device.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Device is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
■ Conversion Type
Select conversion processing for the received data from the following.
ASCII (HEX) to Binary: Considers the received data as a hexadecimal number and converts it to binary data.
ASCII (DEC) to Binary: Considers the received data as a decimal number and converts it to binary data.
No conversion: No conversion is performed.
■ Device
Specify the word device for storing the received data. You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62 .
■ Use Reference Device
To change the word device for storing the received data according to values of devices, select this check box and
specify a device. You can only specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
■ Storage Method of data
Select the handling method for received data. This can be configured only when No Conversion is selected under
Conversion Type.
from Upper byte: Values of devices are stored from the upper byte.
from Lower byte: Values of devices are stored from the lower byte.
■ Number of bytes
Specify the received data size to be stored per word. The number of bytes to be specified varies based on
Conversion Type.
ASCII (HEX) to Binary: 1 to 4
ASCII (DEC) to Binary: 1 to 5
No Conversion: 1 to 2
■ Words
Specify the number of word devices (1 to 250) for storing the received data.
22-52 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
■ Variable
Select this check box to store data up to either Constant (Character) data, or Constant (Hexadecimal) data
from the beginning of the received data in a device. Stores data of the size specified under Words.
When the stored data is smaller than the size specified under Words, the values of all remaining devices will stored 0.
Stored data
No
conversion Value of Device
2 1
LDR100: 3231h
(32h) (31h)
Number of words for stored data: 2 LDR101: 3433h Number of specified words: 3
4 3
LDR102: 0000h
(34h) (33h)
Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than the size specified for Words.
When the check box is not selected, the amount of data (bytes) stored is Number of bytes x Number of words.
When the Variable check box is selected, observe the following points.
22
• When data is set expect for the end of a command, set Constant (Character) data or Constant
Communication
(Hexadecimal) data following Device data.
• When there is no data stored in the device, all of the values of devices specified under Words will be 0.
• The maximum amount of the received data stored in the device is Number of bytes x Number of words.
Examples: Device for receive command data
Example 1
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Storage Method of data from Upper byte
Number of bytes 1
Words 3
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Received data Upper Lower
Value of Device
1 2 3 1 0
LDR100: 3100h
(31h) (32h) (33h) (31h) (00h)
from Upper byte LDR101: 3200h Words: 3
1 byte 2 0
Order of reception LDR102: 3300h
(32h) (00h)
3 0
(33h) (00h)
No conversion
Example 2
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Storage Method of data from Lower byte
Number of bytes 2
Words 2
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Received data Upper Lower
Value of Device
1 2 3 4 2 1
LDR100: 3231h
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (32h) (31h) Words: 2
from Lower byte LDR101: 3433h
2 bytes 4 3
Order of reception (34h) (33h)
No conversion
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-53
5 User Communication
Example 3
Item Setting
Conversion Type ASCII (HEX) to Binary
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Number of bytes 2
Words 2
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Received data
Value of Device
1 2 3 4 1 2
LDR100: 0012h
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (31h) (32h) Words: 2
2 bytes LDR101: 0034h
3 4
Order of reception (33h) (34h)
ASCII (HEX) to Binary
Example 4
Item Setting
Conversion Type ASCII (DEC) to Binary
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Number of bytes 2
Words 2
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Received data
Value of Device
1 2 3 4 1 2
LDR100: 12 (DEC)
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (31h) (32h) Words: 2
2 bytes LDR101: 34 (DEC)
3 4
Order of reception (33h) (34h)
ASCII (DEC) to Binary
Example 5
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Storage Method of data from Upper byte
Number of bytes 1
Words 3
Variable ON
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device. Constant
(Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data Constant (HEX) data
Upper Lower No
conversion Value of Device
1 3 ETX 1 NUL
LDR100: 3100h
(31h) (33h) (03h) (31h) (00h)
from Upper byte LDR101: 3300h Words: 3
1 byte 3 NUL
Order of reception LDR102: 0000h
(33h) (00h)
Constant (Character) data Insufficient by 1 word 0 is stored.
0 is stored. 0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than the
size specified for Words.
22-54 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Example 6
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Storage Method of data from Lower byte
Number of bytes 2
Words 3
Variable ON
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device. Constant
(Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
22
Communication
Received data
Stored data Constant (HEX) data
Upper Lower No
conversion Value of Device
1 2 3 ETX 2 1
LDR100: 3231h
(31h) (32h) (33h) (03h) (32h) (31h)
from Lower byte LDR101: 0033h Words: 3
2 bytes NUL 3
Order of reception LDR102: 0000h
(00h) (33h)
Constant (Character) data Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored. 0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than the
size specified for Words.
Example 7
Item Setting
Conversion Type ASCII (HEX) to Binary
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Number of bytes 1
Words 3
Variable ON
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device. Constant
(Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data Constant (HEX) data
ASCII (HEX) to Binary Value of Device
1 3 ETX 1
LDR100: 0001h
(31h) (33h) (03h) (31h)
1 byte LDR101: 0003h Words: 3
3
Order of reception LDR102: 0000h
(33h)
Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than the
size specified for Words.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-55
5 User Communication
Example 8
Item Setting
Conversion Type ASCII (DEC) to Binary
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device OFF
Number of bytes 2
Words 3
Variable ON
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
Data from the beginning of the received data to Constant (Hexadecimal) data is stored in the device. Constant
(Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
Received data
Stored data Constant (HEX) data ASCII (DEC)
to Binary Value of Device
1 2 3 ETX 1 2
LDR100: 12 (DEC)
(31h) (32h) (33h) (03h) (31h) (32h)
2 bytes LDR101: 3 (DEC) Words: 3
NUL 3
Order of reception LDR102: 0 (DEC)
(00h) (33h)
Constant (Character) data Insufficient by 1 word
0 is stored. 0 is stored.
The stored data is smaller than the
size specified for Words.
Example 9
Item Setting
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device ON, Device: LDR200
Storage Method of data from Upper byte
Words 2
Variable OFF
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is stored in devices in the following order.
When the LDR200 value is 2
Value of Device
LDR100: 0000h
Received data Upper Lower
LDR101: 0000h LDR200=2
1 2 3 4 1 2
LDR102: 3132h
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (31h) (32h) Words: 2
Bytes: 2 LDR103: 3334h
3 4
Order of reception (33h) (34h)
No conversion
22-56 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Registering Constant (Character)
The received data is compared with the registered character data and the number of the matching character data is
stored in the device.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Registering Constant (Character) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Number of Registering Constants
Specify the number of data of the registered character data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.: Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the character data.
Index: Shows the Index No. of the character data.
Data: Shows the character data.
■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the character data.
■ Data
Enter the character data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered. The size of a single-byte character is one byte and that of
a double-byte character is two bytes.
The character data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it is
overwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a character data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settings
cannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device
Specify the word device for storing the Index No. of the character data matching the received data. You can only
specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-57
5 User Communication
Example: Registering Constant (Character) for receive command data
Item Setting
Number of Registering Constants 3
Index No. 1: 123
Registering Constants Index No. 2: 456
Index No. 3: 789
Index Device LDR100
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the registered data, and the value of the
Index No. 2 of the matching data is stored in Index Device LDR100.
Index No. Data
Received data
1: 123 Value of the Index Device
4 5 6 Number of
(34h) (35h) (36h) Registering 2: 456 LDR100: 2 (DEC)
Compare Constants: 3 3: 789
Order of reception
22-58 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal)
The received data is compared with the registered hexadecimal data and the number of the matching hexadecimal
data is stored in the device.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Number of Registering Constants
Specify the number of data of the registered hexadecimal data (1 to 100).
■ Registering Constants
No.: Shows the ID No. (1 to 100) of the hexadecimal data.
Index: Shows the Index No. of the hexadecimal data.
Data: Shows the hexadecimal data.
■ Index
Specify the Index No. (0 to 65535) of the hexadecimal data.
■ Data
Enter the hexadecimal data (1 to 1500 bytes) to be registered.
The hexadecimal data of different size or the same data with a different number cannot be registered.
■ Set
Register the Index and Data settings to the list. When a number that is already registered is selected, it is
overwritten with the new setting.
■ Insert
Insert a hexadecimal data setting to the selected number in the list.
Click this button to insert the Index and Data setting. The settings at the insertion point shift down 1 line. Settings
cannot be inserted when all numbers are already set.
■ Delete
Delete the selected settings from the list.
■ Index Device
Specify the word device for storing the Index No. of the hexadecimal data matching the received data. You can only
specify an internal device.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-59
5 User Communication
Example: Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) for receive command data
Item Setting
Number of Registering Constants 3
Index No. 1: 1234
Registering Constants Index No. 2: 5678
Index No. 3: 2537
Index Device LDR100
When the trigger condition is satisfied, the received data is compared with the registered hexadecimal data, and the
value of the Index No. 2 of the matching data is stored in Index Device LDR100.
When the LDR100 value is 3
Index No. Data
Received data
1: 1234h Value of the Index Device
25h 37h Number of
Registering 2: 5678h LDR100: 3 (DEC)
Compare Constants: 3 3: 2537h
Order of reception
Example of applying Registering Constant
When the same device address is specified for the Index Device for Registering Constant (Character) data or
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) data and for Use Reference Device for Device data, the data storage
destination for each unit of received data can be changed.
Data type Item Setting
Constant (Hexadecimal) Data 02
Number of Registering Constants 2
Index No. 1: AA
Registering Constant (Character) Registering Constant
Index No. 2: BB
Index Device LDR100
Conversion Type No Conversion
Device LDR100
Use Reference Device ON, Device: LDR200
Device Storage Method for Data from Upper byte
Bytes 2
Words 2
Variable OFF
Constant (Hexadecimal) Data 0D
When the following commands are received
STX B B 1 2 CR
(02h) (42h) (42h) (31h) (32h) (0Dh)
• The first 1 byte is taken as the start code. Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
STX
(02h)
• The received data is compared with the registered data, and the value of the Index No. 2 (DEC) of the matching
data is stored in Index Device LDR100.
Received data Index No. Data
B B Number of 1: AA Value of the Index Device
(42h) (42h) Registering 2: BB LDR100: 2 (DEC)
Compare Constants: 2
Order of reception
22-60 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
• Since the Indirect Device LDR100 of Device of the receive command data is 2 (DEC), the data is stored in the
device LDR202, which is offset by +2.
Value of Device
LDR200: 0000h
LDR201: 0000h LDR100=2
LDR202: 3132h
• The last 1 byte is taken as the terminal code. Constant (Hexadecimal) data is not stored.
CR
(0Dh)
22
Communication
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-61
5 User Communication
BCC (Block Check Code)
The BCC comparison data is automatically calculated from the receive data and compared with the BCC part of the
receive data.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
BCC is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
■ Calculation Start Position
Specify the position (1 to 15) in the receive data where BCC calculation starts. The position is counted backwards,
with the first position of the receive data taken as 1.
Calculation Start Position: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
Receive data:
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh)
■ Calculation End Position
Specify the position (0 to 15) in the receive data where BCC calculation ends. The position is counted forwards, with
the data position before the BCC taken as 0.
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
Receive data:
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh)
Calculation End Position: (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) (0)
■ Calculation Type
Select the method to calculate the data between the Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position.
XOR: Calculates the data with exclusive logical add.
ADD: Calculates the data using addition.
ADD (2's Complement): Calculates the data using addition, inverts the bit and adds one.
Modbus ASCII (LCR): Calculation is performed according to the following procedure. Conversion Type:
Binary (HEX) to ASCII, Number of bytes: 2
1. Convert the ASCII characters between Calculation Start Position and Calculation End
Position into 1-byte hexadecimal data for each set of two characters.
Example: 37h, 35h → 75h
2. Calculate the sum of the data obtained in step 1.
3. Invert the bit of the result of step 2 and add one. (2’s complement)
4. Convert the lower one byte data of the result of step 3 into ASCII characters.
Example: 75h → 37h, 35h
22-62 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Modbus RTU (CRC): CRC-16 (Generating polynomial:x16+x15+x2+1) is calculated according to the following
procedure. Conversion Type: No Conversion, Number of bytes: 2
1. Obtain an exclusive OR (XOR) of 1 byte data at Calculation Start Position and FFFFh.
2. If the least significant bit of the result of step 1 is 0, shift to the right by one bit. If the
bit is 1, shift to the right by 1 bit and obtain XOR of the result and the value (A001h).
3. Repeat step 2 to shift 8 times.
4. Obtain XOR of the next one byte of data and the result of step 3.
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 until the data at Calculation End Position is processed.
6. Compare the result of step 5 in the order of the lower byte and upper byte.
Example: 1234h → 34h, 12h
■ Conversion Type
After calculating the data using the specified calculation type, select the type of conversion for the data from the
following.
22
Communication
Binary (HEX) to ASCII: Considers the data as binary-coded hexadecimal number and converts it to ASCII data.
No conversion: No conversion is performed.
■ Number of bytes
After converting according to the specified conversion type, select 1 or 2 for the number of bytes for comparison
data.
Example: BCC for receive command data
This example describes the case of comparing the BCC calculation result for the following receive data with the BCC
part of the receive data.
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh)
• Calculation Start Position and Calculation End Position
When Calculation Start Position is 2 and Calculation End Position is 1: Calculates the range 1234.
Calculation Start Position: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (0Dh)
Calculation End Position: (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) (0)
Data used for BCC calculation
• Calculation Type
XOR: 31h^32h^33h^34h^=04h
ADD: 31h+32h+33h+34h=CAh
ADD (2's Complement): Inverts the bit of CAh+1=36h
Modbus ASCII (LCR): BA→42h, 41h
Modbus RTU (CRC): BA30h→BAh, 30h
• Conversion Type
When the BCC calculation result is 0004h, the converted data is as follows.
Data
0 4
0004h
(30h) (34h)
Binary (HEX) to ASCII
Data
00h 04h
0004h
No conversion
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-63
5 User Communication
• Number of bytes and comparison data
When the converted data is 3034h, the data used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data is as
follows.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte) Comparison data
0 4 4
(30h) (34h) (34h)
Bytes: 1
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte) Comparison data
0 4 0 4
(30h) (34h) (30h) (34h)
Bytes: 2
• BCC data comparison
The comparison data is compared with the BCC part of the receive data.
In the following receive data, when the comparison data is the 1-byte 34h, there is a match since the BCC part data
is 34h.
When there is no match, the BCC Error (address+0, bit 0) of the Status Device changes to 1.
Receive data BCC part
STX 1 2 3 4 5 BCC CR
(02h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (35h) (34h) (0Dh)
Match
Comparison data
4
(34h)
• When the calculation type is Modbus ASCII (LCR)
When the BCC calculation result is 4241h after Binary (HEX) to ASCII conversion the resulting two bytes of data
is used for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte) Comparison data
Data
B A B A
4241h
(42h) (41h) (42h) (41h)
Binary (HEX) to ASCII Bytes: 2
• When the calculation type is Modbus RTU (CRC)
When the BCC calculation result is BA30h with no conversion the two bytes of data is used for comparison with the
BCC part of the receive data.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte) Comparison data
Data
BAh 30h BAh 30h
BA30h
No conversion Bytes: 2
22-64 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Skip
The data with the specified number of bytes in the receive data will be ignored.
This can be configured only when RXD is selected in Command Type on the Command Settings dialog box, and
Skip is selected under Type on the Data Settings dialog box.
22
Communication
■ Number of bytes
Specify the number of bytes (1 to 249) of receive data to be ignored.
Example: Skip for receive command data
Item Setting
Number of bytes 2
In the received four byte data (1 (31h), 2 (32h), 3 (33h), 4 (34h)), only the data for 3 (33h) and 4 (34h) is received
and the two bytes of 1 (31h) and 2 (32h) are discarded.
Received data Enabled data
1 2 3 4 3 4
(31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (33h) (34h)
2 bytes
(Ignored)
Order of reception
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-65
5 User Communication
● Start Code and Terminal Code
A start code starts data reception and a terminal code judges the terminal of data reception. A start code and a
terminal code can be configured for either Constant (Character) or Constant (Hexadecimal) settings for receive
command. The first 1 byte of the constant is recognized as the start code and the last 1 byte as the terminal code.
Command settings: Constant (HEX) Device Constant (HEX)
Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U> '34' '35' '0d'
Start code 02h Terminal code 0dh
Code 00h to 7Fh can be set when Data Length under Interface Settings is 7 bits, and 00h to FFh when the data
length is 8 bits. Data Length is configured under the Communication Interface tab on the Project Settings dialog
box.
The procedure for terminal of data reception varies whether or not the receive data contains a start code and a
terminal code, and whether the Variable check box for Device for receive command data is selected.
In the following description, With Variable indicates that the Variable check box for Device for receive command
data is selected and Without Variable indicates that the Variable check box is not selected. Also, when there are
multiple Device set for receive command data, and at least 1 command has the Variable check box selected, this
corresponds to With Variable.
Terminal
Start code Variable Description of the procedure for terminal of data reception
code
Reception is started with the start code and terminated with the terminal code.
Command settings: Constant (HEX) Device Constant (HEX)
Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U> '34' '35' '0d'
Start code 02h Terminal code 0dh
Receive
Set
Set Set When the terminal code is followed by BCC, the data including the number of bytes of
Not set
BCC is received.
Command settings: Constant (HEX) Device Constant (HEX) BCC
Receive data: '02' '31' '32' '33' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U> '34' '35' '0d' BCC(1 0 XOR N 1)
Start code 02h Terminal code 0dh
Receive
Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the
maximum command length.
Command settings: Constant (HEX) Device With Variable Registering Constant (HEX)
Receive data: '02' '31' '32' <[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U> <<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>
Start code 02h Terminal code: None
Maximum command length
Set Receive
Reception is terminated when the Receiving Character Time Out occurs.
Command settings: Constant (HEX) Device With Variable Constant (HEX) Registering Constant (HEX)
Receive data: '02' '31' '32' <[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U> '03' <<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>
Set Not set
Start code 02h Receiving character Terminal code: None
time out occurs.
Receive
Reception is started with the start code and the data is received according to the length of
the command.
Command settings: Constant (HEX) Device Without Variable Registering Constant (HEX)
Receive data: '02' '31' '32' <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U> <<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>>
Not set
Start code 02h Terminal code: None
Command length
Receive
Reception is started from the beginning and terminated with the terminal code.
Command settings: Registering Constant (HEX) Device Constant (HEX)
Set Receive data: <<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>> <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U> '34' '35' '0d'
Not set Set
Not set
Start code: None Terminal code 0dh
Receive
22-66 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
Terminal
Start code Variable Description of the procedure for terminal of data reception
code
Reception is started from the beginning and the data is received according to the
maximum command length.
Constant
Command settings: Skip (Character) Device With Variable
Receive data: Skip(2) “123” <[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U>
Start code: None Terminal code: None
Maximum command length
Receive
Set
Reception is terminated when the Receiving Character Time Out occurs.
Constant
Not set Not set
Command settings:
Receive data:
Skip
Skip(2)
(Character)
“123”
Device With Variable
<[LDR0100] N 2V 2 U>
22
Communication
Start code: None Terminal code: None
Receiving character time out occurs.
Receive
Reception is started from the beginning and terminated when the data is received
according to the length of the command.
Command settings: Device Without Variable Registering Constant (HEX) BCC
Not set Receive data: <[LDR0100] N 2 2 U> <<1:”AB” 2:”CD” [LDR0200]>> BCC(1 0 XOR N 1)
Start code: None Terminal code: None
Command length
Receive
• When trigger conditions are satisfied for two or more receive commands for which both start code and
terminal code are set, all commands are analyzed and processed for receive processing. Since
commands with and without errors may be mixed depending on the results of data reception analysis of
each command, take extra caution regarding error handling.
• While the trigger condition is satisfied for a receive command for which either a start code or terminal
code is not set, only this command is processed for data reception when the trigger condition of another
command is being satisfied. When two or more commands exist for which either start code or terminal
code is not set, the command with the biggest number for managing the protocol is processed.
• When a start code of the receive command for which a start code is set cannot be received, all of the
receive data is ignored and abandoned. No error occurs.
• When start code is received with a receive command for which start code and terminal code are set, the
data reception is completed after the maximum number of bytes received in case of continuous reception
of data that does not match the terminal code of all receive command in which the trigger conditions is
satisfied.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-67
5 User Communication
5.4 Example of User Communication Settings
This section describes examples of user communication settings and command operations.
● Example 1
This section describes an example of user communication protocol settings for creating the following commands and
command operations.
• Transmission command for transmitting data using Constant (Hexadecimal), Constant (Character), Device,
Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings when the trigger condition device changes to 1
• Receive command for receiving, processing, and storing data in devices, using Constant (Hexadecimal), Constant
(Character), Device, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings, for data transmitted from an external device,
when the trigger condition device is 1
■ User Communication Settings dialog box settings
Item Setting
Protocol Name Sample 1
Receiving Character Time Out 30 (×100 msec)
■ Transmission command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item Setting
Comment TXD command
Command Type TXD
Completed Device LM101
Status Device LDR110
Transmission Wait 50 (×100 msec)
Trigger Condition While ON, Device: LM100
Constant
'05'
(Hexadecimal)
Constant
"D"
(Character)
Command
Data Settings dialog box settings Conversion Type: Binary (DEC) to ASCII,
Device Number of bytes: 4, Words: 1
Device: LDR100
Constant
'0D'
(Hexadecimal)
Operation for transmission command
1 Write a value of 100 (DEC) to LDR100 of transmission command data Device.
2 Change the trigger condition LM100 from 0 to 1 to start command transmission.
After the transmission wait duration (five seconds), the transmission data is sent. The transmission data is as follows.
Constant Constant Constant
(HEX) (Character) Device (HEX)
Command settings:
Transmission data: EQN D 0 1 0 0 CR
(05h) (44h) (30h) (31h) (30h) (30h) (0Dh)
• When data transmission is successfully completed, the Completed Device LM101 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 for Status Device LDR110 is 0, transmission is completed without an error.
22-68 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
■ Receive command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item Setting
Comment RXD command
Command Type Receive
Completed Device LM102
Not Clear Completed Device
No
automatically
Status Device LDR130
Receiving Time Out 0 (No Receive Time Out)
Trigger Condition While ON, Device: LM101
Constant
'02'
(Hexadecimal)
Constant
22
"D"
(Character)
Communication
Command
Data Settings dialog box settings Conversion Type: ASCII (HEX) to Binary,
Device Number of bytes: 4, Words: 1
Device: LDR120, Reference Device: LDR100
Constant
'0D'
(Hexadecimal)
Operation for receive command
1 When data transmission of the transmission command is completed, the value of LM101 changes to 1, and since the
same device is specified for the trigger condition user communication becomes ready for receiving.
2 Data is transmitted from the external device and the transmitted data is received and processed.
The receive data is as follows.
Constant Constant Constant
(HEX) (Character) Device (HEX)
Command settings:
Receive data: STX D 1 2 3 4 CR
(02h) (44h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (0Dh)
Since a value of 100 is written to LDR100 at the time of transmission, the data is stored in device LDR220, which
corresponds to an offset of +100 from LDR120.
Value of Device
LDR120: 0000
LDR121: 0000
LDR230=100
LDR220: 1234h
• When data reception is successfully completed, the Completed Device LM102 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 of Status Device LDR130 is 0, reception is completed without an error.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-69
5 User Communication
● Example 2
This section describes an example of user communication protocol settings for creating the following commands and
command operations.
• Transmission command for transmitting data using Constant (Hexadecimal), Registering Constant (Character),
Device, BCC, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings when the trigger condition device changes to 1
• Receive command for receiving, processing, and storing data in devices, using Constant (Hexadecimal), Registering
Constant (Character), Skip, Device, BCC, Constant (Hexadecimal) command settings, for data transmitted from an
external device, when the trigger condition device is 1
■ User Communication Settings dialog box settings
Item Setting
Protocol Name Sample 2
Receiving Character Time Out 30 (×100 msec)
■ Transmission command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item Setting
Comment TXD command
Command Type Transmit
Completed Device LM201
Status Device LDR220
Transmission Wait 0 (×100 msec)
Trigger Condition While ON, LM200
Constant
'05'
(Hexadecimal)
Registering
Constant 10: "AB", 20: "CD", Index Device: LDR200
(Character)
Command No Conversion, from Upper byte, Number of bytes: 2,
Data Settings dialog box settings Device Words: 2
Device: LDR210
Start Calculation Position: 1, End Calculation Position: 0,
BCC
XOR, Binary (HEX) to ASCII, 2 bytes
Constant
'0D0A'
(Hexadecimal)
Operation for transmission command
1 Write a value of 10 (DEC) to LDR200 for Registering Constant (Character) for transmission command data.
AB is selected.
Data Transmission data
Index No.
A B
10: AB
Number of Registering Constants: 2 (41h) (42h)
20: CD Index Device
LDR200=10
Order of transmission
2 Write a value of 3132h to LDR210 and 3334h to LDR211 for Device for transmission command data.
3 Change the trigger condition LM200 from 0 to 1 to start command transmission.
The transmission data is as follows.
Constant Registering Constant
(HEX) Constant (Character) Device BCC (HEX)
Command settings:
Transmission data: EQN A B 1 2 3 4 0 2 CR LF
(05h) (41h) (42h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (30h) (32h) (0Dh) (0Ah)
• When data transmission is successfully completed, the Completed Device LM201 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 for Status Device LDR220 is 0, transmission is completed without an error.
22-70 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
■ Receive command: Command Settings dialog box settings
Item Setting
Comment RXD command
Command Type Receive
Completed Device LM203
Not Clear Completed Device
No
automatically
Status Device LDR260
Receiving Time Out 0 (No Receive Time Out)
Trigger Condition While ON, Device: LM202
Constant
'02'
(Hexadecimal)
Registering
Constant 10: "AB", 20: "CD", Index Device: LDR230
(Character) 22
Command Skip 2 bytes
Communication
Data Settings dialog box Conversion Type: No Conversion, from Upper byte,
settings Device Number of bytes: 2, Words: 2
Device: LDR240, Reference Device: LDR230
Calculation Start Position: 1 Calculation End Position: 0, XOR
BCC
Binary (HEX) to ASCII, 2 bytes
Constant
'0D''0A'
(Hexadecimal)
Operation for receive command
1 Change the trigger condition LM202 from 0 to 1 to be ready for receiving user communication.
2 Data is transmitted from the external device and the transmitted data is received and processed.
The receive data is as follows.
Constant Registering Constant
(HEX) Constant (Character) Skip Device BCC (HEX)
Command settings:
Receive data: STX A B C D 1 2 3 4 0 2 CR LF
(02h) (41h) (42h) (43h) (44h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (30h) (32h) (0Dh) (0Ah)
• The receive data is compared with the character data, and the value of the matching Index No. (10 (DEC)) is stored
in Index Device LDR230.
Received data Index No. Data Value of the Index Device
Number of
A B 10: AB LDR230: 10 (DEC)
Registering
(41h) (42h) 20: CD
Compare Constants: 2
Order of reception
• The 2 bytes (specified with Skip) of the receive command data 43h and 44h are ignored.
• Since the Reference Device LDR 230 of Device of the receive command data is 10 (DEC), the data is stored in the
device LDR250 and LDR251, which is offset by +10.
Value of Device
LDR240: 0000h
LDR241: 0000h
LDR230=10
LDR250: 3132h
• [STX] ABCD1234 is calculated with BCC of receive command data and compared with 3032h.
- When Calculation Start Position is 1 and Calculation End Position is 0: Calculates the range STX ABCD1234.
Calculation Start Position: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
STX A B C D 1 2 3 4 0 2 CR LF
(02h) (41h) (42h) (43h) (44h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (30h) (32h) (0Dh) (0Ah)
Calculation End Position: (8) (7) (6) (5) (4) (3) (2) (1) (0)
Data used for BCC calculation
- The BCC calculation type is XOR.
02h^41h^42h^43h^44h^31h^32h^33h^34h^=02h
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-71
5 User Communication
- When the BCC calculation result is 0002h, the converted data will be 3032h.
Data
0 2
0002h
(30h) (32h)
Binary (HEX) to ASCII
- When the converted data is 3032h, the data for comparison with the BCC part of the receive data will be 3032h.
Converted data
(Second byte) (First byte) Comparison data
0 2 0 2
(30h) (32h) (30h) (32h)
Bytes: 2
- The comparison data is compared with the BCC part of the receive data.
In the following receive data, when the comparison data is the 2-byte 3032h, there is a match since the BCC part
data is 3032h.
When there is no match, the BCC Error (address+0, bit 0) of Status Device changes to 1.
Receive data BCC part
STX A B C D 1 2 3 4 0 2 CR LF
(02h) (41h) (42h) (43h) (44h) (31h) (32h) (33h) (34h) (30h) (32h) (0Dh) (0Ah)
Match
Comparison data
0 2
(30h) (32h)
• When data reception is successfully completed, the Completed Device LM203 changes to 1.
• When the value of each bit of address+0 for Status Device LDR250 is 0, transmission is completed without an error.
22-72 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
5 User Communication
5.5 Compatible USB Bar Code Readers
The following USB bar code readers can be used with the Touch:
Manufacturer Type Number
IDEC DATALOGIC QD2130*1
The QD2130 transmits line feed codes as 0xa, according to the settings. In this case, set the end delimiter
to 0xa.
5.6 Connection Diagram for User Communication
When connecting an external device to the Touch via user communication, refer to the following connection diagram.
22
Communication
■ Serial interface (RS232C)
External device (RS232C) Touch
Name Pin No. Shield Wire Pin No. Name
FG - 1 SD
RD - 2 RD
SD - 3 RS
SG - 4 CS
5 SG
■ Serial interface (RS422/485)
External device (RS485/422) Touch
Name Pin No. Shield Wire Pin No. Name
FG - 8 RDA(RD+)
SDA - 9 RDB(RD-)
SDB - 6 SDA(SD+)
RDA - 7 SDB(SD-)
RDB - 5 SG
SG - Terminal
There is no pin No. corresponding to TERM. When a termination resistor is necessary, insert one with
suitable resistance value between pin 8 (RDA) and pin 9 (RDB). For details, refer to Chapter 1 "3 Important
Points Regarding Wiring" in the "External Device Setup Manual".
*1 in selected country only
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 22-73
5 User Communication
22-74 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 23 Online Function
This chapter describes in detail on how to setup the online function and the operation of the Touch.
1 Communicating with the Touch
1.1 How the Online Function is Used
The online function enables communication with the Touch in WindO/I-NV3. This communication between
WindO/I-NV3 and the Touch, implemented using an exclusive protocol called maintenance communication.
The online function enables the following.
• Write a project data into the Touch.
Computer
Touch
Download
23
Online Function
Project data
When project data is downloaded using the online function, the Alarm Log data, Data Log data, and
Operation Log data in the data storage area are deleted. All internal devices except for the HMI Keep
Register (LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK) are cleared.
• The following functions can be executed with downloading of project data.
- Download additional fonts.
- Download the runtime system.
- Download recipe files to an External Memory Folder in external memory inserted in the Touch.
- Clear the HMI Keep Register (LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK) after download.
- Start running the control functions after download.
• For details on writing project data to an external memory inserted in the computer, refer to Chapter 26
“Downloading” on page 26-6.
• Write files to an external memory inserted in the Touch.
Computer Touch
USB flash drive
Download
Recipe file
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-1
1 Communicating with the Touch
• Read the project data downloaded to the Touch and then save it to a computer.
Computer
Touch
Upload
Project data
• It is possible to upload recipe files from an External Memory Folder in external memory inserted in the
Touch, together with uploading of project data.
• For details on reading project data saved on an external memory using WindO/I-NV3, refer to Chapter 26
“Uploading” on page 26-9.
• Delete the data stored in the internal memory or the external memory inserted in the Touch and format the
external memory inserted in the Touch.
Computer Touch
Deleting data
USB flash drive
Deleting data
Formatting
• Display the information about the runtime system and project data of the Touch.
Computer
Touch
System
Information
23-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Communicating with the Touch
• Edit a project data in WindO/I-NV3 while checking Touch operation by displaying and changing values of devices
and switching screens using the monitor function.
Computer Touch
External device
Screen monitor
130
LDR1= 0 130
Computer Touch
External device
130
Base Screen 1
23
Online Function
Switches to Base Screen 2.
External device
Tank 1
Full
Base Screen 2
For details about monitor function, refer to Chapter 24 “Monitor Function” on page 24-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-3
1 Communicating with the Touch
1.2 Connect Touch to a Computer
Connection type varies according to the interface between the Touch and computer.
● USB cable connection
The computer must be running Windows XP/Vista (32-bit version only), or Windows 7 (64-bit and 32-bit versions),
and must have a USB 1.1/2.0 port.
Computer
Touch
To USB port To USB interface
A plug USB cable Mini-B plug
• A USB driver must be installed when connecting the Touch to a computer with a USB cable. Install the
USB driver when making the connection for the first time.
For details, refer to Appendix “6.1 Installing the USB Driver” on page A-12.
• The USB driver does not have to be installed for subsequent connections.
Note, the connection must use the same USB port that was connected to when installing the USB driver.
The computer will not recognize the Touch immediately if the USB cable is connected to a different USB
port.
• Multiple Touch connections using different USB ports on the same computer are not supported.
• The computer cannot be connected to the Touch via a USB hub.
● Ethernet cable connection
The computer must be equipped with an Ethernet port.
Computer
Touch
To Ethernet port To Ethernet interface
Ethernet cable
It is necessary to configure the Touch according to the local network that is used.
On the Communication Interface tab in the Project Settings dialog box, specify the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway, and clear the Forbid Maintenance Communication check box. For details,
refer to Chapter 3 “3.2 Communication Interface Tab” on page 3-26.
23-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Communicating with the Touch
1.3 Change Communication Settings
To communicate with the Touch in WindO/I-NV3, configure the settings such as communication speed and port used
to match the connection method for the Touch.
1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm.Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed.
2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary and then click OK.
23
Online Function
■ Communicate with
Select the device to communicate with from the following items.
Touch: Communicate with the Touch connected to the computer.
For details, refer to “Using the online function for Ethernet communication” on page 23-7.
Computer
Touch
USB cable
Ethernet cable
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-5
1 Communicating with the Touch
O/I Link Slaves: Communicate with an O/I Link Slave Touch via an O/I Link Master.
For details, refer to “Using the online function with an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master”
on page 23-8.
Computer Touch
O/I Link Master
USB cable
Ethernet cable
O/I Link Communication
Read Write
Touch Touch Touch
O/I Link Slave O/I Link Slave O/I Link Slave
(Slave 1) (Slave 2) (Slave 15)
External Memory: Read or write data to the external memory inserted in the Touch connected to the computer.
For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1.4 Reading/Writing Data” on page 26-3.
■ Port
Select the communication port on the computer from the following items.
USB: Connect the USB port on the computer to the USB interface on the Touch.
Ethernet: Connect the Ethernet port on the computer to the Ethernet interface on the Touch.
■ Time Out (min)
Specify the time to wait for a response from the Touch (1 minute to 20 minutes).
This option can only be configured when Ethernet is selected for Port.
23-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Communicating with the Touch
● Using the online function for Ethernet communication
Select Ethernet under Port on the Target IP Address dialog box.
It is necessary to set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway of the Touch according to the local
network that is used.
For details about Ethernet communication, refer to Chapter 3 “3.2 Communication Interface Tab” on page
3-26.
To download project data
Click Download in the Download dialog box to display the Target IP Address dialog box.
Specify the Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) for the Touch.
Select the Touch IP addresses and you can batch download project data to multiple Touch.
It is also possible to change the Ethernet settings (IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway) of the Touch to
which you are downloading after project data is downloaded.
23
Online Function
■ Target List
Download to: Shows the current IP address for the Touch to download the project data to.
Set IP Address: Shows the IP address for the Touch after downloading the project data.
Set Subnet Mask: Shows the subnet mask for the Touch after downloading the project data.
Set Default Gateway: Shows the default gateway for the Touch after downloading the project data.
■ Add
Adds a download destination for project data to the list. Click this button to open IP Address Manager. Using
IP Address Manager, specify the Ethernet settings for the Touch to which you are downloading.
■ Delete
Deletes download destinations from the list.
■ Change Settings
Changes the Ethernet settings of the Touch to which you are downloading after project data is downloaded.
Select a download destination from the list, and then click Change Settings to display IP Address Manager. Using
IP Address Manager, specify the Ethernet settings of the Touch after downloading.
Even if the Ethernet settings of the Touch are changed by using the Target IP Address dialog box when
downloading a project, the Ethernet settings in the editing project data are not changed.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-7
1 Communicating with the Touch
To execute any function except project data download
The Target IP Address dialog box will be displayed when any of the following functions are executed.
• Upload a project data.
• Upload data from an external memory inserted in the Touch.
• Delete data stored in the internal memory.
• Delete data from or formatting an external memory inserted in the Touch.
• Display information about runtime system and project data.
• Monitor the Touch.
Specifies the IP address of the Touch used for communication.
■ Target IP Address
Specify the IP address for the target Touch to execute this function.
Click to display IP Address Manager. Specify the IP address for the target Touch with IP Address Manager.
● Using the online function with an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master
Select O/I Link Slaves under Communicate with on the Communication Settings dialog box.
When a Touch used as an O/I Link Master or O/I Link Slave is connected with a computer, select Touch in
the Communication Settings dialog box.
For details about O/I Link Communication, refer to Chapter 22 “2 O/I Link Communication” on page 22-3.
• The MICRO/I models that can communicate with the Touch using O/I Link Communication are the HG2G-
S/-5S/-5F, and HG3G/4G.
• During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
To download project data
Click Download in the Download dialog box to display the Target Slaves dialog box.
Specify the slave station number of the Touch to which you are downloading. You can download project data to
multiple Touchs.
Also, it is possible to change the slave station number the Touch to which you are downloading after project data is
downloaded.
■ Target
Select slave stations (Slave 1 through Slave 15 of the download target).
23-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Communicating with the Touch
■ Set Slave No.
The slave station number of the Touch to which you are downloading is changed after project data is downloaded.
Specifies the new slave station number (1 to 15) applied to the Touch after downloading a project data.
If the slave station number of the Touch is duplicated after downloading, communication is not possible.
Even if the slave station number of the Touch configured in the Target IP Address dialog box when
downloading a project is rewritten, project data remains unchanged during editing.
■ Master IP Address
Specifies the IP address of the O/I Link Master that is used to communicate between the O/I Link Slave and the
external device.
Click to display IP Address Manager. Specify the IP address for the O/I Link Master with IP Address Manager.
This option can only be displayed when O/I Link Slave is selected for Communicate with and Ethernet is
selected for Port in the Communication Settings dialog box.
23
To execute any function except project data download
Online Function
The Target Slave dialog box will be displayed when any of the following functions are executed.
• Upload project data.
• Upload data from an external memory inserted in the Touch.
• Delete data stored in the internal memory of the Touch.
• Delete data from or format an external memory inserted in the Touch.
• Display information about runtime system and project data.
• Monitor the Touch.
Specifies the O/I Link Slave.
■ Target Slave
Select the slave station number (Slave 1 to Slave 15) that will be the subject of the operation.
■ Master IP Address
Specify the IP address of the O/I Link Master that is used to communicate between the O/I Link Slave and the
external device.
Click to display IP Address Manager. Specify the IP address for the O/I Link Master with IP Address Manager.
This option can only be displayed when O/I Link Slave is selected for Communicate with and Ethernet is
selected for Port in the Communication Settings dialog box.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-9
1 Communicating with the Touch
● IP Address Manager
You can register target Ethernet settings for performing online function via Ethernet communication to the project
data.
■ IP Address List
Ethernet settings registered in the project data are displayed in this list.
IP Address: Shows the IP address.
Subnet Mask: Shows the subnet mask.
Default Gateway: Shows the default gateway.
Comment: Shows comment.
■ IP Address
Enter the IP address to register in the project data.
■ Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask to register in the project data.
■ Default Gateway
Enter the default gateway to register in the project data.
■ Comment
Enter comment to register in the project data.
■ Add New
Adds IP Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, and Comment to the list.
■ Delete
Deletes the selected IP address from the list.
■ Select
Closes IP Address Manager, and apply the Ethernet settings selected from the list.
23-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Downloading
2 Downloading
2.1 Downloading Project Data to the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch
as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.
2 Open a project to download.
To download a project without opening it, on the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download
icon. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select a file then click Open. The Download dialog box is displayed.
Proceed to Step 4.
When project data is downloaded to the Touch, the Touch screen data is overwritten.
23
3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
Online Function
The Download dialog box is displayed.
If the project data was changed, a confirmation message to save the project data is displayed.
• Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
• Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.
4 Select data for download under Download Data.
■ All
Download the entire project data.
■ Modified Data Only
Downloads files modified since the previous download.
If download fails, select All to download.
■ Select Files
Download the specified files. Click Browse to display the Open Screens dialog box. Select Screen Type, select the
screen to be downloaded from Screen List and then click OK. The selected screen is added to the list.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-11
2 Downloading
5 Click Download.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, the project data starts downloading.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed.
Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “To download
project data” on page 23-7.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to download to, then click OK to start the download.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the O/I Link Master via which to download. For details, refer to
“To download project data” on page 23-8.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
6 Click Yes.
The Download Project dialog box is displayed and the project file starts downloading.
When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.
7 Click OK.
8 Click Close on the Download Project dialog box.
This concludes downloading project data.
• Do not turn off the Touch while project data is downloading.
• If project data downloading fails and communication is not possible, turn the Touch off and on, then
download the data once again.
• During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
For details on writing project data to an external memory inserted in the computer, refer to Chapter 26
“Downloading” on page 26-6.
23-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Downloading
2.2 Download Dialog Box
This section describes items and buttons of the Download dialog box.
23
Online Function
■ Communication Settings
Communicate with: Available computer devices are displayed.
Port: Available communication ports on the computer are displayed.
Change: Changes communication settings. Click this button to display the Communication Settings dialog
box. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.
■ Download Data
Selects data to be downloaded.
All: All project data is downloaded.
Modified Data Only: Only files that were updated since the previous download are downloaded.
If an upload fails, select All to download.
Select Files: Specifies a screen for download.
Browse: The screen to be downloaded is added to the list. Click Browse to display
the Open Screens dialog box. Select Screen Type, then select the screen to
be downloaded from Screen List, and then click OK. The selected screen is
then added to the list.
Specific Data List: Lists the properties of the specified screen
No.: Displays the Screen No. of the specified screen
Title: Displays the title of the specified screen
Screen Type: Displays the screen type of the specified screen
File Name: Displays the file name of the specified screen
Options: Used for settings to download runtime system and additional fonts. Click to display the Options
dialog box. For details, refer to “Options dialog box” on page 23-15.
■ Automatic start Control Function after download
After project data is downloaded, the ladder program operation starts automatically (M8000 is set to 1).
■ Clear HMI Keep Register (LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK)
Select this check box to clear the HMI Keep Register and HMI Keep Relay after the project data is downloaded. Note
that when a project data with a changed data storage area setting is downloaded, the HMI Keep Register and HMI
Keep Relay are always cleared.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-13
2 Downloading
■ Download Recipe Files to External Memory
Select this check box to create a RECIPE folder or recipe files in an External Memory Folder on an external memory
inserted in the Touch when downloading projects. Only on channels for which Save to in the Recipe Settings dialog
box is set to External Memory, and Recipe Function is set to Use.
• When Download Data is set to All, recipe files are created for all channels for which recipe data is set.
• When Download Data is set to Modified Data Only, only recipe files on channels where recipe data has
changed are created.
• When Download Data is set to Select Files, no recipe file is created.
■ Download
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, the project data starts downloading.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is
displayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “To
download project data” on page 23-7.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to download to, then click OK to start the download.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master via which to download. For details, refer to “To
download project data” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to External Memory, the Select Drive dialog box is displayed. Select the
external memory drive, then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “2.3 Downloading Files to an
External Memory Inserted in the Touch” on page 23-16.
• Do not turn off the Touch while project data is downloading.
• If project data downloading fails and communication is not possible, turn the Touch off and on then
download the data once again.
• During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
■ Cancel
Stops downloading of project data.
23-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Downloading
Options dialog box
Download runtime system and additional fonts.
23
■ Download Runtime system
Online Function
Select this check box to force download runtime system, irrespective of the runtime system version of the Touch,
when downloading project data. Normally this option should not be used.
■ Download additional fonts
Select this check box to download additional fonts when downloading project data.
If this check box is selected, the following additional fonts can be selected for download to the Touch.
Japanese Large Font (First standard), Japanese Large Font (Second Standard), Chinese, Taiwanese,
Korean, European Large Font, Central European, Baltic, and Cyrillic.
• For details about additional fonts, refer to Chapter 2 “Installed Fonts in the Touch” on page 2-7.
• Clear the Download Additional Fonts check box, to delete all additional fonts that have been
downloaded to the Touch.
• The additional fonts downloaded to the Touch whose check box is cleared will be deleted from the Touch.
Target font size (byte): Shows the total size of the basic fonts and selected additional fonts.
If no additional fonts are selected for download to the Touch, shows the size of
the basic fonts.
Downloadable project size (byte): Shows the amount of project data that can be downloaded. This figure varies
according to the additional fonts selected.
Target Font Information: Confirms the additional fonts installed on the Touch.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-15
2 Downloading
2.3 Downloading Files to an External Memory Inserted in the Touch
Specified files can be downloaded to an external memory inserted in the Touch. The files are downloaded to External
Memory Folder specified in the Project Settings dialog box for the current project.
1 Insert the external memory into the Touch.
Touch
USB flash device
2 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch
as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.
3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow under Download.
While editing project data, even if you click the arrow under Download in the Transfer group on the
Online tab, the download menu will be displayed.
4 Select the method for downloading the file to the external memory.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
■ Files to External Memory
Stops operation of the Touch and downloads the file to the external memory inserted in the Touch. When the file
download is complete, operation resumes.
■ Files to External Memory while running
Downloads the file to the external memory inserted in the Touch without stopping operation of the Touch.
5 Select the file, and then click Open.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, the project data starts downloading.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is displayed.
Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start the download. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to download to, then click OK to start the download.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master via which to download. For details, refer to “To
execute any function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name and
enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
23-16 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Downloading
6 Click Yes.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box is displayed and the file starts downloading.
When finished downloading, a completion message is displayed.
7 Click OK.
23
Online Function
8 Click Close in the External Memory Maintenance dialog box.
During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
To create a recipe file on an external memory inserted in the computer, use Save Recipe File to External
Memory in the Recipe Settings dialog box. For details, refer to Chapter 18 “Creating Recipe Files in the
Recipe Settings Dialog Box” on page 18-17.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-17
3 Uploading
3 Uploading
Project data in the Touch or in an external memory inserted in a computer can be read using WindO/I-NV3 and saved
to the computer.
3.1 Upload Project Data from the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch
as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.
2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Upload icon.
While editing project data, project data can be uploaded from the Touch even by clicking the Upload icon
in the Transfer group on the Online tab.
If project data is being edited, project data will be closed. If the project data was changed, a confirmation
message to save the project data is displayed.
• Click Yes to save the project data and display a dialog box corresponding to the communication settings.
• Click No to close the project data without saving changes and display a dialog box corresponding to the
communication settings.
• Click Cancel to stop uploading and return to the editing screen without saving the project data.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to USB, the Upload dialog box is displayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is
displayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start the upload. For details, refer to “To
execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to display the Upload dialog box.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master via which to upload. For details, refer to “To
execute any function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
23-18 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Uploading
3 Check the project data details, and then click Upload.
If there is a project file with the same file name in the upload folder, an overwrite confirmation message is displayed.
• Click Yes to start uploading the project data.
• Click Cancel to stop uploading the project data.
When finished uploading, a completion message is displayed.
23
■ Project Name
Online Function
The project file is saved with the currently displayed name. To change the project name, enter a new name for the
file. The maximum number is 50 characters.
You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:*?"<>|
■ Location
The uploaded project file is saved to the currently displayed location. To change the location of the saved file,
click . The Save Project After Uploading dialog box is displayed. Select a location, and then click Save.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close on the Upload dialog box.
A confirmation message to open the project is displayed.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-19
3 Uploading
6 Click OK.
The uploaded project opens.
This concludes uploading of project data.
During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
For details on reading project data saved on an external memory using WindO/I-NV3, refer to Chapter 26
“Uploading” on page 26-9.
23-20 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Uploading
3.2 Upload Dialog Box
This section describes the settings and buttons of the Upload dialog box.
■ Project Name
The project file is saved with the currently displayed name. To change the project name, enter a new name for the
23
file. The maximum number is 50 characters.
Online Function
You cannot use the following characters in the project name.
\/:*?"<>|
■ Comment
Displays comment on project data downloaded to the Touch.
■ Type Number
Displays the type number selected in project data downloaded to the Touch.
■ Modified
Displays the time that project data downloaded to the Touch was last saved in WindO/I-NV3.
■ Location
Specifies the location for saving uploaded project files.
Click to display the Save Project After Uploading dialog box. Select the location for saving, then click Save.
■ Upload files used in this project from the External Memory
To upload files located on an external memory inserted in the Touch that are used by the project together with
project data, select the file to be uploaded from the following.
Recipe Files
■ Upload
Starts uploading of project data.
■ Cancel
Stops uploading of project data.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-21
4 Clear
4 Clear
Deletes data from the Touch or from an external memory inserted in the Touch.
4.1 Clear Data from the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch
as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.
2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Clear, then click the data to be deleted.
■ All
Deletes project data, Alarm Log data, Data Log data, and Operation Log data. It also clears the HMI Keep Register
(LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK).
■ Alarm Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Alarm Log function.
■ Data Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Data Log function.
■ Operation Log Data
Deletes the data collected by the Operation Log function.
■ HMI Keep Register (LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK)
Clears the HMI Keep Register (LKR) and HMI Keep Relay (LK).
■ Stored Data in External Memory
After stopping operation, deletes data saved to an External Memory Folder on an external memory.
Click this to display the Clear Data dialog box. For details, refer to “Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted
in the Touch” on page 23-24.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, deletion of the data starts.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is
displayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start deletion of the data. For details, refer to
“To execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to start deletion of the data.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master to be used. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
23-22 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Clear
4 Click Yes.
5 Click Close.
This concludes clearing data.
23
Online Function
During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-23
4 Clear
4.2 Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted in the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
In the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch
as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication
Settings” on page 23-5.
2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Clear, then click Stored Data in External Memory.
The Clear Data dialog box is displayed.
4 Select the check box for the data items to be deleted from the External Memory Folder.
Alarm Log Data, Data Log Data, Operation Log Data, and Recipe Files
5 Click OK.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port to USB, deletion of the data starts.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is
displayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to start deletion of the data. For details, refer to
“To execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to start deletion of the data.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master to be used. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
23-24 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
4 Clear
6 Click Yes.
7 Click Close.
This concludes clearing data on the external memory.
23
Online Function
During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-25
5 Formatting
5 Formatting
Stops operation of the Touch and formats an external memory inserted in the Touch.
5.1 Formatting an External Memory Inserted in the Touch
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
If communicating with a Touch inserted in a computer, in the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from
Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select
O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.
2 Open project data.
3 On the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Format.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to USB, a formatting confirmation message is
displayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is
displayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to display the formatting confirmation message.
For details, refer to “To execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to display the formatting confirmation message.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master to be used. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
4 Click Yes.
5 Click Close.
This concludes formatting the external memory.
During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
23-26 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
6 System Information
6 System Information
Displays information about the runtime system and downloaded project data of the Touch.
This function can be used to show information about project data during editing and to simultaneously check details
of project data downloaded to the Touch.
6.1 Displaying System Information
1 Change communication settings according to the connection method between the computer and the Touch.
If communicating with a Touch inserted in a computer, in the Communication Settings dialog box, select Touch from
Communicate with. To communicate with the Touch as an O/I Link Slave via an O/I Link Master, select
O/I Link Slave. For details, refer to “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.
2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Target Info..
23
Online Function
While editing project data, information about runtime system and project data can be displayed even by
clicking Target Info. in the Touch group on the Online tab.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to USB, the System Information dialog box is
displayed.
• When Communicate with is set to Touch and Port is set to Ethernet, the Target IP Address dialog box is
displayed. Specify the IP address of the Touch, and then click OK to display the System Information dialog box. For
details, refer to “To execute any function except project data download” on page 23-8.
• When Communicate with is set to O/I Link Slave, the Target Slave dialog box is displayed. Specify the slave
station of the Touch to communicate with, and then click OK to display the System Information dialog box.
If Port is set to Ethernet, specify the IP address of the master to be used. For details, refer to “To execute any
function except project data download” on page 23-9.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-27
6 System Information
3 Check information about the runtime system and project data.
• To check the additional fonts installed on the Touch, click Font Information. The Font Information
dialog box is displayed. For details, refer to “Font Information Dialog Box” on page 23-30.
• To check information about the external memory inserted in the Touch, click External Memory
Information. The External Memory Information dialog box is displayed. For details, refer to “External
Memory Information Dialog Box” on page 23-30.
4 When you have finished checking the information, click OK.
5 Click Close.
This concludes checking system information.
During communication with an O/I Link Slave using the online function, O/I Link Master operation is
stopped.
23-28 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
6 System Information
6.2 Target Information Dialog Box
This section describes the settings and buttons of the Target Information dialog box.
23
Online Function
■ Target Runtime Information
Product Series: Shows the type number of Touch
Runtime Version: Shows the runtime system version of the Touch.
Memory Space (byte): Shows the maximum amount of project data (bytes) that can be downloaded to the Touch.
Font Information: Checks the additional fonts currently installed on the Touch. Click this button to display the
Font Information dialog box. For details, refer to “Font Information Dialog Box” on page 23-
30.
External Memory Information: Checks the state of an external memory inserted in the Touch, its total capacity,
available capacity, and used capacity. Click this button to display the External Memory
Information dialog box. For details, refer to “External Memory Information Dialog Box”
on page 23-30.
■ Target Project Information
Project Name: Shows the project name of projects downloaded to the Touch.
Modified Date: Displays the time that project data downloaded to the Touch was last saved in WindO/I-NV3.
Project Version: Displays the version of WindO/I-NV3 used to create the project data downloaded to the
Touch.
External Device Manufacturer: Displays the external device manufacturer configured in the project downloaded to the
Touch.
Protocol: Displays the communication driver configured in the project downloaded to the Touch.
Driver Version: Displays the version of the communication driver.
■ Opened Project Information
Project Name: Shows the project name of the project being edited.
Modified Date: Displays the time that the project being edited was last saved in WindO/I-NV3.
Version Number: Displays the version of WindO/I-NV3 used to create the project being edited.
This function can be used to show information about a project that is being edited and simultaneously check
information about project data downloaded to the Touch.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 23-29
6 System Information
Font Information Dialog Box
This dialog box is used to check the state of installed additional fonts.
The installation status of each additional font is shown to the right of the font. The following additional fonts can be
installed.
• Japanese Large Font (First standard)
• Japanese Large Font (Second standard)
• Chinese
• Taiwanese
• Korean
• European Large Font
• Central European
• Baltic
• Cyrillic
External Memory Information Dialog Box
Checks the state of an external memory inserted in the Touch, its total capacity, available capacity, and used
capacity.
State: Shows the state of the external memory inserted in the Touch.
Memory Capacity: Shows the total capacity (bytes) of the external memory inserted in the Touch.
Free Space: Shows how much of the capacity (bytes) of the external memory inserted in the Touch is
currently available for use.
Used Space: Shows how much of the capacity (bytes) of the external memory inserted in the Touch is
currently in use.
23-30 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 24 Monitor Function
This chapter describes the monitor function that checks operation of the created project data.
Monitor function enables the values of internal devices and the values of external devices to be checked and changed.
This can be done in two ways: using WindO/I-NV3 on a computer connected to the Touch, or directly on the screen
of the Touch.
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
1.1 How the Monitor Function in WindO/I-NV3 is Used
Monitor function in WindO/I-NV3 can be performed as follows.
• Checking values of devices used on the screen of the Touch
Computer Touch
External device
LDR1
Screen Monitor
130 24
Monitor Function
LM0
LM0
LDR1
Displays device addresses used in a screen.
• Checking values of specified devices
Computer Touch
External device
Custom Monitor
130
Select device address
• Checking values of devices of sequential addresses
Computer Touch
External device
Batch Monitor
130
Sequential addresses
(Starting address) LM0
Length: 3 LM1
LM2
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-1
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
• Checking the state of external devices connected to the Touch
Computer Touch
External device
Connect
External Device Monitor
130
Station Station
No. 0 No. 1 Station No. 0
External device
Disconnect
Station No. 1
• Displaying the value of device in a popup
Object List window Script Editor
Popup
Popup
• Highlighting objects while satisfying conditions
Not satisfied Trigger Condition
While satisfying the condition: LM0==1
Condition
LM0 = 0 1
Satisfied
Condition
Highlighted
24-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
• Switching to the screen of the Touch
Computer Touch
External device
130
Base Screen 1
Switches to Base Screen 2.
External device
Tank 1
Full
Base Screen 2
• Opening current screen
24
Monitor Function
Computer Touch
External device
Tank 1
Full
Click
Base Screen 2
Opens to
Base Screen 2.
External device
Tank 1
Full
Base Screen 2
Not supported in the monitor function of WindLDR.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-3
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
1.2 Debugging in WindO/I-NV3
This section describes the procedure for monitoring values of devices and debugging in WindO/I-NV3.
1 Change the communication setting to match the connection method between computer and Touch.
For details, refer to Chapter 23 “1.3 Change Communication Settings” on page 23-5.
2 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Start Monitor.
The Touch switches to monitor mode and Monitor Mode is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Enter
the password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
3 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click the following button or enter the number to the text box to switch
the screen displayed on the Touch to the Monitor screen.
■ (Back)
You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched.
■ (Forward)
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using (Back).
■ (First Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of the lowest screen number in the project data.
■ (Previous Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not sequential, switches to the screen of next lowest number.
■ (Specified Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen with the specified number.
■ (Next Screen)
Switches to the screen with screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive, switches to the screen of next highest number.
■ (Last Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.
4 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Open Current Screens.
The screen displayed on Touch opens in the editing window.
24-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
5 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, select the monitor being used.
When monitoring starts, the screen monitor is displayed.
■ Screens
Automatically checks device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Touch. For details, refer to “Screen
Monitor” on page 24-6.
■ Object List
Displays values of devices in a popup on the Object List window. It also highlights objects while satisfying
conditions. For details, refer to “1.3 Display the Value of Device in Popup” on page 24-16, and “1.4 Highlighting
Objects While Satisfying Conditions” on page 24-16.
■ Custom
Registers monitored devices individually and displays the value of devices. For details, refer to “Custom Monitor” on
page 24-7.
24
■ Batch
Monitor Function
Registers monitored devices as a batch for sequential addresses and displays the value of devices. For details, refer to
“Batch Monitor” on page 24-14.
■ External Devices
Displays the state of external devices connected to the Touch. For details, refer to “External Device Monitor” on page
24-15.
6 Check operation of project data by monitoring and changing values of devices, and edit project data if there is an
error.
If the monitored screen is switches, repeat steps 3 through 4.
7 Download the edited project data to the Touch.
To reflect edits made during debugging, it is necessary to perform a download.
8 On the Online tab, in the Monitors group, click Stop Monitor.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-5
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
● Screen Monitor
Automatically displays device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Touch. Enables values of devices to be
monitored and changed.
■ Device Address
Displays the device addresses used on the screen displayed on the Touch.
next to Comment toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, click to
display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.
■ Comment
Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only after you click next to
Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.
■ Value
Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, double-click a cell and then specify
a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Click to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click to display a popup menu,
then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.
■ Hexadecimal, Binary
Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change a value, double-click a cell
and then specify a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
Comments are displayed only after you click next to Value to display a popup menu and then select the HEX and
BIN check box.
■ Data Type
Selects the data type of the selected value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
• The values of device addresses configured as write-only, such as destination device address for bit
buttons, cannot be monitored. “????” is displayed in this case.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type for the address of highest number, the values
stored in the device address are displayed repeatedly.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type, sequential addresses (lower word to upper
word) are used.
24-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
● Custom Monitor
Enables the values of registered device addresses to be monitored and changed.
■ Add to List
Saves device addresses registered in Monitor to project data as a custom monitor list. A saved lists can be monitored
24
by selecting it from the List.
Monitor Function
Click this button to display the Device List Name Setting dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving Registered Device
Addresses to Project Data as a Custom Monitor List” on page 24-10.
■ Device
Registers the device addresses to monitor individually.
Click this button to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For details, refer to “Registering the device
addresses to monitor individually” on page 24-8.
■ Script
Batch saves all device addresses used in a script.
Click this button to display Script Manager. For details, refer to “Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts” on
page 24-9.
■ Import
Imports the device addresses from a device list saved as a CSV text file.
Click this button to display the Open dialog box. For details, refer to “Importing Devices from a Device List” on page
24-12.
■ Export
Saves the device addresses displayed in Monitor as a CSV text file. This file is called a Device List.
Click this button to display the Save As dialog box. For details, refer to “Saving a Custom Monitor List as a CSV File”
on page 24-11.
The saved device list can be imported using Import.
■ Clear
Deletes all the device addresses displayed in Monitor.
■ List
Displays a custom monitor list saved with the project data.
Select a list to clear the device addresses shown in Monitor and display the device addresses in the list.
Double-click a cell to display the Device List Name Setting dialog box. The name of the custom monitor list can be
edited.
Select a list and press DELETE to delete it from the List.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-7
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
■ Monitor
The registered device addresses are displayed in a list.
Select the custom monitor list from the List to show the device addresses registered in the list.
Device Address: The registered device addresses are displayed.
Double-click a cell to register or change a device address. Click to display the Device
Address Settings dialog box. For details on how to configure device address settings, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, click to
display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.
Comment: Displays comments on device addresses saved in Tag Editor. Comments are displayed only
after you click next to Device Address to display a popup menu, then click Comment
and select the check box.
Value: Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, double-
click a cell and then enter a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data”
on page 2-2.
Click to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click to
display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.
Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change a
value, double-click a cell and then specify a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data”
on page 2-2.
Comments are displayed only after you click next to Value to display a popup menu and
then select the HEX and BIN check box.
Data Type Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available
Data” on page 2-2.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type for the address of highest number, the values
stored in the device address are displayed repeatedly.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type, sequential addresses (lower word to upper
word) are used.
Registering the device addresses to monitor
Registering the device addresses to monitor individually
Click Device. Or, double-click a cell under Device Address in Monitor, and then click .
The Device Address Settings dialog box is displayed. For details on configuring device address settings, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
24-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
Batch Saving Device Addresses Used in Scripts
1 Click Script.
Script Manager is displayed.
2 Select the script ID of the script for the device address to be batch-saved, and then click Select. 24
Monitor Function
All the device addresses used by the script are registered.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-9
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
Saving Registered Device Addresses to Project Data as a Custom Monitor List
If registered device addresses are saved with project data as a list, then even when the project data is later
reopened, the device addresses can be called from the List to be reutilized.
1 Click Add to List.
The Device List Name Setting dialog box is displayed.
2 Enter a name for the custom monitor list.
The maximum number is 40 characters. Only alphanumeric characters and symbols can be used.
The following characters cannot be used for names of custom monitor list.
\/:*?"<>|
3 Click OK.
The custom monitor list is added to the List.
4 Saving project data.
If a project file is closed without saving, custom monitor lists will not be saved with the project data.
24-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
Saving a Custom Monitor List as a CSV File
To use a custom monitor list (registered devices list) in another project, save it as a CSV text file. This file is called a
Device List.
1 Click Export.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
24
Monitor Function
2 Select Save in, enter a File name, and then click Save.
This concludes saving device list.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-11
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
Importing Devices from a Device List
Imports the device addresses from a device list saved as a CSV text file into custom monitor.
1 Click Import.
The Device List dialog box is displayed.
2 Click .
The Open dialog box is displayed.
3 Select a saved device list, and then click Open.
The device addresses are listed.
24-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
4 Click the device address to import.
To select multiple items of text, press and hold SHIFT or CTRL while you click the specific items.
5 Click OK.
If there is an already registered device address on the Custom Monitor, an overwrite confirmation message is
displayed.
• Click Yes to overwrite the device address displayed in the confirmation message.
24
• Click Yes To All to overwrite all the device addresses.
Monitor Function
• Click No to display the next confirmation message without overwriting the device address displayed in the
confirmation message.
• Click Cancel to stop importing device addresses.
The device is added to Monitor.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-13
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
● Batch Monitor
Displays sequential addresses as a batch.
(Monitor)
■ Target
Select Touch or External Devices from the device addresses that include the device addresses to be set.
■ Station No.
Specify the station number of the external device. The range of possible settings can be varies according to the
selected communication drivers.
This option can only be configured when 1:N Communication is selected under Connection in the Select
Communication Driver dialog box or the Change Communication Driver dialog box.
■ Device Type
Selects the device type.
The list only shows device types that can be used.
■ Address
Specify the address. The range that can be set varies based on the device type selected.
■ Bit
Specify the bit (0 to 15) of the word device when a word device is selected in Device.
■ Length
Specifies the number of device addresses displayed in the list (Bit device and bit of the word device specification: 1 to
16 Other than above: 1 to 1000).
■ Data Type
Selects the data format of the displayed value. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data” on page 2-2.
■ (Monitor)
Automatically displays the selected device addresses, in the number specified under Length, from top to bottom,
consecutively.
Device Address: The specified device addresses are displayed.
toggles between showing and hiding comments. When comments are displayed, click to
display a popup menu, then click Comment and select the check box.
24-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
Value: Displays the current value of device address in decimal format. To change a value, double-
click a cell and then specify a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data”
on page 2-2.
Click to toggle display of HEX and BIN format. To display HEX and BIN values, click to
display a popup menu, then click HEX and BIN and select the check box.
Hexadecimal, Binary: Displays the current value of device address in hexadecimal and binary format. To change a
value, double-click a cell and then specify a value.
The value range depends on the data type. For details, refer to Chapter 2 “1.2 Available Data”
on page 2-2.
Comments are displayed only after you click next to Value to display a popup menu and
then select the HEX and BIN check box.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type for the address of highest number, the values
stored in the device address are displayed repeatedly.
• If BIN32, BCD8, or float32 is selected from Data Type, sequential addresses (lower word to upper
word) are used.
24
● External Device Monitor
Monitor Function
Displays the state of external devices connected to the Touch.
Can be used only for 1:N communication devices.
(Connection status)
(Station No.)
■ (Connection status)
Displays the state of external devices connected to the Touch. If a red cross appears over the icon of an external
device ( ), communication is stopped.
Clicking the external device icon enables switching between connection and disconnection.
■ (Station No.)
Displays the station number of all external devices used in the project.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-15
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
1.3 Display the Value of Device in Popup
During monitoring, mousing over device addresses displayed in the Object List window or device addresses in a
script opened in Script Editor displays the current value in a popup window.
• Object List window
• Script Editor
• Popup viewing of values of devices in the Object List window works only if the screen displayed in the
Object List window matches the screen displayed on the Touch.
• Popup viewing of values of devices in Script Editor works only if the script during editing is being used by
a global script command or a script command on the screen displayed on the Touch.
• The maximum number for popup window is 80 characters. Any characters entered after the 80th will not
be displayed.
• If 65 or more device addresses are displayed in the Object List window, monitor refreshing and popup
message will slow down.
1.4 Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions
When the Trigger Condition is satisfied during monitoring, the objects for which conditions are being satisfied are
highlighted in the Object List window.
24-16 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3
1.5 Switching the Screen of the Touch
During monitoring, it is possible to switch to the screen displayed on the Touch using a WindO/I-NV3 command.
■ (Back)
You are returned to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched.
■ (Forward)
Advances to the Base Screen that was displayed immediately before the screen was switched using the (Back).
■ (First Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen with the lowest screen number in the project data.
■ (Previous Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one lower than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen 24
numbers are not consecutive numbers, this command switches to the closest number.
Monitor Function
■ (Specified Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of a specified number.
■ (Next Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of screen number one higher than the Base Screen currently displayed. If the screen
numbers are not consecutive numbers, switches to the closest number.
■ (Last Screen)
Switches to the Base Screen of highest screen number in the project data.
1.6 Open Current Screens
To automatically open the screen displayed on the Touch during monitoring and put it into an active state, click Open
Current Screens.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-17
2 Monitoring on the Touch
2 Monitoring on the Touch
It is possible to change values of devices and check the operation on the Touch, without connecting to a computer.
2.1 How the Monitoring Function is Used
Monitoring in the Touch can perform the following functions.
• Checking and changing the value of specified device
Touch
• Checking ladder program
Touch
00001
I0000 IMOV
N
00002
M0001 D0000
-01
ESC OK
24-18 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Monitoring on the Touch
2.2 Device Monitor
By registering device addresses in Run Mode, both data monitoring and changing can be conducted. Registered
device addresses are listed in Device Monitor in ascending order (A to Z, 0 to 9). Registered device addresses are
saved until power to the Touch is turned OFF, or the mode is changed.
• Available device address range depends on types and settings of external devices. Selecting unavailable
device address, “Communication error” happens and it can not be back in without reboot. For details,
refer to Chapter 30 “1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen” on page 30-1.
• If three Popup Screens are displayed on the screen (or if two Popup Screens are displayed in the Alarm
Log Settings), in order to use Device Monitor in the same way on Popup Screens, the Device Monitor
cannot be used.
● Displaying Device Monitor
1 Press the upper-left corner of the screen on the Touch for three seconds or more.
The Maintenance Screen is displayed.
Touch
24
Press and hold three
Monitor Function
or more seconds
2 Press Device Monitor.
Device Monitor is displayed.
If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Select
a user name and then enter a password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “1.1 User Accounts” on page 21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-19
2 Monitoring on the Touch
● Device Address Registration
1 Press Select on Device Monitor.
The Select Device screen is displayed.
Dec/Hex
2 Press Up or Dwn to select the device type.
The next address of the device address entered previously is automatically displayed in the Select Device
screen.
3 Enter the address and then press ENT.
• Press CLR to clear all values entered for the address.
• Press CAN to stop registering devices.
• If a device address is invalid, pressing ENT will not return to Device Monitor.
• For 1:N communication, : is displayed. Enter the station number as a 2-digit hexadecimal value. Press :, specify
the station number and then enter the address.
• Control device addresses are displayed on Device Monitor with a # before the device type.
Example: When setting D100
Device Monitor: #D100
Ladder Monitor: D100
The device address is registered to Device Monitor.
Dec/Hex
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to register all device addresses to be monitored.
24-20 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Monitoring on the Touch
● Changing Value of Device
1 Press Up or Down to select the device to be changed the value.
Dec/Hex
2 Press Data on Device Monitor.
The Write Data screen is displayed.
Dec/Hex
24
Monitor Function
3 Press Dec/Hex to switch the display type for values of devices.
Switches between DEC and HEX.
Dec/Hex
4 Enter the value of device and press ENT.
• Press CLR to delete the entered value of device.
• Press CAN to stop entering the value of device.
Dec/Hex
• If a value of device is invalid, pressing ENT will not return you to Device Monitor.
• If the display type is decimal, A to F cannot be used.
The value of device is changed.
Dec/Hex
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-21
2 Monitoring on the Touch
● Device Monitor Configuration
Title bar
Move button
Close button
Dec/Hex
(Device Address) (Value)
(Focus)
■ Title Bar
Displays the title, (Move) button, and (Close) button.
(Move) button: Moves the Device Monitor.
(Close) button: Closes the Device Monitor.
■ Dec/Hex
Switches the display type for the current value of device. Switches between DEC and HEX.
■ (Device Address)
The registered device address is displayed.
■ (Value)
The current value of device is displayed.
■ (Focus)
Highlights the selected device address.
■▲
Moves the focus up by one line.
■▼
Moves the focus down by one line.
■ Data
Changes the value of the selected device address. Press to display the Write Data Screen. For details, refer to
“Changing Value of Device” on page 24-21.
■ Del
Deletes the selected device address.
■ Select
Registers a selected device address. Press to display the Select Device Screen. For details, refer to “Device Address
Registration” on page 24-20.
24-22 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Monitoring on the Touch
2.3 Ladder Monitor
This function displays the ladder program along with execution states. This enables you to visually understand the
states of the ladder program. For details, refer to Chapter 2 in the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
● Displaying Ladder Monitor
Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the follow method to display the Ladder Monitor.
1 Press the upper-left corner of the screen on the Touch for 3 seconds or more.
The Maintenance Screen is displayed.
Touch
Press and hold three
or more seconds
2 Press Ladder Monitor.
The select line screen is displayed.
24
Monitor Function
If a password has been configured for the project data, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Select
a user name and then enter a password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security
Function” on page 21-1.
3 Press Last Monitored Line or Go To ....
Select Last Monitored Line to display the Ladder Monitor and start the monitor from the last monitored line.
Select Go To ... to display the Go To screen. Enter the desired line and press to display the Ladder Monitor and
start the monitor from the specified line.
When the following operations are performed, Last Monitored Line is reset to the first line of the ladder
program.
• The power is turned on.
• The project is downloaded.
● Moving the focus
1 The Ladder Monitor is displayed.
Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the Maintenance Screen to display the Ladder Monitor.
2 Press , ↑ , , and to move the focus to the desired position.
↑
↑
Press and hold to repeatedly move the focus.
● Displaying instruction parameters
1 The Ladder Monitor is displayed.
Use the Goto Screen Button, the Goto Screen Command, or the Maintenance Screen to display the Ladder Monitor.
2 Press , ↑, , and to move the focus to the desired instruction.
↑
↑
3 Press .
The detailed information screen is displayed.
4 Press .
Closes the detailed information screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-23
2 Monitoring on the Touch
● Ladder Monitor Configuration
Touch
Focus
00001
I0000 IMOV
N
Display 00002
M0001 D0000
-01
Operation buttons ESC OK
■ Display
This area displays the ladder program and the parameters for the instructions.
Ladder program: Displays the ladder program used by the running project.
Up to five symbols can be displayed per line.
Example:
Symbol Focus
Line No. 00001
I0000 MOV
00002
M0000 M0001 M0002 M0003 M0004 Device addresses
or instructions
Line No.: Shows the ladder program line number.
Symbol: Shows the instruction symbol.
Focus: Displays the selected instruction with the colors reversed.
Device addresses or instructions:
The LOD, LODN, OUT, OUTN, SET, RST, AND, ANDN, OR, and ORN instructions
display the device address under the symbol. The displayed device addresses are as
follows.
"Device type (one character)" + "Address (four characters)" (+ "Bit position (two
characters)")
For details, refer to Chapter 27 “1.2 Control Device Addresses” on page 27-4 and
Chapter 27 “2.2 Control Device Addresses” on page 27-11.
MCS, MCR, JMP, END, LABEL, LJMP, LCAL, and LRET instructions are displayed in one
line on the screen.
The instructions other than those listed above display the instruction name under
up to a maximum of five characters.
Details of the following instructions can be displayed in the details screen:
Basic instructions: LOD, LODN, OUT, OUTN, SET, RST, AND, ANDN, OR, ORN, TML, TIM, TMH, TMS,
TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO, CNT, CDP, CUD, CNTD, CDPD, CUDD, SFR, SFRN, CC=,
CC>=, DC=, DC>=
Move instructions: MOV, MOVN, IMOV, IMOVN, IBMV, IBMVN
Binary arithmetic instructions:
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, INC, DEC, ROOT, SUM
24-24 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Monitoring on the Touch
Details: Displays detailed information for the selected instruction. Select an instruction on the ladder
program and press to display. The displayed content varies based on the instruction.
Example:
Instruction Data type
Label OPCODE: MOV (W)
S1 -: D0000 = 1234
Parameter
D1 R: D0123 = 1234
REP : 03/99
Label: Shows the name and data type of the instruction.
Instruction: Shows the instruction name up to a maximum of 5 characters.
Data type: Shows the data type. The displayed data types are as follows.
W (word), I (integer), D (double word), L (long), F (float)
Parameter: Shows the configuration details for the instruction.
■ Operation button
24
Monitor Function
: Moves the focus right by one line.
↑
: Moves the focus left by one line.
↑
↑: Moves the focus up by one line.
: Moves the focus down by one line.
↑
: Toggles the contact state for the selected NO contact or NC contact.
Press and hold to display the detailed information for the instruction with focus.
: The operation varies based on the content displayed in the display.
Ladder program: Closes the Ladder Monitor.
Details: Closes the detailed information screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 24-25
2 Monitoring on the Touch
24-26 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 25 Data Transfer Function
This chapter describes the Project Transfer function to upload and download project data to the Touch using external
memory.
The function to exchange data using external memory is generically referred to as the Data Transfer function.
1 Project Transfer Function
1.1 How the Project Transfer Function is Used
The project transfer function uploads or downloads project data between the Touch and an external memory inserted
in the Touch.
● Download project data saved on an external memory to the Touch. However, you must create project
data for transfer.
Computer Touch
Create Project File USB flash drive
for Transfer Download
25
Data Transfer Function
Project File Project File
(ZNV Format) (ZNV Format)
● Upload the project data used for operation on the Touch and save it to an external memory.
Touch
USB flash drive
Upload
Project File
(ZNV Format)
When using the project transfer function and a project file is uploaded, the project file name is “project
name + file extension (.ZNV)”.
1.2 Project Data Transfer Procedures
The following methods can be used to upload or download project data between the Touch and an external memory
inserted in the Touch.
• Using the USB Autorun function
For details, refer to Chapter 26 “1 USB Flash Drives” on page 26-1.
• Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-commands
For details, refer to “1.4 Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer Project Data” on
page 25-5.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 25-1
1 Project Transfer Function
1.3 Converting Project Data for Transfer
Project data must be converted to dedicated data for transfer in order to download project data to the Touch using
the project transfer function.
Use the following procedure to create project data for transfer using an external memory.
1 Insert a USB flash drive in the computer's USB port.
Computer
USB flash drive
To USB Port
2 Open the project data to transfer using WindO/I-NV3.
3 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the Download icon.
The Download dialog box is displayed.
When the project data has not been saved after it was opened, a save confirmation message is displayed.
Click OK to save the project data and display the Download dialog box.
Click Cancel to return to the editing screen without saving the project data.
4 Check that Communication Settings is External Memory, and then click Download.
The Select Drive dialog box is displayed.
1. If Communication Settings is not External Memory, click Change.
The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed.
2. Select External Memory for Communicate with, and then click OK.
25-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Project Transfer Function
5 Specify the drive for the USB flash drive, and then click OK.
A continue download confirmation message is displayed.
■ Drive
Specify the drive assigned to the external memory.
■ Network
Displays the Network Drive Assignment dialog box. You can specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Folder
Specify the folder where the project data is to be downloaded.
Click to display the Project Settings dialog box. You can specify an External Memory Folder as the download
destination.
6 Click Yes.
The Download dialog box is displayed and the project data is now being saved.
When this process is complete, a message is displayed. 25
Data Transfer Function
7 Click OK.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 25-3
1 Project Transfer Function
8 Click Close on the Download Project dialog box.
The project data for transfer is created in the External Memory Folder on an external memory.
For details about the created data folder and file structure, refer to Chapter 26 “External Memory Devices”
on page 26-1.
If the folder or file structure on the External Memory Folder is modified, the Touch and WindO/I-NV3 will
not be usable.
25-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
1 Project Transfer Function
1.4 Using Key Buttons, Multi-Buttons, or Multi-Commands to Transfer Project Data
Allocate a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command configured with the project transfer function to the
Touch.
For details, refer to Chapter 7 “4 Key Button” on page 7-49.
For details, refer to Chapter 7 “5 Multi-Button” on page 7-68.
For details, refer to Chapter 11 “5 Multi-Command” on page 11-31.
● Download
1 Create a project file for transfer (.ZNV) and save it on a USB flash drive.
For details, refer to “1.3 Converting Project Data for Transfer” on page 25-2.
2 Insert a USB flash drive in the Touch.
Touch
USB flash drive
25
3 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with Download Project under Data
Transfer on the Key Browser.
Data Transfer Function
● Upload
1 Insert a USB flash drive in the Touch.
Touch
USB flash drive
2 Press the Key Button or Multi-Button or execute the Multi-Command configured with Upload Project under Data
Transfer on the Key Browser.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual 25-5
1 Project Transfer Function
1.5 Precautions
• An error message is displayed if the project data upload or download fails.
For details, refer to Chapter 30 “1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen” on page 30-1.
• While the project transfer function is running, the Touch stops processing other functions.
• When project data is downloaded using the project transfer function, the HMI Keep Registers and the HMI Keep
Relays are cleared. Control device addresses kept by Memory Backup in Function Settings are not cleared.
• If a project file (ZNV format) exists with the same name in the save destination when uploading a project file (ZNV
format), the file is overwritten with the uploaded file without displaying an overwrite confirmation message.
• When using the project transfer function, make the project data file name half-width alphanumeric characters.
• While running the project transfer function using a Key Button, Multi-Button, or Multi-Command, if a data transfer
function (project transfer) is initiated, the only function that will work is the currently running function. If two or
more data transfer functions are configured to a Multi-Button or Multi-Command, only the data transfer function
displayed at the top of the function list on the parts property dialog box will run.
• When running the project transfer function, the external memory device must have enough free space equivalent
to the size of the ZNV project file. Check that there is sufficient free space on the external memory device that will
be used with the project transfer function. If the device does not have sufficient free space, the project upload or
download may fail.
25-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Chapter 26 External Memory Devices
This chapter describes the specifications, functions, and notes to observe when using external memory devices with
the Touch.
1 USB Flash Drives
1.1 How the USB Flash Drive Function is Used
The following functions are available when a USB flash drive is inserted in the Touch.
• USB Autorun function
Refer to “2.1 Overview of the USB Autorun Function” on page 26-18.
• USB Popup Screen function
Refer to “1.8 USB Popup Screen Function” on page 26-15.
• Transferring projects
Refer to “Chapter 25 Data Transfer Function” on page 25-1.
• Alarm Log output
Refer to Chapter 13 “External Memory Tab” on page 13-20.
• Data Log output
Refer to Chapter 14 “External Memory Tab” on page 14-16.
26
External Memory Devices
• Operation Log output
Refer to Chapter 15 “External Memory Tab” on page 15-14.
• Reading/writing recipe data
Refer to Chapter 18 “Recipe Function” on page 18-1.
1.2 Specifications
The specifications of supported USB flash drives are as follows.
• Max capacity 32 GB.
• Compatible with FAT16 or FAT32 formatted USB flash drives.
• The maximum file size that can be read and written is 256 MB.
• Character set support only for alphanumeric characters.
• File names may be up to 120 characters long. (Includes file extensions.)
• File paths may be up to 250 characters long. (Includes file extensions and drive characters.)
• Drive letters cannot contain the following characters:
\"&()*+,./:;<>[] =|^
• File and directory names cannot contain the following characters:
\/:*?"<>|
Check the IDEC web site for more information about compatible USB flash drives.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-1
1 USB Flash Drives
1.3 File Structure
When downloading or uploading data using the WindO/I-NV3, the following files and folders are accessible.
By default, the External Memory Folder on the external memory is named “HGDATA01”. For details, refer to “1.5
Setting the External Memory Folder” on page 26-12.
USB flash drive
HGDATA01 (External Memory Folder)
Folder name File name Description
[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
ALARMLOG Alarm Log data
Batch: ALMHTO.CSV
Real time: ALMHTA.CSV
[user-defined].CSV
Default file name Data Log data
DATALOG
Batch: LOGO**.CSV (** corresponds to the data number)
Real time: LOGA**.CSV
[user-defined].CSV
Default file name
OPERATIONLOG Operation Log data
Batch: OPLOGO.CSV
Real time: OPLOGA.CSV
Recipe data
[user-defined].CSV
RECIPE (*** corresponds to the recipe
Default: RCP****.CSV
number)
NVDATA [Project name].ZNV Project files
HGDATA02
HGDATA03
Users can create multiple external memory folders for different projects on a single USB flash drive. Note,
the External Memory Folder on the external memory must reside on the root directory.
Do not alter project files (ZNV format). Altered files cannot be used with Touch.
26-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 USB Flash Drives
1.4 Reading/Writing Data
● Using WindO/I-NV3 to read and write to an external memory inserted in the Touch
This procedure shows how to read and write data to the External Memory Folder specified for the project currently
running on the Touch.
Use either method below to make the connection.
• Connect a USB cable to the USB port on the computer and the USB interface on the Touch.
• Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the computer and the Ethernet interface on the Touch.
Computer To USB Port To USB Interface Touch
USB flash drive
A Plug USB Cable Mini-B Plug
To Ethernet Port To Ethernet Interface
Ethernet Cable
Communication settings
Follow these procedures to configure the communication device and port to allow reading and writing to the USB flash
drive inserted in the Touch.
1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm. Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box appears.
26
External Memory Devices
2 Select Touch under Communicate with.
3 Select the type of connection under Port, and then click OK.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-3
1 USB Flash Drives
Downloading
This procedure shows how to download a specified file into the External Memory Folder on the external memory for
the currently running project.
1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow under Download.
2 Click Files to External Memory or Files to External Memory while running.
The Open dialog box appears.
■ Files to External Memory
This function temporarily stops the Touch and then downloads files to the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch. Touch
resumes running when files have been downloaded.
■ Files to External Memory while running
This function downloads files to the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch without stopping the Touch.
3 Specify the file name, and then click Open.
A confirmation message appears.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name and
enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
4 Click Yes.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and the file download begins.
When the download is complete, a message box appears.
5 Click OK.
26-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 USB Flash Drives
6 Click Close on the External Memory Maintenance dialog box.
Uploading
This procedure shows how to upload specified data from the External Memory Folder on the external memory for the
currently running project.
1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the arrow next to Upload.
2 Click Stored Data in External Memory.
The Upload from External Memory dialog box appears.
26
External Memory Devices
3 Specify the type of data to upload by checking the appropriate items.
4 Specify the destination folder in the Path box.
5 Click OK.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and the data upload begins.
A message box appears when the data upload is complete.
The following kinds of data can be uploaded.
• Alarm Log Data
• Data Log Data
• Operation Log Data
• Recipe Files
• Click to display the Select a Folder dialog box and specify the destination folder for uploading.
• After starting WindO/I-NV3, Alarm Log data, Data Log data, and Recipe files can be uploaded from an
External Memory Folder without opening project data.
If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name and
enter the password.
For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-5
1 USB Flash Drives
6 Click OK.
7 Click Close on the External Memory Maintenance dialog box.
● Using Downloader to read and write to a USB flash drive inserted in the Touch
Maintenance is performed on data in the External Memory Folder on the external memory specified for the project
currently running on the Touch.
Downloading
This procedure shows how to download a specified file into the External Memory Folder on the external memory for
the currently running project.
1 In Downloader, under the External Memory Maintenance, click Files to External Memory or Files to External
Memory while running.
The Open dialog box appears.
2 Specify the file name, and then click Open.
This procedure saves the data to the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch.
Uploading
This procedures shows how to upload specified data from the External Memory Folder on the external memory for the
currently running project.
1 In Downloader, under External Memory Maintenance, click Upload.
The Upload from External Memory dialog box appears.
2 Specify the data to upload and where to save it to, then click OK.
This procedure uploads data to the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch and saves it
in the user-specified location.
26-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 USB Flash Drives
● Using WindO/I-NV3 to read and write to a USB flash drive inserted in the computer
This procedure shows how to read and write from a USB flash drive inserted in the computer's USB port.
Computer
USB flash drive
To USB port
Communication settings
To read and write to the USB flash drive inserted in the computer, the External Memory must be selected under the
Communication with. Configure the communication settings as follows before downloading or uploading.
1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Comm. Setup.
The Communication Settings dialog box appears.
2 Under Communicate with, select External Memory, and then click OK.
26
External Memory Devices
Downloading
This procedure shows how to download the project data to the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive.
1 Open the project data to download using WindO/I-NV3.
2 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click the icon above Download.
The Download dialog box appears.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-7
1 USB Flash Drives
3 Click Download.
The Select Drive dialog box appears.
4 Select the external memory drive, and then click OK.
A confirmation message appears.
■ Drive
Specify the drive assigned as the external memory drive.
■ Network
The Network Drive Assignment dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to specify a drive on the network.
■ External Memory Folder
Specify the destination folder for downloading project data.
Click to display the Project Settings dialog box. This procedure allows you to specify the External Memory Folder
on the external memory where the download will be stored.
5 Click Yes.
The Download dialog box appears and the file download begins.
When the download is complete, a completion message appears.
26-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 USB Flash Drives
6 Click OK.
7 Click Close on the Download dialog box.
Uploading
This procedure shows how to upload the project data from the External Memory Folder on the USB flash drive 26
inserted in the computer, to the computer.
External Memory Devices
1 On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Upload.
The Select External Memory Folder dialog box appears.
2 Select the external memory drive, and then click OK.
The Upload dialog box appears.
■ External Memory Folder
Displays the folder specified in the Project tree described next.
■ Project
Specify the destination folder for uploading the project data.
■ Drive
Specify the drive assigned as the external memory drive.
■ Network
The Network Drive Assignment dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to specify a drive on the network.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-9
1 USB Flash Drives
3 Click Upload.
The Upload dialog box appears and the file upload begins.
When the upload is complete, a completion message appears.
4 Click OK.
5 Click Close on the Upload dialog box.
A confirmation message appears indicating the project will be opened.
6 Click OK.
The uploaded project opens.
26-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 USB Flash Drives
● Manipulating files using the file management functions provided with the OS
It is possible to use Explorer or any other program provided with the Windows OS to replace the recipe data that
Touch uses.
Insert the USB flash drive into the computer and save the new file(s) using the same name as the existing files in
each folder under the External Memory Folder.
● External memory writing timing
If the write timing setting for Alarm Log, Data Log, and Operation Log data is set to Real Time to USB flash drive,
the data is stored in the file output buffer once.
The writing timing from the file output buffer to the USB flash drive is as follows.
• Within three minutes of an output event to the USB flash drive.
• When the HMI Special Internal Relay LSM18 changes to 1.
• When switching to the Top Page in the System Mode.
• When downloading/uploading project data.
• When the Access Pause button is pressed.
In the following events, WindO/I-NV3 writes the data in the file output buffer to the USB flash drive once,
and then moves on to the next process. This creates a processing delay which can cause WindO/I-NV3 to
raise a communication error when downloading or uploading a project file. If a communication error
occurs, try downloading or uploading the project file again.
• When data exists in the file output buffer
• When attempting to switch to the Top Page in the System Mode while reading/writing to the USB flash
drive.
• When downloading or uploading project data.
26
External Memory Devices
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-11
1 USB Flash Drives
1.5 Setting the External Memory Folder
The External Memory Folder on the external memory can be renamed using WindO/I-NV3.
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.
2 On the External Memory tab, enter the desired name in the External Memory Folder text box.
Use only alphabetic characters (A to Z) and numbers (0 to 9) and the maximum number is 8 characters.
3 Click OK.
• It is not possible to change folder names and file names other than the External Memory Folder.
• The External Memory Folder is named “HGDATA01” if project data has never been downloaded to the
Touch.
26-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 USB Flash Drives
1.6 Deleting Files on the USB Flash Drive
When the value of device that uses as a condition for deleting a file changes from 0 to 1, the file is deleted from the
External Memory Folder of the USB flash drive inserted in the Touch.
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.
2 On the External Memory tab, select the Remove Files check box.
3 Specify the range of files to delete by checking the appropriate items.
26
External Memory Devices
■ All Alarm Log files
Deletes all files in the ALARMLOG folder.
■ All Data Log files
Deletes all files in the DATALOG folder.
■ All Operation Log files
Deletes all files in the OPERATIONLOG folder.
■ Trigger Device
Specifies the bit device or the bit of a word device to serve as condition for deleting files.
Click to display the Device Address Settings dialog box. For the device address configuration procedure, refer to
Chapter 2 “5.1 Device Address Settings” on page 2-62.
4 Click OK.
The online function in WindO/I-NV3 can also be used to delete files on the USB flash drive.
For details, refer to Chapter 23 “4 Clear” on page 23-22.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-13
1 USB Flash Drives
1.7 Formatting the USB Flash Drive
Always format the USB flash drive before using it.
The USB flash drive inserted in the Touch can be formatted with the WindO/I-NV3 online function.
1 On the Online tab, in the Touch group, click Format.
A confirmation message appears warning that existing data will be deleted.
In Communication Settings, Communicate with must be set to Touch in advance, and Port must be
set to USB in advance. For details on how to configure these settings, refer to “Communication settings” on
page 26-3.
If security is enabled for the project saved on the external memory, the Password Screen is displayed.
Select the user name and enter the password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the
Security Function” on page 21-1.
2 Click Yes.
The External Memory Maintenance dialog box appears and formatting begins.
When the external memory has been formatted, the display returns to the External Memory Maintenance dialog box.
3 Click Close.
26-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 USB Flash Drives
1.8 USB Popup Screen Function
The USB Popup Screen function displays a specific screen by simply inserting a USB flash drive in the Touch.
This provides an easy way to display a message when the operator inserts a USB flash drive.
● When a USB flash drive is inserted a popup window is automatically displayed.
Configuration Procedure
1 Create the popup window to be displayed when USB flash drive 1 is inserted.
On the Home tab, in the Screens group, click the arrow under New and then click Popup Screen.
The Screen Properties dialog box is displayed.
2 Change the settings on each tab as necessary, and then click OK.
3 Arrange the object on the editing screen as required.
4 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.
26
External Memory Devices
5 On the Autorun tab, select the Open Popup Screen when USB Flash Drive is inserted check box.
6 Specify the Screen No. of the Popup Screen to display, and the Coordinates, then click OK.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.9 Autorun Tab” on page 3-39.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-15
1 USB Flash Drives
Operating Procedure
Insert the USB flash drive into the Touch.
USB flash drive Touch
The Popup Screen appears.
Touch
Popup Screen USB flash drive was inserted.
If security is enabled for the Popup Screen that is displayed by the USB Popup Screen function, the
Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name and enter the password.
For details, refer to “2.4 USB Autorun Function Security” on page 26-26.
When the USB Popup Screen function is enabled, if the USB flash drive contains a definition file (hgauto.ini)
for use with the USB Autorun function, both functions will appear on the menu screen.
26-16 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 USB Flash Drives
1.9 Precautions
• USB flash drives have a limitation on the number of times they can be written to.
Regularly backup data on the USB flash drive.
• Never turn the power off or remove the USB flash drive while reading/writing to it. Otherwise, the data on the USB
flash drive may be destroyed. Should this occur, reformat the USB flash drive.
• Multiple USB flash drives cannot be used at the same time.
• Before turning off the power to the Touch or before removing the USB flash drive, set HMI Special Internal Relay
LSM18 to 1 and check that HMI Special Internal Relay LSM19 is 0.
• The message Saving USB flash drive appears while reading or until writing stops.
To resume reading/writing to the USB flash drive, re-insert it.
• If an unusable USB flash drive is inserted, the error message USB flash drive not available appears.
• Do not alter project files (ZNV format). Altered files cannot be used with Touch.
• Do not connect the USB flash drive to the Touch through a USB hub.
26
External Memory Devices
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-17
2 USB Autorun Function
2 USB Autorun Function
2.1 Overview of the USB Autorun Function
The USB Autorun function automatically displays a menu screen from which the user can execute predefined
commands when a USB flash drive is inserted into the Touch.
USB Autorun Function Menu Screen
Touch
USB flash drive
Confirmation
Change Program
Copy Program
USB Autorun Run All Cancel
definition file
Press the button
(hgauto.ini)
• This allows operators to change project files without using a computer.
• These defined processes are called commands, and the file that contains the details of the command and
menu screen is called the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini).
• A USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) must be stored on the USB flash drive to use the USB Autorun
function.
The commands that can be executed with the USB Autorun function are as follows.
● Downloading a project file
Downloads a project file (ZNV format) saved on a USB flash drive to the Touch.
USB Autorun
definition file
(hgauto.ini)
Computer Touch
Save USB flash drive
Download
Save
Project file
Project file (ZNV format)
(ZNV format)
When the download is complete, the Touch will reset and start running from the beginning of the project that was
just downloaded.
Refer to Chapter 25 “1 Project Transfer Function” on page 25-1 for important notes and limitations.
● Uploading a project file
Uploads the project file (ZNV format) used to operate the Touch and saves it to a USB flash drive.
Computer Touch
USB flash drive
Save Upload
USB Autorun Project file
definition file (ZNV format)
(hgauto.ini)
When the upload is complete, the Touch will reset and start over at the beginning of the project.
Refer to Chapter 25 “1 Project Transfer Function” on page 25-1 for important notes and limitations.
26-18 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 USB Autorun Function
2.2 USB Autorun Function Configuration Procedure
● Executing commands using the USB Autorun function
Configuration Procedure
1 On the Configuration tab, in the System Setup group, click Project.
The Project Settings dialog box appears.
2 On the Autorun tab, select the Enable USB Autorun check box, and then click OK.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “3.9 Autorun Tab” on page 3-39.
26
External Memory Devices
• When enabling the USB Autorun function using the Touch, on the Top Page in the System Mode, press
Main Menu, Initial Setting, System Op., and then press Autorun.
• If the USB Autorun function of the Touch is not enabled, the menu screen will not be displayed, even if a
USB flash drive is inserted into the Touch.
• Once the USB Autorun function of the Touch is enabled, the function will remain enabled until either a
project file with the Enable USB Autorun check box unchecked is downloaded, or the function is
disabled via the System Mode.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-19
2 USB Autorun Function
3 Create a USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) and save it on the USB flash drive.
For details, refer to “2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File” on page 26-22.
Computer
USB flash drive
Save
USB Autorun
definition file
(hgauto.ini)
4 Prepare the necessary files and store them on the USB flash drive.
The necessary files are as follows.
• To download a project file
Create a project file (ZNV format).
For details, refer to Chapter 25 “1.3 Converting Project Data for Transfer” on page 25-2.
Computer
USB flash drive
Save
Project file
(ZNV format)
Operating Procedure
1 Insert the USB flash drive into the Touch.
The menu screen for the USB Autorun function appears.
USB flash drive Touch
If the menu screen does not appear, follow these troubleshooting tips. Correct the problem and re-insert
the USB flash drive.
Cause: USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) does not exist on the USB flash drive.
Solution: Create a USB Autorun definition file and save it on the USB flash drive. For details, refer to
“2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File” on page 26-22.
Cause: The USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) contains an error.
Solution: For details, refer to “2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File” on page 26-22.
Cause: The USB Autorun function is disabled in the Touch settings.
Solution: Enable the USB Autorun function by referring to steps 1 and 2 on page 26-19.
26-20 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 USB Autorun Function
2 Press the command to execute.
The command executes.
Confirmation
Change Program
Copy Program
Run All Cancel
Press the button.
Touching Run All causes all commands defined in the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) to execute
one by one.
• If security is enabled in the Touch project, the Password Screen is displayed. Select the user name and
enter the password.
For details, refer to “2.4 USB Autorun Function Security” on page 26-26.
• Do not remove the USB flash drive while command is executing.
3 When the command finishes executing, a screen appears indicating the execution result.
Press Ack to close the execution result screen and display the menu screen. 26
Result
External Memory Devices
The following function completed
Function Change Program
Ack
If a command executes with a button (except the Run All), the menu screen is displayed after touching
Ack on the execution result screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-21
2 USB Autorun Function
2.3 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File
The menu screen that appears when a USB flash drive inserted in the Touch is defined in the USB Autorun definition
file.
The USB Autorun definition file is created using the following methods.
• Created with the USB Autorun definition file creation tool
Refer to USB Autorun Definition File Creation Tool manual.
• Created with the text editor
Refer to “Created using the text editor” on page 26-22.
● Created using the text editor
You create this file using Notepad or any commercially available text editor. Fill in the items in each section and save
the file with the name “hgauto.ini”.
The USB Autorun definition file has these three sections.
Enter the items and definitions for each section.
[AUTORUN]
[AUTORUN] section (required) item = 2
Specify the number of command items, enable/ button_command = Enable
disable the buttons, and the display language to use. button_runall = Enable
language = English
[COMMAND_1]
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD
[COMMAND] section (required)
src_path = "B:\NV3DATA\FT_PROJECT.ZNV"
Specify the command to execute and its parameters.
title = "Change Program"
Create buttons to execute the number of commands
[COMMAND_2]
specified in the [AUTORUN]: section from
command = PRO_UPLOAD
[COMMAND_1] to [COMMAND_5], in that order.
dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Project"
title = "Copy Program"
[COMMENT] section
[COMMENT]
Enter text to display, as necessary, at the bottom of
comment = "Press the button."
the menu screen.
Confirmation
[COMMAND_1] Change Program
execution button
[COMMAND_2] Copy Program
execution button
RunAll Cancel Button to close
the menu screen
Displays text entered Press the button.
in [COMMENT]
Execution button for all commands
26-22 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 USB Autorun Function
[AUTORUN] section
■ item (required)
Specify the number of commands used from 1 to 5. The USB Autorun function will fail to execute if a value other than
1 to 5 is specified.
■ button_command
Specify whether to enable or disable the execution buttons for [COMMAND_1] to [COMMAND_5].
Enable: Enables the button.
Disable: Disables the button.
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the Touch assumes “Enable”.
■ button_runall
Specify whether to enable or disable the execution buttons for Run All.
Enable: Enables the button.
Disable: Disables the button.
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the Touch assumes “Enable”.
■ language
Specify the language to use for the button labels and messages.
Japanese: Shift-JIS
European: English 26
Chinese: GB2312
External Memory Devices
Taiwanese: BIG5
Korean
Central European
Baltic
Cyrillic
If this item is left blank or contains an illegal value, the Touch assumes “Japanese”.
[COMMAND] section
■ command (required)
Specify the command to execute.
PRO_DOWNLOAD: Download a project file.
PRO_UPLOAD: Upload a project file.
The items required differ for each command except for the “title” item.
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD
■ src_path (required)
Specify the path (250 or less characters) where the project file is to be downloaded.
Use “B:\” for a USB flash drive.
command = PRO_UPLOAD
■ dst_path (required)
Specify the path to the folder (250 or less characters) where the uploaded project file will be saved.
Use “B:\” for a USB flash drive.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-23
2 USB Autorun Function
Common items
■ title
Enter a title for the button label using 1 line of 14 characters or less.
• When using a semicolon (;), backslash (\), or double quotations ("), a backslash (\) as an escape character will be
automatically inserted before those characters and will thus be calculated as 2 single-byte characters.
[COMMENT] section
■ comment
Enter a comment using 1 line of 29 characters or less.
• When using a semicolon (;), backslash (\), or double quotations ("), an escape character (\) will be automatically
inserted before those characters and will thus be calculated as 2 single-byte characters.
Notes on comments
To add comments to the USB Autorun definition file, use a semicolon (;).
All text after the semicolon (;) and up to the line feed will be treated as a non-executable comments.
Restrictions
• The maximum number of characters per line is 512 single-byte characters including line feed codes.
All the text on the line will be ignored if there are more than 512 single-byte characters on the line.
• Each item must be described as a single line. If a line feed occurs before the end of the description, all characters
after the line feed are ignored.
• The maximum size of the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) is 512 KB. The file cannot be used if it exceeds
this limit.
• Only line feed codes of the format generally supported by Windows (CR+LF) are supported. If any other format is
used, the USB Autorun definition file (hgauto.ini) will fail to run properly.
Sample definition file and explanation
Sample definition
; sample hgauto.ini
[AUTORUN]
item = 5 ; number of items
(1) button_command = Enable ; enable individual command buttons
button_runall = Enable : enable the "Run All" button.
language =English ; use English
[COMMAND_1]
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD ; download the project file
(2)
src_path = "B:\FT_DEMO_1.ZNV" ; source path
title = "Change Program" ; button label
[COMMAND_2]
command = PRO_UPLOAD ; upload a project file
(3)
dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Project" ; destination path
title = "Copy Program" ; button label
[COMMENT]
(4)
comment = "Press the button." ; Message shown at bottom of screen.
26-24 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 USB Autorun Function
Explanation
(1)This definition file displays two command execution buttons on the menu screen displayed by the USB Autorun
function. It also enables the Run All button. All button labels and messages are displayed in English.
Defines the number of commands to use and details about the menu
[AUTORUN]
screen.
item = 2 Specifies that two commands will be used.
Enables execution buttons for each command from [COMMAND_1]
button_command = Enable
to [COMMAND_2].
button_runall = Enable Enables the Run All button.
language = English Displays all button labels and messages in English.
(2)Downloading a project file from a USB flash drive to the Touch.
Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_1].
[COMMAND_1]
This is the first command that executes when Run All is touched.
command = PRO_DOWNLOAD Executes "Download a project file".
Downloads the project file “FT_DEMO_1.ZNV” saved on the USB
src_path = "B:\FT_DEMO_1.ZNV"
flash drive (B:) to the Touch.
title = "Change Program" Displays the text “Change Program” as the button label.
(3)Uploading a project to a USB flash drive.
[COMMAND_2]
Defines the command assigned to execution button [COMMAND_2]. 26
This is the fourth command that executes when Run All is touched.
External Memory Devices
command = PRO_UPLOAD Executes "Upload a project file".
Uploads the project file used to operate the Touch and saves it to
dst_path = "B:\Uploaded_Project"
the Uploaded_Project folder on the USB flash drive (B:).
title = "Copy Program" Displays the text “Copy Program” as the button label.
(4)Displays messages below the menu screen for the USB Autorun function.
Defines the number of commands to use and details about the
[COMMENT]
menu screen.
comment = "Press the button." Displays the text “Press the button.” below the menu screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 26-25
2 USB Autorun Function
2.4 USB Autorun Function Security
If security has been enabled for the Touch project, Touch displays the Password Screen when the USB Autorun
function runs.
Password
User1
******** ENT
A B C D E F G H I J KLM
N O P Q R S T UVWXYZ
0 123 4 56 7 8 9
BS CLR OK
Select the user name from the security group that has command execution permissions, enter the password, and
touch ENT.
● Execution privileges by security groups
With the Touch, a password-authenticated user account with the security group "Administrator" is necessary.
Security Group
Command
Administrator Operator Reader
Downloading a project file YES NO NO
Uploading a project file YES NO NO
If you press (Close) instead of entering a password, no commands are executed and the menu screen
closes. To re-execute the USB Autorun function, insert the USB flash drive again.
26-26 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 27 Internal Devices
This chapter describes internal devices available for the SmartAXIS.
The Touch includes an internal HMI device to control HMI functions, and control device for control functions.
1 Bit Devices
1.1 HMI Device Addresses
Internal Device Name Symbol R/W Address Range Base
HMI Internal Relay LM R/W 0 to 2,047 10
HMI Keep Relay LK R/W Variable 10
HMI Temporary Relay LBM R/W 0 to 127 10
HMI Special Internal Relay LSM R/W 0 to 63 10
HMI Timer Relay LTC R 0 to 31 10
R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.
■ HMI Internal Relay (LM)
This is a bit-unit device used for the HMI function. It can store 2,048 addresses.
■ HMI Keep Relay (LK)
This is a bit-unit device that holds the values of device used for the HMI function. The value of this device can be set
to 0 by clearing the project data download option or online function, or it becomes zero if the backup battery is
drained. The address range can be varied between 1,024 and 8,192. For details, refer to Chapter 16 “Minimum and
27
Maximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses” on page 16-2.
Internal Devices
■ HMI Temporary Relay (LBM)
This is a bit-unit device for temporarily storing values for the HMI function. The value of this device switches between
screens and text groups and user accounts, and it becomes 0 if the screen is reset. It can store 128 addresses.
■ HMI Special Internal Relay (LSM)
Special functions are assigned to each bit by the bit-unit device. It can store 64 addresses.
Address Function/Part
LSM0 Normally set to 1.
1 only on the second scan when Base Screen is switched.
LSM1
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting the display screen.
1 only on the first scan when Base Screen is switched.
LSM2
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting the display screen.
0 only on the first scan when Base Screen is switched.
LSM3
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting the display screen.
LSM4 Alternates between 0 and 1 on each scan of the Touch.
LSM5 1 only on the first scan when Popup Screen is opened.
LSM6 1 while touch panel is pressed.
Alternates between 0 and 1 each time data is read (read scan) from all the external devices being
LSM7
used.
LSM8 After powering ON value is 1 until the initially displayed screen switches to another screen.
When value changes from 0 to 1, the backup data stored in flash memory is restored.
LSM9
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written.
When value changes from 0 to 1, the data of Keep Relay 0 to 1,023 and Keep Register 0 to 1,023, and
LSM10 the current backlight settings are transferred to flash memory.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written.
Changes from 0 to 1 when the Base Screen is switched, after the values of all the external devices
LSM11 being used are read, and remains 1 until there is a switch to another screen.
It also operates when switching text group or user account, or resetting the display screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 27-1
1 Bit Devices
Address Function/Part
LSM12 1 only on the first scan when Popup Screen is closed.
Value becomes 0 when Popup Screen is opened, and then changes from 0 to 1 after all the values of
LSM13
all the external devices being used by that Popup Screen are read.
When the indirect value of an indirect device positioned on the Base Screen changes, value becomes
LSM14
1, and reading of the indirect device starts. When reading is complete value becomes 0.
When the indirect value of an indirect device positioned on a Popup Screen changes, value becomes 1,
LSM15
and reading of the indirect device starts. When reading is complete value becomes 0.
LSM16 to 17 Reserved
When value changes from 0 to 1, access to USB flash drive is stopped. The access state can be
LSM18 checked with the value of LSM19.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written.
Value is 1 while there is access to USB flash drive. If value is 0 the USB flash drive can be safely
LSM19
ejected.
LSM20 to 21 Reserved
This is the Operation Log function. When data in excess of the amount that can be recorded in one
LSM22 operation occurs, the value becomes 1.
When it becomes 1 value does not become 0 until the Touch is reset or 0 is written.
LSM23 to 24 Reserved
LSM25 Value is 1 while data is being written to USB flash drive.
LSM26 to 47 Reserved
LSM48 200 millisecond clock (alternates between 0 and 1 every 100 milliseconds)
LSM49 1 second clock (alternates between 0 and 1 every 500 milliseconds)
LSM50 to 63 Reserved
• Since the HMI Special Internal Relay can be written to, even if a write is attempted, the contents will not
change.
• Transfer of the LSM10 Keep Relay and Keep Register to the flash memory can take an excess of one second.
Writing to the flash memory can be repeated a maximum of 100,000 times. Keep writing to the flash memory
to a minimum. LSM10 cannot be used while the ladder program is running. LSM10 does not work while the
ladder program is running.
• When there is no remaining battery power, data transferred with LSM10 will be restored once the power to
the Touch has been turned on.
The period of processing for all of the parts set on the displayed screen is called a scan of the Touch. It is
not related to the period of reading the value of external devices.
27-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Bit Devices
A timing chart for the HMI Special Internal Relay controlled by operation of the Touch is shown below.
Power on Base Screen switch
1
LSM0
0
1
LSM1
0
1
LSM2
0
1
LSM3
0
1
LSM4
0
1
LSM8
0
Processing 1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan 4th scan 1st scan 2nd scan 3rd scan
Popup Screen open Popup Screen close
1
LSM5
0
1
LSM12
0
■ HMI Timer Relay (LTC)
The HMI Timer is a bit-unit device that can be changed to 1 in value of device switched by the Timer from Parts. It
can store 32 addresses.
27
Internal Devices
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 27-3
1 Bit Devices
1.2 Control Device Addresses
Internal Device Name Symbol R/W Address Range Base
Input I R 0 to 7 8
Output Q R/W 0 to 3 8
Timer Bit T R 000 to 199 10
Counter Bit C R 000 to 199 10
Shift Register R R/W 0 to 127 10
Internal Relay M R/W 0 to 1277 10*1
Special Internal Relay M R/W 8000 to 8177 10*1
R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.
■ Input (I)
Inputs (I) are relays to receive input signals through the input terminals.
■ Output (Q)
Outputs (Q) are relays to send the processed results to the output terminals.
■ Timer (T)
Control device timers are bit unit devices that become 1 when the time is up.
■ Counter (C)
Control device counters are bit unit devices that become 1 when the count is up.
■ Shift registers (R)
Shift registers (R) are registers to shift the data bits according to pulse inputs.
■ Internal Relay (M)
Internal relays (M) are relays used in the Touch and cannot be outputted to the output terminals.
• Control devices must have a "#" before the device type only when the WindO/I-NV3 is used.
In addition, on the Device Monitor a "#" is displayed before the device type.
Example: When setting D100
WindO/I-NV3: #D100
WindLDR: D100
• Values can only be written from the HMI function to outputs (Q) while the ladder program is running.
• Do not simultaneously write values to the same control device using the HMI function and the control function.
*1 The last digit of the device address is 0 to 7 in octal notation.
27-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Bit Devices
■ Special Internal Relay (M)
Special internal relays (M) are bit devices used internally on the Touch. Each bit has been assigned a special function.
Although the device code for internal relays (M0000 to M1277) and special internal relays (M8000 to M8177)
is the same ("M"), the device characteristics are different. Special functions are assigned to each bit of the
special internal relay.
Do not change the status of reserved special internal relays, otherwise the Touch may not operate
correctly.
Device CPU Power Read/
Description
Address Stopped OFF Write
Start Control
M8000 controls the state of the ladder program (RUN/STOP). When
M8000 is turned on, the ladder program is executed, and when turned
off, the ladder program stops. Stop input and reset input have
precedence over M8000 (start control).
M8000 maintains its status when the SmartAXIS is powered down. When
M8000 the data to be maintained during power failure is broken after the Maintained Maintained Write
SmartAXIS has been off for a period longer than the battery backup
duration, the Touch restarts ladder program operation as selected in
Configuration, Run/Stop Control, Run/Stop Selection at
Memory Backup Error.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.4 Run/Stop Selection at Memory
Backup Error” on page 3-48.
1-sec Clock Reset
M8001 Cleared Cleared Write
While M8001 is on, M8121 (1-sec clock) is turned off.
All Outputs OFF
When M8002 is turned on, all outputs go off until M8002 is turned off.
M8002 Cleared Cleared Write
Self-maintained circuits using outputs also go off and are not restored
when M8002 is turned off.
Carry (Cy) and Borrow (Bw)
M8003
When a carry or borrow results from executing an addition or
subtraction instruction, M8003 turns on. M8003 is also used for the bit Cleared Cleared Read
27
shift and rotate instructions. For the causes of carry (CY) and borrow
Internal Devices
(BW), see "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
Ladder Program Execution Error
When an error occurs while executing a ladder program, M8004 turns
M8004 on. Cleared Cleared Read
For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Ladder Program Execution Error” on
page 30-5.
M8005 to 8012 Reserved ― ― ―
Calendar/Clock Data Write/Adjust Error Flag
When an error occurs while calendar/clock data is written or clock data
M8013 Operating Cleared Read
is adjusted, M8013 turns on. If calendar/clock data is written or clock
data is adjusted successfully, M8013 turns off.
Calendar/Clock Data Read Error Flag
When an error occurs while calendar/clock data is read from the internal
M8014 Operating Cleared Read
clock to the special data registers (D8008 to D8014), M8014 turns on. If
calendar/clock data is read successfully, M8014 turns off.
M8015 Reserved ― ― ―
Calendar Data Write Flag
M8016 When M8016 is turned on, data in data registers D8015 through D8018 Operating Cleared Write
(calendar new data) are set to the internal clock.
Clock Data Write Flag
M8017 When M8017 is turned on, data in data registers D8019 through D8021 Operating Cleared Write
(clock new data) are set to the internal clock.
Calendar/Clock Data Write Flag
M8020 When M8020 is turned on, data in data registers D8015 through D8021 Operating Cleared Write
(calendar/clock new data) are set to the internal clock.
Clock Data Adjust Flag
When M8021 is turned on, the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds.
If seconds are between 0 and 29 for current time, adjustment for
M8021 Operating Cleared Write
seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same. If seconds are
between 30 and 59 for current time, adjustment for seconds will be set
to 0 and minutes are incremented by 1.
M8022, 8023 Reserved ― ― ―
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 27-5
1 Bit Devices
Device CPU Power Read/
Description
Address Stopped OFF Write
BMOV/WSFT Executing Flag
While the BMOV or WSFT is executed, M8024 turns on. When completed,
M8024 Maintained Maintained Read
M8024 turns off. If the Touch is powered down while executing BMOV or
WSFT, M8024 remains on when the Touch is powered up again.
Maintain Outputs While Ladder Program Operation Stopped
Outputs are normally turned off when the ladder program operation is
stopped. M8025 is used to maintain the output statuses when the ladder
M8025 Maintained Cleared Write
program operation is stopped. When the ladder program operation is stopped
with M8025 turned on, the output ON/OFF statuses are maintained. When the
ladder program operation restarts, M8025 is turned off automatically.
M8026, 8027 Reserved ― ― ―
Read/
M8030 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared
Write
Read/
M8031 Gate Input Maintained Cleared
Write
Special Internal Relays for High-Speed Counter Read/
M8032 Reset Input Maintained Cleared
(Group 1/I0) Write
M8033 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High-Speed Reset Status Maintained Cleared Read
Counter” on page 3-52.
M8034 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read
M8035 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read
M8036 Underflow Maintained Cleared Read
M8037 Count Direction Maintained Cleared Read
Read/
M8040 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared
Write
Special Internal Relays for High-Speed Counter Read/
M8041 Gate Input Maintained Cleared
(Group 2/I2) Write
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High-Speed Read/
M8042 Reset Input Maintained Cleared
Counter” on page 3-52. Write
M8043 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read
M8044 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read
M8045 to
8047, 8050 Reserved ― ― ―
to 8054
Read/
M8055 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared
Write
Special Internal Relays for High-Speed Counter Read/
M8056 Gate Input Maintained Cleared
(Group 3/I3) Write
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High-Speed Read/
M8057 Reset Input Maintained Cleared
Counter” on page 3-52. Write
M8060 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read
M8061 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read
M8062 to
Reserved ― ― ―
8067, 8070
M8071 Interrupt Input I2 Status Turns on when the corresponding Cleared Cleared Read
M8072 Interrupt Input I3 Status user interrupt is allowed. When Cleared Cleared Read
interrupt inputs are disabled, these
M8073 Interrupt Input I4 Status internal relays are turned off. Cleared Cleared Read
M8074 Interrupt Input I5 Status (ON: Allowed, OFF: Prohibited) Cleared Cleared Read
M8075 to
Reserved ― ― ―
8077, 8080
M8081 Interrupt Input I2 Edge Cleared Cleared Read
This flag indicates whether the
M8082 Interrupt Input I3 Edge interrupt input is triggered with a Cleared Cleared Read
M8083 Interrupt Input I4 Edge rising edge or falling edge. Cleared Cleared Read
(ON: Rising, OFF: Falling)
M8084 Interrupt Input I5 Edge Cleared Cleared Read
M8085 to
Reserved ― ― ―
8087, 8090
M8091 Catch Input ON/OFF Status Group 2/I2 Maintained Cleared Read
M8092 When a rising or falling input edge is detected Group 3/I3 Maintained Cleared Read
during a scan, the input statuses of catch inputs
M8093 Group 1/I0 through Group 6/I7 at the moment Group 4/I4 Maintained Cleared Read
are set to M8090 through M8095, respectively,
M8094 without regard to the scan status. Only one edge Group 5/I6 Maintained Cleared Read
is detected in one scan.
27-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Bit Devices
Device CPU Power Read/
Description
Address Stopped OFF Write
M8095 to
8107, 8110 Reserved ― ― ―
to 8117
Initialize Pulse
When the ladder program starts running, M8120 turns on for a period of one scan.
1 scan time
M8120 Cleared Cleared Read
M8120
Start
1-sec Clock
While M8001 (1-sec clock reset) is off, M8121 generates clock pulses in one second
increments, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (500 milliseconds on and 500 milliseconds off).
M8121 500msec 500msec Operating Cleared Read
M8121
1sec
100-msec Clock
M8122 always generates clock pulses in 100 milliseconds increments, whether M8001
is on or off, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (50 milliseconds on and 50 milliseconds off).
M8122 50msec 50msec Operating Cleared Read
M8122
100msec
10-msec Clock
M8123 always generates clock pulses in 10 milliseconds increments, whether M8001
is on or off, with a duty ratio of 1:1 (5 milliseconds on and 5 milliseconds off).
M8123 5msec 5msec Operating Cleared Read
M8123
M8124 Reserved
10msec
― ― ― 27
In-operation Output
M8125 Cleared Cleared Read
Internal Devices
M8125 remains on while the ladder program is running.
M8126 to 8143 Reserved ― ― ―
Timer Interrupt Status
M8144 When timer interrupt is enabled, M8144 is turned on. When disabled, Cleared Cleared Read
M8144 is turned off.
M8145 to 8147 Reserved ― ― ―
Comparison Result Greater Than
Each bit turns ON in accordance with the results of the CMP=(Compare(=))
command and ICMP>=(interval comparison) command.
For CMP=(Compare(=)) command: M8150 = S1>S2, M8151 = S1=S2,
M8150 to M8152 = S1<S2
Maintained Cleared Read
8152 For ICMP>=(interval comparison) command: M8150=S2>S1,
M8151=S3>S2, M8152=S1>S2>S3
For details about comparison results of the CMP=(Compare(=)) and
ICMP>=(interval comparison) commands, refer to "Ladder Editing" in
the "SmartAXIS Ladder Programming Manual".
M8153 to 8165 Reserved ― ― ―
Read/
M8166 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared
Write
Special Internal Relays for High-Speed Counter Read/
M8167 Gate Input Maintained Cleared
(Group 4/I4) Write
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High-Speed Read/
M8170 Reset Input Maintained Cleared
Counter” on page 3-52. Write
M8171 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read
M8172 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read
Read/
M8173 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared
Write
Special Internal Relays for High-Speed Counter Read/
M8174 Gate Input Maintained Cleared
(Group 5/I5) Write
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High-Speed Read/
M8175 Reset Input Maintained Cleared
Counter” on page 3-52. Write
M8176 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read
M8177 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 27-7
2 Word Devices
2 Word Devices
2.1 HMI Device Addresses
Internal Device Name Symbol R/W Address Range Base
HMI Data Register LDR R/W 0 to 8191 10
HMI Keep Register LKR R/W Variable 10
HMI Temporary Register LBR R/W 0 to 127 10
HMI Timer (Current) LTD R 0 to 31 10
HMI Special Data Register LSD R/W 0 to 255 10
R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.
■ HMI Data Register (LDR)
8,192 points are available.
■ HMI Keep Register (LKR)
The value in these registers is retained during power OFF.
The maximum number of HMI Keep Register depends upon the number set in WindO/I-NV3. For details, refer to
Chapter 16 “Minimum and Maximum Amount of Data Storage and Number of Addresses” on page 16-2.
■ HMI Temporary Register (LBR)
This register value will be cleared to 0 when a text group or user account is changed, when a screen is reset or the
screen is changed. 128 points are available.
■ HMI Timer (Current value) (LTD)
HMI Timer stores the current value of Timer from the parts. 32 points are available.
■ HMI Special Data Register (LSD)
The HMI Special Data Registers (256 points) perform the following special operations.
Address Function/Part
LSD0 to 3 Reserved
LSD4 Scan time Maximum value of the Touch (msec)
LSD5 Screen switch response time (msec)
LSD6 Read scan communication time (msec)
LSD7 Scan counter (incremented at each scan of the Touch)
LSD8 1 second counter (incremented each second)
LSD9 10 millisecond counter (increments every 10 msec)
LSD10 100 millisecond counter (incremented every 100 msec)
LSD11 200 millisecond counter (incremented every 200 msec)
LSD12 500 millisecond counter (incremented every 500 msec)
LSD13 Stores the current Year data from the Touch. “Year” (4 BCD digits)
LSD14 Stores current time data from Touch. “Month” (2 BCD digits)
LSD15 Stores current time data from Touch. “Day” (2 BCD digits)
LSD16 Stores current time data from Touch. “Hour” (2 BCD digits)
LSD17 Stores current time data from Touch. “Minute” (2 BCD digits)
LSD18 Stores current time data from Touch. “Second” (2 BCD digits)
LSD19 Stores current time data from Touch. “Day-of-week” (1 BCD digit)
When a value of 1 is written into this device address, the internal clock in Touch is updated
LSD20
according to the data stored in LSD21 to 26. It automatically resets to 0 after the update.
LSD21 Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Year". (2 BCD digits)
LSD22 Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Month". (2 BCD digits)
27-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Word Devices
Address Function/Part
LSD23 Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Day". (2 BCD digits)
LSD24 Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Hour". (2 BCD digits)
LSD25 Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Minute". (2 BCD digits)
LSD26 Stores preset value in the Touch internal clock "Second". (2 BCD digits)
LSD27 Current value of the scan time for Touch (msec)
LSD28 Minimum value of the scan time for Touch (msec)
LSD29, 30 Reserved
LSD31 Stores the currently displayed screen number.
Set a value (in reference to a Base Screen number you want to switch to) and it will
LSD32 automatically switch to a specified Base Screen number.
Note, after switching to a Base Screen, the value stored automatically resets to 0.
USB flash drive error status
0: Normal
LSD33 1: USB flash drive not inserted/incompatible memory
2: Formatting error
3: Access error/insufficient free space/read-write failure
LSD34 USB flash drive available capacity lower word (kB)
LSD35 USB flash drive available capacity upper word (kB)
LSD36 USB flash drive full capacity lower word (kB)
LSD37 USB flash drive full capacity upper word (kB)
LSD38 Ladder program processing time (msec)
LSD39 to 48 Reserved
LSD49 O/I Link Slave station number
The sequence value of the message number (or channel number if the alarm function is
LSD50
being used) selected by the cursor in the Alarm List Display is stored.
A value of between 1 and 1024 (allocated using ((project No. - 1) x 16 + bit position + 1)) is
27
stored for the number.
Internal Devices
LSD51 Color or Monochrome LCD models: Brightness Adjustment 0 to 31
LSD52 The ID number of the script for which the error occurred
LSD53 Script error status
LSD54 Reserved
LSD55 Monochrome LCD models: Contrast Adjustment 0 to 31
The number of lines of data from the start line to the line currently selected with the cursor
LSD56
displayed in the Alarm List Display/Alarm Log Display is stored.
The number of log data pieces stored in the Data Storage Area by the Alarm Log function is
LSD57
stored. (0 to 1,024)
USB flash drive download status
During download of a file to USB flash drive with WindO/I-NV3 the following bits are ON.
LSD58 When downloading is complete, the bit turns OFF.
Bit 2: Recipe data
Bit 4: Project data
LSD59 to 66 Reserved
Stores the connection status for TCP clients and the TCP server for the User Communication
set to the Ethernet interface.
LSD67 Bit 0: User Communication 1
Bit 1: User Communication 2
Bit 2: User Communication 3
When the value changes from 0 to 1, the connections for the TCP clients and the TCP server
for the User Communication set to the Ethernet interface are forcibly disconnected.
LSD68 Bit 0: User Communication 1
Bit 1: User Communication 2
Bit 2: User Communication 3
LSD69 to 100 Reserved
LSD101 Polling period register for the O/I Link Slave
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 27-9
2 Word Devices
Address Function/Part
LSD102 Slave registration setting register for O/I Link Master
LSD103 Reserved
LSD104 Slave online information register for O/I Link Master
LSD105 Reserved
LSD106 Slave error information register for O/I Link Master
LSD107 to 111 Reserved
LSD112 to 127 Refer to details on registers for communication drivers in "External Device Setup Manual".
LSD128 to 255 Reserved
• LSD4 and 6 store the maximum value, and when the Base Screen is switched, they are reset.
• The values of LSD4 to 6 are included errors of +/- 10 milliseconds.
• The values of LSD38 to 40 are included errors of +/- 10 milliseconds.
• When registers LSD7, 8, 9, 10, 11 or 12 contain FFFF (H) and are incremented, the value becomes 0.
• When you reckon time by using LSD9, the time difference (in 10 milliseconds units) from the previous value
can be calculated.
• The range for the “Year” in LSD13 is 2000 to 2099, and reverts to 2000 after 2099.
• When 1 is written to LSD20, internal clock is updated by the contents of LSD21 to 26. Note that if there is
even 1 incorrect data item in LSD21 to 26, the internal clock of the Touch is not updated.
• The display format for LSD31 is set under Screen No. Format in Project Settings. (BCD, BIN)
• This data format for LSD32 is the same as Screen No. Format in Project Settings. (BCD, BIN)
If the screen number is not exist in the project, “No Screen Data” message will appear.
If 0xFFFF(Hex) is written to LSD32, Touch will display the Top Page in the System Mode.
In case that the current screen is changed by System Area 1 and LSD32 at the same instant, the screen
number of the System Area 1 will be displayed.
• By using the LSD50 value in the Message Switching Display you can display the message that corresponds to
the cursor in the Alarm List Display.
• Refer to Chapter 20 “1.4 Script Error” on page 20-4 regarding LSD52 and LSD53.
• LSM7 and LSD6, 102 to 107 are not available for slave units when using O/I Link Communication.
27-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Word Devices
2.2 Control Device Addresses
Device Name Symbol R/W Address Range Base
Input WI R 0 10
Output WQ R/W 0 10
Shift Register WM R/W 2 10
0 to 48*
Internal Relay WR R/W 0 to 1260*1 10
Special Internal Relay WM R/W 8000 to 8160*1 10
Timer Setting Value TP R/W 000 to 199 10
Timer Count Value TC R 000 to 199 10
Counter Setting Value CP R/W 000 to 199 10
Counter Count Value CC R 000 to 199 10
Data Register D R/W 0000 to 1999 10
Special Data Register D R/W 8000 to 8199 10
R/W stands for Read/Write. R/W enables reading and writing of values, whereas R enables reading only.
■ Input (WI)
Devices for handling bit device inputs (I) in word units
■ Output (WQ)
Devices for handling bit device outputs (Q) in word units
■ Shift Register (WR)
Devices for handling bit device shift registers (R) in word units
27
Internal Devices
■ Internal Relay (WM)
Devices for handling bit device internal relays (M) in word units
■ Special Internal Relay (WM)
Devices for handling bit device special internal relays (M) in word units
■ Timer (TP, TC)
This timer is used internally by the Touch. These can be used as an ON delay Timer or OFF delay Timer.
■ Counter (CP, CC)
This counter is used internally by the Touch. These can be used as an addition type counter or reverse counter.
■ Data Register (D)
This is a word unit device used for storing numerical data internally in the Touch. It can also be used as a bit unit
device.
• Control devices must have a "#" before the device type only when the WindO/I-NV3 is used.
In addition, on the Device Monitor a "#" is displayed before the device type.
Example: When setting D100
WindO/I-NV3: #D100
WindLDR: D100
• Do not simultaneously write values to the same control device using the HMI function and the control function.
*1 Multiples of 20 only
*2 Multiples of 16 only
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 27-11
2 Word Devices
■ Special Data Register (D)
This is a word unit device used for storing numerical data internally in the Touch. Each data register is assigned a
special function. It can also be used as a bit unit device.
Although the device code for the data registers (D0000 to D1999) and special data registers (D8000 to
D8199) is the same ("D"), the device characteristics are different. Special functions are assigned to each
special data register.
Do not change the data of reserved area, otherwise the Touch may not operate correctly.
Device
Description Updated
Address
Quantity of Inputs When I/O
D8000
The total of input points provided on the Touch is stored to D8000. initialized
Quantity of Outputs When I/O
D8001
The total of output points provided on the Touch is stored to D8001. initialized
CPU Module Type Information
Information about the Touch is stored to D8002.
0: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 12-I/O type
D8002 1: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 24-I/O type Power-up
2: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 40-I/O type
3: SmartAXIS Pro/Lite 48-I/O type
4: SmartAXIS Touch
D8003, 8004 Reserved ―
General Error Code
SmartAXIS general error information is stored to D8005. When a general error occurs,
the bit corresponding to the error occurred turns on. When error
D8005
The general error and ladder program execution error can be cleared by writing “1” to occurred
the most significant bit of D8005 using a ladder program.
For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.1 General Error Codes” on page 30-3.
Ladder Program Execution Error Code
The ladder program execution error information is stored to D8006. When a ladder
When error
D8006 program execution error occurs, the error code corresponding to the error occurred is
occurred
stored to D8006.
For details, refer to Chapter 30 “2.2 Ladder Program Execution Error” on page 30-5.
D8007 Reserved ―
D8008 Year Every 500 msec
D8009 Month Every 500 msec
D8010 Day Every 500 msec
Calendar/Clock Current Data (Read only)
D8011 Day of Week Every 500 msec
Used to read calendar and clock data from the internal clock.
D8012 Hour Every 500 msec
D8013 Minute Every 500 msec
D8014 Second Every 500 msec
D8015 Year ―
D8016 Month ―
D8017 Day ―
Calendar/Clock New Data (Write only)
D8018 Day of Week ―
Used to write calendar and clock data to the internal clock.
D8019 Hour ―
D8020 Minute ―
D8021 Second ―
Constant Scan Time Preset
D8022 ―
Scan Time Data Value
These are special data registers for checking the scan
D8023 Scan Time Current Value Every scan
time and configuring the constant scan time.
D8024 For details, refer to Chapter 12 “Control function” on Scan Time Maximum Value At occurrence
page 12-2.
D8025 Scan Time Minimum Value At occurrence
D8026 to 8032 Reserved ―
27-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Word Devices
Device
Description Updated
Address
D8033 Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No. I2 ―
D8034 Jump destination label numbers for interrupt inputs are stored in these I3 ―
special data registers. To use interrupt inputs, store the label number
that corresponds to the special data register allocated to the interrupt
D8035 input. I4 ―
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.9 Interrupt Input” on page 3-71.
Timer Interrupt Jump Destination Label No.
The jump destination label number when the timer interrupt occurs is stored in D8036.
D8036 ―
To use the timer interrupt, store the corresponding label number.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.13 Timer Interrupt” on page 3-80.
Interrupt Input Jump Destination Label No.
Jump destination label numbers for interrupt inputs are stored in these
special data registers. To use interrupt inputs, store the label number
D8037 I5 ―
that corresponds to the special data register allocated to the interrupt
input.
For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.9 Interrupt Input” on page 3-71.
D8038, 39 Reserved ―
D8040 Analog Input Value AI0 Every scan
The analog input values (0 to 10 VDC) to the analog input terminals are
D8041 converted to digital values (0 to 1000) and stored to the corresponding AI1 Every scan
special data registers.
D8042 to
Reserved ―
8049
D8050 Upper Word Current Value / Frequency
High-Speed Counter (Group 1/I0) Every scan
D8051 These special data registers are used with Lower Word Measurement Value (I0)
D8052 the high-speed counter function and the Upper Word
Preset Value ―
D8053 frequency measurement function. Lower Word
D8054 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High-
Speed Counter” on page 3-52.
Upper Word
Reset Value ―
27
D8055 Lower Word
Internal Devices
D8056 Upper Word Current Value / Frequency
High-Speed Counter (Group 2/I2) Every scan
D8057 These special data registers are used with Lower Word Measurement Value (I2)
D8058 the high-speed counter function and the Upper Word
Preset Value ―
D8059 frequency measurement function. Lower Word
D8060 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High- Upper Word
Speed Counter” on page 3-52. Reset Value ―
D8061 Lower Word
D8062 to
Reserved ―
8067
D8068 Upper Word Current Value / Frequency
High-Speed Counter (Group 3/I3) Every scan
D8069 These special data registers are used with Lower Word Measurement Value (I3)
D8070 the high-speed counter function and the Upper Word
Preset Value ―
D8071 frequency measurement function. Lower Word
D8072 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High- Upper Word
Speed Counter” on page 3-52. Reset Value ―
D8073 Lower Word
D8074 to
Reserved ―
8076
Out of Analog Input Range Status
When an analog input value is 11V or higher, the corresponding bit of D8077 turns on.
When an analog input value is lower than 11V, the corresponding bit of D8077 turns off.
The assignment of each analog input is as follows.
bit bit bit bit
D8077 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ―
Analog input 0
Analog input 1
D8078 to
Reserved ―
8133
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 27-13
2 Word Devices
Device
Description Updated
Address
D8134 Upper Word Current Value / Frequency
High-Speed Counter (Group 4/I4) Every scan
D8135 These special data registers are used with Lower Word Measurement Value (I4)
D8136 the high-speed counter function and the Upper Word
Preset Value ―
D8137 frequency measurement function. Lower Word
D8138 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High- Upper Word
Speed Counter” on page 3-52. Reset Value ―
D8139 Lower Word
D8140 Upper Word Current Value / Frequency
High-Speed Counter (Group 5/I5) Every scan
D8141 These special data registers are used with Lower Word Measurement Value (I5)
D8142 the high-speed counter function and the Upper Word
Preset Value ―
D8143 frequency measurement function. Lower Word
D8144 For details, refer to Chapter 3 “4.7 High- Upper Word
Speed Counter” on page 3-52. Reset Value ―
D8145 Lower Word
D8146 to
Reserved ―
8199
27-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 28 Touch Setup
This chapter describes the Touch setup screen and how to perform setup.
1 Maintenance Screen
1.1 Maintenance Screen Overview
You can display the Maintenance screen in Run Mode. It will allow you to access the System Mode, make Brightness/
Contrast adjustment, do Device Monitor, Ladder Monitor, and Start/Stop.
Color LCD models Monochrome LCD models
Maintenance Screen functions are indicated below:
Button Description
In System Mode, you can specify the initial settings and initialize data of the Touch.
System Mode
For details, refer to “2 System Mode Overview” on page 28-3.
Shows the Device Monitor. This screen can be used to register devices and monitor and change
Device Monitor
values of devices. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.2 Device Monitor” on page 24-19.
The control of brightness adjustment of the screen is displayed.
Color LCD models:
Adjusts the brightness of the screen.
Brightness/Contrast
The control of brightness and contrast adjustment of the screen is
Monochrome LCD models:
displayed. Adjusts the brightness and contrast of the screen.
Ladder is displayed and allows you to monitor ladder programs. For details, refer to Chapter 24 “2.3
28
Ladder Monitor
Ladder Monitor” on page 24-23.
Touch Setup
Manipulates start control (M8000) to run and stop the ladder program operation. While the ladder
Ladder Start/Stop
program operation is stopped, "Ladder STOP" flashes at the bottom right portion of the screen.
If a password has been configured for the project data and press System Mode, Device Monitor or
Ladder Monitor, the Enter Password screen will be displayed. Select a user name, and then enter the
password. For details, refer to Chapter 21 “User Accounts and the Security Function” on page 21-1.
1.2 Displaying the Maintenance Screen
Press the upper-left corner of the Touch screen for three seconds or more.
If the Base Screen is switched before three seconds have elapsed, the load operation for the Maintenance Screen will
be canceled. Please press it again.
Touch
Press and hold 3
or more seconds
• To display the Maintenance Screen, select the Enable Maintenance check box under the System tab
in the Project Settings dialog box.
• If a touch switch is placed in the upper-left corner of the screen, switching to the Maintenance Screen
will not be possible.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 28-1
1 Maintenance Screen
1.3 Adjusting Screen Brightness
1 On the Maintenance screen, press Brightness (Color LCD models), or Brightness/Contrast (Monochrome LCD
models).
Color LCD models Monochrome LCD models
2 Press or to adjust to your preferred brightness.
Color LCD models Monochrome LCD models
You can also adjust the screen brightness and contrast by using the following items.
• or buttons on the Top Page in System Mode
• The values of HMI Special Data Registers
Brightness: LSD51
Contrast*1: LSD55
*1 Monochrome LCD models only
28-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 System Mode Overview
2 System Mode Overview
The System Mode allows you to access the internal Touch initial settings, self diagnosis, and clearing logged data. In
this mode, the project in the Touch will not be running.
2.1 System Mode Screens
In the System Mode, the content of the Top Page appears. (as shown below).
Color LCD models Monochrome LCD models
パスワード
For information on accessing the Touch System Mode, refer to “1.2 Displaying the Maintenance Screen” on
page 28-1.
The following items are included on the Top Page and Main Menu. When you press the button of an item the
operation and settings screen for that item will be displayed.
■ Top Page
Item Descriptions See page
Run Switches to Run Mode. Page 28-9
Main Menu Displays the Main Menu. Page 28-3 28
Touch Setup
■ Main Menu
Item Descriptions See page
Allows adjustment of settings relating to operation,
Initial Setting Page 28-5
communication parameters, and log data of the Touch.
Clock Setting Allows setting of the internal clock of the Touch. Page 28-9
Run Switches to Run Mode. Page 28-9
Displays information relating to the type number,
System Info. Page 28-9
project, as well as runtime system of the Touch.
Top Page Moves to the Top Page. Page 28-10
Executes self diagnosis of memory, the touch panel, display,
Self Diag. Page 28-10
communication and other self diagnosis.
The screens under the Top Page in the System Mode are displayed in English only.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 28-3
2 System Mode Overview
2.2 Names and Layout of Setup Menus
Main Menu Initial Setting System Op. Backlight
Start Time
Details
Default Scr. No.
Password
Autorun
Initialize Alarm Log
Data Log
Op. Log
Touch PnlAdj
Comm. Driver Retry Cycles
Time Out
Trans. Wait
Parameter1
Parameter2
Parameter3
Parameter4
O/I Link O/I Link Set1
O/I Link Set2
Comm. I/F RS232C
RS422/485
IP Address
TP/CP Change Default Gateway
Misc Setting
Clock Setting
Ext. IP Address
Run
System Info. System
System2
Font
Top Page
Self Diag. Memory
Display LCD
Draw
Brightness
Backlight
Buzzer
Contrast
Touch Panel Trace
Fixed Points
Comm.
I/O IN OUT
HSC
Seq. Check Sequent
28-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Settings
3 Settings
3.1 Initial Setting
Press Initial Setting on the Main Menu to display the initial setting screen. You can use this screen to input the
settings for Touch operation and communication parameters, and to clear the logs. To return to the Main Menu, press
Main Menu at the top of the screen.
● System Op. (System Operation)
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then System Op. to display the system operation menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the items below. Press the button for each item to set it.
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
• To return to the system operation menu screen from any of the settings screens below, press System
Op. at the top of the screen.
■ Backlight
This item sets the amount of time (in minutes) until the backlight turns off automatically when the screen is not
touched or switched for a preset amount of time.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Backlight.
To set a value, enter the value using the Keypad, and then press ENT.
Press CAN to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value.
• The setting is not updated if you display another screen before pressing ENT.
• Setting a time of 0 turns off the backlight automatically.
■ Start Time
This item sets the amount of time (in minutes) until communication with the external device starts after Touch power
ON. This can be used to synchronize boot times with the external device. 28
From the main menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Start Time.
Touch Setup
To set a value, enter the value using the Keypad, and then press ENT.
Press CAN to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 28-5
3 Settings
■ Details (Detailed Settings)
The following items can be set.
• Whether or not to have a sound made when a touch switch is pressed.
• Select the screen number to be displayed as a binary number or BCD (binary coded decimal).
• To set blink cycle.
• Display the error message in Japanese or English.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Details.
Select the item to change using ▲ or ▼ . The selected item is highlighted.
Each press of CHG changes the property of the selected item. Repeat this procedure until the desired properties are
displayed.
Press ENT to apply the changes.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
■ Default Scr. No. (Default Screen Number)
This item sets the No. (as a decimal value) of the screen to display after power ON.
From the main menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Default Scr. No.
To set a value, use the keypad to enter a value.
Press ENT on the keypad to apply the value entered.
Press CAN to cancel the entered value and display the currently set value.
• The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
• If the Default Scr. No. is set to 0, Touch will display the screen set in the external device instead of the
Default Screen. For details, refer to Chapter 3 “System Area 1” on page 3-22.
■ Password
Specifies a password to use to move to System Mode. This changes the password for the "Administrator" Security
Group of the WindO/I-NV3.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Password.
Press Change Password to display the password input screen.
To enter a password, use the arrow keys (, , , ), to move the cursor to a selected character and then press
ENT.
Once the the password is entered, move the cursor to OK, and then press ENT to confirm the password entered. To
cancel changing the password, move the cursor to CAN, and then press ENT.
To clear the password input field, move the cursor to CLR, and then press ENT.
• If you want to return to the password screen and decide not to change the password, move the cursor to
the CAN and press ENT on the password input screen.
• Pressing ENT without entering a password disables the password function.
• When you do not assign a password to a project data, the Password is blank.
• If you forget your password, contact for sales representative.
■ Autorun
You have the option to enable or disable the USB Autorun function.
When Autorun is enabled, Autorun function will be executed when a USB flash drive is inserted to the Touch.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, System Op., and then Autorun.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
28-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Settings
● Initialize
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then Initialize to display the initialization menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the following items. Press the button for each item to set it.
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
• To return to the initialization menu screen from any of the settings screens below, press Init at the top of
the screen.
■ Alarm Log
Clears all the Alarm Log data.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Initialize, and then Alarm Log.
Press Yes to clear the Alarm Log data.
■ Data Log
Clears all the Data Log data.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Initialize, and then Data Log.
Press Yes to clear the Data Log data.
■ Op. Log (Operation Log)
Clears all the Operation Log data.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Initialize, and then Op. Log.
Press Yes to clear the Operation Log data.
■ Touch PnlAdj (Touch Panel Adjust)
Adjusts the analog touch panel.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Initialize, and then Touch PnlAdj.
Press Yes and adjust according to the instructions on the screen.
28
Touch Setup
Press the center of
the symbol.
Press the center of displayed on the screen, in the following order: lower-left corner, lower-right
corner, upper-left corner, upper-right corner of the Touch screen. The position of the analog touch
panel is properly adjusted and set.
● Comm. Driver (Communication Driver)
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then Comm. Driver to display the communication driver menu
screen.
To specify settings, press the button to select a choice. Comm. Driver setting items vary based on the currently
connected hardware. For details about settings, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual".
If No External Devices are selected from the Communication Driver, some settings cannot be modified.
To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
● O/I Link
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then O/I Link to display the O/I link menu screen.
This screen displays information on the O/I Link.
(Various settings can be made by pressing O/I Link Set 1 and O/I Link Set 2.)
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
• For details about settings, refer to the "External Device Setup Manual".
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 28-7
3 Settings
● Comm. I/F (Communication Interface)
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then Comm. I/F to display the communication interface settings
menu screen.
You can use this screen to set the items below. Press the button for each item to set.
• To return to the initial settings screen, press Init Set at the top of the screen.
• Press Comm. I/F at the top of the screen to return to the communication interface settings menu
screen.
■ RS232C
Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface Port (RS232C).
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then RS232C.
■ RS422/485
Allows the setting of communication parameters for the Serial Interface Port (RS422/485).
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then RS422/485.
■ IP Address
Allows the setting of the IP address and subnet mask.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then IP Address.
Press <-- or --> to select an item, and then use the Keypad to enter the IP address and subnet mask values.
Press ENT to apply the entered values.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
■ Default Gateway
Specify the default gateway.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then Default Gateway.
Press <-- or --> to select an item, and then use the Keypad to enter the default gateway value. Press ENT to apply
the entered value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
■ Misc Setting (Miscellaneous Setting)
Specify whether to allow or prohibit Maintenance Communication via TCP/IP (refer to Chapter 23 “Using the online
function for Ethernet communication” on page 23-7).
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then Misc Setting.
Each press of CHG changes the property of the selected item. Repeat this procedure until the desired properties are
displayed.
Press ENT to apply the entered value.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
■ Ext. IP Address (External Device IP Address)
Changes the IP addresses for the external device.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, Comm. I/F, and then Ext. IP Address.
Procedure
1 Press <-- or --> to select the station number, and then enter the station number value with the numeric keypad.
2 Press ENT to confirm the entered value. The IP address for the selected station number is displayed.
3 Press <-- or --> to select the item, and then enter the IP address with the numeric keypad.
4 Press ENT to confirm the entered value.
5 Press SAVE to save the settings.
If you switch to another screen or change the station number before pressing SAVE, the settings are not
saved.
28-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Settings
● TP/CP Change (Change the Timer and counter preset value)
Saves the control device timer and counter preset values.
From the Main Menu, press Initial Setting, and then TP/CP Change.
If you press SAVE, the modified values are saved and the project data is updated.
If you press CLEAR, the modified values are restored to the values configured in the project data.
3.2 Clock Setting
Press Clock Setting in the Main Menu to display the clock settings screen.
Use this screen to set the internal clock of the Touch.
To return to the Main Menu, press Main Menu at the top of the screen.
Procedure
1 Press <-- or --> to select an item and then the date or time with the numerical keypad.
2 Press ENT to apply the new setting.
3 Press SAVE to save the date/time setting.
The setting is not updated if you display another screen before applying the setting.
3.3 Run
Switches to the Run Mode to execute the project.
3.4 System Info. (System Information)
From the Main Menu, press System Info., and then press System or System 2 to display the system information
screen. This screen displays information such as the Touch type number, the type and version number of runtime
system.
28
To return to the Main Menu, press Main Menu at the top of the screen.
Touch Setup
Only the first 15 characters of the project name are displayed.
● System
From the Main Menu, press System Info. and then System.
Displays the following settings:
• Touch type number
• MAC address
• Boot software version
• Runtime system version
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. at the top of the screen.
● System 2
From the main menu, press System Info. and then System 2.
Displays the following settings:
• Project file name
• External device manufacturer
• Communication protocol
• Communication driver version
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. at the top of the screen.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 28-9
3 Settings
● Font
From the Main Menu, press System Info., and then Font.
Displays the font type stored in Touch.
To return to the system information screen, press System Info. at the top of the screen.
3.5 Top Page
Press Top Page in the Main Menu to return to the Top Page.
3.6 Self Diag. (Self Diagnosis)
From the Main Menu, press Self Diag. to display the self-diagnosis screen.
Use this screen to run Touch internal self-diagnosis. To execute an operation, press the corresponding button.
To return to the Main Menu, press Main Menu at the top of the screen.
• You need inspection jigs to run self-diagnosis.
• Self Diagnosis is a special screen for factory inspections. Do not use without due reason.
28-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 29 SmartAXIS Specifications
1 Touch
1.1 Packing Contents
Before installing the Touch, make sure that the specifications of the product conform to your requirements, and that
no parts are missing or damaged due to accidents during transportation.
Name Pcs/pack
Touch Unit 1
Instruction Sheet 1
Mounting clips 2
Power plug
1
(Attached to the Touch)
Communication I/F plug
1
(Attached to the Touch)
USB Cable Lock Pin 2
29
SmartAXIS Specifications
USB Clamp Band 2
1.2 Type Number
LCD size Bezel color Type No.
Light gray FT1A-M12RA-W
3.7inch STN Monochrome LCD Dark gray FT1A-M12RA-B
Silver FT1A-M12RA-S
Light gray FT1A-C12RA-W
3.8inch TFT Color LCD Dark gray FT1A-C12RA-B
Silver FT1A-C12RA-S
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-1
1 Touch
1.3 Part Names
(3) (6) (7)
(1), (2)
(4) (8) (9)
(5)
No. Name Description
(1) Display
(2) Touch Panel
(3) Power Supply Terminal
RS232C, RS422/485
(4) Serial Interface (Port)
Connector : Terminal Block 9 pin
IEEE802.3u
(5) Ethernet Interface (Ethernet) 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Connector : RJ-45
USB2.0 (Device)
(6) USB Interface (USB1)
Connector : Mini-B
USB1.1 (External device)
(7) USB Interface (USB2)
Connector : Type A
(8) Output Terminal (Q0 to Q3) Relay output (10A)
(9) Input Terminal (I0 to I7) Digital input, Analog input
29-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Touch
1.4 External Interfaces
CAUTION
Make sure to turn off the power to the Touch before wiring each interface.
● Serial Interface (Port)
Interface Specification RS232C, RS422/485
Connector Detachable Terminal Block 9 pin
Applicable cable AWG16 to AWG28
AI 0.34-8 TQ (For AWG22)
AI 0.5-8 WH (For AWG20)
AI 0.75-8 GY (For AWG18)
Recommended Pressure Terminal
AI 1-8 RD (For AWG18)
AI 1.5-8 BK (For AWG16)
(Phoenix Contact)
Tightening Torque 0.25 N•m
No. Name I/O Function Communication type
1 SD OUT Send Data
2 RD IN Receive Data
3 RS OUT Request to Send RS232C
4 CS IN Clear to Send
5 SG ― Signal Ground
6 SDA OUT Send Data (+)
29
SmartAXIS Specifications
7 SDB OUT Send Data (-) RS422/485
8 RDA IN Receive Data (+)
9 RDB IN Receive Data (-)
The Touch is not equipped with terminating resistance. When using the RS422/485 interface, insert
terminating resistance with the appropriate value (around 100 to 120 Ω) between terminal No. 8 (RDA)
and terminal No. 9 (RDB) as required.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-3
1 Touch
● I/O Terminals
Applicable cable AWG16 to AWG22
AI 0.34-8 TQ (For AWG22)
AI 0.5-10 WH (For AWG20)
AI 0.75-10 GY (For AWG18)
Recommended Pressure Terminal AI 1-10 RD (For AWG18)
AI 1.5-10 BK (For AWG16)
AI TWIN 2 x 0.75 10GY (For AWG18, TWIN Pressure Terminal)
(Phoenix Contact)
Tightening Torque 0.5 to 0.6 N•m
■ Terminal Arrangement
Terminal Arrangement and I/O Wiring Diagrams
+ -
Power supply terminal
1 SD
5 SG Port
9 RDB
Ry
OUT
Q0 COM0 Q1 COM1 Q2 COM2 Q3 COM3 I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7
: Fuse - +
2-wire Analog voltage
L L L L
L : Load Sensor output device
+ -
● Input Terminal Specifications
Input Points 8
Rated Input Voltage 24V DC
Input Voltage Range 0 to 28.8V DC
Effect of Improper No damage.
Input Connection (If any input exceeding the rated value is applied, permanent damage may be caused.)
■ Digital Input Specifications
Input Type Sink
Input Points 6 points in 1 common line
(Terminal No. /Common Line Name) (I0 to I5/Power supply "-" terminal)
Rated Input Current 4.4mA
Input Impedance 5.5KΩ
Input System OFF ON 2.5 μs + filter value
Transfer Time ON OFF 5 μs + filter value
Between input
Not isolated
Isolation terminals
Internal circuit Not isolated
Input Type Type1 (IEC61131-2)
External Load for I/O Interconnection Not needed
Signal Determination Method Static
Cable Length
3m
(in compliance with EMC standards)
29-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Touch
■ Analog Input Specifications
Input Signal Type Voltage Input
Input Points 2 points in 1 common line
(Terminal No. /Common Line Name) (I6, I7/internal -terminal, SG terminal for Port)
Input Range 0 to 10 VDC
Rated Input Current 0.3mA
Input Impedance 78.0KΩ
Digital Resolution 0 to 1,000 (10bit)
Data Type Binary data: 0 to 1000
Input Value of LSB 10mV
Type of Input Single-ended input
Sample Duration Time 2 msec max.
AD Conversion Sample Repetition Time 2 msec max.
Total Input System Transfer Time 2 msec + filtering time + scan time
Maximum Error at 25°C ±3.0% of full scale
Input Error Temperature Coefficient ±0.04% of full scale/°C
Maximum Error ±5.0% of full scale
General Operating Mode Self-scan
Characteristics Conversion Method Σ∆ type
Status Display Device Monitor screen (LCD)
Maximum Temporary Deviation during Electrical Noise
±5.0% of full scale
Tests
Recommended Cable for Noise Immunity Twisted pair shielded cable
Calibration or Verification to Maintain Rated Accuracy Not possible
Maximum Permanent Allowed Overload (No Damage) 28.8V DC
Overload Status (Outside Input Range) Detection Detectable
Between input terminals Not isolated
Isolation
Between input and internal circuit Not isolated 29
Digital Input Type — (IEC 61131-2 digital input type is not supported)
SmartAXIS Specifications
Used as Digital
ON voltage: 15V min. (ON current: 0.20 mA min.)
Input Input Threshold
OFF voltage: 5V max. (OFF current: 0.06 mA max.)
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-5
1 Touch
■ Equivalent Circuit
Sink Input (I0 to I5) Shared Digital/Analog Input (I6, I7)
24V DC 24V DC
Internal Circuit
Internal Circuit
4.3kΩ 56kΩ
Input Input
circuit circuit
1.2kΩ 22kΩ
OV OV
■ Operating Range
Sink Input (I0 to I5) Shared Digital/Analog Input (I6, I7)
Input Voltage (V DC) Input Voltage (V DC)
28.8V 28.8V
ON Area ON Area
24V 24V
15V 15V
Transition Area Transition Area
5V 5V
OFF Area OFF Area
Input Current (mA) Input Current (mA)
0.9mA 2.7mA 4.4mA 5.3mA 0.06mA 0.2mA 0.3mA 0.37mA
● Output Specifications (10A Relay)
No. of Outputs (Terminal No.) 4 (Q0 to Q3)
Output Type 1a contact
Maximum Load Current 10A
Minimum Switching Load 10 mA/5V DC (reference value)
Initial Contact Resistance 100 mΩ max. (1A, 6V DC)
Electrical Life 100,000 operations min. (rated load 1,800 operations/hour)
Mechanical Life 20,000,000 operations min. (no load 18,000 operations/hour)
Rated Load 250V AC/10A, 30V DC/10A
Between output
terminal and
Dielectric Strength internal circuit 2,300V AC 5mA, 1 minute
Between output
terminals (COMs)
Status Display Device Monitor screen (LCD display)
■ Output Delay
ON
Command
OFF
ON
Output Relay Status
OFF
OFF delay: 330 msec max.
Chatter: 6 msec max.
ON delay: 6 msec max.
29-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Touch
1.5 Specifications
■ Applicable Standards
UL508
Safety Standard
CSA C22.2 No.142 (c-UL)
EMC Standard*1 IEC/EN 61131-2:2007
■ Environmental Specifications
Operating Temperature 0 to 50°C
Relative Humidity 10 to 95% RH (no condensation)
Storage Temperature -20 to +60°C
Storage Humidity 10 to 95% RH (no condensation)
Operation: 0 to 2,000m
Altitude
Transport: 0 to 3,000m
Pollution Degree 2
Corrosion Immunity Free from corrosive gases
■ Electrical Specifications
Rated Voltage 24V DC
Power Consumption 9.2W max. When USB2 is unused: 5.8W max.
Power Voltage Range 20.4 to 28.8V DC
Allowable Momentary Power
10 msec max.
Interruption
Inrush Current 50A max.
Between power and FE terminals: 500V AC, 5mA,1 minute
Dielectric Strength
Between power and output terminals: 2,300V AC, 5mA, 1 minute
■ Construction Specifications
Vibration Resistance
5 to 8.4Hz amplitude 3.5mm, 8.4 to 150Hz acceleration 9.8m/s2 29
10 times on each of three mutually perpendicular axes (100 minutes) (IEC61131-2)
SmartAXIS Specifications
147m/s2, 11ms (5 shocks on each of three mutually perpendicular axes)
Shock Resistance
(IEC61131-2)
*1 When using the Touch as the EMC Standard Approved Products, attach a ferrite core (ZCAT3035-1330 manufactured by TDK
Corporation) to the power cables and the communication cables.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-7
1 Touch
■ Performance Specifications
Type Number FT1A-M (Monochrome LCD models) FT1A-C (Color LCD models)
LCD Type STN Monochrome LCD TFT Color LCD
Display Colors 2 Colors (Black, White) 8 shades 65,536 Colors
Effective Display Area
87.59(W) × 35.49 (H) 88.92 (W) × 37.05 (H)
[mm]
Display Resolution 240 (W) x 100 (H) pixels
View angle Left/Right/Top/Bottom: 45° Left/Right: 40°, Top: 20°, Bottom: 60°
Display Contrast Adjustment 32 levels –
White: 740 [cd/m2]
Brightness of LCD only 400 [cd/m2]
Red: 135 [cd/m2]
Brightness Adjustment 32 levels
LED (White, Red)
Backlight LED (White)
Screen color: White, Pink, Red
Backlight Life*2 50,000 hours nominal
Switch Type Analog Resistive Film
Touch Operating Force 0.2 to 2.5 N
Panel Multiple Operations Impossible
Life 1,000,000 operations
User Memory 5MB
Lithium secondary battery
Backup Duration: Approx. 30 days (typical) (Operating temperature: 25°C)
Backup Battery*3 Charging Time: Approx. 15 hours for charging from 0% to 90% of full charge
Battery Life: 5 years in cycles of 9-hour charging and 15-hour discharging
Replaceability: Not possible to replace battery
Backup Data 128KB
Buzzer Output Single tone (tone length is adjustable)
Degree of Protection IP66F (IEC60529)*4
Weight (approx.) 300 g
■ EMC Specifications
Class A : 10m
Radiated Emission 40dBµV/m quasi-peak (30M to 230MHz)
47dBµV/m quasi-peak (230M to 1GHz)
Contact : ±6kV
Electrostatic Discharge
Air : ±8kV
10V/m (80 to 1000 MHz)
3V/m (1.4 to 2.0 GHz)
Electromagnetic Field
1V/m (2.0 to 2.7 GHz)
80% AM (1kHz)
±2kV (Power, Output terminal)
Fast Transient Burst
±1kV (Port, Ethernet, Input terminal)
±500V (between +24V-0V)
Surge Immunity
±1kV (between +24V-FE, 0V-FE)
10V (Power, Port, Ethernet, Input terminal, Output terminal)
Conducted Radio
(150kHz to 80MHz)
Frequency Immunity
80% AM (1kHz)
*2 The backlight life refers to the time until the surface brightness reduces to a half after using continuously at room
temperatures.
*3 In high temperature environments battery life may be affected, so retention time may be reduced.
*4 The degree of protection for the operating section after the panel is attached. The compliance test has been passed, but this
is not a guarantee of operation in all environments.
29-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Touch
1.6 Dimensions
Unit: mm
<Cable Attached Dimensions>
29
SmartAXIS Specifications
Depending on the type of connection cable used the dimensions shown above will change.
The dimensions given here are intended for reference only.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-9
1 Touch
1.7 Installation
● Operating Environment
For designed performance and safety of the Touch, do not install the Touch in the following environments:
• Where dust, briny air, or iron particles exist.
• Where oil or chemical splashes for a long time.
• Where oil mist is filled.
• In direct sunlight.
• Where strong ultraviolet rays exist.
• Where corrosive or combustible gasses exist.
• Where the Touch is subjected to shocks or vibrations.
• Where condensation occurs due to rapid temperature change.
• Where high-voltage or arc-generating equipment (electromagnetic contactors or circuit protectors) exists in the
vicinity.
● Ambient Temperature
• Allow sufficient space for ventilation, and install the equipment away from heat sources.
• Allow at least 100mm between the Touch and walls or other equipment.
• Do not install the Touch where the ambient temperature exceeds the rated operating ambient temperature range.
When mounting the Touch in such locations, provide a forced air-cooling fan or air-conditioner to keep the ambient
temperature within the rated temperature range.
• The Touch is designed to install on a vertical plane so that natural air-cooling is provided. If you install it using any
other orientation, use forced-air cooling, or lower the ambient operating temperature.
■ Derating
When using the Touch at an operating temperature of 45°C or higher, reduce the output current of each output
terminal as shown in the figure below.
Installed upright in landscape orientation
Output Current
10A
5A
Operating Temperature
0 45°C 50°C
If operating the Touch in a high-temperature environment, reducing the brightness of the backlight can
help to limit the temperature rise of internal components.
The relationship between ambient temperature of operation, the output current of each output terminal,
and brightness, is approximately as shown in the figure below.
Brightness
Output Current10A
Output Current5A
Output terminal not used
100%
50%
Operating Temperature
0 35°C 45°C 50°C
The values shown above may vary with individual products. Please use this information as a reference at
the time of design.
29-10 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Touch
● Installation
• Make a panel cut-out on the panel with the dimensions shown below.
B
Unit: mm
A B Panel Cut-out
A
+1.0 +1.0
66.0 105.0 1.0 to 5.0
0 0
• The Touch has the mounting clip positions not only on the top and bottom side (0.3 to 0.35 N•m).
TOP
Mounting Clip
Panel
BOTTOM
Mounting Clip Position
CAUTION
• Do not tighten excessively, otherwise the Touch may warp and cause wrinkle on the display, or
impair the waterproof characteristics.
• If the mounting clips are tightened obliquely to the panel, the Touch may fall off the panel.
• When installing the Touch into a panel cut-out, make sure that the gasket is not twisted. Especially
29
when re-installing, take special care because any twists in the gasket will impair the waterproof
SmartAXIS Specifications
characteristics.
• Even in the panel thickness range, there is a risk that the waterproof characteristics cannot be
maintained due to the panel materials and size.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-11
1 Touch
● Orientation
The Touch is designed to install on a vertical landscape. If you install it using any other orientation, confirm the
limitations about operating temperature and the use of the Touch.
Orientation Operating Ambient Temperature
0 to 50°C
Vertical landscape Portrait
0 to 45°C
Vertical
Portrait (Clockwise)
0 to 50°C
Portrait (Counter Clockwise)
0 to 45°C
Horizontal
• When installing the Touch in a diagonal, the limitations are same as a horizontal.
• Confirm the visibility of the display in a final installation.
29-12 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Touch
1.8 Wiring
CAUTION
• Turn off the power supply before wiring.
• Make the wiring as short as possible and run all wires as far away as possible from high-voltage
and large-current cables. Follow all the procedures and precautions when wiring the Touch.
• Separate the Touch power supply wiring from the power lines of I/O devices and motor equipment.
• Ground the functional earth terminal to make sure of correct operation.
● Power Supply Terminal
• Pin assignment is shown in the following table.
+ Power supply 24V DC (+24V)
- Power supply 0V (0V)
Functional Earth (FE)
• Use applicable cables for wiring and recommended ferrules (made by Phoenix Contact) as follows.
Applicable Cable AWG16 to AWG22
AI 0.34-8 TQ (For AWG22)
AI 0.5-8 WH (For AWG20)
AI 0.75-8 GY (For AWG18)
Recommended AI 1-8 RD (For AWG18)
Pressure Terminal AI 1.5-8 BK (For AWG16)
AI-TWIN 2×0.5-8 WH (For AWG20, TWIN Pressure Terminal)
AI-TWIN 2×0.75-8 GY (For AWG18, TWIN Pressure Terminal)
29
(Phoenix Contact)
SmartAXIS Specifications
Tightening Torque 0.5 to 0.6 N•m
● Cautions when connecting external devices
The Touch power supply is non-isolating. Interference or external noise from external devices due to wiring may
cause adverse effects on the internal circuits of the Touch or external devices.
To prevent such damage, choose a proper solution depending on your system setup.
• Use a separate earth ground from the external noise source device.
• The wire for grounding should be thick and short in order to direct the noise from the noise source device to the
earth ground.
• Use a separate power supply from the external noise source device.
• Insert an isolator on the communication line of the Touch and the non-isolated communication device (i.e. PLC) to
prevent damage.
● Cautions for using the Touch connected to a computer
When connecting the Touch to a computer via the Serial Interface (Port) or USB Interface, the Touch or the computer
may break down depending on the conditions of the computer. Make sure of the following cautions, in order to
prevent an accident.
• If the computer has a 3-pin power plug or power plug with a ground lead type. make sure to use a plug socket
including a ground input electrode or ground the earth lead, respectively.
• If the computer has a 2-pin power plug without ground lead, follow the procedure below when connect the Touch
to the computer.
(1) Pull out the power plug of the computer from the AC outlet.
(2) Connect the Touch to the computer.
(3) Insert the power plug of the computer into the AC outlet.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-13
1 Touch
1.9 USB Cable Lock Pin Attachment
When using the USB interface (USB1, USB2), attach the USB cable lock pin to prevent disconnecting the USB cable from
the Touch.
1 Insert the USB cable into the USB port.
2 Strain the “Edge part” of the USB cable lock pin, and insert the “Edge part” to the 2 holes upper the USB port.
Edge Part Clamp part
Upper Holes
3 Fasten the USB clamp band around the USB cable and the clamp part, secure them tightly.
Fasten the USB clamp band without the space between the clamp part and it, and the inclination.
29-14 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Touch
1.10 Maintenance and Inspection
Maintain and inspect the Touch periodically to ensure the best performance. Do not disassemble, repair, or modify
the Touch during inspection.
Wipe any stain of the display using a soft cloth slightly dampened with neutral detergent or
Display alcoholic solvent. Do not use solvents such as thinner, ammonia, strong acid, and strong
alkaline.
Check the terminals and connectors to make sure of no loose screws, incomplete insertion, or
Terminals, Connectors
disconnected lines.
Make sure that all mounting clips and screws are tightened sufficiently. If the mounting clips are
Mounting Clips
loose, tighten the screw to the recommended tightening torque.
The Touch backlight cannot be replaced by the customer. When the backlight needs to be
Backlight
replaced, contact IDEC.
A gap may be caused in the operation accuracy of the touch panel by the secular distortion, etc.
Touch Panel Adjust the touch panel according to the following procedure when there is a gap in the operation
of the touch panel.
● Maintenance Screen
Turn on the power to the Touch, then press and hold the upper-left corner of the screen for three seconds or longer.
The Maintenance Screen appears on the screen.
Touch
Press and hold 3
or more seconds
Maintenance Screen (Color LCD models) Maintenance Screen (Monochrome LCD models)
29
SmartAXIS Specifications
• Permission to show the Maintenance Screen can be set using WindO/I-NV3 software. For details, refer to Chapter 3
“3.1 System Tab” on page 3-18.
• The Maintenance Screen is not displayed in the System Mode.
● System Mode
Press the System Mode at the top of the Maintenance Screen. The Top Page appears.
Top Page (Color LCD models) Top Page (Monochrome LCD models)
6<67(002'(7233$*( 6<67(002'(7233$*(
5XQ 0DLQ0HQX 5XQ 0DLQ0HQX
-8/)5, -8/)5,
,3$GG '+&3 ,3$GG '+&3
&2175$67
%5,*+71(66 %5,*+71(66
Initial Setting, Self Diagnosis and Initialization of the data, etc can be executed in the System Mode.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-15
1 Touch
● Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast
The brightness and contrast of the Touch display can be adjusted on the Adjust Brightness/Contrast Screen. Adjust
the brightness and contrast to the best condition as required.
1 Press the Brightness (color LCD models) or Brightness/Contrast (monochrome LCD models) on the Maintenance
Screen.
The Adjust Brightness/Contrast Screen appears.
Color LCD models Monochrome LCD models
2 Press and at the bottom the Adjust Brightness/Contrast Screen to adjust the contrast to the optimal
setting.
Color LCD models Monochrome LCD models
3 Press to close the Adjust Brightness/Contrast Screen.
To adjust the brightness and contrast in the System Mode, use and located at the bottom of the Top
Page.
Top Page (Color LCD models) Top Page (Monochrome LCD models)
6<67(002'(7233$*( 6<67(002'(7233$*(
5XQ 0DLQ0HQX 5XQ 0DLQ0HQX
-8/)5, -8/)5,
,3$GG '+&3 ,3$GG '+&3
&2175$67
%5,*+71(66 %5,*+71(66
Since contrast adjustment is not possible on color LCD models, the contrast adjust function is not
displayed.
29-16 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
1 Touch
● Adjusting the Touch Panel
A gap may be caused in the operation accuracy of the touch panel by the secular distortion, etc. Adjust the touch
panel according to the following procedure when there is a gap in the operation of the touch panel.
1 Press Main Menu on Top Page in System Mode. The Main Menu appears.
Top Page (Color LCD models) Top Page (Monochrome LCD models)
6<67(002'(7233$*( 6<67(002'(7233$*(
5XQ 0DLQ0HQX 5XQ 0DLQ0HQX
-8/)5, -8/)5,
,3$GG '+&3 ,3$GG '+&3
&2175$67
%5,*+71(66 %5,*+71(66
2 Press Init Set, Initialize, and then Touch PnlAdj. The confirmation screen appears and asks “Adjust Touch Panel
setting?” is displayed. Press Yes.
The Touch Panel Adjust Screen is displayed.
3 Press the center of the , then the position of the symbol changes one after another. Press five symbols
sequentially.
Press the center of
the symbol.
When pressing , make sure to press the center of the symbol. This will ensure the accuracy of the touch
panel operation.
4 When normally recognized, the confirmation screen of 2 is restored.
At step 3, when pressing a point away from the center of the , a recognition error will result. Then the returns 29
to the initial position, then repeat the step of 3 again.
SmartAXIS Specifications
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 29-17
1 Touch
29-18 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Chapter 30 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes the errors that may occur with the Touch and the measures necessary to correct these errors.
1 Error Messages
The Touch displays a variety of error messages in order to assist you in quickly analyze and resolve problems with the
hardware, communications system, and user screen data.
1.1 Errors Displayed on the Screen
The following error messages are displayed in the event of communication system problems and problems with user
screen data. When an error occurs, take the appropriate indicated action. If an error persists despite your attempts to
correct it, contact your nearest sales representative.
Error Message Cause Solution
Waiting for default The default screen number is set at 0. Write the screen number to System
screen No. Area 1 (address+0), or set the Default
Screen spin box on the System tab of
the Project Settings dialog box to a
value other than 0.
No screen data The specified Base Screen does not exist. Set the Base Screen and download it to
the Touch.
Processing error • This message is displayed when a value is divided by Check the calculation or settings.
0.
• There is data which cannot be handled with the
BCD4, BCD8, or float32 data types.
• Incorrect calendar data has been saved to the Calendar
of the Data Display.
Communication Error An error occurred during communication with the Check the communication lines and the
external device. communication settings.
During 1: N communications, the port
number of the external device on which
the Communication error has occurred.
Device range error • The data is written to the device with the address Check the device settings.
out of the range.
• The number of devices exceeds the limitation. 30
No USB flash drive No USB flash drive inserted when the unit attempted Insert a USB flash drive.
Troubleshooting
exists to access the USB flash drive.
This USB flash drive is • The type of USB flash drive is not recognized by the Please use a new recommended USB
not available Touch. flash drive.
• The USB flash drive is broken.
USB flash drive Access When the unit attempted to access the USB flash Create some free space on the USB
Error drive: flash drive or get a new one.
• The USB flash drive did not have enough free space.
• The USB flash drive was removed partway through.
• The USB flash drive was broken.
ZNV file is not found The project file (ZNV format) was not in the specified Check whether or not the file is in the
location on the external memory when a download was specified location on the external
made using the Project Data Transfer function. memory.
ZNV file format Error When a download was made using the Project Data Remake the project file (ZNV format).
Transfer function:
• The project file is not in ZNV format.
• The file is corrupt.
Product Series is not Check that the model name that is set in
When a download was made using the Project Data
correct the file you want to download is the same
Transfer function, the model of the downloaded project
as the model name of the destination
and the model of the destination Touch were different
Touch.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 30-1
1 Error Messages
Error Message Cause Solution
Script error An error occurred for a process in execution of the Check the value of LSD52 and LSD53,
script. and correct the script. For details, refer
to Chapter 20 “Script” on page 20-1.
Device write error The script generated a lot of write data, and the write Reduce the number of write operations
operation failed. to be performed at the same time.
Insufficient memory The resource memory of the Touch is insufficient Clear the Recover Background or
error because of the use of a large number of the following Scroll checkbox, or delete parts to
parts. reduce memory resource utilization.
• Pilot Lamps, Multi-State Lamps, and Picture Displays
with the Recover Background checkbox is
selected.
• Message Display and Message Switching Display with
the Scroll checkbox is selected.
• Parts over the number limit of parts that can be set
per screen by overlapping Base Screen.
Indirect device error Indirect write failure with Word Button or Word Write Do not perform indirect read-write with
Command. external devices while HMI Special
Internal Relay LSM14 or LSM15 is ON.
Check Interface Touch cannot change into the Run mode because the Modify settings using the
settings Interface settings are not correct. Communication Interface tab of the
Project Settings dialog box before
downloading.
Network off-line This error message is only displayed when O/I Link is See the "External Device Setup Manual"
being used. for details.
TP/CP The control device timer or counter preset value was Press Main Menu, Initial Setting,
modified. and then TP/CP Change in order on
the Top Page in the System Mode
Output circuit error The circuit for the relay output did not operate If this problem occurs frequently, the
normally. Touch may be damaged and require
replacement.
1.2 Low Battery Voltage
An internal battery maintains clock settings and log data in the Touch. When the battery runs out, keep register data,
log data and other backup data will be cleared, and the contrast is reset to the default value. If this happens, the
following message is displayed when the Touch is powered up, so take the indicated action.
This message does not show when the Enable Low Battery Warning check box on the System tab of
the Project Settings dialog box is not selected.
Note that in this case, System Area 2 (address+2, bit 14) is set to 1. Turn ON the power again to set the value to 0.
Message Description
Backup data lost The Log Data and Calendar Data are lost. Set the clock again. Keep the power ON for
about two days to charge the battery.
In case of storing Keep Relay or Keep Register to the flash memory using HMI Special Internal Relay
(LSM10), stored data is transferred to the memory automatically when Backup data is lost.
30-2 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Error Information
2 Error Information
There are two kinds of errors with the control functions of the Touch: general errors and ladder program execution
errors.
General errors can be checked by the state of a Special Data Register (D8005), and they can be cleared.
Ladder Program execution errors can checked by the state of a Special Data Register (D8006).
2.1 General Error Codes
The error code is stored in Special Data Register D8005. If '1' is stored in each bit of D8005, the corresponding error
is occurring.
Also, general errors (D8005) and Ladder Program execution errors (D8006) can be cleared by writing "1" to the most
significant bit of Special Data Register D8005, using a ladder program. Due to parts and communication, writing "1"
to the most significant bit of D8005 will not clear errors.
bit bit bit bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
D8005
Error clear bit Error information bits
● General Error Code List
Bit No. Item Cause Solution
This error indicates when the power supply is lower
0 Power Failure than the specified voltage. This error is also Clear the error code using WindLDR.
recorded when the power is turned off.
The watchdog timer monitors the time required for
Clear the error code using WindLDR. If
Watchdog Timer one program cycle (scan time). When the time
1 this error occurs frequently, the Touch
Error exceeds the allowed time, the watchdog timer
has to be replaced.
indicates an error.
2, 3 Reserved – –
The execution data of timer/counter preset values
Timer/Counter
is corrupted. The timer/counter preset values are
Preset Value
4 initialized to the values of the ladder program Clear the error code using WindLDR.
Sum Check
automatically. Note that changed preset values are
Error
cleared and that the original values are restored.
5 Reserved – – 30
This error indicates that the data designated to be If this error occurs in a short period of
Troubleshooting
maintained during power failure is corrupted power interruption after the battery
Keep Data Sum because of memory backup failure. has been charged as specified, the
6
Check Error Note that the “keep” data of internal relays and battery is defective and the Touch has
to be replaced. Clear the error code
shift registers are cleared. Data of counters and
using WindLDR.
data registers are also cleared.
The error code is cleared when a
correct ladder program is transferred.
Ladder Program This error indicates that the ladder program has a
7 Correct the ladder program, and
Syntax Error syntax error.
download the corrected ladder
program to the Touch.
8 to 12 Reserved – –
This error indicates that invalid data is found Refer to “2.2 Ladder Program
Ladder Program during execution of a ladder program. When this Execution Error” on page 30-5 and fix
13
Execution Error error occurs, special internal relay M8004 (ladder and clear the error code. Clear the
program execution error) is turned on. error code with WindO/I-NV3.
14 Reserved – –
15 Error clear bit – –
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 30-3
2 Error Information
Example: This ladder program clears the error information using the error clear bit of special data
register D8005.
Turn on M0 and turn on the upper bit of D8005. The error information is cleared at the end of the ladder scan.
1 S
M0000 D8005.15
2 R
M0000
● Touch Operating Status and Output during Errors
If an error occurs, the operation and output states of the Touch will be as follows.
Error Items Operating Status Output Checked at
Power failure Stop OFF Any time
Watchdog timer error Stop OFF Any time
Ladder Program (ROM) CRC error Stop OFF Starting operation
When checking a change in
TIM/CNT preset value sum check error Maintained Maintained
timer/counter setting values
Keep data error Maintained/Stop*1 Maintained/Stop*1 Turning power on
Ladder Program syntax error Stop OFF Downloading Ladder Program
Ladder Program execution error Maintained Maintained Executing Ladder Program
*1 Operation starts to run and outputs are turned on or off according to the ladder program as default, but it is also possible to
stop operation and turn off outputs using the Function Area Settings on WindLDR
30-4 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
2 Error Information
2.2 Ladder Program Execution Error
This error indicates that invalid data is found during execution of a ladder program. When this error occurs, the
special internal relay M8004 (ladder program execution error) is from 0 to 1. The detailed information of this error can
be viewed from the error code stored in special data register D8006 (ladder program execution error code).
● Ladder Program Execution Error Code (D8006)
Error Code Error Details
1 Source/destination device is out of range.
2 MUL result is out of data type range.
3 DIV result is out of data type range, or division by 0.
4 BCDLS has S1 or S1+1 exceeding 9,999.
S1 is 10,000 or higher in the HTOB(W) instruction, or S1 is 100,000,000 or higher in the HTOB(D)
5
instruction.
6 BTOH has any digit of S1 exceeding 9.
7 HTOA/ATOH/BTOA/ATOB has quantity of digits to convert out of range.
8 ATOH/ATOB has non-ASCII data for S1 through S1+4.
In the WEEK instruction, the ON time data is out of range (hour data is 24 or higher, minute data is 60
9
or higher), or the OFF time data is out of range (hour data is 25 or higher, minute data is 60 or higher).
In the YEAR instruction, the month and day data is out of range (month data is 13 or higher, day data is
10
32 or higher).
CVXTY/CVYTX is executed without matching XYFS.
12
XYFS and CVXTY/CVYTX have the same S1, but have different data types.
13 CVXTY/CVYTX has S2 exceeding the value specified in XYFS.
14 Label in LJMP, LCAL, or DJNZ is not found.
Attempt was made to execute an instruction that cannot be used in an interrupt program. (Refer to
18
Chapter 3 “4.9 Interrupt Input” on page 3-71.)
19 Attempt was made to execute an instruction that is not available for the external device.
21 DECO has S1 exceeding 255.
22 BCNT has S2 exceeding 256.
23 ICMP>= has S1 < S3.
25 BCDLS has S2 exceeding 7. 30
DI or EI is executed when interrupt input or timer interrupt is not programmed in the Function Area
26
Troubleshooting
Settings.
27 Work area is broken when using DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS, or TTIM.
28 S1 for trigonometric function instruction is invalid.
29 Result of F (float) data type instruction is out of the data type range.
30 N_B for SFTL/SFTR is out of range.
In the FIFOF instruction, the FIEX instruction or the FOEX instruction was executed before the FIFO data
31
file was registered.
32 TADD, TSUB, HOUR, or HTOS has invalid data for source device S1.
34 NDSRC has invalid data for source device S3.
In the SUM instruction, the execution result exceeds the valid range for the selected data type, or S2
35
data is 0.
36 In a DLOG/TRACE instruction, the size of the CSV file has exceeded 5 MB.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 30-5
3 Handling Problems
3 Handling Problems
3.1 When You Cannot Download Project Data
If you are unable to download project data from the WindO/I-NV3, press the top left corner of the panel for three
seconds while at the same time turning the power off and back on again.
When power is turned on again, the screen in the System Mode is displayed, and then Touch becomes downloadable
status. If you download using Ethernet and O/I Link, check again each setting of TCP/IP and O/I Link before
executing the download.
3.2 When the Backlight is OFF and the Buzzer Sounds
If you fail to download the runtime system to Touch, the backlight may turn to OFF and a buzzer may sound
continuously every second, even after the power has been turned off and on again. If this happens, rectify the
situation by doing the following:
Download the project and the runtime system by using WindO/I-NV3 via USB cable. When the Touch is in this state,
projects cannot be downloaded via Ethernet or using an external memory.
To download the runtime system, when you download a project, click Option on the Download dialog box in WindO/
I-NV3, and then select Download Runtime system on the Options dialog box.
30-6 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
3 Handling Problems
3.3 When a Problem Occurs with a Control Function
This section describes the procedures to determine the cause of trouble and actions to be taken when any trouble of
the Control Function occurs while operating the Touch. In case of any trouble, refer to the following table to
determine the cause and to correct the error.
Problem Cause Action
M8000 is not "1". Set "1" to M8000.
Ladder Program doesn't
execute. The stop or rest input is designated using Function
Set "0" to the stop and reset inputs.
Area Settings.
Input device is not "1".
Correct the program.
Input device address is incorrect.
Input does not operate The input wiring is incorrect. Correct the input wiring.
normally.
Supply the rated voltage to the input
The input terminal is not powered.
terminal.
Wiring or operation of external device is incorrect. Correct the external device wiring.
Output device addresses are incorrect. Correct the Ladder Program.
Output does not operate The output circuit in the Touch is
Output does not turn on and off.
normally. damaged. Replace the Touch.
Touch output connection is incorrect. Correctly connect the output.
The stop or reset input is designated in the
Set "1" to the designated input.
Function Area Settings.
Ladder Program cannot be
The designated stop or reset input does not turn Input does not work normally. Replace
stopped.
on and off. the Touch.
M8000 is not "0". Set "0" to M8000.
NOP instruction can reset the watchdog
timer.
Watchdog timer error The scan time exceeds the time configred for the Insert a NOP instruction into the
occurs. watchdog timer. Ladder Program so the time configured
for the watchdog timer is not
exceeded.
The interrupt/catch input
cannot receive short The input ON/OFF voltage level are not correct. Make sure of correct input voltage.
pulses.
Select Single-phase High-speed
30
Signals are not input to the Groups 1 through 5.
Frequency measurement Counter in the Groups 1 through 5.
Troubleshooting
does not work. The function settings in WindLDR is not configured Specify the used group in the
correctly. frequency measurement settings.
SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual 30-7
3 Handling Problems
30-8 SmartAXIS Touch User's Manual
Appendix
This chapter contains the Color Number Correspondence Table, and describes details about the Color Palette and
other settings used in WindO/I-NV3.
1 Color Number Correspondence Table
This table is used when using Message Display and Script. Select a value from the Data column of the table and you
can change the display color of an object.
Color No. Data Color No. Data Color No. Data Color No. Data Color No. Data Color No. Data
041 0x29 083 0x53 125 0x7D 167 0xA7 209 0xD1
000 0x00 042 0x2A 084 0x54 126 0x7E 168 0xA8 210 0xD2
001 0x01 043 0x2B 085 0x55 127 0x7F 169 0xA9 211 0xD3
002 0x02 044 0x2C 086 0x56 128 0x80 170 0xAA 212 0xD4
003 0x03 045 0x2D 087 0x57 129 0x81 171 0xAB 213 0xD5
004 0x04 046 0x2E 088 0x58 130 0x82 172 0xAC 214 0xD6
005 0x05 047 0x2F 089 0x59 131 0x83 173 0xAD 215 0xD7
006 0x06 048 0x30 090 0x5A 132 0x84 174 0xAE 216 0xD8
007 0x07 049 0x31 091 0x5B 133 0x85 175 0xAF 217 0xD9
008 0x08 050 0x32 092 0x5C 134 0x86 176 0xB0 218 0xDA
009 0x09 051 0x33 093 0x5D 135 0x87 177 0xB1 219 0xDB
010 0x0A 052 0x34 094 0x5E 136 0x88 178 0xB2 220 0xDC
011 0x0B 053 0x35 095 0x5F 137 0x89 179 0xB3 221 0xDD
012 0x0C 054 0x36 096 0x60 138 0x8A 180 0xB4 222 0xDE
013 0x0D 055 0x37 097 0x61 139 0x8B 181 0xB5 223 0xDF
014 0x0E 056 0x38 098 0x62 140 0x8C 182 0xB6 224 0xE0
015 0x0F 057 0x39 099 0x63 141 0x8D 183 0xB7 225 0xE1
016 0x10 058 0x3A 100 0x64 142 0x8E 184 0xB8 226 0xE2
017 0x11 059 0x3B 101 0x65 143 0x8F 185 0xB9 227 0xE3
018 0x12 060 0x3C 102 0x66 144 0x90 186 0xBA 228 0xE4
019 0x13 061 0x3D 103 0x67 145 0x91 187 0xBB 229 0xE5
020 0x14 062 0x3E 104 0x68 146 0x92 188 0xBC 230 0xE6
021 0x15 063 0x3F 105 0x69 147 0x93 189 0xBD 231 0xE7
022 0x16 064 0x40 106 0x6A 148 0x94 190 0xBE 232 0xE8
023 0x17 065 0x41 107 0x6B 149 0x95 191 0xBF 233 0xE9
024 0x18 066 0x42 108 0x6C 150 0x96 192 0xC0 234 0xEA
025 0x19 067 0x43 109 0x6D 151 0x97 193 0xC1 235 0xEB
026 0x1A 068 0x44 110 0x6E 152 0x98 194 0xC2 236 0xEC
027 0x1B 069 0x45 111 0x6F 153 0x99 195 0xC3 237 0xED
028 0x1C 070 0x46 112 0x70 154 0x9A 196 0xC4 238 0xEE Appendix
029 0x1D 071 0x47 113 0x71 155 0x9B 197 0xC5 239 0xEF
030 0x1E 072 0x48 114 0x72 156 0x9C 198 0xC6 240 0xF0
031 0x1F 073 0x49 115 0x73 157 0x9D 199 0xC7 241 0xF1
032 0x20 074 0x4A 116 0x74 158 0x9E 200 0xC8 242 0xF2
033 0x21 075 0x4B 117 0x75 159 0x9F 201 0xC9 243 0xF3
034 0x22 076 0x4C 118 0x76 160 0xA0 202 0xCA 244 0xF4
035 0x23 077 0x4D 119 0x77 161 0xA1 203 0xCB 245 0xF5
036 0x24 078 0x4E 120 0x78 162 0xA2 204 0xCC 246 0xF6
037 0x25 079 0x4F 121 0x79 163 0xA3 205 0xCD 255 0xF7
038 0x26 080 0x50 122 0x7A 164 0xA4 206 0xCE
039 0x27 081 0x51 123 0x7B 165 0xA5 207 0xCF
040 0x28 082 0x52 124 0x7C 166 0xA6 208 0xD0
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-1
2 Color Palette
2 Color Palette
The Color Palette is used to select colors for drawing objects, text on parts, outlines, flanges, plates and other objects.
The Color Palette appears when you click on the Color button in the object’s Properties dialog box.
● Functions of Color Palette buttons
■ Color
Selects a color. Clicking these buttons sets the Color button to the selected color.
■ >>More, <<Less
Switches the palette display. Clicking >> More shows all the colors assignable to the Color button. Clicking <<
Less shows only the basic colors assignable to the Color button.
■ TMC
This feature allows use of the text color specified in Text Manager. Click this button to use the text color specified in
Text Manager. The TMC button appears on the Color Palette only if the Use Text Manager check box is selected.
● Color Palette Types
The type of color palette shown varies based on the series being used.
■ 256 Color Palette*1
<< Less button
Color buttons >> More button
TMC button
■ 8 shades Monochrome Palette*2
<< Less button
Color buttons >> More button
TMC button
*1 Color LCD models only
*2 Monochrome LCD models only
A-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
3 Pattern Palette
3 Pattern Palette
The Pattern Palette is used to select patterns for drawing objects, part outlines, flanges, and other objects.
The Pattern Palette appears when you click on the Pattern button in the object’s Properties dialog box.
Click the Pattern button and select a pattern.
Drawings
Pattern buttons
Parts
Pattern buttons
● Foreground and Background Colors
Drawing objects, part outlines and flanges are formed by foreground and background colors.
The selected pattern is applied to the foreground color.
Foreground color
Background color
The background color is visible through the unpainted parts of the foreground color.
● Patterns
These patterns are available on WindO/I-NV3.
Foreground Foreground Foreground Background
Pattern name None*1
100% 25% 50% 100%
Pattern buttons
Display sample
Appendix
Horizontal Slant
Pattern name Vertical lines Slant Upwards Crosshatch Tint
lines Downwards
Pattern buttons
Display sample
*1 None can only be applied to drawing objects. Selecting None is the same as not applying any color at all.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-3
4 Text Alignment
4 Text Alignment
Text Alignment is used to adjust the way text appears on Drawing Objects and Parts.
● Horizontal Writing
These examples show how text appears using different combinations of the Align Text Horizontal and Align Text
Vertical properties.
Align Text Horizontal
Left Center Right Center-Left
Top ---
Center
Align Text
(Center-
Vertical
Top)
Bottom ---
■ Align Text Vertical
Top: Aligns the text along the top edge.
Aligns text along top edge
Center (Center-Top): Centers the text vertically in the center.
Centers text in the middle
Bottom: Aligns the text along the bottom edge.
Aligns text along bottom edge
A-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
4 Text Alignment
■ Align Text Horizontal
Left: Aligns the text along the left edge.
Aligns along left edge
Center: Centers the text horizontally in the center.
Centers text in the middle
Right: Aligns the text along the right edge.
Aligns along right edge
Center-Left: Centers the line containing the most number of characters, and then aligns the other lines
to the left end of that line.
Aligns to left end of line with most characters
Centers line with most characters
If Align Text Horizontal is set to Center-Left, Align Text Vertical will automatically be set to Center-
Top. Center-Top results in the same display as Center.
● Vertical Writing
These examples show how text appears for Align Text Horizontal.
Align Text Vertical defaults to Top.
Align Text Horizontal
Left Center Right
Appendix
Align
Text Top
Vertical
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-5
4 Text Alignment
■ Align Text Horizontal
Left: Aligns the text along the left edge.
Aligns along left edge
Center: Centers the text horizontally in the center.
Centers text in the middle
Right: Aligns the text along the right edge.
Aligns along right edge
Take note of these points when the Vertical Writing check box is selected:
• When there is a mixture of double-byte and single-byte characters, the half-width characters are left
aligned.
Aligned to
left edge
• Dashes are displayed horizontally. Symbols representing voiced and semi-voiced sounds of single-byte
characters are shown as follows.
Horizontal
display
Next
characters
A-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Ladder Program
5 Ladder Program
This section describes details on ladder program processing, instruction execution times, and the byte count for
instructions.
5.1 Processing in One Scan
While the Touch is running, the Touch performs operations repeatedly such as input refreshing, ladder program
processing, and error checking. A scan is the execution of all instructions from the first line of the ladder program to
the END instruction. The time required for this execution is referred to as one scan time. The scan time varies with
respect to program length.
The current value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8023 (scan time current value), and the
maximum value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8024 (scan time maximum value).
5.2 Executing Program Instructions
During the scan time, the ladder program is executed sequentially from the top to the bottom except when interrupt
programs are executed. One scan time of a ladder program is approximately equal to the total of execution time of
each instruction.
For the instruction execution times, refer to “5.4 Execution Times for Instructions” on page A-8.
When the processing time for one scan exceeds the specified time, a watch dog timer error occurs and the
system is reset. For details on the watchdog timer, refer to Chapter 3 “4.14 Watchdog Timer Setting” on
page 3-82.
5.3 Breakdown of END Processing Time
With the Touch, processing that occurs outside ladder program processing is referred to as END processing. This
includes the processing for I/O refreshing and error checking.
Item END Processing Time
Housekeeping (built-in I/O service) 5 msec min.
Appendix
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-7
5 Ladder Program
5.4 Execution Times for Instructions
Device and Execution Device and Execution
Instruction Instruction
Condition Time (μs) Condition Time (μs)
― 1.58 TCCST (D) D→T 85.5
LOD, LODN Using data CMP (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (W, I) D↔D→M 47.0
2.71
register CMP (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (D, L) D↔D→M 127.5
― 1.13 CMP (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (F) D↔D→M 127.5
OUT, OUTN Using data ICMP (≥) D↔D↔D→M 169.5
2.17
register
LC (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (W, I) D↔D 5.0
― 1.08
LC (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (D, L) D↔D 86.5
SET, RST Using data
2.17 LC (=, <>, <, >, ≤, ≥) (F) D↔D 86.5
register
M+M→D 86.5
― 0.81 ADD (W, I)
D+D→D 47.3
AND, ANDN, OR, ORN Using data
2.46 M+M→D 166.3
register
ADD (D, L)
AND·LOD, OR·LOD ― 0.85 D+D→D 167.3
BPS ― 0.99 ADD (F) D+D→D 171.9
BRD ― 0.99 M-M→D 86.5
SUB (W, I)
BPP ― 0.99 D-D→D 47.3
SOTU, SOTD ― 2.16 M-M→D 166.3
SUB (D, L)
TML, TIM, TMH, TMS ― 5.45 D-D→D 167.3
TMLO, TIMO, TMHO, TMSO ― 5.45 SUB (F) D-D→D 171.9
CNT, CDP, CUD ― 4.33 M×M→D 86.5
MUL (W, I)
CNTD, CDPD, CUDD ― 126.1 D×D→D 47.3
SFR, SFRN N bits 42.7+0.4n M×M→D 166.3
MUL (D, L)
CC=, CC≥ ― 2.38 D×D→D 167.3
DC=, DC≥ ― 2.94 MUL (F) D×D→D 171.9
MCS, MCR, JMP, JEND ― ― M÷M→D 86.5
DIV (W, I)
END ― ― D÷D→D 9.3
NOP ― ― M÷M→D 166.3
DIV (D, L)
M→M 44.7 D÷D→D 167.3
MOV, MOVN (W, I)
D→D 4.3 DIV (F) D÷D→D 171.9
M→M 84.5 INC (W, I) ― 44.7
MOV, MOVN (D, L)
D→D 84.5 INC (D, L) ― 124.5
MOV (F) ― 84.5 DEC (W, I) ― 44.7
M+D→M+D 48.4 DEC (D, L) ― 124.5
IMOV, IMOVN (W) ROOT (W) 5.5
D+D→D+D 7.7 D →D
IMOV, IMOVN (D) D+D→D+D 87.9 ROOT (D) D →D 86.7
ROOT (F) D →D 886.5
IMOV (F) ― 87.9
SUM (W, I) D, D→D 47.6+1.1n
M+D→M+D 47.5
IBMV, IBMVN SUM (D, L) D, D→D 90.5+41.5n
D+D→D+D 47.5
SUM (F) D, D→D 90.5+45.0n
BMOV D→D 90.3+1.4n
M·M→D, 46.1
NSET (W, I) D→D 1.8+2.5n ANDW, ORW, XORW (W)
D·D→D 5.7
NSET (D, L) D→D 1.8+83.0n
ANDW, ORW, XORW (D) D·D→D 127.1
NSET (F) D→D 1.8+83.0n
SFTL, SFTR N_B=100 56.1
NRS (W, I) D, D→D 16.5
BCDLS D→DS1=1 49.9
NRS (D, L) D, D→D 732.5
WSFT D→D 91.3
NRS (F) D, D→D 732.5
ROTL, ROTR D, bits=1 44.9
XCHG D↔D 5.1
HTOB D→D 10.5
TCCST (W) D→T 4.81
A-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Ladder Program
Device and Execution Device and Execution
Instruction Instruction
Condition Time (μs) Condition Time (μs)
BTOH D→D 11.1 NDSRC (D, L) D, D, D→D 782.5
HTOA D→D 13.7 NDSRC (F) D, D, D→D 782.5
ATOH D→D 6.0 TADD ― 54.4
BTOA D→D 13.7 TSUB ― 54.4
ATOB D→D 56.3 HOUR D→D, Y, D 20.6
ENCO M→Dbits=16 6.9 HTOS ― 52.7
DECO D→M 50.0 STOH D→D 92.1
BCNT M→Dbits=16 ―
ALT ― 42.7
W, I, D, L→F 53.0
CVDT
F→W, I, D, L 56.3
DTDV D→D 8.9
DTCB D→D 10.4
SWAP (W) ― 8.9
SWAP (D) ― 89.7
WEEK ― ―
YEAR ― ―
LABEL ― ―
LJMP ― ―
LCAL ― ―
LRET ― ―
DJNZ ― ―
IOREF ― 46.8
HSCRF ― 46.8
DI ― 90.3
EI ― 54.1
XYFS ― ―
CVXTY ― ―
CVYTX ― ―
AVRG (W, I) S3=10 6.38
AVRG (D, L) S3=10 49.5
AVRG (F) S3=10 55.1
DTML, DTIM, DTMH ― 60.2
DTMS ― 63.0
Appendix
TTIM ― 60.3
RAD F→F 143.9
DEG F→F 143.9
SIN, COS F→F 161.1
TAN F→F 149.1
ASIN, ACOS F→F 618.9
ATAN F→F 616.5
LOGE, LOG10 F→F 206.0
EXP F→F 172.5
POW F→F 191.0
FIFOF ― 129.0
FIEX ― 129.0
FOEX ― 129.0
NDSRC (W, I) D, D, D→D 19.5
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-9
5 Ladder Program
5.5 Instruction Bytes
The quantities of bytes of basic and advanced instructions are listed below.
● Basic Instruction
Qty of Bytes Qty of Bytes
Basic Basic
When not using Using data Instruction When not using Using data
Instruction
data registers registers data registers registers
LOD 4 8 TMLO 8 ―
LODN 4 8 TIMO 8 ―
OUT 4 8 TMHO 8 ―
OUTN 4 8 TMSO 8 ―
SET 4 8 CNT 8 ―
RST 4 8 CDP 8 ―
AND 4 8 CUD 8 ―
ANDN 4 8 CNTD 8 ―
OR 4 8 CDPD 8 ―
ORN 4 8 CUDD 8 ―
AND·LOD 4 ― SFR 8 ―
OR·LOD 4 ― SFRN 8 ―
BPS 4 ― CC= 8 ―
BRD 4 ― CC>= 8 ―
BPP 4 ― DC= 8 ―
SOTU 4 ― DC>= 8 ―
SOTD 4 ― MCS 4 ―
TML 8 ― MCR 4 ―
TIM 8 ― JMP 4 ―
TMH 8 ― JEND 4 ―
TMS 8 ― END 4 ―
● Advanced Instruction
Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes
NOP 4 SFTL, SFTR 12
MOV, MOVN 12 to 16 BCDLS 12 to 16
IMOV, IMOVN 16 WSFT 12 to 20
IBMV, IBMVN 16 to 24 ROTL, ROTR 12
BMOV 12 to 16 HTOB, BTOH 12 to 16
NSET 12 to 1,540 HTOA 12 to 20
NRS 12 to 20 ATOH 12 to 20
XCHG 12 to 16 BTOA 12 to 20
TCCST 12 to 16 ATOB 12 to 20
CMP (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) 16 to 24 ENCO 12 to 16
ICMP>= 16 to 28 DECO 12 to 16
LC (=, <>, <, >, <=, >=) 12 to 20 BCNT 12 to 20
ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV 16 to 24 ALT 8
INC, DEC 8 CVDT 12 to 20
ROOT 12 to 20 DTDV 12 to 16
SUM 16 to 20 DTCB 12 to 16
ANDW, ORW, XORW 16 to 24 SWAP 12 to 16
A-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
5 Ladder Program
Advanced Instruction Qty of Bytes
WEEK 20 to 532
YEAR 24 to 216
LABEL 8
LJMP 8 to 12
LCAL 8 to 12
LRET 8
DJNZ 12 to 16
IOREF 12
HSCRF 8
DI 8
EI 8
XYFS 20 to 268
CVXTY, CVYTX 16 to 20
AVRG 16 to 24
DTML, DTIM, DTMH, DTMS 16 to 20
TTIM 8 to 12
RAD 12 to 16
DEG 12 to 16
SIN 12 to 16
COS 12 to 16
TAN 12 to 16
ASIN 12 to 16
ACOS 12 to 16
ATAN 12 to 16
LOGE 12 to 16
LOG10 12 to 16
EXP 12 to 16
POW 12 to 24
FIFOF 20 to 24
FIEX 12
FOEX 12
NDSRC 16 to 24
TADD 16 to 20
TSUB 16 to 20
HOUR 16 to 24 Appendix
HTOS 12 to 16
STOH 12 to 16
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-11
6 USB Driver
6 USB Driver
6.1 Installing the USB Driver
Before the Touch can be connected to a computer, it is necessary to install WindO/I-NV3 If you connect
Touch to the computer before installing the driver, an error message will appear prompting you to install
the driver software. In this case, clear the error and install the driver.
● Windows 7, Windows Vista
The USB interface supports both the 64-bit and 32-bit editions of Windows 7, and the 32-bit edition of
Windows Vista. It does not support the 64-bit edition of Windows Vista.
Follow these steps to install the USB driver.
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface on the Touch (with power supplied) and the USB port on the computer
(computer should be on).
Computer Touch
To USB port To USB interface
A plug USB cable Mini-B plug
If running Windows Vista, the following dialog box appears.
Click Ask me again later.
A-12 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 USB Driver
2 Call up Device Manager.
■ Windows 7
Click the Start button, Control Panel, System and Security, and then Device Manager.
■ Windows Vista
Click the Start button, Control Panel, System and Maintenance, System, and then Device Manager.
If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed, click Continue.
3 Right-click on IDEC HG Series under Other devices, then click Update Driver Software...
If connecting the Touch to a computer running Windows 7 32-bit edition and IDEC HG Series is not shown Appendix
under Other devices, check Ports (COM LPT). If IDEC USB CDC ACM. (XXXX) (XXXX is the port
name) is shown, the USB driver is already installed.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-13
6 USB Driver
4 Click Browse my computer for driver software if using Windows Vista / the 64-bit edition of Windows 7 or
Search automatically for updated driver software if using the 32-bit edition of Windows 7.
If using the 32-bit edition of Windows 7, go to step 8.
32-bit edition of
Windows 7
64-bit edition of
Windows 7
Windows Vista
5 Click Browse... next to Search for driver software in this location:
A-14 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 USB Driver
6 Specify the folder to save the USB driver, and then click OK.
• The USB driver is located in these folders on the Automation Organizer Application CD. (Ver. 1.30 or later)
Windows 7 64-bit edition: \Driver\HG3G\Win7 64-bit
Windows 7 32-bit edition and Windows Vista: \Driver\HG3G\WinVISTA_7 32-bit
• The USB driver may also be downloaded from the website (http://www.idec.com/).
7 Click Next.
Appendix
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-15
6 USB Driver
8 Click Install this driver software anyway.
The USB driver installation begins.
9 Click Close.
IDEC USB CDC ACM. appears if the USB driver installs properly.
A-16 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 USB Driver
To uninstall the Windows 7 64-bit edition version of the USB driver
The Windows 7 64-bit edition version of the USB driver cannot be completely uninstalled even if you delete the USB
driver IDEC USB CDC ACM.(XXXX) (where XXXX is the port name) from Device Manager. Follow these steps to
delete all USB driver files to uninstall it completely, then reinstall it.
1 Launch Windows Explorer.
2 Click Computer, C:, Windows, and then inf.
3 Enter IDEC in the search box.
The file oem**.inf (** denotes a number) will appear.
If the file extension is not displayed, change the display settings as follows.
(1) Click Organize - Folder and Search Options.
The Folder Options dialog box is displayed.
(2) On the View tab, deselect Hide extensions for known file types.
Appendix
(3) Click OK.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-17
6 USB Driver
4 Delete oem**.inf.
Right-click on oem**.inf, and then click Delete or press DELETE on the keyboard.
The File Access Denied dialog box appears.
If Windows cannot find oem**.inf, change the settings as follows.
(1) Click Organize, and then click Folder and Search Options.
The Folder Options dialog box is displayed.
(2) On the Search tab, click Always search file names and contents under What to
search.
(3) Click OK.
5 Click Continue.
6 This will reinstall the USB driver.
A-18 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 USB Driver
● Windows XP
Follow these steps to install the USB driver.
1 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface on the Touch (with power supplied) and the USB port on the computer
(computer should be on).
A message Found New Hardware appears, followed by the Found New Hardware Wizard.
Computer Touch
To USB port To USB interface
A plug USB cable Mini-B plug
2 Select No, not this time, and then click Next.
3 Select Install the software automatically (Recommended), and then click Next.
The Hardware Installation dialog box is displayed.
Appendix
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-19
6 USB Driver
4 Click Continue Anyway.
The USB driver installation begins.
If the Hardware Installation dialog box is not displayed and the installation aborts, check the Driver
Signing Options.
For details, refer to “Changing driver signing options” on page A-21.
5 Click Finish.
“IDEC USB CDC ACM.” will appear if the USB driver installs properly.
A-20 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
6 USB Driver
Changing driver signing options
If the USB driver installation stops before it is complete, follow these steps to check the driver signing options.
1 Click the Start button, Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, and then System.
The System Properties dialog box is displayed.
2 Click Driver Signing on the Hardware tab.
3 Select Warn under the label What action do you want Windows to take?, and then click OK.
Appendix
If Block is selected, the Hardware Installation dialog box is not displayed and installation stops.
4 Click OK on the System Properties dialog box.
5 Click (Close) on the Control Panel.
To reinstall the USB driver, disconnect the USB cable from the USB interface on the Touch and from the USB
port on the computer. Reinstall by referring to “Windows XP” on page A-19.
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual A-21
6 USB Driver
6.2 Checking the USB Driver
Follow these steps to confirm that the USB driver was installed properly, and that the computer recognizes Touch
correctly.
1 Call up Device Manager.
■ Windows 7
Click the Start button, Control Panel, System and Security, and then Device Manager.
■ Windows Vista
Click the Start button, Control Panel, System and Maintenance, System, and then Device Manager.
If the User Account Control dialog box is displayed, click Continue.
■ Windows XP
(1) Click the Start button, Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance, and then System.
The System Properties dialog box is displayed.
(2) Click Device Manager on the Hardware tab.
2 Click Ports (COM & LPT).
If “IDEC USB CDC ACM.(XXXX)” (XXXX is the port name) is displayed as the device name, the USB driver is already
installed and the computer recognizes the Touch.
• The device name will disappear if the USB cable is disconnected or the Touch power is turned off.
• When the Touch power is turned on and the USB cable is connected, the words Unknown Device or a
? may appear in place of the device name, indicating the computer may not be recognizing the USB
driver correctly. Disconnect the USB cable and turn the Touch power off. Then turn the Touch power on
again and connect the USB cable to check that the computer recognizes the USB driver. If the computer
still does not recognize the USB driver, uninstall it from Device Manager and reinstall it.
A-22 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Index
Numerics Backlight color .....................................................................4‐15
Backlight OFF ......................................................................4‐16
1:1 Communication ................................................... 22‐2, 22‐4
Bar Chart .............................................................................10‐1
1:N Communication ................................................... 22‐2, 22‐5
Base Screen .........................................................................4‐14
256 Color Palette .................................................................. A‐2
Basic Instruction ......................................................12‐13, A‐10
8 shades Monochrome Palette ............................................ A‐2 Batch
Alarm Log Function .......................................... 13‐6, 13‐32
A Alarm Log Settings ....................................................13‐21
Data Log Settings ......................................................14‐17
Active User ...........................................................................2‐54 Operation Log Settings ..............................................15‐15
Add ..................................................... 7‐19, 7‐22, 11‐10, 11‐13 Batch Monitor ....................................................................24‐14
Adding a Security Group ...................................................21‐15 Bit Button ...............................................................................7‐1
Additional fonts ..................................................................23‐15 Bit Devices ...........................................................................27‐1
Adjust Brightness Screen ....................................................28‐2 Bit Functions .......................................................... 20‐16, 20‐34
Adjust Contrast Screen .......................................................28‐2 Bit Number Symbol .............................................................2‐58
Adjusting Screen Brightness ...............................................28‐2 Bit operator ........................................................................20‐16
Administrator .......................................................................21‐4 Bit Write Command .............................................................11‐1
Advanced Instruction ..............................................12‐17, A‐10 Bitwise Operators ..............................................................20‐32
Alarm Display .......................................................................7‐67 Blink .....................................................................................4‐16
Alarm List Display ...................................................... 7‐65, 9‐83 Blinking Cycle ......................................................................3‐21
Alarm Log Display ...................................................... 7‐65, 9‐99 Block Settings ....................................................................13‐18
Alarm Log Function .............................................................13‐1 Block Tab ...........................................................................18‐10
Alarm Log Settings dialog box ..........................................13‐13 Breakdown of END Processing Time ....................................A‐7
Alarm States ........................................................................13‐3
C
Alarm Tab ..........................................................................9‐132
Alternate ...........................................7‐2, 7‐5, 7‐18, 7‐22, 7‐70 Calendar .............................................................................9‐129
Always Entry Mode ..............................................................3‐20 Catch Input ..........................................................................3‐69
Analog Input ........................................................................3‐78 Change User Account Dialog Box .....................................21‐32
AND .................................................... 7‐19, 7‐22, 11‐10, 11‐13 Changing the Name of a Security Group .........................21‐16
Application Menu .................................................................2‐38 Channel Settings ...............................................................13‐19
Arc ........................................................................................6‐13 Channel Tab ......................................................................13‐16
Arithmetic Formulas ................................................9‐18, 9‐126 Alarm Log Settings ....................................................13‐16
Recipe Settings ..........................................................18‐12
Arithmetic operation ..........................................................20‐16
Character Code Table .........................................................2‐15
Arithmetic Operators .............................................20‐15, 20‐31
Character Input ...................................................................9‐23
Arrange ................................................................................2‐49
Index
Character Input Keypad ......................................................7‐63
Auto Backlight OFF ..............................................................3‐18
Character string operation ................................................20‐18
Auto-change IME .................................................................2‐58
Charts ...................................................................................10‐1
Automation Organizer Updater dialog box .........................2‐35
Checking the USB Driver .....................................................A‐22
Autorun Tab .........................................................................3‐39
Circle ....................................................................................6‐10
Auto-Setup dialog box
Alarm Log Settings .....................................................13‐18 Clear ...................................................................................23‐22
Data Log Settings ......................................................14‐21 Clear Data from the Touch ...............................................23‐22
Available Updates ................................................................2‐35
Clipboard ..............................................................................2‐42
Clock Function .....................................................................3‐85
B
Closing Screens .....................................................................4‐6
Background Colors ............................................................... A‐3 Color Number Correspondence Table ..................................A‐1
Backlight ..............................................................................3‐18 Color Palette ..........................................................................A‐2
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual Index-1
Index
Command Settings Dialog Box .........................................22‐26 Control Statements ............................................... 20‐14, 20‐22
Commands ...........................................................................11‐1 Converting Project Data for Transfer .................................25‐2
Comment ...........................................................................20‐21 Counting the Operation Count ............................................17‐2
Comment Tab Counting the Operation Time .............................................17‐2
Alarm List Display ........................................................9‐98
Creating a New User Communication Protocol ................22‐11
Alarm Log Display ......................................................9‐113
Bar Chart ....................................................................10‐18 Creating a screen ..................................................................4‐2
Bit Button .....................................................................7‐16 Creating a USB Autorun Definition File (Text editor) ......26‐22
Bit Write .......................................................................11‐8
Calendar .....................................................................9‐141 Creating a User Account .....................................................21‐8
Character Input ............................................................9‐36 Creating New Project Data ...................................................3‐1
Goto Screen Button .....................................................7‐48 Creating Recipe Files .........................................................18‐17
Goto Screen Command ..............................................11‐24
Key Button ....................................................................7‐62 Creating Text Groups ..........................................................19‐3
Line Chart ...................................................................10‐38 Creation Ladder Program ....................................................12‐5
Message Display ...........................................................9‐68
Custom Monitor ...................................................................24‐7
Message Switching Display .........................................9‐82
Meter ..........................................................................10‐58
Multi-Button ..................................................................7‐81 D
Multi-Command ..........................................................11‐37
Multi-State Lamp ..........................................................8‐25 Data .....................................................................................2‐65
Numerical Display ......................................................9‐128 Data comparison and copy ...............................................20‐18
Numerical Input ...........................................................9‐20
Data Configuration
Picture Display .............................................................9‐52
Alarm Log Function ......................................................13‐5
Pie Chart .....................................................................10‐47
Data Log Function .......................................................14‐5
Pilot Lamp ....................................................................8‐13
Operation Log Function ...............................................15‐4
Potentiometer ............................................................7‐110
Recipe Function ...........................................................18‐3
Script Command ........................................................11‐30
Selector Switch ...........................................................7‐100 Data Displays .........................................................................9‐1
Timer ..........................................................................11‐43 Data for Recipes ..................................................................18‐2
Word Button .................................................................7‐34
Data Labels dialog box ......................................................15‐12
Write Command .........................................................11‐17
Data Log Function ...............................................................14‐1
Communicate with ...............................................................23‐5
Data Log Settings dialog box ............................................14‐12
Communicating with the Touch ..........................................23‐1
Data Over Tab
Communication ....................................................................2‐46
Bar Chart ......................................................................10‐9
Communication Driver .........................................................2‐54 Line Chart ...................................................................10‐31
Communication Driver Extension Tab ................................3‐34 Numerical Display ......................................................9‐121
Numerical Input ...........................................................9‐12
Communication Driver Network Tab ..................................3‐33
Data Settings Dialog Box ...................................... 14‐21, 22‐36
Communication Driver Tab .................................................3‐31
Data Size ..............................................................................2‐54
Communication Interface Tab ............................................3‐26 Data Storage Amount
Communication Settings ................................. 23‐5, 26‐3, 26‐7 Alarm Log Function ......................................................13‐7
Compatible Data ................................................................12‐28 Data Log Function .......................................................14‐6
Operation Log Function ...............................................15‐6
Compatible USB Bar Code Readers ..................................22‐73
Data Storage Area ...............................................................16‐1
Completed Device .............................................................22‐27
Data Storage Area Management dialog box ......................16‐4
Conditional branching .......................................................20‐14 Data Tab
Configuration .......................................................................2‐45 Bar Chart ......................................................................10‐5
Data Log Settings ......................................................14‐19
Confirmed ............................................................................13‐3
Recipe Settings ..........................................................18‐13
Connect Touch to a Computer ............................................23‐4
Data Transfer .............................................................. 1‐6, 7‐66
Connection Diagram for User Communication .................22‐73
Data Transfer Function .......................................................25‐1
Constant .............................................................................20‐21
Data type conversion ........................................................20‐17
Contents Tab .......................................................................3‐41
Daylight Savings Time ........................................................3‐84
Control Device Addresses
Debugging in WindO/I-NV3 ................................................24‐4
Bit Devices ....................................................................27‐4
Word Devices .............................................................27‐11 Default Gateway ..................................................................3‐28
Control Devices Default Path .........................................................................2‐59
Keep and Clear .............................................................3‐50
Deleting a Security Group .................................................21‐17
Control Function ..................................................................12‐1
Index-2 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Index
Deleting a User Account ...................................................21‐14 Enable Maintenance ............................................................3‐19
Deleting Data Enable Text Auto Resizing ..................................................2‐58
Alarm Log Function ......................................................13‐8
Enable Two-point Push .......................................................3‐19
Data Log Function ........................................................14‐6
Operation Log Function ...............................................15‐6 ENT button .......................................................... 9‐6, 9‐7, 9‐27
Deleting Data from an External Memory Inserted in the Touch ....23‐24 Enter Password Dialog Box ...............................................21‐38
Deleting Files on the USB Flash Drive ..............................26‐13 Equilateral Polygons ............................................................6‐18
Deleting Recipe Files .........................................................18‐22 Error Information ................................................................30‐3
Deleting Screens ..................................................................4‐10 Error Messages ....................................................................30‐1
Device Address ..................................................................20‐21 Errors Displayed on the Screen ..........................................30‐1
Maximum Number of External Devices .............3‐88, 4‐28 Ethernet ........................................................... 3‐28, 3‐29, 23‐6
Device Address Settings ......................................................2‐62
Event Name .......................................................................15‐13
Device cache ......................................................................20‐51
Example of User Communication Settings .......................22‐68
Device Monitor ...................................................................24‐19
Executing and Stopping Ladder Programs .........................12‐3
Disable Switch .....................................................................3‐21
Executing commands using the USB Autorun function ...26‐19
Display Block No. ...............................................................9‐110
Executing Program Instructions ...........................................A‐7
Display side by side .............................................................2‐53
Execution Times for Instructions ..........................................A‐8
Display the Order of Overlapping Screens .........................4‐16
Exit WindLDR .....................................................................12‐12
Display the Value of Device in Popup ..............................24‐16
External Device Monitor ....................................................24‐15
Display with Arithmetic Operation ..........................9‐18, 9‐126
External Memory .................................................................23‐6
Div ...................................................... 7‐19, 7‐22, 11‐10, 11‐13
External Memory Devices ...................................................26‐1
DM Link Communication .....................................................22‐4
External Memory Information Dialog Box ........................23‐30
Docking ................................................................................2‐50
External Memory Tab ..........................................................3‐38
Download .............................................................................3‐88 Alarm Log Setting ......................................................13‐20
Download Data ..................................................................23‐13 Data Log Settings ......................................................14‐16
Operation Log Settings ..............................................15‐14
Download Dialog Box ........................................................23‐13
Downloading ......................................................................23‐11 F
Downloading files
Downloader ..................................................................26‐6 File structure
USB flash drive .............................................................26‐4 USB flash drive .............................................................26‐2
Downloading Files to an External Memory Inserted in the Touch ....23‐16 Fill .........................................................................................6‐21
Downloading Project Data Floating windows .................................................................2‐50
USB flash drive .............................................................26‐7
Focus Order ............................................................... 4‐16, 4‐24
Downloading Project Data to the Touch ..........................23‐11
Font Assignment ..................................................................2‐60
Downloading Project Files ...................................................25‐5
Font Information Dialog Box ............................................23‐30
Draw ...................................................................................20‐19
Font Size ................................................................................2‐9
Draw Objects .........................................................................5‐1
Fonts installed in the Touch .................................................2‐6
Drawings ......................................................................2‐42, 6‐1
Foreground Colors .................................................................A‐3
Duplicating Screens ...............................................................4‐8
Index
Format ..................................................................... 2‐48, 23‐26
E Arrange .........................................................................2‐49
Shape Style ..................................................................2‐48
Size ...............................................................................2‐49
Editing ..................................................................................2‐44
Text Style .....................................................................2‐49
Editing a User Account ......................................................21‐12 Format List .........................................................................20‐14
Editing Recipe Data ...........................................................18‐14 Format Tab
Editing Recipe Files ...........................................................18‐21 Alarm List Display ........................................................9‐91
Alarm Log Display ......................................................9‐107
Editing window ....................................................................2‐53 Calendar .....................................................................9‐136
Ellipse ...................................................................................6‐10 Character Input ............................................................9‐30
Enable Increment Address ..................................................2‐58 Message Display ..........................................................9‐60
Message Switching Display .........................................9‐78
Enable Increment Station No. ............................................2‐58 Numerical Display ......................................................9‐120
Enable Low Battery Warning ..............................................3‐19 Numerical Input ...........................................................9‐10
Selector Switch ............................................................7‐95
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual Index-3
Index
Formatting an External Memory Inserted in the Touch ...23‐26 H
Formatting the USB Flash Drive .......................................26‐14
Halt and exit ......................................................................20‐15
Frequency Measurement .....................................................3‐74
Handling Problems ..............................................................30‐6
Function .............................................................................20‐16
Highlighting Objects While Satisfying Conditions ............24‐16
Function Area Settings ........................................................3‐43
High-quality Fonts ...............................................................2‐10
Function List ............................................................3‐42, 20‐10
High-Speed Counter ............................................................3‐52
G HMI Device Addresses
Bit Devices ....................................................................27‐1
Word Devices ...............................................................27‐8
General Error Codes ............................................................30‐3
General Tab Home ...................................................................................2‐42
Alarm List Display ........................................................9‐85 Horizontal Writing .................................................................A‐4
Alarm Log Display ......................................................9‐101
Alarm Log Settings .....................................................13‐13 I
Bar Chart ......................................................................10‐3
Base Screen ..................................................................4‐14
Image Files ..........................................................................2‐19
Bit Button .......................................................................7‐4
Bit Write .......................................................................11‐4 Image Name ........................................................................2‐61
Calendar .....................................................................9‐131 Importing Text from a Text List .........................................19‐8
Change User Account ................................................21‐32
Importing user communication protocol ..........................22‐20
Character Input ............................................................9‐25
Data Log Settings ......................................................14‐14 Indirect read ..........................................................................2‐5
Global Script ...............................................................20‐12 Indirect write .........................................................................2‐5
Goto Screen Button .....................................................7‐37
Individual Settings dialog box
Goto Screen Command ..............................................11‐20
Alarm List Display ........................................................9‐88
Key Button ....................................................................7‐51
Alarm Log Settings ....................................................13‐18
Line Chart ...................................................................10‐21
Data Log Settings ......................................................14‐14
Message Display ...........................................................9‐56
Preventive Maintenance Settings ................................17‐8
Message Switching Display .........................................9‐72
Recipe Settings ..........................................................18‐10
Meter ..........................................................................10‐50
Multi-Button ..................................................................7‐70 Input Filter ...........................................................................3‐76
Multi-Command ..........................................................11‐33 Input with Arithmetic Operation .........................................9‐18
Multi-State Lamp ..........................................................8‐16 Installed Fonts in the Touch .................................................2‐7
New User Account ......................................................21‐32
Installing the USB driver
Numerical Display ......................................................9‐116
Windows 7, Windows Vista .........................................A‐12
Numerical Input .............................................................9‐3
Windows XP .................................................................A‐19
Operation Log Settings ..............................................15‐10
Picture Display .............................................................9‐43 Instruction Bytes .................................................................A‐10
Pie Chart .....................................................................10‐41 Interface Configuration .......................................................3‐26
Pilot Lamp ......................................................................8‐3
Interface Settings ................................................................3‐27
Popup Screen ...............................................................4‐22
Potentiometer ............................................................7‐103 Internal Device ....................................................................27‐1
Script Command ........................................................11‐27 Interrupt Input ....................................................................3‐71
Selector Switch .............................................................7‐88
IP Address ...........................................................................3‐28
Timer ..........................................................................11‐40
User Accounts ............................................................21‐30 IP Address Manager ..........................................................23‐10
Word Button .................................................................7‐21
Write Command .........................................................11‐12 K
Global Script ......................................................................20‐12
Goto Screen Button .............................................................7‐35 Keep data error ...................................................................30‐4
Goto Screen Command .....................................................11‐18 Keep data sum check error .................................................30‐3
Gridlines Key Browser .........................................................................7‐66
Grid Settings .................................................................2‐55
Key Button ................................................................. 7‐49, 25‐5
Show/Hide ....................................................................2‐47
For Alarm Displays .......................................................7‐65
Snap to Grid .................................................................2‐54
For Data Transfer Keys ...............................................7‐65
Group Membership Tab
For Keypad ...................................................................7‐63
Change User Account ................................................21‐33
New User Account ......................................................21‐33 Keypad ....................................................................... 7‐66, 7‐82
Index-4 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Index
L Goto Screen Button .....................................................7‐47
Key Button ...................................................................7‐61
Multi-Button .................................................................7‐80
Label of Recorded Data ....................................................15‐12
Numerical Input ...........................................................9‐19
Ladder Instruction Reference ...........................................12‐13 Potentiometer ............................................................7‐109
Ladder Monitor ..................................................................24‐23 Selector Switch ............................................................7‐99
Word Button .................................................................7‐33
Ladder Program .................................................................... A‐7
No. ............................................................................. 4‐14, 4‐22
Ladder program (ROM) CRC error ......................................30‐4
Not Clear Completed Device automatically ......................22‐28
Ladder Program Actions ......................................................12‐1
Notch Settings dialog box ...................................................7‐92
Ladder Program Execution Error .................... 30‐3, 30‐4, 30‐5
Number of Blocks
Ladder program syntax error ....................................30‐3, 30‐4 Alarm Log Function ....................................................13‐16
Line ........................................................................................6‐1 Recipe Function ...........................................................18‐8
Line Chart ..........................................................................10‐19 Numerical Display ..............................................................9‐114
List Tab ................................................................................9‐87 Numerical Input ........................................................... 3‐20, 9‐1
Log Tab ..............................................................................9‐103 Numerical Input Keypad .....................................................7‐63
Log Trend ..............................................................10‐21, 10‐22
O
Logical Operators ..................................................20‐15, 20‐30
Low Battery Voltage ............................................................30‐2 O/I Link Communication .....................................................22‐3
O/I Link Slaves ....................................................................23‐6
M O/I Link Tab ........................................................................3‐35
Maintenance Screen ............................................................28‐1 Object List ............................................................................2‐60
Master IP Address ...............................................................23‐9 Occurred ..............................................................................13‐3
Maximum Number of Parts .................................................4‐27 Offset .................................................................................20‐20
Message Display ..................................................................9‐53 Online ...................................................................................2‐45
Message Switching Display .................................................9‐70 Online Function ...................................................................23‐1
Message Tab ........................................................................9‐74 Open Current Screens .......................................................24‐17
Meter ..................................................................................10‐48 Opening Project Data ............................................................3‐4
Minimize the Ribbon ............................................................2‐41 Opening Screens ...................................................................4‐2
Minimum System Requirements ...........................................2‐1 Operating Modes ...................................................................1‐6
Mod .................................................... 7‐19, 7‐22, 11‐10, 11‐13 Operation Count Tab ...........................................................17‐9
Mode ....................................................................................2‐54 Operation Log Function ......................................................15‐1
Momentary Operation Log Settings dialog box ...................................15‐10
....... 7‐2, 7‐5, 7‐18, 7‐22, 7‐70, 11‐1, 11‐4, 11‐10, 11‐12 Operation Time Tab ............................................................17‐8
Monitor Function .................................................................24‐1 Operator ........................................................ 2‐65, 20‐15, 21‐4
Monitor Mode .........................................................................1‐6 Options dialog box ............................................................23‐15
Monitoring on the Touch ...................................................24‐18 Options Tab
Alarm List Display ........................................................9‐94
Monitoring with WindO/I-NV3 ............................................24‐1
Alarm Log Display ......................................................9‐109
Index
Monitors ...............................................................................2‐46 Alarm Log Settings ....................................................13‐24
Move ............... 7‐2, 7‐5, 7‐18, 7‐21, 11‐2, 11‐5, 11‐10, 11‐12 Bar Chart ....................................................................10‐16
Base Screen .................................................................4‐15
Multi ................................................... 7‐19, 7‐22, 11‐10, 11‐13 Bit Button .....................................................................7‐14
Multi-Button ............................................................... 7‐68, 25‐5 Calendar .....................................................................9‐139
Multi-Command .......................................................11‐31, 25‐5 Character Input ............................................................9‐34
Data Log Settings ......................................................14‐22
Multi-State Lamps ...............................................................8‐14 Goto Screen Button .....................................................7‐46
Key Button ...................................................................7‐60
N Line Chart ...................................................................10‐36
Message Display ..........................................................9‐65
New User Account Dialog Box ..........................................21‐32 Message Switching Display .........................................9‐80
Meter ..........................................................................10‐56
No External Devices ............................................................22‐6
Multi-Button .................................................................7‐79
No Touch Sound Multi-State Lamp ..........................................................8‐23
Bit Button .....................................................................7‐15 Numerical Display ......................................................9‐125
Character Input ............................................................9‐35 Numerical Input ...........................................................9‐16
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual Index-5
Index
Picture Display .............................................................9‐50 Project ........................................................................ 2‐44, 3‐88
Pie Chart .....................................................................10‐45
Project Data ...........................................................................3‐1
Pilot Lamp ....................................................................8‐11
Popup Screen ...............................................................4‐23 Project Data Transfer Procedures ......................................25‐1
Potentiometer ............................................................7‐108 Project Details Tab ..............................................................3‐40
Selector Switch .............................................................7‐98
User Account ..............................................................21‐34 Project Recovery dialog box ...............................................2‐36
Word Button .................................................................7‐32 Project Settings ......................................................... 3‐17, 3‐18
OR ...................................................... 7‐19, 7‐22, 11‐10, 11‐13 Project Settings dialog box .................................................3‐18
Overlay .................................................................................4‐15 Project Transfer Function ...................................................25‐1
Properties dialog box
P Alarm List Display ........................................................9‐85
Alarm Log Display ......................................................9‐101
Parts .....................................................................................2‐43 Arc ................................................................................6‐14
Bar Chart ......................................................................10‐3
Parts List ..............................................................................2‐61
Bit Button .......................................................................7‐4
Password Input ..................................................................21‐36 Bit Write .......................................................................11‐4
Password Screen ...............................................................21‐37 Calendar .....................................................................9‐131
Character Input ............................................................9‐25
Pattern Palette ...................................................................... A‐3
Circle/Ellipse .................................................................6‐11
Patterns ................................................................................. A‐3 Equilateral Polygons ....................................................6‐19
Peak charts ..........................................................................10‐3 Fill .................................................................................6‐22
Goto Screen Button .....................................................7‐37
Pen (Device) Tab
Goto Screen Command .............................................11‐20
Line Chart ...................................................................10‐29
Key Button ...................................................................7‐51
Pen (Log) Tab
Keypad .........................................................................7‐84
Line Chart ...................................................................10‐27
Line .................................................................................6‐2
Pen Recorder .....................................................................10‐22 Line Chart ...................................................................10‐21
Picture ..........................................................................5‐2, 6‐23 Message Display ..........................................................9‐56
Message Switching Display .........................................9‐72
Picture Display .....................................................................9‐40
Meter ..........................................................................10‐50
Picture Manager ..................................................................2‐27 Multi-Button .................................................................7‐70
Picture Name Setting dialog box ........................................2‐33 Multi-Command ..........................................................11‐33
Multi-State Lamp ..........................................................8‐16
Picture Tab ...........................................................................3‐10
Numerical Display ......................................................9‐116
Pie ........................................................................................6‐15 Numerical Input .............................................................9‐3
Pie Chart ................................................................10‐39, 10‐42 Picture ..........................................................................6‐24
Picture Display .............................................................9‐43
Pilot Lamps ............................................................................8‐1 Pie .................................................................................6‐16
Plate Color ...........................................................................9‐66 Pie Chart .....................................................................10‐41
PLC Link Communication ....................................................22‐1 Pilot Lamp ......................................................................8‐3
Polygon ...........................................................................6‐6
Polygon ..................................................................................6‐5 Polyline ...........................................................................6‐4
Polyline ...................................................................................6‐3 Potentiometer ............................................................7‐103
Rectangle .......................................................................6‐8
Popup Screen .......................................................................4‐22
Script Command ........................................................11‐27
Port .......................................................................................23‐6 Selector Switch ............................................................7‐88
Position ................................................................................2‐54 Text ..............................................................................6‐26
Timer ..........................................................................11‐40
Potentiometer ....................................................................7‐101
Word Button .................................................................7‐21
Power failure ..............................................................30‐3, 30‐4 Write Command .........................................................11‐12
Preference ............................................................................2‐35 Protect .................................................................................2‐45
Preventive Maintenance Function .......................................17‐1 Protecting Data ....................................................................21‐2
Preventive Maintenance Settings dialog box .....................17‐6 Protecting Displays and Operations ...................................21‐5
Preview ................................................................................2‐55 Protecting the Display of Parts .........................................21‐22
Preview button ....................................................................2‐58 Protecting the Display of Screens ....................................21‐18
Print Tab ................................................................................3‐8 Protecting the Operation of Parts .....................................21‐26
Print dialog box ..............................................................3‐8 Protocol Manager ..............................................................22‐21
Printing Project Data .............................................................3‐7 Protocol Tab ........................................................................3‐11
Priority of the Operator .....................................................20‐52
Processing in One Scan ........................................................ A‐7
Index-6 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Index
Q Save .......................................................................................3‐5
Save As ..................................................................................3‐6
Quick Access Toolbar ..........................................................2‐39
Save option ..........................................................................2‐59
Save Screen As ......................................................................4‐5
R
Save Screens .........................................................................4‐4
Range Tab .........................................................................10‐54 Saving a screen .....................................................................4‐4
Reader ..................................................................................21‐4 Saving Control Function ....................................................12‐12
Real Time Saving Data
Alarm Log Function ..........................................13‐6, 13‐33 Alarm Log Function ......................................................13‐7
Alarm Log Settings .....................................................13‐22 Data Log Function .......................................................14‐6
Data Log Settings ......................................................14‐18 Operation Log Function ...............................................15‐6
Operation Log Settings ..............................................15‐16 Saving Data as a CSV File
Receive (RXD) Command Alarm Log Function ....................................................13‐32
BCC (Block Check Code) ............................................22‐62 Data Log Function .....................................................14‐36
Constant (Character) .................................................22‐50 Operation Log Function .............................................15‐17
Constant (Hexadecimal) ............................................22‐51 Saving drawing objects drawn on the editing screen .......2‐24
Device .........................................................................22‐52
Registering Constant (Character) .............................22‐57 Saving graphic elements in Picture Manager .....................2‐20
Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) ........................22‐59 Saving image files ...............................................................2‐20
Skip .............................................................................22‐65
Saving pictures as image files ............................................2‐26
Receiving Character Time Out ..........................................22‐23
Saving Project Data ...............................................................3‐5
Receiving Time Out ...........................................................22‐31
Saving Registered Text as a CSV File ................................19‐7
Recipe Function ...................................................................18‐1
Saving registered user communication protocol as a file ....22‐19
Recipe Settings dialog box ..................................................18‐8 Scale Tab
Recorded Events ..................................................................15‐3 Bar Chart ....................................................................10‐11
Recovered ............................................................................13‐3 Line Chart ...................................................................10‐32
Meter ..........................................................................10‐55
Rectangle ...............................................................................6‐7
Screen ....................................................................................4‐1
Reference Screen ....................................................9‐94, 9‐109
Screen List ...........................................................................2‐60
Registering Text ..................................................................19‐5
Screen Monitor ....................................................................24‐6
Registration Text Tab
Bit Button .....................................................................7‐10 Screen No. Format ..............................................................3‐18
Goto Screen Button .....................................................7‐42 Screen Number Restrictions ...............................................4‐27
Key Button ....................................................................7‐56
Screen Size ............................................................................4‐1
Multi-Button .................................................................7‐75
Multi-State Lamp ..........................................................8‐20 Screen Tab .............................................................................3‐9
Pilot Lamp ......................................................................8‐7 Screen Type ............................................................... 4‐14, 4‐22
Word Button .................................................................7‐28
Screens .............................................................. 2‐42, 2‐48, 4‐2
Relational Operator ...........................................................20‐15
Script ....................................................................................20‐1
Relational Operators ..........................................................20‐28
Script Coding Examples ....................................................20‐22
Repeat ................................................................................20‐14
Script Command ................................................................11‐25
Reset .......................................................... 7‐1, 7‐4, 11‐1, 11‐4
Script Definition Method ...................................................20‐14
Reset Input ..........................................................................3‐46
Index
Script Editor .........................................................................20‐8
Reusing Screens ..................................................................4‐12
Script Error ..........................................................................20‐4
Ribbon ..................................................................................2‐42
Script Function ....................................................................20‐1
Run Mode ...............................................................................1‐6
Script Manager ....................................................................20‐7
Run/Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error ....................3‐48
Security Function .................................................................21‐1
Run/Stop Selection at Power Up ........................................3‐49
Security Group ............................4‐17, 4‐24, 21‐4, 21‐6, 26‐26
Runtime system .................................................................23‐15
Selecting graphic elements from Symbol Factory .............2‐22
RXD ....................................................................................22‐27
Selector Switch ....................................................................7‐86
S Set ................... 7‐1, 7‐4, 7‐18, 7‐21, 11‐1, 11‐4, 11‐10, 11‐12
Set Slave No. .......................................................................23‐9
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .........................................................1‐1 Setting Conditional Expressions .........................................2‐64
Sampling Method ...............................................................14‐14 Setting the External Memory Folder .................................26‐12
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual Index-7
Index
Setting user communication for a communication interface ...22‐8 Text Alignment ......................................................................A‐4
Settings ................................................................................2‐64 Text Color ............................................................................9‐66
Shape Style ..........................................................................2‐48 Text Group ................................................................. 2‐54, 19‐1
Shapes ...........................................................................5‐2, 6‐1 Text Group Settings Dialog Box .......................................19‐15
Show Below the Ribbon ......................................................2‐40 Text Manager ....................................................................19‐12
Show/Hide ...........................................................................2‐47 Text Style .............................................................................2‐49
Size .......................................................................................2‐49 Threshold .............................................................................17‐3
Special Functions .................................................................3‐42 TIM/CNT preset value sum check error .............................30‐4
Specifications ............................................................... 2‐1, 29‐1 Time Out (min) ....................................................................23‐6
Stacked Bar Chart ..............................................................10‐41 Timer ..................................................................................11‐38
Standard Keypad Popup Screen .........................................4‐26 Timer Interrupt ....................................................................3‐80
Start Code ..........................................................................22‐66 Timer/Counter Preset Value Sum Check Error ..................30‐3
Start Part with synchronous ...............................................3‐21 TMC button ............................................................................A‐2
Start Time ............................................................................3‐18 Toggle .........................................................7‐2, 7‐5, 11‐2, 11‐5
Start WindLDR .....................................................................12‐4 Top page ..............................................................................28‐3
State Settings dialog box ....................................................8‐22 Touch ............................................................... 2‐45, 23‐5, 29‐1
State Tab .............................................................................8‐21 Touch Panel Adjust .............................................................28‐7
Status Bar ..................................................................2‐54, 2‐56 Touch Setup ........................................................................28‐1
Status Device .....................................................................22‐29 Touch Sound .......................................................................3‐19
Stop Input ............................................................................3‐45 Touch switch .......................................................................4‐21
Storage Method of 32-bit Numerical Data .........................3‐20 Transfer ...............................................................................2‐45
Storage Method of String Data ...........................................3‐20 Transmission (TXD) Command
BCC (Block Check Code) ............................................22‐47
String Data Storage Method .....................................9‐38, 9‐69
Constant (Character) .................................................22‐37
Sub ..................................................... 7‐19, 7‐22, 11‐10, 11‐13 Constant (Hexadecimal) ............................................22‐38
Subnet Mask ........................................................................3‐28 Device .........................................................................22‐39
Registering Constant (Character) .............................22‐43
Superimpose ........................................................................4‐23 Registering Constant (Hexadecimal) ........................22‐45
Supported Languages ...........................................................2‐6 Transmission Wait .............................................................22‐31
Switching the Displayed Language by Value of Device ...19‐10 Trigger Condition .................................................................2‐64
Switching the Screen of the Touch ..................................24‐17 Trigger Condition Settings ..................................................2‐64
Symbol Factory ....................................................................2‐30 Trigger Condition Tab
Symbol Options Dialog Box .................................................2‐31 Bar Chart ....................................................................10‐13
Bit Button .....................................................................7‐12
System Area .........................................................................3‐22 Bit Write .......................................................................11‐6
System Information ...........................................................23‐27 Calendar .....................................................................9‐137
Character Input ............................................................9‐32
System Language ................................................................3‐19
Global Script ...............................................................20‐13
System Mode ............................................................... 1‐6, 28‐3 Goto Screen Button .....................................................7‐44
System Setup .......................................................................2‐45 Goto Screen Command .............................................11‐22
Key Button ...................................................................7‐58
System Tab ..........................................................................3‐18
Line Chart ...................................................................10‐34
Message Display ..........................................................9‐63
T Multi-Button .................................................................7‐77
Multi-Command ..........................................................11‐35
Tag Editor ............................................................................2‐63 Numerical Display ......................................................9‐123
Target ..................................................................................23‐8 Numerical Input ...........................................................9‐14
Picture Display .............................................................9‐48
Target Information Dialog Box .........................................23‐29 Pilot Lamp ......................................................................8‐9
Target IP Address ................................................................23‐8 Potentiometer ............................................................7‐106
Script Command ........................................................11‐28
Target List ............................................................................23‐7
Selector Switch ............................................................7‐96
Target Slave .........................................................................23‐9 Timer ..........................................................................11‐41
Temporary Device .............................................................20‐21 Word Button .................................................................7‐30
Write Command .........................................................11‐15
Terminal Code ...................................................................22‐66
Troubleshooting ..................................................................30‐1
Text ..............................................................................5‐2, 6‐25
Index-8 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
Index
TXD ....................................................................................22‐26 Message Display ..........................................................9‐58
Message Switching Display .........................................9‐76
Type Number .......................................................................2‐54
Meter ..........................................................................10‐52
Multi-Button .................................................................7‐73
U Multi-State Lamp ..........................................................8‐18
Numerical Display ......................................................9‐118
Upload Dialog Box .............................................................23‐21 Numerical Input .............................................................9‐8
Picture Display .............................................................9‐46
Upload Project Data from the Touch ................................23‐18
Pie Chart .....................................................................10‐44
Uploading ...........................................................................23‐18 Pilot Lamp ......................................................................8‐5
Uploading data Potentiometer ............................................................7‐104
Downloader ..................................................................26‐6 Selector Switch ............................................................7‐93
USB flash drive .............................................................26‐5 Word Button .................................................................7‐26
Uploading Project Data
USB flash drive .............................................................26‐9 W
Uploading Project Files ........................................................25‐5
USB .......................................................................................23‐6 Watch Dog ...........................................................................3‐21
USB autorun definition file ................................................26‐22 Watchdog timer error ................................................ 30‐3, 30‐4
USB AutoRun Function ............................................3‐39, 26‐18 Watchdog Timer Setting .....................................................3‐82
When a USB flash drive is inserted a popup window is
USB AutoRun Function Security .......................................26‐26
automatically displayed. ............................................26‐15
USB Flash Drive ...................................................................26‐1
WindO/I-NV3 .........................................................................2‐1
USB Interface ......................................................................3‐27
WindO/I-NV3 Options dialog box .......................................2‐57
USB Popup Screen Function .............................................26‐15
Window ...................................................................... 2‐48, 2‐50
USB1(USB-B) .......................................................................3‐30
Windows Font .............................................................. 2‐6, 2‐13
USB2(USB-A) .......................................................................3‐30
Word Button ........................................................................7‐17
Use Device Cache ................................................................3‐21
Word Devices ......................................................................27‐8
Use Large Font ....................................................................3‐19
Word Functions ..................................................... 20‐16, 20‐35
Use System Area .................................................................3‐21
Word Write Command ........................................................11‐9
User Accounts ......................................................................21‐1
Work Environment ..............................................................2‐57
User Accounts Dialog Box .................................................21‐30
Workspace ............................................. 2‐47, 2‐50, 2‐58, 2‐60
User Communication ...........................................................22‐7
Write delay ........................................................................20‐51
User Communication Protocol Settings Dialog Box .........22‐23
User Communication Tab ....................................................3‐36 X
Using the online function for Ethernet communication .....23‐7
Using the online function with an O/I Link Slave via XOR .................................................... 7‐19, 7‐22, 11‐10, 11‐13
an O/I Link Master .......................................................23‐8
Z
V
Zoom ................................................................ 2‐48, 2‐56, 2‐60
Vertical Installation Restrictions .........................................4‐28
Vertical Writing ..................................................................... A‐5
Index
View .....................................................................................2‐47
Screens .........................................................................2‐48
Show/Hide ....................................................................2‐47
Window .........................................................................2‐48
Workspace ....................................................................2‐47
Zoom ............................................................................2‐48
View Tab
Alarm List Display ........................................................9‐89
Alarm Log Display ......................................................9‐105
Bar Chart ......................................................................10‐7
Bit Button .......................................................................7‐8
Calendar .....................................................................9‐134
Character Input ............................................................9‐28
Goto Screen Button .....................................................7‐40
Key Button ....................................................................7‐54
Line Chart ...................................................................10‐25
SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual Index-9
Index
Index-10 SmartAXIS Touch User’s Manual
You might also like
- Activity-2-S4HANA Using Global Bike Case Study SDNo ratings yetActivity-2-S4HANA Using Global Bike Case Study SD53 pages
- IDEC Programming Manual Ladder FT1A.pdfNo ratings yetIDEC Programming Manual Ladder FT1A.pdf422 pages
- RAC18-IP Installation Instruction DIM433en v1.0No ratings yetRAC18-IP Installation Instruction DIM433en v1.03 pages
- Failing Function Codes, Failing Items, and Symbolic FRUsNo ratings yetFailing Function Codes, Failing Items, and Symbolic FRUs420 pages
- Marconi 2023A 2024A 2025 Service ManualNo ratings yetMarconi 2023A 2024A 2025 Service Manual315 pages
- Manual SIRIUS Overload Relay 3RU 3RB en-USNo ratings yetManual SIRIUS Overload Relay 3RU 3RB en-US248 pages
- Powerflex 750-Series Products With Totalforce Control: Catalog Numbers 20G1, 20ge, 20J1, 20jeNo ratings yetPowerflex 750-Series Products With Totalforce Control: Catalog Numbers 20G1, 20ge, 20J1, 20je442 pages
- SMART-1 405/410 Appliances: Getting Started GuideNo ratings yetSMART-1 405/410 Appliances: Getting Started Guide20 pages
- emerson-fb1100-flow-computer-instruction-manual-en-586730No ratings yetemerson-fb1100-flow-computer-instruction-manual-en-58673088 pages
- manual_standstill_monitor_3TK2810-0_en-USNo ratings yetmanual_standstill_monitor_3TK2810-0_en-US70 pages
- Guardshield Safety Light Curtain: User ManualNo ratings yetGuardshield Safety Light Curtain: User Manual192 pages
- ATV32 Safety Functions Manual EN S1A45606 02No ratings yetATV32 Safety Functions Manual EN S1A45606 0283 pages
- Powerflex 755Ts Products With Totalforce Control: Hardware ServiceNo ratings yetPowerflex 755Ts Products With Totalforce Control: Hardware Service198 pages
- Hindle Group I Operating Manual (6 25 Adc)No ratings yetHindle Group I Operating Manual (6 25 Adc)100 pages
- Kinetix 5700 Safe Monitor Functions: Safety ReferenceNo ratings yetKinetix 5700 Safe Monitor Functions: Safety Reference108 pages
- Liebert SmartAisle2 User Manual V1.3-20200323No ratings yetLiebert SmartAisle2 User Manual V1.3-20200323104 pages
- 2VAA001695 en S Control NTCS04 Controller Station Termination UnitNo ratings yet2VAA001695 en S Control NTCS04 Controller Station Termination Unit43 pages
- X1 Titanium Gen 1 Hardware Maintenance ManualNo ratings yetX1 Titanium Gen 1 Hardware Maintenance Manual89 pages
- Chainsaw Operator's Manual: Chainsaw Safety, Maintenance and Cross-cutting TechniquesFrom EverandChainsaw Operator's Manual: Chainsaw Safety, Maintenance and Cross-cutting Techniques5/5 (1)
- Safe Use of Smart Devices in Systems Important to Safety in Nuclear Power PlantsFrom EverandSafe Use of Smart Devices in Systems Important to Safety in Nuclear Power PlantsNo ratings yet
- Equal Employment Opportunity in Bangladesh100% (1)Equal Employment Opportunity in Bangladesh35 pages
- Hook (Gemini Norawit) - My School President OST Sheet Music For Piano (Solo)No ratings yetHook (Gemini Norawit) - My School President OST Sheet Music For Piano (Solo)1 page
- Bachelor of Technology and Livelihood Education: Executive SummaryNo ratings yetBachelor of Technology and Livelihood Education: Executive Summary15 pages
- A Review: Prediction For Cube in OLAP - Based Data Mining TechniquesNo ratings yetA Review: Prediction For Cube in OLAP - Based Data Mining Techniques4 pages
- 1st Merit List BS Information Cyber Security M Department of Information Security Bahawalnagar Campus BWP Merit Fall 2020 PDFNo ratings yet1st Merit List BS Information Cyber Security M Department of Information Security Bahawalnagar Campus BWP Merit Fall 2020 PDF2 pages
- Gujarat Technological Unversity AhmedabadNo ratings yetGujarat Technological Unversity Ahmedabad39 pages
- MCQs On Employees Provident Fund & Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952-1 PDF100% (1)MCQs On Employees Provident Fund & Miscellaneous Provisions Act 1952-1 PDF5 pages
- User Manual of High-End RDS/EON Car Radio System CCR612 (V0.3)No ratings yetUser Manual of High-End RDS/EON Car Radio System CCR612 (V0.3)94 pages
- FT Exercise 1 - Completion of Worksheet - NERO CompanyNo ratings yetFT Exercise 1 - Completion of Worksheet - NERO Company1 page
